1981_Systems_Data_Catalog 1981 Systems Data Catalog

User Manual: 1981_Systems_Data_Catalog

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 578

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

inter

SYSTEMS DATA CATALOG

JANUARY 1981

Intel Corporation makes no warranty for the use of its products and assumes no responsibility for any errors which
may appear in this document nor does it make a commitment to update the information contained herein.
Intel software products are copyrighted by and shall remain the property of Intel Corporation. Use, duplication or
disclosure is subject to restrictions stated in Intel's software license, or as defined in ASPR 7·104.9 (a) (9). Intel Corporation assumes no responsibility for the use of any circuitry other than circuitry embodied In an Intel product. No
other circuit patent licenses are implied.
No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means without the prior written consent
of Intel Corporation.
The following are trademarks of Intel Corporation and may only be used to identify Intel products:
BXP
CREDIT
i
ICE
ICS
im
Insite
Intel

Intelevision
Intellec
iSBC
iSBX
Library Manager
MCS
Megachassis
Micromap

MULTIBUS'
MULTI MODULE
PROMPT
Promware
RMX
UPI
I'Scope

and the combinations of ICE, iCS, iSBC, MCS or RMX and a numerical suffix.
MDS is an ordering code only and is not used as a product name or trademark. MDS@ is a registered trademark of
Mohawk Data Sciences Corporation.
~MULTIBUS

is a patented Intel bus.

Additional copies of this manual or other Intel literature may be obtained from:
Literature Department
Intel Corporation
3065 Bowers Avenue
Santa Clara, CA 95051

AFN·01300A·l

Table of Contents
Quality Assurance Flow Chart

CHAPTER 1
Single Board Computers
iSBC 80104 Single Board Computer .......... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iSBC 80105 or (pSBC 80105*) Single Board Computer. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iSBC 80/10B or(pSBC 80/10B*) Single Board Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iSBC 80/20-4 or(pSBC 80/20-4*) Single Board Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . .. . . . . . .
iSBC 80/24 or(pSBC 80/24*) Single Board Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iSBC 80/30 or (pSBC 80/30*) Single Board Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iSBC 86/12A or(pSBC 86/12A *) Single Board Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iSBC 88/40 Measurement and Control Computer ...................................... ,
iSBC 310 High Speed Mathematics Unit ...................... , . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1
1-7
1-12
1-19
1-26
1-35
1-43
1-51
1-59

CHAPTER 2
iSBXTM MULTIMODULETM Boards
iSBX331 Fixed Floating Point Math MULTIMODULE Board..............................
iSBX 332 Floating Point Math MULTIMODULE Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iSBX 350 Parallel 110 MULTIMODULE Board. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .
iSBX 351 Serial 110 MULTIMODULE Board. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .

2-1
2-7
2-12
2-16

CHAPTER 3
iCSTM Industrial Control Series
"
iCS 80 Industrial Chassis ............................................... " ... ~. . . . . .
iCS 910/920/930 Signal ConditioninglTermination Panels. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .
iSBC941 Industrial Digital Processor _..................................... '" . . . . . . . . .

3-1
3-6
3-14

CHAPTER 4
Run-Times Systems Software
iRMX/80 Real-Time Multi-Tasking Executive......................... ..................
iSBC801 FORTRAN Run-Time Package............................. ..................
iSBC 802 BASIC-80 Configurable RMX/80 Disk-Based Interpreter. . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .
iRMX860peratingSystem ...................,... , ................. , .. ,.............
iRMX88 Real-Time Multi-Tasking Executive......................... ..................
iSBC 957 A Intellec-iSBC 86/12A Interface and Execution Package. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-1
4.6
4~9

4-13
4-25
4-31

CHAPTER 5
Peripheral Controllers
iSBC 202 Double Density Diskette Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
iSBC 204 Single Density Flexible Diskette Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4
iSBC 208 Flexible Disk Controller ................................. ,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8
iSBC 215A/iSBC 21,5B Winchester Disk Controller. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-12
iSBC 218 Flexible Disk Controller ....................................... ~ ............ ' 5-17
iSBC 220 SMD Disk Controller .............. , . , . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21

CHAPTER 6
Memory Expansion Boards
iSBC 01616K-Byte RAM Memory Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iSBC 032/048/064 RAM Memory Boards .............................................. '"
iSBC 090 Memory System ..........................................................
iSBC 094 4K-Byte CMOS RAM Memory Battery Backup Board ............................
iSBC 2501 Megabit Bubble Memory Board ............................................
, iSBC 254 Bubble Memory Board .......................' ............... :. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iSeC 41616K EPROM Expansion Board .................................... : .. . . . . . . . .
iSBC 464 or(pSBC 464*) 64K-Byte EPROM Expansion Board .............................
iSBC 108A/116A Combination Memory and 1/0 Expansion Boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iSBC 300 or (pSBC 300*) 32K-Byte RAM Expansion Module iSBC 340 or (pSBC 340*)
16K-Byte EPROM Expanison Module .............. :. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iSBC 301 4K-Byte RAM MULTIMODULE Board ....... ~. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . .

6-1
6-3
6-5
,6-9
6-12
6-15
6-16
6-18
6-21
6-29
6-30

CHAPTER 7
Digital 1/0 Expansion and Signal Conditioning Boards
iSBC 337 MULTIMODULE Numeric Data Processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iSBC 501 Direct Memory Access Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
iSBC 508 I/O Expansion Board ..................................................... , .
iSBC 517 Combination I/O Expansion Board .................................... ; . . . . . .
iSBC 519 or (pSBC 519*) Programmable I/O Expansion Board. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .
iSBC 530 Teletypewriter Adapter ........... ; ................................. ; . . . . . . .
iSBC 556 Optically Isolated I/O Board ..................... '... . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iSBC 569 Intelligent Digital Controller ..................... " . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .

7·1
7·9
7·13
7·15
7·19
7·23
7·25
7·27

CHAPTER 8
Communication Controllers
iSBC 534 or(pSBC 534*) FourChannel Communications Expansion Board..... ............
ISBC 544 Intelligent Communications Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8·1
8·5

CHAPTER 9
Analog I/O Expansion & Signal Conditioning Boards
iSBX 311 Analog Input MULTIMODULE Board ... ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iSBX 328 Analog Output MULTI MODULE Expansion Board.......... ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .
iSBX 711 Analog Input Board. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iSBX 724 Analog Output Board ................................. ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iSBX 732 Analog Combination I/O Board ..............................................

9·1
9·5
9·9
9·13
9·16

CHAPTER 10
System Packaging & Power Supplies
ISBC 604/614 or (pSBC 604/614 *) Modular Cardcage/Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . .
iSBC 655 System Chassis ...................................... ;...................
iSBC 660 System Chassis ..........................................................
ISBC635 PowerSupply .. '..........................................................
iSBC640 PowerSupply ............................................................

10·1
10·3
10·5
10·8
10·11

CHAPTER 11
Microcomputer Development Systems
Introduction' New Dimensions in Development Solutions ........ , ............ ,............
Model 120 Intellec Series II Microcomputer Development System .................. '" : . . .
Model 225 Intellec Series 11/85 Microcomputer Development System ......................
Model2861ntellec Series III Microcomputer Development System .................... ,...
Model 290 Network Manager Intellec Network Development System·1 (NDS·1) . . . . . . . . .. . . . .

11·1
11·3
11·7
11-12
11·18

CHAPTER 12
Microcomputer Development Systems Options
Expansion Chassis Intellec Series II Microcomputer Development System. . . . . . • . . .. . .. . . .
Model 503 Double Density Upgrade Kit for Intellec Microcomputer Development System. . . . .
Model 505 Intergrated Processor Card .....................................'.' .... : . . . . .
Model 556 iAPX 86 Resident Processor Board Package. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model 590 Network Manager Upgrade Package Intellec Network Development System·1
(NDS·1) .... ·................................................................. : ..
Model810 Software Development Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Mainframe Link for Distributed Development ............. , ... , .. , .......... ; .......... ,...
Credit CRT·Based Text Editor Microcomputer Development Systems ................ , ..... ,

12·1
12·3
12·5
12·8
12·11
12·14
12·18
12·21

CHAPTER 13
Flexible and Hard Disk Systems
Intellec Single/Double Density Flexible Disk System ........•....... , . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . • .
Model 740 Intellec Hard Disk Subsystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13·1
13·5

CHAPTER 14
MCS 80185™ Development Systems and Options
FORTRAN 808080/8085 ANS FORTRAN 77lntellec Resident Compiler ....................
Basic·80 Extended ANS 1978 Basic Intellec Resident Interpreter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14·1
14·5

8080/8085 Fundamental Support Package (FSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iCIS COBOL Software Package. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
PUM 80 High Level Programming Language Intellec Resident Compiler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..•
PASCAL 80 Software Package. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP80 Support Package. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
SP85 Support Package. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
ICE-80, 8080 In-Circuit Emulator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
ICE-85B, MCS·85 In-Circuit Emulator with Multi-ICE Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

14-8
14-12
14-16
14-19
14-24
14-26
14-28
14-34

CHAPTER 15
iAPX 86/88 Support Options
Series 118086/8088 Software Development Packages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PUM 86/88 Software Package. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
PASCAL 86/88 Software Package. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
8087Software Support Package. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
8089 lOP Software Support Package. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP86A/SP86B Support Package................................ .... ... ..... ..........
SP88 Support Package. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
ICE-86, 8086 In-Circuit Emulator ................................. ,....................
ICE-88, 8088 In-Circuit Emulator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15-1
15-11
15-16
15-19
15-22
15-25
15-27
15-30
15-36

CHAPTER 16
Prototype Microcomputer Kits
SDK-85, MCS-85 System Design Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SDK-86, MCS-86 System Design Kit .... , . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SDK-C86, MCS-86 System Design Kit
Software and Cable Interface to Intellec Development System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16-1
16-7
16-13

CHAPTER 17
MCS-48™ Development Systems
MCS-48 Diskette-Based Software Support Package. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ICE-49, MCS·48 In-Circuit Emulator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HSE-49 High Speed Emulator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EM1 8021 Emulation Board .........................................................
EM2 8022 Emulation Board ............ , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
ICE-22, 8022 In-Circuit Emulator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

17-1
17-3
17-7
17-13
17-16
17-19

CHAPTER 18
MCS-SPM Development Systems
8051 Software. Development Package. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18-1

CHAPTER 19
UPI·41ATM Development Systems
ICE-41A, UPI-41A In-Circuit Emulator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19-1

CHAPTER 20
2920 Signal Processor Development Systems
2920 Software Support Package. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20-1

CHAPTER 21
Memory Systems
Introduction .................... , ................... ;; .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Series 90 General Purpose Memory System ...........................................
in-5770 Video Refresh Memory System ...............................................
in-1670, PDP*-11/70Add-On Memory System ..........................................
in-5150 Eclipse Add-In Memory ... , .... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
in-5160 Nova3 Add-In Memory ....... ,.. . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . ....
MU-5780 VAX·11/780 Add-In Memory Card; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

21-1
21-2
21-5
21-11
21-15
21-19
21-24

CHAPTER 22
Insite T " User's Program Library .... ; ........., ..........• ' . .. . . .. .. . . .. . . .... ... . . . ... . .. . . .

22-1

CHAPTER 23
Intel Microcomputer Workshops ...........................................................

23-1

CHAPTER 24
Product Service

24-1
iii

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A typical product flow

Automatic Test
Systems Utilized in
. Board Testing

Visual Inspection of
Printed Wire Assemblies

Ovens Utilized for
Board Pffj"Bake

Cable Testing Using an
Automatic Test System

Checking Alignment of
Floppy Disk Drives

XYZ Measurement of
Sheet Metal

ASSEMBLY

In·Process QC of System
in Assembly

SYSTEM TEST

Aging in System Test

Boot·Up Test in
System Test

Shipping Inspection

Single Board
Computers

inter
iSBC 80/04
SINGLE BOARD COMPUTER
• Programmable 14-bit binary timer

• 8085A CPU used as central processor
• 256 bytes of static readlwrite memory

• TTL serial 110 interface with hole
patterns for RS232C line drivers and
receivers

• Sockets for 4K bytes of erasable
reprogrammable read only memory
• 22 programmable parallel 1/0 lines with
sockets for interchangeable line drivers
and terminators

• Four-level vectored interrupt

• Optimized for stand-alone applications
with provisions for on-board + 5V
regulator, heat sink, and mounting
holes for attachment to user's
equipment

• Upward compatibility with iSBC 80/05
• Single + 5V power supply

The iSBC 80/04 Single Board Computer is a member of Intel's complete line of OEM computer systems which take full
advantage of Intel's LSI technology to provide economical, self·contained computer·based solutions for OEM applica·
tions. The iSBC 80/04 is a complete computer system on a single 6.75 x 7.85·inch printed circuit card. The CPU, system
clock, readlwrite memory, nonvolatile read only memory, 1/0 ports and drivers, serial interface, priority interrupt logic,
and programmable timer all reside on the board.

1·1

iSBC 80/04
RAMIIOITimer. The system software is used to configure the 110 lines in any combination of unidirectional
input or output ports as indicated in Table 1. The 110 interface may, therefore, be customized to meet specific
peripheral requirements. In order to take full advantage
of the large number of possible 110 configurations,
sockets are provided for interchangeable 110 line drivers
and terminators. Hence, the flexibility of thelIa interface is further enhanced by the capability of selecting
the appropriate combination of optional line drivers and
terminators to provide the required sink current, polarity, and driveltermination characteristics for each application. The 22 programmable 110 lines and signal ground
lines are brought out to a 50-pin edge connector that
mates with flat, woven, or round cable.

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Intel's powerful8-bit n-channel8085A CPU, fabricated on
a single LSI chip, is the central processor for the iSBC
80104. The 8085A CPU is directly software compatible
with the popular intel8080A CPU. The 8085A contains six
8-bit general purpose registers and an accumulator. The
six general pwpose registers may be addressed individually or in pairs, providing both single and double precision operators. Minimum on-board instruction execution time is 2.03 microseconds. A block diagram of iSBC
80104 functionalcomponents is shown in Figure 1.

Memory Addressing
The 8085A CPU has a 16-bit program counter which
allows addressing of up to 65,536 bytes of memory. An
external stack, located within any portion of iSBC 80104
readlwrite memory, may be used as a last-inlfirst-out
storage area for the contents of the program counter,
flags, accumulator, and all of the six general purpose
registers. A 16-bit stack pointer controls the addressing
of this external stack. This stack provides subroutine
nesting bounded only by memory size.

Stand·Alone Applications
The iSBC 80104 is designed to be a cost-effective solution for applications requiring a self-contained computer on a single board without the need for external
memory or 110 options. In order to help minimize power
supply cost in small systems, the iSBC 80104 includes
provision for an on-board + 5V regulator allowing unregulated voltage to be connected directly on the board.
Regulated DC voltages are applied to the board through
two 12-pin edge connectors which mate with flat,
woven, or round cables. The iSBC 80104 also includes
pins that will accept MOLEX-type connectors for connection of regulated DC voltages. Mounting holes are
provided in the corners of the iSBC 80104 board which
permit direct attachment to the user's equipment,
thereby eliminating the need for cardcage and backplane.

Memory Capacity
The iSBC 80104 contains 256 bytes of readlwrite memory
using the Intel 8155 RAMIIOITimer. Two sockets for up
to 4'K bytes of nonvolatile read only memory are provided on the board. Read only memory may be added in
2K-byte increments using Intel 2716 erasable and electrically reprogrammable ROMs (EPROMs) or Intel 2316E
masked ROMs. Optionally, if only 2K bytes are required,
read only memory may be added in 1K-byte increments
using Iniel 2708 EPROMs or Intel 2608 masked ROMs.

Compatibility with iSBC 80105

Parallel 1/0 Interface

TheiSBC 80104 is fully upward compatible with the iSBC
80105 Single Board Computer. Pin assignments for
parallel 110, serial 110, and regulated DC voltages are

The iSBC 80104 contains 22 programmable parallel ,1/0
lines implemented using the 110 ports of the Intel 8155

EXTERNAL

22 PROGRAMMABLE
I/O LINES

INTERRUPT

SERIAL

REQUEST

I/O INTERFACE

SERIAL
I/O INTERFACE

LINE

ITTLlEVELS)

IRS2J2C LEVELSI

Figure 1. ISBC Block Diagram Showing Functional Components

1·2

iSBC 80/04
Table 1. Input/Output Port Modes of Operation
Mode of Operation
Unidirectional
Port

Lines
(qty)
Unlatched

Output

Input
Latched &
Strobed

X
X
X
X

X
X

Latched

X
X
X
X

Control

Latched &
Strobed

X
X
X1
X2

Noles
1. Port 3 must be used as a control port when port 1 is used as a latched and strobed input or a latched and strobed output port.
2. Port 4 must be used as a control port when port 2 is used as a latched and strobed input or a latched and strobed output port.

indentical to those of the iSBC 80/05. Additionally, soft·
ware developed for the iSBC 80/04 will execute directly
in the iSBC 80/05. In addition to the iSBC 80/04 features,
the iSBC 80/05 contains a total of 512 bytes of read/write
memory, allows for expansion of memory and I/O
capacity, and provides full MULTI BUS arbitration con·
trol for multimaster applications.

Serial I/O Interface
The iSBC 80/04 prvides serial I/O capability through the
serial input data (SID) and serial output data (SOD) func·
tions of the Intel 8085A CPU. These functions are con·
trolled exclusively by software through execution of the
8085A RIM and SIM instructions. The baud rate for the
serial I/O interface is determined by the system time
available for execution of serial I/O support software.
Hence, the maximum baud rate supported by the iSBC
80/04 is solely dependent on the overall system real·
time software requirements. Serial I/O signals are TTL
compatible, and hole patterns are provided on the board
for optional installation of RS232C line drivers and
receivers.

Programmable Timer
The iSBC 80/04 provides a fully programmable binary
14·bit interval timer utilizing the Intel 8155
RAM/la/Timer. The systems deSigner simply configures
the time via software to meet system requirements.
Whenever a given timer delay is needed, software com·
mands to the programmable timer select the desired
functions. Four functions are available as shown in
Table 2. The contents of the timer counter may be read
at any time during system operation.

Interrupt Capability
The iSBC 80/04 takes advantage of the powerful interrupt processing capability of the 8085A CPU. Interrupt
requests are routed to four interrupt inputs of the 8085A
CPU (i.e., TRAP, RST 7.5, RST 6.5, and RST 5.5 in order of
priority, TRAP highest), and each input generates a
unique memory address (i.e., TRAP: 26 16 , RST 7.5: 3C 16,
RST 6.5: 34 16 , RST 5.5: 2C 16 ). A single 8085A jump instruction at each of these addresses then provides
linkage to locate each interrupt service routine independently anywhere in memory. All interrupt inputs
with the exception of one (TRAP) may be masked via
software. The trap interrupt should be used for conditions such as power-down sequences which require attention by the 8085A CPU.

Table 2. Programmable Timer Functions
Function

Operation

Programmable
pulse

Timer out goes low during the sec·
ond half of count. Therefore, the
count loaded in the count length
register should be twice the pulse
width desired.

Square wave
rate generator

Timer out remains high until one·
half the count has been completed,
and goes low for the other half of the
count. The count length is auto·
matically reloaded when terminal
count is reached.

Rate generator

Divide by N counter. A repetitive
timer out low pulse is generated and
new timeout initiated every time ter·
minal count is reached.

Programmable
strobe

A single low pulse is generated upon
reaching terminal count. This func·
tion is extremely useful for genera·
tion of real·time clocks.

Interrupt Generation - The iSBC 80/04 accepts inter·
rupts from four sources. An interrupt is automatically
generated by the programmable interval timer/event
counter upon completion of the selected function. Two
interrupts are automatically generated by the I/O ports
section of the 8155 when ports 1 or 2 of the 8155 are programmed to operate in the "latched and strobed" mode
(see Table 1). The fourth interrupt source is available to
the user and should be used to inform the 8085A CPU of
catastrophic errors such as power failure. This userdefined source is connected to the trap input of the
8085A CPU.

1·3

iSBC 80/04
capability to program in a natural, algorithmic language
and eliminates the need to manage register usage or
allocate memory. PUM programs can be written in a
much shorter time than assembly language programs
for a given application.

Systems Development Capability
The development cycle of the iSBC SOl04-based products may be significantly reduced using an Intellec
microcomputer development system. The resideni
macroassembler, text editor, and system monitor
greatly simplify the design, development, and debug of
iSBC SOlO4 system software: An optional diskette operatingsystem provides a relocating macroassembler, a
relocating loader and linkage editor, and a library manager. A unique in-circuit emulator (ICE-S5) option provides the capability of developing and debugging software directly on the iSBC S0104.

PL/M-80 - Intel's high level programming language,
PUM, is also available as a resident Intellec microcomputer development system option. PUM provides the

FORTRAN-BO - For applications requiring computational and formatted 1/0 capabilities, the high level
FORTRAN-SO programming language is also available
as a resident option of the Intellec system. The FORTRAN compiler produces relocatable object code that
may be easily linked with PUM or assembly language
program modules. This gives the user a wide flexibility
in developing software.

SPECI FICATIONS

Interrupts

Word Size

Four-level interrupt routed to SOS5 CPU interrupt inputs.
Each interrupt automatically vectors the processor to a
unique memory location

Programming Capability

Instruction - S, 16, or 24 bits
Data - S bits

Cycle Time
Basic Instruction Cycle -

2.03 I'S, ± 0.1 %

Note

Condition

Interrupt
Input

Memory
Address

User·defined
Timer
1/0 Port 2
1/0 Port 1

TRAP
RST 7.5
RST 6.5
RST 5.5

24 16
3C16
34 16
2C16

Basic instruction cycle is defined, as the fastest instruction (i.e., four
clock cycles).

Priority

Type

Highest

Non-rnaskable
Maskable
Maskable
Maskable

Lowest

Memory Addressing

Timer

ROMIEPROM - O-OFFFH
RAM - 3FOO H

Input Frequency Reference - 122.SS ·kHz ± 0.1 % (S.14
I's period nominal)
Output FrequencieslTimlng Intervals

Memory Capacity
ROMIEPROM - 4K bytes (sockets only)
RAM - 256 bytes

TlmerlCounter

Function

1/0 Addressing
On-Board Programming 1/0 -

see Table 1

Port
Control

8155
Port 1

8155
Port 2

8155
3&4

8155
.Ports

8155 Timer
Low·Order
Byte

8155 Timer
Hlgh·Order
Byte

Address

Programmable pulse
Square' wave rate generator
Rate generator
Programmable strobe

Min

Max

8.14 ~s
7,50 Hz
7.50 Hz
8.14 ~s

66.67ms
61.44 kHz
61.44 kHz
133.33 ms

Interfaces
1/0 .Capacity
Parallel -

Parallel 1/0 - All signals TTL compatible
Interrupt Request - All TTL compatible (active-low)
Serial 1/0 - TTL; hole patterns available for user installation of RS232C line drivers and receivers

22 programmable lines (see Table 1)

Serial Communications Characteristics
SID and SOD functions of the S085 CPU are used for
serial 1/0. Controlled by software through RIM and SIM
instructions of the SOS5A CPU. Baud rate determined by
system time available for serial 1/0 handling, On-board
timer may be used to greatly ease serial 1/0 timing requirements.

System Clock (8085 CPU)
1.966 MHz ±0.1%

1-4

iSBC 80/04
Connectors

Line Drivers and Terminators
The following line drivers are all compati·
ble with the I/O driver sockets on the iSBC 80/04:
110 Drivers -

Interface

Pins
(no.)

Center

(In.)

Mating Connectors 1

Molex 09·66·1071
Connector

Molex 09·50·7071
+ 5V, + 12V,
_ 5V 2

7
single·

Connector

0.156

sided

Driver

Characteristic

Sink Current (rnA)

7438

I,OC

7437

7432

7426

I,OC

7409

NI,OC

7408

7403

I,OC

16
16

7400

Note

AMP 87194·6

I;;; inverting; NI;;; non-inverting; OC;;;;: open collector.

Connector

AMP 3·87025·4

Connector

I/O Terminators - Intel provides 220Q/330Q divider and
1 kQ pull·up resistive terminator packs for termination
of 110 lines programmed as inputs. These options are as
follows:

Molex 09·66·1071
Connector

Molex 09·50·7071
Connector

7
Voltages

+ 5V, -12V 3

single-

0.156

sided

AMP 87194·6

220Q

+5V - - - - - ; : - - - - - - ,

Connector

AMP 3·87025·4

220QI330QL

Connector

Molex 09·66·1021

~-----+----~O isec 901

OPTION

1 kQ
1 kQ

Connector

+ 5V ----~'VV\_------__o isec 902 OPTION

Molex 09·50·7021
Unregulated

+5V

2
singlesided

Connector

RS232C Drivers and Receivers

0.156

The following RS232C drivers and receivers are compati·
ble with the RS232C socket on the iSBC 80/04:
RS232C Driver - National DS1488 or TI SN75188
RS232C Receiver - National DS1490 or TI SN75189

AMP 89194·1

Connect"or
AM P 2·87025·5
Connector

Parallel 1/0

50
double·
sided

0.1

3M 3415·000
(flat cable)

Sockets
Sockets may be installed in the hole patterns provided
ior the RS232C drivers and receivers. The following
sockets are compatible with the iSBC 80/04: TI
C93·14·02 and SCANBE US·2·14·160·N·B.

MOlex 09·66·1071

Connector
Molex 09·50·7071
Connector

7
Serial 1/0

single·
ended

0.156

Compatible Voltage Regulator
AMP 87194·6

National LM 323 - 3A, 5V Positive Regulator
Fairchild J.

S = sign bit
0= positive
1 = negative
E2 - Eo = biased exponent (8 bits) (bias = 7F H)
F22 - Fo = fraction (23 bits)

where:

Fixed Point Integer (1S·Bit)
Memory Location

I
I

F7 -

F15 -

where:
F15 - Fo = 16·bit integer

1,61
~.-

....

ERR

R is reserved for future use
= is equal (for FCOMP and FTST)
> is greater than (for FCOMP and FTST)
< Is less than (for FCOMP and FTST)
and:
ERR is a 3·bit error code that specifies one of
the following error conditions:
000 No error
001 Divide by zero
010 Square root of negative number
011 Overflow
100 Underflow
101 First argument valid
110 Second argument valid
111 Reserved

Note
F is always normalized (i.e., a "1"ls assumed In the highest bit position),
yielding an effective 24·bit fraction.

M+l

F24

Result Byte

F22 -

where:

Base Address (M)

F30 -

where: S = sign bit
F30 - Fo = two's complement integer

Memory Location
Base Address (M)

M+3

iSBC 310
Status Byte

connected to any ,of the 8 interrupt levels on the ISBC 80
'bus via jumpet selection.

Contains the following Information:
7

where:

R is
B Is
C is
E is

',0

Bus Interface

All signals are TTL compatible.

reserved for fUture use
bl,lsy
operation complete without error
operation complete with error

Bus Connector
Bus Connector - 86-pin, double-sided PC edge connector with 0.156-in. contact centers.
'
Mating Connector -Viklng3KH43/9AiVlK12

Addressing
1/0 Addressing -

Used to pass operation codes, memory address boundaries, and result and status bytes between host processor and iSBC 310
"
Port Add.....
Base (p)

P+l
P+2
, P+3
P+4
P+S
P+6
P+7

Output
OPCODE
MEM LOW
MEMHIGH
'R
R
R
R
R

Physical Characteristics
Width - 12.00 in (30.48 cm)
Height -- 6.75 in. (17.15 cm)
Depth- 0.50 In. (1.27 cm)
Weight - 12 oz (340.5 gm)

Input

,,'

R
Result byte
R
R
R
R
R
Slatus byte

Electrical Characterls'tics
DC Power Requirements

P= 110 base address, of XO or X8 (where
X = any hex digit)
R = reserved for iSBC 310 usage
OP CODE = mathematic commands (see Table 1)
MEM LOW, _ programmable base address (see MemMEM HIGH - ory Addressing)

vee
SV:l:S%

, iec
6.7A max; 4.9A Iyp

'where:,

Environmental Characteristics
Operating ,Temperature - O·C to 55·C

Equipment Supplied
High speed mathematics units
Standard preprogrammed ROMs (installed)
Schematics
Assembly drawing

Memory Addressing - Sixteen memory locations are
used; the first eight are used for argument/result storage; the second eight are reserved for future use.
Memory addresses are assigned froin the host processor via an 1/0 output instruction (see I/O Addressing).
MEM LOW (the lower address byte) must be XO (where X
is any hex digit). MEM HIGH (the upper address byte)
,
may be any value. "

Reference Manual
9800410A - iSBC 310 Hardware Reference Manual
(NOT SUPPLIED)
Reference manuals are shipped with each product only
if designated SUPPLIED (see above). Manuals may be
ordered from any Intel sales representative, distributor
office or from Intel LiteratUre Department, 3065 Bowers
Avenue, Santa Clara, California 95051.

Interrupts
Interrupts are generated, on operation complete and
operation error. Either one or both interrupts may be

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

SBC 310

High Speed Mathematics Unit -

1-62

iSBXTM Multimodule™
Boards

iSBX 331
FIXED/FLOATING POINT MATH
MULTIMODULE BOARD
• iSBX bus compatible high speed
fixed/floating point math expansion

• Square root, log, and exponential
functions

• 4 M Hz operation

• Float·to·fixed and fixed·to·float
conversions

• Fixed point single and double precision
(16/32·bit)

• End of operation interrupt

• Floating point double precision (32·bit)

• Software reset control

• Binary data formats

• Low power requirements

• Add, subtract, multiply and divide

• iSBX bus on·board expansion elimi·
nates MULTIBUS system bus latency
and increases system throughput

• Trignometric and inverse trigonometric
functions

The Intel'" iSBX 331 Fixed/Floating Point Math MULTIMODULE Board is a member of Intel's new line of
iSBX bus compatible MULTIMODULE products. The iSBX MULTIMODULE board plugs directly into any
iSBX bus compatible host board offering low cost incremental on·board expansion. As a result, any iSBX
bus compatible host board may be expanded to perform high speed math computations, affording up to a
40 x improvement in speed compared to software math. The iSBX 331 module performs single/double
(16/32-bit) precision fixed point plus double (32-bit) precision floating point arithmetic operations. In addition, the module performs transcendental, data manipulation, and fixed to float/float to fixed point conversion operations. The command operations run entirely independent of the host board permitting efficient
concurrent processing. The iSBX board is closely coupled to the host board through the iSBX bus, and as
such, offers maximum on-board performance and frees MULTIBUS system traffic for other system
resources. Incremental power dissipation is minimal requiring only 2.73 watts.

2-1
.....:..:..

iSBX 331
returned to TOS. There are four types of transcendental operations that can be performed in floating point numbers: trigonometric functions, logarithms, exponentials, and square roots. The results of these operations will be returned to TOS.
There are four types of data manipulation operations that can be performed in either fixed or floating point numbers: sign change of TOS, exchange
of TOS and NOS and copying or popping operands
onto or off of TOS. Fixed to floating point conversion can be performed on floating point instructions and floating point to fixed point conversion
can be performed on fixed point instructions.

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The iSBX 331 module uses the Intel 8231 Arithmetic Processing Unit (APU) to accomplish high
speed (4 MHz) math operation. The system software may communicate with the iSBX 331 module
across the iSBX bus using 1/0 readlwrite commands. All transfers, including operand, result,
status, and command information, take place over
an 8-bit bidirectional data bus. Operands are
pushed onto an internal stack and. commands are
issued to perform operations on the data. Results
are then available from the stack. A status byte
may be read to monitor execution completion and
the nature of the result (zero, sign, or errors). In addition, control logic is included on the iSBX 331
module to facilitate single instruction software
reset control.

The execution times of the commands are shown
in Table 2.

Interrupt Requests
There is one interrupt line from the APU that may
generate an interrupt request to the host: END
(MINTRI). The END interrupt line is active upon
command completion. The END signal is cleared
by a reset or status register read.

Command Functions
The iSBX 331 module commands fall into three
categories: double preCision floating point, single
precision fixed point, and double precision fixed
point (see Table 1). There are four arithmetic operations that can be performed in either fixed or
floating point numbers: add, subtract, multiply,
and divide. These operations require two operands. The 8231 assumes these operands are located in the internal stack as Top of 'Stack (TOS)
and Next on Stack (NOS). The result will always be

Installation
The iSBX 331 module plugs directly into the
female iSBX connector on the host board. The
module is then secured at one additional point
with nylon hardware to insure the mechanical
security of the assembly (see Figures 1 and 2).

INTEL ISBX 331
MULTI MODULE
BOARD

HOST BOARD

~
.. ::-

.. ;:::.:':::"

INTEL ISBX
_MULTIMODULE
CONNECTOR

Figure 1_ Installation of Isax 331 Module on a Host Board

2-2

AFN·01486A

iSBX 331
Table 1. Command Summary
Double Precision Floating Point Instructions (32·Bit)

Instruction

Hex
Code

Description

Stack Contents
After Execution(ll

A B C D

ACOS

Inverse Cosine of A

R U U U

ASIN

Inverse Sine of A

R U U U

ATAN

Inverse Tangent of A

5
7

R B U U
R B C D

CHSF

Sign Change of A

COS

R B U U

EXP

Cosine of A (radians)
eA Function

R B U U

FADD

Add A and B

FDIV

Divide B by A

R C. D U
R C D U

FLTD

32·Bit Fixed to Floating Point Conversion

R B C U

FLTS

16·Bit Fixed to Floating Point Conversion

R B C U

FMUL

Multiply A and B

R C D U

FSUB

Subtract A from B

R C D U

LOG

Common Logarithm (base 10) of A

R B U U

Natural Logarithm of A

R B U U

POPF

Stack Pop

B C D A

PTOF

Stack Push

8
7

PUPI

Push

onto Stack

R A B C

PWR

BA Power Function

R C U U

SIN

Sine of A (radians)

R B U U

A A B C

SQRT

Square Root of A

R B C U

TAN

Tangent of A (radians)

R B U U

XCHF

Exchange A and B

B A C D

Status Flags
Affected(3 1

S,l,
S,l,
S,l
S,l
S,l
S,l,
S,l,
S,l,
S,l
S,l
S,l,
S,l,
S,l,
S,l,
S,l
S,l
S,l
S,l,
S,l
S,l,
S,l,
S,l

E
E

E
E
E

E
E
E
E

E
E
E

Double Precision Fixed Point Instructions (32·Bit)

Instruction

Hex
Code

Description

Stack Contents
After Execution(ll

A B C D

CHSD

Sign Change of A

R B C D

DADD

Add A and B

R C D A

DDIV

Divide B by A

R C D

DMUL

Multiply A and B (R

R C D U

DMUU

=lower 32 bits)
Multiply A and B (R =upper 32 bits)

R C D U

DSUB

Subtract A from B

R C D A
R B C U

FIXD

Floating to Fixed Point Conversion

POPD

Stack Pop

B C D A

PTOD

Stack Push

A A B C

XCHD

Exchange A and B

B A C D

2·3

AFN·01486A
• ..:::::Jo .••

Status Flags
Affected(31

S,l,O
S,l, C, E
S,l, E
S,l,O
S,l,O
S, l,C,O
S,l,O
S, l
S,l
S,l

iSBX331
Table 1. Command Summary (continued)
Single Precision Fixed Point Instructions (16·Bit)

Hex
Code

' Description

Instruction

Stack Contents
Status Flags
After Execution(2)
4ffected(3)
Au' AL BuBL C u C L Du DL

CHSS

Change Sign 'of Au

FIXS

Floating to Fixed Point Conversion

POPS'

Stack Pop

.8,

AL Bu .BL Cu CLDu DL Au'

PTOS

Stack Push

Au Au A~ Bu BL C Ci. Du

SADD

Add Au and Ai.

R Bu BL Cu CLO'u DL Au

SDIV

Divide AL by Au

R Bu BL

SMUL

Multiply AL by Au'(R= lower 16 bits)

R Bu BL Cu C L Du DL U
R Bu BL Cu CL Du DL U
R Bu BL Cu C~ Du DL Au

R AL Bu BL Cu CL Du DL
R Bu BL' Cu CL 'u ,'U U

CL Du DL U

SMUU

Multiply AL by Au (R = upper 16 bits)

SSUB

Subtract Au from AL

XCHS,

Exchange Au and AL

7 . 9

AL Au Bu BL

NOP

No Operation

Au A~ Bu BL Cu :C L Du DL

CLDu DL

S,l,O
S,l,O
S,l
S,l
S, l, C; E
'S,l, E
S,l, E
S,Z, E

S,l, C, E
S,l

NOTES:,
1, The stack initially is composed of four 32·bit numbers (A, B, C, D), A is equivalent to Top Of Stack (TOS) .and B is Next On Stack
(NOS), Upon completion ;{f a command the stack is composed of: the result (R); undefined (U); or the'initiill contents (A.B. C, or D).
2. The stack initially is composed of eight 16·bit numbers (A~, AL" Bu, SL, Cu, CL, Du. DL), Au is the TOS and AL is NOS. Upon comple·
tion of a command the stack is composed of: the result (R); undefined (U); or the initial contents (Au. A L• Su. SL.:")'
3, Nomenclature: Sign (S); Zero (Z); Overflow (0); 'Carry (C); Error Code Field (E).

Table 2. Command Execution Times
Command Mnemonic

SADD
SSUB
SMUL
SMUU
SDIV
DADO
DSUB
DMUL
DMUU
DOIV
FIXS
FIXD
FLTS,
FLTD
FADD
FSUB
, FMUL
FDIV
SORT
SIN
COS
" TAN

,..Seconds

Command Mnemonic

,..Seconds

4.25
7.5
21-23.5
20-24.5
21-23.5
5.25
9.5
48.5-52.5
45.5-54.5
,52
23-54
25-.86.5
24:5-46.5
24.5-94.5
13.5-92
17.5-92.5
36,.5-42'
38.5-46
200
1116
1029.5,
1438.5

ASIN
ACOS
ATAN
LOG
LN
EXP
."
PWRNOP
CHSS
CHSD
CHSF
PTOS
PTOD
PTOF
POPS
POPD
POPF
XCHS
XCHD
XCHF
PUPI

1917
1933.5
1501.5
1118.5-1783
1074.5-1739
948.5-1219.5
,2072.5-300.8
1
5.75
6;75
4.5
4
5
5
2.5
3
:3
4.5
6.5
6.5
4

NOTE: Assumes 4 MHz operation:"

AFN·01486A

iSBX 331

__
r

L.C. .;.O_NI:_:~_TO"';'". . L. _- -L

I
_ _ _- L _ - - '

OOSOl(m,no)

(FEMALE)

Figure 2. ISBX 331 MULTIMODULE Board Mounting Clearanc.es (inches)

Bits 0-14: Values in the range from - 32, 768 to
+32,767.

SPECIFICATIONS
Word Size

Double Precision Fixed Point (32 bits)

Data-8 bits.

On-Board Clock Rate

4.0 MHz ±0.1%.

VALUE

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I II I I I I I I I I II

S =Sign of operand. Positive values
are represented by a sign of zero (S =
0). Negative values are represented by
the two's complemet of the corre·
sponding positive value with a sign bit
equal to 1 (S = 1).
Bits 0-30: Values in the range from - 2,147, .483,
648 to + 2, 147, 483, 647.
Bit 31:

110 Addressing
Function

Type of
Operation

iSBX
Connector
Port Address

Data Transfer
Command Transfer
Status Transfer
Reset

Read or Write
Write
Read
Write

XD, X2, X4, or X6
X1, X3, X5, or X7
X1, X3, X5, or X7
X8 through XF

NOTE:

Double Precision Floating Point (32 bits)

The port addresses are determined on the host iSBC micro·
computer. Refer to the Hardware Reference Manual for your
host iSBC microcomputer to determine the first digit (X) of the
connector port addresses.

EXPONENT

Arithmetic Functions

Bit 31:

See Table 1.

Data Formats

AFN·01486A

'I
0

MS = Sign of the mantissa. 1 repre·
sents negative and 0 represents pOSitive.

I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Bit 15:

MANTISSA

2423

Bits 24-30: ES the exponent expressed as a
two's complement 7·bit value having a
range of - 64 to· + 63.

Single Precision Fixed Point (16 bits)

mllllllllllllllllllllllllllill

3130

Bits 0-23: The mantissa is expressed as a 24·bit
(fractional) value. The 8231 APU requires that floating point data be represented by a fractional mantissa
value between 0.5 and 1 multiplied by
2 raised to an appropriate power (expo·
nent). This is expressed as follows:

VALUE

S = Sign of the operand. Positive
values are represented by a sign bit of
zero (S = 0). Negative values are repre·
sented by the two's complement of
the corresponding positive value with
a sign bit equal to 1 (S = 1).

Value = mantissa x 2exponent
2-5

iSBX 331
Device Status

Interrupts

Device status is provided by means of an internal
status register whose format is shown below:

One interrupt request may originate from the APU
indicating command completion (END).

BUSY

S'GN

ZERO

ERRORCODE---II

CARRY

I
Interface

BUSY: Indicates that 8231 is currently executing
a command (1 = Busy)

iSBX Bus-All signals TTL. compatible

SIGN: Indicates that the value on the top of stack
is negative (1 = Negative)

Physical Characteristics
Width-6.35 cm (2.50 in.)
Length-9.40 cm (3.70 in.)
Height*-2.04 cm (0.80 in.) iSBX 331 Board
--':2.86 cm (1.13 in.) iSBX 331 Board +
Host Board
Weight-51 gm (1.79 oz)

ZERO: Indicates that the value on the top of stack
is zero (1 = Value is zero)
ERROR CODE: This field contains an indication
of the validity of the result of the last operation.
The error codes are:
0000 No error
1000 Divide by zero
0100 Square root or log of negative number
1100 Argument of inverse sine, cosine, or
eX too large
XX10- Underflow
XX01- Overflow

'See Figure 2.

Electrical Characteristics
DC Power Requirements
Vee= +5V ±5%
lee=365 mA max.
Voo= + 12V ±5%
100=75 mA max.

CARRY: Previous operation resulted in carry or
borrow from most significant bit. (1 = Carry/Bor·
row, 0= No Carry/No Borrow.)

Environmental

If the BUSY bit in the status register is a one, the
other status bits are not defined; if zero, indicating
not busy, the. operation is complete and the other
status bits are defined as given above.

Operating Temperature-O·C to 55·C
Free moving air across the base board and iSBX
board.

Access Time

Reference Manual

Read-1900 ns (max.)
Write-1900 ns (max.)

142668~01-iSBX

331 Floating Point Math
MULTIMODULE Board (NOT SUPPLIED)

NOTE:
Actual transfer speed isdepende.nt upon the cycle. time oHhe
host microcomputer. The listed times assume no operation in
progress. 11 an operation is executing when an access is at·
tempted, the command execution time must be added to the
above times for all accesses except status read.

Reference manuals may be ordered from any Intel
sales representative, distributor office or from
Intel Literature Department, 3065 Bowers Avenue,
Santa Clara, California 95051.
.

ORDERING INFORMATION
~art

Number

SBX331

Description
Fixed/Floating Point Math
MULTIMODULE Board

2·6

iSBX 332
FLOATING POINT MATH
MULTIMODULE' BOARD
• iSBX bus compatible high speed
floating point math expansion

• Add, subtract, multiply and divide
functions

• 4 M Hz operation

• End-of-operationand error interrupts

• Compatible with proposed IEEE format
and existing Intel floating point
standard

' . .

• Software reset control
• Accessed as 1/0 port .Iocations

• Single (32-bit)1 double (64-bit) precision
arithmetic and data manipulation
commands

• Low power requirements
• iSBXbus on-board expansioneiim.i.
nates MULTIBUS system bus latency
and increases system throughput

• Performs functions independently and
concurrently with the MULTIBUS host
board

The Intel® iSBX 332 Floating Point Math MULTI MODULE Board is Ii member of Intel's new line of iSBX bu's compatible
MULTIMODULE products. The iSBX MULTIMODULE board plugs directly into any iSBX bus compatible host board
offering incremental on-board expansion. The iSBX 332 module performs single (32·bit) and double (64·bit) precision
floating point add, subtract, multiply, and divide functions compatible with the proposed IEEE floating pOint standard.
The command operations run entirely independent of the host board permitting efficient concurrent processing. The
iSBX board is closely coupled to the host board through the iSBX bus; and as such, offers maximum on-board perform·
ance and frees MULTIBUS system traffic for other system resources. In addition, Incremental power dissipation Is
minimal requiring only 2.73 watts

2·7

iSBX 332
The results will be raunded ta preserve the accuracy. In
additian ta the arithmetic aperatians, the 8232 implements eight data manipulating aperatians. These
include changing the sign .of a dauble .or single
precisian .operand lacated in TOS, exchanging single
precisian operands lacated at TOS and NOS, as well as
capying and papping single .or dauble precisian .operands. See alsa the sectlans an status register and
.operand farmats.

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The iSBX 332 madule uses the Intel'" 8232 Flaating
Paint Pracessar (FPP) ta accamplish high speed math
aperatian. The system saftware may cammunlcate with
the iSBX 332 madule acrass the iSeX bus using 1/0 readl
write cammands. All transfers, including .operand,
result, status, and cammand infarmatian, take place
aver an 8-bit bidirectianal data bus. Operands are
pushed anta an internal stack and cammands are
issued ta perfarm aperatians an the data stack. Results
are then available ta be retrieve'd fram the stack. A
status byte may be read ta manitar executian campletian and the nature .of the result (zera, sign, .or errars). In
additian,cantral lagic is, included an the iSBX 332
madule ta facilitate single instructian saftware reset
cantral.

The executian times .of the cammands are all data
dependent. Table 2 shaws .one example .of each cammand executian time.

Interrupt Requests
There are twa interrupt lines fram the FPP that may generate an interrupt request ta the .hast: END (MINTR1)
and ERINT (MINTRO). The END interrupt line is aciive
upan cammand campletian and the ERINT lineis active
when the current cammand executian results in an errar
canditian. The errarcanditians are: attempt ta divide by
zera, expanent averflaw and expanent underflaw. Bath
the END and ERINT signals are cleared by a reset .or
status register read.

Command Functions
The iSBX 332 madulecainmands lallinta three categories: single precisian arithmetic, dauble precisian arithmetic and data manipulatian (see Table 1). There are
faur arithmetic aperatians that can l;ie perfarmed with
single precisian (32-bit) .or dauble precisian (64-bit) flaating pain'tnumbers: add .. subtract, n\ultiply and divide.
These aperatians require' twa, .operands. The 8232
assumes that these .operands are Ipcated in the internal
stack as Tap .of Stack (TOS) and Next an Stack (NOS).
The result will always be returned ta the previaus NOS
which becames the new TOS. Results fram an aperatian
are .of the same precisian and farmat as the .operands.

Installation
The iSBX 332 madule plugs directly inta the female iSBX
can nectar an the hast baard. The madule is then
secured at .one additianal paint with nylan hardware ta
insure the mechanical security .of the assembly (see
Figures 1 and 2).

INTEL Isax 332
MULTIMODULE
aOARD

HaST. BOARD

.'.
. INTEL ISBX
•
.. "
.... ~. MULTIMOD.ULE
." '
CONNECTOR

.. : .. ' .0.:0
.

." ....
,.

"".

.\.

Figure 1. Installation of ISBX 332 Module on a Host Board

2·8

iSBX 332
Table 1. Command Summary

Command Bits
765 4 3 2 1 0

Mnemonic

Description

X 0 0 000 0 1

SADD

Add TOS to NOS single precision and result to NOS. Pop stack.

X 0 0 000 1 0

SSUB

Subtract TOS from NOS single precision and result to NOS. Pop stack.

SMUL

Multiply NOS by TOS single precision and result to NOS. Pop stack.

X 0 0 000 1 1
X 0 0 0 0 1

o0
o1

SDIV

Divide NOS by TOS single precision and result to NOS. Pop stack.

CHSS

Change sign of TOS single precision operand.

X 0 0 0 0 1 1 0

PTOS

Push single precision operand on TOS to NOS.

X 0 0 0 0 1 1 1

POPS

Pop single precision operand from TOS. NOS becomes TOS.

X 0 0 0 1 000

XCHS

Exchange TOS with NOS single precision.

X 0 0 0 0 1

CHSD

Change sign of TOS double precision operand.

X 0 1 0 1 1 1 0

PTOD

Push double precision operand on TOS to NOS.

X 0 1 0 1 1 1 1

POPD

Pop double precision operand from TOS. NOS becomes TOS.

X 0 0 0 0 000

CLR

CLR status.

X 0 1 0 1 001

DADD

Add TOS to NOS double precision and result to NOS. Pop stack.

X 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

DSUB

Subtract TOS from NOS double precision and result to NOS. Pop stack.

o1
o1

0 1 1

DMUL

Multiply NOS by TOS double precision and result to NOS. Pop stack.

100

DDIV

Divide NOS by TOS double precision and result to NOS. Pop stack.

X 0 1

X 0 1
X 0 1

NOTE:

X = Don't care. Operation for bit combinations not listed above is undefined.

Table 2. Execution Times

Command

TOS

SADD
SSUB
SMUL
SDIV
CHSS
PTOS
POPS
XCHS
CHSD
PTOD
POPD
CLR
DADD
DSUB
DMUL
DDIV

3F800000
3F800000
40400000
3F800000
3F800000
3F800000
3F800000 .
3F800000
3FFOOOOOOOOOOOOO
3FFOOOOOOOOOOOOO
3FFOOOOOOOOOOOOO
3FFOOOOOOOOOOOOO
3 F FOOOOOAOOOOOOO
3FFOOOOOAOOOOOOO
BFF8000000000000
BFF8000000000000

Result

NOS
3F800000
3F800000
3FCOOOOO
40000000

40000000
00000000
40900000
3FOOOOOO
BF800000

40000000

-,-

8000000000000000
8000000000000000
3FF8000000000000
3FF8000000000000

3FFOOOOOAOOOOOOO
3FFOOOOOAOOOOOOO
C002000000000000
B F FOOOOOOOOOOOOO

B F FOOOOOOOOOOOOO

NOTE:
lOS, NOS and result are in hexadecimal; clock period is in decimal.

2·9

Clock Periods

Time!i

iSBX 350
Parallel Interface Connectors
Interlace

No. 01
Center. Connector
Pairs!
(In.)
Type
Pins

Parallel 110
Connector

25150

0.1

Female

Parallel 1/0
Connector

25150

0.1

Female,
Soldered

Physical Characteristics

Vendor

Vendor
Part No.

3415'()OO1 with
Ears

Width - 7.24 cm (2.85 in.)
Length - 9.40 cm (3.70 in.)
Height" - 2.04 cm (0.80 in.) iSBX 350 Board
- 2.86 cm (1.13 in.) iSBX 350 Board
Board
Weight - 51 gm (1.79 oz)

GTE
6AD01251A1DD
Sylvania

+ Host

·See Figure 2.

Note: Connector compatible with those listed may also be used.

Line Drivers and Terminators

Electrical Characteristics

1/0 Drivers - The following line drivers and terminators
are all compatible with the 1/0 driver sockets on the
iSBX 350.

DC Power Requirements

Driver

Characteristic

7438
7437

Power Requirement

Conllguratlon

+5V@320mA

Sockets XU3, XU4, XU5, and XU6 empty (as
shipped).

+5V@500mA

Sockets XU3, XU4, XU5, and XU6 contain
7438 buffers.

+5V@620mA

Sockets XU3, XU4, XU5, and XU6 contain
iSBC 901 termination devices.

Sink Current (mA)

I.OC
I

7432

7426

I.OC

16
16

7409
7408
7403

NI.OC

NI
I,OC

7400

16
16
16

Environmental

Note:

Operating Temperature - O°C to 55°C

I = Inverting, NI = Non·lnverting, OC= Open Collector

Port 1 has 25 mA totem pole drivers and 1 kO termi·
nators.

Reference Manual
1/0 Terminators -

220013300 divider or 1 kO pull up.

9803191·01 - iSBX 350 Parallel I/O MULTIMODULE
Manual (NOT SUPPLIED)

22011/33011 (lSBC 901 OPTION)
220u
+5V ---....,~'-;- - - - ,

.f
1 kl! (ISBC 902 OPTION)

Reference Manuals may be ordered from any Intel sales
representative, distributor office or from Intel Literature
Department, 3065 Bowers Ave., Santa Clara, California
95051.

1 kU

+5V - - - -.....IW/O-·- - - - - - - - 0 0

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

SBX 350

Parallel I/O MULTIMODULE
Board

2·15

iSBX 351
SERIAL.I/O MULTIMODULE BOARD
• iSBX bus compatible I/O expansion

• Four jumper selectable interrupt
request sources

• Programmable synchronous/asynchro·
nous communications channel with
RS232C or RS449/422 interface

• Accessed as 1/0 port locations
• Low power requirements
• Single + 5V when configured for
RS449/422 interface

• Software programmable baud rate
generator

• iSBX bus on·board expansion elimi·
nates MULTIBUS system bus latency
and increases system throughput

• Two programmable 16·bit BCD or binary
timers/event counters

The Intel® iSBX 351 Serial I/O MUL TIMODULE board is a member of Intel's new line of iSBX bus compatible
MUL TIMODULE products. The iSBX MUL TIMODULE board plugs directly into any iSBX bus compatible
host board offering incremental on"board 110 expansion. The iSBX 351 module provides one RS232Cbr
RS449/422 programmable synchronous/asynchronous communications channel with software selectable
baud rates. Two general purpose programmable 16·bit BCD or binary timers/event counters are available to
the host board to generate accurate time intervals under software control. TheiSBXboard is closely
coupled to the host board through the iSBX bus, and as such, offers maximum on-board performance and
frees MULTIBUS system traffic lor other system resources. In addition, incremental power dissipation is
minimum requiring only 3.0 watts (assumes RS232C interface).

2-16

iSBX 351

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

and framing error detection are all incorporated in
the USART. The command lines, serial data lines,
and signal ground lines are brought out to a double
edge connector configurable for either an RS232C
or RS449/422 interface (see Figure 3). In addition,
the iSBX 351 module is jumper configurable for either
point-to-point or· multidrop network connection.

Communications Interface
The iSBX 351 module uses the Intel® 8251A Universal
Synchronous/Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
(U8ART) providing one programmable communications channel. The USART can be programmed
by the system software to individually select the
desired asynchronous or synchronous serial data
transmission technique (including IBM Bi-Sync).
The mode of operation (i.e. synchronous or asynchronous), data format, control character format,
parity, and baud rate are all under program control.
The 8251A provides full duplex, double buffered
transmit and receive capability. Parity, overrun,

16-SIt Interval Timers
The iSBX 351 module uses an Intel 8253 Programmable Interval Timer (PIT) providing 3 fully programmable and independent BCD and binary 16-bit

USER I/O
CONNECTOR------.
INTEL ISBX 351
MULTIMODULE
BOARD

HOST BOARD

/
INTEL iSBX

.~.
'.-:::.' _ _ MULTIMODULE
-:::::::::::;"
CONNECTOR
.

Figure 1. Installation of iSBC 351 Module on a Host Board

2-17

iSBX 351

interval. timers. One timer is available to the system
designer to generate baud rates for the USART
under software control. Routing for the outputs
from the other two counters is jumper selectable to
the host board. In utilizing the iSBX 351 module, the
systems designer simply configures, via software,
each timer independently to meet system requirements. Whenever a given baud rate or time delay is
needed, software commands the programmable
timers to select the desired function. The functions
of the timers are shown in Table 1. The contents of
each counter may be read at any time during
system operation.

hardware to insure the mechanical security of the
assembly (see Figures 1 and 2).
Table 1. Programmable Timer Functions
Operallon

Function
Interrupt on
terminal count

When terminal count is reached, an interrupt
request is generated. This function is useful
for generation of real-time clocks.

Programmable

Output goes low up,on receipt of an external
trigger edge and returns high when terminal
count is reached. This function is ret riggerable.

one-shot

Rate generator

Divide by N counter. The output will go low
for one input clock cycle, and the period
from one low going pulse to the next is N
times the input clock period.

Square-wave
rate generator

Output will remain high until one-hall the
count has been completed. and go low lor the
other half 01 the count.

Software
triggered strobe

Output remains high until software loads
counl (N). N counts after count Is loaded,
output goes low lor one input clock period.

Hardware
triggered strobe

Output goes low lor one clock period N
counts after rising edge counter trigger in·
put. The counter is retrlggerable.

Event counter

On a jumper selectable basis, the clock input
becomes an input from the external system.
CPU may read the number of events occurring after the counting "window" has been
enabled or an interrupt may be generated
after N events occur in the system.

Interrupt Request Lines
Interrupt requests may originate from four sources.
Two interrupt requests can be automatically generated by the USART when a character is ready to
be transferred to the host board (i.e. receive buffer
is full) or a character has been transmitted (i.e.
transmit buffer is empty). In addition, two jumper
selectable requests can be generated by the programmable timers.

Installation
The iSBX 351 module plugs directly into the female
iSBX connector on the host board. The module is
then secured at one additional point with nylon

.40

.80
MAX

~~ ~L-~L____

______L-______
SO_C_K_E_T______L-__

ISBX 351 MULTIMODULE BOARD

1.13
MAX
ISBX

CONNECTOR
(MALE)

.50

~ ~

CONNECTOR
____L-__'_SB_X__
(FEMALE)

____

_______
SO_C_K_E_T______L-__

~lM'N

Figure 2. Mounting Clearances (Inches)
2·18

intel'

iSBX 351

RS232C CABLING

RS449/422 CABLING

CONNECTOR PIN 1

FIgure 3. Cable Construction and Installation for RS232C and RS449/422 Interface

SPECIFICATIONS
Word Size
Data -

. Serial Communications
Synchronous - 5 - 8-bit characters; internal character synchronization; automatic sync insertion;
even, odd or no parity generation/detection.

8 bits

I/O Addressing
1/0
Addre••

XO, X2, X4,
or X6
XI, X3, X5,
or X7

Chip
Selecl

Funclion
Write: Data

8251A
USART

Read: Data
Write: Mode or Command
Read: Status

Asynchronous - 5 - 8-bit characters; break character generation and detection; 1, 1%, or 2 stop
bits; false start bit detection; even, odd or no parity
generation/detection.

Write: Counter 0

(Load Count -<- N)

X8 or XC

Read: Counter 0

. Sample Baud Rate:
8251 USART Baud Rate (Hz)'

Write: Counter 1

X9 or XD
8253
PIT
XA or XE

(Load Count -<- NI
Read: Counter 1
Write: Counter 2
(Load Count -<- N)
Read: Counter 2

XS or XF

Write: Control

Read: None

NOTE: The first digit of each port 1/0 address is listed as "X" since it will
change depending on the type of host iSSC microcomputer used.
Refer to the Hardware Reference Manual for your host iSBC
microcomputer to determine the first digit of the 110 address.

Access Time
250 nsec max
Write - 300 nsec max
Read -

Nole
Actual transfer speed is dependent upon the cycle time of the
host microcomputer.

8253 PIT Frequency'
(kHz, Solfware Selecfable)

307.2
153.6
76.8
38.4
19.2
9.6
4.8
2.4
1.76

Synchronous

38400
19200
9600
4800
2400
1760

Asynchronous

-<- 16
19200
9600
4800
2400
1200
600
300
150
110

-<- 64
4800
2400
1200
600
300
150
75

NOTES: 1. Frequency selected by 110 writes of appropriate 16-bit frequency factor to Baud Rate Register.
2. Baud rates shown here are only a sample subset of possible
software-programmable rates available, Any frequency from

18.75 Hz to 614.4 kHz may be generated utilizing on-board
crystal oscillator and 16-bit Programmable Interval Timer
(used here as frequency divider),

iSBX 351

Interval Timer and Baud Rate Generator

Interfaces

Input Frequency (selectable):

iSBX Bus -

1.23 MHz ±0.1% (.813 flSec period nominal)

Serial - configurable for EIA Standards RS232C or
RS449/422

153.6 kHz ±0.1% (6.5 J1sec period nominal)

EIA Standard RS232C signals provided
and supported:
Clear to Send (CTS)
Data Set Ready (DSR)
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
Request to Send (RTS)
. Receive Clock (RXC)
Receive Data (RXD)
Transmit Clock (DTE TXC)
Transmit Data' (TXD)

Output Frequency:
Rate Generator
(Frequency)

Real-Time Interrupt
(Inlerval)

Min.

Max.

Miri.'

Max.

Single
Timer 1

18.75 Hz

614.4 kHz

1.63/iSec

53.3 msec

Single
Timer 2

2.34 Hz

76.8 kHz

13.0/iSec

426.7 msec

Dual
Timer3
(Counters
o and 1
in series)

0.000286 Hz

307.2 kHz

3.26 psec

58.25 min

Dual
Timer 4
(Counters
o and 1
in series)

0.0000358 Hz

38.4 kHz

26.0 /iSec

7.77 hrs.

ali signals TTL compatible.

EIA Standard RS449/422 signals provided
and supported:
Clear to Send (CS)
Data Mode (OM)
Terminal Ready (TR)
Request to Send (RS)
Receive Timing (RT)
Receive Data' (RD)
Terminal Timing (TT)
Send Data (SO)

NOTES: 1. Assuming 1.23 mHz clock input.

Physical Characteristics

2. Assuming 153.6 kHz clock input.

3. Assuming Counter 0 has 1.23 mHz clock input.

Width Length Height" -

4. Assuming Counter 0 has 153.6 kHz clock input.

Interrupts

Weight -

Interrupt requests may originate from the USART
(2) or the programmable timer (2).

7.24 cm (2.85 inches)
9.40 cm (3.70 inches)
2.04 cm (0.80 inches)
iSBX 351' Board
2.86 cm (1.13 inches)
iSBX 351 Board and Host Board
51 grams (1.79 ounces)

(See Figure 2)

Serial Interface Connectors
Configuration

Mode2

MULTI MODULE Edge Connector

Cable

Connector 8

RS232C

DTE

26-pin 5 , 3M-3462-0001

3M3_3349/25

25-pin', 3M-3482-1000

RS232C

DCE

26-pin 5 , 3M-3462-0001

3M3_3349/25

25-pin', 3M-3483-1000

RS449

DTE

40-pin', 3M-3464-0001

3M'-3349/37

37-pin',3M-3502-1000

RS449

DCE

40-pin', 3M-3464-0001

3M'-3349/37

37-pin', 3M-3ii03-1000

NOTES: 1. Cable housing 3M-3485-4000 may be used with the connector.
2. OTE -

Data Terminal mode (male connector),-DCE -

Data Set mode (female connector).

3. Cable is tapered at one end to fit the 3M 7 3462 connector.
4. Cable is tapered to fit 3M-3464 connect9r.

5. Pin 26 of the edge connector is not connected to the flat cable.
6. Pins 37, 39, and 40 of the edge connector are not connected to the flat cable.
7. May be used with cable housing 3M-3485-:-1000.
8. Connectors compatible with those listed may also be used.

2-20

iSBX 351

Electrical Characteristics

Environmental Characteristics

DC Power Requirements

Temperature - 0 - 55°C, free moving air across the
base board and MUL TIMODULE board.

Mode

RS232C

Voltage

+5V ±0.25V
+12V ±0.6V
-12V ±0.6V

RS449/422

+5V ±0.25V

Amps

Reference Manual

(Max.)

9803190·01 - iSBX 351 Serial 110 MULTIMODULE
Manual (NOT SUPPLIED)
Reference Manuals may be ordered from any Intel
sales representative, distributor office or from Intel
Literature Department, 3065 Bowers Ave., Santa
Clara, California, 95051.

460 mA
30 mA
30 mA
530 mA

ORDERING INFORMATION
Description
Part Number
SBX 351

Serial I/O MUL TIMODULE
Board

2·21
Co

iCSTM Industrial
Control Series

iCS 80
INDUSTRIAL CHASSIS
• MULTIBUS standard 4-slot backplane,
expandable to 12 slots
• Vertical board orientation for
convection. cooling
• 19-inch wide RETMA rack mounting or
NEMA type backwall mounting.
brackets
• Four fans for forced-ciir cooling
• Submitted for approval as
recognized component

aUL

• 110/230V, 50160 Hz operation

• Slide inlout mounting rails for iSBC
power supplies
- Quick disconnect cabling for
serviceability
- Your choice of supply
• Lockable service panel
• All front access serviceability
;",.. iSBC boards
- Power supplies
- Interrupt and reset buttons
- Operation indicators and fuse
• Recessed mounting space for signal.
conditioninglwire termination panels

The iCS 80 lridustrial Chassis provides industrially· oriented mbunting space for Intel single board computer (iSBC)
products, associated iSBC power supplies, and related iCS 9XX analog and digital signal conditioning/termination
panels. The base unit provides a 4-siot MULTIBUS backplane (iSBC 604) with expansion space and cabling to expand to
12 MULTIBUS backplane slots by adding additional 4-slot iSBC 614s as needed (up to two). Allbf the 25-plus Intel
MULTlBUS bus-compatible iSBC boards can be inserted into any oneofthe 12slots. In addition, over 50 products from 30
independent manufacturers have been designed for mounting into the MULTI BUS backplane. Full MULTIBUS
compatibility in the iCS 80 chassis also allows configuration of multiple single board computers to share system tasks
through communication over the bus (through multimaster bus arbitration built on the multiple iSBC processors).

les 80
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Power Supply Flexibility
To provide a iTlodular base on which to build a vallety of
configurations, no power supply is provided in the iCS
80 Industrial Chassis. Users choose one of the low cost
Intel iSBC 635 (14-amp) or iSBC 640 (30-amp) power supplies based on their application. Slide in!out mounting
rails are provided to match the iSBC 635 and iSBC 640
supplies, and quick disconnect cabling and connectors
are provided for rapid service replacement. An AC wiring
barrier strip allows simple wiring connections for integration into larger systems (see Figure 4).

Self Contained Low Cost Controllers
Small, self contained Industrial controllers can be configured with the 4-slot cardcage and ISBC 635 power
supply. As shown in Figure 2, this packaging can also
accommodate the iCS 9XX series signal conditioning!
termination panels.

Or Large Power and Point Counts in a
Small Package
At the high end of performance for the iCS 80 chassis, a
user can build a 12-slot configuration with the Intel iSBC
640 Power Supply. This iCS 80 chassis can support the
iSBC 86/1216-bit computer with 112K bytes memory (96K
RAM, 16K ROM), 64 differential analog inputs, 180 digital
inputs, 52 isolated digital outputs, and 8 analog outputs
(four current loops); in total a 304-channel, mixed analog
and isolated digital, input and output controller, large
enough for most dedicated applications (see Figure 3).

Industrial Rack Mounting
The chassis mounts directly into 19-inch standard width
RETMA (Radio-Electronics-Television Manufacturers
Association) customer provided rack. Alternately,
mounting brackets and power cabling access are provided for mounting directly on a backwall, such as the
backwall panel of a NEMA-type (National Electrical
Manufacturers Association), front-access-onlycabinet.

Engineered for Industrial Applications
The MULTIBUS slots are mounted vertically to Improve
convection cooling and the top, bottom and sides are
engineered to allow maximum air flow over the boards.
Four fans are provided as standard to increase air flow,
allowing users to eliminate or minimize the need for
supplementary fans or air conditioning.

Front Access Serviceability
To simplify serviceability, front access is provided for all
iSBC boards, the power supply, operation indicator
lights, interrupt and reset buttons, and the AC power
fuse.

TOP VIEW

=~1'~ ~ -_-_~- 17-.4=:= = = :'1~
%. .. .. .. ..

r
L

·1 <;;

::>
?

I•

19.0

'Tj-

. .. .. .. ..
i[][]o

15.9
11.97

~Itrr
. _t

00000000 0

11.47

FRONT VIEW

SIDE VIEW

Figure 1_ iCS 80 Chassis Dimensions

3-2
=>

iCS 80
Typical Small Configuration
•
•
•
•
•
•
..
•
•

Figure 2. Small Configuration ies

8-bit 8080 processor (iSSC 80/20-4)
2K bytes RAM
8K bytes ROM/EPROM
16 analog inputs
2 analog outputs
8 isolated digital inputs
8 isolated digital outputs
12 TTL outputs
12 TTL inputs

so with ISBC 635, ICS 910 and ICS 930 Signal

Conditioning/Termination Panels

Typical Maximum Configuration
•
•
•
•
•

16·bit 8086 processor (iSSC 86/12)
96K bytes RAM
16K bytes EPROM
64 analog inputs
4 analog voltage outputs
• 4 analog current outputs (4-20 mAl
• 132 Isolated digital inputs
• 48 TTL digital inputs
• 52 Isolated digital outputs
(All iCS 9XX Signal CondltionlnglTermination Panels are
not shown)

Figure 3. iCS SO with 12 MULTIBUS Card Slots and iSBC 640 Power Supply, Large Configuration

Figure 4. Rear View ICS SO Chassis Showing Power Distribution Panel, and Cabling from ICS"SO Chassis to ICS 9XX
RETMA Mounted Signal Conditioning Panels (Top of ICS SO Chassis)

3-3

iCS 80
Lockable Service Panel

Submitted for UL Recognition

To assist in development, checkout and service, two
push buttons are provided. The RESET button pulls low
the initialize line (iiiiIT) on the MULTIBUS backplane. The
INTERRUPT button pulls low one interrupt line On the
MULTI BUS backplane (INT1). Logic within the iCS 80 en,
sures that these buttons function with all versions of
Intel single board computers. From the front of the iCS
80 chassis, without a CRT or other panel, an operator or
service person can reset or interrupt on·going iCS 80
system operations to get attention, signal an alarm, or
start a self-test operation.

The iCS 80 chassis has been submitted to Underwriters
Laboratories for approval as a U.L. listed component
under the Underwriters Laboratories Safety Standard for
Process Control Equipment, UL1092. When installed as
described in theiCS 80 manual, the iCS 80 chassis
provides adequate protection against shock, fire and
casualty hazards, and should comply with most local and
regional requirements for installation in ordinary
locations.

Mounting Space for Signal
Conditioning/Wire Terminations

Three indicator light emitting ·diodes record basic
chassis status. POWER ON (GREEN); RUN (GREEN);
and HALT (RED); the RESET or INTERRUPT buttons will
remove the HALT state.

The cardcages and power supplies in the iCS 80 chassis
are recessed behind the front edge of the rack mounting
ears to provide mounting space for the iCS 9XX series
signal conditioning/termination panels and field wiring.
For smaller systems with on Iy one or two iSBC 604/614
cardcages (4 to 8 slots), up to two iCS 910, iCS 920, or iCS
930 signal conditioning/termination panels can be
mounted vertically over the area where the second orthird
cardcage would mount (see Figure 2), The benefit of this
design is a completely self-contained industrial chassis
with iSBC cards, power supply, signal conditioning and
field wiring terminations, all in one enclosure.

SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment Supplied

A front panel key provides three positions: OFF (AC
power off and key removable), ON (AC power on, push·
buttons enabled, key unremovable), and LOCK (AC
power on, pushbuttons disabled, key removable).

iCS 80 industrial chassis, three fans forcardcages, one fan
for power supply, 4-slotcardcage with MUL TIBUS
backplane, control panel with switches, indicators, keylock, power distribution barrier strip, AC power fuse, line
filter, 115V power cable, and logic for interrupt and reset
buttons. An installation package is also provided,
inciLiding a NEMA cabinet mouilting kit, power supply
extension cables, and RETMA cabinet mounting screws,
110/230 VAC operation.

Capacity
Four slots for MULTIBUS compatible single board computers, memory, I/O or other expansion boards
Expandable to 12 slots using customer plug-together
iSBC 614 cardcages

Front Panel Controls
Pushbuttons
RESET: Connected to Initialize/ on MULTIBUS backplane

Software
See the RMX/80 Real-time Multitasking Executive
specifications for industrial related applications. In
addition, system monitors for most of the Intel single
board computers are available in the INSITE (Intel's
Software Index and Technology Exchange) User's
Program Library.

INTERRUPT: Connected to Interrupt 1/ line on MULTIBUS backplane.
Panel Indicator Lights (LEOs)
POWER ON (green): + 5V power exists on the MULTIBUS backplane
RUN (green): CPU is executing an instruction. Light
goes out if CPU is in WAIT or HALT state
HALT (red): CPU has executed a HALT instruction

Physical Characteristics
Height - 39.3 cm (15.7 in.)
Width - 48.5 cm (19.0 in.) at front.panel
43.5 cm (17.4 in.) behind front panel
Depth - 30.0 cm (12.0 in.) with all protrusions
Weight - 16.8 kg (37.0 Ib) without power supplies

Keylock
OFF: AC power off, key removable
ON: AC power on, push buttons enabled, key unremovable
LOCK: AC power on, push buttons disabled, key removable
Fuse -

Environmental Characteristics
(Ambient at iCS-80 air intake, bottom of chassis)
Temperature (Ambient)
Operating: O°C to 50°C (32°F to 122°F)
Non-operating: - 40°C to + 85°C

AC power (6A)

Humidity -

3-4

Up to 90% relative, noncondensing at 40°C

iCS 80
supply) peak-to-peak, max (DC to 500 kHz)

Electrical Characteristics
The iCS 80 chassis provides mounting space for either the
iSBC 635 or iSBC 640 power supply. Unless otherwise
stated, electrical specifications apply to both power
supplies when installed by user in iCS 80 chassis.

Output Transient Response - Less than 50 Ilsec for ±50%
load change.
Maximum Watts Dissipation (load plus losses) (iSBC 640 supply), 250W (iSBC 635 supply)

Input Power
Frequency: 47 to 63 Hz. Voltage (Nominal)
(Single Phase): 100, 115, 215, or 230 VAC +10%, jumper
selectable.
ISBC635
3.0A max
1.5A max
315 watts

With

Current:

(Including fans)
Power, max:

ISBC640
5.6A max
2.BA max
5BO watts

Input Voltage
103 VAC
206 VAC

Overvoltage
ISBC 635
+ 14V to +16V
+ 5.BV to + 6.6V
- 5.BV to - 6.6V
-14V to -16V

Protection
ISBC 640
+ 14V to + 16V
+ 5.BV to + 6.6V
- 5.BV to - 6.6V
-14V to -16V

With

Installation
Complete instructions for installation are contained in
the iCS 80 Site Planning and Installation Guide, including RETMA and NEMA cabinet mounting, and field
signal, ground wiring and cooling suggestions.

Warranty
The iCS 80 Industrial Chassis is warranted to be free
from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of 90 days from date of
shipment.

Output Power
Voltage
+ 12V
+5V
-5V
-12V

Output Current (max)
iSBC635 ISBC640
2.0A
4.5A
14.0A
30.0A
0.9A
1.75A
O.BA
1.75A

Reference Manuals
9800799A :- iCS 80 Industrial Chassis Hardware Reference Manual (SUPPLIES)
9800798 - iCS 80 Industrial Systems Site Planning and
Installation Guide (SUPPLIED)

Combined Line/Load Regulation - ±1'10 at ±10% static
line change and ±50% static load change, measured at the
output connector (±0.2% measured at the power supply
under the same conditions).
Remote Sensing regulation.

9800708A - iSBC 604/614 Cardcage Hardware Reference Manual (SUPPLIED)
Reference manuals are shipped with each product only
if designated SUPPLIED (see above). Manuals may be
ordered from any Intel sales representative, distributor
office or from Intel Literature Department, 3065 Bowers
Avenue, Santa Clara, California 95051.

Provided for +5 VDC output line

Output Ripple and Noise-10 mV (iSBC 635and iSBC 640

ORDERING INFORMATION
The iCS 80 I ndustrial Chassis must be ordered as a kit with
an Intel power supply of your choice. Ordering as a kit will
ensure shipment olthe power supply and iCS 80 chassis at
the same time. Typical configurations and ordering
instructions are:

Part Number

Description

ICS 80 Kit 635

iCS 80 system consisting of:
iCS 80 Industrial Chassis
iSBC 635 Power Supply

ICS 80, Kit 640

iCS 80 system consisting of:
iCS 80 Industrial Chassis
iSBC 640 Power Supply

500W

3-5

iCS 910/920/930
SIGNAL CONDITIONING/TERMINATION PANELS
• Interconnects iSBC and digital I/O ports
to field signal/control wiring

• Digital signal conditioning (iCS 920/930)
- Sockets for optically isolated input
filters and solid state output
switches
- Pad space for transient suppressors, current limiting resistors,
and voltage dividers
- Socketed fuse for overload
protection (iCS 930)
- LED/channel status indicators

• Ribbon cable connection from panel is
pin compatible with iSBC analog, CPU,
and digital board I/O ports
• Barrier strip screw terminals for
- iCS 910: 32 single-ended analog
inputs (or 16 differential signal plus
shield) plus four analog voltage
outputs or two analog 4 to 20 rnA
current outputs
- iCS 920: 24 medium power digital
inputs and/or outputs (55V, 300 rnA
max)
- iCS 930: 16 high power AC or DC
digital inputs or outputs (280 VAC,
3A max)

• Engineering printed circuit mounting
space for customer analog input
components (iCS 910)
- Noise liters
- Current loop resistors
- Open circuit detection resistors
- Voltage divider resistors
- Thermistor bias current

• Flexible mounting kits for
- 19" width RETMA rack
- N EMA type backwall
- iCS 80 Industrial Chassis

• Submitted for UL recognition

The iCS 910/920/930 Signal Conditioning/Termination Panels are heavy duty printed circuit boards with screw
terminations which allow industrial customers to easily connect their heavier gauge field signal wiring to Intel's line of 8and 16-bit single board computers, and iSBC analog and digital I/O boards. Flat ribbon cables connect the iCS 910 panels
to any of the Intel iSBC 700 series analog input and output board pin-outs. Flat ribbon cables also connect the iCS 920
panels and iCS 930 panel to the 50-pin digital I/O ports (8255 or UPI) on Intel's single board computers and digital I/O
boards. Power for opto-isolators or line drivers (+5 VDC) can be supplied via this cable from the iSBC boards. Jumpers
and a screw terminal block are provided on the iCS 920/930 panels to allow an external supply of +5V power. A similar
jumper/terminal block is provided on the iCS 910 panel to allow users to connect external +15V (or greater) compliance
voltage for larger analog output loads.

3·6
.c,

iCS 910/920/930
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION COMMON
TO iCS 910/920/930
Large Wire or Spade Lug Connections
The barrier strip screw terminations on the iCS 910/920/
930 panels provide familiar connection points for factory
electricians to terminate the heavier gauge wiring often
pulled through conduits from sensors or control
elements. These screw terminals securely connect up to
14 AWG gauge wire size (16-gauge on iCS 910/920
panels). Alternately, spade lugs can be crimped on field
wiring and inserted under the screw terminals.

Mounting Flexibility and Serviceability
The iCS 910/920/930 panels were designed to be
physically separate from iSBC boards or the iCS 80
chassis to allow maximum mounting flexibility and ease of
serviceability. The panels and field wiring can be
mounted in one area of the cabinet where electricians
have access. Flat ribbon cable can then be run to the area
where control electronics technicians have access.

Figure 2. iCS 910/920 Signal Conditioning/Termination
Panel Mounted on a NEMA Cabinet Backwall

The iCS 910/920/930 panels may b'e mou nted horizontally
in a 19" standard width (RETMA) rack using a recessed
mounting panel (see Figure 1). Alternately, the panels
can be mounted on a cabinet wall (e.g., NEMA cabinet
backwall) using standoffs provided (see Figure 2). 0;-, for
the most compact packaging, users can mount up to two
iCS 910/920/930 panels vertically, directly on the front of
the iCS 80 chassis using standoffs and holes provided (see
Figure 3).
A black metal labelling strip is provided with each iCS
910/920/930 panel. White, blank gummed labels are in·

cluded so that users can custom identify each input or
output channel. A clear plastic cover is provided to pro·
tect against inadvertent touching or damage to the
screw terminals or customer mounted components.

Figure 3. iCS 910/930 Signal Conditioning/Termination
Panels Mounted on iCS 80 Industrial Chassis

iCS 910 ANALOG SIGNAL
CONDITIONING/TERMINATION PANEL
Mixed Analog Input and Output Signals
A single iCS 910 panel connects up to 32 single ended
analog inputs (or 16 differential analog inputs plus shield)
to the iSBC 711 or iSBC 732 analog input boards. In
addition, the same iCS 910 panels can connect up to four
analog output voltages from the iSBC 724 analog output
board, or two voltage or 4 to 20 mA current loop outputs
from the iSBC 732 combination analog input/output
board. Three flat ribbon cables are included in the iCS
910 installation kit (two analog inputs, one analog output)
to route signals to iSBC 711/724/732 boards.

Figure 1. iCS 930 AC and iCS 920 Digital Signal
Conditioning/Termination Panel Mounted on
a 19" Width RETMA Rack

3·7

iCS 910/920/930
Engineered Signal Conditioning
Mounting Space

circuit area onto which users may mount components to
signal condition analog input signals. Pad traces and
holes are designed to allow easy mounting of R-C noise
filters, input voltageresistorldivider networks, current
loop input resistors, open circuit detection resistors, or to
supply thermistor bias current (see Figure 4 for schematic
of a typical analog input channel).

Printed circuit traces on the iCS 910 panel connect each
screw terminal analog input channel to the flat ribbon
cable connector. Users can jump straight through signal
connections if they desire. Each input channel trace,
however, passes through a custom engineered printed

OPEN CIRCUIT
DETECTION OR
THERMISTOR BIAS
RESISTORS

BARRIER
STRIP

I
I .... ...,

:~ E~~~ENT

_L .:
c

VOLTAGE
DIVIDER
RESISTOR

r - --A.,"'..,'''v- - --,

I .... J

NOISE FILTER

-T-

"". RESISTOR
1

FIELD WIRING
FROM
TRANSDUCER

I
.>

~:
I

I
I
_.L_

DECOUPLING

I
I

CAPACITORS FOR

-T-

-r

I
I

-v

C~~AF~m=s

SINGI\;Jp~~DED

I
SHIELD

RIBBON
CABLE TO
ISBC-711/732
ANALOG INPUT
BOARD

I
I
I

!Q]'---------------------<6)-------~

Figure 4. iCS 910 Analog Input Signal Conditining Examples

mounting voltage divider/threshold resistors and protection diodes.

iCS 920 DIGITAL SIGNAL
CONDITIONING/TERMINATION PANEL

Groups of four inputs can have mixed voltage levels,
opto-isolation, or straight through connections in
groups of two. Output groups of four can be mixed optoisolated or high current drive in groups of two. DIP components from a wide variety cif vendors are selected and
inserted by users based on their application. The iCS
920 manual recommends several alternative components and bffers design assistance for your I/O configuration. Digital signal conditioning examples for several
common industrial voltages are shown in Table 1 and in
the diagrams below (see Figure 5).

The iCS 920 panel interconnects up to 24, 2-wire digital
input or output channels from barrier strip screw terminals
to the 16- or 24-bit digital 1/0 ports, standard on many
Intel single board computers and digital 1/0 expansion
boards. Screw terminals allow for one each 16 AWG size
wire for differential (2-wire) connections or two each
AWG IS-gauge wire for daisy chaining grounds or power
for external contact sensing.

Flexibility in Isolation and Serviceability
Active Channel Indicators

Dual-in-line sockets are in series with each channel (see
Figure 5) to allow customer jumpering for straight
through connections (TTL I/O), or for insertion of popular DIP packaged opto-isolators or digital output high
current driver transistors. Circuit pads are available for

Light emitting diodes (LEDs) are mounted adjacent to
each channel's screw terminals and may be jumperedin
to indicate the Hi-Lo status of each of the 24 input or
output channels.
.

3-8

iCS 910/920/930

iSBC BOARD

CURRENT LIMITING
AND
THRESHOLD RESISTORS

OPTO·ISOLATOR
SOCKETS

-;;'.~ Til 117) I

I
I

IN FROM
FIELD

RIBBON
CABLE

SCREW
TERMINALS

8255

iSBC 902

1 OF 4
CHANNELS

I
I
I

L ___ -1

OPTICALLY ISOLATED DC INPUT EXAMpLE (iCS-920 panel)

OPTO·ISOLATOR
SOCKETS
(e.g. TIL 113)

+'I

I
I

,-----]
I

iSBC BOARD

RIBBON
CABLE

8255

I
I

'-------~

.-J
OPTICALLY ISOLATED DC OUTPUT EXAMPLE (iCS-920 panel)

iSBC BOARD
LINE DRIVER
OPTO·ISOLATOR LED
SOCKETS

8255

I
I

L ____ J

-1
CURRENT DRIVER OUTPUT (55V. 300 mAl EXAMPLE (iCS-920 panel)

Figure 6. Digital Signal Conditioning Examples

3·9

iCS 910/920/930
Table 1. iCS 920 Digital 1/0 Signal Conditioning Plug·ln Component Examples
Digital Voltage Input or
Output Load Voltage

Maximum Input Current
(mA)

Threshold Voltage
(V)

Oplo·lsolators"

Diode Protection"

50
50
40

3
6
6

TIL 117
TIL 117
TIL117

1N4002
1N4002
1N4002

4N36

1N4002

Oplo-Isolated Input
5 VDC
12 VDC
24 to 26 VDC
48 VDC

Maximum Output Currenl
(mA)

Line Driver"

Opto·lsolators"

Opto·lsolated Output
TIL113
TIL119

100

300

T175472

300
150

GE4N40
MCS 2

12 VDC
24 VDC

100
100

48 VDC

MCS 2

Current Drivers
55 VDC
Half Wave Rectifier Outputs
24 VAC SCR
115 VAC SCR

'Example component - alternate source components are listed in the iCS 920 Hardware Reference Manual.

iCS 930 AC Signal Conditioning/Termination
Panel

each channel can be individually mixed for AC or DC in·
put (or AC or DC output). The user pays only for those
channels implemented. User supplied compatible modules are shown in Table 2.

The iCS 930 panel interconnects 16 2-wire digital input or
output channels from barrier strip screw terminals to 16
bits of the digital I/O ports available on many Intel single
board computers and digital I/O expansion boards. The
iCS 930 panel differs from the iCS 920 digital signal
conditioning/termination panel in that the iCS 930 panel
handles higher AC or DC voltages and currents (up to
280V, 3A), such as those found on many 115 VAC
machines, motor starters, and industrial control panels.
The iCS 930 panel is also recommended for optically
isolated DC outputs greater than 100 mAo

DC and AC input modules are current actuated and thus
provide a 5·ms filter against spurious noise spikes or
contact bounce. AC solid state output modules provide
zero crossing turn on to minimize arcing.

Protection Circuitry
Each of the 16 channels contain a socketed fuse to pro·
tect against overload. In addition, mounting pads are
available on each channel output for user supplied voltage transient RC "snubber" components or inductive
pulse suppression, e.g., metallic-oxide·varistor (MOV)
for large motor starting.

The iCS 930 screw terminals accept up to 14 AWG size
wire each for differential (2 wires per channel) connec·
tions, or two 14 AWG size wires for daisy chaining
grounds or power from external sources.

Active Channel Indicators

Modular Isolation/Switching with Easy
Serviceability

Light emitting diodes (LEDs) are mounted adjacent to
each channel's screw terminals and opto·module to
indicate Hi·Lo status of that channel and to assist in
troubleshooting servicing.

Each iCS 930 panel accepts up to 16 user supplied, op·
tically isolated input modules or optically isolated solid
state switches, for either AC or DC voltages (see Figure
6). Each module is screw mountable/replaceable and
can be mixed for AC or DC input, or AC or DC output, in
groups of four. Among groups of four inputs (or outputs)

Examples of iCS 930 input and output schematics are
shown in Figure 6.

3·10

iCS 910/920/930
Table 2. Opllcally Isolated Modules Compallble with ICS 930 Signal CondlllonlnglTermlnallon Panel
Signal Conditioning Desired

Voltage Rallng

Maximum Input Current

Opto·22 Numberr

Motorola Number·

AC Input -

95 to 130 VAC
180 to 280 VAC

10 mA
10 mA

IAC5
IAC5A

IAC5

DC Input - 5 !lsec Filter
Fast, 50 !lsee On

10 to 32 VDC
4 to 16 VDC

32 mA
14 mA

IDC5
IDC5B

IDC5

AC Output

12 to 140 VAC
24 to 280 VAC

3A
3A

OAC5
OAC5A

OAC5

DC Output

10 to 60 VDC
200 VDC

3A
1A

ODC5
ODC5A

ODC5

115 VAC
220 VAC

Output Current Rating

• Motorola and Opto·22 sales offices are localed In North America, Europe, and Japan.

+5V

r-----------

SCREW
TERMINALS

I
I
I

OPTO·ISOLATOR

,-I
RIBBON
CABLE

--,

II
I
I
L ____ ...lI
ISBC·902

8255

I
I

ISBC BOARD

AC INPUT EXAMPLE (iCS-930 panel)
+5V
LED

r---------,

TRANSIENT

!
3AMP

(§)

f':~oad

r----..,

?-- ~IP-JY

RIBBON
CABLE

8255

ZENER
DIODE

I
I
..J

ISBC BOARD

DC SOLID STATE OUTPUT

LED
ZEROYOLTAGECIRCuiT-l

~______Q-______~______1~1~~~4

3
RIBBON
CABLE

~~.--~~---~~~--~
FUSE3A

L __ ~g~~~ _ _ ...J

I
I
...J

AC SOLID STATE RELAY OUTPUT EXAMPLE (iCS-930 panel)
Figure 6. Typical ICS 930 Signal Conditioning Examples

3-11
c::::'.

8255

iCS 91019201930
FLAT RIBBON CABLE
(3 Included with
ICS-910 and 1 with
IC$-920 and 930

EDGE CONNECTOR TO
ISBC ANALOG OR
DIGITAL BOARDS

ICS.910, 920. or 930
SIGNAL CONDITIONING PANEL

TERMINAL LABEL STRIP

RETMA BRACKET OR
NEMA BACKWALL
MOUNTING SPACERS
HIGH VOLTAGE
PROTECTION
CLEAR PLASTIC COVER

BLANK LABELS TO
IDENTIFY INPUT/OUTPUT
CHANNELS

Figure 7. Mounting Arrangements for Signal ConditioninglTerminal Panels

SPECIFICATIONS
(For iCS 910/920/930 panels unless otherwise specified)

'iCS 9)0

455 gm(16 Ol)

Number of Lines

iCS 920

iCS 930

(Minimum. PC panel only)

Weight:

455 gm (16 Ol)

681 gm (24 Ol)

(Maximum with all components and mounting kit installed)

iCS 910 Panel
Analog Inputs - Sixteen 3-wire (differential signal plus
shield) or 32 single ended
Analog Outputs - Four 2-wire voltage output (iSBC 724
Analog Board) or two 2-wire current output (iSBC 732
Analog Board)
iCS 920 Panel -'- Zero to 24 digital inputs or outputs in
groups of four
iCS 930 Panel - Zero to 16 digital inputs or outputs in
groups of four

1.6 Kg (56 Ol)
Depth:

1.8 Kg (64 Ol)

3.4 Kg (120 Ol)

(With compone'nis and clear plastic cover installed)
5.08 cm(2.0 in.)

5.08 cm (2.0 in.)

5.08'cm(2.0 in.)

(Barrier strip)

Connectors:
2/56 screws
48 AI
12 AO
2 power

2156 screws
48 DIlDO
2 + 5V power

6132 screws
32 DIlDO
2 + 5V power

(J1. J2, J3 to iSBC boards)
50·pin
0.1 in. centers
(2.54 mm)

Isolation Characteristics
line-to-line Isolation - 250 VDC or RMS AC (iCS
910/920 panels), 500 VDC or RMS AC (iCS 930 panel)

50·pin
0.1 in. centers
(2.54 mm)

(Mating connector: 3M 3415·0000 or TI H3·12125)

Input/Output Isolation - 250 VDC or RMS AC (iCS 920
panel), 500 VDC or RMS AC (iCS 930 panel)

Maximum Distance from iSBC Boards
The iCS 910/920/930 panels are shipped with 4-ft. long
cables., With customer provided 50-conductor or,twisted
pair ribbon cable. however. the iCS 910/920/930 panels
can be mounted remote from the iSBC analog or digital
1/0 boards. In electrically quiet environments using
normal iSBC board line driver/receivers. the iCS
910/920/930 panels should be able to operate up to 25 ft.
(7.69m) from the iSBC board.

Physical Characteristics
Width: 36.63 cm (14.65 in.)
Height: 8.13 cm (3.25 in.)
Thickness: 0.24 cm (0.093 in.). iCS 910/920panei
0.32 cm (0.125 in.). iCS 930 panel

3·12

.:::;;;;.:.

iCS 910/920/930
ies 930 - AC Signal Conditioning/Termination Panel,
one 4-ft, 50-conductor ribbon cable with connectors, and
Installation kit below

Electrical Characteristics
Power Requirements
iCS 920 panel- +15V ±5%, 25 mA max ifiSBC 724 or iSBC
732 ±15V power is used for user mounted open circuit
detection, or thermistor bias components. Additional
power must be supplied via +15V terminal block.

Installation kit consisting of RETMA (19" rack) mounting bracket, clear plastic safety cover, labelling strip
with blank gummed labels, hex standoffs and mounting
screws

iCS 920 panel - +5V ±5%, 1.46A max (24 channels high
current drive)
ICS 920 Channel
Conllgurallon

Documentation Supplied

Maximum per Channel Currenl
(Includ.s pullups, LEOs,
Isolalors, drivers)

TTL in
TTL out
Opto·lsolated in
Opto.isolated out
Open collector driver
oulput

23
23
23
41
61

A schematic diagram and assembly diagram are supplied
.
with each iCS 910/920/930 panel.

mA
mA
mA
rnA
rnA.

Reference Manuals
9800800A - iCS 910 Analog Signal Conditioriing/Termination Panel Hardware Reference Manual (NOT SUPPLIED).

Nole: Both iCS 920 and iCS 930 panels have jumpered provision for
externally supplied +5V power via a screw terminal block.

98008D1A - iCS·920 DigitalSignal Conditioning/Termination Panel Hardware Reference Manual (NOT SUPPLIED)

iCS 930 panel - +5V ±5%, 320 mA max. Output AC or DC
channel: 20 mA/chan max; Input AC or DC channel: 12
mA/chan max.

9800802A - iCS 930 AC Signal Conditioning/Termination Panel Hardware Reference Manual (NOT SUPPLIED)

Maximum Power Dissipation
iCS 910 panels - 3 watts with 16 channels analog input
signal conditioning and +15V external compliance voltage
iCS 920 panels - 12 watts with 24 channels each
containing high current driver outputs
iCS 930 panels - 80 watts with 16 channels of AC or DC
output

9800798A - iCS 80'Systems Site Planning and Installatjon Guide (NOT SUPPLIED), but supplied with iCS 80
Industrial Chassis
Reference manuals are shipped with each product only
if designated SUPPLIED (see' above). Manuals may be
ordered from any Intel sales representative, distributor
office or from Intel Literature Department, 3065 Bowers
Avenue, Santa Clara, California 95051.

Underwriters Laboratory (UL) Recognition
The iCS 910/920/930 signal conditioning/termination
panels have been submitted to Underwriters Laboratories
for approval as a UL recognized component under the UL
safety standard for process control equipment, UL 1092.

Installation
Complete instructions for installation and service are
contained in the applicableiCS 910/920/930 Hardware
Reference Manual. Additional system level information
is available in the iCS 80 Systems Site Planning and Installation Guide, including RETMA and NEMA cabinet
mounting, field signals, ground wiring and cooling suggestions.

Environmental Characteristics
Operating Temperature - 0 to 70°C (32°F to 158°F)
Relative Humidity - 0 to 90%, noncondensing

Hardware Supplied
ICS 910 - Analog Signal Conditioning/Terminating
Panel, three 4-ft, 50-conductor flat ribbon cables with
connectors, and Installation kit below
ICS 920 - Digital Signal Conditioning/Termiriation
Panel, one 4-ft, 50-conductor flat ribbon cable with connectors, and installation kit below

Warranty
The iCS 80 Industrial Chassis is warranted to be free
from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of 90 days from date of
shipment.
'

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

iCS 910

Analog signal conditioning/
termination panel

iCS 920

Digital signal conditioning/
termination panel

iCS 930

AC signal conditioning/termination
panel

3·13
. ..:...::-..:::::........:"......

iSBC 941
INDUSTRIAL DIGITAL PROCESSOR
• Compatible with 8041A Universal
Peripheral Interface (UPI·41J,\) sock.ets
such as those provided on I.htel iSBC
569 Intelligent Digital Processor

• Provides measurement and control of
common industrial digital input and
. output signals
.
- Sense change state
- Pulse counting
- Pulse generation
- Period measurement
-. Frequency measurement

• Applications include
- Switch senSing
- Motor speed control
- Stepper motor actuation
- Serial communications

• Off·loads host processor from time·
consuming task of digital 1/0
processing

• 16 programmable 1/0 lines, TTL
compatible

• Simplified command protocol with
MCS 80/85/86 "Master" Processor

• Single + 5V supply

The iSBC 941 Industrial Digital Processor is a 40;'pin DIP device which provides the user with easy-to-use processing of
digital input and output signals desired in many industrial automation environments. Onaof nine digital I/O functions can
be selected.at anyone time for measuring, counting, or controlling up to 16 separate I/O lines. Additional utility
commands allow reading or setting the condition of unused I/O lines. Simplex serial input and output modes can
assemble or disassemble bytes transmitted asynchronously over TTL lines, including insertion and deletion of start/stop
bits. The device has two a-bit, TTL compatible I/O ports.

BLOCK DIAGRAM

PIN CONFIGURATION

Vee
Vee

.. .

CLOCK {

ii6

WI!

SYNC

CO~~~N:~~:~;.
CONTROL

INTERFACE

00-07

{Rii
\Vii
~

Vss

p"-P,, }
8·BITII0

RESET

Vss Voo

PORTS
P20 .. P27

} To, T, TEST INPUTS
.SVN·C

'-----"

3-14

iSBC 941
Stepper motors designed for up to eight
phase control may be controlled directly
or stepper motor translator signals may
be generated ..

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Industrial Digital Processor
Designed to operate as a slave device, the iSBC 941
processor may be requested to implement one of nine
Primary Functions. These Primary functions are subrou·
tines which are stored in program memory of the iSBC
941 device. Each Primary Function has a specific 1/0
task. Available Primary Functions include:
EVENT

Monitors and counts up to eight input
lines for event counting or comparison
to a preset count for each line. Interrupts may be generated or counter can
be read 'on-the-fly' without changing its
state.

FCOUNT

Measures frequency of one of eight
digital inputs over a programmable
period. Inputs may be selected under
user program control or iSBC 941 processor may be requested to automatically scan inputs in sequential order,
update, and hold or interrupt for reading
each 16-bit counter. Input frequencies
up to 18 KHz may be measured.

FREQ

Any of the sixteen UPI processor 1/0 lines that are not
used by a Primary Function are available for general pur·
pose use; e.g., direct status reads or latched digital out·
puts, through the use of Utility Commands.
Commands recognized by the iSBC 941 Industrial Digital
Processor are defined by one of two categories, Control
Commands or Utility Commands. Control Commands
are used to start and stop a Primary Function. Utility
Commands are typically associated with moving a byte of
information or reading the status of the iSBC 941 processor through the COMMANDIDATA Bus Buffer.

Control Commands available are:
ENFLAG -

Enables the iSBC 941 processor to send interrupts via its 1/0 lines to the host processor.

INITPF

Generates up to eight gated frequency
outputs with separately programmable
pulse width and periods and complementary synchronous outputs.

Selects the desired Primary Function and
initializes parameters used by the Primary
Function.

LOOP

Continuously executes the selected Primary
Function at a specific rate.

PERIOD

Measures the period of up to four in·
puts (Sing Ie cycle).

PACIFY

SCAN

Monitors up to 16 input lines for changeof-state and direction of change.
Change-of-state interrupts may be
generated. User can individually disable inputs.

Resets all iSBC 941 processor 1/0 lines to
the input state and clears all control variables.

PAUSE

Commands the iSBC 941 processor to exit
the LOOP or INITPF mode.

SERIN

Enables simplex reception and 8-bit byte
assembling of asynchronously transmitted serial data bits for communications applications. Includes detectionl
deletion of start/stop bits. Baud rates up
to 1200 baud may be programmed.

SEROUT

Enables simplex transmission of asynchronous serial data bits for communications applications. Includes
insertion of start/stop bits. Baud rates
up to 1200 baud may be programmed.

SHOT1

Emulates a gated one-shot pulse generator (edge triggered and retriggerable modules) with programmable delay
and period. Complimentary, synchronous one-shots can be created on
separate output lines, on up to eight
lines.

STEPPER

Utility Commands include:

Generates up to eight programmable
outputs that may be used for control of
stepper motors. Step rate, step count,
and step direction are user defined.

CLRP1
(CLRP2)

Sets (to logic level 0) selected iSBC 941
processor Port 1 (port 2) output lines. All
other lines are unaffected.

ENP11N (ENP2IN)

Enables user-defined mask to inhibit the
writing of'O's by the iSBC 941 processor to
Port 1 (Port 2) input lines. This function is
used by SETP1 (SETP2), CLRP1 (CLRP2),
STEP and LOOP.

IDEN

Requests the identity code of the iSBC 941
processor accessed.

LATCH

Transfers to holding area for reading all eight
counters used by the EVENT Primary Function.

RDEC

Enables host processor to read one of eight
user-specified event accumulators used by
the EVENT Primary Function.

RDFQ

Reads bytes from the iSBC 941 processor's

3·15
c.

iSBC941
first-in-first-out (FIFO) buffer (used by
. SCAN andSEROUT Primary Functions).
R DH R

(5) Enable selected SCAN input lines (Parameter byte)
(enabled in groups of eight)

Enables the host processor to read the contents of the iSBC 941 holding register
specified (used by PULSE, PERIOD, and
EVENT Primary Functions),

RDIDV

Enables the host processor. to read the iSBC
941 processor's input-data-valid (IDV) flags.

RDLC

Enables host processor to read one of eight
user specified EVENT counters previously
stored by LATCH command.

RDP1
(RDP2)

- Reads data byte present at iSBC 941 processor Port 1 (port 2) and sends to host processor.

SETOE

- Sets output enable parameter bits.

(6) Terminate parameter list

(7) Enable iSBC 941 processor inter- (Command byte)
rupt outputs ..
(B) Request execution

- Sets the Time Reference Period scale
factor for value.

WRP1
(WRP2)

- Allows host processor to write to iSBC 941
processor Port 1 (Port 2).

Signal

P1o-P17 B·bit, PORT 1 Quasi·bidirectional I/O lines.
P20 -P27 B-bit, PORT 2 quasi-bidirectional 1/0 lines.
Control can configure P24 as OBF (Output
Buffer Full), P2Sas IBF (Input Buffer Full) to send
interrupt signals to master CPU.

iSBC 941 functions may be implemented with minimum
software overhead required of the host processor. An
easy·to·implement protocol ensures that communica·
tion between the iSBC 941 processor and host CPU is
straightforward and uncomplicated.
Implementing a Primary Function involves simple pro·
gramming; the host processor transmits to the ISBC 941
processor a command byte followed by parameter bytes
(the number of parameter bytes required is dependent
upon the Primary Function selected). For example,to
execute the Primary Function SCAN:

WR .

I/O write input which enables the master CPU
to write data and command words to the iSBC
941 COMMANDIDATA BUS BUFFER.

I/O read input which enables the master CPU
to read data and status words from the COM·
MANDIDATA BUS BUFFER or status register.

Chip select input used to select one iSBC 941
processor out of several connected to a com·
mon data bus.

Address input used by the master processor to
indicate whether byte transfer is data or com·
mand.

To, T1

Input pins used by various iSBC 941 processor
routines.

x1, X2

Inputs for a crystal, LC or an external timing
signal to determine the internal oscillator
frequency.

SYNC

Output signal which occurs once per iSBC 941
instruction cycle. SYNC can be used as a
strobe for external circuitry.

RESET

Input used to reset status flip·flops and to
prepare iSBC 941 processor to receive com·
mands.

(Command byte)

(2) Select SCAN as Primary Function (Parameter byte)
and select internal or external time
reference
(3) Program Time Reference Period (Parameter byte)

(scan rate - this byte is required
only if internal time reference was
selected in (2) )
(4) Define return message format

Description

Three·state, bidirectional COMMANDIDATA
BUS BUFFER lines used to interface the iSBC
941 processor to an B·bit master system data
bus.

Simple Command Protocol

(1 ) Initialize iSBC 941 processor

(Command byte)

PIN DESCRIPTION

- Sets (to logic level 1) selected iSBC 941
SETP1
(SETP2)
processor Port 1 (Port 2) output lines .. All
other lines are unaffected.
SETSF

(Command byte)

(Parameter byte)

3-16

Vee

+5V power supply pin.

V DD

+ 5V during normal operation.

Vss

Circuit ground potential.

Connect to +5V through 10K-ohm pu II-up
resistor

iSBC 941
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
'COMMENT: Stresses above those listed under "Absolute Maximum
Ratings" may cause permanent damage to the device. This Is a stress
rating only and functional operation of the device at these or any other
conditions above those indicated in the operational sections of this

Absolute Maximum Ratings*
Ambient Temperature Under Bias ......... O·C to 70·C
Storage Temperature ............. - 65·C to + 150·C
Voltage on Any Pin With Respect
to Ground .......................... 0.5V to + 7V
Power Dissipation ......................... 1.5 Watt

specification is not implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating con-

ditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.

D.C. and Operating Characteristics
TA=O·C to 70·C, vss=ov, vcc= +5V ±5%
Min.

Max.

Unit

V il

Input Low Voltage (All Except X t , X2)

-0.5

0.8

VIHl

Input High Voltage (All except Xl, X2, RESET, WR, CS)

2.0

Vcc

VIH2

Input High Voltage (Xl, X2, RESET)

3.0

Vcc

V IH3

Input High Voltage (WR, CS)

2.2 .

Vee

VOL1

Output Low Voltage (D 2-D 7, Sync)

0.45

VOl2

Output Low Voltage (All Other Outputs Except Prog) .

0.45

IOl= 1.6 rnA

V OHl

Output High Voltage (Do-D7)

2.4

IOH= - 400,..A

V OH2

Output High Voltage (All Other Outputs)

2.4

IOH= -50,..A

III

Input Leakage Current (To, T l , RD, WR, CS, A o,)

± 10

,..A

VSS~VIN~Vee

loz

Output Leakage Current (Do-D7' High Z State)

± 10

,..A

V ss + 0.45~VIN~Vee

ILil

Low Input Load Current (P lO P17, P2O P27)

0.5

rnA

V ll =0.8V

Ill2

Low Input Load Current (RESET, SS)

0.2

rnA

V ll =0.8V

100

Voo Supply Current

rnA

lee+ 100

Total Supply Current

125

rnA

Max.

Unit

Symbol

Parameter

Test Conditions

IOL=2.0 rnA

A.C. Characteristics
TA=O·C to 70·C, vss=ov, vcc=voo= +5V ±5%
DBB READ
Symbol'

Parameter

Min.

Test Conditions

tAR

CS, AD Setup to RD~

tRA

CS, AD Hold After RDt

tRR

RD Pulse Width

tAD

CS, AD to Data Out Delay

225

C l =150pF

tRO

RD~

225

C l =150pF

tROF

RDt to Data Float Delay

'.100

:.-

250

to Data Out Delay

tRY

Recovery Time Between Reads And/Or Write

300

tey

Cycle Time

2.5

,..s

Min.

Max.

Unit

DBB WRITE
Symbol

Parameter

tAw

CS, AD Setup to WR~

tWA

CS, AD Hold After WRt

tww

WR Pulse Width

tow

Data Setup to WRt

150

two

Data Hold Aftert WRt

3·17

250

Test Conditions

iSBC 941
1. READ OPERATION-DATA BUS BUFFER REGISTER.

C"S OR AO

-"'-1 .

IRV

'RR

-tRA-

\
_f

(SVSTEM'S
ADDRESS BUS)

(READ CONTROL!

tAO

_IOF

2. WRITE OPERATION-DATA BUS BUFFER REGISTER.

~ORAO =>i~----~D<

" "·l r
\{

AOOA ESS BUS)

"·~·n-'w.J

, . - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - (WRITE CONTROL)

~'ow~
DATA BUS
DATA
)
ONPUT,, _ _ _ _ _
M_AV_C_"_AN_G_' _ _---J

(SYSTEM'S

-'wo

_OATAVAlIO_W

DATA
V\_______MA_V_C_"A_N_G_'
_ _ __

Reference Manuals
9803077 - iSBC 941 Industrial Digital Processor User's
Guide (NOT SUPPLIED)

if deSignated SUPPLIED (see above). Manuals may be
ordered from any Intel sales representative, distributor
office or from Intel Literature Department, 3065 Bowers
Avenue, Santa Clara, California 95051.

Reference manuals are shipped with each product only

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

SBe 941

Industrial Digital Processor

3·18

Run- Time Systems
Software

iRMX 80
REAL·TIME MULTI·TASKING EXECUTIVE
• Small, efficient nucleus

• Designed for Intel® iSBC 80/10B,
iSBC 80/20-4, 80/24 and iSBC 80/30
based applications

• Simple user task interface
• Comprehensive 1/0 support

• Completely user configurable through
interactive configuration utility

• Library of flexible modules
• Structured application environment

• Priority-oriented scheduling

The Intel® iRMX 80 Real-Time Multi-Tasking Executive is an easy-to-use, sophisticated software system
which operates on Intel's 8-bit single board computers and System 80 packaged systems. The iRMX 80
executive provides real-time facilities for priority-based resource allocation, intertask communications,
standard 1/0 device control, and other features suitable for many applications including medical
electronics, industrial process control,instrumentation, test systems, and data communications. The
iRMX 80 package provides the framework that allows system developers to begin immediate application
software implementation. The implementation and integration process is aided by the Interactive Configuration Utility (ICU80) program, a configuration tool which accelerates the development process.

Figure 1_ Structure Diagram

4-1

iRMX 80
time facilities such as intertask communication
and control are included.

FEATURES
The iRMX 80 executive provides users of Intel
Single Board Computers simple, easy-to·use tools
for creating a wide range of application systems.
The most popular features of the iRMX 80 are:

Priority-Oriented Scheduler·
The iRMX 80 scheduler insures that the highest
priority task which is ready to execute is given
system control, allowing the application system
to be responsive to its external world.

Structured Environment
The iRMX 80 executive provides a consistent
structure, as diagrammed in Figure 1, from application to application thus allowing experience
gained on one system to be easily transferred to
others. Often, entire programs may be used in
multiple applications.

Comprehensive 1/0 Support
The iRMX 80 libraries contain support for a wide
range of 1/0 boards supplied by Intel, simplifying
the addition of peripherals to an application
system. For applications which require custom
boards the iRMX 80 device handler philosophy
allows easy addition of user written handlers.

Simple Interface
The iRMX 80 executive provides a simple, straightforward program interface for user programs. This
interface is consistent throughout the range of
facilities offered, reducing the number of con·
cepts which must be learned.

Interactively Configurable
The Interactive Configuration Utility (ICU80) pro·
gram provides the user with an easy·to·use method of configuration of iRMX 80-based applications. Responding to questions from the ICU80
program running on the Intellec Microcomputer
Development System, the user tailors theapplication system by selecting modules, e.g., nucleus
flexibility as shown in Figure 2, from the wide
variety of iRMX 80 facilities. The resultant system
contains only the modules necessary for its use,
allowing the iRMX 80 executive to fit a wide range
of applications from small special purpose dedicated applications to large general purpose sys·
tems.

Library Modules
The iRMX 80 executive is constructed in a thoroughly modular manner with the full range of facilities being offered in multiple library modules, see
Table 1, allowing easy selection of the exact facilities required.

Small Nucleus
The iRMX 80 nucleus provides a small, efficient
foundation upon which application systems may
be easily built. A wide range of multi-tasking, real·

Figure 2_ Configuration Flexibility Provides Application Freedom. The iRMX 80 executive allows you the
freedom to choose from a wide range of iSBCfamily processors and peripherals upon which
your application may be built. It allows you to break the software "chain" which ties your application to a single processor type and thereby gain application freedom.

4-2

AFN-01553A

iRMX 80
Board Technological Support

iRMX 80 DFS allows for either Intellec Development Systems, ISIS-II compatible media format, or
a user specified format. iRMX 80 DFS offers the
following services in an ISIS-II compatible media
format:

The iRMX 80 executive provides support for a
range of processor technologies from the 8080based iSBC 80/10 Single Board Computer to the
8085-based iSBC 80/30 Single Board Computer.
Applications are offered an easy upgrade path
with the iRMX 80 executive which allows greater
pricelperformance to be achieved without expensive software modification.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Extensive Debugging Aids
The iRMX 80 executive provides two user oriented, interactive software debugging aids. The
debuggers allow memory examination and modification, execution breakpoints, and automatic
stack overflow monitoring. These powerful aids
allow simplified task debugging and faster application system development.

OPEN a file for processing
READ data from a file
WRITE data to a file
SEEK to a specific location within a file
CLOSE a file to further processing
RENAME a file
DELETE a file.

For those applications which require unique
media formats the iRMX 80 executive offers a
level of processing which allows complete user
flexibility in formatting data. The services offered
are:

The various facilities offered by the iRMX 80 executive are provided as independent library modules, thus allowing simple inclusion or exclusion,
depending on the user's specific requirements.
These facilities are described below.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Nucleus

Terminal Handler

The iRMX 80 executive provides nuclei for operation on various iSBC single board computers. The
nuclei provide real-time scheduling, interrupt
handling, intertask communications, and task
control. The services offered are:

The iRMX 80 terminal handler provides a data path
between a console device (CRT or TTY) and user
tasks. Communications between task and device
are affected by using the nucleus services SEND
and WAIT. Two versions of the terminal handler
are offered:

FACILITIES

• Send a message from one task to another
• Accept a message from another task
• Wait for a message to be transmitted from
another task
• Transmit a special interrupt message to a task
• Suspend execution of a task temporarily
• Continue execution of a previously suspended
task.

SEEK to a specific track
READ a sector
WRITE a sector
FORMAT a track
RECALIBRATE to Track 0
VERIFY a sector
DELETE a sector.

1) Full Terminal Handler - The full terminal handier has a built-in interface to the debugger. It
also provides for:
• Correction of data previously input
• Automatic buffering of data prior to a read request
• Priority output path which allows "emergency" messages to bypass any other messages which may be queued for output
• Automatic baud rate search to determine
communications terminal speed.

Disk File System
The iRMX 80 Disk File System (DFS) provides for
the filing and retrieving of data using disks. The

Table 1. iRMX 80 Memory Requirement
Memory Requirements"
(Bytes)
Module

Nucleus

Full
Terminal
Handler

Minimal
Terminal
Handler

Free
Disk
Space
File
Manager System

Minimum Development System
Requirements
Disk
1/0

Analog
1/0

Bootstrap
Loader &
Initializer

Operating
Syslem

Memory
Size
(Bytes)

Minimum
Diskette
Drives

ISIS-II

64K RAM

PROM'

600

5.5K

700

800

600

RAM

250

950

120

250

1.6K

100

900

"Indicates amount of code which can be configured
•• All figures are approximate.

AFN·01553A

PROM .

4-3

iRMX 80
2) Minimal Terminal Handler - The minimalter'
minal handler provides a limited feature version of the full terminal handler for memory
space critical applications. The minimal terminal handler provides for correction of data previously input.

set of questions on the terminal of the Intellec
Development System and elicits the configuration
information about the application system, e.g.
CPU TYPE: 80130, or TERM HNDLER: FULL. After
describing the application system configuration
the ICU80 program will initiate the housekeeping
chores (linking and locating), thereby supplying
the target iRMX 80 application. The result is the
rapid development of the target iRMX 80 application system.

Free Space Manager
The iRMX 80 free space manager provides the
capability of dynamically allocating RAM memory
based upon user requests. Requests may be made
for any size memory blocks and will be accommodated based on memory availability. The free
space manager services are:

The iRMX 80 generation process allows application programs written in PUM-80, FORTRAN-80,
BASIC-80, or 8080/8085 Assembly Language to be
merged with the specific iRMX 80 modules desired,see Figure 3. The system may then be debugged using Intel's sophisticated In-Circuit Emulation (ICE™) products oriRMX 80 debugger. The
final application system is then available for
either PROM or disk-based systems.

• Request memory
• Release memory.

Analog Handlers
The iRMX 80 analog handlers provide a convenient
mechanism for obtaining and transmitting analog
values between user tasks and Intel's iSBC 711,
724 and 732 Analog Boards. The analog handlers
offer a full range of services including:
.
•
•
•
•
•

Repetitive channel input
Sequential channellsingle gain input
Sequential channellvariable gain input
Random channellvariablegain input
Random channel output.

The input and output modules are individually
configurable allowing greater application flexibility.

Bootstrap Loader
The iRMX 80 bootstrap loader allows those applications using disk to create essentially, a "soft"
system that may be loaded into RAM from disk
rather than being permanently PROM reside.nt.
This provides greater application flexibility in
building and supporting disk-based systems.
iRMX 80
LIBRARY

Interactive Configuration
The Interactive Configuration Utility (ICU80) program provides relief from the. burden of manually
creating hardware configuration tables and combining selected software components. Using the
environment information, the iRMX 80 nucleus effectively controls and orchestrates the appl ication system.

l:I
Wo
DEBUG

The iRMX 80 package provides two avenues for
configuring applications; an effective macro
mechanism allbws specific detail manipulation of
structures for the experienced iRMX 80 user or,
secondly, an easy-to-use interactive ICU80utility
program generates the structures automatically.
This latter program displays a clear and concise

APPLICATION
SYSTEM

EXECUTE

V=>C
Figure 3. The System Generation Process

4-4

AFN·01553A

iRMX 80
Minimal Terminal Handler
Free Space Manager
Disk File System
Analog Handlers
Debuggers
Bootstrap Loader
Configuration Macros
Interactive Configuration Utility Program
(ICU80)
Problem Reports
Registration Card
Reference Manuals

SPECIFICATIONS
Supported Hardware
SINGLE BOARD COMPUTERS
iSBC 80/10A
iSBC 80/10B
iSBC 80/20
iSBC 80/20-4
iSBC 80/24
iSBC 80/30
MASS STORAGE CONTROLLERS
iSBC 201
iSBC 202
iSBC 204
iSBC 206

Reference Manuals
9800522 - iRMX 80 User's Guide (SUPPLIED)
9803087 - iRMX 80 Installation Instructions (SUPPLIED)
142603 - iRMX 80 Interactive Configuration Utility User's Guide (SUPPLIED)

ANALOG BOARDS
iSBC 711A
iSBC 711
iSBC 724A
iSBC 724
iSBC 732A
iSBC 732

Reference Manuals are shipped with each product
only if designated SUPPLIED (see above). Manuals
may be ordered from any Intel sales representative, distributor office or from Intel Literature
Department, 3065 Bowers Avenue, Santa Clara,
California 95051.

iRMX 80 Executive Shipping Package
Single and double density diskettes containing:
iSBC 80/10,80/20, and 80/30 Nuclei
Terminal Handler

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

RMX 80

Real-Time Multi-Tasking
Executive

AFN·01553A

4-5

iSBC S01
FORTRAN·SO RUN·TIME PACKAGE
FOR RMXlSO SYSTEMS
• Includes FORTRAN-80 terminal I/O via
RMXl80 mini or full Terminal Handler

• The ideal iSBC 80 Single Board
Computer run·time environment for
programs written in Intel's ANSI
FORTRAN 77 standard compiler

• Software floating point libraries are
compatible with Intel floating point
standard

• Fully compatible with Intel's RMXl80
Real·Time Multitasking Executive
software

• iSBC 310 High Speed Math Unit driver~
allow acceleration of floating point
operations

• Includes FORTRAN·80 disk I/O via
RMXl80 Disk File System

The iSBC 801 FORTRAN-80 Run-Time Package is a complete, ready-to-use set of linkable object modules which are
fully compatible with RMX/80systems_ The modules, when combined with the FORTRAN-80 coded application, provide the appropriate interfaces to the disk file system and terminal handler of RMX/80_ The FORTRAN-80 application,
in addition to usage of the disk file or terminal 1/0, can take advantage of the software floating point routines_ In those
cases where accelerated operations are necessary, the FORTRAN-80 Run-Time Package provides the necessary interface to use the iSBC 310 High Speed Math Unit.

4-6

iSBC801
Direct communication with the mini or full Terminal
Handler and Disk File System by using the formatted 1/0
facility in FORTRAN·80 coded application tasks. The
user is able to specify the external format of data (inte·
ger, floating point, and character) as either input or out·
put on those devices. The universality of formatted data
statements In FORTRAN·80 facilitates storing relevant
data for later retrieval, as well as summary display of the
information. For example, to read two variables:

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The FORTRAN·80 Run·Time Package is a complete,
ready·to·use set of linkable object module libraries on
both a single and a double density diskette. it can be
combined with the RMX/80 modules and user·supplied
application software modules on the Intellec Develop·
ment System. The FORTRAN·80 Run·Time Package for
RMX/80 systems is the ideal environment for executing
the FORTRAN·80 code in an iSSC 80 system. It provides
full data formatting and storage capability through the
RMX/80 Disk File System. The package allows utiliza·
tion of the RMX/80 Terminal Handler for entry and dis·
play of information on a TIV or CRT. In addition, the
FORTRAN·80 Run·Time Package facilitates effective
use of the iSSC 310 High Speed Math board to optimize
floating pOint calculations.

READ (5,88) X, V
88 FORMAT (F10.3, F6.2)
The run·time software support modules are built for
selective utilization at link time with FORTRAN·80 coded
tasks. Selective linking can be profitably used to Insure
that only those modules which exactly match
FORTRAN·80 application requirements are included in
the run time systems. This insures that the minimum
memory is required in the final system.

Features and Benefits of the FORTRAN·80
Run·Time Package

Software modules provided with the package are con·
veniently linkable with the RMX/80 library modules. This
allows-use of the right software tool (whether 8080/8085
Assembler, PUM·80, or FORTRAN·80) for the right job.
The user is also able to combine all the software
elements into a highly effective RMX/80 based applica·

The modules included on the diskettes are readily
usable by linking with the user·coded FORTRAN·80 reo
locatable object modules for operation in the RMX/80
environment. Advantages forthe iSSC user include:

LINK

AND
LOCATE

The RMX/BO executive based environment is specified by configuration parameters supplied at the time of system linking. These parameters define ex- .
pected system characteristics and the relationship of FORTRAN·BO coded tasks to other RMX/BO modules. The linker output is the object code which
may be placed in PROM or loaded into RAM via the bootstrap loader. Configuration parameters are discussed in detail in the RMX/80 User's Guide,
Chapter 3.

Figure 1. Configuration Flow Diagram

4·7
~-.-

iSBC 801
Description and Capabilities Summary

tion. FORTRAN routines can be interfaced to PUM or
assembler coded routines so portable software can be
run on all RMX/SO based systems.

To run FORTRAN·SO programs under RMX/SO, libraries
are selected from two packages: the RMX/SO Real-Time
Multitasking Executive and the FORTRAN-SO Run-Time
Package for RMX/SO systems. The FORTRAN-SO RunTime· Package provides libraries to support
FORTRAN-SO coded programs running under RMX/SO:

Application writing with the floating point algorithms of
FORTRAN-SO is enhanced thru the accuracy insured by
FORTRAN-SO adherence to the Intel Floating POint Standard. Accuracy is insured thru software; it can beduplicated and accelerated thru the interface modules for the
iSBC 310 High Speed Math Board. The iSBC customer
now can effectively perform high speed, accurate computations with pre-coded and debugged mathematical
functions.

FSORMX.LlB

FORTRAN-SO input/output formatting
and interface routines for the RMX/SO
environment.

FPSFTX.LlB

Software floating point arithmetic
routines for the RMXlSOenvironment.

FPHRDX.LlB Software interface routines for the
iSBC 310 facilitate floating point
calculations in the RMXlSO environment
of an iSBC SO/20 or iSBC SO/30 hardware
based sy"tem. FPHX10.LlB is another
libm,y provided specifically for the
iSBC SO/1 0 based RMX/SO system.

Generation Considerations
The FORTRAN-SO Run-Time Package consists of several
relocatable library modules. The modules are. configurable with the RMX/SO supplied library modules and user
coded FORTRAN-SO, PUM-SO or SOSO/SOS5 system.
Through the proper linkage and location of the appropriate modules, a complete software solution for the target
iSBC SO system can be generated. This software then
can be quickly loaded into the target iSBC SO system
through ICE-SO or S5 during debug. The final application
code is placed in EPROM or loaded directly from disk
via the RMX/SO boostrap loader.
.

SPECI FICATIO NS

Reference Manuals

Generation Environment

The following material is shipped with the product:
#9S004S0 ISIS-II FORTRAN-SO Compiler Operator's
Manual

Intellee Microcomputer Development System with
ISIS-II Diskette Operating System.
Minimum of 64K bytes RAM memory.
Dual Floppy Diskettes.
RMX/SO Real-Time Multi-Tasking Executive library
diskettes.
FORTRAN-SO (V2.0 or later) Compiler diskettes.

Additional information for FORTRAN-SO and RMX/SO
can be found in the
#9S004S1 FORTRAN·SO Programming Manual
#9S00522 RMX/SO User's Guide
#9S00547 SOSO/SOS5 FORTRAN-SO Reference Card

Compatible Run-Time Hardware

Additional manuals may be ordered from any Intel sales
representative, distributor office or from I ntel Literature
Department, 3065 Bowers Avenue, Santa Clara, California 95051.

Single Board Computers:
iSBCSO/10A
iSBC S0/20-4
iSBCSO/30
Disk Controllers:
iSBC 202
iSBC 204
iSBC 206
Other:
iSBC 310 Math Unit

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number Description
SBC SOl

FORTRAN-SO Run-Time Package for
RMX/SO Systems

FORTRAN-SO Run·Time Package is copyrighted and
licensed by Intel Corporation. It can be purchased only
under a required license agreement with Intel. Software
may be developed with the FORTRAN-SO Run-Time
Package to run on Intel RMX/SO based systems.

Physical Characteristics
Product distributed on both a single and a double
density diskette.

4-8

iSBC 802
BASIC·80 CONFIGURABLE RMX/80
DISK BASED INTERPRETER
• Resident BASIC interpreter for iSBC 80
Single Board Computers

• Totally compatible with Intel's RMXl80
Real·Time Multitasking Executive
software

• Sequential or random access diskette
storage for programs and data

• Exceeds the ANS X3.60·1978 and the
ECMA·55 minimal BASIC standard

• Single and double precision software
floatin'g point arithmetic

• Interpreter supplied in two forms:
- A i'elocatable module for tailoring
systems to exact requirements

• Direct port 110 instructions for special
input and output requirem~nts

• Interface upto 25 user defined software
functions written in 8080/8085
assembler, PLlM·80, or FORTRAN·80

A predefined version which
incorporates the RMXl80 Nucleus,
Terminal Handler, and Disk File
System for. an iSBC 80/30 and
iSBC 204 based system

The iSBC S02 BASIC·SO Configurable RMX/SO Disk Based Interpreter has acomplete ready·to·use set of linkable object
modules which are fully compatible with Intel's RMX/SO Real·Time Multitasking Executive Software, The modules
combine with RMX/SO to provide a BASIC·SO interactive interpreter system, BASIC·SO programs may be created,
stored, and interpreted on the iSBC SO based system. These programs may use the disk file and terminal 110, software
floating point, or interface to other routines provided by the user to tailor the BASIC·SO system.

4·9

iSBC 802
as the relocatable BASIC-80 modules, 2) a set of bootstrap PROMs that will load the executable RMXSYS
module from the diskette into the iSBC main memory,
and 3) a cable that connects the iSBC 204 Floppy Diskette Controller to the bulkhead connector on any Intellec diskette.drive chassis. The predefined system offers
an "instant-on" software capability for the user's supplied hardware system consisting of the following
items:

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The RMX BASIC-80 Interpreter provides a high level language interpreter with extended disk capabilities which
operates under the RMX/80 Real-Time Multitasking Executive and translates BASIC-80 source programs into an
internally executable form. This universally accepted language is designed for the OEM who requires a pass
through programming language suitable for usage by
both beginners and experienced programmers. BASIC80 offers users an expedient method of utilizing the
powerful computational and input/output capabilities of
an iSBC 80 microcomputer system and applying them to
solving a wide range of application problems;The BASIC80 language has a rich complement of statements, functions, and commands to program applications requiring a
full range of 1) string manipulation and disk I/O for data
processing, 2) single and double precision floating point
and array handling for numeric analysis, or 3) port I/O with
mask operations controlled through bitwise Boolean logical operators. In addition, Intel's BASIC-80 meets and
exceeds the requirements of ANS X3.60-1978 Minimal
BASIC Standard and, similarly, the Standard ECMA-55
Minimal BASIC.

Dual Solution
The iSBC802 provides BASIC-80 to the OEM in two
forms. First, the product is supplied as a set of linkable
object modules on both a single and a double density
diskette which can readily be combined with RMX/80
library and user application modules. The Intellec Development System is used to form a complete software
solution for the iSBC 80 based system from this configurable version. Second, for users who want an "instanton" BASIC system and have no need to add additional
software routines for their end product, a predefined
BASIC-80 software system has been included in the
iSBC 802. The predefined system inCludes 1) the
RMX/80 and BASIC-80 software modules configured into an executable object module (RMXSYS) which is supplied on the same single and double density diskettes

iSBC 80/30 Single Board Computer
iSBC 204 Universal Flexible Diskette Controller
32K bytes additional RAM memory (either iSBC 032 or
two iSBC 016s)
Compatible teletypewriter terminal
Compatible diskette drives

RMXl80 BASIC·80
FEATURES AND BENEFITS
Meets New Industry Standard
BASIC-80 provides the OEM and end-user with a resident
programming language for the iSBC 80/10A, iSBC 80/20,
iSBC 80/20-4, or iSBC 80/30 based systems. A desirable
and cost effective language feature is its PROM or disk
resident capability. BASIC-80 also complies with an industry standard that defines the Minimal BASIC language
specification and provides a level of confidence and
structure not previously available to the OEM with BASIC
interpreters. Since Intel's BASIC-80 meets this standard,
the user can be assured of a maximum amount of compatibility with other BASIC interpreters.

Major Features of ANS X3.60·1978 Include:
Constants and Variables-The user can describe and
manipulate constants and variables in a form most suited
to the application. The numeric expression can be constructed from variables, numeric constants, and function
references. The string expression is composed of a
string variable or a string constant.
Numeric Functions-Commonly used single precision
scientific numeric functions are provided for cosine, sine,

The RMX/80 based environment is specified by configuration parameters supplied at the time of system linking. These parameters define expected system
characteristics and the relationship of the BASIC-BO tasks to other RMXfBO modules. The linker output is the obiect code which may be placed in EPROM or
loaded into RAM via the bootstrap loader. Configuration parameters are discussed in detail in the RMX/80 User's Guide, Chapter3.

Figure 1. Configuration Flow Diagram

4·10

iSBC 802
tangent, arctangent, square root, exponentiation, abso·
lute value, integer, sign of a number, log, and random
number generation. In addition, RANDOMIZE can be used
to override the predefined pseudo·random number
values. All underflow and overflow conditions are recog·
nized and reported in a consistent and defined manner.
Program Control and Sequencing-Specific program
control and the sequencing of statement execution is
provided.

GENERATION CONSIDERATIONS
Generation of Configurable Version
The configurable portion of the iSBC 802 BASIC·80 pack·
age consists of several relocatable library modules.
These modules are configurable with the appropriate
RMX/80 library routines (Minimal Terminal Handler, Nu·
cleus, Disk File System and Loader) and the other appli·
cation tasks to form a full system. Through the proper
linkage and location of the appropriate modules, a com·
plete software solution for the iSBC 80 system can be
generated. This software then can be quickly loaded into
the iSBC 80 system through ICE 80 or 85 during debug.
The final application code is placed in EPROM or loaded
directly from disk via the RMXlBO bootstrap loader.

Assigned Variable Values-Variables can be assigned
values by the use of DATA statements which can be
READ and manipulated through the RESTORE statement.
Custom Functions-The user can defin'e custom func·
tions for use during program execution.
Indexed Arrays-Arrays can be indexed starting with 0 or
1 and the array's size is established through a dimension
(DIM) statement.
Interactive'I/O-Program directed prompts can be sent to
the terminal through the INPUT statement in addition to
accepting input data values. Effective tabular output is
accomplished through the PRINT statement which will
cause the transmission of a character string to an ex·
ternal device.

DESCRIPTION AND CAPABILITIES
SUMMARY
Configurable Version
To create a tailored BASIC·80 System for an iSBC BO
based product, libraries are selected from two packages:
the RMXlBO Real·Time Multitasking Executive and the
BASIC·BO Conflgurable RMXlBO Disk Based Interpreter
package. The BASIC·BO Configurable RMX/80 Disk Based
Interpreter package provides the following files for use
with RMXl80 (Version 1.3 and above).

EXTENSION BEYOND
INDUSTRY STANDARD
Intel's BASIC·80 has enhancements and extensions
beyond the standard. These include the following:
PROM Storage-BASIC·80 interpreter and program
source can be stored In PROM and then executed at sys·
tem startup. This allows users to take advantage of spe·
cial routines they have written in other languages, PUM·
80, FORTRAN·80, or 8080/8085 Assembler.
Floating Point Standardization-The OEM can code float·
ing pOint algorithms in BASIC·80 because the accuracy is
insured by the BASIC·80 interpreter's adherence to the
Intel Floating Point Standard. Single precision is accu·
rate to a maximum value 3.40282E+38 and double preci·
sion is accurate to a maximum value of 1.79769313486231
D + 308 for the utmost in creditability for scientific and
mathematical computation.
File Management Statements-Abundant file managing
statements aid in the orderly usage of programs and data
stored on disk files.
Direct Port I/O-Communicate directly to the 1/0 ports of
the iSBC product line through the byte oriented INP and
OUT instructions. Use the WAIT statement to mask in·
puts from a port until the indicated bit pattern appears.
Specific memory locations can be examined with the
PEEK statement or modified via the POKE statement.

BASIC.L1B

Necessary modules for linkage with
RMX/80

BOOPS.ASM

"Include" source file for BASIC·BO
options related to the creation of a
tailored system

BASCM.ASM

The macro assembler source for the
Configuration Module used for
RMXIBO

BOMEM.ASM

Module to describe the memory allo·
cation for the BASIC·80 task

BOOTCM.ASM

Assembler source for the Configura·
tion Module used by the bootstrap
loader

BOBMEM.ASM

Module to describe the memory allo·
cation for the system to the boot·
strap loader

Predefined Version
The following modules are related to the predefined
BASIC·80 System which can be loaded via the supplied
bootstrap loader.

Formatted Output-Valuable output formatting of data
can be accomplished through the PRINT USING format·
ting characters, i.e. asterisk (0) fill, floating dollar sign ($),
leading or trailing sign (+, -), comma (,), insertion and
scientific notation (exponent display).
Enhanced Interactive Programming-Interactive pro·
gramming is enhanced through easy to use source line
modification commands. Program modules stored on
disk can be readily MERGED with statements in memory.

4·11

RMXSYS

Predefined BASIC·80 System soft·
ware configured, linked, and located
to support the required configuration

BOBOOT

Exact copy of the bootstrap loader as
supplied on the ROMs for the prede·
fined system

iSBC 802
SPECIFICATIONS

Physical Characteristics

Configurable Version Generation Requirements

Product distributed on both a single and double density
diskette. Each diskette contains both the modules for
configuring a tailored system and the predefined soft·
ware system.

Intellec® Microcomputer Development System with ISIS·
II Diskette Operating System
Minimum of 48K bytes RAM memory

Two ROMs which contain the bootstrap loader.

Dual Floppy Diskettes

One cable for the predefined system which provides a
connection from the iSBC 204 to the user's Intellec
Diskette Drive Chassis (MDS DDS, MDS DDR, and MDS
2DS, MDS 710, MDS 720, MDS 730).

RMX/80 Real·Time Multitasking Executive library disk·
ettes (Version 1.3 and above)

Compatible Run-Time Hardware

Reference Manuals
Single Board Computers
iSBC80/10A
iSBC BO/20·4
iSBCBO/30

The following material is shipped with the product:
980075B
9B00774

Reference manuals are shipped with each product only if
designated SUPPLIED (see above). Manuals may be or·
dered from any Intel sales representative, distributor
office or from Intel Literature Department, 3065 Bowers
Avenue, Santa Clara, California 95051.

Disk Controllers
iSBC 202
iSBC 204
iSBC 206

Predefined Versiol1Generation Requirements
No system generation is required as the software system
has been predefined to execute in the run·time environ·
ment specified below:
iSBCBO/30
iSBC 204 disk controller
Additional 32K bytes memory (either iSBC 032 or two
iSBC 016 memory boards)
Compatible Intellec diskette drives and cable (cable
supplied with iSBC 802)
RS232C compatible terminal

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number
SBC802

BASIC·BO Reference Manual (SUPPLIED)
BASIC·80 Pocket Reference (SUPPLIED)

Description
BASIC·BO Configurable RMX/BO
Disk Based Interpreter

BASIC·80 Configurable RMX/BO Disk Based Interpreter is
copyrighted and licensed by Intel Corporation. It is avail·
able only under a license agreement with Intel. Software
may be developed with the BASIC·BO to run on Intel
RMX/80 based systems.

4·12

iRMX86
OPERATING SYSTEM
• Structured application environment

•• Real~time priority-oriented scheduling

• User configurable

• Powerful error management

• User extensible

• Interactive system debugger

• PROM or RAM based

• Comprehensive 1/.0 system

• Object-oriented nu.cleus

• Extensive human interface

The Intel® iRMX 86 Real-Time Operating System is an easy-to-use, sophisticated software system Which
operates on Intel iSBC 86/12 b.oards and user iAPX 86 (8086)-based boards. TheiRMX 86 Operating.System
extends the iAPX 86 (8086) arch(tecturEl, providing a structured, .efficient environment for many applications, including process contro·i, intelligent.terminals, office systems, medical electronics, and data com.
munications.

iRMX 86 ™ Operating SystelTiLayers

4-13

iRMX 86

facilities being offered in library modules, allowing easy selection of the exact features required.
Overhead for unused facilities is then eliminated.

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Services provided by the iRMX 86 Operating System include facilities for executing programs concurrently, sharing resources and information, servicing asynchronous events, and interactively
controlling system resources and utilities. In addition, the iRMX 86 Operating System provides all
major real-time facilities including priority-based
system resource allocation; the means to concurrently monitor and control multiple external
events; real-time clock control; interrupt management and task dispatching. The iRMX 86 Operating System contains the following modules: a
Nucleus, a device independent Input/Output Subsystem, a Human Interface Subsystem with command language interpreter and ASCII console interface, a Terminal Handler, and an interactive
object'oriented Debugging Subsystem.
Because the modules and services provided by
the operating system are user selectable, application-specific operating systems can be created by
iRMX 86 users. The iRMX 86 Operating System
thus eliminates the need for custom operating
system design and hence reduces development
time, cost and risk.

USER EXTENSIBLE
The iRMX 86 Operating System provides a framework in which to extend the system and have
these extensions look like facilities provided by
Intel. These extensions include not only the abil~
ity to add custom system calls, but also the ability
to add operating system data structures. Check'
out of these extensions is easily accomplished by
using the Debugging Subsystem since extensions
become an integral part of the operating system.
Because the operating system is designed for
user extensibility, the extensions can be 'added in
a symmetric manner, resulting in a homogeneous
customized operating system.
EPROM OR RAM BASED
The iRMX 86 system can be EPROM resident or
loaded from a mass storage device into RAM, depending upon application requirements. Being
able to place all of the software in EPROM offers
two benefits. First, if the application is in a harsh
environment, mass storage devices cannot be
used because of the danger of contamination.
Second, if the application is small, the expense
and overhead of mass storage devices is eliminated.

Feature Overview
The iRMX 86 Operating System provides users of
the iAPX 86 (8086) simple, easy-to-use to'olsfor
creating a wide range of application systems. The
most important features of the iRMX 86 Operating
System are:

Nucleus"
OBJECT-ORIENTED NUCLEUS
The iRMX 86 Nucleus provides a foundation upon
which a variety of application systems can be
built. Object-oriented architecture provides a symmetric interface for' application programs and
operating system ,extensions. Objects provide
. facilities including multiprogramming" mUltitasking; critical section management, extensive taskto-task communication and control.

STRUCTURED APPLICATION ENVIRONMENT
The iRMX 86 Operating System provides a consi!;ltent structure from application to application,
thus allow,ingexperience gained on one system to
be easily transferred to others. Often, entire programs may be ported from one application to
ano.ther.
USER CONFIGURABLE

REAL-TIME PRIORITY-ORIENTED SCHEDULER

iRMX 86·basedapplications can use a wide range
of facilities, selecting only those which meet the
specific requirements of the application system. ,
The resultant system contains only the modules
necessary for its use, allowing the IRMX 86 Operating System to be cost-effectively applied in a
wide range of application environments from performance-oriented industrial applications, to
security-conscious data-processing systems.
The iRMX 86 Operating System is constructed In a
thoroughly modular manner with the full range of

The iRMX 86 Scheduler ensures that the highest
priority task ready to execute is given system control because the scheduler recognizes 255 software priority levels. Also, the system supports
eight hardware priority levels, allowing the application system to be responsive to its external
environment.

4-14

ERROR MANAGEMENT SUBSYSTEM
The iRMX 86 Operating System provides extensive error management and reporting mechaAFN·01528A

iRMX 86

nisms. Both excessive system loading and user
programmer errors can be reported, reducing
system debug time. The flexibility of the Error
Management Subsystem allows errors to be ser·
viced directly by the user task 'or sent to a specific
error handler.

-Critical section management
-User extensible
• Real·time prioritY'oriented scheduling
• Interrupt management
• Extensive error management
OVERVIEW

Debugging System

The Nucleus is the heart of the iRMX 86 Operating
System. All other subsystems require the
Nucleus.

The iRMX 86 Operating System provides inter·
active software debugging. The Debugging Sub·
system has two capabilities that greatly siniplify
the process of debugging a multitasking system.
First, the Debugger allows you to debug several
tasks while the balance of the application system
continues to run in real·time. Second, the Debug·
ger lets the programmer interactively view and
modify system constructs as well as RAM and •
iAPX 86 (8086) registers.

Embedded in the Nucleus are two main facilities:
first, the facility for concurrent program execu·
tion; second, the faCility for handling simultane·
ous asynchronous events. iRMX 86 systems solve
problems that require real-time response. For ex·
ample, interrupts coming from specialized periph·
eral devices can be serviced in an efficient man·
nero iRMX 86.systems allow the hardware to be
used by more than one application, thus reducing
the overall system size and hardware cost.

1/0 System
The iRMX 86 device·independent I/O Subsystem
provides a standard interface for application pro·
grams to communicate with all I/O devices. File
management systems provide powerful features
like a hierarchical directory structure for quick, ef·
ficient file access. A standardized device driver in·
terface allows users to easily create custom
device drivers. A wide range of standard drivers
are available including; iSBC 204 Single Density
Diskette Controller, iSBC 206 Hard Disk Control·
ler, and terminal handler (via on·board 8251 USART
device).

The object'oriented architecture provides the
power necessary to solve the complex problems
of today and tomorrow. The system is comprised
. of uniform system calls ensuring that the Nucleus
is both easy to learn and easy to extend. Only four
concepts must be mastered to learn the system:
object management, interrupt management, the
scheduling algorithm, and error management.

Human Interface
The iRMX 86 Human Interface provides a powerful
man·machine interface for interactive control of
system resources and utilities. iRMX 86 system
utilities include display file directories, copy files,
rename files, etc. The Intel supplied command
line interpreter is table driven, allowing easy
modification by the user for the creation of
application'oriented commands.

SYSTEM LAYERS AND FACILITIES
Nucleus Application Code Interface

Nucleus
FEATURES

OBJECT·ORIENTED ARCHITECTURE

• Object'oriented architecture
-Dynamic memory manager
-Multitasking
-Multiprogramming
-Interprogram and intertask communication
and control
AFN·QI528A

The Nucleus is composed primarily of "objects."
Objects are data structures with a fixed set of at·
tributes. Just as a floating point number is a data
structure with operators to manipulate it, like add
or multiply, iRMX 86 objects have system calls to
manipulate them. Because of the uniform struc·
4·15

iRMX86

ture of the system, users have aJoundation on
which to tailor the Nucleus to the application by
adding application-specific objects .and system
calls.
'

ager automatically allocates and deallocate$
avaiJable RAM memory when objects are created
and deleted.

iRMX 86 objects include:

Object Description

- SEGMENTS, for dynamic buffering
- MAILBOXES, for intertask and interprogram object and data transfer.
- SEMAPHORES, for intertask and interprogram
synchronization and mutual exclusion
- REGIONS, for critical section management
- TASKS, for code execution
.
-JOBS, for program isolation
• USER OBJECTS, for system extensions

SEGMENT -

Dynamically created RAM buffer
with a specified length used to store data.

Provides intertask and interprogram
object and data transfer. Mailboxes are locations
for objects to be sent af)d retrieved. For example,
intertask communication permits a time·critical
task.to.forward data to a.non-time·critical task for
processillg. Mailboxes a~e generally .used to pass
data from task to task, although any object (useror system·provided) may be passed.
MAILBOX -

AlliRMX 86 objects are dynamic; they can be
created and deleted. Thefree space memory man:

Manages mutual exclusion and
synchronization. A semaphore, an integer be-

SEMAPHORE -

Nucleus Object Management System Calls
System Calls for
All Objects

O.S. Objects

Object·Specific
System Calls

Attributes

JOBS

Tasks
Memory pool.
Object directory
Exception handler

TASKS

Priority
Stack
Code
State
Exception handler

SEGMENTS

Buffer with length

MAILBOXES

List of objects

CREATE$JOB
DELETE$JOB
SET$POOL$MIN
GET$POOL$ATTRIB
OFFSPRING
CREATE$TASK
DELETE$TASK
SUSPEN D$TASKRESUMEHASK
GET$EXCEPTION$HANDLER·
SET$EXCEPTION$HANDLER
SLEEP
GET$TASK$TOKENS
GET$PRIORITY
SET$PRIORITV
CREATE$SEGMENT
DELETE$SEGMENT
GET$SIZE
CREA TE$MAI LBOX
DELETE$MAILBOX
SEND$MESSAGE
RECEIVE$MESSAGE
CREATE$SEMAPHORE
DELETE$SEMAPHORE
RECEIVE$UNITS
SEND$UNITS

CATALOG$OBJECT
UNCATALOG$OBJECT
LOOKUP$OBJECT
ENABLE$DELETION

DISABLE$DELETION

List of tasks waiting for objects

FORCE$DELETE
SEMAPHORES

GET$TYPE

. Semaphore unit value
List of tasks waiting for units

REGIONS

USER
OBJECTS
,"1'

list of tasks waiting for critical
section

CREATE$REGION
DELETE$REGION
RECEIVE$CONTROL '.
ACCEPT$CONTROL
SEND$CONTROL

License rights to a given extension
type
-New object template

-I
-;

4·16

CREATE$EXTENSION
DELETE$EXTENSION
CREA TE$COM POSITE
DELETE$COMPOSITE
INSPECT$COMPOSITE
ALTER$COM POSITE

AFN-0152BA

iRMX 86

tween. 0 and 64K, is used to signal another task
when processing has been· completed or when resources are available. A semaphore provides a low
overhead signalling mechanism.

Priority Levels
Handling an interrupt with respect to other work in
the system can be completely' user controlled.
iRMX 86 external interrupt levels are directly
related to task priorities. The priority of the executing task determines which interrupts are
masked. Generally, software background tasks
will be assigned a lower priority than interrupt
tasks to avoid blocking interrupts.

Controls access to critical sections.
Regions allow only one task at any given time to
access a portion of code. Examples are a ncinreentrant procedure or code for controlling a
peripheral device that can 'only service one request at a time. In addition, regions can also be
used to protect data structures from being
manipulated by more than one procedure at a
time.
REGION -

NUCLEUS SCHEDULING
Features

TASK - Software modules that execute sequentially. Each task in the system has the characteristics of a processor. It has its own code, priority
level, stack area, data area, and status. Software
priority levels determine the task's eligibility to
execute; there are 255 levels. Task execution is
based on an event·driven priority-oriented scheduling algorithm.

• Real-time priority-oriented
• Timed wait for system resources
• Dynamic control of task execution
Overview
The iRMX 86 scheduler executes tasks on the
basis of three criteria: relative importance of the
task, elapsed tiine,and task state.

Permits isolation of application tasks, objects, and memory, providing a multiprogramming
environment. Jobs encapsulate an application
and limit the degree of interaction between one
set of tasks and another.

JOB -

ReaHime Priority Scheduling
The iRMX 86 Nucleus offers apriority-oriented
event·driven scheduling mechanism'. The scheduler uses the task priority to determine which task
receives CPU time. The scheduler ensures that
the highe.st priority task ready to execute is given
system control. That task will continue to run until
a higher priority interrupt occurs, or until the running task requests resources that are not available. Priority scheduling allows the system to be
responsive to the external environment while still
devoting resources only totasks that have work to
be performed.

System programmer's facility
for creating objects not found in the iRMX 86
system. These new objects appear to other facilities in the iRMX 86 system as if part of the
original operating system. This means that the
system calls that manipulate system objects also
manipulate user defined objects.
USER OBJECTS -

NUCLEUS INTERRUPT MANAGEMENT
Features

Timed Wait

• Two levels of interrupt management
• User selectable priority for interrupt response

A task can specify the time it will wait for an event
to occur or wait for system resources to become
available. A task can limit the time it will wait to
receive an obje.ct at a mailbox, to receive units
from .a semaphore, or to look·up an object in the
directory. In addition, a task can specify how long
it will remain dormant before executing any further instructions. This allows the user to more
finely control the execution of the task and guard
against possible system deadlock.

Overview
The iRMX 86 Operating System is responsive to
external events occurring asynchronously in real
time.
Interrupt Management
The iRMX 86 Operating System provides two
levels of interrupt management; an' interrupt
handler or an interrupt task. One provides speed,
the other power. The interrupt task permits all
iRMX 86 system calls to be issued and masks only
lower priority interrupts. The interrupt handler permits only iRMX 86 interrupt system calls to be
issued and masks all interrupts.
AFN·01528A

Dynamic Control of Task Execution
Dynamic control over task execution can be completely user controlled. Often, it is important to
temporarily halt the execution of a task. (This is
known as suspending a task.) If a task has been
suspended N times, then it must be resumed N
4-17

iRMX 86

times before it will be permitted to run. The
!lystem is thus protected against a suspended
task executing before it has been resumed the
proper number of times.

tasks running under the iRMX 86 Nucleus. It is intended for use in applications which require only
limited 1/0 through a terminal and is generally
used in applications that do not include an iRMX
86 1/0 Subsystem. An output-only version oUhe
Terminal Handler is for use in applications that
send output to a terminal but do not receive input.

ERROR MANAGEMENT
Features
• Hierarchical error handling
• Selective error processing

Line Buffering and Character Echoing
The Terminal Handler provides a line buffer which
stores ASCII characters as they are input to the
console. Special editing characters are not placed
in the line buffer. Characters are echoed to the terminal when they are stored .in the line buffer.

Overview
When a task issues an iRMX 86 system call the
results may not be what the task is trying to
achieve. For example, the task may request memory that is not available, or it may use an invalid
parameter. When these conditions occur, they are
reported by the iRMX 86 error management system.

Keystroke Control
The Terminal Handler supports operator control
over both input and output. A table of special characters is shown.

Hierarchical Error Handling
There is a hierarchy of error handlers within the
iRMX 86 system. If errors are to be handled uniformly, then a system error handler is used. If a job
has need of a different error handling facility, then
the job's errors are handled at the job level. In addition, if a task has need for a unique error handier, then an error handler can be specified for
that task. This flexible error handling means
global error handlers can be created for the majorityof the errors, reducing the amount of application software to be written. Yet; jobs or tasks with
specific needs can trap and handle errprs in a
mariner unique to them.

Terminal Handler Editing Characters
Special
Character
Rubout
Carriage
Return
Line Feed
Escape
control·C
control·Q
control·Q
control·R
control·S
control·X
control-Z

Selective Error Processing
Errors can be processed according to two failure
modes: programmer errors and environmental
conditions. "Insufficient memory" for example
would be classified as an environmental condition. An invalid parameter in a system call would
be classified as 'a programmer error. Whether a
programmer error or an environmental condition,
errors of a given category can be serviced in-line
or cause the system to vector to the specified error handler.

Effect
Deletes previously entered character.
Signals end of line.
Signals end of line.
Signals end of line.
Aborts an application program.
Ki lis or restarts output.
Resumes suspended output.
Displays current line with editing.
Suspends output.
Deletes the current line.
Sends empty message.

Debugging Subsystem
Features
• Object-oriented debugger
• User-oriented interactive on-line debugging
facility
• Task execution breakpoint facility

Terminal Handler

Overview

Features

A powerful Debugging Subsystem which is both
object-oriented and interactive is provided to ease
the chore of debugging application systems.

• Line buffering and character echoing
• Keystroke control for line editing
Overview

Object-Oriented Debugger

The. Terminal Handler supports real-time, asyn-.
chronous 1/0 between the operator's terminal and

The iRMX 86 Operating System provides a special
debugger that recognizes iRMX 86 objects. Both

4-18
....0-..... --...

AFN·01528A
_

iRMX 86

system objects and user objects can be viewed
using the debugger.

f\\.E. DRIVER INTERFACE'

Interactive On-Line Facilities

The Debugging Subsystem's own terminal handier includes all the features available in the
stand-alone Terminal Handler. Interactive system
checkout allows the user to view iRMX 86 system
lists including the lists of the jobs, the ready
tasks, the suspended tasks, the tasks queued at
mailboxes, semaphores, regions, and the objects
queued at mailboxes.

BIOS-Application Code Interface

Task Execution Breakpoint Facility

Overview

The Debugging Subsystem allows the application
programmer to debug several tasks while the balance of the application system continues to run in
real time using the task breakpoint facility. Task
breakpoints can be set, viewed and changed.

All 1/0 requests are performed on "files". Files
can be created, deleted, opened, closed, read, and
written. The system provides two file manager
support options, named file support and physical
file support. These file managers offer different
1/0 support and I/O-application interfaces. 1/0 requests to a device can be issued using the file
managers supported by the actual driver.

Basic 1/0 Subsystem
FEATURES

Named File Manager

• Device-independent file driver interface
• Device driver interface

FEATURES

• Hierarchical directory support for' mass storage
devices
• File access protection and control
• Control over file fragmentation

OVERVIEW

The Basic InputlOutput Subsystem, BIOS, is an
optional subsystem that provides input and output facilities for mass storage devices and communication with 1/0 devices in a device-independent manner. For example, the BIOS translates a
READ request into device-specific instructions,
freeing the application programmer from these
details. Because the BIOS provides a standard interface for all 110 requests, programmers need not
rewrite application code when adding or changing
1/0 devices. To incorporate application-specific
peripheral devices in an iRMX 86 system only a
small amount of code, a device driver, needs to be
written.

OVERVIEW - The named file manager provides
support for mass storage devices_ Appl ication
programs reference data through a directory
rather than by physical track and block location,
thus allowing data to be given a name and referenced by that name.
HIERARCHICAL DIRECTORY SUPPORT - The
BIOS supports a hierarchical directory structure,
allowing data to be grouped logically and allowing
quick directory lookup. An example is shown.

The BIOS has two interfaces: one for performing
device-independent application 1/0 requests (file
driver interface) and one for adding device drivers
(device driver interface).
DEVICE-INDEPENDENT FILE DRIVER INTERFACE
Features

• Two file manager support options
• Logical device naming for constant 1/0 application interface
AFN·01528A

Hierarchical Directory Example

4-19

iRMX 86

converters are typical kinds of devices that use
the physical file manager.

FILE ACCESS PROTECTION AND CONTROL Besides logical data grouping and naming, both
access mode and password protection are supported to ensure file integrity. When a file is
created the creator determines access rights:
read, write, update, and append. The file is also
password protected and only the creator of a file
can grant another user access rights. These rights
may be different from the creator's. For example,
a creator who can "read" or "write" a file has the
ability to grant "read-only" access to another
user.

Logical Device Naming
Logical names are used when specifying a particular device rather than a physical address, causing physical device changes not to require a rewrite of application code.
DEVICE DRIVER INTERFACE
Features
• Mass storage device drivers
• Support for custom device drivers
• Run-time device driver binding

CONTROL OVER FILE FRAGMENTA TlON - Applicaton programs specify file granularity at the
time a file is created. Because files are stored on
random locations on the disk, wasted space is
eliminated by using small file granularity. When
file granularity is increased, access time for data
retrieval is improved. The BIOS allows the user to
decide whether time or space is more important.

Overview
The iRMX 86 system offers extensive device driver
support, enabling users to easily add device
drivers to the system. The same device driver
code can be used for more than one physical device.

Physical File Manager
Mass Storage Device Drivers

A direct interface to the device driver support
facilities is provided via the physical file manager.
No file directory structure is associated with the
physical iile manager. Line printers, AID and DIA

The iRMX 86 system includes two mass storage
device drivers. The iSBC 204 Universal F.lexible
Diskette Controller for standard flexible diskette

BIOS-Application System Call Interface

Universal File Calls

ATTACH$FILE

File
Management
Options
Named
• Hierarchical
Directories
• Access Mode
Protection
• Password
Protection

File Types
Named
Data

DELETE$CONNECTION
Named
Directory

GET$FILE$STATUS
GET$CON NECTlON$ST ATUS

Physical
• Direct Device
Driver
Support
Interface

None

4-20

File Specific Calls
CREATE$FILE
DELETE$FILE
OPEN
CLOSE
·READ
WRITE
SEEK
RENAME$FILE
CHANGE$ACCESS
GET$PATH$COMPONENT
CREATE$DIRECTORY
DELETE$FILE
GET$DIRECTORY$ENTRY
RENAME$FILE
CHANGE$ACCESS
GET$PATH$COM PON ENT
CREATE$FILE
OPEN
CLOSE
READ
WRITE
SEEK

Access Mode
Protection
Delete
Read
Write
Update
Append

Change Entry
Delete
Display
Add Entry

,
None

AFN·01528A

iRMX 86

drives is supported. For larger mass storage reo
quirements, the iSBC 206 Hard Disk Controller offers 10 MB on·line storage.

lishes the binding and thereby the type of file sup·
port used for a given device.
Run-Time Device Driver Binding

NAMED
FILE

DRIVER~

.
PHYSICAL$ATTACH$DEVICE---...

PHVSICAL/·

~~~~~~.

FILE

DRIVER
'Provldes code for READ, WRITE, SEEK, OPEN, CLOSE.

iRMX 86 System Calls

Device Driver Interface

NUCLEUS OBJECT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
CALLS·

Support for Custom Device Drivers
Custom drivers can also be added to. the iRMX 86
system. There are three levels of device driver
support: random access device driver support,
common device driver support, and custom device
driver support. Regardless of the driver support
option and the file management option, only four
routines need to be written for the driver. Also, an
interrupt routine must be written for common and
random access dri·vers. The semantics of these
routines differ according to the device driver support option used. These are:

CATALOG$OBJECT
Catalogs the specified object in the given job's
object directory.
UNCATALOG$OBJECT
Uncatalogs object from the directory.
LOOKUP$OBJECT
Returns access to the specified object.
ENABLE$DELETION
Enables an object to be deleted based on the
disable-deletion depth.

Highlevel support for random access devices. Assumptions for its use are: deblocking of requests is
necessary, one interrupt level is sufficient, and
random·seek must be supported.

RANDOM ACCESS DRIVER SUPPORT -

DISABLE$DELETION
Disables an object from being deleted by incrementing the disable-deletion depth.
FORCE$DELETE
Decrements disable-deletion depth by one,
then proceeds to delete the object .

High-level support for common devices. Common driver support
assumes no deblocking of requests is necessary,
FIFO 1/0 requests are sufficient, and one interrupt
level is sufficient.

COMMON DRIVER SUPPORT -

GET$TYPE
Returns the specified object's type code:
CREATE$JOB
Creates the job with an initial task, memory
pool, an empty object directory, and an exception handler.

Complete flexibility to the device driver writer. No 1/0 request
scheduling is provided, giving complete 1/0 request queuing responsibility to the device driver.
No assumptions are made regarding interrupt
levels or blocking or deblocking of requests.

CUSTOM DRIVER SUPPORT -

DELETE$JOB
Deletes the specified job.
SET$POOL$MIN
Defines new minimum for the given job's memory pool.

Run·Time Device Driver Binding
The application program specifies the file
management system and device driver; device
drivers are attached to the system at run-time. The
PHYSICAL$ATTACH$DEVICE system call estab·
AFN·01528A

GET$POOL$ATTRIB
Returns information regarding the given job's
memory pool.
4-21

iRMX86

OFFSPRING
Returns the children jobs ofthe specified job.

CREATE$SEMAPHORE
Creates 'an integer semaphore with an initial
value.

CREATE$TASK
Creates a task ilith a specified priority, stack,
code location, and the job's exception handler.

DELETE$SEMAPHORE
Deletes the specified semaphore.

DELETE$TASK
Deletes the specified task.

RECEIVE$UN ITS
Receives the number of units requested from
the semaphore.

SUS PEN D$TASK
Suspends the specified task or, if already sus·
pended, increments suspension depth by one.

SEND$UNITS
Sends to the given semaphore the specified
number of units.

RESUME$TASK
Decrements the suspension depth by one, and
if zero resumes the task.

CREATE$REGION
Creates an access mechanism which controls
code that is only to be accessed by one task at
a time.

G ET$EXCEPTION$HAN DLER
Returns task's exception handler information.

DELETE$REGION
Deletes the specified region.

SET$EXCEPTION$HANDLER
Sets task's exception handler to the specified
location and mode. The mode determines
which classes of errors will be sent to the exception handler.

RECEIVE$CONTROL
Gains access to the mutually exclusive code
even if it involves waiting.

SLEEP
Places the caller task in the asleep state for a
specified numberof milliseconds.

ACCEPT$CONTROL
Gains access to the mutually exclusive code
only ifit is immediately available.

GET$TASK$TOKENS
Returns requested system information.

SEND$CONTROL
Relinquishe,s the region when finished using it.

GET$PRIORITY
Returns the priority of the calling task.

CREATE$EXTENSION
Creates the license rights to a specified extension type.

SET$PRIORITY
Dynamically alters the specified task's priority.

DELETE$EXTENSION
Deletes all objects of the extension type specified.

CREATE$SEGMENT
Creates a segment with a specified length.
DELETE$SEGMENT
Deletes the specified segment.

CREATE$COMPOSITE
Creates anew object template under the specified e'~tension object type.

GET$SIZE
Returns the segment size.

DELETE$COMPOSITE
Deletes the specified composite object.

CREATE$MAI LBOX
Creates a.mailbox for objects.to be sent and reo
ceived.

INSPECT$COM POSITE
Inspects the specified composite.object's template.

DELETE$MAI LBOX
Deletes the specified mailbox.

ALTER$COM POSITE
Changes the composite object'stemplate.

SEND$MESSAGE
Sends the specified object's access to the
given mailbox.

INTERRUPT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM CALLS

RECEIVE$MESSAGE
Receives an object's acces§ fromthespecified
mailbox.

SET$INTERRUPT
ASSigns an interrupt handler and,if desired, an
i nterru pt task.

4-22
.1::=4.

AFN,01528A

iRMX 86

RESET$INTERRUPT
Voids the SET$INTERRUPT call.

DELETE$FILE
Deletes the file from the directory after all connections to the file have been deleted.

GET$LEVEL
Returns interrupt level of executing interrupt
handler.

RENAME$FILE
Renames the file in the directory.

EXIT$I NTERRU PT
Interrupt handler's "END OF INTERRUPT"
statement.

CHANGE$ACCESS
Changes access rights to a given file. User
rights may.be added or changed.

SIGNAL$INTERRUPT
Used within interrupt handler to invoke interrupt task.

TRUNCATE
Truncates the file at the present file pointer.
GET$PATH$COM PON ENT
Returns the hierarchical directory tree traversal
from the root to the file.

WAIT$INTERRUPT
Puts calling interrupt task in suspension until
reinvoked by the interrupt handler.

GET$DIRECTORY$ENTRY
Returns the file's directory name.

ENABLE
Enables an external interrupt level.

CREATE$DIRECTORY
Creates a directory file.

DISABLE
Disables an external interrupt level.

Supported Hardware
SINGLE BOARD COMPUTERS
BASIC 1/0 SUBSYSTEM CALLS

iSBC 86/12A Single Board Computer

CREATE$FILE
Creates a file and establishes an I/O line or connection. If named, it also establishes access
mode.

Complete computer system on a single 6.75 x 12inch printed circuit board; includes an iAPX 86
(8086) CPU, system clock, 32K bytes of dual port
RAM, sockets for 4K bytes (using Intel 2758), 8K
bytes (using Intel 2716 or 2316E) or 16K bytes
(using Intel 2732) of read only memory, multimaster MULTIBUS™ arbitration logic, 9-level programmable vectored interrupt control, 2 programmable BCD binary timers/counters, 24 programmable I/O lines with sockets for I/O line drivers
and terminators, and a USART 8251A with associated RS232C drivers and receivers.

ATTACH$FILE
Establishes an I/O connection to an existing
file.
DELETE$CONNECTION
Deletes an I/O connection to the specified file.
GET$CONNECTION$STATUS
Returns I/O connection status.
GET$FILE$STATUS
Returns file status.

MASS STORAGE CONTROLLERS
iSBC 204 Diskette Controller

PHYSICAL$A TT ACH$DEVICE
Binds file driver to device driver.

Universal Flexible Diskette Controller; plugs into
one MULTIBUS system slot. Controls most single
density standard flexible diskette drives and minidrives.

OPEN
Opens a file for I/O. The file pointer is set to the
beginning of the file.

iSBC 206 Disk Controller

CLOSE
Undoes an OPEN.

Disk Controller for 5440-type disk drives with 10M
bytes per drive and up to four drives per controller;
adapts to industry standard drives.

READ
Initiates an 110 read starting at the file pointer.
WRITE
Initiates an I/O write starting at the file pointer.

USER iAPX 86 (8086)-BASED SYSTEMS
The iRMX 86 system runs on user designed
boards with the following components:

SEEK
Moves the file pointer.
AFN·01528A

• iAPX 86 (8086) -16-Bit Microprocessor
4-23

iRMX 86

• 8253 - Programmable Interval Timer (counter 0
mapped to I/O .locationODOH)
• 8259A- Programmable Interrupt Controller
(base port mapped to I/O location OCOH c;onnecting INT 2 to counter 0 of the 8253)
.
• 8251A - USART (base port mapped to I/O location OD8H when using the Terminal Handler)

Documentation Package including:
• Introduction toiRMX 86 Operating System
(9803124-01 )
• iRMX 86 Nucleus, Terminal Handler, and Debugger Reference Manual (9803122-01)
• iRMX 86 I/O System Reference Manual
(9803123-01)

iRMX 86 Shipping Package

• iRMX 86 System Programmer's Reference Manual (142721-001)

ISIS-II compatible diskettes containing:
•
•
•
•
•

iRMX 86 Nucleus
iRMX 86 Terminal Handler
iRMX 86 Debugging Subsystem
iRMX 86 Basic Input/Output Subsystem·
iSBC 204 Universal Flexible Diskette Device
Driver
• iSBC 206 Hard Disk Device Driver .
• Preconfigured iRMX 86 System

• iRMX 86 Installation Guide for ISIS-II Users
(9803125-01 )
• iRMX 86.Configuration Guide for ISIS-II Users
(9803126-01)
.
Registration Form
Software Problem Reports
One year of updates

One man-week of training at any Intel Training
Center offering iRMX 86 training. (G.ood for .6
months.)

iSBC 957A Intellec-iSBC 86/12A Interface and
Execution Package

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

RMX86

Operating System

4-24

AFN·01528A

iRMX 88
REAL·TIME MULTITASKING EXECUTIVE
• Performance-oriented nucleus

• Designed for iAPX 88, iAPX 86-based
applications

• Easy-to-use interfaces

• EPROM or RAM based
• Systems tailored through Interactive
Configuration Utility

• Real-time priority-oriented scheduling

• Effective system debugger

• Disk file system software

The iRMX 88 Real-Time Multitasking Executive is a small, performance-oriented executive system which
can be used on Intel's 16-bit single board computers, iAPX 88 and iAPX 86-based boards. Based on the
iRMX 80 Executive's field-proven and reliable architecture, the iRMX 88 Executive supports upgrading
8-bit based applications and helps the firsHime microcomputer customer with simple, easy-to-use interfaces for both the iSBC and component-based applications. The iRMX 88 Executive Software provides the
innermost, software control layer for the CPU that supports real-time application requirements for intertask communication, asynchronous 110 control, priority-based resource allocation, and standard iSBC
disk controller interfaces.
The iRMX 88 Executive offers features that are suitable for reliable, performance-critical process control
applications, production test stand units, sophisticated laboratory analysis, instrumentation, or specialized data acquisition and monitoring stations. Now, previous iRMX 80-based designs can upgrade to
small size and high performance solution using the iRMX 88 Executive. The application wili be easily
tailored using the Interactive Configuration Utility.

Diagram 1_ Module Representation

4-25

iRMX 88

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The iRMX 88 Executive provides users of Intel
Single Board Computers and user-designed
boards utilizing iAPX 86, iAPX 88 CPUs, with facilities for executing concurrently, managing resources, and servicing asynchronous events. The
iRMX 88 Executive provides simple, easy-to-use
tools for creating a range of reliable high quality
application systems. The foundation modules include support for real-time facilities including
priority-based task scheduling, provide the means
to concurrently monitor and control multiple
events, provide real-time clock control, manage interrupts, and dispatch tasks. By staying within the
64K byte code and 64K data segment model, the
operating system can maintain performance and
minimize memory requirements; However, user
tasks can access the full megabyte of data
memory. The iRMX 88 Executive, as shown .in
Diagram 1, contains the following modules: a
Nucleus, Terminal Handler, Free Space Manager,
Disk File System, Bootstrap Loader, Analog
Handlers, Interactive System Debugger, and a
Command Line Interpreter.

Diagram 2. Consistent Structure

User Configurable
The iRMX 88-based applications can utilize a wide
range of features or select only those which meet
the specific requirements of the application system. The resultant system contains only the modules necessary for its use, allowing the iRMX 88
application system to be tailored to the application demands.
The iRMX 88 Executive is constructed in a thoroughly modular manner with the full range of facilities being offered in library modules, allowing
easy selection of the exact features required.
Overhead for unused features is then eliminated,
minimizing memory requirements.

Because of the modularity and variety of services
available with the iRMX 88 product, the user
selects only those features needed for an effective application-specific operating system. This
process of feature selection for a custom operating system is aided by a development tool, the Interactive Configuration Utility. After the user
responds to a set of feature and configuration
questions, the Interactive Configuration Utility integrates and configures the system readily from
its library of quality, tested system features.

An interactive configuration development tool
provides an easy-to-use method of configuring the
iRMX 88-based application. Responding to questions from the utility program executing on the
Intellec Microcomputer Development System, the
user quickly tailors the operating system features
to. meet specific application needs.

Task Interfaces
FEATURE OVERVIEW

The iRMX 88 Executive utilizes a simple, straightforward programmer interface for user tasks. This
consistent interface reduces the complexity and
number of concepts which must be learned.

The iRMX 88 Executive products provide users
with simple, easy-to-use, quality software tools for
ceating a wide range of application systems. The
most important features are:

Structured Application Environment

EPROM or RAM Based

The iRMX 88 Executive provides a consistent
structure from application to application, CPU to
CPU, thus allowing experience gained on one system to be easily transferred to others. Often, entire tasks may be ported from one application to
another. As shown in Diagram 2, the Executive
manages the hardware interface and provides a
standard interface to the application. When the
Executive supports future hardware, the Executive may have new control software, but the application layer interface remains the same.

The iRMX 88 Executive system can be totally
EPROM resident or bootstrap loaded from a mass
storage device into RAM, depending upon application requirements. Being able to place all of the
software in EPROM offers two benefits. First, it
does not require a disk for bootstrap loading. This
is convenient when mass storage devices cannot
be used because of the danger of contamination.
Second, the overhead expense of mass storage
devices is eliminated when the application can be
prommed.
4-26

iRMX88

Nucleus

signed a lower priority than interrupt task priori·
ties, to avoid blocking interrupts.

The iRMX 88 Executive provides control software
for operation on various iSBC 16·bit Single Board
Computers, and can be used f.or user iAPX 86,
iAPX 88·based boards. The iRMX 88 Nucleus pro·
vides a foundation upon which a variety of applica·
tion systems can be built.

Table 1. Nucleus Primitives
Operands

Return
Value

ROACPT

exch·addr

addr

Accept a message from speci·
fled exchange. Returns message address if available. zero
otherwise.

ROCTSK

STD·addr

none

Create task by building new
Task Descriptor based on specified Static Task Descriptor.

ROCXCH

RAM·addr

none

Create exchange at specified
RAM address.

RODLVL

level

none

Disable specified
level.

RODTSK

TD·addr

none

Delete task specified by Task
Descriptor.

RODXCH

exch·addr

byte

Delete specified exchange.

ROELVL

level

none

Initialize message portion of
the fnterrupt Exchange De·
scriptor associated with the
specified interrupt level (the
first time called only). and en·
able specified interrupt level.

ROENOI

none

Signals end-ot·interrupt in user·
supplied interrupt service routine.

ROISND

IED·addr

none

Send an inter~upt message to
Ihe specified interrupl ex·
change.

RORESM

TD·addr

none

Resume a task that has previ·
ou:;;,ly been suspended.

ROSEND

exch·addr.
msg·addr

none

Send the message located at
"msg'addr" to the exchange
specified by "exch·addr."

ROSETV

addr. level

none

Set interrupt vector. Interrupts
at the specified level are serviced by the user-supplied routine starting at "addr." Ihus by·
passing Nucleus interrupt soft~
ware.

ROSUSP

TD·addr

none

Suspend execution of the task
·specified by the Task Descrip·
tor.

ROWAIT

exch·addr.
time·limit

add,

Wait at the specified exchange
until a message is available or
time limit expires ..Return address of system time-out mes-.
sage or user message.

Name

The iRMX ""3 Nucleus is the heart of an iRMX
88·based operating system. All other subsystems
require the Nucleus.
Embedded in the Nucleus are two main facilities:
first, the facility for concurrent program execu·
tion; second, the facility for handling simultane·
ous asynchronous events. The typical iRMX 88·
based application solution requires real·time reo
sponse. For example, interrupts (samples per sec·
ond) coming from specialized peripheral devices
must be serviced in an efficient manner. Since the
concepts are portable from CPU to CPU, iRMX 88·
based systems allow the hardware and software
to be used by more than one application, thus reo
ducing the overall system and hardware costs.
Designed toward performance'oriented solutions,
the multitasking architecture provides the power
necessary to solve the complex problems of today
and tomorrow. The system comprises uniform
system calls ensuring that the Nucleus is both
easy to learn and easy to extend. Only two con·
cepts must be mastered to learn the system: the
user·task requests to the Nucleus for service; and
the definition of the system configuration. These
concepts require the understanding of the terms:
task, messages, and exchanges. These three
items can be created and deleted dynamically.
The Nucleus provides two levels of interrupt
management, an interrupt handler and an interrupt
task. One provides speed for high performance
samples per second requirements and the other
provides flexibility. The interrupt handler permits
only Nucleus interrupt system calls to be issued
and masks all interrupts. The interrupt task per·
mits all Nucleus system calls to be issued and
masks only lower priority interrupts; this is very
effective for interrupt management at a lower fre·
quency.

Function

interrupt

Free Space Manager
The iRMX 88 Free Space Manager provides the
capability of dynamically allocating RAM space
based upon user requests. The Free Space
Manager allows efficient use of RAM in the iRMX
88·based system by reclaiming RAM space that is
no longer needed by a task, thereby making it
available for use by other tasks. This allows RAM
space to be treated as a common resource, shared
dynamically by a number of tasks.

Priority Levels
Handling an interrupt with respect to other work in
the system can be completely user controlled.
Nucleus external interrupt levels are directly reo
lated to task priorities. The priority of the execut·
ing task determines which interrupts are masked.
Generally, software background tasks will be as·

4·27

iRMX88

Table 2. Disk File System Services

System Debugger
The iRMX 88 product provides an interactive software debugger. The System Debugger has two
capabilities that greatly simplify the process of
debugging a multitasking system. First, the Debugger allows examination of the task while the
system continues to operate. Second, the Debugger lets the programmer interactively view and
modify system constructs and RAM data space.

Service

Function

Data Transfer Services
Prepare a file for processing.
OPEN
Transfer data from an open file to memREAD
ory.
Transfer data from memory to an open
WRITE
file.
Set or return value of disk file marker.
SEEK
Terminate processing of an open file.
CLOSE
Directory Maintenance Services
Remove a file from the directory ·and re-,
DELETE
lease its space.
RENAME Change the nameof a file in the directory.
Change an attribute of a file in the direcATTRIB
tory.
Other Services
FORMAT Initialize a new disk.
I· LOAD
Read a file of executable code, into memory.
DISKIO
Perform fundamental disk sector operations.

Comprehensive 1/0 Support
The iRMX 88 software libraries contain support for
a wide range of iSBC 110 boards manufactured by
Intel. This support simplifies· the' addition of
peripherals to MULTIBUS-compatible application
systems. For applications which require custom
boards the iRMX 88 architecture allows easy addition of user~written device handlers.
The iRMX 88 Disk File System (DFS) provides disk
access capabi lities to i RMX 88 operating systems.
The term "disk" will refer generally to both hard
disk and floppy disk products. The services
operate in the real-time environment supported by
the Nucleus. Files may be created, deleted or
changed. Data may be accessed sequentially and
directly ("randomly").

Bootstrap Loader
The iRMX 88 Bootstrap Loader is an extension to
the operating system that adds considerable flexibility toiSBC disk controller-based systems. The
Bootstrap Loader allows those applications using
disk to create essentially a "soft" system that may
be loaded into RAM from disk rather than being
permanently EPROM resident. This offers greater
flexibility in building and maintaining an applicationthat is disk-based.

Many applications do not need all the services
which DFS offers. The modular design of the
system allows DFS functions to be implemented
selectively, thereby keeping memory requirements consistent with the needs of the application.
DFS performs most of the activities required to
manage real-time disk operations. (See Table 1.)
The user does not have to be concerned with
scheduling and coordinating the multiple and
sometimes conflicting requests that typify realtime operation. By taking responsibility for these
activities, and for the maintenance of system integrity, DFS encourages the user to concentrate
on solving the application problem at hand.

- Since application software is stored on disk
rather than in ROM, changes are easier to implement. A mod'ificationto application software
entails changing the contents of the disk rather
than replacing the ROM.
-Because the disk has a much larger storage
capacity than does the ROM, multiple tasks can
be stored on disk with the Bootstrap Loader
• bringing them into. RAM on demand. This
feature allows a singleiSBC-based, solution to
be used for more than one application.

In addition to presenting a complex control situation, real-time applications often have demanding
performance requirements. DFS helps maximize
system throughput by allowing user tasks to overlap disk operations with processor operations and
by allowing multiple disk operations to proceed in
parallel. For example,files can be "double buffered" so that while DFS is filling (or emptying)
one buffer, the user task can be processing the
data in the other, reducing the time the task
spends waiting for 110.

Terminal Handler
The iRMX 88 product includes aTerminal Handler
module that provides real-time asynchronous 110
between an operator's terminal and tasks executing under the iRMX88 Nucleus. User tasks can
utilize. input data obtained from the Terminal
Handler. Output may be at the level of a Single
character, a logical line, or a set of lines.

4-28

iRMX 88

for the CLI, thus satisfying a demand for unique
input command requests.

Command Line Interpreter
The iRMX 88 Command Line Interpreter (CLI) is a
task that provides a powerful man-machine interface for interactive control of system resources
and utilities. The CLI can be readily ~ configured
with the iRMX 88 Terminal Handler. Examining an
input message, the CLI will pass the message to
the appropriate utility task. The utility tasks provided with the system include. FORMAT, DIR(ectory), and COPY.

Analog Handlers
The iRMX 88 Executive offers Analog Handlers
which provide. a convenient mechanism for performing AID and.o/A conversions, utilizying Intel's
iSBC Analog Boards. The Analog Handlers perform repetitive, sequential, single or variable gain,
random channel input and random channel output. The input and output modules are individually
configurable, allowing greater application flexibility for minimum size systems.

In addition, a greater degree of flexibility for
tailored application is available; the user can add
application-oriented commands to the vocabulary

.!::.:

iSBC iAPX 88 and iAPX 86 Memory Requirements
Memory Requirements··
(Bytes)
Module

Minimal
Free
Nucleus Terminal Space
Handler Manager

PROM'

3.5K

1.2K

RAM

270

140

500

Minimum Development
System Requirements

Disk
File
System

Disk
1/0

Analog
1/0

Bootstrap
Loader &
Initializer

Operating
System

Memory
Size
(Bytes)

Minimum
Diskette
Drives

11K

1.4K

1.6K

1.2K

ISIS-II

64K RAM

·Indicates amount of code which can be configured in PROM .
•• All figures are approximate for education purposes only.

SPECIFICATIONS

iSBC 724/724A
iSBC 732/732A

iSBC Supported Hardware

MULTIMODULE Boards
iSBX 337 numerical data processor
iSBX 351 serial 1/0

Single Board Computers
iSBC 88/40
iSBC 86/05
iSBC 86/12A

User iAPX 86 and iAPX 88- Based Systems

Mass Storage
iSBC 208 flexible disk controller
iSBC 215A/215B 8-inch Winchester disk controller
iSBC 220 SMD disk controller

The iRMX 88 system runs on user-designed
boards with the following components:
• 8253-Programmable Interval Timer (counter 0)
• 8259A-Programmable Interrupt Controller
(INT1 to counter 0 of 8253)
• 8251A-USART or iSBX 351 when using Terminal Handler

Analog Boards
iSBX 311
iSBX 328
iSBC 711/711A

4-29

iRMX 88

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

iRMX 88

NUCLEUS, Terminal Handler,
Free Space Manager for iAPX 88
(8088), iAPX 86 (8086) support
including iSBC 86/12A, iSBC
88/40. Package also includes
Interactive Configuration Utility
program for execution on an
Intellec Microcomputer
Development System.

Not Available

The modules which include the
debugger, CLI, and utility
software modules COPY., DIR,
and FORMAT.

Not Available

Analog Handler modules for
support of iSBC 711/711A, iSBC
724/724A, iSBC 732/732A, iSBX
311, iSBX 328.

iRMX 88 DOC

Documentation Package
including
• Introduction to the iRMX 88
Executive
• iRMX 88 Systems Reference
Manual
• iRMX 88 Installation Guide
• iRMX 88 Configuration Utility
Guide
• iRMX 88 Application Guide

Not Available

Disk File System, modules for
iSBC 208, iSBC 215A/215B,
iSBC 220 disk controllers, and
supports user-defined
controllers.

Not Available

4·30
=

=.0.

iSBC 957A
INTELLEC® -iSBC 86/12A
INTERFACE AND EXECUTION PACKAGE
• Establishes communication between
the iSBC 86/12A board and the Intellec®
Development Systems to aid in iAPX
86/8086 software development

• Offers "virtual terminal" capability
which permits the Intellec® console to
access the iSBC 86/12A monitor

• Allows full speed execution of iAPX
86/8086 programs

• Provides powerful console commands
for software debug
.

• Includes EPROM resident system
monitor for iSBC 86/12A Single Board
Computer

• Allows ac::cess to all iSBC 86/12A
memory, registers, flags and. 110 ports·

• Allows Intellec® ISIS·II files to be trans·
ferred between iSBC 86/12A board and
Intellec® Microcomputer Development
System

• Includes all necessary hardware,
software and documentation

The Intel®iSBC 957A Intellec® -iSBC 86/12A Interface and Execution Package contains all the necessary hardware,
software, cables and documentation required to interface an iSBC 86/12ASingie Board Computer to an Intel lee Micro·
computer Development System for software development and full·speed execution.

4·31
~--::--"

.-_....

iSBC957A
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

registers and memory, perform port 1/0, move a block of
'memory, compare blocks of memory, search for a wordl
byte value, and perform hex arithmetic. In addition, the
monitor provides for the recognition of interrupts via a
user-defined table. The program on, the diskette contains communication software which passes appropriate console commands to the iSBC 86/12A resident
monitor and also interfaces with the ISIS-II operating
system to transfer files between the development
system diskettes and the iSBC 86/12A board.

Overview
The iSBC 957A Intellec-iSBC 86/12A Interface and Execution Package' extends, the software development
capabilities of the Intellec Microcomputer Development
Systems to the iSBC 86/12 and iSBC 86/12A Single
Board Computers. It allows software modules developed under the Intellec resident ISIS-II ,Operating Systems to be down-Ioa,ded to the iSBC 86/12A board for
full-speed execution and debug. In addition, the iSBC
957A package allows segments of iSBC 86/12A memory
to be saved on floppy disk files. Special communication
software allows transparent access to the powerful
debug commands, in the iSBC 86/12A monitor. from the
Intellec console terminal. '
"
'

System Interfacing,
The physical interface between the Intellec Microcomputer Development System and the iSBC 86/12A board
is accomplished with cables supplied ",iththe iSBC
975A package. The cabling arrangement varies depending on whether the system is a member of the Intellec
MDS-800 family or one of the Intellec Series II family.

Software Capabilities

Intellec Series II Interface - For Intellec Series II Development Systems the connection between it and the
iSBC 86/12A board is accomplished with either a Single
serial lineintercorinecting the iSBC 86/12A serial port
with serial port 1 on the Intellec system, or a parallel
cable from ttie UPP port to the parallel port on the iSBC
86/12A board. ·AII communication including' command
and data transfer occurs over this line.

The software included in the iSBC 957A package consists of the iSBC 86/12A monitor residing on jour intel
EPROMs which are inserted into sockets,on the iSBC
86/12A board. A diskette is also included which contains
the Intellec resident communications software that
links the iSBC 86/12A board with the Intellec Microcomputer Development System. The EPROM resident software creates an execution environment in which object
modules may be loaded into the iSBC 86/12A memory,
executed at full speed, modified if necessary and saved
on the Intel lei: system floppy disk. The monitor provides
the ability to execute selected program segments with
breakpoints or by single stepping, examine and modify

Intellec® Environment
An Intellec Microcomputer Development System to be
used in conjunction with the iSBC 957A package and an
iSBC 86/12A board must have the following necessary

INTELLEC' SERIES II
MODEL 220, 230

ISBC86112
OR

SERIAL 110

iSBC 86112A

r"
,

PORT

~,
',' )),
.

OEM RS232,C
CABLE

.",

Figure 1. IntelleC® Series Models 220, 230 Serial Connection
AFN-01529A

4-32

iSBC957A

PARALLEL 110
-.......~.-r~PORT

ISBC 86112A

BOARD

Figure 2. Intellec® Series Models 220, 230, 240 Parallel Connection
functionality to support program development and stor·
age:

should include the following components for effective
utilization:

1. Intellec Development System with 64K bytes of RAM.
2. Console CRT or TTY terminal.
3. Intellec MDS·DDS Dual Double Density Diskette
Drive and ISIS·II Operating System or Intellec MDS·
2DS Dual Single Density Diskette Drive and ISIS·II
Operating System.
4. User·selected language translators.

1. An iSBC 86/12A Single Board Computer.
2. An iSBC 957A Intellec-iSBC 86/12A Interface and Execution Package.
3. An iSBC 655 or iSBC 660 System Chassis for' power
and MULTIBUS expansion.
4. One or more iSBC 032, 048, or 064 RAM boards for
programs requiring more than 32K bytes of RAM.
Note: The iSBC 86/12A cannot be mounted in the Intellee system and requires a separate operating environment.

Note: The Intellee Series II Model 230 Microcomputer Development System and the Intel lee MDS·800 Microcomputer Development Center con·
tain all necessary hardware and operating system software to be used
with the iSBC 957A package and the iSBC 86/12A board.

Additional memory boards, analog and digital 1/0
boards, and peripheral controllers can be included in the
iSBC 660 System Chassis with the iSBC 86/12A to allow
the execution environment to be equivalent to the expected final product configuration.

Execution Environment
A full capability iSBC 86/12A execution environment

Drivers and terminators needed when parallel load cable
is required

SPECIFICATIONS
Hardware

Interface Adapters
(1) iSBC 530 TTY adapter - Used when serial 1/0 line
connects with TTY port on Intellec system
(1) Parallel port status adapter - Mounts on iSBC
86/12A when parallel load cable is required

Cables
(1) OEM RS232-C cable - Mates with serial 1/0 port on
iSBC 86/12A
(1) RS232-C port cable - Mates with RS232-C port on
Intellec system
(1) TTY port cable - Mates with TTY port on Intellec
system
(1) Parallel load cable - Mates with UPP port on Intellec system and parallel 1/0 port on iSBC 86/12A

Miscellaneous Attachment
mounted connectors

for Intellec

Software
(4) EPROMs with iSBC 86/12A system monitor
(1) Single density floppy diskette with iSBC 86/12A ISIS·
II communication software
(1) Double density floppy diskette with iSBC 86/12A
ISIS-II communication software

All cables allow separation of Intellec system and iSBC
86/12A of up to 6 feet.
110
(1)
(4)
(4)

screws

Drivers and Terminators
7437 48 mA open collector drivers
iSBC 901 220D/330D terminator packs
iSBC 902 1 kD terminator packs

System Monitor
Addresses: RAM: 00000-006FFH; ROM: FEOOO-FFFFFH

4-33

AFN-01529A

iSBC957A
Transfer Rates

Commarids
Command
L Load
G Go

Function
Loaas absolute object liIe from Intellec into
ISBC 86/12A memory.
Transfers control of the 8086 CPU to the user
program.

X Examine

Loads absolute object liIe from Intellec into
ISBC 86/12A memory and begins execution.
Loads a blo~k of iSBC 86112A memory Into an
Intellec file.
Displays and executes one Instruction at a
time.
Displays or modifies 8086 registers.

R Load and Go
T Upload
N Single Step

D Display

Displays contents of a memory block.

S Substitute

Displays/modifies memory locations.

M Mov.e
F Find
C Compare
I Input

Moves the contents of a memory block.
Searches a memory block or a constant.

Outputs data to output port.
Prints values of literals.

Output

P Print
E Exit
Comment

Compares two memory blocks.
Inputs and displays data from Input port.

Exits the loader program and returns to ISIS·II.
Rest of line is a comment.

ORDERING iNFORMATION
Part Number

Description

sac 957A

Intellec-iSaC B6/12A Interfacing and
Execution Package.

Intellec MDS·BOO Family

Serial transfer: 37K byteslminute
Parallel transfer: 96K byteslmlnute
Intellec Series II Family

Serial transfer: 37K byteslminute
Parallel transfer: 29K byteslmlnute

Reference Manuals
Isac B6/12A Hardware Reference Manual
142849·01 - iSaC 957A Intellec-iSaC B6/12 Interface
and Execution Package User's Guide
9800640 -

BOB6 Assembly Language Manual

Peripheral
Controllers

iSBC 202
DOUBLE DENSITY DISKETTE CONTROLLER
• iSBC 80, iSBC 86 and iSBC 88
compatible interface, control and DMA
logic for high speed, high capacity
random access bulk storage

• DMA channel allows single board
computer to process in parallel with
block transfer between diskettes and
memory

• Provides control of up to four single
sided flexible diskette drives

• Complete CRC data checking

• Soft·sectored format allows SOOK·byte
data storage capacity per double
density. diskette

• Compatible with Shugart SA 800·1 and
other similar double density diskette
drives

The iSBC 202 Double Density Diskette Controller is an interface between the MULTIBUS system bus and double density flexible diskette drives via a direct bus interface. Designed with Intel's powerful 3000 Series of microprogrammabie bit-slice microprocessors, the iSBC·202 provides a high speed, efficient, and easy to use high capacity random
access bulk storage interface to Intel's family of single board computers. Software support for the iSBC 80 Series of
8-bitsingle board computers is provided through RMX/80, the Real-Time Multitasking Executive.

5-1
__ • .:..-:..

c..:::.

"-_ _

.!.:......I

iSBC 202
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

loaded (i.e., to come in contact with the diskette platter),
cause the head to move to the proper track and verify
successful operation. The interface board accepts the
data being read off the diskette, interprets synchronizing bit patterns, checks the validity of the data using a
cyclic redundancy check (CRC) polynomial, and then
transfers the data to the channel board. The diskette
controller is capable of performing seven different operations: recalibrate, seek, format track, write data, write
deleted data, read data, and verify CDC.

The iSBC 202 Double Density Diskette Controller provides an easy to use interface for OEM use of Intel
single board computers and other manufacturers' flexible diskette drives. All DMA logic is provided so no additional boards or circuitry are required, and up to four
double density flexible diskette drives may be interfaced with each iSBC 202. The controller facilitates
recording of all data.in soft-sector format. The controller
consists of two. boards which may reside, in System
Chassis, the iSBC 604 or 614 Modular Cardcage/Backplane, or in an OEM custom designed iSBC 80 buscompatible with a majority of double density specified
flexible diskette drives. The microprogrammed track format consists of 52 sectors with 128 bytes per sector.
The Shugart SA 800-1 drive is fully compatible with this
dense track format due to its "straddle-erase" magnetic
head. Use of other manufacturers' flexible disk drives is
accommodated also, with the limitation that after any
"write data" operation, the CPU must delay 500 P.s
before issuing another read or write command (due to
the "delayed-erase" magnetic head). Therefore, use of
multi-sector "write data" commands is only possible
with the SA 800-1 drive.

Write Operations - During write operations, the interface board outputs the data and clock bits to. the
selected drive at the proper times, and generates the
CRC characters' which are then appended to the data_
Memory Operations - When the diskette controller
requires access to the system memory, the interface
board requests and maintains DMA transfer control of
the system bus, and generates the appropriate memory
command. The interface board also acknowledges I/O
commands as required by the MULTI BUS system bus.

Programming Capability
10PB Function - The I/O Parameter Block (IOPB) has
been designed to allow simplified I/O programming
where necessary, and to facilitate a high level of sophistication in system-level I/O drivers in more complex
systems. All diskette operations are initiated by an Intel
single board computer with standard 110 commands.
Once initiated, however,the diskette controller completes the specified operation without further intervention on the part of the CPU. Only three general steps are
performed by the CPU to complete any diskette operation:

Channel Board
Channel Board Function - The channel board is the
primary control module within the diskette controller. It
receives, decodes, and responds to channel commands
from the central processor unit (CPU) on the Intel iSBC
Single board computer. The channel board can access a
block of system memory to determine the particular
diskette operations to be performed and fetch the
parameters required for the successful completion of
the specified operation.

1. The CPU must prepare and store in system memory
an 10PB for each operation to be performed.

Control Function - The control functions of the channel board have been achieved with an 8-bit micropro'
grammed processor, designed with Intel's Series 3000
Bipolar Microcomputer Set. This 8-bit 'processor
includes four 3002 central processing elements (2-bit
slice per CPE), a 3001 microprogram control.unit, and
512 x 32 bits of3604A programmable read-only-memory
(PROM) which stores the microprogram'. It is the execution of the microprogram by the microcomputer set
which actually effects the control capability of the channel board.

2. The CPU then passes the memory address of the
10PB to the diskette controller.
.
3. The CPU., must process the resultant information
from the diskette controller upon ,completion of the
operation.
IOPB Format ....,.In preparing the IOPB, the CPU requires
nCl interaction with the diskette controller. The IOPB is
prepared as any block of data in memory would be prepared, utilizing the following formal for the 7-byte
parameter block:
<

Interface Board

Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Interface Board Function - The interface board provides the iSBC 202 Double Density Diskette Controller
with a means of communicating with the diskette
drives, as well as with the system bus. Under control of
the microprogram being executed on the channel board,
the interface board generates those signals which
cause the read/write head on the selected drive to be

5-2
.

"'"

Command
Channel word
Diskette instruction
Number of sectors
Track address
Sector address
Buffer address (lower)
Buffer address (upper)

iSBC 202
Environmental Characteristics

SPECI FICATIONS

Temperature
Operating: O·C to 55·C
Non·Operating: - 55·C to + 85·C

Media
Flexible diskette
One recording surface
77 tracks/diskette
52 sectors/track
128 bytes/sector
512,512 bytes/diskette

Humidity
Operating: Up to 90% relative humidity without conden·
sation
Non·Operating: All conditions without condensation of
water or frost

Physical Characteristics
Equipment Supplied

Mounting - Occupies two slots of System 80 chassis
or iSBC 604/614 cardcage, uses P2 connectors for Inter·
board communication.
Height (ea) - 6.75 in. (17.15 mm)
Width (ea) - 12.00 In. (30.48 mm)
Depth (ea) - 0.50 In. (1.27 mm)
Weight (ea) -

DDFDC channel board
DDFDC interface board
Dual auxiliary board connector (P2 socket)

Reference Manuals
9800420 - iSBC 202 Hardware Reference Manual (NOT
SUPPLIED)

Electrical Characteristics

Reference manuals are shipped with each product only
if designated SUPPLIED (see above). Manuals may be
ordered from any Intel sales representative, distributor
office or from Intel Literature Department, 3065 Bowers
Avenue, Santa Clara, California 95051

DC Power Requirements
Channel Board: 5V @ 3.75A typ, 5A max
I nterface Board: 5V @ 1.5A typ, 2.5A max; - 5V @ 0.1 A
typ, 0.2A max

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

SBC 202

Double Density Diskette Controller

5·3

·iSBC 204
SINGLE DENSITY FLEXIBLE DISKETTE CONTROLLER
• Full compatibility with iSBC 80, iSBC
86, and iSBC 88 Single Board
Computers
'
,

• DMA input/output allows single board
computers to process in parallel With
diskette transfer ()perations

• Direct compatibility with most single-.
density" soft-sectored standard- (8")
and mini-size (51A1") flexible diskette
drives
• Software supported by RMXl80 and"
RMXl86 Real-Time Multitasking
ExecutiVE!, disk file system .

• Programmable track-to-track access,
head-settling, and. head-load tim~s '
• On-board data separation logic
• Read, write, verify, and search on single
or multiple sectors;
• Single

+ 5V

supply

The Intel iSBC 204 Single Density Flexible Diskette Controller is a single board universal·diskette controller capable of
supporting virtually any software-sectored, single density diskette drive. The standard iSBC 204 Controller can control
two drive surfaces (two single-sided drives or one double-sided drive). With the addition'of asecorid (optional) ·Iritel
8271 component, up to four drives can be supported. In addition to the standard IBM 3740 formats, the controller supports sector lengths of up to 4096 bytes plus mini-size drive formats. The iSBC 204's wide range of drive compatibility
is achieved without compromising performance. The operating characteristics (track-to-track access, head-load, and
head-settling times) are specified under user program control. The controller can' read, write, verify, and search either
single or multiple sectors.

..,.

iSBC 204
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Interface Characteristics

Intel's 8271 Floppy Disk Controller (FDC) circuit is the
heart of the iSBC 204 Controller. On-board data separation logic performs standard FM encoding and
decoding, obviating external separation circuitry at the
drive. Diskette data transfers are DMA (direct memory
access) through an on-board intel 8257 DMA controller
circuit which manages DMA transfers and signals the
master iSBC processor on completion of the transfer. A
block diagram of the iSBC 204 Controller is shown in
Figure 1.

Expandability - Each standard iSBC 204 Controller includes a single 8271 FDC circuit capable of supporting
two drive surfaces. Optionally the iSBC 204 may be expanded to support four single-sided (or two doublesided) drives with the insertion of a second 8271 component into an on-board socket.
Simplified Interface - The cables between the iSBC 204
Controller and the drivels) may be either low cost, flat
ribbon cable with mass termination connectors or
twisted pair conductors with individually wired conp.ecttors. An on-board, cross-connect matrix allows optional
drive control and status signals to be connected while
maintaining pin-to-pin compatibility.

Universal Drive and MULTIBUS Compatib,lity
Because the iSBC 204 Controller has universal drive
compatibility, it can be used to control virtually any
standard- or mini-sized single density diskette drive.
Moreover, the iSBC 204 Controller fully supports the
microcomputer industry standard' MULTIBUS system
bus and can be used with. any single board computer or
system compatible with Intel's bus. Because the iSBC
204 Controller is programmable, its performance is not
compromised by its universal drive compatibility. The
track-to-track access, head-load, and head-settling
characteristics of the selected drive model are program
specified. Data may be organized in a fully compatible
IBM 3740 sector format, in sectors up to' 4096 bytes in
length, or in formats compatible with the mini-sized
diskette drives.

Programming
The powerful 8271 FDC circuit is capable of executing
high-level commands that simplify system software
development. The device can read, write, and verify both
single and multiple sectors. CRC characters are generated and checked automatically. Up to two tracks on
each surface may be designated "bad" and logically
removed from the diskette.
Sector Scanning - Scan commands permit sectors to
be searched for a specified data pattern or "key". During
scan operations the pattern image from memory is continuously compared with a sector or multiple sectors

BUS
CONTROLLER

8257
DMA
CONTROLLER

AD, A1

8271·
FDC

13
TO
DRIVE

MULTIBUS
P1

ADDRESS

AD-A7

DRIVERS

ADRo/·AD131

13
TO

: DRIVE

AO,A1

IN~~~:~:T I - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - j
'-----'

Figure 1. iSBC 204 Single Density Diskette Controller Block Diagram

5-5

iSBC204
read from the diskette. No CPU intervention is required
until a match is found or all specified sectors have been
searched.

ing systems. Files are named symbolically and may be
created, deleted, or changed.

Program Initiation - All diskette operations are in·
itiated by standard input/output (I/O) port operations
through an iSBC single board computer. System software first initializes the controller with the operating
characteristics of the ·selected drive. The diskette is
then formatted under program control. For subsequent
transfers,. the starting memory address and transfer
mode are specified for the DMA controller. Data
transfers occur in response to.commands output by the
CPU.

Data may be accessed sequentially or directly. An un·
limited number of files can be open simultaneously and
multiple tasks may read the same file concurrently. A
listing of service functions included under RMX/BO and
RMX/86 is shown In Table 1.
Table 1. Services Available Under RMXJ80 and RMXJ86
Operation

Funcllon
Open
Read
Write
Seek
Close
Delete

Data Transfer - Once a diskette transfer operation has
been initiated, the controller acts as a bus master and
transfers data over the MULTIBUS at high speed .. No
CPU intervention Is required until the transfer is complete as indicated either by the generation of an Interrupt on the bus or by examination of a "done" bit by the
CPU.

RMX/80 and RMX/86 Real·Time Executive
Software Support

Rename
Format
Load

The iSBC 204 Controller is supported by the disk file
system of RMX/BO and RMX/B6, Intel's real-time operat·

Disk I/O

Prepares a file for processing.
Transfers data from open file to memory.
Transfers data from memory to open file.
Enables direct access.
Terminates processing of file.
Removes file from directory, releases its
space.
Changes name of file.
Initializes a new disk.
Reads a file of executable code into
memory.
Performs basic I/O operations.

Data Organization and Capacity

SPECI FICATIONS

(Standard Size Drives)
IBM Format

Compatibility
CPU - Any iSBC MULTI BUS computer or system mainframe.
Drive -

Bytes per sector

128

Sectors per track

Non·IBM Format
1024
4

I
I

2048
2

I
I

Up to 255

Bytes per diskette
(77 tracks)

256,256
(128·byte sector)
295,680
. (256·byte sector)
315,392
(512-byte sector)

315,392

4096
'1

Drive Characteristics
Standard Size
Transfer rate (KBfsec)
Disk speed (RPM)

CDC 9404
GSI110
MEMOREX 550
MEMOREX 552 (dual·sided)
SHUGART 800
SHUGART 850 (dual·slded)
WANGCO 765
PERTEC 650 (SOlDO, DBL. Head)

I 512
I 8

Single density, standard- (B") and mini-sized

Standard Size

256

Tracks per diskette

(51/4") diskette drives. The standard iSBC 204 Controller

supports two single·sided drives or one double-sided
drive. By adding an (optional) 8271 FDC, four single·
sided or two double·sided drives may be supported. The
following drives are known to be compatible:

I
I

Track-to·track access
(programmable)

Mini Size
PERTEC FD200
SHUGART SA400
WANGC082

Mini Size

250

125

360
1 to 255 ms
in 1 ms steps

300

o to 255 ms

2 to 510 ms
In 2 ms steps

Head settling time
(programmable)

in 1 ms steps

Ot0510ma
in 2 ms steps

Head load time
(programmable)

o to 60 ms
In 4 ms steps

Oto 120ms
In 8 ms steps

Equipment Supplied
ISBC 204 Controller
Reference Schemallc
Controller-to-drive cabling arid connectors are not supplied with the iSBC 204 Controller. Cables can be
fabricated easily using either flat ribbon cable or
twisted pair conductors with commercially available
connectors as described in the iSBC 204 Hardware
. Reference Manual.

Diskette - Unformatted IBM Diskette 1 (or equivalent
single-sided); unformatted IBM Diskette 2 (or equivalent
double-sided); unformatted Shugart SA104 Diskette (or
equivalent mini).

5-6

iSBC204
Optional Equipment

Environmental Characteristics

8271 Flexible Diskette Controller Component - Addi ng
a second 8271 device to the fully tested circuit on the
iSBC 204 Controller allows four drive surfaces to be sup·
ported.

Temperature - O°C to 55°C (operating); - 55°C to
+ 85°C (non·operating)
Humidity - Up to 90% relative humidity without con·
densation (operating); all conditions without condensa·
tion or frost (non·operating)

Physical Characteristics

Reference Manuals

Width - 6.75 in. (17.15 em)
Height - 0.5 in. (1.27 em)
Length - 12.0 in. (30.48 em)
Shipping Weight - 1.75 Ib (0.80 kg)
Mounting - Occupies one slot of iSBC system chassis
or iSBC 604/614 cardcage.

9800568 - iSBC 204 Diskette Controller Hardware Ref·
erence Manual (NOT SUPPLIED).
9800522 - RMX/80 User's Guide (NOT SUPPLIED).
Reference manuals are shipped with each product only
if designated SUPPLIED (see above). Manuals may be
ordered from any Intel sales representative, distributor
office or from Intel Literature' Department, 3065 Bowers
Avenue, Santa Clara, California 95051.

Electrical Characteristics
Power Requirements -

5.0V (± 5%), 2.5A max

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

SBC 204

Universal Flexible Diskette
Controller

5·7

')SBC 208
FLEXIBLE DISK CONTROLLER
• Compatible with: all iSBC 80,iSBe 86,
and iSBC. ,88 Single
. .Board Computers
..
' . '

• Phase lock loop data separator assures
maximum data integrity.
'
.

• Cor,trols most si,rlgle anddou~le
densi~y

• Read, write, verify, and search on single
or multiple sectors
....

diskette drives

• On-board iSBX' bus for additional
functions

• Single + 5V Supply

• User-programmable drive parameters
allow wide choice of drives

• Capable of addressing 16M bytes of
system memory
,

The Intel iSBC 208 Flexible Disk Controller is a diskette controller capable of supporting virtually any softsectored, double density or single density diskette drive. The standard controller can control up to four
drives with up to eight surfaces. In addition to the standard IBM 3740 formats and IBM System 34 formats,
the controller supports sector lengths of up to 8192 bytes. The iSBC 208 board's wide range of drive
compatibility is achieved without compromising performance. The operating characteristics are specified
under user program control. The controller can read, write, verify, and search either single or multiple
sectors. Additional capability such as parallel or serial 1/0 or special math functions can be placed on the
iSBC208 board by utilizing the iSBX bus connection.

5-8

iSBC208

Universal Drives and the iSBC 208
Controller

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Because the iSBC 208 Controller has universal
drive compatibility, it can be used to control virtu·
ally any standard· ormini·sized diskette drive. More·
over, the iSBC 208 Controller fully supports the
iSBX bus and can be used with any iSBX module
compatible with this bus. Because the iSBC 208
Controller is programmable, its performance is not
compromised by its universal drive compatibility.
The track·to·track access, head·load, and head·
unload characteristics of the selected drive model
are program specified. Data may be organized in
sectors up to 8192 bytes in length.

Intel's 8272 Floppy Disk Controller (FDG) circuit is
the heart of the iSBC 208 Controller. On·board
data separation logic performs standard MFM
(double density) and FM (single density) encoding
and decoding, eliminating the need for external
separation circuitry at the drive. Data transfers
between the controller and memory are managed
by a DMA device which completely controls trans·
fers over the MULTIBUS system bus. A block dia·
gram of the iSBC 208 Controller is shown in
Figure 1.

STANDARD DRIVES
(B")

MINI·DRIVES
(5%")

J2
CONNECTOR

Jl
CONNECTOR

I
f-----+

ISBX
CONNECTOR

DATA BUS(B)

JI
-

I
AUX
PORT

TIMING
PLL

i 0
1

(16)

f-----+
l-

B272
FDC

.--

SEGMENT
REGISTER

I
B21B
BUS
CONTROLLER

ADDER

(20)

I
(16)

ADDRESS
BUFFER

(24)

B237
DMAC

I-

10
DECODE

DATA
BUFFER

ADDRESS
BUS

(B)

DATA
BUS

...

MULTIBUS SYSTEM BUS Pl

...
Figure 1. iSBC 208 Flexible Disk Controller Block Diagram

5·9

iSBC 208

Interface Characteristics
The standard iSBC 208 Controller includes an
Intel 8272 Floppy Disk Controller chip which supports up to four drives, single or double sided.
SIMPLIFIED INTERFACE-The cables between
the iSBC 208 Controller and the drive(s) may below
cost, flat ribbon cable with mass termination connectors. The mechanical interface to the board is
a right-angle header with locking tabs for security
of connection.
PROGRAMMING-The powerful 8272 FDC circuit
is capable of executing high-level commands that
simpl ify system software development. The
device can read, write, and verify both single and
multiple sectors. CRC characters are generated
and checked automatically. Recording density is
selected at each Read and Write to support the
industry standard technique of recording basic
media information on Track 0 of Side 0 in single
density, and then switching to double density (if
necessary) for operations on other tracks.
Program Initiation-All diskette operations are
initiated by standard inputloutput (1/0) port operations through an iSBC single board computer.

System software first initializes the controller
with the operating characteristics of the selected
drive. The diskette is then formatted under program control. For subsequent transfers, the starting memory address and transfer mode are specified for the DMA controller. Data transfers occur
in response to commands output by the CPU.
Data Transfer-Once a diskette transfer operation
has been initiated, the controller acts as a bus
master and transfers data over the MULTIBUS at
high speed. No CPU intervention is required until
the transfer is complete as indicated either by th.e
generation of an interrupt on the bus or by examination of a "done" bit by the CPU.

iSBX BUS SUPPORT - One connector is available
on the iSBC 208 board which supports the iSBX
system bus. This connector supports single-byte
transfer as well as higher-speed transfers supervised by the DMA controller. Transfers may take
place in polled or interrupt modes, user-selected.
The presence of the iSBX bus allows many different functions to be added to the board. Serial 1/0,
parallel 1/0 and various special-purpose math
functions are only a few of the c'apabilities available on iSBX MULTIMODULE boards.

Equipment Supplied

SPECIFICATIONS

iSBC 208 Controller
Reference Schematic
Controller-to-drive cabling and connectors are not
supplied with the controller. Cables can be fabricated with flat cable and commercially-available
connectors as described in the iSBC 208 Hardware Reference Manual

Compatibility
CPU-Any iSBC MULTIBUS computer or system
.
main frame
Devices-Double or single density standard (8")
and mini (51/4") flexible disk drives. The drives
may be single or double sided. Drives known
to be compatible are:

Physical Characteristics
Standard (8")
143M
Caldisk
RFD4000
Remex
Memorex 550
MFE
700
Siemens FDD200-8
Shugart
SA 850
Pertee
FD650

Mini (5V2")
Shugart SA
Mieropolis
Pertee
Siemens
Tandon

Width-6.75 inches (17.15 cm)
Height-0.5 inches (1.27 cm)
Length-12.0 inches (30.48 cm)
Shipping Weight-i. 75 pounds (0_80 Kg)
Mounting-Occupies one slot of iSBC system
chassis or iSBC 604/614 Cardcage/Backplane.
With an iSBX MULTIMODULE board mounted,
vertical height increases to 1.13 inches (2.87
cm).

450 SA 400
1015-IV
250
200-5
TM-100

Diskette-Unformatted IBM Diskette 1 (or equivalent single-sided media); unformatted IBM
Diskette 20 (or equivalent double-sided).

Electrical Characteristics
Power Requirements- + 5 VDC @ 3.0A
5-10

iSBC 208

Data Organization and Capacity

Standard Size Drives

Double Density
IBM System 34

Single Density

Non·IBM

IBM System 3740

Non·IBM

Bytes per Sector

2§6

512

1024

2048

4096

8192

128

256

512

1024

2048

4096

Sectors per Track

Tracks per Diskette

Bytes per Diskette
(Formatted, per
diskette surface)

512,512
(256 bytes/sector)
591,360
(512 bytes/sector)
630,784
(1024 bytes/sector)

Drive Characteristics

630,784

256,256
(128 byte/sector)
295,680
(256 bytes/sector)
315,392
(512 bytes/sector)

315,392

Standard Size

Mini Size

Double/Single Density

62.5/31.25

31.25/15.63

Disk Speed (RPM)

360

300

Step Rate Time
(Programmable)

1 to 16 msec/track in
1 msec increments

2 to 32 msec/track in
2 msec increments

Head Load Time
(Programmable)

2 to 254 msec in
2 msec increments

4 t0508 msec in
4 msec increments

Head Unload Time
(Programmable)

16t0240msec in
16 msec increments

32 to 480 msec in
32 msec increments

Transfer Rate (K bytes/sec)

Environmental Characteristics

Reference Manual

Temperature-O°C to 55°C (operating); - 55"C to
+ 85°C (non·operating)
Humidity-Up to 90% Relative Humidity without
condensation (operating); all conditions with·
out condensation or frost (non·operating)

143078·001-iSBC 208 Flexible Disk Controller
Hardware Reference Manual (NOT SUPPLIED).
Reference manuals may be ordered from any Intel
sales representative, distributor office, or from
Intel Literature Department, 3065 Bowers Avenue,
Santa Clara, CA 95051.

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number
SBC208

Description
Flexible Disk Controller

5·11

inter
iSBC 215A1iSBC 215B
WINCHESTER DISK CONTROLLER
• Intel 8089 1/0 Processor provides DMA
channels plus user-programmable
intelligence

• Controls up to four 8" or 14"
Winchester disk drives
• Over 100 MB of storage per controller

• On-board diagnostics and ECC

• Two iSBXconnectors on-board

• Full sector buffering on-board

• Removable back-up storage available
through the iSBX 218 Flexible Disk
Controller

• iSBC 215A board controls open-loop
drives; iSBC215B board controls
closed-loop drives

• Will provide proposed X3T9_3 ANSI

• Capable of addressing 1 MB of system
memory

standard interface

The iSSC215 Winchester Disk Controller will enhance the mass storage capabilities of any iSSC 80, iSSC
88, or iSSC 86-based MULTISUS system. The controller will interface to industry standard 8" Winchester
disk drives currently available in formatted capacity from 4.5 to 26.7 MS. Recording densities are expected to increase rapidly in the near future and the iSSC 215 controller has been designed to accommodate these increases.
The iSSC 215 board will control up to four 8" 0(14" drives and is designed to conform to the proposed
X3T9.3 ANSI standard (currently in the final definition phase).
.
Two iSSX connectors are provided on the board to interface with the iSSX 218 Flexible Disk Controller,
providing upto 4 MS of removable storage.
Increased computing power made available in the iSSC board products has led to a requirement for larger,
more reliable mass storage subsystems. The Winchester disk controller provides a high capacity, low
cost disk solution that is well matched to single boai'd computer applications.

5-12

iSBC 215A/iSBC 215B

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

iSBX Interface
The software interface and data bufferingcapabilities used for Winchester drives are also available
for both iSBX MULTI MODULE interfaces. Software developed for the iSBC 215 controller can
also be used to transfer data to and from an iSBXcompatible 1/0 device.

Programming
Programming the iSBC 215 controller is simplified
by the use of memory-based parameter blocks. A
linked list technique is used, allowing the user to
perform multiple disk operations.

Full On-Board Buffer

Expanded 110 Capability

The iSBC 215 controller contains enough on-board
RAM for buffering one full data sector. The controller is designed to make use of this buffer in all
transfers. The on-board sector buffer prevents
data overrun errors and allows the iSBC 215 Winchester Disk Controller to occupy any priority slot
on the MULTIBUS.

The iSBC 215 controller allows the user to execute
user-written 8089 programs located in on-board or
MULTIBUS system RAM. Thus the full capability
of the 8089 1/0 processor can be utilized for customer 1/0 requirements.

ECC
High data integrity is provided by on-board Error
Checking Code (ECC) logic. When writing sector
10 or data fields, a 32-bit Fire code, for burst error
correction, is appended to the field by the controller. During a Read operation, the same logic regenerates the ECC polynomial and compares. this
second polynomial to the appended ECC. The
ECC logic can detect an erroneous data burst up
to 32 bits in length and using an 8089 algorithm
can correct an erroneous burst up to 11 bits in
length.

1-----------------------I
I
I

I
I
I

....

I
I
I

lOP

INTERFACE

I
I

LOCAL
BU.
INTERFACE

MULTIBUS

MUlTIBUS

SYSTEM

MEMORY
110 COMMUNICA·
TIONS BLOCKS

I
I
I
I
I .
I
L _________ 1!~~ .!I~~S.!!:~I~~N~O..!:!:~ __________ J
ROM

Block Diagram of iSBC 215 Winchester Disk Controller

5-13

RAM

iSBC. 215A/iSBC.215B

J1
Isec 215A

CONTROLLER
INTERFACE WITH SHUGART/QUANTUM DRIVES

INTERFACE WITH MEMOREXISHUGART DRIVES

L-_ _~~_""" CONTROL AND .....- - " " " ' - - - - - '

READIWRITE

READ/WRITE
CONTROL

INTERFACE WITH PERTEC AND PRIAM DRIVES

Controller to Drive Interfacing
5·14

iSBC 215A/iSBC 215B
MULTIBUS

Isac 215A121S8 ,
8" WINCHESTER DISK CONTROLLER

REMOVABLE BACKUP

:~-=-.::~==.::--=== _.=--=.::: __

r __
- _ _ _-=:..(°-fPTlNALI

iSBX BUS

CONNECTOR

iSBX 218
DOUBLE DENSITY
DISKETTE CONTROLLER

System Configuration (with Optional Diskette Backup)

Controller-to-drive cabling and connectors are not
supplied with the controller. Cables can be fabricated with flat cable and commercially-available
connectors as described in the iSBC 215 Hardware Reference Manual.

SPECIFICATIONS
Compatibility
CPU - Any iSBC MULTIBUS computer or system
mainframe
Disk Drives - Winchester Disk Drives; both openloop and closed-loop head positioner types_ The
following drives are .known to be compatible:

Physical Characteristics
Width- 6.75 in. (17.15 em)
Height - 0.5 in. (1.27 cm)
Length - 12.0 in. (30.48 cm)
Shipping Weight - 19 oz (54 kg)
Mounting - Occupies one slot of iSBC system
chassis or eardcage/backplane
With an iSBX MUL TIMODULE board mounted, vertical height increases to 1.13 in. (2.87 cm).

Open-Loop (iSBC 215A)
Shugart SA 1000 Series
Shugart SA 4000 Series
Memorex 100 Series
Quantum Q2000 Series
Closed-Loop (iSBC 215B)
Pertee 08000 Series
Priam 8" and 14" Drive Series
iSBX MULTIMODULE Boards

Electrical Characteristics

iSBX 218 Flexible Disk Controller
iSBX 350 Parallel 1/0
iSBX 351 Serial 1/0
iSBX 311 Analog Input
iSBX 328 Analog Output

Power Requirements
+ 5 VDC @ 3.25A max
-5 VDC @ 0.15A max1
+ 12 VDC @ 0.15A max 2
- 12 VDC @ 0.03A max 2
Notes:
1. On·board regulator and jumper allows - 12 VDC usage from
MULTIBUS.
2. Required for some iSBX MUL TIMODULE boards.

Equipment Supplied
iSBC 215 Winchester Disk Controller
Reference Schematic
5-15

iSBC 215A/iSBC 2158

Data Organization and Capacity
Sectors/Track 1
Bytes/Sector

Priam 8"

Priam 14"

Shugart/Quantum

Memorex

Pertec

128
256
512
1024

70
42
23
12

104
62
34
18

54
31
17
9

68
39
21
11

73
44
24
13

Nole 1. Maximum allowable for corresponding selection of bytes per seclor.

Formatted Capacity/Drive 2
Bytes/Sector

Shugart

Quantum

Pertec

Priam

Memorex

128
256
512
1024

7.08 MB
8.12
8.91
9.43

13.05 MB
15.74
17.17
18.60

23.29 MB
27.94
30.62
31.95

8.49 MB
9.74
10.49
10.98

Nole 2. Shugart SA 1004. Ouantum 02010. Priam 3450. Pertec D8000. Memorex 101.

Humidity - Up to 90% relative humidity without
condensation (operating); all conditions without
condensation or frost (non-operating)

Drives per Controller
8" Winchester Disk Drives -

Up to four Shugart,
Pertec, Quantum or Priam drives; up to two Memorex drives.
14" Winchester Disk Drives - Up to four Priam
drivers; up to two Shugart drives.
Flexible Disk Drives - Up to four drives through
the optional iSBX 218 Flexible Disk Controller
connected to the iSBC 215 board's iSBX connector.

Reference Manual
1215193 - iSBC 215 Winchester Disk Controller
Hardware Reference Manual (NOT SUPPLIED)

Reference manuals may be ordered from any Intel
sales representative, distributor office, or from
Intel Literature Department, 3065 Bowers Avenue,
Santa Clara, CA 95051

Environmental Characteristics
Temperature - 0° to 55°C (operating); - 55°C to
+ 85°C (non-operating)

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

SBC 215A

Winchester Disk Controller
(open-loop)
Winchester Disk Controller
(closed-loop)

SBC 215B

5-16

iSBX 218
FLEXIBLE DISK CONTROLLER
• iSBX MULTIMODULE controller
provides flexibility at low cost
• Controls most single and double
density diskette drives
• User-programmable drive parameters
allow wide choice of drives

• Phase lock loop data separator assures
maximum data integrity
• Read, write, verify, and search on single
or multiple sectors
• Single + 5V supply

The Intel iSBX 218 Flexible Disk Controller is a double-wide iSBX board diskette control.ler capable of
supporting virtually any soft-sectored, double density or single density diskette drive. The standard
controller can control up to four drives with up to eight surfaces. In addition to the standard IBM 3740
formats and IBM System 34 formats, the controller supports sector lengths of up to 8192 bytes. The iSBX
218 board's wide range of drive compatibility is achieved without compromising performance. The
operating characteristics are specified under user program control. The controller can read, write, verify,
and search either single or multiple sectors.

iSBX 218

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Interface Characteristics

Intel's 8272 Floppy Disk Controller (FDC) chip is
the heart of the iSBX 218 Controller. On·board
data separation logic performs standard MFM
(double density) and FM (single density) encoding
and decoding, eliminating the need for external
separation circuitry at the drive. Data transfers
between the controller and memory are managed
by the intelligent device (usually an Intel 8·bit or
16-bit CPU chip) on the host board. A block
diagram of the ISBX 218 Controller is shown In
Figure 1.

The standard iSBX 218 Controller includes an Intel
8272 Floppy Disk Controller chip which supports
up to four drives, single or double sided.

Universal Drive and iSBX 218 Controller
Because the iSBX 218 Controller has universal
drive compatibility, it can be used to control virtually any standard- or mini-sized diskette drive.
Moreover, the iSBX 218 Controller fully supports
the iSBX bus and can be used with any single
board computer which furnishes this bus.
Because the iSBX 218 Controller is programmable, its performance is not compromised by its
universal drive compatibility. The track-to-track
access, head-load, and head-unload characteristics of the selected drive model are program
specified. Data may be organized in sectors up
to 8192 bytes in length.

SIMPLIFIED INTERFACE-The cables between
the iSBX 218 Controller and the drive(s) may be
low cost, flat ribbon cable with mass termination
connectors. The mechanical interface to the
board is a right-angle header with loc~ing tabs for
security of connection.
PROGRAMMING-The powerful 8272 FDC circuit
is capable of executing high-level commands that
simplify system software development. The
device can read, write, and verify both single and
multiple sectors. CRC characters are generated
and checked automatically. Recording density is
selected at each Read and Write to support the
industry standard technique of recording basic
media information on Track 0 of Side 0 in single
density, and then switching to double density (if
necessary) for operations on other tracks.
SECTOR SCANNING-Scan commands permit
sectors to be searched for a specified data pattern
or "key." During scan operations the pattern image
from memory is continuously compared with a
sector or multiple sectors read from the diskette.

'5'

RESET
RD
WR
CS
AD

RESET
10RDI

IOWRI
MCSOI
MAO

MOROT
MDACKI

BUS

OPTO

MFM MODE

yeo

READ DATAl

CIRCUIT

RD DATA

PRE·SHIFTD

8272
FDC

DACK
TC

PRE-SHIFT1

CHIP

PAE·COMP

WAITE DATAl

we DATA'

MDO-

---------

we PROT 12 SIDED

WRITE PROTECT I

FAULTITAACKO

TWO-SIDEDI
FAULTI
TRACK 01

FL T RESET/STEP

DATAI-7

MD'

DATA
RECOVERY

SYNC

INT
ORO

MINTR1

Isax

DATA WINDOW

LOW CURRENT/DIR

MUX

STEP}

lOW CURRENTI
DIRECTION

BUHz
OSC

FLT RESETI

RiWfSEEK

•

READYI
WRITE ENABLEI
INDEXI
HEAD LOADI

1
WAITE

SIDE SELECT

CLOCK
OEN

US.
US,

~
MUX

Figure 1. Block Diagram of iSBX 218 Board

5-18

~
~

FLEXIBLE
DISK

DRIVE

iSBX 218

require a data transfer every 13 microseconds
(double density) or 26 microseconds (single density). Most CPUs will operate in a polled mode,
checking controller status and transferring bytes
when the controller is ready. Boards utilizing the
Intel 8080 chip, such as the iSBC 80/10B board,
will be restricted to single density operation with
the ISBX 218 Controller, due to these speed requirements. A programming example illustrating
the iSBC 80/10B handler Is contained in the Hardware Reference Manual.

PROGRAM INITIATION-All diskette operations
are initiated by standard iSBX bus input/output
(\/0) operations through the host iSBC single
board computer. System software first initializes
the controller with the operating characteristics
of the selected drive. The diskette is then formatted under program control. Data transfers occur In
response to commands output by the CPU.
DATA TRANSFER-Once a diskette transfer
operation has been initiated, the controller will

SPECIFICATIONS

Diskette-Unformatted IBM Diskette 1 (or equivalent single~sided media); unformatted IBM
Diskette 2D (or equivalent double-sided).

Compatibility
CPU-Any iSBC single board computer or I/O
board compatible with the MULTIBUS system
bus and implementing the iSBX bus and connector.
Devices-Double or single density standard (8")
and mini (5V4") flexible disk drives. The drives
may be single or double sided. Drives known
to be compatible are:

Equipment Supplied
iSBX 218 Controller
Reference Schematic
Controller-to-drive cabling and connectors are not
supplied with the controller. Cables can be fabricated with flat cable and commercially-available
connectors as described In the iSBX 218 Hardware Reference Manual.
Nylon Mounting Bolts

Physical Characteristics
Standard (8")
Caldisk
Remex
Memorex
MFE
Siemens
Shugart
Pertec

Mini (5V2 ")

143M
RFD4000
550
700
FDD 200·8
SA 850
FD650

Width-2.85 inches (7.24 cm)
Height-0.5 Inches (1.27 cm)
Length-7~5 inches (19.05 cm)
Shipping Weight-1 pound (0.46 Kg)
Mounting-Occupies one double-wide iSBX MULTIMODULE position on boards; increases
board height (host plus iSBX board) to 1.13
inches (2.87 cm).

450

Shugart

Data Organization and Capacity
Standard Size Drives
Double Density
IBM System 34

Single Density

Non-IBM

IBM System 3740

Non-IBM

Bytes per Sector

256

512

1024

2048

4096

8192

128

256

512

1024

2048

4096

Sectors per Track

Tracks per Diskette

Bytes per Diskette
(Formatted, per
diskette surface)

512,512
(256 bytes/sector)
591,360
(512 bytes/sector)
630,784
(1024 bytes/sector)

630,784

5-19

77
256,256
(128 byte/sector)
295,680
(256 bytes/sector)
315,392
(512 bytes/sector)

315,392

iSBX 218

Drive Characteristics
Standard Size

Mini Size

Double/Single Density

62.5/31.25

31.25/15.63

Disk Speed (RPM)

360

300

Step Rate Time
(Programmable)

1 t016 msec/track in
1 msec increments

2 to 32 msec/track in
2 msec increments

Head Load Time
(Programmable)

2 to 256 msec in
2 msec increments

4 to 512 msec in
4 msec increments

Head Unload Time
(Programmable)

oto 240 msec in
16 msec increments

oto 480 msec in
32 msec increments

Transfer Rate (K bytes/sec)

Electrical Characteristic·s
Power Requirements- + 5 VDC

Reference Manual
@

0.81 A

121S83·001-iSBX 218 Flexible Disk Controller
Hardware Reference Manual (NOT SUPPLIED).

Environmental Characteristics
Temperature'-:O°C to 55°C (operating); - 55°C to
+ 85°C (non·operating).
Humidity~Up to 90% Relative Humidity without
condensation (operating); all conditions without condensation or frost (non-operati ng).

Reference manuals may be ordered from any Intel
sales representative, distributor office, or from
Intel Literature Department, 3065 Bowers Avenue,
Santa Clara, CA 95051.

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number
SBX 218

Description
Flexible Disk Controller

5-20

iSBC 220
SMD DISK CONTROLLER
• Controls up to four SMD interface
. compatible disk drives
• 12 MB to 2.4 GB per controller

• On·board diagnostic and ECC

• Full sector buffering on·board

• Compatible with all iSBC 80, iSBC 88,
and iSBC 86 Single Board Computers

• Capable of addressing 1 MB of system
memory

• Intel 8089 1/0 Processor provides two
high speed DMA channe.ls as well as
controller intelligence

• SMDinterface available on 14"
Winchester, CMD,SMD and large fixed,
media drives

The iSBC 220 SMD Disk Controller brings very large mass storage capabilities to any iSBC 80, iSBC 88, or
iSBC 86 MULTIBUS system. The controller will interfaceto any disk drive conforming to the industry standard SMD interface. Using simplified cable connections, up to four drives may be connected to the iSBC
220 Controller Board to give a total maximum capacity of 2.4 gigabytes. The Intel 8089 I/O Processor simplifies programming through the use of memory-based parameter blocks. A linked list technique allows
the user to perform multiple disk operations.

iSBC 220

to 32 bits in length and using an 8089 alrogithm
can correct an erroneous burst up to 11 bits in
length.

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Full On-Board Buffer
The iSBC 220 SMD Controller contains enough onboard RAM for one full sector buffering_ The controller is designed to make use of this buffer in all
transfers. The on-board sector buffer prevents
data overrun errors and allows the iSBC 220 SMD
Controller to occupy any priority slot on the
MULTIBUS.

SMD Interface
High speed, reliable data transfers are a major
benefit of using the SMD interface. A data transfer
rate of 1.2 MB is accomplished by using separate
(radial) differential data line cabling for each drive.
Control signals are daisy-chained from drive to
drive.

ECC

Defective Track Handling

High data integrity is provided by on-board Error
Checking Code (ECG) logic. When writing sector
ID or data fields, a 32-bit Fire code, for burst error
correction, is appended to the field by the controller. During a Read operation, the same logic regenerates the ECC polynomial and compares this
second polynomial to the appended ECC. The
ECC logic can detect an erroneous data burst up

When a track is deemed defective, the host processor reformats the track, giving it a defective
track code and enters the address of the next
available alternate track. When the controller accesses a track previously marked defective, the
controller automatically seeks to the assigned
alternate track. The alternate track seek is totally
automatic and invisible to the user.

r-------------------------l
I
I

I
I

I
I
I
I

8089
lOP

I
I

lOP

MULTI BUS
INTERFACE

LOCAL
BUS
INTERFACE

I
I
SYSTEM
MEMORY
110 COMMUNICA·
TIONS BLOCKS

I
I
I
L ___________is.!.cE~M~~~~L~~A~ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _'J

Simplified Block Diagram of iSBC 22 SMD Disk Controller.
5-22

iSBC 220
TERMINATOR
DRIVE 0

DRIVE 3

DRIVE 2

DRIVEl

READ/WRITE
CABLE

CONTROL
CABLE

,------

--I
I

~"""'--::-;:":;"""",

I
I
I
I

P2
(NOT USEDI

L ________ _

I
I
I
I

MULTIBUS

Typical Multiple Drive System

SPECIFICATIONS

Electrical Characteristics
Power Requirements
+ 5 VDC @ 3.25A max
-5 VDC @ 0.75A max 1

Compatibility
CPU - Any iSSC MUL TISUS computer or system
mainframe
Disk Drive - Any SMD interface-compatible disk
drive

Note 1: On·board voltage regulator allows optional - 12 VDC
usage from MULTIBUS.

Equipment Supplied

Data Organization and Capacity

iSSC 220 SMD Disk Controller
Reference schematic

Bytes per Sector2 - 128 256 521 1024
Sectors per Track2 - 108 64 35 18
Note 2: Software selectable.

Controller-to-drive cabling and connectors are not
supplied with the controller. Cables can be fabri'cated with flat c~ble and commercially-available
connectors as described in the iSSC 220 SMD
Disk Controller Hardware Reference Manual.

Table 1. Drive Characteristics (Typical)

Physical Characteristics
Width - 6.75 in. (17.15 cm)
Height - 0.5 in. (1.27 cm)
Length - 12.0 in. (30.48 cm)
Shipping Weight - 19 oz (0.54 kg)
Mounting - Occupies one slot of iSSC system
chassis or cardcage/backplane
5-23

Disk (spindle) Speed

3600 rpm

Tracks per Surface

823

Head Positioning

Closed loop servo type, track
following

Access Time

Track to Track
Average
Maximum

Data Transfer Rate

1.2 megabytes/second

Storage Capacity

12 to 2.4 gigabytes

6 ms
30 ms
55 ms

iSBC 220

Environmental Characteristics

Reference Manual

Temperature - O°C to 55°C (operating); - 55°C to

iSBC 220 SMD Disk Controller Hardware
Reference Manual (NOT SUPPLIED)

+ 85°C (non-operating)
Up to 90% relative humidity without
condensation (operating); all conditions without
condensation or frost (non-operating)
Humidity -

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

SBC 220

SMD Disk Controller

12159 -

Re'ference manuals may be ordered from any Intel
sales representative, distributor office, or from
Intel Literature Department, 3065 Bowers Avenue,
Santa Clara, CA 95051.

Memory Expansion
Boards

uSBC 016
16K·BVllE RAM MEMORY BOARD
II!l

iSBC 80 RAM memory expansion
through the MUlTIBUS interface

• Jumper selectable starting address for
16K contiguous addresses

16K-byte read/write memory capacity

• Read/write data buffers

!ill

On-board hardware regresh for all
dynamic memory elements

• TTl compatible data, address, and
command signal interface

The iSBC 016 16K-Byte RAM Memory Board is a member of Intel's complete line of iSBC memory and I/O expansion
boards. The iSBC 016 interfaces directly to any iSBC 80 single board computer via the system bus to expand RAM
memory capacity. The board contains 16K bytes of read/write memory, implemented using 2107 dynamic RAM memory
components. On-board refresh hardware refreshes 64 bit positions of all 32 RAM elements every 14 microseconds.
Each refresh cycle utilizes memory for 735 nanoseconds. If a read or write cycle is in progress when a refresh cycle is
scheduled to begin, the refresh cycle is postponed until the end of the cycle. The iSBC 016 contains a jumper used to
select contiguous 16K-byte address segments starting in locations 0000, 4000, 8000, or COOO. Read/Write buffers
reside on the board to buffer all data written into or read from the memory array. All data, address, and command signals on the bus interface are TTL compatible.

6-1

iSBC 016

MEMORY
ARRAY

16K! 8

::==j::======~==========================~=====A~DD~RE~SS~B~US===== I
DATA BUS

CONTROL BUS

:~i~~~~E

Figure 1. iSBC 016 16K RAM Memory Expansion Board Block Diagram

SPECIFICATIONS

Physical Characteristics

Word Size

Width - 12.00 in. (30.48 cm)
Height - 6.75 in. (17.15 cm)
Depth - 0.50 in. (1.27 cm)
Weight - 1202 (415. 2 gm)

8 bits

Memory Size
16,384 bytes

Electrical Characteristics
DC Power Requirements
Vee = +5V DC ±5%
Icc = 1.2A typ; 1.5A max
Voo = +12VDC ±5%
100 = 0.7A typ; 1.0A max
V BB
-5V DC ±5%
IBB = 0.2 mA typ; 3.2 mA max

Cycle Times
Read Cycle - 735 ns max
Write Cycle - 1360 ns max
Refresh Cycle - 735 ns max

Interface
All address, data, and command signals are TTL compatible.

Environmental Characteristics
Operating Temperature -

Address Selection
Jumper selection of base address of 16K contiguous
memory block to reside in locations 0000, 4000, 8000, or
COOO.

Reference Manual
9800279A - iSBC 016 Hardware Reference Manual
(NOT SUPPLIED)

Connectors

Manuals may be ordered from any Intel sales representative, distributor office or from Intel Literature Depart·
ment, 3065 Bowers Avenue, Santa Clara, California
95051.

Edge Connector -86·pin double-sided PC edge con·
nector with 0.156-in. contact centers.
Mating Connector -

Viking 3KH43/9AMK12

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

SBC 016

16K-Byte RAM Memory Board

O°C to 55°C

6·2

iSBC 032/048/064
RAM MEMORY BOARDS
• iSBC 80 and iSBC 86 RAM memory
expansion through direct MULTIBUS
interface

• Auxiliary power bus and memory
protect control logic provided for
battery backup RAM requirements

• 32K, 48K, 64K bytes of read/write
memory (iSBC 032, iSBC 048, iSBC 064
boards, respectively)

• Jumper selectable starting address for
independent 16K·byte memory segments

• On·board hardware for refresh ola"
dynamic memory elements

• TTL compatible data, address, and
command signal interface

• Read/write data buffers

The iSBC 032, iSBC 048, and iSBC 064 RAM Memory Boards are members of Intel's complete line of iSBC memory and
I/O expansion boards. Each board interfaces directly to any Intel iSBC 80 or iSBC 86 single board computer via the
MULTIBUS interface to expand RAM memory capacity. The iSBC 032 contains 32K, the iSBC 048, 48K, and the iSBC
064, 64K bytes of read/write memory implemented using dynamic RAM memory components. On·board refresh hiHd·
ware refreshes a portion of RAM memory every 14 microseconds. Each refresh cycle utilizes memory for 585 nano·
seconds. If a read or write cycle is in progress when a refresh cycle is scheduled to begin, the refresh cycle is post·
poned until the end of the cycle. The iSBC 032 contains jumpers used to individually select two independent 16·byte
memory segments, and the iSBC 048 contains jumpers used to individually select three independent 16K·byte memory
segments starting on 16K·byte boundaries in one of sixteen 64K·byte pages. Read/write buffers reside on each board
to buffer all data written into or read from the memory array. All data, address, and command signals on the bus inter·
face are TTL compatible.

6·3

iSBC 0321048/064

READ/

WRITE

ADDRESS
BLOCK
SELECT

DATA

BUFFERS

JUMPERS

2,3,OR4
MEMORY
ARRAYS
(16K x 8 EACH)
CONTROL
(BUS

HANDSHAKE
& REFRESH
LOGIC)

ADDRESS

ADDRESS
DeCODe

ADDRESS BUS
DATA BUS
CONTROL BUS

}i \

MULTIBUS

L-j'NTERFACE

Figure 1. RAM Memory Expansion Boerds Block Diagram

SPECIFICATIONS

Memory Protect
An active·low TTL compatible memory protect signal is
brought out on the auxiliary connector which, when
asserted, disables read/write access to RAM memory
on the board. This input is provided for the protection of
RAM contents during system power·down sequences.

Word Size
8 bits and 16 bits

Memory Size
32,768 bytes (iSBC 032), 49,152 bytes (iSBC 048), 65,536
bytes (iSBC 064)

Physical Characteristics

Access Time

Width - 12.00 in. (30.48 cm)
Height - 6.76 in. (17.15 cm)
Depth - 0.50 in. (1.27 cm)
Weight - 14 oz (415.2 gm)

450 ns max

Cycle Times

Electrical Characteristics

Read Cycle - 700 ns max
Write Cycle - 600/1240 ns max
Refresh Cycle ....,. 700 ns max

DC Power Requirements
Voltage

Interface
vee= +5V ±5%

All address, data, and command signals TTL compati·
ble.

Voo= +,12V ± 5%

VBS = -5V ±5%

Normal System
Operation
(max)'
Icc=3,2A
100=600 rnA
leB= 10 rnA

AUX Power
RAM Access
(max)2

AUX Power
No RAM Access
(max)

1,7A
600 rnA
10mA

1.7,11
120 rnA
3 rnA

Address Selection

Notes

Jumper selection for independent 16K·byte, memory
blocks starting on 16K·byte boundaries in one of sixteen
64K·byte pages.
'

1. All current values apply to the iSBC 032, iSBC 048 or ISBC064 boards
and include AUX power.
2. RAM chips and RAM control logic powered via auxiliary,power bus.
3. Power necessary ~o refresh RAMs and maintain data, as after system
power f a i l u r e . '
.
,

Connectors

Environmental Characteristics
+ 55 'C

Edge Connectors - 86-pin double·sided PC edge con·
nector with 0.156-in. contact centers:
Mating Connector -

Operating Temperature - 0 'C to

Reference Manual

Viking 3KH43/9AMK12

9800488B - iSBC 032/048/064 Hardware Reference
Manual (NOT SUPPLIED)

Auxiliary Power
An auxiliary power, bus is' provided to allciw separate
power to RAM for syst'ems requiring battery back up of
read/write memory. ,Selection of this auxiliary RAM
power bus is made' via jumpers on the board.

Manuals may be ordered from'any Intel sales represe!)·
tative, distributor office or from Intel Literature Depart·
men't, 3065 Bowers Avenue, Santa Clara, California
95051.

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

SBC 032
SBC 048
SBe 064

32K'Byte RAM Board
48K·Byte RAM Board
64K·Byte RAM Board

6·4

iSBC 090™ MEMORY SYSTEM

•

128K, 256K, 384K, 512K, 768K or 1024
K·byte Capacities

•

Error Correcting Circuitry (ECC)
Provides Single Bit Correction and
Double Bit Detection

Error Logger and Display Isolates
• Single
Bit Errors to the Memory
Device Level
Selectable Starting Address
• Switch
on any 4K Byte Boundary

• Field Expandability

• 8·Bit or 16·Bit Word Transfer

The Intel® iSBC 090 Memory System is a random·access dynamic memory system to be used with Intel's MULTIBUS™
System and iSBC 80/86™ product line. The iSBC 090 Memory System can provide up to 1 Megabyte of memory in
256K·byte increments or up to 512K·bytes in 128K·byte increments. It consists of a MULTIBUS Interface Board and a
Series 90 Random Access Dynamic Memory. The Interface Board plugs directly into the MULTIBUS backplane, and
through four ten·foot cables interfaces the MULTIBUS system and the memory.
The Interface Board is a 12.0 inch. by 6.75 inch printed circuit board that occupies anyone slot in the MULTI BUS
backplane. It allows the user to select the beginning and ending addresses to which the iSBC 090 Memory System will
respond; it permits either 8·bit or 16·bit bus masters, or mixes of both, as well as supporting the normal read, write,
refresh, and inhibit RAM cycles of the MULTI BUS system. Operating power for the interface is supplied by the
MULTIBUS chassis and is not affected by increases in memory capacity.
The memory is a self·contained unit measuring 5.21 inches by 19.00 inches by 19.5 inches. It includes a memory
storage area, which provides up to 1 Megabyte of memory. In addition, its control interface provides sjngle·bit error
detection and correction, double:bit error detection, and refresh arbitration. The memory also includes an error logger
and error display, as well as its own power supplies and blower assembly. It is available as a rack mount system or a
table top system with either 115 or 220 VAC input power.

The fOllowing are trademarks of Inlel Corporation and may be used only to describe Intel products: Index, Intel, InSile, Intellec. Library Manager, Megachassis, Micromap,

MULTIBUS. PROMPT, RMX, UPI, J.lScope, Promware, MeS, ICE, ISeC, ISeX, MULTIMODULE and ICS, and the combination of MeS, RMX, ICE, iSSe, iSeX or ieS and a numerical
suffix. Intel Corporation assumes no responsibility for the use of any Circuitry other than Circuitry embodied In an Intel product. No other circuit patent licenses are Implied.
© INTELCORPORATION,1980
Jun~i~;:~

6.5

iSBC 090™

Interface Board. The switches allow the memory to be
any size, ranging from 4K-bytes to one megabyte,'starting and ending on any 4K boundary.

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The memory portion of the iSBC 090 Memory System
(Figure 1) provides the memory storage area and the error detection and correction functions for the system.

Error Logger and Display

The MULTIBUS Interface Board provides address compatibility between the MULTIBUS system and the
memory; supports the four types of data transfer across
the MULTIBUS interface; and generates the required
control and status signals. Interface Board address circuits permit ,the iSBC 090 System to fit any. addres~
space from 4K-bytes to one megabyte, starting at any 4K
boundary.

The Error Logger is a random-access memory which
stores (logs) ECC syndrome bits that identify the failing
bit and its location. The logger memory can store a maximum of 4096 single and double-bit errors. A display
panel shows error information for user reference.'
The error logger operates in three modes: log (write),
scan (read), and clear. In normal system operation, the
logger is operated in log mode and accessed only when
one or more of the syndrome bits go active, indicating
an error condition. The syndrome pattern identifying the
error and the address of the error location are stored in
the logger memory.

The Error Logger and Display records error, syndrome,
and status Signals, then on request displays them for
quick location of memory errors.

Capacity

To look at the stored error information; the logger is
placed in scan mode, taking it off-line. The logger
memory is sequentially scanned until error information
is reached. Scanning stops and the memory card identification, the card JOW, the data byte and the data bit are
displayed on the logger display panel. The scan can be
resumed using a scan control button.

The' iSBC 090 Memory System provides up to one megabyte of memory in 256K increments, or up to 512K-bytes
in 128K increments. Each 128K-byte or 256K-byte incre,
ment is provided by adding one memory module in the
memory. Five standard system cap'acities are offered:
128K, 256K,384K, 512K, 768K and 1024K-bytes. The
128K system can be expanded to 512K in 128K increments; the 256K and larger systems to 1024K-bytes in
256K-byte increments.

INSTALLATION
The MULTIBUS Interface Board plugs directly into the
MULTIBUS backplane. All operating power is furnished
through the MULTIBUS connectors. Interface to the
memory portion of the iSBC 090 Memory System is
made using four 50-pin flat-ribbon cables, supplied with
the System.

Addressability
The address space which the iSBC 090 Memory System
will occupy in the MULTIBUS addressing scheme is,
determined by two eight-position DIP switches on the

MULTIBUSTII
INTERFACE
,BOARD

Figure 1. iSBC 090™ Memory System; Block Diagram

6-6

iSBC 090™

The iSBC 090 is available as a 19·inch rack·mounted unit
with slide attachments or as a table top configuration
with side covers instead of slides.

Depending on the configuration selected, the memory is
connected to either 115 VAC, 50/60 Hz, single·phase, or
220 VAC, 50/60 Hz, single·phase power.

SPECIFICATIONS

Logic Levels Output

Storage Capacity

Logic High - +2.5V to +5.25V at 0.1 mA
Logic Low - O.OV to +0.5V at 16.0 mA

128K, 256K, 384K, 512K, 768K, 1024K bytes

Physical Characteristics

Word Length

iSBC Interface Board

8/16 bits plus 6 bits for ECC

Height
Width
Thickness
Weight

Operating Cycles
Read Cycle
Write Cycle
Inhibit RAM Cycle
Refresh Cycle

6.75 in. (17.15 cm)
12.0 in. (30.48 cm)
0.5 in. (1.27 cm)
3 Ibs. (1.4 Kg) (with interface cables)

Series 90 Memory System
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
Mounting

Read Access Time (8- or 16·8it Transfer)
450 nsec max (MRDC* to XACK*)

5.21 in. (13.2 cm)
19.0 in. (48.25 cm)
19.5 in. (49.53 cm)
30 Ibs. (13.5 Kg) max.
19-inch rack/table top (optional)

Electrical Characteristics

Write Access Time

MULTI BUS Interface Board

8·Bit Transfer - 485 nsec max (MWTC* to XACK*)
16·Bit Transfer - 150 nsec max (MWTC* to XACK*)

+5V±6.0%
2 Amps typical
3 Amps worst case

* MWTC = Memory Write Command
XACK = Transfer Acknowledge
MRDC= Memory Read Command

Series 90 Memory System
115 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 2.8A
220 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1.6A

(Reference MULTIBUS Manual 9800683)
Read Cycle Time (8· or 16·8it Transfer)

Environmental Requirements

485 nsec max

Ambient Operating Temperature - O°C to 50°C
Relative Humidity - 10 to 90% without condensation

Write Cycle Time

REFERENCE MANUAL

8-Bit Transfer - 700 nsec max
16·Bit Transfer - 400 nsec max

The iSBC 090 Memory System is supported by a full line
of documentation, as listed below:

Refresh Cycle Time (8· or 16·8it Transfer)

Logic Levels Input

111710, Technical Manual for iSBC 090™ Memory
System
111784, Technical Manual for Series 90 Random Access
Memory Systems with CI-9000 Control Interface

Logic High - +2.0V to 5.25V
Logic Low - - 0.5V to ± 0.80V

111764, Technical Manual for Series 90, CM-90
Dynamic Memory Module

450 nsec max

6-7

iSBC 090™

ORDERING INFORMATION
Model Number

Description

SBC-090-x*3F

128K Byte Multibus-compatible
dynamic RAM memory system with
ECC. Expandable to 512K Bytes using
CM-90200-F22 memory module
(below). NOTE: "x" in model no. must
be specified per table below to define
input voltage and chassis configuration.

SBC-090-x*1H

256K Byte Multibus-compatible
dynamic RAM memory system with
ECC. Expandable to 1024K Bytes
using CM-90100-H22 memory module
(below). NOTE: "x" in model no. must
be specified per table below to define
input voltage and chassis config uration.

SBC-090-x*3H

256K Byte memory system. Otherwise
identical to above SBC-090-x*3F.

SBC-090-x* 1K

512K Byte memory system. Otherwise
identical to above SBC·090-x* 1H.

SBC-090-x *3J

384K Byte memory system. Otherwise
identical to above SBC-090-x*3F.

SBC-090-x*1 L

768K Byte memory system. Otherwise
identical to above SBC-090·x*1 H.

SBC-090-x*3K

512K Byte memory system. Not expandable. Otherwis!l identical to
above SBC-090-x*3F.

SBC-090-x* 1M

1024K Byte memory system. Not expandable. Otherwise identical to
above SBC-090-x*1 H.

CM-90200-F22

128K Byte memory module for expansion of SBC·090-x*3F, H, or J.

CM-90100-H22

256K Byte memory module for expansion of SBC-090-x*1 H, K, or L.

NOTE
To order SBC 090, the "x" in model no. must be specified per the following table to define input voltage and
chassis configuration.
x=o for
x = 1 for
X= 2 for
x = 3 for

6-8

rack mount unit, 110 VAC
rack mount unit, 220 VAC
table-top unit, 110 VAC
table-top unit, 220 VAC

iSBC 094
4K·BYTE CMOS RAM MEMORY
BATTIERY BACKUP BOARD
I!i:I

iSBC 80 and iSBC 86 nonvolatile RAM
memory expansion through the
MULllBUS

[] Base address selectable to start on any
41( memory address boundary

c 4K bytes of low power static CMOS
RAM memory

o On· board rechargeable batteries and
charging circuitry for S6·hour data
retention

• On·board power·fail interface logic

Single

+ 5V power requirement

The iSBC 094 4K-Byte CMOS RAM Memory/Battery Backup Board is a member of Intel's complete Iine of iSBC memory
and I/O expansion boards. The ISBC 094 interfaces directly to iSBC single board computer via the system bus to expand RAM memory capacity. The board contains 4K bytes of read/write memory, implemented using 32 Intel 5101
CMOS RAM memory components. an-board rechargeable batteries and charging circuitry insure that data contained
In RAM will be retained for at least 96 hours after system bus power (+ 5V) is removed. Critical system parameters
stored in the ISBC 094 RAM will thus be saved during temporary system powerf!illures. Full power-fail interface logic
is provided on the board to generate a CPU Interrupt when system power fails. Orderly system shutdown procedures
may then be executed and critical system parameters may be retrieved and stored. The use of CMOS RAM on the iSBC
094 also reduces power dissipation during normal system operation. The iSBC 094 contains jumpers for use in selectIng a contiguous 4K-byte address segment beginning on any 4K memory address boundary (OOOOH, 1000H, 2000H,
etc.). Read/write buffers reside on the board to buffer all data written into or read from the memory array. All address,
data, and command signals on the bus Interface are TTL compatible.

6-9

iSBC 094

BATTERIES

MEMORY

ON-BOARD

BATTERY
CHARGER

I-

+5V

ARRAY
4K X 8

RAM
SELECT

ADDRESS
ADDRESS

BLOCK
SELECT
JUMPERS

DECODE

'------

POWER-FAIL
INTERRUPT
LOGIC

ACLOW
(FROM
I - POWER
SUPPLY)

i\
Y

ADDRESS BUS

DATA BUS
CONTROL BUS

MULTIBUS
I NTERFACE

Figure 1. iSBC 094 Memory Backup Board Block Diagram

vided for the protection of RAM contents during system
power·down sequences. This signal is automatically
asserted by the power·fail interface logic 3.6 ms after
the AC low signal is received from the system power
supply to signify that system power is beginning to fail.

SPECIFICATIONS
Word Size
8 bits and 16 bits

Memory Size

Address Selection

4096 bytes

4K segments starting at any jumper selectable base ad·
dress on a 4K·byte boundary (e.g., OOOOH, 1000H, ...
FOOO H). The memory will appear in every 64K·byte memo
ory page.

Memory Response Time
Operation

Access (ns, max)

Cycle (ns, max)

Read

750

900

Write

900

Mating Connectors
Pins
(qty)

Centers
(In.)

Mating Connectors

Bus'

0.156

Viking 3KH43/9AM K12

Auxiliary'

0.1

AMP PE5·14559 or
TI H311130

Intorfaco

Interface
All address, data, and command signals are TTL com·
patible.

Note

1. Connector Dimensions vary from vendor to vendor. Review vendor
specifications to ensure that connector heights and wire-wrap pin
lengths to conform to your system packaging requirements.

Power Fail Interrupt
Control logic is also included for generation of a power·
fail interrupt to the MULTIBUS interface, which works in
conjunction with the AC low signal from the Intel iSBC
635 Power Supply or equivalent.

Data Retention
96 hours minimum aiter + 5V bus power is removed.

Battery Characteristics
Memory Protect

Type - Nickel·Cadmium, rechargeable
Capacity - 150 mA hr
Voltage - 3.6V nominal

An on·board memory protect signal disables read/write
access to RAM memory on the board. This input is pro-

6·10

is Be 094
Battery Charger Characteristics

Environmental Characteristics

Charge Time
14 hours for full charge (150 rnA hr)
Full overcharge protection
Full short·circuit protection

Operating Temperature - O·C to 55·C

Physical Characteristics
Width - 12.00 in. (30.48 cm)
Height - 6.75 in. (17.15 cni)
Depth - 0.60 in. (1.27 cm)
Weight - 12 OZ (340.5 gm)

Reference Manual
98004498 -

iSBC 094 Hardware Reference Manual
(NOT SUPPLIED)

Electrical Characteristics

Manuals may be ordered from any Intel sales represen·
tative, distributor office or from Intel Literature Depart·
ment, 3065 Bowers Avenue, Santa Clara, California
95051.

Average DC Current
Vee = +5VDC±5%
lec=0.8A typ, 1.7A max

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

SBC 094

4K·Byte CMOS RAM Memory
Battery Backup Board

6·11

inter
iSBC 250™
1 Megabit Bubble Memory
Board
• Completely Assembled 1 Megabit
Bubble Memory System

• Average Access time 48 ms
• Automatic Error Correction

• Direct MULTIBUS™ Interface

• Power Fail Circuit Protects Bubble
Memory and Stored Data
• Fully Compatible with iSBC-80™ and
iSBC-86™ Single Board Computers

• Standard 6,75 x 12-inch SBC Printed
Circuit Board
• Non-Volatile Solid-State Memory

The iSBC 250 is a completely assembled 128K byte non-volatile memory utilizing the Intel Magnetics 7110 one
megabit bubble memory, 7230 current pulse generator, 7242 dual formatter/sense amplifier, and 7250.and
7254 coil drivers. Designed for interface with MULTIBUS systems, the iSBC 250 can be plugged into Intellec®
Microcomputer Development Systems.
Software provided on single- and double-density diskettes enables the user to perform maintenance fu nctions
or to perform reliability evaluation. Source code in 8080 Assembler Language for sample driver routine is
supplied on each diskette.
Error correction and power fail protection capabilities enable the iSBC 250 to be used in OEM systems as well
as in development applications.

6-12

inter

iSBC250™

written into the 7242 during system initialization. The
7242 uses the bootloop map to gate the data to insure
that bad loops are not written into and that data from
these loops are not read out.

iSBC 250™ FUNCTIONS
The iSBC 2S0 megabit Bubble Memory Board consists of a one megabit bubble memory cell and a
bubble memory controller based on integrated
circuits.

SOFTWARE
A set of object programs for exercising and maintaining the iSBC 2S0 is supplied on diskettes. These
programs can be used on any Intellec® Microcomputer Development System with ISIS-II ...

The controller for the iSBC board is made up of an
BOBSA microprocessor, PROMs and EPROMs .. The
BOBSA communicates with the host CPU through a
set of registers on the board via I/O commands. By
interpreting these registers, the BOBSA microprocessor controls timing and analog circuits to access
the bubble memory. Data are passed via a FIFO on
the board. An on-board clock generator (a crystalcontrolled oscillator and driver) allows the board to
function independently of the host CPU clock.

The programs are:
1. MASK-To create a bad loop map in a format
suitable for writing to a bubble memory chip.
2. UNMASK-To determine the correspondence
between a given bit in an input/output buffer and
the physical minor loop, given a bad loop .map.

The iSBC 2S0 board is address-decoded by an B20S
decoder. The controller address is selected by a
jumper option. Normal jumper configurations provide compatibility with MULTIBUS structures. The
host addressable registers are a 16 x B RAM, and the
addresses are controlled either by the host bus or
the BOBSA microprocessor.

3. VERIFY-To write bubble memory bootloop.
4. BUBBLE-To transfer data between bubble,
RAM or other devices in the system.
S. SEED-To regenerate seeds on the bubble.
6. TEST-To check the operation of the board. It
enables the user to perform device evaluations by
writing data in the 7110, reading the stored data
and indicating errors.

The bubble memory cell operates as follows:
The 72S0 coil predriver translates SV signals to 12V,
to drive the 72S4 quad transistor packs. These transistors in turn, drive the X and Y coils at the 7110
bubble memory.

In addition, a stand alone monitor is provided in
sou rce code form. It aliolNs the user to execute a set
of commands, such as, INITIALIZE, READ, WRITE,
ABORT AND SEEK for the purpose of demonstrating
the functions of the iSBC 2S0 in a Single Board
Computer or an Intellec® Microcomputer Development System environment.

The 7230 cu rrent pu Ise generator provides pu Ises to
the 7110 bubble memory and serves as a voltage
supply monitor. The 7230 device issues a POWERFAIL signal if either +SV or +12V power falls below
a preset safe operating threshold value.

Since the monitor software is in source code form, it
may be modified by the user to reside on any SBC
processor board or may be used as a model for the
user's OEM application software.

The 7242 dual formatter/sense amplifier communicates with the BOBSA-based controller, the 7230 current pulse generator and the711 0 bubble memory.
The 7242 formatter also provides internal errOr correction by means of a 14-bit Fire code. This code can
correct burst errors up to S bits in length, in each
.page. This error correction system significantly improves the· read error rate. A zero-suppression and
filter system is also incorporated between the· 7242
inputs and the 7110 detector outputs to further
minimize errors.

SYSTEM PROGRAMMING
The iSBC 2S0 appears as a peripheral device to the
processor. The processor communicates with the
iSBC 2S0 through two ports. The command, address
and status information through one of the ports, and
data is passed in the second port.
Data is organized as 204Blogical pages with 64 bytes
per page. Bubble addressing is done by page
number.

The board includes circuits to recreate seed bu.bbles
in the 711 0 bubble memory as needed. The iSBC 2S0
is designed to utilize the transparent redundancy
inherent in the 7110 magnetic bubble memory de~·
vice. The bootioop map information of the 7110 is

Data istrEmsferred in byte mode. Interrupt can be set
on completion of command or on encountering
error conditions.
6-13

AFN·Ol438A

iSBC250™

SPECIFICATIONS

Connector

Memory Size

Mating Connector: Control Data VPB01 E43DOOA 1
or Viking 2VH43/1AV5. 86-pin double-sided PC edge
connector with 0.40 cm (0.156 inch) contact centers.

128K bytes.

Interface
All address, data and control signals are Intel
MULTIBUS. compatible.

Electrical Characteristics
D.C.
+5
+12
-12

Power (Max)
Volts D.C. ±5%, 3.0A Max.
Volts D.C. ±5%, 0.5A Max.
Volts D.C. ±5%, 0.1A Max.

Physical Characteristics
Length:
Height:
Depth:
Weight:

30.48 cm (12 inches)
17.15 cin (6.75 inches)
1.45 cm (0.57 inch)
447g (16 ounces)

Environment
Operating Temperatlire: 'O-50·C for iSBC-250
10-50·C for iSBC-250-2

Performance

Equipment Supplied

Rotating Rate Field: 50kHz
Maximum Data Rate: 100K bits/sec
Nominal Data Rate: Read 35K bits/sec,
Write 41 K bits/sec
Average Access Time: 48 ms

iSBC 250 Bubble Memory Board
iSBC 250 Operation Manual
iSBC 250 Software (single and double density
diskettes).

Error Rates
Typical
Without
Correction

Calculated
With
Correction

Read

10-'

Data

10- 11

10- 1•
10-20

SYSCK

X, eLK
OUT

I-t+lf----+.rl

ADO-AD7
CONTROL

BOSSA

Figure 1. Block Diagram

AFN·01438A

iSBC 254™
BUBBLE MEMORY BOARD

• Non-Volatile Storage

• 128K Byte to 512K Byte Capacity on
Single iSBC™ Board

• Multiple I/O Modes, Including DMA

• 48MS Average Access Time

• Driver Software for Operation with
RMX 80/86

• Low Power Consumption
35 Watts for 512 KB Version

The iSBC 254™ is a non-volatile memory utilizing the Intel 7110 one-megabit bubble memory element. The
board is offered in three capacities: 128K, 256K, or 512K bytes.
The iSBC 254 can be operatedin three I/O modes: polled status, interrupt-driven, or DMA. The 128K byte version can operate at a maximum transfer rate of 12.5K bytes per second. The multiple bubble elements of the
256K byte and 512K byte versions can be accessed in parallel to achieve maximum transfer rates of 25K and
50K bytes per second, respectively.
The physical outline of the iSBC 254 is the standard 12 inch by 6.75 inch iSBC card format. The depth of the
board, however, is 0.62 inches, requiring two normally spaced card slots for adequate mechanical clearance.
Power requirements for the iSBC 254 are 4 Amps at +5 volts and 1.2 Amps at + 12 volts, maximum.

6-15

inter
iSBC 416
16K EPROM EXPANSION BOARD

• Allows iSBC 80 EPROM/ROM
expansion through the MULTIBUS
interface

• Switches enable or disable each
memory block
• Jumper selectable addresses for each
8K block

• Sockets for up to 16K bytes of Intel
2708 programmable and erasable .
PROM

• Buffered address and data lines

The iSBC 416 16K EPROM Expanslqn Board Is a member of Intel's complete line of iSBC memory and I/O expansion
boards. The iSBC 416 interfaces directly to any ISBC 80 single board computer via the system bus to expand EPROM
memory capacity. The board contains 16 sockets that can house Intel 2708 programmable and erasable EPROMs.
EPROM memory can be added in 1K-byte increments. The ISBC 416 contains a set of jumpers allowing the selection of
the base address of Independent 8K memory blocks, to begin on any 8K boundary. Switches are used to enable onboard memory in 1K block Increments.

6-16

iSBC 416

TIMING
CONTROL

~
~

PROM
READ REQUEST

SELECTED
ADDRESS

ADDRESS
CONTROL
BLOCK

-V

SOCKETS FOR
16K BYTES
OF
EPROM
MEMORY

UDATA

DATA LINE BUFFERS
ADDRESS BUS

DATA BUS
COMMAND BUS

~MULTIBUS

Ly/INTERFACE

Flgur/11. ISBC 416 PROM Expansion Board Block Diagram

. Physical Characteristics

SPECIFICATIONS

Width - 12.00 in. (30.40 cm)
Height - 6.75 in. (17.15 cm)
Depth - 0.50 in. (1.27 cm)
Weight - 12 oz (340.5 gm)

Word Size
8 bits

Memory Size
Electrical Characteristics

Sockets for up to 16K bytes. Memory may be added in
1K·byte increments.

DC Power Requirements
With 2608

Without

Compatible Intel Memory
+5V
-5V
+ 12V

EPROM - 2708

With 2708

Memory

Typ

Max

Typ

Max

O.75A

O,77A
O.OO1A
O:5BA

" O.79A
O,010A
O.9GA

O.B5A
O.4BA
O.BOA

O.91A
O.75A
1.04A

Interface
All address, data, and com'mand signals are TTL compatible and iSSC 80 bus compatible.

,Environmental Characteristics
Operating Temperature - 0 'C to 55 'C

Address Selection

Switches and jumpers allowing the selection of base
address for each independent 8K block of memory, on
any 8K'boundaries'

Reference Manuals

Connectors

Manuals may be, ordered from any Intel sales represen·
tatlve, distributor office or from Intel Literature Depart·
ment, 3065 Bowers Avenue, Santa Clar~, California
95051.

9800265A - iSSC 416 Hardware Reference Manual
(NOT SUPPLIED)

Edge Connector - 86·pin double·sidedPC edge con·
nettor,withO.156·in. (0.40 cm) contact centers.
Matlng'Connector - Viking 3KH43/9AMK12

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number Description
SBC 416

16K EPROM Expansion Soard

6·17

iSBC 464 or (pSBC 464*)
64K·BYTEEPROM EXPANSION BOARD

• Switch selectable base address on
4K·byte boundaries for each memory
bank

• Provides EPROM/ROM expansion of
iSBC 80 and iSBC 86 systems via direct
MULTIBUS interface

• Assignable anywhere within a 1
megabyte address space

• Sockets for up to 64K bytes of
EPROM/ROM
.

• EPROM/ROM components which are
not enabled are placed in standby
power mode

• Compatible with Intel 2758, 2716 or
2732 erasable PROMs and 2136E
masked ROMs

• Requires a single

+ 5V power supply

The iSBC 464 64K-Byte EPROM Expansion Board is a member of Intel's complete line of iSBCrnemoryand I/O expansion boards. The iSBC 464 board interfaces directly to the iSBC 80 or iSBC 86 single board computers via the MULTIBUS system bus, to expand system EPROM/ROM memory capacity.
. .

• Same product, manufactured by Intel Puerto Rico, Inc.

6-18

iSBC 464

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Memory Configuration

Memory Banks - When used in the 8 bit mode,the iSBC
464 board is organized into four banks (labeled A-D) of
four sockets each. Depending on the type of memory
components used, each bank may contain a maximum of
4K, 8K or 16K bytes of memory. Unused memory sockets
may be deselected by bank or individually in bank D. Peselecting a bank or individual socket frees that address
space for use elsewhere in the system. In the 16/8 bit
mode, banks A & Band C & D are paired together to form
two banks (labeled AB, CD) which are 16 bits wide. Each
of these banks has four socket pairs. Bank AB may be
deselected as a single unit. Socket pairs in bank CD may
be deselected individually. Thus, board configurations
using fewer than 16 memory components do not fill
memory address space with unused sockets. Selection/
deselection is accomplished by setting switches on the
board.

The iSBC 464 board contains sixteen sockets which provide a maximum of 64K bytes of memory expansion. The
actual capacity of the board is determined by the type
and quantity of EPROM/ROM components installed by
the user. The board is compatible with three different
sizes of Inte.1 EPROM/ROM devices. These are the 1K
byte 2758 EPROM, the 2K byte 2716 EPROM/2316E ROM
and the 4K byte 2732 EPROM/2332 ROM. Although only
one device size may be used, EPROM and ROM may be
mixed on the same board.
Mode of Operation - The iSBC 464 board can operate in
one of two modes: the 8 bit only mode or the 16/8 bit
mode. The 8 bit mode provides the most efficient
memory configuration for systems handling 8 bit data.
The 16/8 bit mode allows 16 bit words to be accessed by
16 bit processors. In the 16/8 bit mode, 16 bit and 8 bit
microprocessors may also access either the high order
byte or the low order byte of a 16 bit word. The mode of
operation is selected by placing two option jumper
blocks in the appropriate sockets.

ADDRESS
SELECTION
LOGIC

Memory Access Time - The iSBC 464 board operates
with one of 15 switch selectable memory access times
ranging from 35 to 1435 nanoseconds. This feature
allows the board to be tailored to the performance of the
installed components and the system CPU.

SOCKETS FOR
16K/32K/64K bytes
of EPROM/ROM
MEMORY

EVEN ADDRESS
DATA BYTES

I
I-----.....J'-.I
MULTIBUS
INTERFACE
LOGIC

I
I

CONTROL
LOGIC

I
I

I
I
I
I
1

ADDRESS
LINES

ODD ADDRESS
DATA BYTES

---l
I
I
1

I
I

1
1
1
1

OATS.
DATF

MULTIBUSTM

Figure 1. iSBC 464 Block Diagram

6-19

iSBC 464

Memory Addresses
Switch selectable options on the iSBC 464 board allow
the board-to be assigned anywhere'within a 1 megabyte
address space. In either operating mode, the base' ad·
dress of each memory bank may' beset,to any 4K byte
boundary within a 64Kbyte memory page. There is one
exception. If the 4K byte devices' are used in the 16/8 bit
mode,' then base addresses are restricted to 8K byte
boundaries. If the board is used in' a system with an
address range greater than 64K· bytes, memory on the
iSBC 464 board may reside in'one or two 64K bytemem·
ory pages. Any two pages out of a'possible 16 may be
chosen by setting switches on the board ..

Standby Power Operation
The iSBC 464 board. takes advantage of. the standby
modes of the Intel 2758, 2716, 2332, and 2732. When
they are not enabled,' these components draw as little as

SPECIFICATIONS

25% of their active level power with no degradation in
access time. The iSBC 464 board is designed so that
only two memory components are enabled during a read
operation.
' .

RAM Overlap
Memory banks ofthe iSBC 464 board can be overlapped
with the addresses of system RAM by setting on·board
switches. The process of addreSSing a memory bank
will'drive the inhibit RAM (INH1/) signal true. Thissigrial
is issued to the MULTIBUS system bus in order to pre·
vent any MULTIBUS accessableRAM in the system from
responding to the current address. If an EPROM/ROM is
addressed which has its corresponding RAM overlap
switch on, an access time of 15 clock cycles is impose<;l.
This allows overl,appeddynamic RAM to refreSh before
the addressor! the rviULTIBUS is changed. The RAM
overlap feat Li re does not apply to RAM which is not on
the MULTIBUSsystem bus.
.,
'

Mating Connector - Viking 3KH43/9AMK12 or compati·
ble connector

Word Size
8 bits or 16 and 8 bits

Physical Characteristics

Memory Size

Length Height Depth Weight -

Sockets are provided for up t6 16K bytes in 1K incre·
ments or 32K bytes in 2K increments or 64K bytes in 4K
increments

Compatible Intel Memory
ROM - 2316E or 2332
EPROM -2758 or 2716 or 2732

30.48 Cm (12 in.)
17.15 crn (6.75 in.)
1.27cm (0.5 in.)
294 gm (10.5 oz) without EPROM/ROM

Environment
Operating Temperature - O·C to + 55·C
Relative Humidity Limits - < 90% non·condensing

Interface - All 20 address, 16 data, and 6 control sig·
nals are TTL compatible and Intel MULTIBUS compati·
ble

Reference Manual

Electrical Characteristics

9800643A - iSBC 464 Memory Expansion Board Hard·
ware Reference Manual (NOT SUPPLIED)

DC Power (max)
Vcc: +5V DC ±5"10
Icc: 1,1 amps without EPROM/ROMs
Icc: 1,6 amps with (16) ?716sor 2758s
Icc: 1.3 amps with (16) 2732s
Icc: 1.35 amps with (16) 2332s
Icc: 3.0 amps with (16) 2316s

Manuals may be ordered from any Intel sales represen·
tative, distributor office or from Intel Literature Depart·
ment, 3065 Bowers Avenue, Santa Clara, California
95051.
'

ORDERING INFORMATION
Connectors
Bus - 86·pin double·sided PC edge cOnnector with 0.40
cm (0.156 in.) contact centers

Part Number

Description

SBC 464

64K EPROM Expansion Board

inter
iSBC 108A/116A
COMBINATION MEMORY AND
I/O EXPANSION BOARDS
• 8Kor 16K bytes of readlwrite memory
(iSBC 108A, iSBC 116A boards,
respectively)

.48 programmable 1/0 lines with sockets
for interchangeable line drivers and
terminators

• Sockets for up to 32K bytes of EPROM

• Synchronous/asynchronous communi·
cations interface with RS232C drivers
and receivers

• Auxiliary power bus and memory
protect control logic provided for
, battery backup RAM requirements

• Eight maskable interrupt request lines
with a pending interrupt register

• RAM and EPROM assignable anywhere
within a 1 megabyte address space

• 1 msec interval timer

The iSBC 108A and iSBC 116A Combination Memory and 1/0 Boards are members of Intel's complete line
of iSBC memory and 1/0 expansionboards. Both boards interface directly with any iSBC 80™ or iSBC 86™
single board computer via the MULTIBUSTM interface to expand RAM, EPROM, serial 1/0 and parallel 1/0
capacity. This mixture makes the iSBC 108A and 116A combination boards ideal for 'small microcomputer
systems where the on-board resources of a single board computer are insufficient, or for incrementing
the memory and 1/0 capacities of larger multiple board systems.

6·21

iSBC 108A/116A

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Memory Capabilities
The iSBC 108A board contains 8K bytes and the
iSBC 116A board contains 16K bytes of RAM implemented with eight dynamic RAM components.
An .intel® 8202A dynamic RAM controller is used
to provide all timing, control and refresh signals.
Starting on a 4K-byte boundary, RAM may be located anywhere in the MULTIBUS 1 megabyte
memory address space.
Both combination boards contain four 28-pin
sockets for adding up to 4K bytes (using Intel®
2708 or 2758 EPROMs), 8K bytes (using Intel® 2716
EPROMs), 16K bytes (using Intel® 2732 or 2732A
EPROMs) or 32K bytes (using Intel® 2764
EPROMs) of non-volatile read-pnly-memory. The
boards have been designed to also be compatible
with the forthcoming 64K EPROMs.

Parallel I/O Interface
Each combination board contains 48 programmable I/O lines implemented using two Intel 8255A
programmable peripheral interfaces. The system
software is used to configure the I/O lines in any
combination of unidirectional input/output, and bidirectional ports indicated in Table 1. Therefore,

the I/O interface may be customized to meet specified peripheral requirements. In order to take full
advantage of the large number of possible I/O configurations, sockets are provided for interchangeable
I/O line drivers and terminators. Hence, the flexibility
of the I/O interface is further enhanced by the
capability of selecting the appropriate combination
of optional line drivers and terminators to provide
the required sink current, polarity, and drive/termination characteristics for each application. The 48
programmable I/O lines and signal ground lines are
brought out to two 50-pin edge connectors that
mate with flat, round, or woven cable.

Communications Interface
A programmable communications interface using
Intel's .8251 A Universal Synchronous/Asynchronous
Receiver/Transmitter (USART)is contained on
each board. A jumper selectable baud rate generator provides the USART with all common communications frequencies between 75 Hz and 38.4 kHz.
The USART can be programmed by the system
software to select the desired asynchronous or
synchronous serial data transmission technique
(including IBM Bi-Sync). The mode of operation
(i.e., synchronous or asynchronous). data format,
control character format, parity, and asynchronous
serial transmission rate are all under program con-

USER OESIGNATED PERIPHERALS

.U. I~ ~ ~ ~·T D
n

4B PROGRAMMABLE

1'0 LINES

LINES

r---->"-----,

t. INTERAUPTSQRIGINATING FROM THE PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE
AND PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE ARE JUMPER SELECTABLE

Figure 1. iSBC 108A1116A Combination Memory and 1/0 Expansion Board Block Diagram
6·22

iSBC 108A/116A

trol. The 8251A provides full duplex, double· buffered
transmit and receive capability. Parity, overrun, and
framing error detection are all incorporated in the
USART. The inclusion of a comprehensive RS232C
interface on the boards in conjunction with the
USART provides a direct interface to CRTs, RS232C
compatible cassettes, and asynchronous and synchronous modems. The RS232C, serial data lines,
and signal ground lines are brought out to a 26-pin
edge connector which mates with RS232C compatible flat or round cables.
Optically Isolated Interface - The iSBC 530 Teletypewriter Adapter provides an optically isolated
interface for those systems requiring a 20 mA current
loop. The iSBC 530 may be used to interface the
iSBC 108A/116A combination boards to teletypewriters and other 20 mA currant loop equipment.

is full) or a character has been transmitted (i.e., output data buffer is empty). Two jumper selectable
interrupt requests can be automatically generated
by the USART when a character is ready to be transferred to the CPU (i.e., receive buffer is full) or a
character has been transmitted (transmit buffer is
empty). Two interrupt request lines may be interfaced directly from user designated peripheral
devices via the 1/0 edge connector. An on'board
register contains the status of all eight interrupt
request lines, and may be interrogated by the
CPU. Each interrupt request line is maskable
under program control. Routing for the eight interrupt request lines is jumper selectable. They may
be ORed to provide a single interrupt request line
for theiSBC 80/10B, or they may be individually
provided to the MULTIBUS interface for use by the
other iSBC single board computers.

Interrupt Request Lines

Interval Timer

Interrupt requests may originate from eight sources.
Four jumper selectable interrupt requests can be
automatically generated by the programmable
peripheral interfaces when a byte of information is
ready to be transferred to the CPU (i.e., input buffer

Each board contains a jumper selectable 1 ms interval timer. The timer is enabled by jumpering one of
the interrupt request lines from the I/O edge connectorto a 1 ms interval interrupt request signal
originating from the baud rate generator.

Table 1. Input/Output Port Modes of Operation

Mode of Operation
Unidirectional
Port

r-·

Lines
(qty)

Input

Output

Unlatched

Latched &
Strobed

Latched

Latched &
Strobed

X
X

Bidirectional

Control

X'
X'

Notes,
1. Part of port 3 must be used as a control port when efther port 1 or port 2 are used as a latched and strobed input or a latched and strobed output or port 1
is used as a bidi rectional port.
2. Part of port 6 must be used as a control port when either port 4 or port 5 are used as a latched and strobed input or a latched and strobed output or port 4
is used as a bidirectional port.

6·23

iSBC 108A/116A

SPECIFICATIONS

Serial Communications Characteristics

Memory Word Size

Synchronous - 5 - 8 bit characters; internal or
external character synchronization; automatic sync
insertion.

8bits only. 16-bit single board computers may use
this memory only for the storage of 8-bit data.

Asynbhronous - 5- 8 bit characters; break characters generation; 1, 1v" or 2 stop bits; false start bit
detectors.

Memory Addressing
EPROM - Up to 4K, 8K, 16K, or 32K bytes of readonly-memory may be located anywhere within a.1
. megabyte address range. The base address must
be locatedona 4K-byte boundary. EPROM addresses may not cross 32K-byte boundaries.

Interrupts

RAM - 8K .(iSBC .108A) or 16K (iSBC 116A) bytes
of .RAM may be located anywhere in a one megabyte address range. The base address must be
located on a 4K byte boundary. RAM .addresses
may not cross 32K byte boundaries.

Interrupt· Register Addresses
XX11nterrupt mask register
XXO
Interrupt status regi.ster
Note
XX is any two hex digits assigned by jumper selection.

Memory Response Time
Memory

Access (ns)

Cycle (ns)

RAM

450 max'

580 max'

EPROM/ROM

450 max

635 max

Timer Interval
1.003 ms ±0.1 % when 110 baud rate is selected.
1.042 ms ±0.1 % for all other baud rates.

• Without refresh contention.

Interfaces
Bus - All signals TTL compatible
Parallel I/O - All signals TTL compatible
Serial I/O' - RS232C
Interrupt Requests - All TTL compatible

1/0 Transfer Rate
Parallel- Read or write acknowledge time 575 ns max ..
Serial -

(USART)

Connectors

Baud Rate (Hz)
Frequency (kHz)
(Jumper Selectable)

Synchronous

Interface

Asynchronous
(Program Selectable)

Bus (PI)
+ 16
19200
9600
4800
2400
1200
600
300

307.2
153.6
76.8
38.4
19.2
9.6
4.8
6.98

Eight interrupt request lines may originate from the
programmable peripheral interface (4 lines), the
USART (2 lines) or user specified devices via the
I/O edge connector (2 lines), or interval timer.

38400
19200
9600
4800
6980

+64
4800
2400
1200
600
300
150
75
110

No. of
Pins

Centers
(In.)

0.)56

Viking 3KH43/9AMK12

MaUng Connectors

Parallel 1/0

0.1

3M 3415-000 or
TI H312125

Serial 110

0.1

3M 3462-000 or
TI H312113

Aux. Power (P2)

·0.1

AMP PE5-14559 or
TI H311130

NOTE: Connector heights and wire-wrap pin lengths are not guaranteed to conform to Intel OEM packaging.

1/0 Addressing
Port

Address

XX4

XX5

XX6

XX8

5 .

XX9

8255A
No.1
Control

8255A
No.2
Control

USART
Data

USART
Control

XXA

XX7

XXB

XXC or XXE

XXD or XXF

Nofe
XX is any· two hex digits assigned by Jumper .election ..

e'24

iSBC 108A/116A

Bus Drivers

Auxiliary Power
An auxiliary power bus is provided to allow separate
power to RAM for systems requiring battery backup
of read/write memory. Selection of this auxiliary
RAM power bus is made via jumpers on the board.

Function
Data

Commands

Memory Protect
An active-low TTL compatible memory protect signal is brought out on the auxiliary connector which,
when asserted, disables read/write access to RAM
memory on the board. This input is provided for the
protection of RAM contents during system powerdown sequences.

Physical
Width Height Depth Weight -

I/O Drivers - The following line drivers and terminators are all compatible with the liD driver sockets
on the iSBC 108A/116A board. Ports 1 and 4 have
25 mA totem-pole drivers and 1 kO terminators.
Characteristic

7438
7437
7432
7426
7409
7408
7403
7400
Nole·
i inverting: NI

Sink Current (mA)

I.OC
I
NI
I.OC
NI.OC
NI
I.OC
I

= non-inverting:

48
48
16
16
16
16
16
16

= open

OPTION

--,--_.rvv,....---------00

-12tS%

No EPROM or
Terminators

250 mA

2.9 A

70 mA

427085 and
8 Terminators

520 mA

3.6 A

180 mA

70 mA

4 27165 and
No Terminators

250 mA

3.3 A

70 mA

4 27325 and
No Terminators

250 mA

3.5 A

70 mA

175 mA

0.45 A

3 mA

20 mA

0.45 A

'3 mA

SBC 902 OPTION

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number
SBC 108A

Description
Combination Memory and
liD Expansion Board with
8K bytes RAM

SBC 116A

Combination Memory and
liD Expansion Board with
16K bytes RAM

VA.

Manuals may be ordered from any Intel sales representative, distributor office or from Intel Literature
Department, 3065 Bowers Avenue, Santa Clara,
Cal ifQrn ia 95051.

1klJ

VaB =
-stSCfo

Reference Manuals
9800862 - iSBC 108A/116A Board Hardware Reference Manual (NOT SUPPLIED)

-------------------------~------1 kU

Vee =
+5:5%

Environmental Characteristics
Operating Temperature - O°C to +55°C.

'5~~
sac 101

VDD =
+12t5%

Aux. Power
No RAM Access

collector.

3 3 D U " - - - - -.....----cc

32
32

Characteristics
12.00 in. (30.48 cm)
6.75 in. (17.15 cm)
0.50 in. (1.27 cm)
14 oz (397.3 gm)

Aux. Power
.. RAM Accessed

1/0 Terminators - 2200/3300 divider or 1 kO pullup.

220 U J330H [

Sink Current (mA)

Tri-S!at.
Tri-Stste

Electrical Characteristics
Average DC Current

Line Drivers and Terminators

Driver

Characteristic

6·25
0.

iSBC3()0 or (pSBC 300*)
32K·BYTE RAM EXPANSION MODULE
iSBC340 ()r (pSBC 340*)
16K·BYTE EPROM EXPANSION MODULE
• On·board memory expansion for iSBC
86/12A Single Board Computer:

• On·board memory expansion .
eliminates MULTIBUS system bus
latency and increases· system
.
throughput

• iSBC 300 module provi'des 32K bytes of
dual port dynamic RAM and plugs
directly into the iSBC 86/12Aboard

• Low power requirements

• iSBC 340 module provides sockets for
up to 16K bytes of additional EPROM
and plugs directly into the iSBC 86/12A
board

• Simple, reUable mechanical and

electrical Interconnection

The iSBC 300 32K·byte RAM e~pansion module arid the iSBC 340 16K-byte EPROM expansion module provide si~ple,
low cost expansion of the memory complement available on the iSBC 86/12A single board computer. Each module
utilized .individually o'r together can double the.iSBC 86/12A board's on-board RAM and EPROM memory capacity. The
(SBC 300 32K-byte RAM expansion module and the iSBC 340 16K-byte EPROM expansion module options for the iSBC
86/t2A board offersystem designers a new level ofJlexibility in defining'and implementing Intel@ single board computer systems. These options allow the systems designer to double the memory complement of an iSBC 86/12Aboard
with"a.minimum of system implications. Because they expand the memory configuration o.n-board, they can be accessed as quickly as the existing iSBC 86/12A memory by eliminating the need for accessing the additional memory
via the MULTIBUS system bus. With the iSBC,8'6/1;!Aboard mounted.in the top slot of an iSBC604 or iSBC 614 cardcage, sufficient clearance exists for mounting both the iSBC 300 and/or the iSBC 340 expansion module option(s). If
the iSBC 86/12A board is inserted into some other slot, the combination of boards will physically (but not electrically)
occupy two cardcage slots. Incremental power required by the options is minimal; for instance, only 305 mW is needed
for the iSBC 300 RAM expansion niodule.
...
,

'Same product, manufactured by Intel Puerto Rico, Inc.

6·26

iSBC 300/340
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
iSBC 300 32K·Byte MULTIMODULE RAM
The iSBC 300 module contains sixteen 16K-byte dynamic RAM devices, sockets for the Intel@ 8202A Dynamic
computer. It expands the iSBC 86/12A board's on-board
dual port RAM capacity from 32K bytes to 64K bytes.
The iSBC 300 module contains sixteen 16K-byte dynamic RAM devices, sockets for the Intel'" 8202 Dynamic
RAM Controller and memory interface latching. To install the iSBC 300 module, the latches and controller
from the iSBC 86/12A board are removed and inserted
into the sockets on the iSBC 300 module. The add-on
board is then mounted onto the iSBC 86/12A board. Pins
extending from the controller's and latches' sockets
mate with the devices' sockets underneath (see Figure
1). Additional pins mate to supply power and other signals to complete the electrical interface. The module is
then secured at three additional pOints'with nylon hardware to insure the mechanical security of the assembly.

To complete the installation, two socketed PROMs are
replaced on the iSBC 86/12A board with those supplied
with the iSBC 300 kit. These are the on-board memory
and MUL TIBUS address decode PROMs which allow the
iSBC 86/12A board logic to recognize its expanded
on-board memory complement.

iSBC 340 16K·byte MULTIMODULE EPROM
The iSBC 340 module expands the iSBC 86/12A Single
Board Computer's on-board EPROM capacity from 16K
bytes to 32K bytes. It measures 3.3" by 2.8" and consists
of a PC board with six 24-pin special sockets. Two of the
sockets have extended pins which mate with two of the
EPROM sockets on the iSBC 86/12A board. Two of the
EPROMs which would have been inserted on the iSBC
86/12A board are then reinserted in the iSBC 340
module. Additional pins also mate for bringing chip
selects for the remairiingEPROM devices (see Figure 2).
The mechanical interface is similar to that used on the
iSBC 300 RAM module and consists of two additional
mounting holes and the necessary mounting hardware.

The iSBC 340 module supports Intel® 2732 EPROM. One
section of the iSBC 86/12A on-board memory and
MULTIBUS address decode PROMs (the same decode
PROMs mentioned for the iSBC 300 module) is already
preprogrammed to support the iSBC 340 module with
Intel® 2732 EPROMs. This section is selected through
the EPROM configuration switches on the iSBC 86/12A
board. The iSBC 340 board can optionally be configured
by the user to support Intel® 2758 or 2761 EPROMs by
programming new iSBC 86/12A decode PROMs to support these devices. Necessary documentation and
PROM map listings are in the iSBC 86/12A Hardware
Reference Manual (order number 9803074-01).

MEMORY LATCHES
(FROM Isac 86112A)

Isec 86/12A
REPLACEMENT
MEMORY ADDRESS
DECODE PROMS
(SUPPLIED WITH
Isac 300 OPTION)

NYLON MOUNTING HARDWARE
(3 PLACES)
(SUPPLIED WITH isac 300 OPTION)

Figure 1_ Installation of IS'BC 300 MULTIMODULE RAM on ISBC 86/12A Single Board Computer

6-27.

iSBC300/340
iSBC 86/12A board +, iSBC 340 module (321< bytes
FEOOO-FFFFFH (using 2758 EPROMs);
max) FCOOO-FFFFFH{using 2716 EPROMs); F8000.,
FFFFFH (using 2732 EPROMs). '
"

SPECIFICATIONS'
Word Size
8 or 16 bits (16-bit data paths) ,

Memory Size

On-board EPROM/ROM is not accessible via the
MULTIBUS interface.

iSBC 300 ModulI!:'" 32,7,68 bytes of RAM
iSBC 340 Module:'" 16,384 bytes (max) of EPROM

AuxiliaryPower/Memory Pr(itection

Access Time'
iSBC 300 Module - Read: 1 ILsec, write: 1.2 ILsec
iSBC 340 Module - Standard EPROMs (450 nsec): 1
ILsec, fast EPROMs (350 or 390 nsec):800 nsec

The ,low power memory protection'option 'included on
the iSBC 86/12/i boards supports the iSBC 300 RAM
module.
.'
.'
"

"Local Only" Memory Protection
The iSBC 86/12A Single Boa'rd Computer supports
dedication of on-board RAM for on-board CPU access
only in 8K, 16K, 24K, or 32K-bytesegements. Installation
of the iSBC 300 option allows protection of 16K, 32K, 48K,
or 64K-byte segments.

Interface
The interface for the iSBC 300 and iSBC 340 module options is designed only for Intel's iSBC 86/12A Single
Board Computer.

M~mory Addressing

Physical Characteristics

On-board RAM
CPU Access
.
ISBC 86/12A boa,rd only (32K bytes) - 00000-07FFFH.
. ISBC 86/12A board + ISBC 31i0 module'(64K bytes) OOOOO-OFFFFH.
MULTIBUS, Access - Jumper selectable for any8Kbyte boundaiy, but not crossing a 128K-byteb9undary.

ISBC 300

'ISBC340

Width

5.75"

3.3"

Length

2.35"

2.8"

Height of iSBC8,6/12A
plus mounted option

On-board EPROM
ISBC 86/12A board only (16K-bytes max.) ~' FFOOOFFFFFH (using 2758 EPROMs); FEOOO-FFFFFH (using
2316E ROMs or 2716 EPROMs); and FCOOO-FFFFFH
(using 2332A ROMs or 2732 EPROMs).

~Includes·

.718
.13 oz.

Weight

.71/i·
,5 oz.

EPRO.Ms

All necessary mounting hardware (nylon, screws,
spacers, ,nuts) are supplied with each kit.

Figure 2_ Installation of ISBC 340 MULTIMODULE EPROM Option on ISBC86/12A Single Board'Computer

6-28

ISBC 300/340
Electrical Characteristics

Environmental Characteristics

DC power requirements:

Operating Temperature - 00 to +55 0 C
Relative Humidity - to 90% (without condensation)

Voltage

+5 ±5%

Isec 300

Isec 340

1 rnA

120 rnA'

+12 ±5%

24 rnA

-12 ±5%

1 rnA

Noto:
1. Loaded with Inlel 2732 EPROMs.

Reference Manuals
All necessary documentation for the iSBC 300 MUL TIMODULE RAM and iSBC 340 MULTlMODULE EPROM!
ROM is included inthe iSBC 86!12A Hardware Reference
Manual; order #9803074-01. (NOT SUPPLIED)
Manuals may be ordered from any Intel sales representative distributor office or from Intel Literature Department,
3065 Bowers Avenue, Santa Clara, CA 95051.

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number Description
SBC 300

32K byte MUL TIMODULE RAM

SBC 340

16K byte MUL TIMODULE EPROM

6-29

iSBC 301

4K·BYTE RAM
MULTIMODULE BOARD

• On-board memory expansion for iSBC
80/24 Single Board Computer to 8K
bytes
• Provides 4K bytes of static RAM
directly on the iSBC 80/24 board
• Uses 5 MHz (8185-2) RAMs
• Single + 5V supply

• 0.5 watts incremental power dissipation
• On-board memory expansion eliminates
MULTIBUS system bus latency and
increases system throughput
• Reliable mechanical and electrical
interconnection

The Intel® iSBC 301 4K-Byte RAM MULTIMODULE Board provides Simple, low cost expansion to double
the RAM capacity on the iSBC 80/24 Single Board Computer to 8K bytes. This offers system designers a
new level of flexibility in defining and implementing system memory requirements. Because memory is
configured on-board, it can be accessed as quickly as the existing iSBC 80/24 memory, eliminating the
need for accessing the additional memory via the MULTI BUS system bus. As a result, the iSBC 301 board
provides a high speed, cost effective solution for systems requiring incremental RAM expansion.
Incremental power required by the iSBC 301 module is minimal, dissipating only 0.5 watts.

iSBC 301

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The iSBC 301 board measures 3.95" by 1.20" and
mounts above the RAM area on the iSBC 80/24
single board con'iputer: It expands the iSBC 80/24
on·board RAM capacity from 4K bytes to 8K bytes.
The iSBC 301 MULTIMODULE board contains four
1K byte static RAM devices and a socket for one
of the RAM devices on the iSBC 80/24 board. To
install the iSBC 301 MUL TlMODULE board, one of
the RAMs is removed from the iSBC 80/24 board
and inserted into the socket on the iSBC 301
board. The add·on board is then mounted into the
vacated RAM socket on the iSBC 80/24 board. Pins

extending from the RAM socket mate with the
device's socket underneath (see Figure 1). Additional pins mate to the power supply and chip
select lines to complete the electrical interface.
The MULTIMODULE board is then secured at two
additional points with nylon hardware to insure
mechanical security of the assembly. With the
iSBC 80/24 board mounted in the top slot of an
iSBC 604 or iSBC 614 cardcage, sufficient Clearance exists for mounting the iSBC 301 option. If
the iSBC 80/24 board is inserted into some other
slot, the combination of boards will physically
(but not electrically) occupy two.cardcage slots.

RAM DEVICE
(FROM iSBC 80/24)
BOARD

/ i S B C 301 OPTION

~
~HARDWARE(2

- - - -__

NYLON MOUNTING
PLACES)
(SUPPLIED WITH
iSBC 301 OPTION)

Figure 1. Installation of iSBC 301 4K·Byte RAM MULTIMODULE Board on the
iSBC 80/24 Single Board Computer
6·31 . '
...::..

'--:..

iSBC 301

SPECIFICATIONS

Physical Characteristics

Word Size

Width - 1.20 in. (3.05 cm)
Length - 3.95 in. (10.03 cm)

8 bits

Height -.44 in. (1.12 cm) iSBC 301 Board
.56 in. (1.42 cm) iSBC 301 Board +
iSBC80/24 Board
Weight - .69 oz (19 gm)

Memory Size
4096 bytes of RAM

Electrical Characteristics
DC Power Requirements:
10 mA at + 5 Volts incremental power

Access Time
Read: 140
200
Write: 150
190

ns
ns
ns
ns

(from
(from
(from
(from

READ command)
ALE)
READ command)
ALE)

Environmental Characteristics
Operating Temperature - 0 to + 55 C
0

Relative Humidity - to 90% (without condensa·
tion)

Memory Addressing
Memory addressing for the iSBC 301
MULTIMODULE board is controlled by the host
board via the address and chip select signal lines.

Reference Manuals
All necessary documentation for the iSBC 301
MULTIMODULE board is included in the
iSBC 80/24 Hardware Reference Manual;
Order #142648·001. (NOT SUPPLIED)
Manuals may be ordered from any Intel sales
representive, distributor office, or from Intel
Literature Department, 3065 Bowers Avenue,
Santa Clara, California 95051.

With the iSBC 80/24 board:
The 4K bytes of RAM on the iSBC 301 board oc·
cupy the 4K byte address space immediately
preceding that of the iSBC 80/24 boards 4K
RAM (i.e., default configuration iSBC 301 board's RAM 2000·2FFF
iSBC 80/24 board's RAM 3000·3FFF)

SPECIFICATIONS
Part Number

Description

SBC 301

4K Byte RAM MUL TIMODULE
Board

6·32

Digital 110 Expansion
and Signal
Conditioning Boards

CJ_

inter
iSBC 337
MULTIMODULE NUMERIC DATA PROCESSOR
• Extends host CPU instruction set with
arithmetic, logarithmic, transcendental
and trigonometric instructions

• High speed fixed and floating point
functions for iSBC 86, 88 and iAPX 86,
88 systems
• MULTIMODULE option containing 8087
Numeric Data Processor

• 50 x performance improvements in
Whetstone benchmarks over iAPX 86/10
performance

• Supports seven data types including
single and double precision integer and
floating point

• Software support through ASM·86/88
Assembly Language and High Level
Languages

• Implements proposed IEEE Floating
Point Standard for high accuracy

The Intel iSBC 337 MUL TIMODULE Numeric Data Processor offers high performance numerics support
for iSBC 86 and iSBC 88 Single Board Computer users, for applications including simulation, instrument
automation, graphics, signal processing and business systems. The coprocessor interface between the
8087 and the host CPU provides a simple means of extending the instruction set with over 60 additional
numeric instructions supporting six additional data types. The data formats conform to the proposed
IEEE Floating Point Standard insuring highly accurate results. The MULTI MODULE implementation
allows the iSBC 337 module to be used on all iSBC 86 and iSBC 88 Microcomputers·and can be added as
an option to custom iAPX 86 and iAPX 88 board designs.

7-1

iSBC 337

socket, installing the iSBC337 processor into the
host's CPU socket, and reinstalling the host CPU
chip into the socket provided for it on the iSBC
337 processor (see Figure 1). All synchronization
and timing· signals are provided via the. coprocessor interface with the host CPU. The two
processors also share a common address/data
bus. (See Figure 2.) The 8087 Numeric Data Processor (NDP) component is capable of recognizing and executing 8087 numeric instructions as
they are fetched by the host CPU. This interface
allows concurrent processing by the host CPU
and the 8087. It also allows 8087 and host CPU instnictions to be intermixed in any fashion to provide the maximum overlapped operation and the
highest aggregate performance.

OVERVIEW
The iSBC 337 MULTIMODULE Numeric Data Processor provides arithmetic and logical instruction
extensions to the 8086 and 8088 CPU's of the
iAPX 86 and iAPX88 families, to provide
iAPX 86/20 and iAPX 88/20 Numeric DataProcessors. The instruction set consists of arithmetic,
transcendental, logical, trigonometric and exponential instructions which can all operate .on
seven different data types. Thedata types are 16,
32, and 64 bit integer, 32 and 64 bit floating point,
18 digit packed BCD and 80 bit temporary.

Coprocessor Interface
The coprocessor interface between the host CPU
(8086 and 8088) and the iSBC "337 processor provides easy to use and high performance math processing. Installation of the iSBC 337 processor is .
simply a matter.of remQving the host CPU from its

High Performance and Accuracy
The 80-bit wide internal registers and data paths
contribute significantly to high performance and

Isec 337 MODULE

CONNECTOR FOR
INTERRUPT REQUEST
FROM iSeC 337
MODULE

iSBC or iAPX 86 or 88 BOARD

Figure 1. iSBC 337 Module Installation

7·2

AFN-01654A

iSCB 337

CPU overhead. Once started, the 8087 can process
in parallel with and independent of the host CPU.
For resynchronization, the NDP's BUSY signal informs the CPU that the NDP is executing an instruction and the CPU WAIT instruction tests this
signal to insure that the NDP is ready to execute
subsequent instructions. The NDP can interrupt
the CPU when it detects an error or exception. The
interrupt request line is routed to the CPU through
an 8259A Programmable Interrupt Controller. This
interrupt request signal is brought down from the
iSBC 337 module to the iSBC 86, 88 Single Board
Computer through a single pin connector (see
Figure 1). The signal is then routed to the interrupt
matrix for jumper connection to the 8259A Interrupt Controller. Other iAPX 86 and 88 designs may
use a similar arrangement, or by masking off the
8086's "READ" pin from the iSBC 337 socket, provisions are made to allow the now vacated pin of
the host's CPU socket to be used to bring down

minimizes the execution time difference between
single and double precision floating point formats. This 80-bit architecture, in conjunction with
the use of the proposed IEI;OE Floating Point Standard provides 'very high resolution and accuracy.
This precision is complemented by extensive exception detection and handling. Six different
types of exceptions can be reported and handled
by the 8087. The user also has control over internal precision, infinity control and rounding control.

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
As a coprocessor to an 8086 or 8088, the 8087 is
wired in parallel with the CPU as shown in Figure
2. The CPU's status and queue status lines enable
the NDP to monitor and decode instructions in
synchronization with the CPU and without any

ADDRESSJDA TA BUS.

ADDRIDATA

8086
OR
6088
HOST CPU

eLK (5 MHz)
6284A
CLOCK
GEN.

READY

STATUS LINES
RESET

STATUS
TEST

---

ROJGT

---,
I

I
I

------

BUSY

ROJGT

STATUS

I
I
ADDRIDATA

8087
NDP

I
I
I
I

I
I
L

I
I
I
I
I
I
L _ _ _ _ -,

isec 337
MODULE

I
I
I

_____________________

ERROR OR EXCEPTiON
iNTERRUPT
(To 8259A Interr upt
Controller)

Figure 2. iSBC 337 System Configuration

7-3

AFN·01654A

iSBC337

Table 1. 8087 Datatypes
Data
Formats

Range

Preci·
. sion

Most Significant Byte
7

104

16 Bits

115

Short Integer

109

32 Bits

131

Long Integer

1019

64 Bits

163

Packed BCO

1018

18 Digits

Short Real

10±38

24 Bits

Long Real

10±308

53 Bits

S IE10

Temporary Real

10±4932

64 Bits

S IE14

Sign: S
BCD Digit

io]

Word Integer

Note:
Integer: I
Fraction: F
Exponent: E

Two's Complement
101

]E7

Two's Complement
10J

-J017

Two's
Complement

101 oJ

016J

Eo]F1

Fo Implicit

F23J

~IF1

F5J

Eo I Fo

Fo Implicit
F631

Bias = 127 for Short Real
1023 for Long Real
16i383 for Temp Real

Bits): D

the interrupt request signal for connection to the
base board and then to the 8259A. Another alter·
native is to use a wire toestablish this connection.

Table 2. Execution Time for Selected 8087 Actual
and Emulated Instructions
Approximate Execution
Time (ms)
Floating Point Instruction
8087
8086
(5 MHz Clock) Emulation

PROGRAMMING INTERFACE
Table 1 lists the seven data types the 8087 sup·
ports and presents the format for each type.
Internally, the 8087 holds all numbers in the tem·
porary real format. Load and store instructions
automatically convert operands represented in
memory as 16·, 32·, or 64·bit integers, 32· or 64·bit
floating point numbers or 18·digit packed BCD
numbers into temporary real format and vice
versa.

Add/Subtract Magnitude
Multiply (single precision)
Multiply (extended precision)
Divide
Compare
Load (double precision)
Store (double precision)
Square Root
Tangent
Exponentiation

14/18
19
27
39
9
10
21
36
90
100

1,600
1,600
2,100
3,200
1,300
1,700
1,200
19,600
13,000
17.100

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Computations in the 8087 use the processor's
register stack. These eight 80·bit registers provide
the equivalent capacity of 40 16·bit registers. The
8087 register set can be accessed as a stack, with
instructions operating on the top stack element,
or as a fixed register set, with instructions operating on explicitly designated registers.

The NDP is internally divided into two processing
elements, the control unit (CU) and the numeric execution unit (NEU), providing concurrent operation
of the two units. The NEU executes all numeric instructions, while the CU receives and decodes instructions, reads and writes memory operands and
executes processor control instructions.

Table 3 lists the 8087's instructions by class. As·
sembly language programs are written in ASM
86/88, the iAPX 86, 88 assembly language. Table 2
gives the execution times of some typical numeric
instructions and their equivalent time on a5 MHz
8086.

Control Unit
The CU keeps the 8087 operating in synchronization with its host CPU. 8087 instructions are intermixed with CPU instructions in a single instruc7-4

AFN-01654A

iSBC 337

Table 3. 8087 Instruction Set
Data Transfer Instructions

Arithmetic Instructions

Real Transfers

Addition

load real

FLD
FST
FSTP
FXCH

Store real

Store feal and pop

FADD
FADDP
FIADD

Disable interrupts

Add real and pop

FENIIFNENI

Enable interrupts

Integer add

FLDCW

Load control word

FSTCW/FNSTCW

Store control word

Subtraction
Integer Transfers
1nleger load

Integer store
Integer store and pop

Packed Decimal Transfers
FBLD
FBSTP

FSUB
cSUBP
FISUB
FSUBR
FSUBRP
FISUBR

Subtract real
Subtract real and pop
Integer subtract
Subtract real reversed
Subtract real reversed and pop
Integer subtract reversed

Multiplication

Packed decimal (BCD) load
Packed decimal (BCD) store and pop
FMUL
FMULP
FIMUL

Multiply real
Multiply real and pop
Integer multiply

FDIV
FDIVP
FIDIV
FDIVR
FDIVRP
FIDIVR

Divide real
Divide real and pop
Integer divide
Divide real reversed
Divide real reversed and pop
Integer divide reversed

FSQRT
FSCALE
FPREM
FRNDINT
FXTRACT
FABS
FCHS

Square root
Scale
Partial reminder
Round to integer
Extract exponent and significand
Absolute value
Change sign

Comparison Instructions
Division
FCOM
FCOMP
FCOMPP
FICOM
FICOMP
FTST
FXAM

Compare real
Compare real and pop

Compare real and pop twice
Integer compare

Integer compare and pop
Test
Examine

Initialize processor

FDISI/FNDISI

Add real

Exchange registers

FILD'
FIST
FISTP

Processor Control Instructions
FINIT/FNINIT

FSTSW/FNSTSW

Store status word

FCLEXlFNCLEX

Clear exceptions

FSTENV/FNSTENV Store environment
FLDENV

Load environment

FSAVEfFNSAVE

Save state

FRSTOR

Restore state

FINCSTP

Increment stack pointer

FDECSTP

Decrement stack pointer

FFREE

Free register

FNOP
" FWAiT

No operation
CPU wait

Other Operations
Transcendental Instructions
FPTAN
FPATAN
F2XM1
FYL2X
FYL2XP1

Partial tangent
Partial arctangent
2x-1
Y- lo 9 2X
Y-log 2(X + 1)

tion stream. The CPU fetches all instructions from
memory; by monitoring the status signals emitted
by the CPU, the NDP control unit determines
when an 8086 instruction is being fetched. The CU
taps the bus in parallel with the CPU and obtains
that portion of the data stream.

instruction is a load, the CU additionally captures
the data word when it becomes available on the
local data bus. If data required is longer than one
word, the CU immediately obtains the bus from the
CPU using the request/grant protocol and reads the
rest of the information in consecutive bus cycles.
In a store operation, the CU captures and saves the
store address as in a load, and ignores the data
word that follows in the "dummy read" cycle.
When the 8087 is ready to perform thestore, the CU
obtains the bus from the CPU and writes the
operand starting at the specified address.

After decoding the instruction, the host executes all
opcodes but ESCAPE (ESC), while the 8087 executes only the ESCAPE class instructions. (The
first five bits of all ESCAPE instructions are identi·
cal). The CPU does provide addressing for ESC instructions, however.

Numeric Execution Unit

An 8087 instruction either will not reference memory, will require loading one or more operands from
memory into the 8087, or will require storing one or
more operands from the 8087 into memory. In the
first case a non-memory reference escape is used
to start 8087 operation. In the last two cases, the
CU makes use of a "dummy read" cycle initiated by
the CPU, in which the CPU calculates the operand
address and initiates a bus cycle, but does not cap·
ture the data. Instead, the CPU captures and saves
the address which the CPU places on the bus. If the

The NEU executes all instructions that involve the
register stack; these include arithmetic, logical,
transcendental, constant and data transfer
instructions. The data path in the NEU is 80 bits
wide (64 fraction bits, 15 exponent bits and a sign
bit) which allows internal operand transfers to be
performed at very high speeds.
When the NEU begins executing an instruction, it
activates the 8087 BUSY signal. This signal is

7·5

AFN-01654A

iSBC 337

Status Word

used in conjunction with the CPU WAIT instruc·
tion to resynchronize both processors when the
NEU has completed its cUrrent instruction.

The.status word shown in Figure 4 reflects the over·
all state of the 8087; it may be stored in memory and
then inspected by CPU code. The status word is a
16·bit register divided into fields as shown in Figure
4. The busy bit (bit 15) indicates whether the NEU is
executing an instruction (B =1) or is idle (B = 0).
Several instructions which store and manipulate the
status word are executed exclusively by the CU, and
these do not set the busy bit themselves.

Register Set
The 8087 register set is shown in Figure 3. Each of
the eight data registers in the 8087's register stack
is 80 bits wide and is divided into "fields" corre·
sponding to the NDP's temporary real data type.
The register set may be addressed as a push down
stack, through.a top of stack pointer or any register
may be addressed explicitly relative to the top of
~~k
..

DATA FIELD
SIGN

TAG FIELD

r--

SIGNIFICAND

EXPONENT

The four numeric condition code bits (CO·C3) are
similar to the flags in a CPU:various instructions up·
date these bits to reflect the outcome of NDP opera·
tions .

I-I-I-I-I--

r--

I-'-----

Bits 14·12 of the status word point to the 8087
register that is the currenttop·of·stack (TOP).
Bit 7 is the interrupt request bit. This bit is set if
any unmasked exception bit is set and cleared
otherwise.
Bits 5·0 are set to indicate thatthe NEU has detect·
ed an exception while executing an instruction.

0
CONTROL REGISTER

Tag Word

STATUS REGISTER
INSTRUCTION POINTER

The tag word marks the content of each register
as shown in Figure 5. The principal function of the
tag word is to optimize the NDP's performance.
The tag word can be used, however, to interpret
the contents of 8087 registers.

DATA POINTER

Figure 3. 8087 Register Set

c, 1

TOP

1 1c,1 c,
C,

I I R l x l PE

I~EloElzE1DEJ

IEJ

EXCEPTION FLAGS (1

=EXCEPTION HAS OCCURRED)

INVALID OPERATION
DENORMALIZED OPERAND
ZERO DIVIDE
OVERFLOW
UNDERFLOW
PRECISION
(RESERVED)
INTERRUPT REQUEST.

(1)

CONDITION CODE
TOP OF STACK POINTER
NEU BUSY
(1)
(2)

IR is set if any unmasked exception bit Is set, cleared otherwise.
Top Values:
000 Regi.ster-O Is Top of Stack.
001 = Register! Is Top of Stack .

111 = Register 7 Is Top of Stack.

Figure 4. 8087 Status Word

(2)

iSBC 337

Exception Handling
The 8087 detects six different exception conditions
that can occur during instruction execution. Any or
all exceptions will cause an interrupt if unmasked
and interrupts are enabled.

TAG VALUES:
00 = VALID
01 = ZERO
10 = SPECIAL
11 = EMPTY

If interrupts are disabled the 8087 will simply suspend execution until the host clears the exception.
If a specific exception class is masked and that exception occurs, however, the 8087 will post the exception in the status register and perform an on-chip
default exception handling procedure, thereby
allowing processing to continue. The exceptions
that the 8087 detects are the following:

Figure 5. 8087 Tag Word

Instruction and Data Pointers
The instruction and data pointers (see Figure 6)
are provided for user-written error handlers.
Whenever the 8087 executes an N EU instruction,
the CU saves the instruction address, the operand
address (if present) and the instruction opcode.
The 8087 can then store this data in memory.
15

1. INVALID OPERATION: Stack overflow, stack
underflow, indeterminate form (010, - , etc.)
or the use of a Non-Number (NAN) as an
operand. An exponent value is reserved and any
bit pattern with this value in the exponent field
is termed a Non-Number and causes this exception. If this exception is masked, the 8087's
default response is to generate a specific NAN
called INDEFINITE, or to propagate already existing NANs as the calculation result.

0
INSTRUCTION POINTER (15·0)
INSTRUCTION POINTER I 0 I
(19·16)

INSTRUCTION OPCODE (10·0)

DATA POINTER (15·0)
DATA POINTER (19·16)

Figure 6. 8087 Instruction and Data Pointers

Control Word
The NDP provides several processing options which
are selected by loading a word from memory into
the control word. Figure 7 shows the format and encoding of the fields in the control word.

2. OVERFLOW: The

result is too large in
magnitude to fit the specified format. The 8087
will generate the code for infinity if this exception is masked.

15
I

x x

II C I

R C I

P C

M I

J 1
PM

UMj

o~ ZMj DMJ 1M

EXCEPTION MASKS 1.1 = EXCEPTION IS MASKED)
INVALID OPERATION
DENORMALIZED OPERAND
ZERO DIVIDE
OVERFLOW
UNDERFLOW
PRECISION
(RESERVED)
INTERRUPT MASK (1 = INTERRUPTS ARE MASKED)
PRECISION CONTROL

(I)

ROUNDING CONTROL (21
INFINITY CONTROL (0 = PROJECTIVE, 1 =AFFINE)
(RESERVED)
II)

Precision Control
00=24 bits
01 = Reserved

10=53 bits
11 =64 bits

12)

Rounding Control
00 = Round to Nearest or Even
01 = Round Down (toward· )
10 = Round Up (toward + )
11 Chop (truncate toward zero)

Figure 7. 8087 Control Word
7-7

iSBC 337

3. ZERO DIVISOR: The divisor is zero .while the
dividend -is a non-infinite, non-zero number.
Again, the 8087 will generate the code for infini·
ty if this exception is masked.

6. INEXACT RESULT: If the true result is not exactly representable in the specified format, the
result is rounded according to the rounding
mode, and this flag is set. If this exception is
masked, processing will simply continue.

SOFTWARE SUPPORT

4. UNDERFLOW: The result is non·zero but too
small in magnitude to fit in the specified for·
mat. If this exception is masked the 8087 will
denormalize (shift right) the fraction until the
exponent is in range. This process is called
gradual underflow.

5. DENORMALIZED OPERAND: At least one of
the operands or the result is denormalized; it
has the smallest exponent but a non-zero
significand. Normal processing continues if
this exception is masked off.

The iSBC 337 module is supported by Intel's
ASM·86/88 Assembly Language and PUM·86/88
Systems Implementation Language. In addition to
the instructions provided in the languages to sup·
port the additional math functions, a software
emulator is also available to allow the execution
of iAPX 86/20 instructions without the need for the
iSBC 337 module. This allows for the development
of software in an environment without the iAPX
86/20 processor and then transporting the code to
its final run time environment with no change in
mathematical results.

SPECI FICATIONS

Environmental Characteristics
Operating Temperature -

Physical Characteristics

0 °C to 55°C

Width - 5.33 cm (2.100 ")

Free air moving across base board and iSBC337
module.

Length - 5.08 cm (2.000 ")
Height - 1.82cm( .718")
iSBC 337 board +
host board

Relative Humidity - Up to 90% R.H. without con·
densation.

Weight - 17.33 grams (.576 oz.)

Reference Manual

Electrical Characteristics

142887·001 - iSBC 337 MULTIMODULE Numeric
Data Processor Hardware Reference Manual (NOT
SUPPLIED)
Manuals may be ordered from any Intel sales representative, distributor office, or from Intel Literature
Department, 3065 Bowers Avenue, Santa Clara,
California 95051.

DC Power Requirements (8087 only)
Vee = 5V ± 5%

Icc = 475 mA max.

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number
SBC 337

Description
MULTIMODULE Numeric Data
Processor

7·8

inter
iSBC 501
DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS CONTROLLER

• Transfers initialized via software

• Directly compatible with Intel iSBC 80
and iSBC 86 Single Board Computers

• Transfers data up to 330K words per
second for interleaved transfers

• Block length up to 65,536 words
• Directly addresses up to 65,536 memory
locations

• Software selectable/maskable interrupt
operations

• Transfer rate up to 1 million words per
second for block transfers

The iSBC 501
The iSBC 501
speed, direct
16 peripheral

• Interrupt priority switch selectable

Direct Memory Access Controller is a member of Intel's complete line of iSBC OEM computer systems.
interfaces directly with any iSBC single board computer-based system via the MULTIBUS interface. High
memory access control and interfacing for transfers between iSBC expansion board memory and up to
devices is provided.

7-9

iSBC 501
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

the shared bus mode. Either mode may be used with the
other iSBG single board computers. Four timing strobes
are provided for the control of data input transfers and
four timing strobes are provided for output transfer
operations. strobes are initiated and selected via sys·
tem softwar~, .and strobe pulses .are jumper selectable
to 100, 200, 400, 800, or 1600 ns widths.

Transfer Capability
Block lengths up tp 65,536 bytes long may be trans·
ferred directly to or from RAM memory in iSBG systems
at rates of up to 1 million words per second. The iSBG
50116·bit addressing capability allows transfers to tilke
place at any location within memory. It is designed to
control the direct transfer of data to or from Intel iSBG
memory expansion or combination memory and I/O
boards. Two transfer modes of operation are included.
System software is used to select the desired mode.
Transfer rates up to 330K words per second may be
achieved in the shared bus mode, wherein the iSBG 501.
request access to the system bus for 600 ns to perform
a transfer of one word to or from memory. The second
mode, the override mode, establishes the DMA control·
ler as the only master which may access the system bus
during the transfer period, thereby providing rapid block
transfer capability. This mode provides transferrates up
to 1 million words per second. The iSBG 80/10B single
board computer may only .interact with the iSBG 501 in

Interrupt Requests
Interrupt requests originating from the DMA controller
are software maskable, active·low, and switch selec·
table to anyone of eight priority levels. User selected
DMA interrupt requests may originate automatically
upon completion of a transfer operation, from an exter·
nal DMA device, or from a software command to the
DMA controller (for system testi ng purposes).

Peripheral Interface
A 4·bit tag register is provided which may be used as a
device select port to provide selection for four (up to 16
with external decoding) high speed peripheral devices
interfacing through theiSBG 501.

INTERRUPT

1-----

EXTERNAL INTERRUPT REQUEST

CONTROL

L--,r--J - - - - -

EXTERNAL INTERRUPT MASK

ADDA E5S/COMMAND

DECODE
INPUT COMMAND STROBES (4)

ADDRESS

OUJPUT COMMANP STROBES (4)

CONTAOL

'v---:--

DATA IN
DATA OUT

sus INTERFACE

'v-----:DATA

STATUS/CONTROL IN

TAG REGISTER

MUL TIBUS
SYSTEM BUS

Figure 1. iSBC 501 DMA Controller Block Diagram

7·10

iSBC 501
SPECIFICATIONS

Tag Register (4 bits) - The contents of the tag register
are used as control/select lines to the external periph·
eral devices being interfaced by the iSBC 501 (e.g., as
the "go" command line to each of four devices), or the
tag register outputs may be used with external decoding
to expand the maximum number of DMA peripherals to
16.

Word Size
8 bits

Block Size
65,536 words, max

Status Register (8·blts) - Provides 4 bits of DMA con·
troller status: software interrupt, memory read/write
operation requested, external/end·of·transfer interrupt,
and DMA controller busy. The status register also pro·
vldes four status/control bits directly from user periph·
eral devices.

Address Capability
65,536 words

Transfer Rates
Transfer Rates (K bytes/sec)1
Mode

Memory Read
Operations

Address Selection

Memory Wrlle

iSBC 501 registers are located in a jumber selectable
block starting at any 16·word boundary in the I/O ad·
dress space.

Operations

Typical

Worst Case3

Shared bus!!
CPU hailed

330

270

330

270

Shared bus,
CPU executing
code 2

180

160

180

160

1000

660

1000

660

Typical

Worst Case3

110 Operalion

Interrupts

XO
XI
X2
X3
X4
X8
X9
XA
XB
XC
XD
XE
XF

Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output

Interrupt requests originating from the DMA controller
are software maskable, active·low, and switch select·
able to anyone of eight priority levelS. User selectable
DMA interrupt requests may originate automatically
upon completion of a transfer operation, from an exter·
nal DMA device, or from a software command to the
DMA controller (for system testing purposes).

XO
XI
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7

Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input

Override
Noles:

1. Transfer rates given are to and from RAM memory on iSBC 108A com·
bination memory and 110 board.
2. Shared bus mode may be used with Intel iSBC 80/10B.
3. Assumes every OMA transfer must wall for RAM refresh cycle to be
completed, worst case memory cycle times.

Function

Output strobe 0
Output strobe 1
Output strobe 2
Output strobe 3
Output tag strobe
Set interrupt
Reset interrupt
Load control register
Load tag register
Load LSB length register
Load MSB length register
Load LSB memory address register
Load MSB m~mory address register
Input command strobe 0
Input comma no strobe 1
Input command strobe 2
Input command strobe 3
Read LSB length register
Read MSB length register
Read DMA status
Invalid command

Note

Key Registers

1. X is any hex digit, assigned by iumbers.

Control Register (6 bits) - The contents of the control
register specify the busy status of the DMA board, the
type of operation to be performed (transfer or non·
transfer), the transfer direction (to or from memory), the
interrupt condition (enabled or disabled), and the means
by which the DMA board is using the system bus
(shared mode or override mode).

Connectors
Double·Sided
Pins (qly)

Cenlers
(In.)

Mallng Connectors

Bus

0.156

Viking 3KH4319AMKI2

110

100

0.100

Intel MDS 990
Viking 3VH50/1JN5

Inlerface

Memory Address Register (16 bits) - Contains the ad·
dress of the next memory location to be accessed by
the iSBC 501. Loaded from the CPU, prior to a transfer
operation, with the address of the first memory location
to be accessed. The address is gated onto the system
address bus during each transfer, and incremented by
one for each word transferred.

Interface Characteristics
flO Line Driver Sink Current - 48 mA
flO Line Terminator Load - 15012 pullup
Input - Data positive relative to data bus
Output - Data positive relative to data bus
Output Strobes - Jumper selectable to 100, 200, 400,
800, or 1600 ns pulse widths.
All flO interface data and control signals are TTL com·
patible and MULTIBUS interface compatible.

Length Register (16 bits) - Contents of this register
specify the total number of words to be transferred. This
word count is decremented by one after each word is
transferred. The transfer stops when the word count
equals zero.

7·11

iSBC501
Physical Characteristics

Equipment Supplied

Width -12.00 in. (30.48 cm)
Height - 6.75 in. (17.15 cm)
Depth- 0.50 in. (1.27 cm)
Weight ~ 12 oz (340.5gm)

iSBC 501 DMA Controller Board

Electrical Characteristics
DC Power Requirements

Vee = 5V ±5%
ICC = 3,35A max; 2.70A typ

Envlron~ental Characteristics
Operating Temperature -

O·C to 55·C

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number
SBC 501

Description
. Direct Memory Acce.ss Controller

Reference Manuals
9800294A -

iSBC 501 Hardware Reference Manual
(NOT SUPPLIED)
iSBC 501 Schematic (SUPPLIED)
Manuals may be ordered from any Intel sales representative, distributor office or from Intel Literature Department, 3065 Bowers Avenue, Santa Clara, California
95051.

iSBC 508
1/0 EXPANSION BOARD

• iSBC 1/0 expansion via direct
MULTIBUS interface

• Selectable latched or unlatched input
ports

• Four 8·bit terminated input ports

• Latched outputs with selectable width
strobes

• Four 8·bit output ports with buffered
TTL drivers

• Switch selectable 1/0 port addresses

The iSBC 5081/0 Expansion Board is a member of Intel's complete line of iSBC memory and 1/0 expansion boards. The
iSBC 508 interfaces directly to any iSBC single board computer via the system bus to expand input and output port
capacity. Four 8·bit terminated input ports are contained on the board. Data is gated into the port while the strobe is
present and latched if the strobe is removed. The iSBC 508 contains four 8·bit output ports. All output lines are driven
by TTL level buffer drivers residing on the board. Output data is latched. A strobe signal of jumper selectable width is
sent to the peripheral device during an output operation. Address selection is accomplished using two resident rotary
switches to select one of 64 unique base addresses for all input and output ports. The board operates with a single
+ 5V power supply.

7·13

iSBC 508

[

8 BITS

IN STBO

[
PERIPHERAL
DEVICES

8 BITS

INSTB'

8.BITS

INPUT
PORTO

INPUT
PORT'

~ ..

INPUT
PORT 2

IN STB 3

-.I

I ADDRESS L
DECODE I

r+I.

OUTPUT

[

PORT 0

INPUT
PORT 3

J-::.-

II CONTROL
(BUS
EI
HANDSHAKE
LOGICI

8 BITS

OUT STB 0

OUTPUT
PORT'

[ 8 BITS

...

IN STB 2

L 8 BITS

j..:...

OUTSTB'

PERIPHERAL
DEVICES

OUTPUT. [ 8 BITS
PORT2·
l O U T STB 2
OUTPUT
PORT 3

[ 8 BITS

.1\

l O U T STB 3
ADDRESS BUS
OATA BUS
CONTROL BUS

MU LTiBUS
IN TERFACE

Figure 1. ISBC 508110 Expansion Board Block Diagram

SPECI FICATIONS

Connectors
Bus Edge Connector - 86-pin double-sized PC edge
connector with 0.156-ln. contact centers
Mating Connector - Control Data VPB01 E43AOOA 1

Word Size
8 bits

Capacity

110 Edge Connector - 100-pin double-sided PC edge
connector with 0.1 in. contact centers
Mating Connector - Viking 3i

}

~~i~~~~E

iSBC 517
Table 1. InputlOutput Port Modes of Operation
Mode of Operation
Unidirectional
Lines
(qty)

Ports

Input

Bidirectional

Output

Control

Unlatched

Latched &
Strobed

Latched

Latched &
Strobed

2
3

~----

~------+--------r----.----~------~--------+-------~----------~----~

r------~-

Notes

1. Part of port 3 must be used as control port when either port 1 or port 2 are used as a latched and strobed input or a latched and strobed output port
or port 1 is used as a bidirectional port.
2. Part of port 6 must be used as a control port when either port 4 or port 5 are used as a latched and strobed input or a latched and strobed output
port or port 4 is used as a bidirectional port.
.

Interval Timer

maskable under program control. Routing for the eight
interrupt request lines is jumper selectable. They may
be ORed to provide a single interrupt request line for the
iSBC 80/10B, or they may be individually provided to the
system bus for use by other iSBC single board computers.

Each board contains a jumper selectable 1 ms interval
timer. The timer is enabled by jumpering one of the
interrupt request lines from the 1/0 edge connector to a
1 ms interval interrupt request signal originating from
the baud rate generator.

SPECIFICATIONS

Serial Communications Characteristics

I/O Addressing·

Synchronous - 5-8 bit characters; internal or external
character synchronization; automatic sync insertion.
Asynchronous - 5-8 bit characters; peak characters
generation; 1, 1';', or 2 stop bits; false start bit detectors.

Port
Address

8255
8255
USART USART
No.2
No.1
Data Control
Control Control

X4 X5 X6 X8 X9 XA

Note

Interrupts

X is any hex digit assigned by jumper selection.

Eight interrupt request lines may originate from the programmable peripheral interface (4 lines), the USART (2
lines), or user specified devices via the 1/0 edge connec·
tor (2 lines) or interval timer.

I/O Transfer Rate
Parallel - Read or write cycle time 760 ns max
Serial - (USART)
Baud Rate (Hz)
Frequency (kHz)
(Jumper Selectable)

153.6
76.8
38.4
19.2
9.6
4.8
6.98

Synchronous

Interrupt Register Address

Asynchronous

(Program Selectable)

38400
19200
9600
4800
6980

716

764

9600
4800
2400
1200
600
300

2400
1200
600
300
150
75
110

Interrupt mask register
Interrupt status register

Note
X is any hex digit assigned by jumber selection.

Timer Interval
1.003 ms ±0.1% when 110 baud rate is selected
1.042 ms ± 0.1 % for all other baud rates

7-17

iSBC 517
, Bus Drivers

Interfaces
8us - All signals TTL compatible
Parallel 110 - All signals TTL compatible
Serial I/O - RS232C
Interrupt Requests ,"- All TTL compatible

Characteristic

Sink Current (rnA)

Data

Tri·state

Commands

Tri·state

Function

Connectors
Pins (qty)

Ceriters (in.)

Bus

0.156

CDC VPBOl E43AOOA 1

Parallel 110

0.1

3M 3415·000 or
TI H312125

Serial 110

0.1

3M 3462·000 or
TI H312113

Auxiliary 1

0.1

AMP PE5·14559 or
TI H311130

Interface

Mating Connectors

Physical Characteristics
Width - 12.00 in. (30.48 cm)
Height - 6.75 in. (17.15 cm)
Depth - 0.50 in. (1.27 cm)
Weight - 14 oz (397. 3 gin)

Note

Electrical Characteristics

1. Connector heights and wire·wrap pin lengths are not guaranteed to
, conform to Intel OEM or system packaging. Auxiliary connector is used
for test purposes only.

Average DC Current
Vcc= +5V ±5%
V DD = +12V ±5%
VAA = -12V ±5%
Icc= 2.4 mA max
IDD= 40mA max
IAA = 60 mA max

Line Drivers and Terminators
I/O Drivers - The following line drivers and terminators
are compatible with all the 110 driver sockets on the
iSBC 517:
Driver

Characteristic

Sink Current (rnA)

7438
7437
7432
7426
7409
7408
7403
7400

I.DC
I
NI
I.DC
NI.DC
NI
I.DC
I

48
48
16
16
16
16
16
16

Note

Does not include power required for optional 110 drivers and 110 terminators. With eight 220Q/330Q input terminators installed, all terminator inputs low.

Environmental Characteristics

Note

Operating Temperature -

I :;;: inverting: NI :;;: non·inverting; DC :;;: open·collector.

O·C to + 55·C

Ports 1 and 4 have 25 mA totem-pole drivers and 1 kQ
terminators.
I/O Terminators -

Reference Manual

220Q/330Q divider or 1 kQ pullup

98003888 - iSBC 517 hardware Reference Manual (NOT
SUPPLIED)

+~---------'~~:,:-~------~--~
220QI330QJ..r--------~~

0 ISBC 901 OPTION

Manuals may be ordered from any'lntel sales representative, distributor office or from Intel Literature Department, 3065 Bowers Avenue, Santa Clara, California
95051.

1 kQ
1 kQ

+ 5V - - - - - - - - " " " '.....------------~o ISBC 902 OPTION

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number Description
SBC 517

Combination 110 Expansion Board

7-18

iSBC 519 or (pSBC 519*)
PROGRAMMABLE 1/0 EXPANSION BOARD

• Jumper selectable 0.5,1.0,2.0, or 4.0 ms
interval timer

• iSBC 1/0 expansion via direct
MULTIBUS Interface
• 72 programmable 1/0 lines with sockets
for interchangeable line drivers and
terminators

• Eight maskable interrupt request lines
with priority encoded and program·
mabie interrupt algorithms

• Jumper selectable 1/0 port addresses

The iSBC 519 Programmable I/O Expansion Board is a member of Intel's complete line of iSBC memory and I/O expansion boards. The iSBC 519 interfaces directly to any iSBC single board computer via the system bus to expand input
and output port capacity. The iSBC 519 provides 72 programmable I/O lines. The system software is used to configure
the I/O lines to meet a wide variety of peripheral requirements. The flexibility of the I/O interface is further enhanced by
the capability of selecting the appropriate combination of optional line drivers and terminators to provide the required
sink current, polarity, and drive/termination characteristics for each application. Address selection is accomplished
by using wire-wrap jumpers to select one of 16 unique base addresses for the input and output ports. The board operates with a single + 5V power supply.

·Same product, manufactured by Intel Puerto Rico, Inc.

7-19

iSBC 519
The interval timer provided on the iSBC 519 may be used
to generate real time clocking in systems requiring the
periodic monitoring of 1/0 functions. The time interval is
derived from the iSBC 80 constant clock (BUS CCLK)
and the timing interval is jumper selectable. Intervals of
0.5, 1.0, 2.0, and 4.0 milliseconds may be selected when
an iSBC 80 single board computer is used to generate
the clock. Other timing intervals may be generated if the
user provides a separate constant clock reference in the
system.

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The 72 programmable 1/0 lines on the iSBC 519 are im·
plemented utilizing three Intel 8255 programmable
peripheral interfaces. The system software is used to
configure the 1/0 lines in any combination of unidirec·
tional inputloutput and bidirectional ports indicated in
Table 1. In order to take full advantage of the large
number of possible 1/0 configurations, sockets are pro·
vided for interchangeable 1/0 line drivers and ter·
minator.s. The 72 programmable 1/0 lines and signal
ground lines are brought out to three 50·pin edge con·
nectors that mate with flat, round, or woven cable.

Eight-Level Vectored Interrupt
An Intel 8259 programmable interrupt controller (PIC)
provides vectoring for eight interrupt levels. As shown
in Table 2, a selection of three priority processing algo·
rithms is available to the system designer so that the

Interval Timer
Typical 1/0 read access time is 350 nanoseconds.
Typical 1/0 readlwrite cycle time is 450 nanoseconds.

Table 1. Input/Output Port Modes of Operation
Mode of Operation
Unidirectional

Lines
(qty)

Ports

Input
Latched &
Strobed

Output
Latched &
Strobed

Unlatched

Bidirectional

Control

Latched

1,4,7

2,5,8

3,6,9

Xl,2,3

NOles
1. Part of port 3 must be used as a control port when either port 1 or port 2 are used as a latched and strobed input or a latched and strobed output
port or port 1 is used as a bidirectional port.
2. Part of port 6 must be used as a control port when either port 4 or port 5 are used as a latched and strobed input or a latched and strobed output
port or port 4 is used as a bidirectional port.
3. Part of port 9 must be used as a control port when either port 7 or port 8 are used as a latched and strobed input or a latched and strobed output
port or port 7 is used as 'a bidirectional port.

USER DESIGNATED
PERIPHERALS

nil

PROGRAMMABLE
I!O LINES

3
INTERRUPT
REQUEST
LINES

-I

I
I

INTERVAL
TIMER

[

1
INTERRUPT
REQUEST
LINE

DRIVER!
TERMINATOR
INTERFACE

I
I

INTERRUPT
CONTROLLER

I
I

INTERRUPT
REQUEST
LINES

J
I

PROGRAMMABLE
PERIPHERAL
INTERFACE

ADDRESS BUS
DATA BUS
CONTROL BUS

CONSTANT CLOCK (CCLKl

I
I

BUS
INTERFACE

iSBC 80

BUS

Figure 1. iSBC 519 Programmable 110 ExpanSion Board Block Diagram

7-20

[

1
1

iSBC 519
incoming requests is of the highest priority, determines
whether this request is of higher priority than the level
currently being serviced, and if appropriate, issues an
interrupt to the system master. Any combination of
interrupt levels may be masked through storage, via
software, of a single byte to the interrupt mask register
of the PIC.

Table 2. Interrupt Priority Options
Operation

Algorithm
Fully nested

Interrupt request line priorities
fixed at
as highest, 7 as
lowest.

Auto·rotating

Equal priority. Each level, after
receiving service, becomes the
lowest priority level until next
interrupt occurs.

Specific priority

Interrupt Request Generation - Interrupt requests may
originate from 10 sources. Six jumper selectable inter·
rupt requests can be automatically generated by the
programmable peripheral interfaces when a byte of in·
formation is ready to be transferred to the system
master (i.e., input buffefis full) or a character has been
transmitted (i.e., output data buffer is empty). Three
interrupt request lines may be interfaced to the PIC
directly from user designated peripheral devices via the
1/0 edge connectors. One interrupt request may be gen·
erated by the interval timer.

System software assigns
lowest priority level. Priority of
all other levels are based in se·
quence numerically on this
assignment.

manner in which requests are serviced may be config·
ured to match system requirements. Priority assign·
ments may be reconfigured dynamically via software at
any time during system operation. The PIC accepts
interrupt requests from the programmable parallel 1/0
interfaces, the interval timer, or direct from peripheral
equipment. The PIC then determines which of the

Bus Line Drivers - The PIC interrupt request output
line may be jumper selected to drive any of the nine in·
terrupt lines on the MULTIBUS. Any of the on·board reo
quest lines may also drive any interface interrupt line
directly via jumpers and buffers on the board.

SPECIFICATIONS

Interfaces

Addressing

Bus - All signals TTL compatible
Parallel 1/0 - All signals TTL compatible
Interrupt Requests - All TTL compatible

8255
Port

Address XO XI X2

8255

No.1
4
Control
X3

X4 X5 X6

No.2
Control
X7

8255
7

X8 X9 XA

No.3
Control

Connectors

Interface

Interrupts

Bus

Register Addresses (hex notation, 1/0 address space)
XD Interrupt request register
XC In·service register
XD Mask register
XC Command register
XD Block address register
XC Status (polling register)
Note
Several registers have the same physical address; sequence of access and
one dala bit 01 control word determines which register will respond.

Ten interrupt request lines may originate from the pro·
grammable peripheral interface (6 lines), or user
specified devices via the 1/0 edge connector (3 lines), or
interval timer (1 line).

Interval Timer
Output Register - Timer interrupt register output is
cleared by an output instruction to 1/0 address XE or
XF1.
Timing Intervals - 500, 1,000, 2,000, and 4,000 ms
± 1 %; jumper selectable 2 .

Pins
(qty)

Centers
(in.)

Mating Connectors

0.156

Viking 3KH43/9AMK12

Parallel 1/0

0.1

3M 3415·000 or
TI H312125

Serial 1/0

0.1

3M 3462·000 or
TI H312113

Auxiliary 1

0.1

AMP PE5·14559 or
TI H311130

Note
1. Connector heights and wirewrap pin lengths are not guaranteed to
conform to Intel OEM or System packaging.

Line Drivers and Terminators
1/0 Drivers - The following line drivers and terminators are
compatible with all the 1/0 driver sockets on the iSBC

519:
Driver

Characteristic

Sink Current (rnA)

7438
7437
7432
7426
7409
7408
7403
7400

I,OC
I
NI
I,OC
NI,OC
NI
I,OC
I

48
48
16
16
16
16
16
16

Notes
1. X is any hex digit assigned by jumper selection.
2. Assumes constant clock (CCLK) frequency of 9.216 MHz ± 1 % . - -

7·21

Note
I ;:;; inverting; NI ;:;; non·inverting; OC ;:;; open-collector.

iSBC 519
1/0 Terminators - 2201"2/3301"2 divider or 1k1"2 pullup

Physical Characteristics
Width - 12.00 in. (30.48 cm)
Height - 6.75 in. (17.15 cm)
Depth - 0.50 in. (1.27 cm)
Weight - 14 oz (397.3 gm)

+5V-------->;::

220Q/330Q~_

~I,--- - - - ' - - - - - < 0 Isec 901 OPTION
1 kQ

1 kQ

+ 5V ----~'NI~.- - - - - - - 0 Isec 902 OPTION

Electrical Characteristics
Average DC Current

Ports 1, 4, and 7 may use any of the drivers or terminators
shown above for unidirectional (input or output) port con·
figurations. Either terminator and the following bidirec·
tional drivers and terminators may be used for ports 1,4,
and 7 when these ports are used as bidirectional ports.

Voltage

Without Termtnatlon 1

With Termlnallon2

VCC= +5V ±5%

ICC= 1.5A max

3.5A max

Note

Bidirectional Drivers

1. Does not include power required for optional 110 drivers and 110 ter·
minators.

Sink Current (rnA)

Characteristic
NI, TS

I, TS

2. With 18 220QI330Q Input terminators installed, all terminator inputs
low.

Note
I ::: Inverting; NI ::: non-inverting; TS ;;;. three-state.

Environmental Characteristics

Terminators (for ports 1, 4, and 7 w.hen used as bidi rec·
tional ports)

Operating Temperature -

Supplier

Product Series

CTS

760·

Dale

LDP14k·02

Beckman

699·1

Reference Manual
9800385B - iSBC 519 hardware Reference Manual (NOT
SUPPLIED)

Bus Drivers
Characteristic

Sink Current (rnA)

Tri-state

Trj·state

Manuals may be ordered from any Intel sales represen·
tative, distributor office or from Intel Literature Department, 3065 Bowers Avenue, Santa Clara, California
95051.

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

SBC 519

Programmable I/O Expansion
Board

0 'C to + 55 'C

7·22

iSBC 530
TELETYPEWRITER ADAPTER
• Compact, easily mounted package with
standard connectors

• General purpose RS232C to 20 rnA
current loop interface

• Compatiblity with iSBC 80 and iSBC 86
Single Board Computers

• Jumper selectable RS232C data set or
data terminal configuration

• Compatibility with iSBC 80 combination
boards

• Interface opto·isolator for high noise
immunity

The iSBC 530 Teletypwriter Adapter provides a compact and flexible means for interfacing Intel iSBC 80 and iSBC 86
Single Board Computers, iSBC combination memory and 1/0 expansion boards, and most RS232C compatible equip·
ment to teletypewriters and other 20 mA current loop equipment. The iSBC 530 converts RS232C signal levels to an op·
tically isolated 20 mA current loop interface. The iSBC 530 provides signal translation for transmitted data (Txd),
received data (RcD), and a teletypewriter paper tape reader relay. The RS232C interfaces are jumper selectable, and
may be configured to accept signals from an RS232C data terminal or data set. Threaded holes have been incorporated
in the iSBC 530 for ease In system chassis design and multiple units may be mounted together to support multiple
serial channels. The units are mountable in any of three planes. When used with an iSBC Single Board Computer,
power is provided to the iSBC 530 directly through its RS232C connector. Power may also be provided through either
of two auxiliary power connectors for standard current loop Interfacing. The noise immunity benefits of total inter·
system power isolation may be achieved through the use of both auxiliary power connectors on the iSBC 530.

7·23

iSBC530

:~: +L-I_EEl_I_/_:_EEl_I ~50

0.512

---L

'I; [
"'""-1=:U

iSBC 530
TTY ADAPTER

lid

ffi

IlLo85_~.'30~1

- - 0,92

lTI

~ 3 . 0 - -I 0.92

~ ..

-4.84--~

NOTES:

1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
·2 ALL FOUR MOUNTING HOLES THREADED FOR 6·32 MACHINE SCREWS
3 CUTOUTS FOR AUXILIARY POWER CONNECTORS

Figure 1. isec 530 Dimensions

SPECI FICATIONS

Physical Characteristics
Width Height Depth Weight -

Interface Characteristics
RS232C Side
RS232C signal levels inlout 1

Electrical Characteristics

TTY Side
20 mA optically isolated current loop

Power connectors for ground, + 12V and -12V, are
jumper selectable. Power may be provided via 25·pin
RS232C connector or via two separate auxiliary power
connectors. Auxiliary connectors allow total power
system isolation at iSBC 530 opto-coupler interface.
Power Requirements
Voo = + 12V ±5%
VAA = -12V ±5%
100 = 98 mA max
IAA = 98 mA max

Note
1. RS232C data set ready line controls 20 rnA paper tape reader relay
driver line.

Mating Connectors
RS232C
20 rnA (nV)

2.876 in. max (7.31 cm)
4.850 in. max (12.32 cm)
0.920 in. max (2.34 cm)
9 oz (255.4 gm)

Cinch

OB·25S

In Cannon

OB·25S

Cinch

OB·25P

Environmental Characteristics

lIT Cannon

OB·25P

Operating Temperature -

AMP
Auxiliary power
Molex

Connector

87159·7

87023·1

Polarizing key

87116·2

Connector

09·50·7071

08·50·0106

Polarizing key

15·04·0219

Reference Manuals
None supplied.
Reference manuals are shipped with each product only
if designated SUPPLIED (see above). Manuals may be
ordered from any Intel sales representative, distributor
office· or from Intel Literature Department, 3065 Bowers
Avenue, Santa Clara, California. 95051.

Note
1. Pins from a given vendor may only be used with connectors from the
same vendor.

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

SBC 530

Teletypewriter adapter

O'C to 55'C

7-24

iSBC 556
OPTICALLY ISOLATED 1/0 BOARD

• iSBC 80 and MULTIBUS compatible

• Provisions for plug·in, optically isolated
receivers, drivers, and terminators

• Up to 48 digital optically isolated
input/output data lines

• Voltate/current levels
- Input up to 48V
- Output up to 30V, 60 rnA

• Choice of
- 24 fixed input lines
- 16 fixed output lines
- 8 programmable lines

• Com-mon interrupt for up to 8 sources

• + 5V supply only

The iSBC 556 Optically Isolated I/O Board provides 48 digital input/output lines with isolation between process application or peripheral device and the iSBC 80 series single board computers_ The iSBC 556 conta'instwo 8255A programmable interface devices, and sockets for user supplied optically isolated drivers, receivers, and input resistor terminators, together with common interrupt logic and iSBC 80 bus interface logic. Input signals can be single-ended or
differential types with user defined input range (resistor terminator and opto-isolated 'receiver selection), allowing
flexibility in design of voltage and threshold levels. The output allows user selection of Opto-Isolated Darlington Pair
which can be used as an output driver either as an open collector or current swiich;
.

7-25

-_._-

iSBC 556
Table 1. I/O Ports Opto·lsolator Receivers, Drivers, and Terminators

Port No.
X=I/O Base
Address

Type of
I/O

Lines
(qty)

Input
Output
Input/
Control
" Input
Output
Input/ }
Output
Control

8
8
8

X+O
X+1
X+2
X+4
X+5
X+6
X+7

Dual
Resistor
Opto·lsolator
Terminator
Dual
Darlington
Opto·lsolator
Pair'
Driver
Pac Rp
16·Pin DIP
8·Pin Dip
6·Pin DIP
7438
Bourns
Monsanto
Monsanto or Equivalent
4116R·00
MCT66
4N29,30
or Equivalent or Equivalent
31,32
or Equivalent

8
8

SPECI FICATIONS

2 if output

' 1if input

8
8

Pull·Up
iSBC 902

2 if input

Connectors

Number of Lines

Inierf.ce

24 input,lines
16 .output lines
8 programmable lines: 4 input -

Pins
(qty)

PI iSBC bus
'86
Jl 16 fixed input &
' 50
8 fixed output lines
J2 8 fixed output, 8
50
fixed output, & 8
programmable
input/output lines

4 .output

1/0 Interface Characteristics
Line·to·Line Iselation - 235V DC or peak AC
Input/Output Isolatien - 500V DC or peak AC

Centers
In.

Mating Connectors

0.156
0,1
0,1

Viking 3K'H4319AMK12
3M 3415'()00 or
TI M312125
3M 34'15·000 or
TI M312125

TERMINATOR PAC

USER-SUPPLIED

DUAL OPlO·ISOLATOR

r -,- - -r--<>--'~----'
:

Physical Characteristics

i - -I

USER·SUPPLIED

___

RESISTOR

1'6-PIN DIP

(+) iSBC

'---9---+--oI----I--+--~H

D-*~I*---+----+--~:

Width - 12.00 in. (30.48 cm)
Height - 6.75 in. (17.15 cm)
Depth - 0.50 in. (1.27 cm)
Weight - 12 oz (397.3 gm)

Electrical Characteristics

L _____ --'

Average DC Current

Rp DETERMINES VOLTAGE AND CUR~~N! RAN~E.

Vcc= + 5V ± 5%, 1~OA witheut user supplied isolated
receiver/driver
Icc'" 1.6A max with user supplied iselator receiver/driver

Bus Interface Characteristics
All data address and control commands are iSBC 80
bus compatible.
,

110 Addressing
8255'1

Port

825H2

Control
C

Address x+ol X+ll X+2

X+.:i

Control
C

X+4I X + 5 I X + 6

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description
Optically Iselated I/O Beard

Temperat'ure -O·C te 55·C
,
Relative Humidity - 0 to 90%, non·condensing

X+7

Where:
base address is from OOH to 1FH (jumper selectable)

SBC 556

Environmental Characteristics

Reference Manual
9800489·02 - ,iSsC 556 Hardware Reference Manual
(NOT SUPPLIED)
Reference manuals are shipped with each product .only
if deSignated SUPPLIED (see abeve). Manuals may be
ordered frem any ,Intel sales representative, distributer
office or from Intel Literature, Department, 3065 Bowers
Avenue, Santa Ciara, California 95051.

iSBC 569
INTELLIGENT DIGITAL CONTROLLER
• Single board digital I/O controller with
up to four microprocessors to share the
digital input/output signal processing

• 2K bytes of dual port static read/write
memory
• Sockets for up to 8K bytes of Intel 2758,
2716,2732 erasable programmable read
only memory

• 3 MHz 8085A central control processor
• Three sockets for 8041/8741 A Universal
Peripheral Interface (UPI·41A) for dis·
tributed digital I/O processing, such as:
-

.. 48 programmable parallel 110 lines with
sockets for interchangeable line drivers
or terminators

Industrial signal processor
(iSBC 941)
Custom programmed 8041A18741A

• Three programmable counters
• 12 levels of programmable interrupt
control
.
• Single + 5V supply
• MULTIBUS standai'dcontrol logic
compatible with optional iSBC 80 and
iSBC 86 CPU, memory, and I/O
expansion boards

• Three operational modes
- Stand·along digital controller
- MULTIBUS master
- Intelligent slave (slave to
MULTIBUS master)

The Intel iSBC 569 Intelligent Digital Controller is a single board computer (BOB5A based) with sockets for three
B041A1B741A Universal Peripheral Interface chips (UPI-41A). The I/O processing algorithm may betailored to application
requirements using designer selected combinations of standard Intel industrial signal processors (e.g., iSBC 941) or user
programmed UPI-41A processors. These devices may be used to offload the BOB5A processor from time consuming tasks
such as pulse counting, event sensing, and parallel or serial digital I/O data formatting with error checking and
handshaking. The iSBC 569 board is acomplete digital controller with up tofourIJrocessors on asingle 6.75 inches x 12.00
inches (17.15cm x 30.4Bcm) printed circuit board. The BOB5A CPU, system clock, read/write memory, non-volatile
memory, priority interrupt logic, programmable timers, MUL TIBUS control and interface logic, optional UPI processors
and optional line driver and terminators all reside on one board.

7·27

iSBC 569
work on the more important application programming of
machine or process optimization. Controlling the Intel
UPI-41A processors becomes a simple task of reading or
writing command and data bytes to or from the data bus
buffer register on the UPI device. Programming the iSBC
941 Industrial Digital Processor to produce a pulse output,
for example, is as simple as sending command and
parameter bytes indicating initialization, pulse output
selection, period and delay parameters, followed by a
command to begin execution.

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Intelligent Digital Controller
Three modes of operation - the iSBC 569 Intelligent
Digital Controller is capable of operating in one of three
modes; stand alone controller, bus master, or intelligent
slave.
Stand alone controller - the iSBC 569 board may
function as a stand alone, single board controller with
CPU, memory, and I/O elements on a single board. Five
volt (+5VDC) only operation allows configuration of low
cost controllers with only a single power supply
voltage. The on-board 2K bytes RAM and upto 16K bytes
ROM/EPROM, as well as the assistance of three UPI-41A
processors, allow significant digital I/O control from a
single board.

Central Processing Unit
A powerful Intel 8085A 8-bit CPU, fabricated on a single
LSI chip, is the central processor for the iSBC 569 ™
controller. The six general purpose 8-bit registers may
be addressed individually or in pairs, providing both
single and double precision operations. The program
counter can address up to 64K bytes of memory using
iSBC expansion boards. The 16-.bit stack pointer
controls the addressing of an external stack. This stack
provides sub-routine nesting bounded only by memory
size. The minimum instruction execution time is 1.30
microseconds. The 8085A CPU is software compatible
with the Intel 8080A CPU.

Bus master - in this mode of operation,. the iSBC 569
controller may interface with and control iSBC expansion
memory and I/O boards; or even other iSBC 569
Intelligent Digital Controllers configured as. intelligent
slaves (but no additional bus masters) ..
Intelligent slave - the iSBC 569 controller can perform as
an intelligent slave to any 8- or 16-bit MUL TIBUS master
CPU by offloading the master of digital control related
tasks. Preprocessing of data forthe master is controlled
by the on-board 8085A CPU which coordinates upto three
UPI-41A processors.' Using the iSBC 569 board as an
intelligent slave, multi-channel digital control can be
managed entirely on-board, freeing a system master to
perform other system functions. The dual port RAM
memory allows the iSBC 569 controller to process and
store data without MULTI BUS memory contention.

Bus Structure
The iSBC 569 Intelligent Digital Controller utilizes a triple
bus architecture concept. An internal bus is used for onboard memory and I/O operations. A MUL TlBUS
interface is available to provide access for all external
memory and I/O operations. A dual port bus with
controller enables access via the third bus to 2K bytes of
static RAM from either the on-board CPU or a system
master. Hence, common data may be stored in on-board
memory and may be accessed either by the on-board
CPU or by system masters. A block diagram of the iSBC
569 functional components is shown in Figure 1..

Simplified Programming
By using Intel UPI-41A processors for common tasks such
as counting, sensing change of state, printer control and
keyboard scanning/debouncing, the user .frees up time to

MULTIBUS

Figure 1. iSBC 569 Intelligent Digital Controller Block Diagram

7·28

iSBC 569
RAM Capacity

Programmable Timers

The iSBC 569 board contains 2K bytes of read/write
memory using Intel 2114 static RAMs. RAM accesses
may occur from either the iSBC 569 controller or from any
other bus master interfaced via the MUL TIBUS system
bus. The iSBC 569 board provides addressing jumpers to
allow the on-board RAM to reside within a one megabyte
address space when accessed via the system bus. In
addition, a switch is provided which allows the user to
reserve a 1K byte segment of on-board RAM for use by the
SOS5A CPU. This reserved RAM space is not accessible
via the system bus and does not occupy any system
address space.

The iSBC 569 Intelligent Digital Controller board provides
three independently programmable interval timer/
counters utilizing one Intel S253 Programmable Interval
Timer (PIT). The Intel S253 PIT provides three 16-bit
BCD or binary interval timer/counters. Each timer may
be used to provide a time reference for each UPITM
processor or for a group of UPI processors. The output of
each timer also connects to the 8259A Programmable
Interrupt Controller (PIC) providing the capability of
timed interrupts. All gate inputs, clock inputs, and timer
outputs of the 8253 PIT are available at the I/O ports for
external access.

EPROM/ROM Capacity
Two sockets for up to 16K bytes of nonvolatile read only
memory are provided on the iSBC 569 board. Nonvolatile
memory may be added in 1K-byte increments up to a
maximum of 2K bytes using Intel 275S erasable and
electrically reprogram mabie ROMs (EPROMs); in
2K-byte increments up to a maximum of 4K bytes using
Intel 2316 ROMs or 2716 EPROMs; in 4K byte increments
up to SK bytes maximum using Intel 2732 EPROMs; or in
SK-byte increments up to 16K bytes maximum using Intel
2364 ROMs (both sockets must contain same type
ROM/EPROM). All on-board ROM/EPROM operations
are performed at maximum processor speed.

Timer Functions -In utilizing the iSBC 569 controller, the
systems designer simply configures, via software, each
timer to meet systems requirements. The S253 PIT modes
are listed in Table 1. The contents of each counter may be
read at any time during system operation with simple read
operations for event counting applications. The contents
of each counter can be read "on-the-fly" for time stamping
events or time clock referenced program initiations.

Table 1. 8253 Programmable Timer Functions

Universal Peripheral Interfaces (UPI-41A)
The iSBC 569 Intelligent Digital Controller board provides
three sockets for user supplied Intel S041A/S741A
Universal Peripheral Interface (UPI-41A) chips. Sockets
are also provided for the associated line drivers and
terminators for the UPII/O ports. The UPI-41A processor
is a single chip microcomputer containing a CPU, 1K
bytes of ROM (S041A) or EPROM (S741A), 64 bytes of
RAM, 16 programmable I/O lines, and an S-bit timer/event
counter. Special interface registers included in the chip
allow the UPI-41A processor to function as a slave
processor to the iSBC 569 controller board's SOS5A
CPU. The UPI processor allows the user to specify
algorithms for controlling peripherals directly thereby
freeing the SOS5A for other system functions. For
additional information, including UPI-41A instructions,
refer to the UPI-41 User's Manual (Manual No. 9S00504).

Function

Operation

I nterrupt on
terminal count

When terminal count is reached,
an interrupt request is generated.

Programmable
one·shot

Output goes' low upon receipt of
an external trigger edge or software command and returns high
when terminal count is reached.
This function is retriggerable.

Rate
generator

Divide by N counter. The output
will go low for one input clock cy·
cle, and the period from one low·
going pulse to the next is N times
the input clock period.

Square·wave
rate generator

Output will remain high until one·
half the count has been com·
pleted, and go low for the other
half of the count.

Software
triggered
strobe

Output remains high until software loads count (N). N counts
after count is loaded, output goes
low for one input clock period.

Hardware
triggered
strobe

Output goes low for one clock pe·
riod N counts after rising edge on
counter trigger input. The counter
is retriggerable.

Event counter

On a jumper selectable basis, the
clock input becomes an input
from the external system. CPU
may read the number of events oc·
curring after the counting "win·
dow" has been enabled or an in·
terrupt may be generated after N
counts occur in the system.

Industrial Digital Processor (iSBC 941)
The iSBC 941 Industrial Digital Processor is a 40-pin DIP
device which provides the user with easy-to-use
processing of digital input and output signals desired in
many industrial automation environments. One of nine
digital I/O functions can be selected at anyone time for
measuring, counting, or controlling up to 16 separate I/O
lines. An additional eight utility commands allow reading
or setting the condition of unused I/O lines. Simplex
serial input and output modes can assemble or disassemble bytes transmitted asynchronously over TTL lines,
including insertion and deletion of start/stop bits. The
iSBC 941 processor plugs into any of the three UPI-41A
sockets on the iSBC 569 board. Simple programming
commands from the master SOS5A processor can .thus
implement up to 4S lines of preprocessed digital I/O
signals. For specific commands and further information,
refer to the iSBC 941 Data Sheet in this document.

7-29

iSBC 569
Interrupt Capability

expanded system using one iSBC 569 Intelligent Digital
Controller as the system master and additional controllers as intelligent slaves,

The iSBC 569 Intelligent Digital Controller provides
interrupt service for up to 12 interrupt sources, Any of the
12 sources may interrupt the on-board processor, Four
interrupt levels are handled directly by the SOS5A CPU
and eight levels are serviced from an Intel S259A
Programmable Interrupt Controller (PIC) routing an
interrupt request output to the INTR input of the SOS5A.

Intelligent Slave Programming
When used as an intelligent slave, the iSBC 569 controller
appears as an additional RAM memory module, System
bus masters communicate with the iSBC 569 board as if it
were just an extension of system memory, To simplify
this communication, the user has been given some
specific tools:

8085A Interrupt - Each of four direct SOS5A interrupt
inputs has a unique vector memory address, An SOS5A
jump instruction at each of these addresses then provides
software linkage to interrupt service routines located
independently anywhere in the memory,

Flag Interrupt - The Flag Interrupt is generated any time
a write command is performed by an off-board CPU to the
first location of iSBC 569 RAM, This interrupt provides a
means for the master CPU to notify the iSBC 569
controller that it wished to establish a communications
sequence, The flag interrupt is cleared when the onboard processor reads the first location of its RAM. In
systems with more than one intelligent slave, the flag
interrupt provides a unique interrupt to each slave outside
the normal MUL TIBUS interrupt lines (INTOI-INn/),

8259A Interrupts - The eight interrupt sources originate
from both on-board controller functions and the system
bus:
UPI-41A Processors - one interrupt from each of three
UPI processor sockets,
S253 PIT - one interrupt from each of three timer outputs,
MUL TIBUS System Bus - one of eight MUL TIBUS
interrupt lines may be jumpered to either of two S259A
PIC interrupt inputs,

RAM - The on-board 2K byte RAM area that is accessible
to both an off-board CPU and the on-board SOS5A may be
configured for system access on any 2K boundary,

Programmable Reset - The iSBC 569 Intelligent Digital
Controller board has a programmable output latch used
to control on-board functions, Three of the outputs are
connected to separate UPI.-41A RESET inputs, Thus, the
user can reset any or all of the UPI-41A processors under
software control. A fourth latch output may be used to
generate an interrupt request onto the MUL TIBUS
interrupt lines, A fifth latch output is connected to a lightemitting diode which may be used for diagnostic
purposes,

MULTIBUS Interrupts - The third tool to improve system
operation as an intelligent slave is access to the
MUL TIBUS interrupt lines. The iSBC 569 controller can
both respond to interrupt signals from an off-board CPU,
and generate an interrupt to the off-board CPU .via the
system bus.

System Development Capability
Software development for the iSBC 569 Intelligent Digital
Controller board is supported by the Intellec® Microcomputer Development System including a resident
macroassembler, text editor, system monitor, a linker,
object code locator, and Library Manager. In addition,
both PLiM and FORTRAN language programs can be
compiled to run on the iSBC 569 board, A unique incircuit emulator (ICE-S5™) option provides the capability
of developing and debugging software directly on the
iSBC 569 board. This greatly simplifies the design,
development, and debug of iSBC 569 system software,

Expansion Capabilities
When the iSBC 569 controller is used as a single board
digital controller, memory and 1/0 capacity may be
expanded using Intel MUL TIBUS compatible expansion
boards, In this mode, no other bus masters may be in the
system, Memory may be expanded to a64K byte capacity
by adding user specified combinations of RAM boards,
EPROM boards, or combination boards, Input/output
capacity may be increased by adding 1/0 expansion
boards, Multiple iSBC 569 boards may be included in an

8013;;(\

accessible from on-board SOS5A. Separately addressable
from system bus.
Off-board expansion - up to 64K bytes of EPROMIROM
or RAM capacity,

CP~)

Word Si7.(;. - 8, 10 cr;:?t '::,its
Cycle Time - 1,30 1l80C ::'c ..:% ~:1' 'estest executable
instruction; i.e" fou~ clock cyclns.
Clock Rate - 3,07 MHz ± ,1%

I/O Capacity

Memory Capacity

Parallel-Timers - Three timers, with independent gate
input, clock input, and timer output user-accessible,
Clock inputs can be strapped to an external source or to
an on-board 1.3S24 MHz reference, Each timer is
'/}'1nected to a S259A Programmable Interrupt Controller
CI"(
• 8y also be optionally connected to UPI processors,

On-board ROM/EPROM - 2K, 4K, 3V;, 0' 16K by!es flf
user installed ROM or EPROM
On-board RAM - 2K bytes of static RAM. Fully

UPI-I/Q - Three UPI-41A interfaces, each with two S-bit
I/O ports plus the two UPI Test Inputs, TheS-bit ports are
user-configurable (as inputs or outputs) in groups offour,

System Access Thr.e
Ou",1 port memory - i25 nsec

7-30

isec 569
Serlal-1 TTL compatibleserial channel utilizing SID and
SOD lines of on-board 8085A CPU

Depth - 17.15 cm (6.75 inches)
Thickness - 1.27 cm (0.50 inch)
Weight - 3.97 gm (14 ounces)

On-Board Addressing

Electrical Characteristics
DC Power Requirements - + 5V

All communications to the UPI-41A processors, to the
programmable reset latch, to the timers, and to the
interrupt controller are via read and write commands from
the on-board 8085A CPU.

@ 2.58A with no op·
tional devices installed. Foreach8741Aadd 135 mAo For
each 220/330 resistor network, add 60 mAo Add the fol·
lowing for each EPROM/ROM Installed.

Memory Addressing
On-board ROM/EPROM - 0-07FF (using 2758 EPROMs);
O-OFFF (using 2716 EPROMs or 2316 ROMs); 0-1 FFF (using
2732 EPROMs); D-3FFF (using the 2364 ROMs)
On-board RAM - 8000-87FF System access - any 2K
increment 00000-FF800 (switch selectable); 1K bytes may
be disabled from bus access by switch selection.

+S.OV Current Requirement
Type
1ROM

I/O Addressing
Source
8253
UPIO
UPI1
UPI2
PROGRAMMABLE RESET
8259A

Driver
7438
7437
7432
7426
7409
7408
7403
7400

Input frequencies - jumper selectable reference
Internal: 1.3824 MHz ± .1 % (.723 I'sec, nominal)
External: User supplied (2 MHz maximum)
Output Frequencies (at 1.3824 MHz)

Real-time

interrupt interval
Rate Generator
(frequency)

Max'

1.45 /-lsec

47.4 msec

21.09 Hz

691.2 KHz

125
125
240
55
55

rnA
rnA
rnA
rnA
rnA

I/O Drivers - The following line drivers are all compatible
with the I/O driver sockets on the iSBC 569 Intelligent
Digital Controller.

Timer Specifications

Min'

2ROMS

rnA
rnA
rnA
rnA
rnA

Line Drivers and Terminators

Addresses
OEOH-OE3H
OE4H-OE5H
OE6H-OE7H
OE8H-OE9H
OEAH-OEBH
OECH-OEDH

Function

100
100
120
40
40

2758
2716
2316E
2732
2364

Nots

= inverting;

Characteristic

Sink Current (mA)

I,OC
I
NI
I,OC
NI,OC
NI
I,OC
I

48
48
16
16
16
16
16
16

NI = non-inverHng; OC = open collector.

I/O Terminators - 2200/3300 divider or 1 kO pullup
220Q
+5V----~::~---_,

220QI330QL

1. Single 16-bit binary count

~~.- - -_______ 0

Isec 901 OPTION

Interfaces
1 kQ

MUL TlBUSTM Interface - All signals compatible with
iSBC and MUL TIBUS architecture
Parallel I/O - All signals TTL compatible
Interrupt Requests - All TTL compatible
Timer - All signals TTL compatible
Serial I/O - All signals TTL compatible

1 kQ + 5V

iSBC 902 OPTION

Environmental Characteristics
Operating Temperature - O°C to 55°C (32°F to 131°F)
Relative Humidity - To 90% without condensation

Reference Manuals

Connectors
Pins
(qty)

Centers
(In.)

Bus

0.156

Viking 3KH43/9AMK12

Parallel 1/0

0.1

3M 3415-000 or
TI H312125

Interface

-----'\N',~------o

9800845·01 - iSBC 569 Intelligent Digital Controller
Board Hardware Reference Manual (NOT SUPPLIED)
9803077 - iSBC 941 Digital Signal Processor User's
Guide (NOT SUPPLIED)
Reference manuals are shipped with each product only if
designated SUPPLIED (see above). Manuals may be
ordered from any Intel sales representative, distributor
office or from Intel Literature Department, 3065 Bowers
Avenue, Santa Clara, California 95051.

Mating Connectors

PhYSical Characteristics
Width - 30.48 cm (12.00 inches)

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

SBC 569

Intelligent Digital Controller

7·31

Communication
Controllers

_~.c::::::"..

iSBC 534 or (pSBC 534*)
FOUR CHANNEL COMMUNICATION EXPANSION BOARD
• iSBC 80 serial 110' expansion through
four programmable synchronous and
asynchronous communications
channels

• Jumper selectable interface register
addresses
• 16·bit parallel 110 interface compatible
with Bell 801 automatic calling unit

• Individual software programmable baud
rate generation for each serial 110
channel

• RS232C/CCITT V.24 interfaces plus
20 mA optically isolated current loop
interfaces (sockets)

• Two independent programmable 16·bit
interval timers

• Programmable digital loopback for
diagnostics

• Sixteen maskable interrupt request
lines with priority encoded and
programmable interrupt algorithms

• Interface control for auto answer and
auto originate modems

The iSBC 534 Four Channel Communication Expansion Board is a member of Intel's complete line of iSBC 80 memory
and 1/0 expansion boards. The iSBC 534 interfaces directly to anyiSBC 80 single board computer via the system bus
to provide expansion of system serial communications capability. Four fully programmable synchronous and asynchronous serial channels with RS232C buffering and provision for 20 mA optically isolated current loop buffering are
provided. Baud rates, data formats, and interrupt priorities for each channel are individually software selectable. In
addition to the extensive complement 0'1 EIA Standard RS232C signals provided, the iSBC 534 provides 16 lines of
RS232C buffered programmable parallel 1/0. This interface is configured to be directly compatible with the Bell Model
801 automatic calling unit. These capabilities provide a flexible and easy means for interfacing iSBC 80 and System
80 based systems to RS232C and optically isolated current loop compatible terminals, cassettes, asynchronous and
. . .
synchronous modems, and distributed processing netwOrks.

'Same product, manufactured by Intel Puerto Rico, Inc.

8·1

iSBC 534
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

lime delay is needed, software commands to the programmable timers select the desired function. Three
: functions of these timers are supported on the iSBC
534, as shown in Table 1. The,contents of each counter
may be read at any time during system operation.

Communications Interface
Four programmable communications interfaces using
Intel's 8251 Universal" SynchroriousiAsynchronous
Receiver/Transmitter (USART) are contained on the
board.' Each USART can be programmed by the system
software tc;>individually select the desired asynchronous or synchronous serial datfltransmission
technique (including IBM Bi-Sync). The mode of operation, (i.e. synchronous. or asyncl:lronous), data format,
control character format, parity, and baud rate are all
under program control. Each 8251 provides full duplex,
double buffered transmit and receive capability. Parity,
overrun, and framing error detection are all incorporated 'i.ri :each USART. Each set of RS232C command
lines, serial data lines', arid signal ground lines are
brought out to 26-pin edge connectors that mate with
RS232C flat or round cables.

Table 1. Programmable Timer Functions

CURRENT

RS232C

DEVICE

COMPATIBLE
DEVICE

coo,

IIIIhen terminal count, is reached
an interrupt request is generaled.
This function is used for the generation of real-time clocks.

Divide by N counter; The output
will go low for one input clock cycle and high for N - 1 Input clock
periods.
Square wave rate Output wil,l remain high for onehalf the count and low for the
generator
other half of the count.

16·Bitlnterval Timers

DEVICE

Operation

Interrupt on terminal count

Rate generator'

The iSBC 534 provides six fully programmable and independent BCD and binary 16-bit interval timers utilizing two Intel 8253 programmable interval timers.· Four
timers are available to the systems designer to generate
baud rates for the USARTS under software control.
Routing for the outputs from the other two counters is
jumper selectable. Each may be independently routed
to'the programmable interrupt controller to provide real.
time clocking or to the USARTs (feii applicationsrequir,
irig different transmit and receive bilUd rajes). 'In utilizing the iSBC 534,the systems, designer simply configures, via s'?ftware, each timer independently to meet
system requirements. Whenever ag,i~en !:laud. rate or

RS232C
COMPATIBLE

Function

Interrupt Request Lines
Two independent Intel 8259 programmable interrupt
controllers (PIC's) provide ,,!ectoring for 16 interrupt
levels. ·'As shown in Table 2, a selection of three pri'ority
processing algorithms is available to the system
designer. The manner in which requests are serviced
may thus be config!lred to match system requirements.
Priority assignments may be reconfigured dynamically
via, software at any time during system operation. Any
combination of interrupt levels may be masked through
storage, via software, ofa single byte to the interrupt
mask register of each PIC. Each PIC's interrupt request

CURRENT
LOOP' .

DEVICE

AS232C

CURRENT

RS232C

CURRENT

COMPATIBLE
DEVICE

DEVICE

COMPATIBLE
DEVICE

LOOP
DEVice

INTERRUPT"'

I,IITERRUPT

REOUEST

LINES
IFRDMUSARTSj

Figure 1_ iSBC 534,Four

coo,

AEQUEST
LINES

Channel~ommunications

8-2

2
PROGRAMMABLE
TIMERS

Expansion Board Block.Diagram

iSBC 534
Table 3_ Interrupt Assignments

eutput line may be jumper selected to. drive any of the
nine interrupt lines en the iSBC 80 bus.
Table 2. Interrupt Priority Options
Algorithm

Operation

Fully
nested

Interrupt request line priorities fixed at 0
as highest, 7 as lewest.

Auto.retating

Equal priority. Each level, after receiving
service, becomes the lew est prierity level
until next interrupt eccurs.
System seftware assigns lewest prlerity
level. Prierity ef all other levels based in
sequence numerically en this assignment.

Specific
prierity

The iSBC 534 prevides 16 RS232C buffered parallel 1/0
lines implemented utilizing an Intel 8255 programmable

SPECIFICATIONS

PIT 1 counter 1
PIT 2 ceunter 2
Ring indicater (all perts)
Present next digit
Carrier detect pert 0
Carrier detect pert 1
Carrier detect pert 2
Carrier detect pert 3

Single Timer

Function
Real·Time
Interrupt
Interval

Sample Baud Rates 1
Baud Rate (Hz)

Rate Generator
(Frequency)

Asynchronous
+ 16

.,. 64

9600
4800
2400
1200
600
300

2400
1200
600
300
150
75
110

PORT 0 Rx' ROY
PORT 0 Tx ROY
PORT 1 Rx ROY
PORT 1 Tx ROY
PORT 2 Rx ROY
PORT 2 Tx ROY
PORT 3 Rx ROY
PORT 3 Tx ROY

Input Frequency (On-Board Crystal Oscillater) MHz ± 10% (0.813I's peried, nominal)

Synchronous - 5·8 bit characters; internal er external
character synchrenizatien; autematic sync insertien.
Asynchronous - 5·8 bit characters; break character
generation; 1, 1 y" or 2 step bits; false start bit detectien.

38400
19200
9600
4800
6980

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Interval Timer and Baud Rate Generator
Frequencies

Serial Communications Characteristics

PIC 1

-Complete operational details on the Intel 8251 USART, the Intel 8253
Programmable Interval Timer, the Intel 8255 Programmable Peripheral
Interface, and the Intel 8259 Programmable Interrupt controller are con·
tained in the Intel 8080 Microcomput~r Syslem User's Manual and 8085
Microcomputer System User's Manual.

Systems Compatibility

153.6
76.8
38.4
19.2
9.6
4.8
6.98

PIC 0

peripheral inteirface (PPI) cenfigured to. eperate i"h mode
O. * Tl)ese lines are configured to be directly cempatible
with the Bell 801 automatic calling unit (ACU). This
capability allews the iSBC 534 to. interface iSBC 80 and
System 80-based systems t6 Bell 801 type ACUs and up
to feur modems or other serial cemmunicatiens
devices. Fer systems net requiring interface to. an ACU,
the parallel 1/0 lines may also be used as general purpes.e .RS232C compatible control lines in syst.em implementation.

Interrupt Request Generation - As shewn i.n Table 3,
interrupt requests may originate from 16 sources. Two.
jumper selectable interrupt requests (8 total) can be
automatically generated by each USART when a
character is ready to. be transferred to the iSBC 80
system bus (I.e., receive buffer is full) er a character has
been transmitted (transmit buffer is empty). Jumper
selectable requests can be generated by two. of the programmable timers (PITs), and six lines are. reuted
directly from peripherals to accept carrier detect (4
lines), ring indicater, and the Bell 801 present next digit
request lines.

Frequency2
(kHz, Software Selectable) Synchronous

Interrupt
Request
Line

1.2288

Dual/Timer Counter
(Two Timers Cascaded)

Min

Ma.

Min

1.63~s

53.3ms

3.26~s

18.75 Hz

614.4 kHz

0.0029 Hz

M••
58.25

minutes
307.2 kHz

Interfaces - RS232C Interfaces
EIA Standard RS232C Signals provided and supported:
Carrier detect
Receive data
Clear to. send
Ring indicater
Secendary receive data
Oata set ready
Secondary transmit data
Oata terminal ready
Request to. send
Transmit cleck
Transmit data
Receive clock

Notes:
1. Baud rates shown here are only a sample subset of possible
software-programmable rates available.Any frequency from 18.75 Hz to
614.4 kHz may be generated utilizing on·board crystal oscillator and
16·bit programmable interval timer (used here as frequency divider).
2. Frequency selected by 110 writes of appropriate 16·bit frequency factor to Baud Rate Register.

Parallel 110 - 8 input lines, 8 output lines, all Signals
RS232C cempatible
Bus - All signals iSBC 80 bus compatible

8-3

iSBC 534
I/O Addressing

Physical Characteristics

The USART, interval timer, Interrupt controller, and
parallel interface registers of the iSBC 534 are can·
figured as a block of 16110 address locations. The loca·
tion of this block is jumper selectable to begin at any
16·byte 1/0 address boundary (i.e., OOH, 10H, 20H, etc.).

Width - 12.00 in. (30.48 cm)
Height - 6.75 in. (17.15 cm)
Depth - 0.50 in. (1.27 cm)
Weight - 14 oz (398 gm)

I/O Access Time

Average DC Current

Electrical Characteristics
400
400
400
400

ns
ns
ns
ns

USART registers
Parallel 1/0 registers
Interval timer registers
Interrupt controller registers

Voltage

Compatible' Connectors/Cable
Interface

Bus
Serial and
paralielliO

Pins
(qty)

Centers
(In.)

0.156

0.1

Mating Connectors
Viking 3KH43/9AMK12
3M 3462·000 or
TI H312113

Without
Opto·lsolators

With
Opto·lsolators'

Vee = +5V

1.9 A, max

1.9 AI max

VOO= +12V
VAA= -12V

275 mA, max

420 mAo max

250 mA, max

400 rnA, max

Note

Cable

1. With four 4N33 and four 4N37 opto·isolator packages installed in
sockets provided to implement four 20 mA current loop interfaces.

N/A
Intel
ISBC955

Environmental Characteristics
Operating Temperature - 0 'C to + 55 'C

Compatible Opto·lsolators
Function

Supplier

Reference Manual
9800450·12 - iSBC 534 Hardware Reference Manual
(NOT SUPPLIED)
Reference manuals are shipped with each product only
if designated SUPPLIED (see above). Manuals may be
ordered from any Intel sales representative, distributor
office or from Intel Literature Department, 3065 Bowers
Avenue, Santa Clara, California 95051.

Part Number

Driver,

Fairchild
General Electric
Monsanto

4N33

Receiver

Fairchild
General Electric
Monsanto

4N37

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

SBC 534

Four Channel Communication Ex·
pansion Board

8·4

iSBC 544
INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER
• iSBC Communications Controller acting
as a single board communications
computer or an intelligent slave for
communications expansion

• Ten programmable parallel I/O lines
compatible with Bell 801 Automatic
Calling Unit

• On·board dedicated 808SA Micro·
processor providing communications
control and buffer management for
four programmable synchronousl
asynchronous channels

• Twelve levels of programmable
interrupt control

• Sockets for up to 8K bytes of read only
memory
• 16K bytes of dual port dynamic readl
write memory with on·board refresh
• Extended MULTIBUS addressing
permits iSBC 544 board partitioning
into 16K·byte segments in a 1·megabyte
address space

• Individual software programmable baud
rate generation for each serial 1/0
channel
• Three independent programmable
interval timerlcounters
• Interface control for auto answer and
auto originate modem

The iSBC 544 Intelligent Communications Controller is a member of Intel's family of single-board computers, memory,
I/O, and peripheral controller boards. The iSBC 544 board is a complete communications controller on a single
6.75x 12.00 inch printed circuit card. The on-board 8085A CPU may perform local communications processing by
directly interfacing with on-board read/write memory, nonvolatile read only memory, four synchronous/asynchronous
serial I/O ports, RS366 compatible parallel I/O, programmable timers, and programmable interrupt~.

8·5

iSBC 544
to coordinate up to four serial channels. Using the iSBC
544 as an intelligent slave, multichannel serial transfers
can be managed entirely on-board, freeing the bus
master to perform other system functions.

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Intelligent Communications Controller
Two Mode Operation - The iSBC 544 board is capable
of operating in one of two modes: 1) as a single board
communications computer with all computer and communications interface hardware on a single board; 2) as
an "intelligent bus slave" that can perform communications related tasks as a peripheral processor to one or
more bus masters_ The iSBC 544 may be configured to
operate as a stand-alone single board communications
computer with all MPU, memory and I/Oelements on a
single board. In this mode of operation, the iSBC 544
may also interface with expansion memory and 1/0
boards (but no additional bus masters). The iSBC 544
performs as an intelligent slave to the bus master by
performing all communications related tasks. Complete
synchronous and asynchronous 1/0 and data
management are controlled by the on-board 8085A CPU

II
I
I

SERIAL I/O

Architecture - The iSBC 544 board is functionally partitioned into three major sections: 1/0, central computer,
and shared dual port RAM memory (Figure 1). The 1/0
hardware is centered around the four Intel 8251A USART
devices providing fully programmable serial interfacing.
Included here as well is a 10-bit parallel interface compatible with the Bell 801 automatic calling unit, or equivalent. The 1/0 is under full control of the on-board CPU
and is protected from access by system bus masters.
The second major segment of the intelligent communications controller is a central computer, with an 8085A
CPU providing powerful processing capability. The
8085A together with on-board EPROM I ROM, static
RAM, programmable timerslcounters, and program-

SEAIALIIQ

SERIALI/O

PARAUECil6 -

I
I
I

PROGRAMMABLE 1/0

-r-------

I--

I
I

I
I
I
I

I
I

"I
I

CENTRAL COMPUTER

MULTIBUS

Figure 1_ iSBC 544 Intelligent Communications Controller Block Diagram

8-6

16K x8
DYNAMIC
RAM

iSBC 544
mabie interrupt control provide the intelligence to manage sophisticated communications operations on-board
the iSBC 544 board. The timer/counters and interrupt
control are also common to the I/O area providing pro·
grammable baud rates to the USARTs and prioritizing
interrupts generated from the USARTs. The central computer functions are protected for access only by the on·
board 8085A. Likewise, the on·board 8085A may not gain
access to the system bus when being used as an in·
telligent slave. When the iSBC 544 is used as a bus
master, the on-board 8085A CPU controls complete
system operation accessing on·board functions as well
as memory and I/O expansion. The third major segment,
dual port RAM memory, is the key link between the iSBC
544 intelligent slave and bus masters managing the
system functions. The dual port concept allows a common block of dynamic memory to be accessed by the
on·board 8085A CPU and off-board bus masters. The
system program can, therefore, utilize the shared dual
port RAM to pass command and status information
between the bus masters and on·board CPU. In addition,
the dual port concept permits blocks of data
transmitted or received to accumulate in the on-board
shared RAM, minimizing the need for 'a dedicated
memory board.

Central Processing Unit
Intel's powerful 8·bit n·channel 8085A CPU, fabricated
on a single, LSI chip, is the central processor for the
iSBC 544. The 8085A CPU, is directly software compatible
with the Intel 8080A CPU. The 8085A contains six 8·bit
general purpose registers and an accumulator. The six
general purpose registers may be addressed individually
or in pairs, providing both single and double precision
operators. The minimum instruction execution time is
1.45 microseconds. The 8085A CPU has a 16·bit program
counter. An external stack, located within any portion of
iSBC 544 read/write memory, may be used as a last·in/
first·out storage area for the contents of the program
counter, flags, accumulator, and all of the six general
purpose registers. A 16-bit stack pointer controls the addreSSing of thi's external stack. This stack provides sub·
routine nesting bounded only by memory size.

EPROM/ROM Capacity
Sockets for up to 8K bytes of nonvolatile read only memo
ory are provided on the iSBC 544 board. Read only memo
ory may be added in 2K·byte increments up to a maximum of 4K bytes using Intel 2716 EPROMs or Intel
2316E masked ROMS; or in 4K-byte increments up to 8K
bytes maximum using Intel 2732 EPROMs. All on·board
EPROM/ROM operations are, performed at maximum
processor speed.

Serial I/O
Four programmable communications interfaces using
Intel's 8251A Universal Synchronous/Asynchronous
Receiver/Transmitter (USART) are contained on the board
and controlled by the on·board CPU in combination
with the ,on·board interval timer/counters to provide all
common communication frequencies. Each USART can
be programmed by the system software to individually
select the desired asynchronous or synchronous serial
data transmission technique (including IBM Bi. Sync.).
The mode of operation (i.e., synchronous or asynchronous), data format, control character format, parity, and
baud rate are all under program control. Each 8251A pro·
vides full duplex, double·buffered, transmit and receive
capability. Parity, overrun, and framing error detection
are all incorporated in each USART. Each channel is
fully buffered to provide a direct interface to RS232C
compatible terminals, peripherals, or synchronous/asynchronous modems. Each channel of RS232C command
lines, serial data lines, and signal ground lines are
brought out to 26·pin edge connectors that mate with
RS232C flat or round cable. An optional iSBC 530 teletypewriter adapter provides an optically isolated inter·
face for those systems requiring a 20mA current loop.

RAM Capacity
The iSBC 544 contains 16K bytes of dynamic read/write
memory using Intel 2117 RAMs. Power for the on·board
RAM may be provided on an auxiliary power bus, and
memory protect logic is included for RAM battery backup requirements. The iSBC 544 contains a dual port controller, which 'provides dual port capability for the on·
board RAM memory. RAM accesses may occur from
either the on·board 8085A CPU or from another bus
master, when used as an intelligent slave. Since onboard RAM accesses do not require the MULTIBUS, the
bus is available for concurrent bus master use; Dynamic
RAM refresh is accomplished automatically by the iSBC
544 for accesses originating from either the CPU or from
the MULTIBUS:
AddreSSing - On board RAM, as seen by the on-board
8085A CPU, resides at address 8000·BFFF. On ·board
RAM, as seen by an off-board CPU, may be placed on
any 4K·byte address boundary. The iSBC 544 provides
extended addressing jumpers to allow the on·board
RAM to reside within a one megabyte address space
when accessed via the MULTIBUS. In ~ddition, jumper
options are provided which allow the user to protect 8K·
or 12K·bytes of on-board RAM for use by the on-board
8085 CPU only. This reserved RAM space is not acces·
sible via the MULTIBUS and does not occupy any
system address space.

Parallel 110 Port
The iSBC 544 provides a 10·bit parallel I/O interface controlled by an Intel 8155 Programmable Interface (PPI)
chip. The parallel I/O port is directly compatible with an
Automatic Calling Unit (ACU) such as the Bell" Model
801, or equivalent, and can also be used for auxiliary fun·
ctions. All signals are RS232C compatible, and the interface cable signal aSSignments meet RS366 specifications. For systems not requiring an ACU interface, the
parallel I/O port can be used for any general purpose
inierface requiring RS232C compatibility.

Stalic RAM - The iSBC 544 board also has 256 bytes of
static RAM located on the Intel 8155 PPI. This memory is
only accessible to the -on·board 1i085A CPU and is
located address 7FOOH·7FFF H.

8-7

iSBC 544
Programmable Timers

Table 1_ Programmable Timer Functions

The iSBC 544 board provides seven fully programmable
and independent interval timer/counters utilizing two
Intel 8253 Programmable Interval Timers (PIT), and the
Intel 8155. The two Intel 8253 PITs provide six independent BCD or binary 16-bit interval timer/counters and the
8155 provides one 14-bit binary timer/counter. Four of
the PIT timers (BDGO-3) are dedicated to the USARTs
providing fully independent programmable baud rates.

Function

Three General U·se Timers - The fifth timer (BDG4) may
be used as an auxiliary baud rate to any of the four
USARTs or may alternatively be cascaded with timer six
to provide extended interrupt intervals .. The sixth PIT
timer/counter (TINT1) can be used to generate interrupt
intervals to the on-board 8085A. In addition to the timer/
counters on the 8253 PITs, the iSBC 544 has a 14-bit
timer available on the 8155 PPI providing a third general
use timer/counter (TINTO). This timer output is jumper
selectable to the interrupt structure of the on-board
8085A CPU to provide additional timer/counter capability.
Timer Functions - In utilizing the iSBC 544 board, the
systems designer simply configures, via software, each
timer independently to meet systems requirements.
Whenever a given baud rate or interrupt interval is
needed, software commands to the programmable timers
select the desired function. The on-board PIT together
with the 8155 provide a total of seven timer/counters
and six operating modes. Mode 3 of the 8253 is the
primary operating mode of the four dedicated USART
baud rate generators. The timer/counters and useful
modes of operation for the general use timer/counters
are shown in Table 1.

Interrupt Capability
The iSBC 544 board provides interrupt service for up to
21 interrupt sources. Any of the 21 sources may interrupt the intelligent controller, and all are brought
through the interrupt logic to 12 interrupt levels. Four interrupt levels are handled directly by the interrupt processing capability of the 8085A CPU and eight levels are
serviced from an Intel 8259 Programmable Interrupt
Controller (PIC) routing an interrupt request output to
the INTR input of the 8085A (see Table 2).

Operation

Counter

Interrupt on
When terminal count
Terminal Count is reached, an inter(ModeO)
rupt request is generated. This function is
useful for generation
of real-time clocks.

8253
TINT1

Rate Generator Divide by N Counter.
(Mode2)
The output will go low
for one input clock
cycle and high for N-1
input clock periods.

8253
BDG4*

Square-Wave I Output will remain
Rate Generator high until one-half the
(Mode 3)
TC has been completed, and go low for
the other half of the
count. This isthe primary operating mode
used for generating
Baud rate clocked to
the USARTs.

8253
BDGO-4
TINT1

Software
Triggered
Strobe
(Mode4)

When the TC is loaded,
the counter will begin.
On TC the output will
goe low for one input
clock period.

8253
BDG4*
TINT1

Single Pulse

Single pulse when TC
reached.

8155
TINTO

Repetitive
Single Pulse

Repetitive Single pulse
each-time TC is
reached until a new
command is loaded.

8155
TINTO

• BDG4 is jumper selectable as an auxiliary baud rate generator to the
USARTs or as a cascaded output to TI NT1. BDG4 may be used in modes
2 and 4 only when configured as a cascaded output.

Table 2_ Interrupt Vector Memory Locations
Vector
Location

Interrupt
Source

Interrupt Sources - The 21 interrupt sources originate
from both on-board communications functions and the
Multibus. Two interrupts are routed from each of the
four USARTs (8 interrupts total) to indicate that the
transmitter and receiver are ready to move a data byte to
or from the on-board CPU. The PIC is dedicated to
accepting these 8 interrupts to optimize USART service
request. One of eight interrupt request lines are jumper
selectable for direct interface from a bus master via the
system bus. Two auxiliary timers (TINTO from 8155 and
TINT1 from 8253) are jumper selectable to provide
general purpose counter/timer interrupts. A jumper
selectable Flag Interrupt is generated to allow any bus
master to interrupt the iSBC 544 by writing into the base
address of the shared dual port memory accessable to
the system. The Flag Interrupt is then cleared by the
iSBC 544 when the on-board processor reads the base
address. This interrupt provides an interrupi link between

Interrupt
Level

Power Fail

TRAP

8253 TINT1
8255TINTO

RST7.5

24H
3C H

Ring Indicator (1)
Carrier Detect

RST6.5

34 H

RST5.5
Flag Interrupt
INTO/-INT7/ (1 of 8)

34 H

Programmabie

5-12

RXRDYO
TXRDYO
RXRDY1
TXRDY1
RXRDY 2
TXRDY2
RXRDY3
TXRDY3

INTR

(1) Four ring indicator interrupts and four carrier detect· interrupts are
summed to the RST 6.5 input. The 8155 may be interrogated to inspect
anyone of the eight Signals.

8-8

iSBC 544
a bus master and intelligent slave (See System Programming). Eight inputs from the serial ports are monitored
to detect a ring indicatorand carrier detect from each of
the four channels. These eight interrupt sources are
summed to a single interrupt level of the 8085A CPU. If
one of these eight interrupts occur, the 8155 PPI can then
be interrogated to determine which port caused the
interrupt. Finally, a jumper selectable Power Fail Interrupt is available from the Multibus to detect a power
down condition.

mode, no other bus masters may be configured in the
system. Memory may be expanded to a 65K byte
capacity by adding user specified combinations of RAM
boards, EPROM boards, or combination boards. Input!
output capacity may be increased by adding digital I/O
and analog I/O expansion boards. Furthermore, multiple
iSBC 544 boards may be included in an expanded
system using one iSBC 544 board as a single board communications computer and additional controllers as
intelligent slaves.

8085 Interrupt - Thirteen of the twenty-one interrupt
sources are available directly to four interrupt inputs of
the on-board 8085A CPU. Requests routed to the 8085A
interrupt inputs, TRAP, RST 7.5, RST 6.5 and RST 5.5
have a unique vector memory address. An 8085A jump
instruction at each of these addresses then provides
software linkage to interrupt service routines located
independently anywhere in the Memory. All interrupt
inputs with the exception of the TRAP may be masked
via software.

System Programming
In the system programming environment, the iSBC 544
board appears as an additional RAM memory module
when used as an intelligent slave. The master CPU communicates with the iSBC 544 board as if it were just an
extension of system memory. Because the iSBC 544
board is treated as memory by the system, the user is
able to program into it a command structure which will
allow the iSBC 544 board to control its own I/O and
memory operation. To enhance the programming of the
iSBC 544 board, the user has been given some specific
tools. The tools are: 1) the flag interrupt, 2) an on-board
RAM memory area that is accessible to both an offboard CPU and the on-board 8085A through which a
communications path can exist, and 3) access to the
bus interrupt line.

8259 Interrupts - Eight interrupt sources signaling
transmitter and receiver ready from the four USARTs are
channeled directly to the Intel 8259 PIC. The PIC then
provides vectoring for the next eight interrupt levels.
Operating mode and priority assignments may be reconfigured dynamically via software at any time during
system operation. The PIC accepts transmitter and receiver interrupts from the four USARTs. It then
determines which of the incoming requests is of
highest priority, determines whether this request is of
higher priority than the level currently being serviced,
and, if appropriate, issues an interrupt to the CPU. The
output of the PIC is applied directly to the INTR input of
the 8085A. Any combination of interrupt levels may be
masked, via software, by storing a single byte in the
interrupt mask register of the PIC. When the 8085A
responds to a PIC interrupt, the PIC will generate a
CALL instruction for each interrupt level. These addressses are equally spaced at intervals of 4 or 8 (software selectable) bytes. Interrupt response to the PIC is
software programmable to a 32- or 64-byte block of
memory. Interrupt sequences may be expanded from
this block with a single 8085A jump instruction at each
of these addresses.

Flag Interrupt - The Flag Interrupt is generated anytime a write command is performed by an off-board CPU
to the base address of the iSBC 544 board's RAM. This
interrupt provides a means for the master CPU to notify
the iSBC 544 board that it wishes to establ ish a communicationssequence. In systems with more than one
intelligent slave, the flag interrupt provides a unique interrupt to each slave outside the normal eight
MULTI BUS interrupt lines (INTO/·INT7/).
On-Board RAM - The on-board 16K byte RAM area that
is accessible to both an off-board CPU and the on-board
8085A can be located on any 4K boundary in the system.
The selected base address of the iSBC 544 RAM will
cause a flag interrupt when written into by an off-board
CPU.

Bus Access - The third tool to improve system
operation as an intelligent slave is access to the Multibus interrupt lines. The iSBC 544 board can both respond to interrupt signals from an off-board CPU, and
generate an interrupt to the off-board CPU via the
MULTIBUS.

Interrupt Output - In addition, the iSBC 544 board may
be jumper selected to generate an interrupt from the onboard serial output data (SOD) of the 8085A. The SOD
signal may be jumpered to anyone of the 8 MULTI BUS
interrupt lines (INTO/-INT7/) to provide an interrupt signal
directly to a bus master.

System Development Capability

Power· Fail Control

The development cycle of iSBC 544 board based products may be significantly reduced using the Intellec
series microcomputer development systems. The Intellec resident macroassembler, text editor, and system
monitor greatly simplify the deSign, development and
debug of iSBC 544 system software. An optional ISIS-II
diskette operating system provides a linker, object code
locater, and library manager. A unique in-circuit
emulator (ICE-85) option provides the capability of
developing and debugging software directly on the iSBC
544 board.
.

Control logic is also included to accept a power-fail
interrupt in conjunction with the AC-Iow signal from the
iSBC 635 Power Supply or equivalent.

Expansion Capabilities
When the iSBC 544 board is used as a single board communications controller, memory and I/O capacity may be
expanded and additional functions added using Intel
MULTIBUS™ compatible expansion boards. In this

8-9

iSBC 544
On:BoardDynamic RAM (MULTIBUS access) - any 4K
increment OOOOO·FFOOO which .is switch and jumper
selectable. 4K· 8K· or 16K·bytes can be made available
tothe bus by switch selection.
.

SPECIFICATIONS
Serial Communications Characteristics
Synchronous - . 5·8 bit characters; automatic sync
insertion; parity.
Asynchronous -

.110 Capacity

5·8 bit characters; break character
generation; 1, 1V2, or 2 stop bits;
false start bit detection; break
character detection.

Serial - 4 programmable channels using f.our 8251A
USARTs.
Parallel - 10 programmable lines available fer Bell 801
ACU, .or equivalent use. Two auxiliary jumper selectable
signals.

Baud Rates
Frequency (KHz)~
(Software Seleclable)
307.2
153.6
76.8
55.8
. 38.4
19.2
9.6 ..
4.8
6.98.

110 Addressing

Baud Rale (Hz)2
Synchronous
Asynchronous

-55800
38400
19200
9600
4800
6980

... 16
19200
9600
4800
3500
2400
1200
600
300

On· Board Programmable 110

... 64
4800
2400
1200
870
600
300
150
75.
110

Port
USARTO
USART1
USART2
USART3
8155 PPI

Nole.:
1) Frequency selected by 110 writes of appropriate 16.bit frequency factor
to Baud Rate Register.
.

DO
02
04
. 06
E9(PorlA)
EA(Porl B)
EB (Port C)

Conlrol
01
03
05
07
E8

Interrupts
Addresses for 8259 Registers (Hex netation, 1/0 address
space)

2) Baud rates shown here are only a sample subset of possible software
programmable rates available.' Any frequency from 18:75 Hz to 614.4
KHz may be generated utilizing on·board crystal oscillator and 16·bit
Programmable Interval Timer (used .here as a frequen.cy dlvld~r).

E6
1:6
E7
E6
E7
E6

8085ACPU
Word Size -

Dala

8, .16 or 24 .bits/instruction; 8 bits of data

Cycle Time -1.45/usec £.1 % for fastest executable
instruciion; i.e. four clock cycles.
Clock Rate - 2.76 MHz ± .1%

Interrupt request register
In·service register
Mask register'
Command register
Block address register
Status (polling register)

Note: Several registers have the same physical address: Sequence of
access and one data bit of the control word determines which register
will respond. .'
.
.
..
.

Interrupt levels routed te the 8085 CPU automatically
vector the processor to unique memory locatlens:
24 TRAP
3C RST7.5
34
RST6.5
2C RST5.5

System Access Time
Dual port memory - 740 nsec
Nota: Assu"mes no refresh contention

Memory Capacity

Timers

On·Board ROM/PROM - 4K, or 8K bytes of user Installed
ROM.or PROM.

Addresses for 8253 Registers (Hex'notation, 1/0 address
space)

On· Board Static RAM - 256 bytes on 8155.
On·Board Dynamic RAM (on·board access) - 16K bytes.
Integrity maintained during power failure with user·
furnished batteries (optional). .

Programmable Interrupt Timer One
D8
Tinier 0
BDGO
D9
Timer 1
BDG1
DA
Timer 2
BDG2
DB
Control register

On·BoardDyanmic.RAM (MULTIBUS access) -4K, 8K,
or 16K·bytes available to bus by switch selection.

Programmable Interrupt Timer Two :.
DC
Timer 0
BDG3
DD
Timer 1
BDG4
DE
Timer2
TINT1
DF
Control register'.. '

Memory Addressing
On·Board ROM/PROM ...,... O·OFFF (using 2716 EPROMs
or 2316E.ROMs); 0·1 FFF (using 2732 EPROMs)

Address for 8155 Programmable Timer
E8 Control
EC Timer(MSB) TINTO
ED Timer (LSB) TINTO

On·Board Static Ram -256 bytes: 7FOO·7FFF
On·Board Dynamic RAM (on·board access) - 16K bytes:
8000·BFFF.

8·10

iSBC 544
Memory Protect

Input frequencies - Jumper selectable reference
1.22BB MHz±.1% (.B14 usec period nominal) or 1.B43
MHz±.1 % crystal (0.542 usec period, nominal)

An active-low TTL compatible memory protect signal is
brought out on the auxiliary connector which, when
asserted, disables read/write access to RAM memory on
the board. This input is provided for the protection of
RAM contents during the system power-down sequences.

Output Frequencies (at 1.2288 MHz)
Dual tlmerlcounter
(two timers cascaded)

Single tlmerlcounter
Function
Min

Ma.

Min

Ma.

Real·time
Interrupt Interval

1.63 usee

53.3 usee

3.26 usee

58.25 min

Rate Generator
(frequency)

18.75 Hz

614.4 KHz

0.00029 Hz 307.2 KHz

Bus Drivers
Characteristic

Sink Current (mA)

Data

Tri-state

Address

Trj-state

Commands

Tri-state

Function

Interfaces
Note: Used as a master in the single board communications computer
mode.

Serial 1/0 - EIA Standard RS232C signals provided and
supported:
Receive Data
Carrier Detect
Ring Indicator
Clear to Send
Secondary Receive Data'
Data Set Ready
Secondary Transmit Data *
Data Terminal Ready
Transmit Clock
Request to Send
Transmit Data
Receive Clock
DTE Transmit Clock

Physical Characteristics
Width:
Depth:
Thickness:
Weight:

30.4B cm (12.00 inches)
17.15 cm (6.75 inches)
1.27 cm (0.50 inch)
3.97 gm (14 ounces)

Electrical Characteristics

• Optional if parallel 1/0 port Is not used as Automatic Calling Unit.

DC Power Requirements
Parallel 1/0 - Four inputs and eight outputs (includes
two jumper selectable auxiliary outputs). All signals
compatible with EIA Standard RS232C. Directly compatible with Bell Model B01 Automatic Calling Unit, or
equivalent.
MULTIBUS - Compatible with iSBC MULTI BUS.

Current Requirements

Configuration

Vee= +5V
+5% (max)

VDD= "12VI Voo= -SV131 VAA=-12V
±S% (max)
:!: 5% (max)
+ 5% (max)

With4K
EPROM
(using 2716)

Without

On· Board Addressing

EPROM

RAM only(1)

All communications to the parallel and serial 1/0 ports,
to the timers, and to the interrupt controller, are via read
and write commands from the on-board BOB5A CPU.

RAM(2)

refresh only

ICC= 3Arnax
max

100

=350mA
max

IBB=5mAmax IAA= 200mA
max

3.3A max

350mA max

5mAmax

200mA max

390mA max

176 rnA max

5mAmax

390 rnA max

20 rnA max

5mAmax

Noles: 1. For operational RAM only. for AUX power supply rating.
2. ForAAM refresh only. Used for battery backup requirements. No RAM
accessed.

Auxiliary Power

3. Ves is normally derived on· board from V AA. eliminating the need for a
Vee supply. If it is desired to supply Ves from the bus. Ihe current
requirement is as shown.

An auxiliary power bus is provided to allow separate
power to RAM for systems requiring battery backup of
readlwrite memory. Selection of this auxiliary RAM
power bus is made via jumpers on the board_

Environmental Characteristics

Connectors

Operating Temperature: O°C to 55°C (32°F to 131°F)
Relative Humidity: To 90% without condensation

Interlace

Pins
(qty)

Center.
(In.)

Reference Manual

Mating Connectors

Bus

0.156

Viking 3KH43/9AMK12

Parallel 1/0

0.1

3M 3415·000 or
TI H312125

Serial 110

0.1

3M 3462-000 or
TI H312113

9800616B - iSBC 544 Intelligent Communication Controller Board Hardware Reference Manual (NOT SUPPLIED)
Reference manuals are shipped with each product only
if designated SUPPLIED (see above). Manuals may be
ordered from any Intel sales representative, distributor
office or from Intel Literature Department, 3065 Bowers
Avenue, Santa Clara, California 95051.

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

iSBC544

Intelligent Communications
Controller

8-11

....... -.::..-

Analog I/O Expansion
and Signal
Conditioning Boards

inter

iSBX 311
ANALOG INPUT MULTIMODUlE BOARD

• Low cost analog input for iSBX MULTIMODULE compatible iSBC boards

• 12·bit resolution analog·to·digital
converter

• 8 differentiall16 single·ended, fault.
protected inputs

• 0.035% full scale accuracy (11 bits) at
25°C

• 20 mV to 5V full scale input range,
resistor gain selectable

• 18 kHz samples per second through·
put to memory

• Unipolar (0 to + 5V) or bipolar ( - 5V to
+ 5V) input, jumper selectable

• Connector compatible with iCS 910
Analog Termination Panel

The Intel iSBX 311 Analog Input MULTI MODULE board provides simple interfacing of non-isolated analog
signals to any iSBC board which has an iSBX compatible bus and connectors .. The single-wide iSBX 311
plugs directly onto the. iSBC board, providing data acquisitionof analog signals from eight differential or
sixteen single-ended voltage inputs, jumper selectable. The iSBX 311 MULTIMODULE is connector and
pinout compatible with the Intel iCS 910 Analog Signal Conditioning/Termination panel so that field wiring can easily be terminated and current loop-to-voltageconversion resistors can be mounted for current
loop analog signal monitoring. Resistor gain selection is provided for both low level (20mv full scale
range) and high level (5 volt FSR) signals. Incorporating the latest high quality IC components, the iSBX
311 MULTIMODULE board provides 12 bit resolution, 11 bit accuracy, and a simple programming interface, all on a low cost iSBX MULTIMODULE board.

9-1

iSBX 311

ground. For noisier environments, differential input mode can be configured to achieve 8 separate
differential signal inputs, or .16 pseudo-differential
inputs.

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The iSBX 311 Analog Input MULTIMODULE board
is a member of Intel's. growing family of
MULTIMODULE expansion boards, designed to
allow quick, easy, and inexpensive expansion for
the Intel single board computer product line. The
iSBX 311 Analog Input MULTlMODULE Board
shown in figure 1, is designed to plug onto any
host iSBC microcomputer that contains an iSBX
bus connector (P1). The board provides 8 differential or 16single-ended analog input channels that
may be jumper-selected as the application
requires. The MULTIMODULE board includes a
user-configurable gain, and a user-selectable
voltage input range (0 to + 5 volts, or - 5 to + 5
volts). The MULTIMODULE board receives all
power and control signals through the iSBX bus
connector to initiate channel selection, sample
and hold operation, and analog-to-digital conversion.

Resolution
The iSBX 311 MULTIMODULES provide 12-bit
resolution with a successive approximation
analog-to-digital converter. For bipolar operation
( - 5 to + 5 volts) it provides 11 bits plus sign.

Speed
The A-to-D converter conversion speed is 35
microseconds (28KHZ samples per second). Combined with the sample and hold, settling times and
the programming interface, maximum throughput
via the iSBX bus and into memory will be 54
microseconds per sample, or 18 KHZ samples per
second, for a single channel, a random channel, or
a sequential channel scan. A-to-D conversion is initiated via the ·iSBX connector and programmed
command from the iSBC base board. Interrupt on
end-of-conversion is a standard feature to ease
programming and timing constraints.

Input Capacity
Sixteen separate analog signals may be randomly
or sequentially sampled in single-ended mode
with the sixteen input multiplexers and a common

HIGH
IMPEDANCE

BUFFEA
AMP

GAIN
RESISTOR
DIFFERENTIAL -

TO
SINGLE
ENDED

.--.....J...-...,

AMP

ANALOG
INPUT
SIGNALS

SIGNAL

GROUND

---'"1'---_

GAIN
SElECT
&

DATA
LINES

OFFSET

ADJUST

START
CONVERSION

AND
CHANNEl
SELECTOR

LOGIC

Figure 1. iSBX 311 Analog Input MULTIMODULE Board

9·2

AFN·0162BA

iSBX 311

Accuracy

OUTput Command start conversion.

High quality components are used to achieve 12
bits resolution and accuracy of .035% full scale
range ± V2 LSB. Offset and gain are adjustable to
± 0.024% FSR ± 1/2 LSB accuracy at any fixed
temperature between OOG (gain = 1). See specifications for other gain accuracies.

Select input channel and

7654320

Bit Position

I C31

Input Channel

C21 C1 I CO I

INput Data - Read converted data and status (low
byte) or Read converted data (high byte). Reads
can be with or without reset of interrupt request
line (INTRO/).

Gain
To allow sampling of millivolt level signals such
as strain gauges and thermocouples, gain is made
configurable via user inserted gain resistors up to
250 x (20 millivolts, full scale input range). User
can select any other gain range from 1 to 250 to
match his application.

Bit Position

Low/status Byte I

5. 4

031 021 01 I DO I

Istart IEOC lintroll

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

High Byte

The host iSBG microcomputer addresses the iSBX
311 MULTI MODULE board by executing IN or OUT
instructions to the iSBX 311 MULTIMODULE as
one of the legal port addresses. Analog-to-digital
conversions can be programmed in either of two
modes: 1. start conversion and poll for end-of-conversion (EOG), or 2. start conversion and wait for
interrupt (INTRO/) at end of conversion. When
conversion is complete as signaled by one of the
above techniques, INput instructions read two
bytes (low and high bytes) containing the 12 bit
data word plus status information as shown
below.

Fastest data conversion and transfer to memory
can be obtained by dedicating the microcomputer
to setting the channel address/starting conversion, polling the status byte for Intra/, and when it
comes true, read the two bytes of the conversion
and send the start conversion/next channel address command. For multitasking situations it
may be more convenient to use the interrupt
mode, reading in data only after an interrupt signals end of conversion.

SPECIFICATIONS

Accuracy -

Inputs - 8 differential. 16 single-ended. Jumper
selectable.

Gain
1

5
50
250

Full Scale Input
Voltage Range - - 5 to + 5 volts (bipolar). 0 to
+ 5 volts (unipolar). Jumper selectable.

101110101091081071061051041

Accuracy at 25°C
± 0.035%
± 0.035 %
±0.035%
±0.035%

±
±
±
±

'12
'12
'12
'12

LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB

Accuracy at 0 °
to 60°C
±0.23%
±0.28%
±0.76%
±2.70%

±
±
±
±

V2
V2
1/2
V2

LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB

NOTE:
Figures are in percent of full scale reading. At any fixed tern·
perature between 0' and SO'C, the accuracy is adjustable to
± 0.035% of full scale.

Gain - User-configurable through installation of
two resistors. Factory-configured for gain of X1;
gain about 250 not recommended.

Dynamic Error- ± 0.015% FSR for transitions
Gain TC (at Gain
tigrade.

Resolution - 12 bits over full scale range (1.22 mv
at 0-5 v, 5}.1v at 0-20 mv)

9-3

= 1)-54 PPM

per degree cen-

AFN·01628A

iSBX311

Physical Characteristics

Offset TC (in percent of FCRI °C)_ 0.0016%.
Gain

Width - 6.35 cm (2.5 inches)

Offset'

1
5
50
250

Height - 2.03 cm (0.80 inch) MULTIMODULE
board only
2.82 cm (1.13 inches) MULTIMODULE
and iSBC board

0.0016%
0.0022%
0.016%
0.08%

Depth - 9.40 cm (3.7 inches)

'Offset is measured in PPM/C 0 with user·supplied gain resis·
tors installed.

Weight -

Input Protection - 30 volts.

Electrical Characteristics (from iSBX connector)

Input Impedance -

Vcc = ± 5 volts (± 0.25V), Icc = 250 mAmax

20 megohms (minimum).

Vdd = + 12 volts (± 0.6V), Idd = 50 mAmax
Vss = - 12 volts ( ± 0.6V), Iss = 55 mAmax

Conversion Speed - 50 microseconds (nominal).
Common Mode Rejection Ratio mum).
Sample and hold microseconds.

60 db (mini-

Environmental Characteristics
Operating Temperature (32 ° to 140°C)

sample time 15

Shock Tested At -

Connectors -

Class B Specification

Reference Manuals

Interface

Pins

Centers

(Qty)

Mating
Connectors

P1 iSBX Bus

0.1

0.254

iSBC iSBX
connector

0.1

3m 3415-000 or
0.254 T1 H312125 or
iCS 910 cable

J1 8/16
50

142913-001 - iSBX 311 Analog Input MULTIMODULE Board Hardware Reference Manual (NOT
SUPPLIED)
Manuals may be ordered from any Intel sales
representative, distributor office or from Intel
Literature Department, 3065 Bowers Avenue, Santa Clara, California 95051.

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number
SBX 311

0 ° to 60°C

Relative Humidity - to 90%
(without condensation)

Aperature - hold aperature time: 120
nanoseconds.

channels
analog

68.05 gm (2.4 ounces)

Description
Analog Input MULTIMODULE
Board

9-4

iSBX 328
ANALOG OUTPUT MULTIMODULE
EXPANSION BOARD
• Low cost analog output foriSBX MULTI·
MODULE compatible iSBC Boards

• 0.035% full scale volage accuracy
@ 25°C

• 8 channels output, current loop or
voltage in any mix

• Connector compatible with iCS 910
Analog Termination Panel
• Intel design based on UPI control for
high density and low cost

• 4-20 rnA current loop; 5V unipolar or
bipolar voltage output

• Programmable offset adjust in current
. loop mode.

• 12·bit resolution

The Intel iSBX 328 MULTIMODULE board provides analog signal output for any iSBC board which has an
iSBX compatible bus and connectors. The single-wide iSBX 328 plugs directly onto the iSBC board, providing eight independent output channels of analog voltage for meters, CRT control, programmable
power supplies, etc. Voltage output can be mixed with current loop output for control of popular 4-20ma
industrial control elements. By using an Intel single chip computer LSI (8041) for refreshing separate
sample-hold amplifiers through a single 12 bit DAC, eight channels can be contained on a single
MULTIMODULE board, for high density and low cost per channel. High quality analog components provide 12 bit resolution, 11 bit accuracy, and slew rates per channel of 0.1 volt per microsecond. Programming the iSBX 328 MULTlMODULE board is done via a simple two byte protocol over the iSBX bus. Maximum channel update rates are 5KHZ on a single channel to 1 KHZ on all eight channels. Outputs are
compatable for screw termination of field wiring on the iCS 910 Analog Signal Conditioning/Termination
Panel.

9-5

iSBX 328

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

TIMODULE board status is available via the iSBX
bus connector, to determine if the UPI is ready to
receive updates to analog output channels.

The iSBX 328 MULTIMODULE board, shown in
figure 1 is designed to plug onto any host iSBC
microcomputer that contains an iSBX bus connector. The board uses an 8041 UPI device to control
eight analog output channels that may be user·
configured through jumpers to operate in either
bipolar voltage output mode (- 5 to + 5 volts),
unipolar voltage output mode (0 to + 5 volts), or
current loop output mode (4 to 20 mAl applica·
tions. Channels may be individually wired for
simultaneous operation in both current loop output and voltage output applications. The outputs
from 50-pin edge connector J1 on the MULTI·
MODULE board are pin-compatible with the iCS
910 Signal Conditioning/Termination Panel.

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
The host iSBC microcomputer addresses the
MULTIMODULE board by executing IN or OUT instructions specifying the iSBX 328 MULTIMODULE as a port address. The UPI on the iSBX
328 is initialized to select whether software or
hardware offset is to be used and how many channels will be active. Then a 2 byte transfer to each
active channel sets the 12 bit output value, the
channel sel.ected and the current or voltage mode.

Commands
OUTput Command -

Interfacing Through the Intel iSBX Bus

Initialization of UPI/ISBX 328

All data to be output through the MULTIMODULE
board is transferred from the host iSBC microcomputer to the MULTIMODULE board via the
iSBX bus connector. The UPI device on the MULTIMODULE board accepts the binary digital data
and generates a 12-bit data word for the Digital-toAnalog Converter (DAC) and a four bit channel
decode/enable for selecting the output channel.
The DAC transforms the data into analog signal
outputs for either.voltage output mode or current
loop output mode. Offsetting of the DAC voltage
in current output mode may be performed by the
UPI software offset routine or by the hardware offset adjustments included on the board. The MUL-

OUTput Command -

Data Bytes
OBit

7
High Byte 011 010 09

Low Byte

00 A3 A2 A1 VIC 1'-

03 02 01

07 06 05 04

. .

DAC Data
0= UPI g e·nerates offset. )
1
SBC generates offset
In cu rrent loop mode

DAC 'channel
to receive data

BUFFER
AMPLIFIER

CURRENT·TO·VOLTAGE
AMP

r-----,

. }8g~1~~tL

DIGITAL·TO
ANALOG

INTELll
8041A

VOLTAGE TO
CURRENT

CONVERTER
12·81T

RESOLUTION

~t-f-

UPI"

SAMPLE/HOLD
CAPACITOR
MULTIPLEXER CONTROL

OFFSET ITEMP
ADJUST
MULTI·
PLEXER

Figure 1. ISBC 328 Analog Output MULTIMODULE Board Block Diagram

9·6

AFN·01627A

iSBX 328

INput Command -

Status Buller Read

Interrupts
No interrupts are issued from the iSBX 328 to the
host iSBC microcomputer. Data coordination is
handled via iSBC software polls of the status
buffer.

SPECIFICATIONS
Outputs - 8 non-isolated channels, each independently jumpered for voltage output or current loop output mode.

Output Impedance - 0.1 ohm. Drives capacitive
loads up to 0.05 microfarads. (approx. 1000 foot
cable)

Voltage Ranges - 0 to + 5 volts (unipolar operation)
- 5 to + 5 volts (bipolar operation)

Temperature Coefficient - 0.005 %/OC
Connectors -

Current Loop Range-4 to 20 mA (unipolar operation only)
Output Current- ± 5 mA
mode-bipolar operation)

maximum

(voltage

Pins

Centers

Interface

(Qty)

P1 iSBX Bus

0.1

0.254

0.1

0.254

J18/16

channels
analog

Load Resistance-O to 250 ohms with on-board
iSBX power. 1000 ohms minimum with 30 VDC
max. external supply
Compliance Voltage -12 V using on-board iSBX
power. If supplied by user, up to 30 VDC max

Width -

Slew Rate-0.1 volt per microsecond minimum

Eight Channel
Update Rate -1 KHz
Accuracy-

1.4 cm (0.56 inch) MULTIMODULE board
only

Depth -

2.82 cm (1.13 inches) MULTIMODULE
and iSBC board.

Depth -

9.40 cm (3.7 inches)

±
±
±
±

0.025% FSR
0.035% FSR
0.11% FSR
0.22% FSR

@25'C
@25'C
@O't060'C
@0' to 60'C

Voltage·Bipolar, typical
Voltage·Bipolar, maximum
Voltage·Bipolar, typical
Voltage·Bipolar, maximum

±
±
±
±

0.025% FSR
0.035% FSR
0.10% FSR
0.17% FSR

@25'C
@25'C
@0' to 60'C
@O't060'C

Current Loop, typical
Current Loop, maximum
Current Loop, typical
Current Loop, maximum

±
±
±

± 0.07% FSR

0.08% FSR
0.25% FSR
0.36% FSR

Weight-85.06 gm (3.0 ounces)

Ambient
Temp

Voltage·Unipolar, typical
Voltage·Unlpolar, maximum
Voltage·Unipolar, typical
Voltage·Unipolar, maximum

6.35 cm (2.5 inches)

Height -

Single Channel
Update Rate - 5KHz

Accuracy

3m 3415·000 or
T1 H312125 or
iCS 910 cable

Physical Characteristics

Resolution -12 bits bipolar or unipolar

Mode

Mating
Connectors
iSSC iSSX
connector

Electrical Characteristics
Vcc = ± 5 volts (± 0.25V), Icc

= 140 ma max

Vdd

= 45 ma max
= 200 ma max

± 12 volts (± 0.6V), Idd
(voltage mode)

(current loop
mode)

@25'C
@25'C
@O't060'C
@O't060'C

Vss
9·7

- 12 volts (± 0.6V), Iss

= 55 ma max

iSBX328

Environmental Characteristics

Reference Manuals

Operating Temperature _0° 1660 °C (32 ° to
140°C)

142914·001 - iSBX 328 Analog Output MULTI·
MODULE Board Hardware Reference Manual
(NOT SUPPLIED)
Manuals may, be ordered from any Intel sales
representative, distributor ,office or from Intel
Literature Department, 3065 Bowers Avenue, Santa Clara, California 95051

Relative Humidity-to 90% (without condensation)
Shock Tested At - Class B specifications

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number
SBX 328

Description
Analog Output MULTIMODULE
Board

9·8

iSBC 711
ANALOG INPUT BOARD
• iSBC 80 and MULTIBUS compatible

• Programmable gain amplifier

• Up to 16 differential/32 single-ended
non-isolated inputs

• 12-bit AID converter

• Fault protection on all inputs

• Memory mapped 1/0

• Voltage or current loop input

• Single + 5V supply

The iSBC 711 Analog Input Board is a complete single board Input subsystem which allows easy interfacing of high
level analog input signals to Intel's complete line of iSBC 80 single board computers. The iSBC 711 performs the basic
functions of data acquisition of analog input signals under microprocessor control. The ISBC 711 consists of 8 differential/16 single ended channel multiplexer, input protection circuits, programmable gain amplifier, sample and hold
amplifer, 12·bit AID converter, DC to DC converter, memory mapped interface, and control logic.

9-9

iSBC 711
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

12-Bit AID Converter
The AID converter is a 12-bit 35 JAS successive approximation device with sample and hold amplifier which
can be jumper selected for 0 \0 + 5V, 0 to + 10V, ± 5V,
and ± 10V input ranges. AID conversion can be initiated
by external trigger, pacer clock, or programmed I/O.
Interrupt on conversion or end of scan is a standard feature. The external trigger is useful when the AID conversion is to be synchronized to some external event. The
internal pacer clock (10 ranges jumper selectable from
976 ,..s to 1 sec) allows precise, evenly spaced AID conversions where signal reconstruction is required.

The iSBC 711 is electrically and mechanically compatible with the iSBC 80 series single board computers. Programming compatibility is also maintained with the
iSBC 732 Analog Combination I/O Board. A block diagram of the iSBC 711 Analog Input Board is shown in
Figure 1.

Input Capacity
The iSBC 711 contains an 8 differential or 16 single
ended analog input multiplexer. Optionally, the iSBC
711 can be expanded up to 16 differential or 32 single
ended, non-isolated input channels via two plug-in
multiplexers (Part No. Harris H1818A).

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
Analog Input

Fault Protection

The iSBC 711 has three modes of operation for acquisi:
tion of analog inputs. These are:

All input channels are protected up to ± 28V via diode
clamping, together with fusible current limit resistors,
limiting potentially destructive overloads under fault
conditions.

1. Repetitive single channel input
2. Sequential input scan
3. Random channel input

Current Loop Input

Repetitive Single Channel Input..,... The channel is
selected by a write to the multiplexer address register
(MAR). The initiation·ol the first conversion is stated by
a write to the command register (CR). Setting the appropriate bits in the command register allows stop/start,
pacing, external trigger. Subsequent conversions are
initiated by read of the AID register (ADCR), or by
another write to the command register.

The differential input channels have provisions for up to
16 user supplied 250-ohm resistors to apcept 4 to 20 mA
current loop inputs.

Programmable Gain Amplifier
The programmable gain amplifier allows gains of 1,2,4,
and 8 to be specified under program control.

PROVISION FOR
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED
CURRENT LOOP RESISTORS

MULTIBUS

'5V

Figure 1. iSBC 711 Analog Input Board Block Diagram

9-10

iSBC711
the 8080's 16-bit memory reference instructions can be
used. The AID converter is addressed as memory: base
plus specific address. The base address is factory set
at F700H and is jumper selectable. Table 1 shows ad·
dress:

Sequential Input Scan - This mode is initiated in the
same manner as the repetitive single channel, except
bit 1 of the command register (CR) is set to a "1" on the
write command.
Random Input Scan - This mode is initiated in the
same manner as repetitive single channel input; subse·
quent channels are selected by a write to the multi·
plexer address register (MAR) before a read of the cur·
rent converted value from the ADCR register.

Address
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base

Addressing

+0
+1
+1
+2

+3
+4
+5

Function

Command
Write
Read
Write
Read
Write
Write
Read
Read

Write to command register
Read status register
Write to multiplexer address register
Read multiplexer addres,s register
Write to last channel register
Clear interrupts
Read LS byte of AID data
Read MS byte of AID data

The iSBC 711 utilizes a memory mapping techniCjJue
which simplifies programming in transferring 12-bit
data. Since the iSBC 711 interfaces as memory, any of

Table 1. Address Commands and Functions

SPECI FICATIONS

Status Register (Read Base

Multiplexer Address Register (MAR) (Write
Base + 1)

Bit Bit
7 6
Gain
selo.lIon

End-ol-conversion status
End-of-scan status - - - - - '
End of conversion interrrupt enable
End of scan interrupt enable - - - - - '
Board busy - - - - - - - - - - - - '
External trigger enabled - - - - - - : - - - - - - - '
AutO-increment enabled - - - - - - - - - - - '
Conversion enabled - - - ' - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - '

I:XG2!100i1i----.l
X4

+ 0)

Not used

+ 3)

Clear Interrrupt (Write Base

AID Converter Register (ADCR)

Clear EOC interrupt
Clear EOS· interrupt _ _ _ _ _ _ _...J

Clear RTC interrupt - - - - - - - - - - - - - ' .

Last Address Register (LAR) (Write Base

+ 2)

I I I I I

~
Select channel 1 of 32

Command Register (CR) (Write Base

----.~~.

Analog Input

+ 0)

Number 01 Input Channels - 8 differential or 16 single·
ended (jumber selectable); expandable from 8/16 to
16/32 using two plug·in multiplexers (Part No. Harris
H1818A).

I I

End-of-conversion interrupt
End of scan interrupt
Clear busy - - - - - - - - - - - - '
External trigger enable _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _........J

Resolution - 12 bit bipolar or unipolar
Sample and Hold Aperture Time - <20 ns
Sample and Hold Uncertainty - 5 ns
Multiplexer Input Voltage Ranges

Auto-increment enable - - - - - - - - - - - - - '
Enable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - '

9-11

iSBC711

X
1
2
4
8

Connectors

AID Input Range

Gain
+5V

+10V

+5V
+2.5V
1.25V
0.625V

+ 10V
+5V
+2.5V
+ 1.25V

±5V

±10V

±5V

± 10V

±2.5V
± 1.25V
± 0.625V

±5V

±2.5V
± 1.25V

. Jumper
.electable

"",100M ohms
Input Current Range - 0-20 mA using 250'ohm user installed resistors

.~t~

. Interface

Pins:
(qty)

iSBC Bus

0.156

± 15V
Auxiliary power

0.1

Jl Not used

0.1

3M3415-000 or
TIH312125

J2 1st 8/16 input
channels

0.1

3M3415-000 or
TIH312125

J3 Expander 8/16
input channels

0.1

3M3415-000 or
TIH312125

In.

Viking 3KH43/9AMK12

Compatible Boards and Systems
iSBC 80105
iSBC 80/10
iSBC 80/20
System 80/10, and
System 80/20-4

Source Impedance
Balanced: <5000 ohms
Unbalanced: <1000 ohms
Overall Accuracy @ 25°C
0.05% FSR ± V2 LSB (gain x 1)
0.07% FSR ± V2 LSB (gain x 2, x 4, x 8)

Physical Characteristics

(Includes 3 sigma noise, linearity, offset gain, and
dynamic response errors.)

Width - 12.00 in. (30.48 cm)
Height - 6.75 in. (17.15cm)
Depth - 0.5 in. (1.27 cm)
Weight - 1 Ib (454 gm)

Temperature Coefficient
0.0025% FSR/oC (gain x 1)
0.0030% FSR/oC (gain x 2, x 4, x 8)

Electrical Characteristics

AID Conversion Speed -

Mating Connectors

Power supply -

+5V±5%, 1.7A max

28 kHz

Environmental Characteristics
Throughput

Reference

Sample Rate (Single Channel) - 17 kHz
Channel to Channel Rate - 16kHz
Common Mode Rejection (CMR) - 60 dB differential input
Common Mode Voltage (CMV) ± 10.24V (signal and
common mode)
Input Over-Voltage Protection - ± 28V DC, peak AC
continuous
External Trigger - TTL compatible, 1.5 ,..s (min) better
than 50 ns riselime

Operating
Conditions
Temperature

DC supply

o to 95%

exceed upper
limit 40°C
dewpoint

+ 5V± 5%

+ 5V±5%

N/A

n = 0 through 10

ORDERING INFORMATION
Description

- 25 to 85°C

Reference Manuals

Analog Input Board

Transportation
and Storage
Limits

9800485A - iSBC 711 Hardware Reference Manual
(NOT SUPLlED)

Divider gives range of 1000 ms

Part Number

o to 55°C
o to 95% not to

Relative
humidity

Pacer Clock
Crystal controlled accuracy 0.05%

SBC 711

25± 0.2°C

Operative
Limits

9-12

iSBC 724
ANALOG OUTPUT BOARD

• Compatible with iSBC 80 series and
MULTIBUS bus

• Memory Mapped 110

• Four independent 12-bit D/A converters

• Unipolar or bipolar with 0 to + 10V,
o to + 5V, ± 10V ranges

• Accuracy: 0.05% FSR

• Short circuit protection on voltage
output

• Single + 5V supply

The iSBC 724 Analog Output Board is a complete single board analog output subsystem which allows easy interfacing
of analog outputs from Intel's complete line of iSBC 80 series single board computers to voltage actuated devices or
control elements. The iSBC 724 board contains four independent 12-bit digital to analog (D/A) converters and associated voltage output amplifiers, 8-bit holder register, DC to DC converter, memory mapped interface, and controillogic.

9-13

iSBC 724
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Addressing
The iSBC 724 utilizes a memory mapping technique
which simplifies programming in transferring 12-bit
data. Since the iSBC 724 interfaces as memory, any of
the 8080's memory reference instructions can be used.
Each independent D/A converter is addressed as
memory; base plus specific address. The base address
is factory set at F708H which is jumper selectable.
Table 1 shows addressing:

The iSBC 724 is electrically and mechanically compati; ble with the iSBC 80 series single board computers. Programming compatibility is also maintained with the
analog output provided on the iSBC 732 analog 1/0
board. Each individual D/A converter can be jumper
selected for a to + 5V, a to + 10V, ± 5V, ± 10V. Short circuit protection for voltage outputs is a standard feature
suitable for many display and control applications. A
block diagram of the iSBC 724 analog output board is
shown in Figure 1.

Table 1. Address Commands and Functions

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
Data Transfer
Data transfer to a 12-bit D/A converter is accomplished
by a write of the least significant 4 bits to the holding
register. When the 8 remaining bits of the upper byte are
transferred, the 12 bits of data are immediately loaded
into the specific D/A converter channel.

Address

Command

Function

Base + 0
Base + 1
Base + 2
Base + 3
Base+4
Base+5
Base+6
Base+7

Write
Write
Write
Write
Write
Write
Write
Write

Write to DAC holding register
Write to DAC a
Write to DAC holding register
Write to DAC 1
Write to DAC holding register
Write to DAC 2
Write to DAC holding register
Write to DAC 3

MULTIBUS

Figure 1. iSBC 724 Analog Output Board Block Diagram

9-14

isec 724
SPECI FICATIONS

Compatible Boards and Systems
iSBC 80/05
iSBC 80/10
ISBC 80/20
System 80/10
System 80/20-4

Registers
o LSB

LS byte 01 data

Physical Characteristics

o LSB

Width - 12.00 in. (30.48 cm)
Height - 6.75 in. (17.15 cm)
Depth - 0.50 in. (1.27 cm)
Weight - 1 Ib, 2 oz (511 gm)

Write +1
(high byle)

';;:::::::;;:~:;;:~~~v~:;;;::~~~~~:::~
Sign MSB
8 dala bits
(high byle)

Analog Output

Electrical Characteristics
+ 5V ± 5%, 2.0A max

Number of Channels - 4 non-isolated
Resolution - 12 bits bipolar or unipolar (switch selectable)

Voltage Output Characteristics
Voltage Output Ranges - 0 to + 5V, 0 to + 10V,

Power Supply -

Environmental Characteristics
Reference
Operating
Conditions

± 5V,

± 10V (jumper selectable)

Output Current -

Temperature
Relative
humidity

± 5. mA @ ± 10V

Output Impedance - 0.2 ohm
Slew Rage -

25± 2.0'C

DC supply

a to 55'C
o to 95%

Transportation
and Storage
- 25 to 85'C
a to 95%

not to exceed
upper limit
40'C dewpoint

10V/p.s

Accuracy @ 25°C - 0.05% FSR (includes linearity and
noise)

Operative
Limits

+5±S%

+5V±5%

N/A

Temperature Coefficient - 0.005/°C

Reference Manuals

Connectors
Pin.
(qty)

In.

PI iSBC Bus

0.156

0.396

P2 ±.15V auxiliary power

0.1

0.254

Jl 4 channels of analog
output

0.1

0.254

Inlerlace

Centers

9800486A - iSBC 724 Hardware Reference Manual
(NOT SUPPLIED)

Mating
Connectors
Viking
3KH43/9AMK12

Reference manuals are shipped with each product only
if deSignated SUPPLIED (see above). Manuals may be
ordered from any Intel sales representative, distributor
office or from Intel Literature Department, 3065 Bowers
Avenue, Santa Clara, California 95051.

3M 3415-000 or
TI H312125

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

SBC 724

Analog Output Board

9-15

iSBC 732
ANALOG COMBINATION 110 BOARD
• iSBC 80 and MULTIBUS compatible

• Programmable gain amplifier
• 12'bit, 28kHz AID converter

• Up to 16 differential/32 single ended
non· isolated inputs

• Two 12·bit D/A converter output
channels

• Fault protection on all inputs

• Memory mapped I/O

• Voltage or current loop input/output .

• Single + 5V supply

The iSBC 732 is a complete single board analog input/output subsystem which allows easy interfacing of high level
analog input and output signals to Intel's complete line of iSBC 80 series single board computers. The iSBC 732 performs the basic functions of data acquisition of analog inputs and controlled analog output signals under
microprocessor control.

9-16

iSBC732
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Programmable Gain Amplifier

The iSBC 732 is electrically and mechanically compatible with the iSBC 80 series single board computers. Programming compatibility is also maintained with the
iSBC 711 Analog Input Board and the iSBC 724 Analog
Output Card. A block diagram of the iSBC 732 Combination Analog 1/0 Board is shown in Figure 1.

The programmable gain amplifier allows gains of 1, 2, 4,
and 8, to be specified under program control.

Input Capacity
ISBC 732 contains an 8 differential or 16 single ended
analog Input multiplexer. Optionally, the iSBC 732 can
be expanded up to 16 differential or 32 single ended,
non-isolated input channels via two plug-In multiplexers
(Part No. Harris H1818A).

Fault Protection
All input channels are protected up to ± 28V via diode
clamping, together with fusible current limit resistors,
limiting potentially destructive overloads under fault
conditions.

Current Loop Input
The differential input channels have provisions for up to
16 user supplied 250-ohm resistors to accept 4 to 20 mA
current loop inputs.

12·Bit AID Converter
The AID converter is a: 12-bit, 34 ",s successive approximation device with sample and hold amplifier which
can be jumper selected for 0 to + 5V, 0 to + 10V,"± 5V
and ± 10V input ranges. AID conversion can be initiated
by external trigger, pacer clock, or programmed 1/0. Interrupt on conversion or end of scan is a standard
feature. The external trigger is useful when the AID con:
version is to be synchronized to some external event.
The internal pacer clock (10 ranges jumper selectable
from 976
to 1 sec) allows precise, evenly spaced AID
conversions where signal reconstruction is required.

"'S

D/A Converter
The dual 12-bit non-isolated D/A converter can be configured for voltage or current loop outpout. Each D/A
converter voltage output can be juniper selected for 0 to
+ 5V, 0 to + 10V, ± 5V; ± 10V, or optionally 0 to 20 mA
current loop output. Short circuit protection for voltage
outputs is a standard feature and user supplied compliance voltage of up to 30V make the current loop output suitable for many control applications.

J1
PROVISION FOR

CUSTOMER SUPPLIED
CURRENT LOOP
RESISTORS

+5V

Figure 1. ISBC 732 Analog Comblnallon I/O Board Block Diagram

9·17

iSBC732
OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

Analog Output

Analog Input

Data transfer to a D/A converter is accomplished by a
write command of the least significant 4 bits to the
holding register. When the upper byte is transferred, the
12 bits of data are immediately loaded to the specific
D/A channel.

The iSBC 732 has three modes of operation for acquisi:
tion of analog inputs. These are:
1. Repetitive single channel input
2. Sequential input scan
3. Random channel input

Addressing
The iSBC 732 utilizes a memory mapping technique
which simplifies programming in transferring 12,bit
data. Since the iSBC 732 interfaces as memory, any of
the 8080's memory reference instructions can be used.
The AID and independent D/A converters are addressed
as memory: base plus specific address. The base address is set at F700H which is jumper selectable. Table
1 shows addressing.

Repetitive Single Channel Input - The channel is
selected by a write to the multiplexer address register'
(MAR). The initiation of the first conversion is started by
a write command to the command register (CR). Setting
the appropriate bits in the command register allow
stop/start, pacing, external trigger. Subsequent conversions are initiated by a read command of the AID register (ADCR).

Table 1_ Address Commands and Functions
Address

Sequential Input Scan - This mode is initiated in the
same manner as the repetitive single channel, except bit
1 of the command register (CR) is set to a "1" on the
write command.

Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base

Random Input Scan - This mode is initiated in the
same manner as repetitive single channel input. Subsequent channels are selected by a write command to the
multiplexer address register (MAR) before a read command of the current converted value from the ADCR
register.

Base

+0
+1
+1
+2

+3
+4

+5
+8
+9
+A
+B

Function

Command
Write
Read
Write
Read
Write
Write
Read
Read
Write
Write
Write
Write

Write to command register
Read status register
Write to multiplexer address register
Read multiplexer address register
Write to last channel register

Clear interrupts
Read LS byte of AiD data
Read MS byte of AID data
Write to DAC holding register (low byte)
Write to DAC 0 (high byte)
Write to DAC holding register (low byte)
Write to DAC 1 (high byte)

o LSB

SPECIFICATIONS
Write +9

Multiplexer Address Register (MAR) Write
Bit
7

Gain
selection

(high byte)

Bit
6

Sign MSB
8 data bits
(high byte)

0
channels

Command Register (CR) (Write Base

+ 0)

Not used
o

LSB

Ir--T"I--r-----,
11r--r1-..----,
11---'-1---'1
AID Converter Register (ADCR)
o

6
Read base
(low byte)

Read base
(high byte)

.:r.

External trigger enable - - - - , . - - - - - - - '
Auto-increment enable - - - - - - - - - - - - - '
Enable conversion _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-...:_ _-...:_...J

Status Register (Read Base
5

+ 0)
o

LSB

I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

End-of-conv ersion status
j
End-of-scan status
End of conv ersion interrrupt enabled
End of scan interrupt enabled
Board busy
External trig ger enabled
Auto-increm ent enabled
Conversion enabled

D/A Hold Register
o LSB
Write +8
(low byte)

End-of-conversion interrupt _ _ _ _
End of scan interrupt
Clear busy _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _---l

I I
--,,-

DIA31 DIA21 DIA1

DIAO

LS byte of data

9-18

iSBC732
Clear Interrrupt (Write Base

+ 3)

-'1

Clear EOC interrupt _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Clear EOS interrupt
.
Clear RTC interrupt - - - - - - - - - '

Common Mode Voltage (CMV) common mode)

± 10.24V (signal and

Input Over-Voltage Protection continuous

± 28V DC, peak AC

External Trigger - TIL compatible, 1.5 ,..s (min) better
than 50 ns risetime

Last Address Register (LAR) (Write Base

+ 2)

Pacer Clock
Crystal controlled accuracy 0.05%

Divider gives range of

1000

Select channel I 01 32

n = 0 through 10

Analog Input
Number of Input Channels - 8 differential or 16 single
ended (jumper selectable); expandable from 8/16 to
16/32 using two plug-in multiplexers (Part No. Harris
H1818A).

Analog Output
Number of Channels - 2 Non-isolated
Resolution - 12 bits bipolar or unipolar (switch selectable)

Resolution - 12-bit bipolar or unipolar
Sample and Hold Aperture Time - <20 ns
Sample and Hold Uncertainty - 5 ns
Multiplexer Input Voltage Ranges
AID Input Range

Gain

X
1
2
4
8

+5V

+10V

±5V

±10V

+5V
+2.5V
1.25V
0.625V

+IOV
+5V
+2.5V
+1.25V

±5V
±2.5V
±1.25V
±0.625V

±10V
±5V
±2.5V
± 1.25V

Voltage Output Characteristics

Jumper
selectable

Voltage Output Ranges - 0 to + 5V, 0 to + 10V, ± 5V,
± 10V (jumper seleciable)
Output Current - ± 5 mA @ ± 10V
Output Impedance - 0.2 ohm
Slew Rate - 10V/,..s with no external capacitance
Accuracy @ 2SoC - 0.05% FSR (includes linearity and
noise)
Temperature Coefficient - 0.005·C

}

Software
programmable

Input Impedance
Power Off: 680 ohms
Power On: >100M ohms
Input Current Range installed resistors

0 to 20 mA using 250-ohm user

Current Loop Characteristics
Current Output - 0 to 20 mA
Load Resistance - 0 to 500 ohms
Compliance Voltage - Up to 30V DC (provided by u.ser)
Accuracy @ 2SoC - 0.075% FSR (includes linearity and
noise)
Temperature Coefficient - 0.005/·C:

Source Impedance
Balanced: <5000 ohms
Unbalanced: <1000 ohms
Overall Accuracy @ 2SoC
0.05% FSR ± V2 LSB (gain x 1)
0.07% FSR ± V2 LSB (gain x 2, x 4, x 8)
(Includes 3 sigma noise, linearity, offset gain, and
dynamic response errors)

Connectors

Temperature Coefficient
0.0025% FSR/·C (gain x 1)
0.0030% FSR/·C (gain x 2, x 4, x 8)
AID Conversion Speed -

Intarlaea
PI ISBC Bus

Pins
(qty)

In.

Cantars
em

0.156

0.396

28 kHz

Throughput
Sample Rate (Single Channel) - 17 kHz
Channel to Channel Rate - 16 kHz
Common Mode Rejection (CMR) - 60 dB differential input

9·19

Mating
Connectors
Viking
3KH43/9AMKI2

P2 ± 15V auxiliary power

0.1

0.254

Jl 2 channels of analog
output
J2 1st 8116 input channels

0.1

0.254

3M 3415.(J00 or
TI H312125

0.1

0.254

3M 3415·000 or
TI H312125

J3 Expander 8116 input
channels

0.1

0.254

3M 3425·000 or
TI H312125

iSBC,732
Environmental Characteristics

Compatible Boards and Systems,'
iSBC 80/05
iSBC 80/10
iSBC'80/20
System 80/10
System 80/20-4

Reference
'Operating
Conditions
Temperature

25± 0,2'C

Relative
humidity

DC supply

Physical Characteristics
Width - 12,00 in, (30.48 cm)
Height - 6.75 in. (17.15 cm)
Depth - 0.5 in. (1.27 cm)
Weight - 1 Ib 4 oz (568 gm)

Description
Analog Combination 1/0 Board

+ 5V± 5%

and Storage
Limits
-25toB5'C
010.95%

N/A

9800487·02 - iSBG 732 Hardware Reference Manual
(NOT SUPPLIED)'
Reference manuals are shipped with each product only
if designated SUPPLIED (see above). Manuals may be
ordered from any Intel sales representative, distributor
ciffice or from Ihiel Literature Department, 3065 Bowers
Avenue, Santa Clara, California 95051.
'

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Ot055'C
Ot095% notto
exceed upper
Iimit40'C
dewpoinl

Transportation

Reference Manuals

Electrical Characteristics
Power Supply - + 5V ± 5 %, 2.3A max

SBC 732

"T5,V±5~/o

Operative
Limits

9-20

System Packaging and
Power Supplies

iSBC 604/614 or (pSBC 604/614*)
MODULAR CARDCAGE/BACKPLANE
• Interconnection on MULTIBUS system
bus and housing for up to four Intel
iSBC boards

• Cardcage mounting holes facilitate
interconnection of units

• Strong cardcage structure helps
protect installed iSBC single board
computers and expansion boards
against warping and physical damage

• Compatible with 3.5·inch RETMA rack
mount increments
• Dual backplane power supply
connectors and signal line termination
circuits on iSBC 604 Cardcagel
Backplane

• Connectors allow interconnection of
two or more cardcage/backplane
assemblies

The iSBC 604 and iSBC 614 Modular Cardcage/Backplane units provide low-cost, off-the-shelf housing for OEM products using two or more Intel single board computers. Each unit interconnects and houses up to four boards. The base
unit, the iSBC 604 Cardcage/Backplane, contains a male backplane PC edge connector and bus signal termination cir·
cuits, plus power supply connectors. It is suitable for applications requiring a single unit, or may be interconnected
with the iSBC 614 Cardcage/Backplane when more then one cardcage/backplane unit is needed.
iSBC 614 Card·
cage/Backplane contains both male and female backplane connectors, and may be interconnected with iSBC 604/614
Cardcage/Backplane units. Both units are identical, with the exception of the power connectors and bus signal termi·
nator features. A single unit may be packaged in a 3.5-inch RETMA rack enclosure, and two interconnected units may
be packaged in a 7-inch enclosure. The units are mountable in any of three planes.

The

'Same product, manufactured by Intel Puerto Rico, Inc.

10-1

iSBC 604/614

.660-1
.188 01A. THRU, 3 ~

1....- - - -

12 .875

- t +--~. - t
I

5500

~.
- . ---f''=-'"
I

2.60

J_
1

8j~

~II~S8C"'ON~LY~I
,

IS8C,,'ONLY

~2.85~-B.500.~

II
2.750

.300~~,

SIDE VIEW

END VIEW

BOTTOM VIEW

Figure 1. iSBC 604/614 Modular Backplane and Cardcage Dimensions

Physical Dimensions

SPECIFICATIONS
Backplane Characteristics
Bus Lines - All MULTIBUS system bus address, data,
and command bus lines are bussed to all four connec·
tors on the printed circuit backplane

Height - 8.5 in. (21.59 cm)
Width - 14.2 in. (36.07 cm)
Depth - 3.34 in. (8,48 cm)
Weight - 35 oz (992.23 gm)

Power Connectors - for ground, + 5V, - 5V, + 12V,
- 12V, - 10V power supply lines
iSBC 604 - Bus signal terminators, backplane male PC
edge connector only, and power supply headers
iSBC 614 -

Backplane male and female connectors

Environmental Characteristics

Mating Power Connectors
AMP

Molex

Operating Temperature -

Connector

87159-7

87023-1

Polarizing key

87116-2

Connector

09-50-7071

08-50-0106

Polarizing key

15-04-0219

O°C to 55°C

Reference Manual

Note
1. Pins from a given vendor may only be used with connectors from the
same vendor.

9800708 - iSBC 604/614 Cardcage Hardware Reference
Manual (NOT SUPPLIED)

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part number

Description

Part Number

SBC 604

Modular Cardcage/Backplane (Base
Unit)

SBC 614

10·2

Description
Modular Cardcage/Backplane
(Expansion Unit)

iSBC 655
SYSTEM CHASSIS

• A rack-mountable package for Intel
microcomputer systems

• Attractive front panel with control
switches and indicator lights

• Provides the Intel MULTIBUS structure
used on the single board computers

• 110V or 220V operation at 50/60 Hz

• Compact single chassis power supply
with all standard iSBC board voltages

• 19-inch rack mountable
• Parallel 110 connectors and RS232C
cable included

• Forced-air cooling

The iSBC 655 System Chassis is an attractive 3.5" high unit designed for use in Intel Microcomputer Systems. The
Chassis' four slots accommodate both single board computers and expansion boards which provide additional 1/0,
memory, or peripheral controller functions. The iSBC 655 System Chassis will accept all Intel boards using the Multibus
architecture. DC power is provided at ±.5VDC and ± 12VDC levels, at current levels commensurate with typical combinations of four boards. The chassis is designed to provide adequate cooling to both power supply and circuit boards over
external temperatures ranging from DOC to 5DoC. Current limiting and over-voltage protection are provided on all outputs.
The power supply recognizes an AC power failure condition and provides a TTL signal sufficiently in advance of DC power
failure to allow orderly system shut-down. For user convenience, system RESET and INTERRUPT switches are provided
on the front panel to facilitate system restarts and provide for operator intervention. RUN and HALT LED indicators are
driven to indicate the operational status of the single board computer.

10-3

iSBC 655
Width - 19 inches (48.3 cm) at Front Panel, 17 inches
(43.2 cm) behind Front Panel
Depth - 20 inches (50.8 cm) with all protrusions
Weight - 37 pounds (17 Kg)

SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical Characteristics
Input Power - Frequency: 47 - 63 Hz. Voltage (Nominal)
(Single Phase): 100, 115,215, or 230 VAC +10%
Output Power:
Nominal
Current
Current Limit
Max Short
Voltage (AMPS)(MAX) Range (AMPS) Circuit (AMPS)

+12
+ 5
- 5
-12

2.0
14.0
0.9
0.8

2.1-3.0
14.7-21.0
0.9-1.4
0.8-1.2

1.0 (Foldback)
7.0'(Foldback)
1.4
1.2

Environmental Characteristics

Over-Voltage
Protection

Temperature - Operating: O°C to 50°C. Non-Operating:
-40 o e to 85°C
Relative Humidity - Up to 90%, non-condensing

+14 to +16 V
+5.8 to +6.6 V
-5.8 to -6.6 V
-14 to -16 V

Equipment Supplied
iSBC 655 System Chassis with iSBe 635 Power Supply,
iSBC Cardcage/Backplane, dual fans, pop-off front
panel
Connector Pack with RS232C Cable (terminal/modem
interface to Single Board Computers), Two 50-pin parallel
I/O connectors for Single Board Computers
Schematics for Cardcage/Backplane, Chassis
Outline Drawing

Combined Line/Load Regulation - ±1% at ±10% static
line change and ±50% static load change, measured at the
output connector (±0.2% measured at the power supply
under the same conditions).
Remote Sensing - Provided for+5 VDC outputline regulation.
Output Ripple and Noise -1 0 mv peak-to-peak maximum
(DC to 500 KHz)
Output Transient Response - Less than 50 p.sec for
±50% load change
Output Transient Deviation - Less than ±5% of initial
voltage for ±50% load change.
Power Failure Indication (AC Low) - A TTL open collector high signal is provided when the input voltage drops
below 90% of its nominal value. DC voltages will remain
within 5% of their nominal values for 3.0 milliseconds
(minimum, 7.5 ms typical) after AC LOW goes true.

Reference Manuals (Not Supplied)
9800709 - iSBC 655 System Chassis Hardware Reference Manual
9800298 - iSBC 635 Power Supply Hardware Reference Manual
9800708 - iSBC 604/614 Card cage Hardware Reference Manual
Manuals may be ordered from any Intel Sales Representative, Distributor office or from Intel Literature Department,
3065 Bowers Avenue, Santa Clara, CA 95051

Physical Characteristics
Height -

3.5 inches (8.9cm)

1 - - - - 16100------~1-

_ l_ _ ,...

-~-

,-,

'::./

I
Figure 1. iSeC 655 Dimensions (inches)

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

SBC 655

iSBC 655 System Chassis

10·4

inter

iSBC 660
SYSTEM CHASSIS

• Eight-slot cardcage and backplane for
iSBC computers ·and expansion
boards

• Attractive, versatile pop-off front panel
• 19-inch wide rack mountable chassis

• Heavy duty power supply with all
standard iSBC voltages

• Horizontal board mounting for
compactness

• Compatible with all Intel single board
computers
• Forced-air cooling

• 110/220V, 50/60 Hz operation

The iSBC 660 System Chassis is an attractive, 7·inch high system chassis designed for use with Intel OEM computers.
It has eight slots for single board computers, memory, 110, or other expansion modules. The iSBC 660 is ideal for appli·
cations requiring multiple board solutions. DC power output is provided at + 12V, + 5V, -12V, and - 5V levels. The
current capabilities of each of these output levels have been chosen to provide power over a O·C to 50·C temperature
range for the majority of applications requiring combinations of computers, memories, peripherals, and other 110
capabilities. Current limiting and over·voltage protection is provided at all outputs. Standard logic recognizes a
system AC power failure and generates a TTL signal for use in power·down control. For user convenience, a reset
switch is provided on the front panel. The reset signal generated and sent to the system bus can be used for external
system control.

10·5

iSBC 660
FRONT VIEW
19 00
- -----/'1
1_ - - . 11.38
1

~_i_'~~l

1-1-mI I

2.10.

q'95~

'45

-1~~8TOP VIEW

18.9

I2.--I37 Ll.25==::J
,,:l.'-,o,J I

-':-1

.
3.00

,to

.
16.9
i------,--(CHASSIS
DIMENSIONS}

Figure 1. iSBC System Chassis Dimensions

Provided for + 5 VDC output line

SPECIFICATIONS

Remote Sensing regulation.

Electrical Characteristics

Output Ripple and Noise mum (DC to 500 kHz).

Input Power
Frequency: 50 Hz ± 5%,60 Hz ± 5%
Voltage: 115V ± 10%, 230V ± 10%, 215 VAC ± 10%,
100 VAC ± 10% via user configured wiring options

Output Transient Response ± 50% load change.

Output Current
(Max)

Current Limit
(Amps)

Over·Voltage
Protection

+ 12V
+5V
-5V
-12V

4.5A
30A
1.75A
1.75A

504
3.6
2.1
2.1

15V ± 1V
6.2V ",OAV
-6.2V ± O.4V
-15V ± 1V

Less than 50 I'S for

Output Transient Deviation - Less than ± 5% of linitial
voltage for ± 50% load change.

Output Power
Power

10 mV peak·to·peak maxi·

Power Failure Indication (AC Low) - A TTL open collec·
tor high signal is provided when the input voltage drops
below 90% of its nominal value. DC voltages will remain
within 5% of their nominal values for 3.0 milliseconds
(minimum, 7.5 ms typical) after AC Low goes true.
The "AC Low" signal will reset to a TTL low level when
the AC input voltage is restored and after all output volt·
ages are within specified regulation.
The "AC Low" threshold is adjustable for optimum
power·down performance at other input combinations
(I.e. 100 VAC, 215 VAC, 50 Hz).

Combined Line/Load Regulation - ± 1% at ± 10%
static line change and ± 50% static load change, meas·
ured at the output connector (± 0.2% measured at the
power supply under the same conditions).

10-6

iSBC 660
Humidity -

Up to 90% relative, non-condensing

I/O connectors for single board computers
Schematics for cardcage/backplane, chassis
Outline drawing

Physical Characteristics
Height - 7 in. (17_8 cm)
Width
At Front Panel: 19 in. (48.3 cm)
Behind Front Panel: 17 in. (43.2 cm)
Depth - 20 in. (50.8 cm) with all protrusions

Reference Manuals
9800505A - iSBC 660 Hardware Reference Manual
(NOT SUPPLIED)

Equipment Supplied

9800505 - iSBC 660 System Chassis Hardware Reference Manual (NOT SUPPLIED)
9800803 - iSBC 640 Power Supply Hardware Reference
Manual (NOT SUPPLIED)
9800708 - iSBC 604/614 Card cage Hardware Reference
Manual (NOT SUPPLIED)

iSBC 660 System Chassis with iSBC 640 Power Supply,
iSBC 604/614 CardcagelBackplane, dual fans, pop-off
front panel
Connector pack with RS232C cable (terminal/modem interface to single board computers), two 50-pin parallel

Environmental Characteristics
Temperature
Operating: O°C to 50°C
Non-Operating: - 40°C to + 85°C

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

SBC 660

iSBC 660 system chassis

10-7

iSBC 635
POWER SUPPLY
• Compact single chassis

• DC power cables and connectors mate
directly to iSBC 604 Modular Cardcage/
Backplane assembly

• ± 5V and ±12V iSBC 80 and iSBC 86
system power

• "AC low" power failure TTL logic level
output provided for system power·
down control

• Sufficient power for one fully loaded
Intel single board computer plus
residual power for up to three Intel
iSBC expansion boards

• 100V, 115V, 215V, and 230V AC
operation

• Current limiting and overvoltage
protection on all outputs

• 50 Hz or 60 Hz input

The iSSC 635 Power Supply provides low cost, off-the·shelf, single chassis power generation for OEM Products using
Intel single board computers. The iSSC 635 supply provides regulated DC output power at + 12V, + 5V, - 5V, and
-12V levels. The current capabilities of each of these output levels have been chosen to provide power over a O'C to
+ 55'C temperature range for one Intel single board computer fully loaded with I/O line terminators and drivers and
EPROMs, plus residual capability for most combinations of up to three iSSC memory, I/O, or combination expansion
boards. Current limiting and overvoltage protection is provided on all outputs. Access for AC input is provided via a
standard 4-pin keyed connector. DC output power levels are provided on cables with keyed connectors directly compatible with the iSSC 604 Modular Cardcage/Sackplane assembly. The iSSC 635 supply includes logic whose purpose
is to sense system AC power failure and generate a TTL signal for clean system power-down contro\.

10-8

iSBC635
CD

HARNESS LENGTHS ARE FADM CENTER OF SURFACE
"A" TO CONNECTOR
a, DC OUTPUT 24 'Q.SINCHES TO 1'6 CONN
b. DC OUTPut 16 '0.5 INCHES TO 1'8 CONN.

c. AC INPUT 12 . 0.5 INCHES TO P2CONN.

LOCATION OF "AC LOW" SIGNAL CONfl:ECTOA IS WITHIN
CROSS-HATCHED VOLUME, ORIENTATION MAV VARY.

ALL FOUR MOUNTING HOLES THREADED FOR 10·24

MACHINE SCREWS

' _ 3 . " MAX

$-------------I

5,000

Figure 1. iSeC 635 Mounting Information

SPECIFICATIONS

Electrical Characteristics

Mating Connectors 1

Input Power - Frequency: 47 - 63 Hz. Voltage (Nominal)
(Single Phase): 100, 115,215, or 230 VAC +10%

AC Input
03-09-1042 or equivalent

Output Power:

02-09-1118 or equivalent
(18 to 22 gauge wire)

Current
Current Limit
Max Short
Nominal
Over-Voltage
Voltage (AMPS)(MAX) Range (AMPS) Circuit (AMPS)
Protection

DC Output 2

Header

Molex

09·66·1071

AMP

87194·6

Molex

09·50·7071

AMP

87159·7

+12
+ 5
- 5
-12

"AC Low" Control
Connector
Polarizing key

Molex

15·04·0219

AMP

87116·2

Molex

08-50-0106 (18 to 22 gauge wire)

AMP

67023·1 (18 to 22 gauge wire)

2.0
14.0
0.9
0.8

2.1-3.0
14.7-21.0
0.9-1.4
0.8-1.2

1.0 (Foldback) +14 to +16 V
7.0 (Foldback) +5.8 to +6.6 V
1.4
-5.8 to -6.6 V
1.2
-14 to -16V

Combined Line/Load Regulation - ±1% at ±10% static
line change and ±50% static load change, measured at the
output connector (±0.2% measured at the power supply
under the same conditions).
Remote Sensing - Provided for +5VDC output line
regulation.
Output Ripple and Noise -10 mV peak-to-peak maximum
(DC to 500 KHz)
Output Transient Response - Less than 50 !,sec for ±50%
load change
Output Transient Deviation - Less than ±5% of initial
voltage for ±50% load change.
Power Failure Indication (AC Low) - A TTL open
collector high signal is provided when the input voltage
drops below 90% of its nominal value. DC voltages will
remain within 5% of their nominal values for 3.0
milliseconds (minimum, 7.5 ms typical) after AC Low goes
true.

Notes
1. Pins from a given vendor may only be used with connectors from the
same vendor.

2. iSBC 635 DC output connectors are directly compatible with power
input power connectors on iSBC 604 Modular Cardcage/Backplane
assembly. Two connectors are provided.

Physical Characteristics
Height - 3.19 in. max (8.11 cm)
Width - 6.03 in. max (15.32 cm)
Depth - 12.65 in. max (32.12 cm)
Weight - 13 Ib (5.90 kgm)

10-9

iSBC635
The "AC Low" signal will reset to a TTL low level when
the AC input voltage is restored and after all output
voltages are within specified regulation.

Equipment Supplied

The "AC Low" threshold is adjustable for optimum
powerdown performance at other input combinations
(Le. 100 VAC, 215 VAC, 50 Hz).

Environmental Characteristics
O·C to + 55·C with 35 CFM

Operating Temperature moving air
Non-Operating -

- 40·C to

+ 85·C

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

SBC 635

Power supply

10-10

iSBC 635 Power Supply with AC and DC cables and connectors attached as shown in Figure 1.

Reference Manual
9800298C - iSBC 635 Power Supply Hardware Reference Manual (includes schematics) (NOT SUPPLIED)
Reference manuals are shipped with each product only
if designated SUPPLIED (see above). Manuals may be
ordered from any Intel sales representative, distributor
office or from Intel Literature Department, 3065 Bowers
Avenue, Santa Clara, California 95051.

inter
iSBC 640
POWER SUPPLY
• ± 5V and ± 12V iSBC 80/86 power

• Compact single chassis/slide rail
mounts in iCS 80 Industrial Chassis or
OEM environments

• Sufficient power for 8-12 MULTIBUS
computer, memory, and peripheral
boards

• DC power cables and connectors mate
iSBC 604 Modular. Cardcage/
directly
Backplane assembly

• Current limiting and overvoltage
protection on all outputs
• "AC low" power failure TTL logic level
output provided for system power-down
control

• 100, 115, 215, and 230V AC operation
• 50 Hz or 60 Hz input

The iSBC 640 Power Supply provides low cost, ·off-the-shelf, single chassis power generation for OEM and industrial
system products using Intel single board computers. The iSBC640 supply provides regulated DC output power at +12V,
+SV, -SV and -12V levels. The current capabilities of each of these output levels have been chosen to provide power over a
O°C to +SsoC temperature range for one fully loaded Intel single board computer, plus residual capability for most
combinations of up to eleven iSBC memory, 1/0, or combination expansion boards. Current limiting and overv?ltage
protection is provided on all outputs. Access for AC input is provided via a standard 4-pin keyed connector. DC output
power levels are provided on cables with keyed connectors directly compatible ·with the iSBC 604 Modular
Backplane/Cardcage assembly. The iSBC 640 supply includes logic whose purpose is to sense system AC power failure
and generate a TTL signal for clean system power-down control.

10·11

iSBC 640
SPECIFICATIONS

Mating Connectors 1
AC Input

Electrical Characteristics

03-09-1042 or equivalent

Input Power

02-09-1118 or equivalent
(18 to 22 gauge wire)

Frequency: 50 Hz±5%, 60 Hz±5%
Voltage: 115V ± 10%, 230V ± 10%, 215VAC ± 10%,

DC Output 2

100VAC±10.%

Via user configured wiring options
Output Power
Nominal
Voltage

Current Limit Short Circuit
Range (Amps) (Amps) (Mao)

5V
-12V

09-66-10n
87194-6

1. Pins from given vendor may only be used with connectors from the
same vendor.

Overvoltage

Protection

2. iSBC 640 DC outp'ut connectors are directly compatible with input
power connectors Ion iSBC 604 Modular Cardcage/Backplane
assembly. Four connectors are provided.

"-'~r-'

Moleo
AMP

Notes

Current
(Amps)(Mao)

+ 12V
+ 5V

Header

4.5A
30A
U5A
U5A

4.7- 6.8
31.5-45.0
1.8- 3.2
1.8- 3.2

2.3
15.0
0.9
0.9

15V '" IV
6.2V '" O.4V
-6.2V",0.4V
-15V '" IV

Physical Characteristics

Height Width Depth Weight -

Provided for +5 VDC output line

6.66 in_ max. (16.92 cm)
8.19 in_ max. (20.80 cm)
12_65 in. max. (32.12 cm)
30 Ibs. max (13.63 kg)

Environmental Characteristics

Output Rippleand Noise ..;.10 mV peak-to-peak maximum
(DC to 500 KHz)

, Temperature - O·C to 55·C with 55' CFM moving air
Non-Operating - - 40·C to + 85·C

Output Transient Response - Less than 50 J.lsec for ±50%
load change.

EqL!ipment Supplied

Output Transient Deviation - Less than ± 10% of initial voltage for ± 50% load change.

iSBC 640 Power Supply with AC and DC cables with
keyed connectors.

Power Failure Indication (AC Low) - A TTL open
collector high signal is provided when the input voltage
drops below 90% of its nominal value. DC voltages will
remain within 5% of their nominal values for 3.0
milliseconds (minimum, 7.5 ms typical) after AC Lowgoes
true.

9800803 - iSBC 640 Power Supply Hardware Reference
Manual (includes sphematic and assembly drawings)
(SUPPLIED)

The "AC Low" signal will reset to a TTL low level when
the AC input voltage is restored and after all output
voltages are within specified regulation.
The "AC Low" threshold is adjustable for optimum
powerdown performance at other input combinations
(i.e. 100 VAC, 215 VAC, 50 Hz);

Reference Manuals

9800798 - iCS 80 Systems Site Planning and InstallationManual (for installation of iSBC 640 supply into iCS
80 Industrial Chassis (NOT SUPPLIED)
Reference manuals are shipped with each product only if
designated SUPPLIED (see above). Manuals may be
ordered from any Intel sales representative, distributor
office or from Intel Literature Department, 3065 Bowers
Avenue, Santa Clara, California 95051.

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number Description
SBC 640

Power Supply

10·12

Microcomputer
Development Systems

intel'
New dimensions in development solutions.
Solutions that deliver the support you need to develop microcomputer based products successfully and economically. No other development system product line supports such a broad range of microprocessor and
support chip functionality. No other development system offers such a broad selection of high-level software
support and de-bug tools. And no other development system today delivers state-of-the-art development support without obsolescence of previous systems.

Evolutionary Growth
Every Intellec@developmentsystem delivered since 1975 can easily be upgraded to current standards. Including resident support for 16-bit product development and distributed development solutions.

Ease of Entry
The new Series II/Model 120 Microcomputer DevelopmentSystem delivers full entry level support at the lowest
entry price, while maintaining full upgradability:

Unprecedented 16-bit Support
The newly introduced Intellec Series III/Model 286 Microcomputer Development System features a resident
iAPX 86 16-bit CPU for direct execution of 16-bit Intel software AND a resident 8c bit CPU for execution of all
Intel 8-bit microprocessor software.

Distributed Development Solutions
For larger development projects, Intel delivers NDS-1-the Networked Development System-with up to eight
development systems sharing hard disk speed and centralized file resources.

Software. Key to Programmer Productivity
High level languages and powerful macro assemblers produce linkabl.e and relocatable object modules, allowing the designer to match software strengths to project requirements for optimal development speed and
product performance. New introductions include PWM, PASCAL and FORTRAN compilers forthe iAPX family
of 16-bit microprocessors.

ICE™ Emulation. For Every Processor
Intel's family of microprocessors is supported by ICE in-circuit emulation modules for integration of system
hardware and software throughout the design cycle. ICE modules feature real-time and single-step trace and
debugging.

The Development Investment
Intellec development tools provide the support you need to manage the complexity of microcomputer product
development over the next decade.
You invest in a family of support tools that supports, in turn, a comprehensive and cohesive family of processors and peripherals-from digital. signal processors to 8-bit microcontrollers to 16-bit microsystems
operating in a multiprocessing environment. And Intel's record of product revolution through product evolution means your development dollars are an investment in today's technology AND tomorrow's technology.

11-1

8080/8085 PERFORMANCE, GUIDE

For developing 8080/8085 programs on an 8·blt based
Intellec® development system.

UPGRADE
OPTIONS

DEVELOPMENT
SYSTEM

TODAY'S
PERFORMANCE
ASM 80/85
V3.0

MODEL
800

SERIES
II
MODELS
120.220.230

SERIES' ,
II
M~.l6EL .

SERiEs
11/85 '
MODELS
225.235 '

SERIES
11/85 ','
MODEL
245

1,4X

1,3X

1,8X

ADD NEW
ASM SO/85
V4.0

1,7X

2.3)(

2.0X·

3.0X

ADD
MODEL 505
ASM 80/85
V4.0

N/A

2.3X

ADD
MODEL 740
ASM 80/85
V4.0

2.0X

2.0X,

3.0X

ADD
MODEL 505 &
MODEL 740
e~ 80/85
.0

N/A

3.0X

... ,.
."

'*'

3.0X

'I'

*The current ,system .Includes this ,option.

IAPX 86/88 PERFOR""ANCE GUIDE .

For developing IAPX ,86 or 88 programs on ,either an 8"blt or
16·blt based Intellee® development system~
,
,
DEVELOPMENT
~T
SYSTEM

UPGRADE
OPTIONS

ASM ~/88
'TODAY'S
PERFORMANCE PL/M 86/88
ADD
MODEL 505
ADD
MODEL 556

ADD
MODEL,556.1

ADD
MODEL 740

MODEL
800
1X

SERIES
II
MODELS
120.220.230

SERIES
11/85
MODELS
225.235

SERIES
II
MODEL
240

SERIES
11/85 '
MODEL
.245

1,2X

1.5X

2.1X

1.3X:

1,4X

. 2.0X

2.1X

. 1X

ASM 86/88

N/A

1,2X

PLIM 86/88

N/A

1.3X

1,6X

• ASM 86/88
PL/M 86/88
, ASM 86/88
PL/M 86/88
. ASM 86/88

• ·2.7X·

3.1X

2.3X

2.4X

3.7X

4.0X

N/A

1.7X

N/A ' '

. 3.1X

N/A

2.4X

N/A

4.0X

. 1,5X

1,5X·

2.1X

1.4X

2.0X

ASM86/88

N/A

2.1X

PLIM 86/88

N/A

2.0X

ASM 86/88

2.7X

3.1X

PL/M 86/88

3.7X

4.0X

ASM 86/88
ADD
MODEL 556 I &
MODEL 740
PL/M 86/88

N/A

3.1X

N/A

4.0X

ADD
MODEL 556 &
MODEL 740

2.0X
1,7X'

PL/M 86/88

ADD
MODEL 505 &
MODEL 740

·
·

·
·
·,.
·
·

·
! "

·.,
·
·
·
·

"The current system Includes this option.
~h~~~I~~~~r~~~~~f~~=~~~r~o~~~7!:' ~~~Cv~~vC~:~~~:~~~nv:~~~g~~li~~I~~ware, The

11·2

MODEL 120
INTELLEC® SERIES II
MICROCOMPUTER DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM
• Built·in interfaces for high speed paper
tape reader/punch, printer and
Universal PROM Programmer

• Complete microcomputer development
system in one package for MCS®·48 and
MCS·80/85 microprocessor families

• Integral 250K·byte floppy disk with total
storage capacity expandable to over 2M
bytes

• Single LSI electronics board with CPU,
32K bytes RAM memory, and 4K bytes
ROM memory

• Available with user's choice of MCS~48
or 8080/8085 macroassembler

• Self·test diagnostic capability

• Software compatible with previous
Intellec®systems

• ISIS·II disk operating system

The Model 120 Intellec Series II Microcomputer Development System is a complete microcomputer development systemintegrated into one compact package. It includes a CPU with 32K bytes of RAM memory, 4K bytes of ROM memory, a 2000-character CRT, detachable full ASCII keyboard with cursor controls and upperllower case capability, and a
250K-byte floppy diskette drive. Powerful ISIS-II Operating System software allows the Model 120 to be used quickly
and efficiently for assembling, compiling and debugging programs for Intel's MCS-48, MCS-80/85 and all other currently supported Intel microprocessor families. ISIS-II performs all file handling operations for the user, leaving him
free to concentrate on the details of his own application. When used in conjunction with an optional in-circuit eniula::'
tor (ICE™) module or the HSE-49™ High-Speed Emulator, the Model 120 provides all the hardware and software development tools necessary for the rapid development of a microcomputer-based product.

11-3

MODEL 120

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Input/Output

Hardware Components

IPB Serial Channels - The 110 subsystem in the Model
120 consists of two parts: the 10C.card and two serial
channels on the IPB itself. Each serial channel is RS232
compatible and is capable of running asynchronously
from 110 to 9600 baud or synchronously from 150 to 56K
baud. Both may be connected to a user defined data set
or data terminal. One channel contains current loop
adapters. Both ,channels are implemented using Intel's
8251 USART. They can .be programmatically. selected to
perform a variety of 110 functions. Baud rate selection is
accomplished programmatically through an Intel 8253
interval timer. The 8253 also serves as a real-time clock
for the entire system .. 110 activity through both serial
channels is signaled· to the system through a second
8259 interrupt controller, operating in a polled mode,
nested to the primary 8259.

The Intellec Series II Model 120 is a packaged, highly integrated microcomputer development system consisting of a CRT chassis with a 6-slot cardcage, power supply, fans, cables, single floppy diskette drive, and two
printed circuit cards. A separate, full ASCII keyboard is
connected with a cable.
CPU Cards - The master CPU card contains its own
microprocessor, memory, 110, interrupt, and bus interface circuitry, f.ashioned from Intel's high-technology
LSI components. Known as the integrated processor
board (IPB), it occupies the firsi slot in the cardcage. A
second, slave CPU card, is responsible for all remaining
110 control, including the CRT and keyboard interface
and floppy disk control. This card, mounted on the rear
panel, also contains its own microprocessor, RAM and
ROM memory, and 110 interface, thus in effect creating a
dual processor environment. Known as the 110 con:
troller (IOC), the slave CPU card communicates with the
IPB over an 8-bit bidirectional data bus, thus leaving the
remaining 5 slots in the cardcage available for system
expansion. A block diagram of the 10C is shown in
Figure 1.
'
.

10C Interface - The remainder of system ilo activity
takes place in the 10C. The 10C provides interfaces for
the CRT, keyboard, integral floppy disk and other peri ph:
erals, including a printer, high speed paper tape readerl
punch, and Intel's Universal PROM Programmer. The
10C contains its own independent microprocessor, also
an 8080A-2. This CPU controls all 110 operations, as well
as supervising communications with the.IPB. 8K bytes
of ROM contain al.1 110 control firmware. 8K bytes of
RAM are used for CRT screen refresh storage and the
floppy disk buffer. These do .not occupy any space in
Intellec Series II main memory since thelOC.is a totally
independent microcomputer subsystem.

System Components
The heart of the IPB Is an Intel NMOS 8-blt microprocessor, the 8080A-2, running at 2.6 MHz. 32K bytes of
RAM memory are provided on the board using Intel 16K
RA¥s. 4K 6f ROM Is provided, preprog~ammed with system bootstrap "self-test" diagnostics and the Intellec
Series II System Monitor. The eight-level vectored priority Interrupt system allows Interrupts to be Individually
masked. Using Intel's versatile 8259A Interrupt controller, the interrupt system may be user programmed to
respond to individual needs.

Integral CRT Display - The CRT is a 12-inch raster
scan-type monitor with a 50/60 Hz vertical scan rate and
15.5 kHz horizontal scan rate. Controls are provided for
brightness and contrast adjustments. The interface to
the CRT is provided through an Intel 8275 single-chip,
programmable CRT controller. The master processor on

CABLE BUS TO IPB

Figure 1. 1/0 Controller (IOC) Block Diagram for the Model 120 Intellec'" Series II Microcomputer Development System

11-4

AFN·01388

MODEL 120

Programmer. Communication between the IPB and 10C
is maintained over a separate, 8-bit bidirectional data
bus. Connectors for the devices named above, as well
as the two serial channels, are mounted directly on the
10C itself.
.

the IPB transfers a character for display to the 10C,
where it is stored in RAM. The CRT controller reads a
line at a time into its line buffer through an Intel 8257
DMA controller and then feeds one character at a time
to the character generator to produce the video signal.
Timing for the CRT control is provided by an Intel 8253
interval timer. The screen display is formatted as 25
rows of 80 characters. The full set of ASCII characters
are displayed, including 10wer,cCise. alphas.

Control
User control is maintained through a front. panel consisting of a power switch and Indicator; reset/boot
switch, run/halt light, and eight Interrupt switches and
Indicators. The front-panel circuit board Is 'attached
directly to the IPB, allowing the eight Interrupt switches
to connect to the primary 8259A, as well as to the In'
tellec Series II bus.

Keyboard - The keyboard interfaces directly to the 10C
processor via an 8·bit data bus. The keyboard contains
an Intel UPI_41™ Universal Peripheral Interface, which
scans the keyboard, encodes the characters, and buf·
fers the characters to provide N-key rollover. The key·
board itself is.a high quality typewriter-style keyboard
containing the full ASCII character set. An upper/lower
case switch allows the system to be used for document
preparation. Cursor control keys are also provided.

MULTIBUS™ Interface Capability
All Intellec Series II models implement the industrystandard MULTlBUS protocol. The MULTIBUS protocol
enables several bus masters, such as CPU and DMA
devices, to share the bus and memory by operating at
different priority levels. Resolution of bus exchanges is
synchronized by a bus clock signal derived independently from processor clocks. Read/write transfers may
take place at rates up to 5 MHz. The bus structure is
suitable for use with any Intel microcomputer family.

Floppy Disk Drive
The floppy disk drive is controlled by an Intel 8271
single·chip, programmable floppy disk controller. It
transfers data via an Intel 8257 DMA controller between
an 10C RAM buffer and the diskette. The 8271 handles
reading and writing of data, formatting diskettes, and
reading status, all upon appropriate commands from the
Ibc microprocessor.
' .

Expansion

Peripheral Interface

The Model 120 may be expanded up to 2.25M bytes of
on-line floppy diskette storage, plus 7.3M bytes of online hard-disk storage capacity; system RAM may be ex,
panded beyond the 32K bytes provided by adding iSBC
memory expansion boards.

AUPI'41 Universal Peripheral Interface on the 10C board
provides interface for other peripheral devices, including a printer, high speed paper tape reader, high
speed paper tape punch, and Intel's Universal PROM

SPECIFICATIONS

Direct Memory Access (DMA)

Host Processor (IPB)

Standard capability on MULTIBUS bus; implemented for
user selected DMA devices through optional DMA module - maximum transfer rate of 5 MHz.

8080A·2 based, operating at 2.600 MHz.
RAM - 32K, expandable to 641< with iSBC 032 RAM
boards (system monitor occupies 62K through 64K)
ROM - 4K (2K in monitor, 2K in boot/diagnostic)
Bus - MULTIBUS architecture, maximum transfer rate
of 5 MHz
Clocks - Host processor, crystal controlled at 2.6 MHz;
bus clock, crystal controlled at 9.8304 MHz.

Memory Access Time
RAM - 585 ns max
PROM - 450 ns max

Diskette
Diskette System Capacity - 250K bytes (formatted)
Diskette System Transfer Rate - 160K bits/sec
Diskette System Access Time
Track-to-Track: 10 ms max
Average Random Positioning: 260 ms max
Rotational Speed: 360 rpm'
.
Average Rotational Latency: 83 ms max
Recording Mode: FM

110 Interfaces
2 Serial 110 Channels, RS232C, at 110-9600 baud (asynchronous) or 150-56K baud (synchronous). Baud rates
and serial format fully programmable using Intel 8251A
USARTs. Serial Channel 1 additionally provided with 20
rnA current loop. Parallel 110 interfaces provided for
paper tape punch, paper tape reader, printer, and
UPP-103 Universal PROM Programmer.

Physical Characteristics
Width Height Depth Weight -

Interrupts
8-level, maskable, nested priority interrupt network initiated from front panel or user selected devices.

11-5

17.37 in. (44.12 cm)
15.81 in. (40.16 cm)
19.13 in. (48.59 cm)
73 Ib (33 kg)
AFN·01388

MODEL 120

Keyboard
Width - 17.37 in. (44.12 cm)
Height - 3.0 in. (7.62 cm)
Depth - 9.0 in. (22.0 cm)
Weight - 6 Ib (3 kg)

ROM resident'system monitor
ISIS-II system diskette
MCS-48 macroassembler diskette (supplied with MCI120/48-Kit)
MCS-80/MCS-85 macroassembler diskette (supplied
with DS-120/80·Kit)

Electrical Characteristics
DC Power Supply
Volt~.

Reference Manuals

Amps
Supplied

Typical
System Requirements

30.0
2.5
0.3
1.5
1.5
1.7

7.5
0.2
0.05
0.15
1.3·
1.2·

Equipment Supplied

9800558 - A Guide to Microcomputer Development
Systems (SUPPLIED)
9800559 - Intellec Series II Instalfation and Service
Manual (SUPPLIED)
9800306 - .ISIS-II System User's Guide (SUPPLIED)
9800556 -Intellec Series II Hardware Reference Manual (SUPPLIED)
9800555 - Intellec Series II Hardware Interface Manual
(SUPPLIED)
9800605 - Intellec Series II System Monitor Source
Listing (SUPPLIED)
9800554 - Intellec Series II Schematic Drawing (SUPPLIED)
9800255 - MCS-48 and UPI-41 Assembly Language Programming Manual (SUPPLIED with MCI-120/48-Kit)
9800301 - 8080/8085 Assembly Language Programming Manual (SUPPLIED with DS-120/80-Kit)

Model 120 chassis
Integrated processor board (IPS)
I/O controller" board (IOC)
CRT and keyboard
250K-byte floppy disk drive

Supplied

+ 5 :1:5%
+.12 :1:5%
-12 :1:5%
-10 :1:5%

+15 :1:5%
+24 :1:5%
·Not available on bus.

AC ReCjuirements
110V, 60Hz - 5.9 Amp
220V, 50 Hz - 3.0 Amp

Environmental Characteristics
Operating TemperatiJre - 16'C to 32'C (61 'F to 90'F)
Operating Humidity....:. 20% to 80% relative humidity

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Des'cription

MCI-120/48-Kit
(110V/60 Hz)

Intellec Series II Model 120 microcomputer'development system with
MCS-48 macroassembler
Intellec Series II Model 120 micro;
computer development system with
MCS-80/MCS-85 macroassembler
Intellec Series II Model 120 microcomputer development system ..
Intellec Series II Model 121 microcomputer development system

DS-120/BO-Kit
(110V/60 Hz)

MDS-120*
(110V/60 Hz)

MDS-121*
(220V/50 Hz)

·"MOS" Is an ordering code orilY,"and is not used as a product name or
trademark. MOS· Is a registered trademark of Mohawk Data Sciences
Corp.

11-6

MODEL225
INTELLEC@SERIES 11/85
MICROCOMPUTER DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM
• Complete microcomputer development
system for MCS'-86, MCS" -85,
MCS"-80, and MCS'-48
microprocessor families
• High performance 8085A-2 CPU,
64K bytes RAM memory, and
4K bytes ROM memory
II

Self-test diagnostic capability

• Built-in interfaces for high speed paper
tape reader/punch, printer, and universal PROM programmer

• Integral 250K byte floppy disk drive
with total storage capacity expandable
to over 2M bytes. of floppy disk storage
and 7,3M bytes of hard disk storage
is

Powerful ISIS-II Disk Operating System
with relocating macroassembler,
linker, locater, and CRT based editor
CREDIT

• Supports PL/M, FORTRAN, BASIC,
PASCAL and COBOL high level
languages
• Software compatible with previous
Intellec'" systems

The Intellec Series 11/85 Model 225 Microcomputer Development System is a performance enhanced, complete microcomputer development system integrated into one compact package. The Model 225 includes
a CPU with 64K bytes of RAM, 4K bytes of ROM, a 2000-character CRT, detachable full ASCII keyboard with
cursor controls and upperllower case capability, and a 250K-byte floppy disk drive. Powerful ISIS-II Disk
Operating System software allows the Model 225 to be used quickly and efficiently for assembling and
debugging programs for Intel's MCS-86, MCS-85, MCS-80, or MCS-48 microprocessor families. ISIS-II performs all file handling operations for the· user, leaving him free to concentrate on the details of his own
application. When used with an optional in-circuit emulator (lCPM) module, the Model 225 provides all of
the hardware and software development tools necessary for the rapid development of a microcomputerbased product. Optional storage peripherals provide over 2 million bytes of floppy disk, and 7.3 million of
hard disk storage capacity.

11-7

in1:el

MODEL225

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

high technology LSI components. Known as the
integrated processor card (IPC), it occupies the
first slot in the cardcage. A second slave CPU card
is responsible for all remaining 1/0 control
including the CRT and keyboard interface. This
card, mounted on the rear panel, also contains its
own microprocessor, RAM and ROM memory, and
1/0 interface logic, thus, in effect, creating a dual
processor environment. Known as the 1/0 controller (IOC), the slave CPU card communicates
with the IPC over an 8-bit bidirectional data bus.

Hardware Components
The Intellec Series 11/85 Model 225 is a highlyintegrated microcomputer development system
consisting of a CRT chassis with a 6-slot cardcage,
power supply, fans, cables, single floppy disk
drive, and two printed circuit cards. A separate,
full ASCII keyboard is connected with a cable.
A block diagram of the Model 225 is shown in
Figure 1.

Expansion - Five remaining slots in the cardcage
are available for system expansion. Additional
expansion of 4 slots can be achieved through the
addition of an Intellec Series II expansion chassis.

CPU Cards - The master CPU card contains its
own microprocessor, memory, 1/0, interrupt and
bus interface circuitry implemented with Intel's

LOCAL
INTERRUPT
CONTROL
8259A

64K BYTES
RAM

4K BYTES
ROM

8·LEVEL
PRIORITY
INTERRUPT
8259A

PANEL
CONTROL

+
I

SERIAL
CHANNELO
8251A

SERIAL
CHANNELl
8251A

8085A·2
CPU

BIDIRECTIONAL
DRIVER

BAUD RATE
GENERATOR &
REAL·TlMECLOCK
8253A

INTELLEC BUS

BUS
CONTROLLER
8219

PRIORITY
RESOLUTION

SYSTEM
CLOCKS

8080A·2
CPU

Y 9
DMA

...

8271
FLOPPY
CONTROLLER

...

8275
CRT
CONTROLLER

KEYBOARD

...

8228
SYSTEM
CONTROLLER

8KRAM

...

8253
INTERVAL
TIMER

CABLE BUS

8Q41A

IOC BUS

CPU

',;

...

"..

-!
I

TAPE
PUNCH

TAPE
READER

,;
PIO BUS

!
PRINTER

Figure 1. Intellec' Series 11/85 Model 225 Microcomputer Development System Block Diagram
11-8

AFN-014248

inter

MODEL225

System Components
The heart of the IPC is an Intel NMOS 8-bit microprocessor, the 8085A-2, running at 4.0 MHz. 64K
bytes of RAM memory are provided on the board
using 16K RAMs. 4K· of ROM is provided, preprogrammed with system bootstrap "self-test"
diagnostics and the Intellec Series 11/85 System
Monitor. The eight-level vectored priority interrupt system allows interrupts to be individually
masked. Using Intel's versatile 8259A interrupt
controller, the interrupt system may be user programmed to respond to individual needs.

Input/Output
IPC Serial Channels - The I/O subsystem in the
Model 225 consists of two parts: the lac card and
two serial channels on the IPC itself. Each serial
channel is RS232 compatible and is capable of running asynchronously from 110 to 9600 baud or synchronously from 150 to 56K baud. Both may be
connected to a user defined data set or terminal.
One channel contains current loop adapters. Both
channels are implemented using Intel's 8251A
USART. They can be programmed to perform a
variety of I/O functions. Baud rate selection is
accomplished through an Intel 8253 interval timer.
The 8253 also serves as a real-time clock for the
entire system. I/O activity through both serial
channels is signaled to the system through a
second 8259A interrupt controller, operating in a
polled mode nested to the primary 8259A.

troller. The master processor on the IPC transfers
a character for display to the laC, where it is
stored in RAM. The CRT controller reads a line at a
time into its line buffer through an Intel 8257 DMA
controller and then feeds one character at a time
to the character generator to produce the video
signal. Timing for the CRT control is provided by
an Intel 8253 interval timer. The screen display is
formatted as 25 rows of 80 characters. The full set
of ASCII characters is displayed, including lower
case alphas.
Keyboard - The keyboard interfaces directly to
the lac processor via an 8-bit data bus. The
keyboard contains an Intel UPI_41™ Universal
Peripheral Interface, which scans the keyboard,
encodes the characters, and buffers the
characters to provide N-key rollover. The
keyboard itself is a high quality typewriter style
keyboard containing the full ASCII character set.
An upper/lower case switch allows the system to
be used for document preparation. Cursor control
keys are also provided.

Peripheral Interface
A UPI-41 Universal Peripheral Interface on the lac
board provides interface for other standard
Intellec peripherals including a printer, high
speed paper tape reader, high speed paper tape
punch, and universal PROM programmer. Communication between the IPC and lac is maintained
over a separate 8-bit bidirectional data bus. Connectors for the four devices named above, as well
as the two serial channels, are mounted directly
on the lac itself.

lac Interface - The remainder of system I/O
activity takes place in the lac. The lac provides
interface for the CRT, keyboard, and standard
Intellec peripherals including printer, high speed
paper tape reader/punch, and universal PROM
programmer. The lac contains its own independent microprocessor, an 8080A"2. The CPU controls
all I/O operations as well as supervising
communications with the IPC. 8K bytes of ROM
contain all I/O control firmware. 8K bytes of RAM
are used for CRT screen refresh storage. These
do not occupy space in Intellec Series II main
memory since the lac is a totally independent
microcomputer subsystem.

Control
User control is maintained through a front panel,
consisting of a power switch and indicator,
reset/boot switch, run/halt light, and eight interrupt switches and indicators. The front panel circuit board is attached directly to the IPC, allowing
the eight interrupt switches to connect to the
primary 8259A, as well as to the Intellec Series II
bus.

Integral Floppy Disk Drive

Integral CRT

The integral floppy disk is controlled by an Intel
8271 single chip, programmable floppy disk controller. It transfers data via an Intel 8257 DMA controller between an lac RAM buffer and the
diskette. The 8271 handles reading and writing of
data, formatting diskettes, and reading status, all
upon appropriate commands from the lac
m ic rap rocessor.

Display - The CRT is a 12-inch raster scan type
monitor with a 50/60 Hz vertical scan rate and
15.5kHz horizontal scan rate. Controls are provided for brightness and contrast adjustments.
The interface to the CRT is provided through an
Intel 8275 single-chip programmable CRT con11-9

AFN-014248

inter

MODEL225

MULTIBUS™ Interface Capability
All Intellec Series 11/85 models implement the
industry standard MULTIBUS protocol. The
MULTIBUS protocol enables several bus masters,
such as CPU and DMA devices, to share the bus

and memory by operating at different priority
levels. Resolution of bus exchanges is synchronized by a bus clock signal derived
independently from processor clocks. Read/write
transfers may take place at rates up to 5 MHz. The
bus structure is suitable for use with any Intel
microcomputer family.

SPECIFICATIONS

Memory Access Time

Host Processor (lPC)

RAM - 470 ns max
PROM - 540 ns max

8085A-2 based, operating at 4.0 MHz.
RAM - 64K on the CPU card
ROM - 4K (2K in monitor, 2K in boot/diagnostic)
Bus - MULTIBUS™ bus, maximum transfer rate
of 5 MHz
Clocks - Host processor, crystal controlled at
4.0 MHz, bus clock, crystal controlled at 9.8304
MHz

I/O Interfaces
Two Serial I/O Channels, RS232C, at 110-9600 baud
(asynchronous) or 150-56K baud (synchronous).
Baud rates and serial format fully programmable
using Intel 8251 A USARTs. Serial Channel 1 additionally provided with 20 mA current loop. Parallel
I/O interfaces provided for paper tape punch,
paper tape reader, printer, and UPP-103 Universal
PROM Programmer.

Integral Floppy Disk Drive
Floppy Disk System Capacity 250K bytes (formatted)
Floppy Disk System Transfer Rate160K bits/sec
Floppy Disk System Access Time Track to Track: 10 ms max
Average Random Positioning: 260 ms
Rotational Speed: 360 rpm
Average Rotational Latency: 83 ms
Recording Mode: FM

Physical Characteristics
Interrupts

CHASSIS

8-level, maskable, nested priority interrupt network initiated from front panel or user selected
devices.

Width -17.37 in. (44.12 cm)
Height -, 15.81 in. (40.16 em)
Depth -19.13 in. (48.59 cm)
Weight - 73 lb. (33 kg)

Direct Memory Access (DMA)

KEYBOARD

Standard capability on M ULTIBUS interface;
implemented for user selected DMA devices
through optional DMA module-maximum transfer
rate of 5 MHz.

Width -17.37 in. (44.12 cm)
Height - 3.0 in. (7.62 em)
Depth - 9.0 in. (22.86 em)
Weight - 6 lb. (3 kg)
11-10

AFN·014248

inter

MODEL225

Electrical Characteristics

Equipment Supplied
Model 225 Chassis including:
Integrated Processor Card (IPC)
1/0 Controller Board (lOC)
CRT
ROM-Resident System Monitor
Detachable keyboard
ISIS-II System Diskette with MCS-80/MCS-85
Macroassembler
ISIS-II CREDIT Diskette CRT-Based Text Editor

DC POWER SUPPLY

Volts
Supplied

Amps
Supplied

Typical
System
Requirements

+ 5±5%
+12 ± 5%
-12 ± 5%
-10 ± 5%
+15±5%*
+ 24 ± 5%*

30.0
2.5
0.3
1.0
1.5
1.7

17.0
1.1
0.1
0.08
1.5
1.7

Documentation Supplied
A Guide to Microcomputer Development Systems,
9800558

*Not available on bus.

Intellec® Series II Model 22X/23X Installation
Manual, 9800559
ISIS-II System User's Guide, 9800306
Intellec® Series II Hardware Reference Manual,
9800556

AC REQUIREMENTS FOR MAINFRAME

8080/8085 Assembly
Manual, 9800301

110V, 60 Hz - 5.9 Amp
220V, 50 Hz - 3.0 Amp

Language

Programming

ISIS-II 8080/8085 Assembler Operator's Manual,
9800292
Intellec~ Series
Listing, 9800605

II Systems

Monitor Source

Intellec@ Series II Schematic Drawings, 9800554
ISIS-II CREDIT (CRT-Based Text Editor) User's
Guide, 9800902

Environmental Characteristics
Additional manuals may be ordered from any Intel
sales representative or distributor office, or from
Intel Literature Department, 3065 Bowers Avenue,
Santa Clara, California 95051.

Operating Temperature _16°C to 32°C
(61°F to 90°F)
Humidity - 20% to 80%

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part
Number

Description

MDS-225* Intellec® Series 11/85 Model 225
Microcomputer
Development System (110V 160 Hz)
MDS-226* Intellec® Series 11/85 Model 226
Microcomputer
Development System (220V 150 Hz)

'''MOS'' is an ordering code only, and is not used as a product
name or trademark. MDS'" is a registered trademark of
Mohawk Data Sciences Corp.

11-11

AFN·014248

MODEL 286
INTELLEC® SERIES III
MICROCOMPUTER DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM
• Complete 16-bit High Performace,
Microcomputer Development Solution
for Intel iAPX 88/86 Applications.
Also Supports MCS-85™, MCS-80™
and MCS-48™ Families

• Upgradeable from Intellec® Model 800,
Series 11/80 and Series 11/85
• Compatible with Intellec® Distributed
Development Systems
• Software Compatible with Previous
Intellec® Systems

• Full Range of iAPX 88/86-resident,
High-level Languages: PL/M-88/86,
PASCAL-88/86, and FORTRAN-88/86

• Software Applications Debugger for
User iAPX 88/86 Programs

• 2 Host CPUs-iAPX 86 and 8085A-for
Enhanced System Performance and
Two Native Execution Environments

• Integral 250K Byte Floppy Disk Drive
with Total Storage Capacity Expandable to Over 2M Bytes of Floppy Disk
Storage and 7.3 M Bytes of Hard Disk
Storage (formatted)

• 96K Bytes of User Program RAM Memory Available for iAPX 88/86 Programs

The Intellec® Series-III Microcomputer Development System is a high performance system solution designed
specifically for iAPX 88/86 microprocessor development. It contains two host CPUs, and iAPX 86 and an 8085,
that provide two native execution environments for optimum performance and compatibility with the Intellec
software packages for both CPUs. The basic system includes 96K bytes of iAPX 88/86 user RAM memory, a
2000-character CRT, detachable full ASCII keyboard with cursor controls and upper/lower case capability, and
a 250K byte floppy disk drive. The powerful Disk Operating System maximizes system processing by utilizing
the power of both host processors. Standard software includes a full range of iAPX 88/86 resident software
and the high-level languages PL/M-88/86, PASCAL-88/86, and FORTRAN-88/86 are also available. A ROM resident software debugger not only provides self-test diagnostic capability, but also gives the user a powerful
iAPX 88/86 applications debugger.

11-12

AFN·01588A
121670-001 Rev. A

inter

MODEL 286

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

contains Intel's 16-bit HMOS microprocessor. These
CPUs provide the dual processor environment.

Hardware Components

A third CPU card performs all remaining I/O including interface to the CRT, integral floppy disk, and
keyboard. This card, mounted on the rear panel,
contains its own microprocessors, RAM and ROM
memory, and I/O interface logic. Known as the I/O
controller (IOC), this slave CPU card communicates
with the IPC-85 over an 8-bit bidirectional data bus.A
64K byte RAM expansion memory board is also
included.

The Intellec Series III is contained in a single package consisting of a CRT chassis with a 6-slot card
cage, power supply, fans, cables, single floppy disk
drive, detachable upper/lower case full ASCII keyboard, and four printed circuit cards. A block diagram of the system is shown in Figure 1.

System Components

Expansion

Two CPU cards reside on the Intellec MULTIBUS™
bus, each containing its own microprocessor,
memory, I/O, interrupt and bus interface circuitry
implemented with Intel's high technology LSI components. The integrated processor card (IPC-85),
occupies the first slot in the cardcage.A second
CPU card, the resident processor board (RPB-86)

Two additional slots in the system cardcage are
available for system expansion. The Intellec expansion chassis Model 201 is available to provide 4 additional expansion slots for either memory or I/O expansion.

Figure 1. INTELLEC® Series III Block Diagram
11-13

AFN-01588A

MODEL 286

and standard Intellec-compatable peripherals including printer, high speed paper tape reader/
punch, and universal PROM programmer. The 10C
contains its own independent microprocessor, an
8080A-2. This CPU issues commands, receives
status, and controls all I/O operations as well as
supervising communications with the IPC-85. The
10C contains interval timers, its own 10C bus system
controller, and 8K bytes of ROM for all I/O control
firmware. The 8K bytes of RAM are used for CRT
screen refresh storage. Neither the ROM nor the
RAM occupy space in the Intellec Series III main
memory address range because the 10C is a totally
independent microcomputer subsystem.

CPU Cards
IPc-a5
The heart of the IPC-85 is an IntelNMbs 8-bit microprocessor, the 8085A-2, running at 4.0 MHz. 64K
bytes of RAM memory are provided on the board
using 16K dynamic RAMs. 4K of ROM is provided,
preprogrammed with system bootstrap "self-test"
diagnostics and the Intellec System Monitor. The
eight-level vectored priority interrupt system allows
interrupts to be individually masked. Using Intel's
versatile 8259A interrupt controller, the interrupt
system may be user programmed to respond to individual needs.
RPB-as
The heart of the RPB-.86 is an Intel HMOS 16-bit
microprocessor, the iAPX 86 (8086), running at 5.0
MHz. 64K bytes of RAM memory are provided on the
board. 16K of ROM is provided on board, preprogrammed with an iAPX 88/86 applications debugger
which provides features necessary to debug and
execute application software for the iAPX 88/86
microprocessors.

Integral CRT

The 8085A-2 and iAPX 86 access two independent
memory spaces. This allows the two processors to
execute concurrently when an iAPX 88/86 program
is run. In this mode, the IPC-85 becomes an intellegent I/O processor board to the RPB-86.

Input/Output
IPc-a5 SERIAL CHANNELS
The I/O subsystem in the Series III consists of two
parts: the 10C card and two serial channels on the
IPC-85 itself. Each serial channel is independently
configurable. Both are RS232-compatible and is capable of running asynchronously from 110 to 9600
baud or synchronously from 150 to 56K baud. Both
may be connected to a user defined data set or terminal. One channel contains current loop adapters.
Both channels are implemented using Intel's 825.1 A
USART. They can be programmed to perform a variety of I/O functions. Baud rate selection is accomplished through an Intel 8253 interval timer. The
8253 also serves as a real-time clock for the entire
system. I/O activity through each serial channel is
independently signaled to the system through a
second 8259A (slave) interrupt controller, operating
in a polled mode nested to the master 8259A.
IOC INTERFACE
The remainder of the system I/O activity is handled
by the 10C. The 10C provides the interface and control forthe keyboard, CRT, integral floppy disk drive,

DISPLAY
TheGRT is a 12-inch raster scan type monitor with a
50/60 Hz vertical scan rate and 15.5 kHz horizontal
scan rate. Controls are provided for brightness and
contrast adjustments. The interface to the CRT is
provided through an Intel 8275 single chip programmable CRT controller. The master processor
on the IPC-85 transfers a character for display to the
10C, where. it is stored in RAM. The CRT controller
reads aline at a time into its line buffer through an
Intel 8257 DMA Controller. It then feeds one character ata time to the character generator to produce
the video Signal. Timing for the CRT control is
provided by an Intel 8253 programmable interval
timer. The screen display is formatted as 25 rows of
80 characters. The full set of ASCII characters are
displayed, including lower case alphas.
KEYBOARD
The keyboard interfaces directly to the 10C processor via an 8-bit data bus. The keyboard contains
an Intel UPI-41A Universal Peripheral Interface,
which scans the keyboard and encodes the characters to provide N-key roll over. The keyboard itself is
a typewriter style keyboard containing the full ASCII
character set. An upper/lower case switch allows the
system to be used for dor.l"nent preparation. Cursor
control keys are also provided.

Peripheral Interface
A UPI-41A Universal Peripheral Interface on the 10C
board provides built-in interface for standard
Intellec-compatable peripherals including a printer,
high speed paper tape reader, high speed paper
tape punch, and universal PROM programmer.
Communication between the IPC-85 and 10C is

11-14

AFN·01588A

MODEL 286

FLOPPY DISK CONTROLLER BOARDS
The diskette controller consists of two boards, the
channel board and the interface board. These two
PC boards reside in the Intellec Series III system
chassis. The channel board receives, decodes and
responds to channel commands from the 8085A-2
CPU on the IPC-85. The interface board provides the
diskette controller with a means of communication
with the disk drives and with the Intellec system bus.
The interface board validates data during reads
using a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) polynomial
and generates CRC data during write operations.
When the diskette controller requires access to the
Intellec system memory, the interface board requests and maintains DMA master control of the
system bus, and generates the appropriate memory
command.

maintained over a separate 8-bit bidirectional data
bus. Connectors for the four devices named above,
as well as the two serial channels, are mounted directly on the IOC itself.

Control
User control is maintained through a front panel,
consisting of a power switch and indicator,reset/
boot switch, run/halt light and eight interrupt
switches and LED indicators. The front panel circuit
board is attached directly to the IPC-85, allowing the
eight interrupt switches to connect the master
8259A, as well as to the Intellec Series III bus.
User program control in the iAPX 88/86 environment
of the Intellec Series III is also directed through keyboard control sequences to transfer control to the
iAPX 88/86 applications debugger, abort a user program or translator and returning control to the
IPC-85.

DISK SYSTEM
Integral Floppy Disk Drive
The integral floppy disk is controlled by an Intel 8271
single chip, programmable floppy disk controller.
The disk provides capacity of 250K bytes. It transfers
data via an Intel 8257 DMA Controller between an
IOC RAM buffer and the diskette. The 8271 handles
reading and writing of data, formatting diskettes,
and reading status, all upon appropriate commands
from the IOC microprocessor.

Hard Disk System (Option)
The Intellec Series III Hard Disk System provides
direct access bulk storage, intelligent controller and
a disk drive containing one fixed platter and one
removable cartridge. Each provides approximately
3.65 million bytes of storage with a data transfer rate
of 2.5 Mbits/second. The controller is implemented
with Intel's Series 3000 Bipolar Microcomputer Set.
The controller provides an interface to the Intellec
Series III system bus, as well as supporting up to 2
disk drives. The disk system records all data in Double Frequency (FM) on 2 surfaces per platter. Each
platter can be write protected by a front panel
switch.

Dual Drive Floppy Disk System (Option)
The Intellec Series III Double Density Diskette System provides direct access bulk storage, intelligent
controller and two diskette drives. Each drive
provides 1/2 million bytes of storage with a data
transfer of 500,000 bits/second. The controller is
implemented with Intel's powerful Series 3000 Bipolar Microcomputer Set. The controller provides an
interface to the Intellec Series III system bus, as well
as supporting up to four diskette drives to allow
more than 2 million bytes of on-line storage.
An additional cable and connectors are also
supplied to optionally convert the integral floppy
disk from single density to double density.

11-15

HARD DISK CONTROLLER BOARDS
The disk controller consists of two boards which
reside in the Intellec Series III system chassis. The
disk system is capable of performing six operations:
recalibrate, seek, format track, write data, read data,
and verify CRC: In addition to supporting a second
drive, the disk controller may co-exist with the
double-density diskette controller to allow up to 17
million bytes of on-line storage.

MULTIBUS™ Interface Capability
All models of the Intellec Series III implement the
industry standard MULTIBUS protocol. The MULTIBUS architecture allows several bus masters, such
as CPU and DMA devices, to share the bus and
memory by operating at different priority levels.
Resolution of bus exchanges is synchronized by a
bus clock signal derived independently from processor clocks. Read/write transfers may take place
at rates up to 5 MHz. The bus structure is suitable for
use with any Intel microcomputer family.
AFN·01588A

inter

MODEL, 286

SPECIFICATIONS' ,

Hard Disk Drive Option

Host Processor Boards

DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS
-(DMA) Standard capability on the MULTIBUS bus;
implemented for us'erselected DMA devices
through optional DMA module
-Maximum transfer rate of 2 MHz

Type-5440 top loading cartridge .and one fixed
platter
Tracks per Inch-200
Mechanical Sectors per Track-12
Recording Technique-double frequency (FM)
Tracks per Surface-400
Density-2,200 bits/inch
Bits 'per Track-62,500
Recording Surfaces per Platter-2
Capacity'Per Surface-15M bits
Per Platter-29M bits
Per Drive-59M bits
Per Drive"':"'7.3M bytes (formatted)
Transfer Rate-2.5M bits/sec
Access TimeTrackto Track: 13 ms max
Full Stroke: 100 ms
Rotational Speed: 2,400 rpm

Integral Floppy Disk '.

Physical Characteristics

Capacity-250K bytes (forniatted)
Transfer Rate-160K bits/sec
Access Time- .
Track to Track: '10 ms max,
Average Random Positioning: 260 ns
Rotational Speed: 360 rpm.
,Average flotational Latency: 83 ms
Recording Mode: FM

Width-17.37 in. (44.12 cm)
Height-15.81 in. (40.16 cm)
Depth-19.13 in. (48.59 cm)
Weight-81 lb. (37 kg)

INTEGRATED PROCESSOR CARD
-(IPC-85) 8085A-2 based, operating at 4 MHz
-64K RAM, 4K ROM (2K in monitor and 2K in boot!
diagnostic)'
,
RESIDENT PROCESSOR BOARD
-(RPB-86) 8086 based, operating at 5 MHz, 64K
RAM, 16K ROM (applications debugger)
,
BUS
-MULTIBUS bus, maximum transfer rate of 5 MHz

Dual Floppy Disk Option
CapacityP~r Disk: 4,1 megabits (formatted)
Per Track: 53,2 kilobits (formatted)
Transfe,r Rate-500 kilobits/sec
Access TimeTrack to Track: 10 ms
Head Setting Time: 1,0 ills
Average Random Positioning Time-260 ms
Rotational Speed-360 rpm
Average Rotational Latency: 83 ms
Recording Mode: M2 FM

KEYBOARD
Width-'17.37 in. (44.12 cm)
Height-3.0 in. (7.6 cm)
Depth-9.0 in. (22.86 cm)
Weight-6 lb. (3 kg)
DUAL FLOPPY DRIVE SYSTEM (OPTION)
Width-16.88 in. (42.88 cm)
Height-12.08 in. (30.68 cm)
Depth-1.0 in. (48.26 cm)
Weight-64 lb. (29 kg)
HARD DISK DRIVE SYSTEM (OPTiON)
Width-18.5 in. (47.0 cm)
Height-34.0 in. (86.4 cm)
Pepth-29.75 in, (75,6 cm)
Weight-202 lb. (92 kg)

11-16

AFN-Ql588A

inter

MODEL 286

Intellec Series III Microcomputer Development System Console Operating Instructions, 121609

ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
DC Power Supply

Intellec Series III Microcomputer Development System Pocket Reference, 121610
Intellec Series III Microcomputer Development System Programmer's Reference, 121618

Typical
System
Requirements

Volts
Supplied

Amps
Supplied

+ 5 ± 5%

30.0

17.0

+12 ± 5%

2.5

1.1

-12 ± 5%

0.3

0.1

-10 ± 5%

1.0

0.08

+15±5%'

1.5

+24 ± 5%'

1.7

iAPX 88186 Family Utilities User's Guide for 8086Based Development Systems, 121616
80861808718088 Macro Assembly Language Refer·
ence Manual for 8086-Based Development Systems,
121627
.
80861808718088 Macro ASSembly Language. Pocket
Reference, 9800749
80861808718088 Macro Assembler Operating Instructions for 8086-Based Development Systems,
121628

Not available on bus

AC Requirements for Mainframe

Intellec Series III Microcomputer Development System Installation and Checkout Manual, 121612

110V, 60 Hz-5.9 Amp
220V, 50 Hz-3.0 Amp

Intellec Series III Microcomputer Development System Schematic Drawings, 121642

ENVIRONMENAL CHARACTERISTICS

ISIS-II CREDIT (CRT-Based Text Editor) User's
Guide, 9800902
ISIS-II CREDIT (CRT-Based Text Editor) Pocket Reference, 9800903

System Operating Temperature-O°C to 35°C (32°F
to 95°F)

The 8086 Family User's Manual, 9800722

Humidity-20% to 80%

The 8086 Family User's Manual, Numeric Supplement, 121586

DOCUMENTATION SUPPLIED

For Series III Plus Hard Disk Systems Only:

Intellec Series III Microcomputer Development System Product Overview, 121575

Model 740 Hard Disk Subsystem Operation and
Checkout, 9800943

ORDERING INFORMATION

DS287FD KIT

Part Number

Description

D8286 KIT

Intellec Series III Model 286 Microcomputer Development System
(110V/60Hz)

DS287 KIT

DS286FD KIT

Intellec Series III Model 287 Microcomputer Development System
(220V/50Hz)
Intellec Series III Model 286 Microcomputer Development System with
Dual Double Density Flexible Disk
System (110V/60Hz)

11-17

Intellec Series III Model 287 Microcomputer Development System with
Dual Double Density Flexible Disk
System (220V/50Hz)

DS286HD KIT Intellec Series III Model 286 Microcomputer Development System with
Pedestal Mounted Hard Disk.
(110V/60Hz)
DS287HD KIT Intellec Series III Model 287 Microcomputer Development System with
Pedestal Mounted Hard Disk.
(220V/50Hz)
Requires Software License

AFN·01588A

MODEL 290
NETWORK MANAGER
INTELLEC® NETWORK DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM-I (NOS-I)
• Provides a distributed development
system environment for Intellec®
microcomputer development system
users

ill Supports up to 8 workstations operating

• Supports all existing Intellec®
development systems as workstations:
Intellec® Model 800, Series 11/80, Series
11/85, and Series III models

• Provides substantial performance
enhancement for floppy disk-based
systems

concurrently
• Files stored on central hard disk shared
among workstations

• Functions as a Project Management tool
to increase programmer productivity and
coordinate large program development
• Shared background line printer

• Distributes the costs of central mass
storage among workstations
• Network Manager upgradeable from
either Intellec® Model 240 or Intellec®
Model 245

The Intellec® Network Development System-I (NDS-I) is designed to provide the user with tools necessary to
support a distributed development system environment. NDS-I enables up to eight Intellec development systems
to share both a common line printer and disk storage. Disk files may reside on either one or two central hard
disks, providing up to fifteen megabytes of storage capacity. The major component of NDS-I is the Network Manager which controls all communications between the workstations and the shared disk. The powerful multitasking operating system of the Network Manager provides public/private file control for all files resident on the hard
disk and printer sharing. As a project management tool, NDS-I helps coordinate the numerous program modules
common to large multi-man projects. Productivity is increased and development time is shortened. An upgrade
package is available to convert an existing Model 240 or 245 into a Network Manager.

11-18

121670·001RA

MODEL 290

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Hardware

Compon~nts

The NDS-I Network Manager consists of CRTchassis
with a 6-slot card cage, power supply, fans, cables,
single floppy diskette drive, a detachable full ASCII
keyboard and five printed circu it cards. A free standing pedestal houses the hard disk drive along with
power supply, fans, and cables for connection to the
main chassis. A block diagram of the Network
Manager is shown in Figure 1.
CPU
The master CPU card is bu ilt arou nd the 8085A-2 and
incl udes 64K bytes of on board memory, I/O, interrupt
and bus interface circuiting fashioned from Intel's
high technology components. Known as the integrated processor card (IPC), it occupies the first
slot in the cardcage. A second slave CPU card is
responsible for the CRTand keyboard interface. This
card, mounted on the rear panel, also contains its
own microprocessor, RAM and ROM memory, and I/O
interface logic. Known as the input/output controller
(IOC), .the slave CPU card communicates with the
IPC over an a-bit bidirectional data bus.
DISK CONTROLLER
The hard disk controller consists of two boards, the
channel board and the interface board, mounted in
the system cardcage. The channel board receives,

decodes and responds to channel commands from
the 8085A-2 in the Network Manager. The interface
board provides the disk controller with a means of
communication with the disk drives and with the
Intellec system bus. The interface board generates a
cyclical redundancy check polynomial and validates
data during reads using a CRC polynomial. When
the disk controller requires access to Intellec system
memory, the channel board requests and maintains
DMA master control of the system bus, and
generates the appropriate memory command. The
channel board also acknowledges I/O commands as
required by the Intellec bus. The disk controller supports one or two hard disk drives.
INTERCONNECT COMMUNICATION
An Interconnect Board (ICB), which occupies one
slot in each workstation and the Network Manager
cardcage, provides the communications interface
between the workstations and the Network
Manager. The ICB is a MULTIBUS™ bus compatible
board with an 8085 microprocessor, 1.25 kbytes of
RAM,4 kbytas of ROM and seven I/O ports. The ICB
accepts a command from the master CPU, executes
the command without intervention by the master
CPU, and signals completion by setting a flag and
generating a MULTIBUS™ bus interrupt. The ICB
moves data between the workstations and the Network Manager with a burst of data transfer rate of 40
kbytes per second.

TO WORKSTAnON

INTERCONNECT
BOARD

TOPIO
BUS

Figure 1. Intellec NDS-I Network Manager Block Diagram

11-19

AFN·01595A

inter

MODEL 290

INTEGRAL CRT
The CRT is a 12·inch raster scan type monitor with a
50/60Hz vertical scan rate and 15.5kHz horizontal
scan rate. Controls are prov'ided for brightness and
contrast adjustments. The interface to the CRT is
provided through an Intel 8275 single·chip program·
mabie CRT controller. The master processor on the
IPC transfers a character for display to the IOC.
where it is stored in RAM. The CRT controller reads a
line at a time into its line buffer through an Intel 8257
DMA controller and then feeds one character at a
time to the character generator to produce the video
signal. Timing for the CRT control is provided by an
Intel 8253 interval timer. The screen display is for·
matted as 25 rows of 80 characters. The full set of
ASCII characters is displayed, including lower case
letters.

FLOPPY DISK DRIVE
The integral single density floppy disk drive is
controlled by an Intel 8271 single·chip, program·
mabie floppy disk controller. The 8271 transfers data
via an Intel 8257 DMA controller between an IOC
RAM buffer and the diskette. The 8271 performs
reading and writing of data, formatting diskettes,
and reading status commands from the IOC
processor.

Software Components

KEYBOARD
The keyboard interfaces directly to the IOC proces·
sor via an 8·bit data bus. The keyboard contains an
Intel UPI·41 Universal Peripheral Interface, which
scans the keyboard, encodes the characters, buf·
fers the characters and provides N·key rollover. The
keyboard itself is a typewriter style keyboard
containing the full ASCII character set. An up·
per/lower case switch allows the system to be used
for document preparation. Cursor control keys are
also provided.

Included with theModel290 is the Network Manager
operating system that controls all communications
between the workstations and the shared hard disk.
The operating system software provides concurrent
disk input/output, communications, and file manage·
ment, and offers substantial workstation per·
formance enhancements compared to standalone,
floppy disk·based development systems. The Net·
work Manager operating system provides
public/private file control for all files resident on the
hard disk. The public/private file control provides a
useful project management tool to help coordinate
the numerous programmers and modules common
to large development projects.

SPECIFICATIONS

Disk Performance

Disk Drive
Type-5440 top loading cartridge and one fixed
platter
Tracks per inch-200
Mechanical Sectors per Track-12
Recording Technique-double frequency (FM)
Tracks per Surface-400
Density-2,200 bitslinch
Bits per Track-62,500
Recording Surfaces per Platter-2

Disk Transfer Rate-2.5M bits/sec
Disk System Access Time
Track to Track: 13 ms max
Full Stroke: 100 ms
Rotational Speed: 2,400 rpm

Diskette
Diskette System Capacity-250K bytes (formatted)
Diskette System Transfer Rate-160K bits/sec
Diskette System Access Time
Track to Track: 10 ms max
Average Random Positioning: 260ms
Rotational Speed: 360 rpm
Average Rotational Latency: 83 ms
Recording Mode: FM

Disk System Capacity
Per
Per
Per
Per

Surface-15M bits
Platter-29M bits
Drive-59M bits
Drive-7.3M bytes (formatted)

11·20

AFN·01595A

intel·

MODEL 290

Physical Characteristics

Environmental Characteristics

Width-17.37 in. (44.12 cm)
Height-15.81 in. (40.1.6 cm)
Depth-19.13 in. (48.59 cm)
Weight-73 lb. (33 kg)

Operating Temperature-16°C to 32°C (90°F)
Humidity-20% to 80%

Equipment Supplied
Model 225 Chassis
Integrated Processor Card
I/O Controller Board
CRTand Keyboard
Model 740 Hard Disk Drive
Two Hard Disk Controller Boards with Cables
Disk Cartridge
NDS-I Interconnect Board with Cable
Two NDS-I Line Terminators
ROM Resident System Monitor
Network Manager Operating System
Network Manager Diagnostics

KEYBOARD
Width-17.37 in. (44.12 cm)
Height-3.0 in. (7.62 cm)
Depth:-9.0 in. (22.86 cm)
Weight-6 lb. (3 kg)

DISK DRIVE ON PEDESTAL
Width-18.5 in. (47.0 cm)
Height-34.0 in. (86.4 cm)
Depth-29.75 in (75.6 cm)
Weight-202 lb. (92 kg)

Reference Manuals

Electrical Characteristics
D.C. POWER SUPPLY
Supply
Voltage

Amps
Supplied

Typical
System
Requirements

+ 5 ±5%
+12±5%
-12±5%
-10±5%
+15±5%*
+24±5%"

30
2.5
0.3
1.0
1.5
1.7

17.0
1.1
0.1
0.08
1.5
1.7

"Not available on bus

Hard Disk Subsystem Operation and Checkout
Manual, 9800943.
Network Manager Console Operating Instructions,
121645.

Optional Equipment
Model 595 NDS-I Workstation Interconnect
Package: Includes Interconnect board
and workstation software to convert any
Model 800, Series 11180, Series 11/85, or
Series III to a NDS-I workstation.
Model 596 NDS-110 ft. Interconnect Cable
Model 597 NDS-I 20 ft. Interconnect Cable

A.C. REQUIREMENTS
FOR MAINFRAME AND 2 DRIVES
110V, 60Hz-16 Amp (Mainframe =5.9 Amp)
(Drive =5.0 Amp)
220V, 50Hz-8.6 Amp (Mainframe =3.1 Amp)
(Drive =3.0 Amp)

Model 743 (110V) Add on hard disk unit with cables
and disk cartridge.
Model 744 (220V) Add on hard disk unit with cables
and disk cartridge.
Model 746 Box of 5 blank hard disk cartridges.

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

DS-290 (11 OV) NDS-I Network Manager: Includes
DS-291 (220V) network console with hard disk
subsystem, interconnect board,
internal cable, and Network
Manager software.

11·21

AFN'()1595A

Microcomputer
Development Systems
Options

EXPANSION CHASSIS
INTELLEC® SERIES II
MICROCOMPUTER DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM
• Four Expansion Slots for Intellec®
Series II Systems

• Cable Connectable to Main Intellec®
Bus

• Internal Power Supply

• Standard Intellec MULTIBUS™ with
Multi-Processor and DMA Capability

• Snug Fit Beneath All Intellec® Series II
Units

• Compatible with Standard Intellect
iSBC™ Expansion Modules

The Intellec Series II Expansion Chassis provides four expansion slots for use with Intellec Series II microcomputer development systems. With its own separate power supply, the expansion chassis may be fully
loaded with any boards needed to expand a user's Intellec Series II system. With the addition of the expansion
chassis, Intellec Series II Models 220 and 230 contain a total of ten slots, sufficient for any configuration
Intellec Series II system. The Intellec Series II Expansion Chassis is a compact chassis with a four slot
cardcage, power supply, fans, and cable assemblies. It is designed to fit under any Intellec Series II system,
connect directly to the system bus through an opening in the top of the chassis, and provide additional slots
for the system users. The power supply is linked directly to the main chassis power supply, allowing power to
flow to both chassis when the main power is turned on.

12-1

AFN·00822A

EXPANSION CHASSIS
SPECI FICATIONS

Environmental Characteristics

Physical Characteristics

Operating Temperature -

Width - 17.37 In. (44.12 cm)
Height - 4.81 in. (17.22 cm)
Depth - 19.13 in. (48.59 cm)
Weight - 42 lb. (19 kg)

0° to 35°C (95°F)

Equipment Supplied
Expansion chassis
Cables

Reference Manuals
9800550 - Intellec Series II Installation and Service
Guide (SUPPLIED)
9800554 - Intellec Series II Schematic Drawings
(SUPPLIED)

Electrical Characteristics
DC Power Supply
Volt.
Supplied

'Amps
Supplied

R~qulrements

+ S±5%
+ 12:!:5%

24
2.0
0.3
1.0

None
None
None
None

-12:1:5%
-10:1:5%

AC Requirements -

System

50·60 Hz, 115/230V AC.

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

MDS-201*

Intellec® Series II
Expansion Chassis

'MOS is an ordering code only and is not used asa product name or trademark. MOS" is a registered trademark of Mohawk Data Science.

12-2

AFN-QOB22A

intel~
MODEL 503
DOUBLE DENSITY UPGRADE KIT FOR
INTELLEC® MICROCOMPUTER DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM

• Converts integral single density drive of
Model 220 or Model 240 system to
double density, doubling the data
capacity from 114 to 112 million bytes

• Associated software and hardware
supports up to three double density
drives, providing up to 1112 million bytes
in one system

• Data recorded on double density flexi·
ble disk is in soft sectored format which
allows 112 million bytes data capacity
with up to 200 files per flexible disk

• Provides total data compability with
other Intellec® Double Density Flexible
Disk Systems

The Double Density Upgrade Kit Model 503 provides an easy, cost effective method to convert the integral single density drive of Model 220 or Model 240 system to double density. In addition to doubling the data capacity, the upgrade kit
maximizes the ease of data transportability between Intellec® Double Density Flexible Disk Systems.

12-3

MODEL 503 DOUBLE DENSITY UPGRADE KIT
SPECIFICATIONS

Electrical Characteristics

Equipment Supplied

Channel Board

5V @ 3.75 (typ), 5A (max)
- Floppy Disk Controller Channel Board
Interface Board

Double Density Floppy Disk Interface Board

Dual Auxiliary Board Connector
Double Density Controller Cable
Double Density Integral Drive Cable
ISIS-II Double Density System Disk

5V @ 1.5A (typ), 2.5A (max)
-10V @ 0.1A (typ), 0.2A (max)

Environmental Characteristics
Controller Boards

Hardware
Double Density Specified Flexible Disk
One Recording Surface
Soft Sector Format M2FM
77 TrackslDiskette
52 SectorslTrack
128 Bytes/Sector

Temperature:
Operating:
0 to 55°C
Non-Operating: -55°C to 85°C
Humidity:
Operating:

Up to 95% relative humidity without condensation

Non-Operating: All conditions without condensation of water or frost.

Physical Characteristics
Mounting-Requires two slots of system card cage

Reference Manuals

Height- 6.75 in. (17.15mm)
Width -12.00 in. (30.48mm)
Depth - 0.50 in. (1.27mm)

DOS Hardware Reference Manual
Reference Schematics
Installation Instructions

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

MDS-503*

Integral drive Single density to .
double density upgrade kit
.

·"MDS" is an ordering code only, and is not used as a product
name or trademark. MDS® is a registered trademark of
Mohawk Data Sciences Corp.

12-4

9800422
9800425
121505

MODEL 505
INTEGRATED PROCESSOR CARD
• High Performance 8085A-2 Based
Integrated Processor Card Upgrades
Intellec® Series II Microcomputer
Development Systems to the
Performance of Series 11/85 Systems

• Single Electronic Board with 8085A-2
CPU, 64K Bytes RAM and 4K Bytes ROM
• Increases Card Slot Availability on
the Intellec® Series II Microcomputer
Development System

• Additional Functions Available Through
MULTIBUS™ Interface-'
- Local Interrupt Controller
- Programmable Interval Timer
- Two Channels of USARTs

• Fully Software Compatible with the
8080-Based Integrated Processor
Board

The Intellec'" Series 11/85 Model-505lntegrated Processor Card (lPC) is a single board upgrade for all 8080based Intellec Series II Microcomputer Development Systems. The IPC is an 8085A-2 based CPU board
which contains 64K bytes of RAM, 4K bytes of ROM, two 8259 interrupt controllers, two 8251 USARTs, al'l
8253 interval timer, MULTIBUS™ compatible interface, and special interfaces to the Intellec Series II
Microcomputer Development System. The IPC is fully software compatible with the8080-based integrated
processor board.
"

12-5

01530A

MODEL 505

Higher Speed-The IPB uses an 8080A-2
microprocessor with a 23.4000 MHz crystal to
derive a clock cycle time of 384.6nsec, and
executes with one wait state on memory read
cycles, and 2 wait states on memory write cycles.
The IPC uses an 8085A-2 microprocessor with an
8.0000 MHz crystal to derive a clock cycle time of
250nsec, and runs with the same number of wait
states as the IPB. The IPC thus provides an
increase in processing speed of approximately
54% over the IPB. The overall system throughput
improves correspondingly. However, the amount
of improvement is a function of the type and the
length of the programs being executed, as well as
the type of storage devices attached to the
system.

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Hardware Components
The heart of the IPC is an Intel NMOS 8-bit
microprocessor, the 8085A-2, running at 4.0 MHz.
64K bytes of RAM memory are provided on the
board using 16K RAM chips. 4K of ROM is provided, preprogrammed with system bootstrap
"self-test" diagnostics and the Intellec Series
11185 System Monitor. The eight-level vectored
priority interrupt system allows interrupts to be
individually masked. Using Intel's versatile 8259A
interrupt controller, the interrupt system may be
user programmed to respond to individual needs.

SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS
The IPC provides two main advantages over its
predecessor, the 8080-based Integrated
Processor Board (IPB). The first advantage is the
higher processing speed. The second advantage
is that it provides twice the memory.

Saves One Card Slot Space-The IPC contains an
additional 32K bytes of RAM over the IPB, to provide a total of 64K bytes of system memory on one
card. The increased on-board RAM size frees up
. one slot in the card cage of the Series II. For a
typical user of ICE-86™ or ICE-88™ emulators, this
additional slot will eliminate the need to purchase
an expansion chassis.

SPECIFICATIONS

Interrupts

Host Processor (I PC)

Eight-level, maskable, nested priority interrupt
network initiated from front panel or user selected
devices.

Processor-8085A-2 based, operating at 4.0 MHz.
RAM-64K on the CPU card.
ROM-4K (2K in monitor, 2K in boot/diagnostic)
Bus-,,,MULTIBUS™ bus, maximum .transfer rate of
5MHz.
Clocks-Host processor crystal controlled at 4.0
MHz; bus clock, crystal controlled at
9.8304 MHz.

Direct Memory Access (DMA)
Standard capability on MULTIBUS™ interface;
implemented for user selected DMAdevices
through optional DMA module-maximum transfer
rate of 5 MHz.

I/O Interfaces
Two Serial 110 Channels, RS232C, at 110-9600
baud (asynchronous) or 150-56K baud (synchronous). Baud rates and serial format fully programmable using Intel 8251A USARTs. Serial
Channel 1 additionally provided with 20 mA current
loop. Parallel 110 interfaces provided for paper
tape punch, paper tape reader, printer, and
UPP-103 Universal PROM Programmer.

Memory Access Time
RAM-470 ns max
PROM-540 ns max
12·6

inter

MODEL 505

ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED

DC Power Supply

8085 Based Integrated Processor Card (lPC)

Voltage
Requirements
(Volts)

Worst Case
Current Requirements
(Amperes)

+ 5±5%
+ 12 ± 5%
-12 ± 5%
-10 ± 5%

4.2
0.5
0.2
0.02

DOCUMENTATION SUPPLIED
Intellec® Series II Model 22X123X Installation
Manual, 9800559
Intellec® Series II Hardware Reference Manual,
9800556

ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
Operating Temp.: Board Level
System Level
Humidity:

Intellec® Series Monitor Source Listing, 9800605

50 - 55°C
(41°F-131°F)
16 0 -32°C
(61 OF - 90°F)

Additional manuals may be ordered from any Intel
sales representative or distributor office, or from
Intel Literature Department, 3065 Bowers Avenue,
Santa Clara, California 95051.

20% to 80%

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part No.

Description

MDS-505*

Integrated Processor Card upgrade
package for Intellec® Series II
Microcomputer Development
System (110V 160Hz or 220V 150Hz).
Upgrades Models 220,221,230,231,
240, and 241 to the performance of
the 8085A-2 based systems.

"'MOS" is an ordering code only, and is not used as a product
name or trademark. MDS® is a registered trademark of
Mohawk Data Sciences Corp.

12·7

. MODEL 556 ,
iAPX 86 RESIDENT PROCESSOR BOARD PACKAGE
• High Performance 8086·Based CPU
Board for Increased Intellec®
Development System Performance and
iAPX 86188 Development Environment·

• Software Applications Debugger for
iAPX 86/88 User Programs
• Supports Full Range of iAPX 86/88·
resident, High·level Languages:
PL/M·86/88, PASCAL·86/88, and
FO RTRAN·86/88

• Upgrades Intellec® Series 11180, Series
1I/85,Model 800 Microcomputer
Development Systems to the
Functionality of Series III Systems

• Includes iAPX 86/88 Resident
Relocating Macro Assembler, Linker,
Locater and Librarian

• 96K Bytes of ,User Program RAM
Memory Available for iAPX 86188 User
Programs

• Dual·Processor Disk Operating System
Software with CRT·based Editor·

The Model 556 is a performance enhancement package for Intellec® Series 11/80, Series 11/85 and Model 800 (requires
Model 556E) Development Systems, specifically designed for iAPX 86/88 microprocessor development. The Model 556
includes two printed circuit boards (an iAPX 86-based CPU board and a 64K memory board), dual-processor disk
operating system software, CRT-based editor, iAPX 86/88 Resident Relocating Macro Assembler, Linker, Locater and
Librarian; software applications debugger for iAPX 86/88 user programs; and complete user documentation.,

12-8

AFN·01721A

MODEL 556

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Hardware Components

When the 8086 is executing a program, the 8-bit CPU offloads all 1/0 activity and operates as an intelligent 1/0
controller to double buffer data to and from the 8086.
The 8086 also provides an execution vehicle for 8086
and 8088 object code. An added benefit of two host
microprocessors is that 8-bit translations and applications are handled by the 8-bit CPU, and 16-bit translations and applications are handled by the 8086. This
feature provides complete compatibility for current
systems and means that software running on current
Intellec Development Systems will run on the new
system.

Resident Processor Board (RPB-86)- The heart of the
RPB-86 is an Intel 8086 16-bit HMOS microprocessor,
running at 5.0 MHz. 64K bytes of RAM memory is provided on the board with transparent refresh from the
Intel 8202 dynamic RAM controller. 16K bytes of ROM is
on board, preprogrammed with an iAPX 86/88 applications debugger. The debugger provides features necessary to debug and control execution of application software for the iAPX 86/88 microprocesors. The RPB-86
occupies two card slots in an Intellec cardcage. The
processors use interrupts for interprocessor communications.

High-Level Languages for iAPX 86/88- The Model 556
allows the current Intellec system user to take advantage of a breadth of new resident iAPX 86/88 high-level
languages: PUM 86/88, PASCAL 86/88, and FORTRAN
86/88. The iAPX 86/88· Resident Macro Assembler and
these high-level language compilers execute on the
8086 host CPU, thereby increasing system performance.

RAM Memory Board-The memory board contains 64K
bytes of read/write RAM memory and interfaces directly
to the Intellec system bus. Ref~esh hardware is provided
onboard for all the dynamic memory elements. Data buffering occurs for all data written to or read from the 64K
memory array.

Expanded Program Memory-By adding a Model 556 to
an existing Intellec Development System, 96K bytes of
user program RAM memory are made available for iAPX
86/88 programs. System memory is expandable by adding additional RAM memory modules. This, combined
with the two host CPU system architecture, dramatically
increases the processing power of the system.

SYSTEM FEATURES
The Model 556 offers many key advantages for iAPX
86/88 applications and Intellec Development Systems:
enhanced system performance through a dual host CPU
environment, a full spectrum of iAPX 86/88-resident
high-level languages, expanded user program space for
iAPX 86/88 programs, and a powerful high-level software
applications debugger for iAPX 86/88 microprocessor
software.

Software Applications Debugger- The RPB-86 contains
the applications debugger which allows iAPX 86/88 programs to be developed, tested, and debugged within the
Intellec system. The debugger provides a subset of InCircuit Emulator commands such as symbolic debugging, control structures and compound commands
specifically oriented toward software debug needs.

Dual Host CPU-The addition of a 16-bit 8086 to the
existing 8-bit host CPU increases iAPX 86/88 compilation speeds and provides for iAPX 86/88 code execution.

SPECIFICATIONS
Environmental Characteristics

Resident Processor Board (RPB-86):
8086 based, operating at 5.0 MHz
2 RAM - 64K bytes on the CPU board
ROM - 16K bytes (applications debugger)
Bus - MULTIBUS architecture; 5 MHz maximum
transfer rate

Operating Temperature: 0° to 35°C (32°F to 95°F)
Relative Humidity: To 90% without condensation

Equipment Supplied

Electrical Characteristics

iAPX 86 Resident Processor Board (RPB-86)
64K Byte RAM Memory Board
iAPX 86/88 Applications Debugger
Self-test Diagnostics
iAPX 86/88 Resident Macro Assembler and Utilities
Dual Processor Disk Operating System Software
CREDIT™ CRT-based text editor

DC POWER SUPPLY
Voltage
Requirements

Current Requirements
(Amperes Max.)

+5±5% Volts
+12±5%Volts
-12±5% Volts

8.6 A
1.0 A
0.05 A

12-9

AFN.Q1721A

MODEL 556

Documentation Supplied
Intel/ec Series 1/1 Microcomputer Development System
Product Overview, 1 2 1 5 7 5 ·
.

Intel/ec Series III Microcomputer Development System
Installation and Checkout Manual, 121612

Intel/ec Series III Microcomputer Development System
Console Operating Instructions, 121609

Intellec Series 11/ Microcomputer Development System
Schematic Drawings, 121642

Intellec Series III Microcomputer Development System
Pocket Reference, 121610

ISIS-II CREDIT (CRT-Based Text Editor) User's Guide,
9800902

Intellec Series 1/1 Microcomputer Development System
Programmer's Reference, 121618

ISIS-II CREDIT (CRT-Based Text Editor) Pocket Reference,9800903

iAPX 86/88 Family Utilities User's Guide for 8086-Based
Development Systems, 121616

The 8086 Family User's Manual, 9800722

B086/8087/80B8 Macro Assembly Language Reference
Manual for BOB6-Based Development Systems, 121627
B086/8087/B088 Macro Assembly Language
Reference, 9800749

Pocket

8086/8087/8088 Macro Assembler Operating Instructions for B086-Based Development Systems, 121628

The 8086 Family USfir's Manual, Numerics Supplement,
121586

Additional manuals may be ordered from any Intel sales
representative or distributor office, or from Intel Literature Department, 3065 Bowers Avenue, Santa Clara,
California 95051.

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number
MDS-556*

DS5561 KIT

essor board (IPC-85). This upgrade
package is for Intel.lec Series 11/80
Development Systems (110V/60 Hz or
220V/50 Hz) and upgrades all Intellec
Series 11/80 Models to the full performance and functionality of an Intellec
Series III Development System.

Description

Model 556 performance upgrade
package forlntellec Series 11/80, Series
11/85 Microcomputer Development Systems (110V/60 Hz or 220V/50 Hz). Spe·
cifically designed for iAPX 86/88 microprocessor development. Upgrades all
Intellec Series 11/80 and Series 11/85
models to the functionality of an Intellec
Series III Development System.
Performance package for Intellec Series
11/80 Microcomputer Development
Systems. Specifically designed for iAPX
86/88 microprocessor development. The
5561 package consists of the Model 556
software and hardware performance
package, and the integrated 8085 proc-

12-10

MDS-556E*

Performance package for Intellec Model
800 Microcomputer Development
Systems. Specifically designed for iAPX
86/88 microprocessor development.
Upgrades Model 800 to the functionality
of an Intellec Series III.

*"MDS" is an ordering code only, and is not used as a product name or
trademark. MDS is a registered trademark of Mohawk Data Sciences

Corp.

AFN-01721A

MODEL 590
NETWORK MANAGER UPGRADE PACKAGE
INTELLEC® NETWORK DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM-I (NDS-I)
• Upgrades either Intellec® Model 240 or
Intellec® Model 245 to a NOS-I Network
Manager
• Provides a distributed development
system environment for Intellec®
microcomputer development system
users
• Supports all existing Intellec®
development systems as workstations:
Intellec® Model 800, Series 11/80, Series
11/85, and Series III models
• Shared background line printer

• Functions as a Project Management tool
to increase programmer productivity and
coordinate large program development
• Supports up to 8 workstations operating
concurrently
• Files stored on central hard disk shared
among workstations
• Provides substantial performance
enhancement for floppy disk-based
systems
• Distributes the cost of central mass
storage among workstations

The Intellec® Network Oevelopment System (NOS-I) is designed to provide the user with tools necessary to
support a distributed development system environment. NOS-I enables up to eight Intellec development systems to share both a common line printer and disk storage. Oisk files may reside on either one or two central
hard disks, providing up to fifteen megabytes of storage capacity.
The major component of NOS-I is the Network Manager which controls all communications between the
workstations and the shared disk. The powerful multitasking operating system of the Network Manager
provides public/private file control for all files resident on the hard disk. Printer sharing operates as a background task concurrent with other NOS-I operations.
As a project management tool, NOS-I helps coordinate the numerous program modules common to large
mUlti-man projects. Productivity is increased and development time is shortened. This upgrade package converts an existing Model 240 or 245 into a NOS-I Network Manager.

12·11

12167().OOlRA

MODEL 590

ICB moves data between the workstations and the
Network Manager with a burst of data transfer rate
of 40 kbytes per second.

COMPONENTS
The NDS-I Network Manager upgrade package consists of an interconnect board, internal cable, line
terminators, and Network Manager software. A
block diagram of the Network Manager is shown in
Figure 1.

Software Components
Included with the Model 590 is the Network Manager
operating system which controls all communications between the workstations and the shared hard
disk. The operating system software provides concurrent disk input/output, communications, and file
management. It offers substantial workstation performance enhancement compared to standalone,
floppy disk-based development systems. The Network Manager operating system provides
public/private file control for all files resident on the
hard disk. The public/private file control is a useful
project management tool to help coordinate the
numerous programmers and modules common to
large development projects.

Interconnect Communications
An Interconnect Board (ICB), which occupies one
slot in the Network Manager and each workstation,
provides the communications interface between the
workstations and the Network Manager. The ICB is a
MULTIBUS™ compatible board with an 8085 microprocessor, 1.25 kbytes of RAM and 4 kbytes of
ROM. The ICB accepts a command from the master
CPU, executes the command without intervention
by the master CPU, and signals completion by setting a flag and generating a Multibus interrupt. The

TO WORKSTATION
INTERCONNECT

BOARD

INTERCONNECT
BOARD

HARD
DISK

CONTROLLER

80SSA
CPU
64K RAM
4K ROM

A
B
L
E

B
U
S
MULTIBUS'" BUS

TOPIO
BUS

Figure 1. Inteliec® NDS-I Network Manager Block Diagram
12-12

AFN.Q1S94A

intel'

MODEL 590

SPECIFICATIONS

Model 596 NOS-I 10 ft. Interconnect Cable
Model 597 NOS-I 20 ft. Interconnect Cable

Equipment Supplied
Interconnect Board
Internal Cable
Two NOS-I Line Terminators
Network Manager Operating System
Network Manager Oiagnostics

Optional Equipment
Model 595 NOS-I Workstation Interconnect
Package: Includes Interconnect board
and workstation software to convert any
Model BOO, Series II/BO, Series 11/85, or
Series III to a NOS-I workstation.

Model 743 (11 OV) Add on hard disk unit with cables
and disk cartridge.
Model 744 (220V) Add on hard disk unit with cables
and disk cartridge.
Model 746 Box of 5 blank hard disk cartridges.

Reference Manuals
Network Manager Console Operating Instructions,
121645.

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

MOS'-590

NOS-I Network Manager Upgrade
Package: Includes interconnect
board, internal cable, and Network
Manager software .

• MDS is an ordering code only and is not used as a product name or trademark. MDS is a registered trademark of Mohawk Data Sciences
Corp.

12·13

AFN·D1594A

inter

MODEL 810
SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT MODULE

• Adds text entry, assembly, and debug
to iSBC™ configurations.
• ROM-based Editor, Assembler, and
Monitor provide resident software
development and debugging.
• User selects standard chassis and
Intel CPU board to host development
software module.
• Symbolic Assembler produces
absolute code for immediate loading
and execution.

• Low-cost, software development
capability for Intel iSBC™ 80/1 OB,
80/24, and 80/30 Single Board
Computers.

• Development software fits easily into
user-defined Intel 8080/8085 iSBC™
configuration by residing on standard
iSBC™ 464 Memory Expansion Board.

• Monitor debugger modifies and
dumps memory and registers; sets
breakpoints.

The Model 810 Software Development Module provides complete software development capability for
Intel single board computers. By inserting the standard iSBC™ memory expansion board into an Intel
8080/8085 user-defined iSBC system, you gain text entry, assembly and debug capability in your application system. (See figure 1.) After using the Model 810 to develop and debug your application, the board
may be left in the system to be re-used or removed to give a complete, self-contained single board
computer application.
The 8080/8085 Symbolic Assembler is a subset of Intel's full 8080/8085 Assembler used on Intellec®
Microcomputer Development Systems. Source code is entered from a user-supplied console (ASR 33
Teletype or equivalent), and debugging is done by a ROM-based Monitor for either the iSBC 80/1 DB,
80/20-4,80/24, or 80/30 Single Board Computer. After assembly and execution, completed programs may
be punched to paper tape for archiving and later programmed into PROM.

12·14

121599-001 Rev. A

inter

MODEL 810

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

SOFTWARE COMPONENTS

System Environment.

The Model 810 has three software components:

The Software Development Module lets you put
together your own single-board-computer-based
development system with standard off-the-shelf
Intel products: an Intel CPU board, chassis and
the Model 810 Software Development Module. The
system is ideal for low-cost editing, assembling
and debugging of small program modules.

Text Editor allows you to enter and update
your programs from the TTY terminal; and
when you have completed your editing session, your program may be saved on paper
tape. All Editor commands are single
character to save typing time.
Assembler allows symbolic program
development. The Assembler translates the
source code into object code for execution.
The object code may be stored on paper tape
or in RAM for intermediate testing.

HARDWARE COMPONENTS

Debug Monitor controls input and. output and
provides you with debugging capability. It
allows you to examine register and memory
locations and interrupt the program at userspecified breakpoints. The three monitor
variants are: 1) iSBC 80/10B (8080 CPU),
2) iSBC 80/20-4 (8080 CPU), iSBC 80/24 (8085
CPU), 3) iSBC 80/30 (8085 CPU) Single Board
Computers.

The Model 810 is a modified iSBC 464 Memory
Expansion Board that includes nine 2K-byte
ROM's containing the Text Editor and 8080/8085
Assembler. Also supplied are three separate
2K-byte ROM's, each containing a debug monitor
for one of the three variants of CPU boards supported. The three Monitor ROM's are included to
allow selection of the appropriate monitor for the
processor board in the user's system. The user
must also provide'a chassis, 16K RAM (iSBC 016 or
on-board 80/30 memory), an ASR 33 Teletype or
equivalent, an iSBC 530 Teletype Adapter (for
iSBC 80/20-4, 80/24, and 80/30 Single Board Computers), and an iSBC 955 (or equivalent) RS232C
Serial I/O Cable Set.

INPUT /OUTPUT
The standard interface enables input/ouput of
data from the TTY keyboard, printer, and paper
tape read/punch.

"NOT REaUIRED WITH
iSBC80/10A OR 80/10B
PROCESSOR

SYSTEM CHASSIS

PROCESSOR BOARD

16K
RAM MEMORY
BOARD"

• "NOT REQUIRED WITH
iSBC 80/30 PROCESSOR

InciudedinModel810

Figure 1. Model810 Software Development Module in Target System
12·15

AFN-01386A

inter

MODEL810

MEMORY

MONITOR COMMANDS

The user must provide a minimum of 16K of RAM
(iSBC 016 RAM Board. or on-board iSBC 80/30
RAM). All 110 requests are serviced through a
common RAM-board jump table stored in RAM.
The user may redefine symbol table buffer lengths
in RAM to fit a specific application.

Command

Operation

Memory Conlrol:
Display

Prints contents of specified range of
memory.

Insert

Inserts n'ew data into memory.

Move

Copies contents of specified portions of
memory into designated RAM locations.

Substitute

Modifies RAM on a byte-by·byte basis.

Prints and allows you to modify contents
of specified register(s}.

Paper Tape ItO Commands:

SYSTEM TEST
A Confidence Test is provided to perform a
checksum test of Monitor, Editor, and Assembler
ROM's, and a read Iwrite test of system RAM.

Read

Reads paper tape from reader and loads
data into memory at specified location.

Write

Punches on tape the contents of
specified memory area.

Program Execution Command:
Execute (Go)

Transfers control to your program at a
specified address. One or two breakpOints may optionally be set.

SPECIFICATIONS

I/O INTERFACES

ROM: 20K (2K Monitor, 4K Editor, 14K Assembler)

iSBC 80/10A and iSBC 80/10B boards provide 20
mA current loop for TTY. iSBC 80/20-4, iSBC 80/24,
and iSBC 80/30 boards require iSBC 530 TTY
Adapter to convert RS232C to 20 mA current loop.

Bus: Multibus interface compatible

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
HARDWARE REQUIRED
Choice of iSBC single board computer and iSBC
chassis as follows:
Single
Board Computer

iSBC 660 iSBC 655 iCSSO
Chassis Chassis Chassis

iSBC80/10B

iSBC 80/20-4

iSBC 80/24

iSBC 80/30

Also required:
iSBC 016 RAM Expansion Board (not required
with iSBC 80/30 Single Board Computer)
iSBC 955 RS232C Serial 1/0 Cable Set (or
equivalent)
iSBC 530 Teletype Adapter

Weight 294 gm (10.7 oz)
Length 30.48cm (12 in)
Height 17.15cm (6.75 in)
1.27cm (0.5 in)
Depth

ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
DC Power (max.)
Voltage: +5V DC ±5%
Current: 2.0 amps max.

EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED
Model 810: iSBC 464 board with nine ROM's containing the Text Editor and Assembler, and three
loose ROM's containing the Monitors (one ROM
for each CPU board monitor variant).

REFERENCE MANUALS
The following material is shipped with the product:

OPTIONAL HARDWARE SUPPORTED

121581

Model 810 Software Development Module
User's Guide
121582 Model 810 Software Development Module
Installation Manual
9800301 808018085 Assembly Language
Programming Manual

iSBC 80/10A Single Board Computer-interchangeable with iSBC 80/10B Single Board
Computer
iSBC 032 RAM Expansion Board (32K RAM)
12-16

AFN-01386A

MODEL 810

The following manuals for the single board computers and chassis used in the target system can
be ordered from Intel Corporation Literature
Department.

9800488 iSBC 032™ Random Access Memory
Board Hardware Reference Manual
9800643 iSBC 464™ PROM/ROM Board Hardware
Reference Manual
9800708 iSBC 604/614™ Cardcage Hardware
Reference Manual
9800298 iSBC 635™ Power Supply Hardware
Reference Manual
9800803 iSBC 640™ Power Supply Hardware
Reference Manual
9800709 iSBC 655™ System Chassis Hardware
Reference Manual
9800505 iSBC 660™ System Chassis Hardware
Reference Manual
9800799 iCS 80™ Industrial Chassis Hardware
Reference Manual
9800798 iCS 80™ Industrial System and Installation
Guide

9800230 iSBC 80/10A'M Single Board Computer
Hardware Reference Manual
9803119 iSBC 80/10B n , Single Board Computer
Hardware Reference Manual
9800317 iSBC 80/20-4TM Single Board Computer
Hardware Reference Manual
142648 iSBC 80/24™ Single Board Computer
Hardware Reference Manual
9800611 iSBC 80/30TM Single Board Computer
Hardware Reference Manual
9800279 iSBC 016™ 16K RAM Expansion Board
Hardware Reference Manual

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part No.

MDS-810*

Description

Software Development Module. ROM
based editor, symbolic assembler,
and debug monitor provide complete development support when
combined with user's target iSBC
8080/8085 system .

• "MOS" is an ordering code only, and is not used as a product
name or trademark. MDS® is a registered trademark of
Mohawk Data Sciences Corp.

12·17

AFN-01386A

inter

MAINFRAME LINK FOR
DISTRIBUTED DEVELOPMENT

• Integrates user mainframe resources
with Intellec® Development Systems.

• Software runs under ISIS-II on any
Intellec® Development System.
• Communicates with remote systems on
dedicated or switched (dial-up)
telephone lines.

• Uses IBM 2780/3780 standard BISYNC
protocol supported by a majority of
mainframes and minicomputers.

• Package also includes tests and a
connector for loop-back self-test
capability.

• Protocol supports full error detection
with automatic retry.

The Mainframe Link consists of software, modem cable to connect the development system to the modem and
a loopback connector for diagnostic testing. The software runs under ISIS-lion Intellec Development Systems. It emulates the operation of an IBM 2780 or 3780 Remote Job Entry (RJE)terminal to (1) transmit ISIS-II
files to a remote system or (2) receive files from a remote system using standard BISYNC 2780/3780 protocol.
The remote system can be any mainframe or minicomputer which supports the IBM 2780 or 3780 communications interface standard. Files may contain ASCII or binary data so that either program source files (ASCII) or
program object files (binary) may be transmitted.
The Mainframe Link allows the user to integrate in-house mainframe resources with Intellec Microcomputer
Development resources. The mainframe can be used for storage, maintenance and management of program
source and object files. The program source can be downloaded to a development system for compilation,
assembly, linkage, and/or location. The linked modules can be transmitted and saved on the mainframe to be
shared by all programmers. The linked program can then be downloaded to a development system for
debugging using ICE emulation.

12·18

121633-Q1A

intel'

MAINFRAME LINK

FEATURES

Automatic translation from ASCII to EBCDIC
and vice versa

• Runs under ISIS-II on any Intellec® Microcomputer Development System.
• Communicates with a remote system using IBM
2780/3780 standard BISYNC protocol, which is
supported by a majority of minicomputers and
mainframes, on dedicated or switched (dial-up)
telephone lines.
• The modem cable supplied with the package can
be used to connect the Intellec® Development
System to the modem (or modem eliminator)
using the standard RS232C port.
• Supports user selectable data transmission rates
of up to 9600 baud.
• Package includes diagnostic tests used to verify
the operation of the Intellec® Development System using the loop-back connector supplied and
data transmission up to the modem using the
analog loop-back feature.
• System can be configured to match the requirements of the installation, i.e., using modem
eliminators for connections up to fifty (50) feet, or
by using modems and telephone lines.
• Software can be configured from several configuration options such as:
2780, 3780 or Intel Mode

Receive chaining for receiving multiple files
• Intel mode is used mainly for file transfers between two Intellec® Development Systems. The
files are duplicated exactly.
• Console commands support all standard features
including:
SEND data in Transparent or Non-transparent
mode, with or without translation to EBCDIC
RECEIVE in Transparent or Non-transparent
mode, with or without translation to EBCDIC.
Supportfor an IBM RJE console (such as HASP)
• Special utility programs are provided. STRZ strips
extra binary zero's from the end of object files.
CONSOl assigns system console input to an ISISII disk file.
• Can process commands interactively from the
console or sequentially from an ISIS-II file under
the SUBMIT facility for semi-automatic batch
operation.
• Error detection in line transmission and error recovery by automatic retransmission.
• A special command such as DIAGNOSE, allows
logging of all data activity on the line, during
transmission and reception.
• When not used for communicating with the mainframe, the Intellec® Development System is available as a complete, stand-alone system.

Transparent mode for binary data
Non-transparent mode for ASCII data

BENEFITS
• Allows the customer to use an in-house mainframe or minicomputer for program sourcepreparation, editing, back-up and maintenance
using inexpensive CRT's and multi-terminal access. The common files may be shared and others
protected.
• Many programmers can use and share the highperformance devices normally available on large
computer systems, e.g., fast printers to reduce
listing time, the large capacity disks with their fast
access time to store large program files.
• The source files can be downloaded using the
Mainframe Link to an Intellec Development System (e.g., Model 240 or 245) for compilation, linking and locating.

12-19

• The compiled and/or linked object files may be
transmitted back to the remote for storage. Updates and version numbers and dates can be
tracked to ensure that the latest version is always
used and back-up files are available. Binary object
files can be later downloaded to an Intellec Development System for debugging using an ICE
emulator.
• In short, provides a powerful and flexible tool
combining the best of both. micro and mainframe
worlds, i.e., powerful CPU with large disk capacity, file sharing, multi-terminal access, etc.,
from a mainframe or minicomputer with Intel's
versatile and compatible software support systems (including PLlM, PASCAL, FORTRAN, Assembler, R & l) and sophisticated debugging
tools such as ICE emulators.

AFN·Ol549A

intel'

MAINFRAME LINK

SPECIFICATIONS

Remote System Requirements

Operating Environment

• IBM 2780/3780 BISYNC protocol as supported by
a majority of mainframes and minicomputers including: all IBM-360/370 Systems, PDP-11/70,
VAX-11/780, Data General ECLIPSE.

Required Hardware:
Intellec® Microcomputer Development System
Model 800
Models 220, 225, 230, 235, 240 or 245
64KB of Memory
One Diskette Drive
Single or Double Density

• Users should purchase this standard software
package from the remote system vendor and any
additional required hardware such as a synchronous communications interface.
• The operating system at the remote must be configured (SYSGEN'ed) with correct options such as
line address, 2780 or 3780, ...

Communication Equipment Requirements

System Console
Intel CRT or non-Intel CRT

The Inteliec Development System may be connected
to the remote system using anyone of the following
methods:

Recommended Hardware for Compilation:

• For short distances (up to 50 feet), use a synchronous modem eliminator (e.g.,SPECTRON
ME-81 FS-2).

Hard Disk (Models 240, 245, or Model 740 Upgrade)
Additional Hardware Required for Model 800
iSBC-955™, iSBC-534™

• For distances up to four miles, use short haul
synchronous modems and telephone lines.

Required Software:

• For distances greater than four miles, use synchronous modems and telephone lines. The following BELL modems or their equivalents are
recommended:

ISIS-II Diskette Operating System
Single or Double Density

BELL 201 C 2400 bits/second
(half duplex, switched line)
BELL 208A 4800 bits/second
(full duplex, leased line)
BELL 208B 4800 bits/second
(half duplex, switchedline)
BELL 209A 9600 bits/second
(full duplex, leased line)

Documentation Package
Mainframe Link. User's Guide (121565-001 )

Shipping Media
Flexible Diskettes
Single and Double Density

• Modems at either end must be compatible.

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

*MDS-384 Kit

Mainframe Link for
Distributed Development

*MDS is an ordering code only and is not used as a product name or trademark.
MDS® is a registered trademark of Mohawk Data Sciences Corporation.

12-20

AFN·01549A

CREDIT™
CRT-BASED TEXT EDITOR
MICROCOMPUTER DEVELOPMENT SYSTEMS
• Provides Interactive Editing of ASCII
Text Files

• Displays Full Page of Text

• CRT Screen Display with Cursor-Based
Editing Using Single Character
Commands for Insertion, Deletion,
Page Forward and Backward

• Dynamic Macro Command Definition

• Command Line Editing with String
Search, Deletion, Insertion and Move

• Operates Under the ISIS-II Operating
System on Intellec® and Intellec®
Series II Microcomputer Development
Systems

CREDIT is a CRT-based text editor that aids in the creation and editing of ASCII text files on Intellec Microcomputer Development Systems. Once the text has been edited to the programmer's satisfaction, it can
be directed to the appropriate language processor for compilation, assembly or interpretation. CREDIT
features are easy to use and simplify the change or rearrangement of text files. CREDIT runs under ISIS-II
on any Intellec or Intellec Series II Microcomputer Development System with an Intel supplied CRT, disk
drive(s) and 64K bytes of memory. Alternatively, it may be configured to run with non-Intel CRTs
supporting cursor controls.
There are two editing modes in CREDIT: a screen mode and a command line mode. The screen mode
makes full use of the display characteristics of the CRT. The cursor position is visible on the screen and
can be positioned by use of the cursor control keys. Display text can be corrected in two ways-either by
simply retyping the text, or by using the single-stroke control keys. Specifically, the single-character control keys are used for change, deletion, insertion and paging forward and page backward.
·In addition to screen editing, there is command line editing, whiQh includes commands for more powerful
and complex editing tasks. Some examples of functions available in the command line mode are search,
block move and copy, macro definition and manipulation of external files. These easily used, high-level
commands facilitate complex editing and speed microcomputer development.

12-21

9800926·02 Rev. B

intJ

CREDIT™ EDITOR

CREDIT™ EDITOR FEATURES

• Change CREDIT features with ALTER command

• Two editing· m.odes: cursor-driven ·screen
editing and command line context editing

• Conditional iteration
• Use'r~defined tab settings
• Symbolic tag positions
• Automatic disk full warning

CRT Editing Includes:
• Displays full page of text
• Single control. key c.ommands for insertion,
deletion, page forward and backward
• Type~over correction and replacement· .
• Immediate feedback of the results of each
operation
• The current state of the text ·is always
represented on the display
Command Line Editing Includes:
• String search and substitute
• String delete, change or insert
•
•
•
•

Block move
Block copy.
User-defined macros'
External file handling

• Runs under ISIS-IISUBM.IT facility
• Option to exit at any time with original file intact
• HELP command

BENEFITS OF CREDIT™ EDITOR.
• Speeds source program creation and
editing-lowers the cost ofthese functions
• Easy to learn and use":":
-source text isclearly displayed'
-single command keys used for CRT editing
-HELP command is available' for easy
reference when needed
.
• Complements existing software - source text
us.ed for PLlM, pASCAL, FORTRAN, BASIC,
and Assemblers
• Aids in the management of source file libraries
• Offers full use of Intel supplied' CRT cursor
functions'

ISIS-II
LOADER

DEBUG
VIA
MONITOR

OPTIONAL
ICE'·
IN-CIRCUIT
EMULATOR

PROM
PROGRAMMER

Figure 1. Microcomputer Program Development
AFN-Ol083B

CREDIT™ EDITOR

SCREEN MODE COMMANDS
MOVE CU RSOR:

Use the directional arrow keys
on the keyboard.

REPLACE:

Type over existing text with
replacement new text.

INSERT:

Insert one character.
Insert more
character.

DELETE:

than

one

Delete one character.
Set boundaries and delete all
text between them.

PAGE:

Next Page: Get next screenful
of text.
Previous Page: Get previous
screenful.
View Page: Rewrite current
page with possible reframing.

COMMAND MODE COMMANDS
HELP:

Display summary
commands.

PRINT:

Print n lines or up to tag.

JUMP:

Move cursor position
characters or to tag.

TAGS:
of

EXIT:

any

INSERT:

Insert before CP
between delimiters.

text

DELETE:

Delete n characters,
characters up to tag.

Delete n lines
backward.

Transfer Copy block of text
from tag1, for n lines or
through tag2, to cursor
position.

MACROS:

all

forward

FIND:

Search for text; move pointer if
found.

SUBST:

newtext replaces oldtext if
oldtext is found. (Optional
query to user before replacement.)

FILES:

Open file "filename"
Reading or Writing.

Transfer move: like Transfer
Copy but the old copy is
deleted.

ADVANCED EDITING COMMANDS

Normal exit.
Exit Quit: Abandon
changes to edit file.

Move cursor position n lines
forward or backward.
MOVE:

Set tag n, n = 0-9. Tag n is
referenced as Tn.

Close the current
Read (Write) file.

Define a macro.
Delete a macro, or all macros if
name=*.

for

external

Go to beginning of current
Read file.

Expand and execute macro
contents, command mode.

Read and insert n lines from
the Read file.

Expand and execute macro
contents, screen mode.

Write n lines to the external
Write file.

Print names and definitions of
all macros.

12-23

AFN·01083B

GET:

Get contents
command li.ne.

file

into

QUERY:

Query User: set Query Flag
accordingly.
Do command only if Query
Flag is True.
Do command .only if Query
Flag is False.

YES:

Do command only if
(Search) Flag
.is False.
.

Yes

Do command only if
(Search) Flag is False.

Yes

LOOP:

Exit current iteration loop.

ALTER:

Configure the command input
keys to work with alternative
CRTs.

USER:

Copy text to the console.

HELP:

Display summary
commands.

SPECIFICATIONS

Required Software

Operating Environment

ISIS-II Diskette Operating System
-Single or double density

Required Hardware
Intellec® Microcomputer Development System
-Model 800 or Series II with 64k bytes of RAM
memory
-Series III

Documentation Package
CREDIT® (CRT-Based Text Editor) User's Guide
(9800902)
CREDIT® Pocket Reference (9800903)

Diskette Drive(s)
-Single or double density
System Console
-Intel supplied CRT or alternative CRT supporting
cursor controls

Shipping Media
Flexible Diskettes
-Single or double density

Optional Hardwar.e
Line Printer
Additional diskette drivels)

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number.

Description

MDS-360*

ISIS-II CREDIT
CRT-Based Text Editor

Requires Software License
*MDS is an ordering code only, and is not used
as a product name or trademark.
MDS® is a registered trademark of Mohawk Data
Sciences Corporation.

12·24

1:~;~~;~;~;;f:~~;~;;;mmmt~tft~ttrmmttj~1tffttfttttt~::::::}~?)::::::::::::::::~:~:>:::::<:::::::

Flexible and Hard Disk
Systems

INTELLEC® SINGLE/DOUBLE DENSITY
FLEXIBLE DISK SYSTEM
Flexible Disk System Providing High
Speed Input/Output and Data Storage
for Intellec® Microcomputer
Development Systems

Data Recorded on Double Density
Flexible Disk is in Soft-Sectored Format
Which Allows Y2 Million Byte Data
Capacity with Up to 200 Files Per
Flexible Disk

Available in Both Single Density and
Double Density Systems

Data Recorded on Single Density
Flexible Disk Is in IBM Soft-Sectored
Format Which Allows 1f4 Million Byte
Data Capacity with Up to 200 Files Per
Flexible Disk

Associated Software Supports Up to
Four Double Density Drives and Two
Single Density Drives, Providing Up to
2.5 Megabytes of Storage in One
System

Dynamic Allocation and Deallocation of
Flexible Disk Sectors for Variable
Length Files

The Intellec Flexible Disk System is a sophisticated, general purpose, bulk storage peripheral for use with the
Intellec Microcomputer Development System. The use of a flexible disk operating system significantly reduces program development time. The software system known as ISIS-11 (Intel System Implementation
Supervisor), provides the ability to edit, assemble, compile, link, relocate, execute and debug programs, and
performs all file management tasks for the user.

13-1

FLEXIBLE DISK SYSTEM
puter Set. This 8·bit processor includes four 3002 Cen·
tral Processing Elements (2·bit slice per CPE), a 3001
Microprogram Control Unit, and 512x32 bits of 3604
programmable·read·only·memory (PROM) which stores
the microprogram. It is the execution of the microprogram by the microcomputer set which actually
effects the control capability of the Channel Board.

HARDWARE
The Intellec® flexible disk system provides direct
access bulk storage, intelligent controller, and two flex·
ible disk drives. Each single density drive provides
million bytes of storage with a data transfer rate of
250,000 bits/second. The double density drive provides
'/2 million bytes of storage with a data transfer rate of
500,000 bits/second. The controllers are implemented
with Intel's powerful Series 3000 Bipolar Microcomputer
Set. The controllers provide interface to the Intellec
System bus. Each single density controller will support
two drives. Each double density controller will support
up to four drives. The flexible disk system records all
data in soft sector format.

1/;

This board is the same for either single or double density drives, except that the Series 3000 microcode is dif·
ferent.
INTERFACE BOARD
The Interface Board provides the flexible disk controller
with a means of communication with the flexible disk
drives, as well as with the Intellec system bus. Under
control of the microprogram being executed on the
Channel Board, the Interface Board generates those
signals which cause the read/write head on the selected
drive to be loaded (i.e., to come in contact with the flex·
ible disk platter), cause the head to move to the proper
track and verify successful operation. The Interface
Board accepts the data being read off the flexible disk,
interprets synchronizing bit patterns, checks the valid·
ity of the data using a cyclic redundancy check (CRG)
polynomial, and then transfers the data to the Channel
Board.

The single/double density flexible disk controllers each
consists of two boards, the Channel Board and the Inter·
face Board. These two printed circuit boards reside in
the Intellec System chassis. The boards are shown in
the photograph, and are described in more detail in the
following paragraphs.

During write operations, the Interface Board outputs the
data and clock bits to the selected drive at the proper
times, and generates the CRC characters which are then
appended to the data.
When the flexible disk controller requires access to
Intellec system memory, the Interface Board requests
the DMA master control of the system bus, and gener·
ates the appropriate memory command. The Interface
Board also acknowledges I/O commands as required by
the I ntellec bus.

SINGLEIDOUBLE DENSITY CHANNEL BOARD

The Flexible Disk System is capable of performing
seven different operations: recalibrate, seek, format
track, write data, write deleted data, read data, and verify
CRC.
The channel board is different for single and double den·
sity drives, due to the different recording techniques
used. The single density controller boards support one
set of dual single density drives. The double density
controller boards support up to two sets of dual double
density drives (four drives total).

DOUBLE DENSITY INTERFACE BOARD
·(SINGLE DENSITY INTERFACE BOARD
IS SIMILAR TO THE ONE SHOWN ABOVE)

The double density controller may co·reside with the
Intel single density controller to allow conversion of
single density flexible disk to double density format,
and provide up to 205M bytes of storage.

CHANNEL BOARD

The Channel Board is the primary control module within
the flexible disk system. The Channel Board receives,
decodes,and responds to channel commands from the
Central Processor Unit (CPU) in the Intellec system. The
Channel Board can access a block of Intellec system
memory to determine the particular flexible disk opera·
tions to be performed and fetch the parameters required
for the successful completion of the specified opera·
tion.

FLEXIBLE DISK DRIVE MODULES

Each flexible disk drive consisis of read/write and con·
trol electronics, drive mechanisms, read/write head,
track positioning mechanism, and the removable flexible disk platter. These components interact to perform
the following functions:
• Interpret and generate control signals
• Move read/write head to selected track
• Read and write data

The control functions of the Channel Board have been
achieved with an 8·bit microprogrammed processor,
designed with Intel's Series 3000 Bipolar Microcom·

13-2

FLEXIBLE DISK SYSTEM
ASSOCIATED SOFTWARE - INTEL
SYSTEMS IMPLEMENTATION
SUPERVISOR (1515·11)
The Flexible Disk Drive System is to be used in conjunction with the ISIS-II Operating System. ISIS-II provides total file management capabilities, file editing,

1515·11 OPERATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL
ISIS-II
32K bytes RAM memory
48K bytes when using Assembler Macro feature
64K bytes when using PUM or Fortran
System Console
Single or Double density Flexible Disk Drive

HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS
MEDIA
Single Density
Flexible Disk
One Recording Surface
IBM Soft Sector Format
77 TrackslDiskette
26 Sectors/Track
128 Bytes/Sector

Double Density
Double Density Specified
Flexible Disk
One Recording Surface
Soft Sector Format
77 TrackslDiskette
52 Sectors/Track
128 Bytes/Sector

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
CHASSIS AND DRIVES
Mounting:
Height:
Width:
Depth:
Weight:

Table-Top
5.7 in. (14.5 cm)
17.6 in. (44.7 cm)
19.4 in. (49.3 cm)
43.0 lb. (19.5 kg)

library management, run-time supports, and utility
management.
ISIS-II provides automatic implementation of random access disk files. Up to 200 files may be stored on each '14
million byte flexible disk for single density system or on
each '12 million byte flexible disk for double density
system. For more information, see the ISIS-II data specification sheet.

FLEXIBLE DISK DRIVE PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATION
Single
Density
Capacity (Unformatted):
Per Disk
Per Track
Capacity (Formatted):
Per Disk
Per Track
Data Transfer Rate
Access Time:
Track-to-Track
Head Settling Time
Average Random
Positioning Time
Rotational Speed
Average Latency
Recording Mode

MEDIA

CHASSIS
DC Power Supplies
Supplied Internal to the Cabinet
AC Power Requirements
3-wire input with center conductor (earth ground) tied
to chassis
Single-phase, 115 VAC; 60 Hz; 1.2 Amp Maximum (For
a Typical Unit)
230 VAC; 50 Hz; 0.7 Amp Maximum (For
a Typical Un)t)

Temperature:
Operating:
Non-Operating:
Humidity:
Operating:
Non-Operating:

flEXIBLE DISK OPERATING SYSTEM CONTROLLER
DC Power Requirements (All power supplied by Intel/ec
Development System)

5V @ 3.75A (typ), 5A (max)
INTERFACE BOARD
Single Density
5V @ 1.5A (typ), 2.5A (max)

3.1 megabits
41 kilobits

6.2 megabits
82 kilobits

2.05M bits
26.6K bits
250 kilobits/
sec

4.10 megabits
53.2 kilobits
500 kilobits/
sec

10 ms
10 ms

260 ms
360 rpm
83 ms
Frequency
Modulation

260 ms
360 rpm
83 ms
M2FM

ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS

ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

CHANNEL BOARD
Single Density

Double
Density

Double Density
5V @ 3.75A (typ), 5A (max)
Double Density
5V @ 1.5A (typ), 2.5A (max)
-10V @ O.lA (typ),
0.2A (max)

15.6'C to 51.7'C
5'C to 55'C
8 to 80% (Wet bulb 29.4 'c)
8 to 90%

DRIVES AND CHASSIS
Temperature:
10'C to 38'C
Operating:
Non-Operating: - 35 'C to 65 'C
Humidity:
20% to 80% (Wet bulb 26.7'C)
Operating:
Non-Operating: 5% to 95%
CONTROLLER BOARDS
Temperature:
o to 55'C
Operating:
Non-Operating: -55'C to 85'C
Humidity:
Up to 95% relative humidity without
Operating:
condensation
Non-Operating: AI/ conditions without condensation of water or frost

13·3

FLEXIBLE DISK SYSTEM
EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED
SINGLE DENSITY

DOUBLE DENSITY

Cabinet, Power Supplies, Line Cord, Two Drives
Single Density FDC Channel Board
Single Density FDC Interface Board
Dual Auxiliary Board Connector
Flexible Disk Controller Cable
Flexible Disk Peripheral Cable
Hardware Reference "Manual
ReferenceSchematfcs
ISIS-II Single Density System Disk
ISIS-II System User's Guide

Cabinet, Power Supplies, Line Cord, Two Drives
Double Density FDC Channel Board
Double Density FDC Interface Board
Dual Auxiliary Board Connector
Flexible Disk Controller Cable
Flexible Disk Peripheral Cable
Hardware Reference Manual
Reference Schematics
ISIS-II Double Density System Disk
ISIS-II System User's Guide

OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
MDS-BLD'
MDS'730/731'

10 Blank Flexible Disks
Second Drive Cabinet with two additional drives

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number
MDS-71 0/11 OV'
711/220V
M DS-720-11 OV'
721/220V
MDS-730/110V'
731/220V

Description

Flexible Disk drive unit with
drives, single density drive
troller, software, and cables_
Flexible Disk drive unit with
drives, double density drive
troller, software, and cables_

two
contwo
con"-

Add-on drive unit with two drives
and double density cable, without
controller and software_ Can be
used with double density controller_

• MDS is an ordering code only and is not used as a product name or trademark. MDS® is a registered trademark of Mohawk Data Sciences
Corporation.

MODEL 740
INTELLEC® HARD DISK SUBSYSTEM

• 7.3 million bytes of on-line hard disk
storage

• Fixed and removable mass storage in
one drive

• 5440-type disk cartridge

• Separate write protect switch for each
disk platter

• Enhanced development system
performance

• Intelligent 2-board controller

The Intellec Model 740 Hard Disk Subsystem is a flexible, high capacity, mass storage peripheral for use with
Intellec Microcomputer Development Systems. In addition to providing a large fixed and removeable storage
component; the 740 can significantly improve throughput and reduce development time.

13·5

intJ

MODEL 740

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

cyclic redundancy check (CRC) polynomial and
generates CRC data during write operations. When
the disk controller requires access to Intellec system memory, the channel board requests and maintains DMA master control of the system bus, and
generates the appropriate memory command. The
channel board also acknowledges I/O commands
as required by the Intellec bus.

Hardware Components
The Intellec Hard Disk Subsystem consists of an
intelligent controller and disk drive with one removeable cartridge and one fixed platter. Each provides
3.6 million bytes of storage (7.3 M total) with a data
transfer rate of 2.5 MBits/second. The disk controller is implemented with Intel's powerful Series 3000
Bipolar Microcomputer Set. The controller provides
an interface to the Intellec system bus, as well as
the disk drive. Data is, recorded in FM format on
each surface (2 per platter). Each platter may be
separately write protected via a front panel switch.
The disk subsystem wil,l perform six specific operations: recalibrate, seek, format track, write data,
read data, and verify CRC.

Channel Board
The Channel Board is the primary control module
within the hard disk subsystem. The Channel Board
receives, decodes and responds to channel commands from the Central Processor Unit (CPU) in
the Intellec system. The Channel Board can access
a block of Intellec system memory to determine the
particular disk operations to be performed and
fetch the parameters required for the successful
completion oj the specified operation.

Disk Controller Boards
Th'e diskcontroll,er consists' of two boards, the
channel board and the interface board. These two
PC boards reside in the ,I ntellec Series II system
chassis and constitute the disk controller. The
channel board receives, decodes and responds to
channel commands from the processor. The interface board provides the disk controller with a
means of communication with the disk drive. The
interface board validates data during reads using a

The ,control functions of the Channel Board have
been achieved with an 8-bit microprogrammed
processor, designed with Intel's Series 3000 Bipolar
Microcomputer Set. This 8-bit processor includes
four 3002 Central Processing Elements (2-bit slice
per CPE), a 3001 Microprogram Control Unit, and
1K x 32 bits of 3628 programmable-read-onlymemory (PROM) which stores the microprogram. It

13-6

MODEL 740
is the execution of the microprogram by the microcomputer set which actually effects the control
capability of the Channel Board.

verify successful operation. The I nterface Board
accepts the data being read off the disk, interprets
synchronizing bit patterns, checks the validity of
the data using a cyclic redundancy check (CRC)
polynomial, and then transfers the data to the
Channel Board.

When the disk controller requires access to Intellec
system memory, the Channel Board requests the
DMA master control of the system bus, and generates the appropriate memory command. The
Channel Board also acknowledges I/O commands
as required by the Intellec bus.

During write operations, the Interface Board outputs the data and clock bits to the selected drive at
the proper times, and generates the CRC characters which are then appended to the data.

Interiace Board
Associated Software

The Interface Board provides the 740 disk controller
with a means of communication with the disk drives,
as well as with the Intellec system bus. Under control of the microprogram being executed on the
Channel Board, the I nterface Board generates
those signals which cause the read/write head on
the selected drive to move to the proper track and

Intel Systems Implementation Supervisor (ISIS-II)
- The Hard Disk Subsystem is to be used in conjunction with the ISIS-II Operating System. ISIS-II
provides total file management capabilities, file
editing, library management, run-time support, and
utility management.

SPECIFiCATIONS

Physical Characteristics

Hardware

Disk Drive on Pedestal
Width - 18.5 in. (47.0 cm)
Height - 34.0 in. (86.4 cm)
Depth - 29.75 in. (75.6 em)
Weight - 202 lb. (92 kg)

Disk Drive
Type - 5440 top loading cartridge and one fixed
platter
Tracks per Inch - 200
Mechanical Sectors per Track - 12
Recording Technique - double frequency (FM)
Tracks per Surface - 400
Density - 2,200 bits/inch
Bits per Track - 62,500
Recording Surfaces per Platter - 2

Electrical Characteristics
Chassis
DC Power Supplies - Internal to Cabinet
AC Power Requirements
110 VAC; 60 Hz; 5A (max)
220 VAC: 50 Hz; 3A (max)
Controiler Boards
5V @ 5.5A (typ). 6.5A (max)

Disk System Capacity
Per
Per
Per
Per

Environmental Characteristics

Surface - 15M bits
Platter - 29M bits
Drive - 59M bits
Drive - 7.3M bytes (formatted)

Media, Drive and Chassis
Temperature:
Operating: 16°C to 32°C
Non-operating: -10°C to 60°C
Humidity:
20% to 80% non-condensing
Controller Boards
Temperature:
Operating: DoC to 55°C
Non-operating: -55°C to 85°C
Humidity:
Up to 90% non-condensing

Disk Performance
Disk Transfer Rate - 2.5M bits/sec
Disk System Access Time Track to Track: 13 ms max.
Full Stroke: 100 ms
Rotational Speed: 2,400 rpm

13-7

MODEL 740
Equipment Supplied

Optional Equipment

Hard disk drive pedestal mounted
H.ard disk controller (2 boards)
Cables
Disk Cartridge
ISIS-II System Diskette
9800306 - Isis-II System User's Guide
9800943 - Hard Disk Subsystem Operation arid
Checkout Manual

MDS-746 Box of 5 blank cartridges specified for
use on Model 240/241, 740/741

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

MDS-740/110V
741/220V.

Hard disk unit with cables,
controller, ·and disk cartridge

13·8

MCS-80/85™
Development Systems
and Options

FORTRAN 80
8080/8085 ANS FORTRAN 77
INTELLEC® RESIDENT COMPILER
• Meets ANS FORTRAN 77
Subset Language Specification plus
adds Intel' microprocessor extensions

• Supports full symbolic debugging with
ICE-80™ and ICE-85™
• Produces relocatable and linkable
object code compatible with resident
PL/M 80 and 8080/8085 Macro
Assembler

• Supports Intel" Floating Point
Standard with the FORTRAN 80 software routines, the iSBC-310™High
Speed Mathematics Board, or the
iSBC-332™ math multimodule

• Provides optional run-time library to
execute in RMX-80™ environment

• Executes on Intellec" Microcomputer
Development System and Intellec"
Series II MicrQcomputer Development
System

• Has well defined I/O interface for
configuration with user-supplied
drivers

FORTRAN 80 is a computer industry-standard, high-level programming language and compiler thiJ.t ImnsliJ.tes
FORTRAN statements into relocatable object modules. When the object modules are linked together and 10ciJ.ted into
iJ.bsolute program modules, they are suitable for execution on Intel 8080/8085 Microprocessors, iSBC-80 OEM Computer Systems, and Intellec Microcomputer Development Systems. FORTRAN 80 meets the ANS FORTRAN 77
Language Subset Specification ~. In addition, extensions designed specifically for microprocessor applications are
included. The compiler operates on the Intellec Microcomputer Development System under the ISIS-II Disk Operating
Systems and produces efficient relocatable object modules that are compatible for linkage .with PLlM80 and
8080/8085 Macro Assembler modules.
The ANS FORTRAN 77 language specification offers many powerful extensions to the FORTRAN language .that are
especially well suited to Intel 8080/8085 Microprocessor software development. Because FORTRAN 80 conforms to
the ANS FORTRAN 77 standard, the user is assured of compatibility with existing FORTRAN software that meets the
standard as well as a guarantee of upward compatibility to other computer systems supporting an.ANS' FORTRAN 77
Compiler.
1ANSI X3J3/90

14·1

9800668-03 Rev. C

FORTRAN 80
FORTRAN 80 LANGUAGE FEATURES
Major ANS FORTRAN 77 features supported by the
Intel@ FORTRAN 80 Programming Language include:
o

Structured Programming is supported with the IF ...
THEN ... ELSE IF ... ELSE ... END IF constructs.

CHARACTER data type permits alphanumeric data
to be handled as strings rather than characters
stored in array elements.

Full 110 capabilities include:
Sequential and Direct Access files
Error handling facilities
Formatted, Free·formatted, and Unformatted
data representation
Internal (in-memory) file units provide capa·
bilityto format and reformat data in internal
memory buffers
List Directed Formatting

Supports arrays of up to seven dimensions.

Supports logical operators
.EQV.
- Logical equivalence
.NEQV.
- Logical nonequivalence

The INCLUDE control permits specified source
files to be combined into a compilation unit at com·
pile time.

Transparent interface for software and hardware
floating point support, allowing either to be chosen
at time of linking.

FORTRAN 80 BENEFITS
FORTRAN 80 provides a means of developing applica·
tion software for Intel~ MCS·80185 products in a
familiar, widely accepted, and computer industry·
standardized programming language. FORTRAN 80 will
greatly enhance the user's ability to provide cost·
effective solutions to software development for Intel
microprocessors as illustrated by the following:
o Completely Complementary to EXisting Intel Software Design Tools - Object modules are linkable
with new or existing Assembly Language and PUM
Modules.
o Incremental Runtime Library Support Runtime
overhead is limited only to facilities required by the
program.

Major extensions to FORTRAN 77 in Intel FORTRAN·80
include:
o

Direct 8080/8085 port 110 supported by intrinsic
subroutines.
Binary and Hexadecimal integer constants.

Well defined interface to FORTRAN-80 110 statements (READ, OPEN, etc.), allowing easy use of ,
user-supplied 110 drivers.
o User·defined INTEGER storage lengths of 1, 2 or 4
bytes.
o User-defined LOGICAL storage lengths of 1, 2 or 4
bytes;
o REAL STORAGE lengths of 4 bytes.

Low Learning Effort - FORTRAN 80, like PL/M, is
easy to learn and use. Existing FORTRAN software
can be ported to FORTRAN·80, and programs
developed in FORTRAN 80 can be run on any other
computer with ANS FORTRAN 77.

Earlier Project Completion - Critical projects are
completed earlier than otherwise possible because
FORTRAN 80 will substantially increase programmer productivity, and ,is complementary to PUM
Modules by providing comprehensive arithmetic,
110 formatting; and data management' support in
the'language.

Lower Development Cost - Increases in program·
mer productivity translates into lower software
development costs because less programming
resources are required for a given function.
Increased Reliability - The nature of high:level
languages, including FORTAN 80, is that they lend
themselves to simple statements of the program
algorithm. This substantially reduces the risk of
Costly errors in systems that have already reached
production status.

Bitwise Boolean operations using logical operators
on integer values.
Hollerith data constants.

Implicit extension of the length of an integer or
logical expression to the lerigth of the left·hand
side in an assignment statement.

A format descriptor to suppress carriage return on
a terminal output device at the end of the record.

FORTRAN 80 COMPILER FEATURES
o
o
o

Supports multiple compilation units in single
source file.
Optional Assembly Language code listing.
Comprehensive cross·reference, symbol attribute
and error listing.
Compiler controls ar:ld directives are compatible
with other Intel language translators.
Optional Reentrancy.

User-defined default storage lengths.

Optional FORTRAN 66 Do Loop semantics.

Source files may be prepared in free format.

14-2

Easier Enhan2ementsand Maintenance - Like
PUM, program modules written in FORTRAN 80 are
easier to read and understand than assembly
language. This means it, is easier to enhance and
maintain FORTRAN 80 programs as system
capabilities expand and future products are
developed.
Comprehensive, Yet Simple Project Development
- The Intellec Microcomputer Development Sys·
tern; with the 808018085 Macro Assembler, PUM 80
and FORTRAN 80 is the most comprehensive software design facility available for the Intel
MCS·80185 Microprocessor family. This reduces
development time and cost because expensive (and
remote) timesharing or large computers are not required.

AFN·00241B

FORTRAN 80
SAMPLE FORTRAN·80 SOURCE PROGRAM
LISTING
*lI
**

THIS PROGRAM IS AN EXAMPLE OF ISIS-II FORTRAN-BO THAT
CONVERTS TEMPERATURE BETWEEN CELSIUS AND FARENHEIT
PROGRAM CONVRT
CHARACTER*l CHOICE, SCALE
PRINT 100
** ENTER CONVERSION SCALE (C OR F)
PRINT 200
READ (5,300) SCALE

*
10

IF (SCALE .EQ. 'C' )
THEN
PRINT 400
*It ENTER THE NUMBER OF DEGREES FARENHEIT
READ (5,*) DEGF
DEGC = 5./9.*(DEGF-32)
** PRINT THE ANSWER
WRITE (6,500) DEGF,DEGC
** RUN AGAIN?
PRINT 600
READ (5,300) CHOICE
IF (CHOICE .EQ. 'Y' )
THEN
+
GOTO 10
ELSE IF (CHOICE .EQ. 'N' )
THEN
+
CALL EXIT
ELSE
GO TO 20
END IF
ELSE IF (SCALE .EQ. 'F')
+
THEN
** CONVERT FROM FARENHEIT TO CELSIUS
PRINT 700
READ (5,*) DEGC
DEGF = 9./5.*DEGC+32.
** PRINT THE ANSWER
WRITE (6,BOO) DEGC,DEGF
GO TO 20
ELSE
lIli
NOT A VALID ENTRY FOR THE SCALE
WRITE (6,900) SCALE
GOTO 10
END IF
FORMAT(' TEMPERATURE CONVERSION PROGRAM' ,II,
+' TYPE C FOR FARENHEIT TO CELSIUS OR' ,I,
+' TYPE F FOR CELSIUS TO FARENHEIT' ,II)
FORMAT(/,' CONVERSION? ',$)
FORMAT(A 1)
FORMAT(/,'ENTER DEGREES FARENHEIT: ',$)
FORMAT(/,F7.2,' DEGREES FARENHEIT = ',F7.2,' DEGREES CELSIUS')
FORMAT(/,' AGAIN (Y OR N)? ',$)
FORMAT(/,' ENTER DEGREES CELSIUS: ',$)
FORMAT(/,F7.2,' DEGREES CELSIUS = ',F7.2,' DEGREES FARENHEIT' ,I)
FORMAT(/,lH ,Al,' NOT A VALID CHOICE - TRY AGAIN I ',I)
END
+

*
*

100
200
300
400
500
600
700
BOO
900

14·3

AFN-002418

FORTRAN 80
The FORTRAN 80 Compiler is an efficient, multiphase compiler that accepts source programs, translates them into
relocatable object code, and produces requested listings. After compilation, the object program may be linked to other
modules, located to a specific area of memory, then executed. The diagram shown below illustrates a program development cycle where the program consists of modules created by FORTRAN 80, PLfM 80 and the 8080/8085 Macro
Assembler.

1515·11
TEXT
EDITOR

FORTRAN 80
SOURCE

1515·11
TEXT
EDITOR

r--

1515·11
LOADER

r--

DEBUG
VIA
MONITOR

RELOCATABLE
OBJECT
MODULE

PLfM 80
SOURCE

1515·11
TEXT
EDITOR

OPTIONAL

Ice·aolM
ICE-85™

IN·CIRCUIT
EMULATOR

ASSEMBLY
LANGUAGE
SOURCE

PROM
PROGRAMMER

Required Software:
ISIS-II Diskette Operating System
- Single or Double Density

SPECI FICATIONS
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

Optional Software:
iSBC-801 FORTRAN-80 Run-Time Software Package
for RMX-80

Required Hardware:
Intellec® Microcomputer Development System
- MDS-800, MDS-888
- Series II Model 220, Model 230

DOCUMENTATION PACKAGE

64K bytes of RAM memory

FORTRAN-80 Programming Manual (9800481)

Dual diskette drives
- Single or Double Density

ISIS-lI FORTRAN-80 Compiler Operator's Manual
(9800480)

System console
- CRT or hardcopy interactive device

FORTRAN-80 Programming Reference Card (9800547)

SHIPPING MEDIA

Optional Hardware:
Line Printer
ICE-80™,ICE-85TM

Flexible Diskettes
- Single and Double Density

ORDERING INFORMATION
PART NO.

DESCRIPTION

*MDS-301

FORTRAN 80 Compiler for
IntellecMicrocomputer Development Systems

·"MDS" is an ordering code only, and is not used as a product
name or trademark. MDS® is a registered trademark of
Mohawk Data Sciences Corp.

14-4

BASIC-80
EXTENDED ANS 1978 BASIC
INTELLEC® RESIDENT INTERPRETER
• Supports the Intel® Floating Point Standard and Provides Integer and String
Data Types

• Meets ANS 1970 Standard for Minimal
BASIC and Adds Many Powerful
Extensions
• Operates Under the ISIS-II Operating
System on Intellec® and Intellec®
Series~1I Microcomputer Development
Systems

• Can Call User Subroutines Written in
FORTRAN 00, PL/M 00, and 0000/05
Macro Assembler that are Resident in
the Intellec® Memory

• Full Sequential and Random Disk File
I/O with ISIS-II
• Applications Range from Prototyping
Microcomputer Software to Inexpensive Engineering and Management
Problem Solving on the Intellec®
Systems

• Easily Learned Language and Interactive Environment Combine to
Provide a Flexible and Powerful Facility
for Developing Programs to Run on the
Intellec® Microcomputer Development
Systems

BASIC is an industry standard, high·level programming language which is designed to be easily learned and used by
novices and experienced programmers alike. The interpreter provides an interactive environment which allows fast
and easy program development, testing, and debugging. BASIC is widely used for problem solving in engineering and
management; extensive software exists for business applications such as order entry, accounts receivable, accounts
payable, and inventory control, and engineering applications such as numeric and statistical analysis.
Intel's BASIC·80 meets the standards of ANS 1978 BASIC and extends them to take advantage of the software devel·
opment capabilities of the Intellec Microcomputer Development Systems. The matching of these resources with the
ease of programming in BASIC·80 provides a very effective tool for both microprocessor systems development and
inexpensive applications programming and problem solving on the Intellec systems.

14·5

AFN·Ol186A

BASIC·SO
BASIC·SO LANGUAGE FEATURES

• Formatted print statement with the PRINT USING
function.

Standard ANS 78 BASIC features, all supported by
BASIC-80, include:

• ELSE clause for IF ... THEN statements.
• Matrices with upto 110 dimensions.

• String and numeric constants, variables, and arrays.

• Extensive string manipulation functions.

• FOR ... TO ... STEP ... NEXT statements for loOp
execution.

• Boolean operators.
• Type conversion
and 'character. .

• IF, .. THEN statements for conditional execution.

functions~lnteger,.

floating point,

• ON ... GOTO statements for computed branching.
• GOSUBIRETURN subroutine calls and returns.
• Built in scientific functions:

ABS
EXP
INT
LOG

RND
SGN
SOR
ATN

BENEFITS OF BASIC-SO·

TAN
COS
SIN

• Added Value to'the,iritellec Systems'C""with.BASIC·80
the Intellec Microcomputer Development Systems
can be effectively used in many engineering and
management applications. ,

• User defined single statement functions.

• Inexpensive and Accessible Computational Facilitythe ease of use and flexibility inherent in BASIC·80
and its interpretive envirbnment fit well with the "at
hand" computational resources of the Intellec sys·
tems. The combination is a pa(ticularlyuseful tool for
obtaining fast and accurate results.

Major extensions toANS78 BASIC which BASIC·80 pro·
vides include:
• Support for the Intel single and .. double precision
.
floating point standard.
• Disk file ·I/O,supporting both random
sequential access files.

acces~ and

• Easy to Learn-the language is designed to be easily
understood and learned. Results are obtained faster
and people who may benefit from using the system
can do so easily.

• Direct read and write to CPU 110 ports through the INP
and OUT functions.
• Direct memory read and write throlJgh the PEEK and·
POKE functions.
.

• Aid in Microcomputer Software'Design-microcomputer software can be prototypedin BASIC·80 to inexpensively develop and test program logic.

• Calls to user-supplied external subroutines, which
may have been written in FORTRAN'80, PUM-80, or
8080/8085 Assembly Language and have been located
at absolute memory locations using the ISIS·II
facilities.

• Complemented by ExistingSoffware-subroutines
written in PUM·80, FORTRAN·80, and ASM 8080/85
can be called from BASIC·80programs.

• Program execution trace command.

• Easy to Enhance. and Maintain-BASIC,80, being
straightforward and easily understood, provides for
programs that are easy to maintain and modify in the
future.

SPECIFICATIONS

Optional Hardware:

• User directed error trapping and handling functions.

Line printer
Additional diskette drive

Operating Environment

Required Software:
ISIS-II Diskette Operating System
- Single or double density

Required Hardware:
Intellec Microcomputer Development System
- Models 800 and 888
- Series·1I Model 220, Model 230

Documentation Package:
Basic-80 Reference Manual (9800758A)
Basic-80 Programming Reference Card (9800774)

48K bytes of RAM memory
Diskette drive
- Single or double density

Shipping Media:

System console
- CRT or hard copy interactive device

Flexible diskettes
- Single and double dElr;sity

14·6

AFN·011a6A

BASIC·80
EXAMPLE BASIC·80 PROGRAM

list
10 PRINT "THIS PROGRAI'I CALCULATES THE MEAN AND STAl'llDARD"
20 PRINT " DEVIATION OF INPUT DATA"
30 S=0:V=0
40 INPUT "NUMBER OF VALUES"~N
50 FOR 1=1 TO N
()0 INPUT A(I)
70 S=S+A(I)
130 NEXT
90 S=S/N
100 REM CALCULATION OF VARIANCE
110 FOR 1=1 TO N
120 V=V+(A(I)-S)"2/N
130 NEXT
140 SD=SQR(V)
150 PRINT "MEAN="~S
160 PRINT "STANDARD DEVIATION IS="~SD
Ok
run
THIS PROGRAM CALCULATES THE MEAN AND
DEVIATION OF INPUT DATA
NUMBER OF VALUES? 6
? 34.7
? 32.9
? 38.2
? 35
? 37.6
? 40.9
MEAN= 36,55
STANDARD DEVIATION IS= 2.642442
Ok

STANDA~D

ORDERING INFORMATION
Product Code

Description

MDS-320'

1515:11 BASIC-80
Disk-Based Interpreter

• MDS is an ordering code only and is not used as a product name or trademark. MDS" il a regiltered trademark of Mohawk Data Science
Corporation.

14-7

AFN-IIl186A

intel~
8080/8085 FUNDAMENTAL
SUPPORT PACKAGE (FSP)
• Comprehensive Extension of the 8080
CPU Performance Features Through
Standardized Software Building Blocks

• library Routines Provide Extended
Math Capabilities of ASM 80, PL/M 80,
and FORTRAN 80

• Hardware-Independent Modules
Selectable by the User for a Wide
Variety of Frequently Needed Program
Functions

• Available on Diskette as an ISIS-II
Library.File
• Efficient Integration with the User's
Program Using the ISIS Utility
Programs LINK and LOCATE

• High Standard of Reliability Achieved
Through Use of Proven Algorithms and
Meticulous Testing of All Functions

• Lowers Software Development Costs

FSP is a mathematical and technical applications library. It is a comprehensive collection of frequently needed
program functions that complement and augment the capabilities of the 8080/8085 microprocessor. The
inciusion of these functions eliminates the need to code and debug complicated math routines and P!lrmits
the user to concentrate on his own application. The use of FSPfunctions thus. makes a noteworthy contribution to the economy of software development.
FSP consists of a collection of subroutines stored as relocatable modules on a diskette. These modules can,
with the help of ISIS utilities, LINK and LOCATE, be linked to user programs in assembly language, PL/M or
FORTRAN.

14-8

121526-001

8080/8085 FUNDAMENTAL SUPPORT PACKAGE (FSP)
PACKAGE FEATURES

DESCRIPTION OF THE LIBRARIES

The Fundamental Support Package consists of nine
individual libraries that lie in a hierarchical structure. as
shown in figure 1. These nine sections are:

FSP Machine (FSLMCH.LlB)
The routines in this library, together with the 8080/8085
hardware, constitute the FSP Machine. The routines fall
into two categories: the first comprises a group of
pselldo-operations that complement and augment the
8080/8085 instruction set. These pseudo-operations are
accessible only from assembly language programs'and
resemble assembler commands. Tile second category
consists of a set of routines that work on variable-length
operands; the integer and decimal arithmetic and
string-handling capabilities of the FSP are based on this
foundatiol'.

• The FSP Machine (primitive subroutine) package
performs fast string handling and binary and decimal
integer arithmetic without error reporting.
• The binary integer arithmetic routines provide
operations on signed and unsigned integers of
various formats in binary representation.
• The floating-point arithmetic section provides
operations on iloating-point (real) numbers in four
formats: single precision, single-precision extended,
double precision, and double-precision extended.

The routines in the FSP Machine do not return
messages in the event of an erro'r; they are optimized
for speed of execution.

• The decimal arithmetic routines provide integer and
fixed-point arithmetic on numbers in decimal
representation-i.e., stored as strings of ASCII
characters.

String Handling (FSLSTR.LlB)
This library contains routines for manipulating strings
and for the processing of character input and output.
The string manipulation routines fall into two groups.
The first is, character-oriented, while the second
handles groups of string variables. 'In both groups,
there are functions necessary for retrieval and
manipulation of data.

• The string handling section contains routines to
transform strings and to extract and insert substrings. A routine for scanning of general input and
one for formatting of general output are included.
• The routines for number conversion and numeric I/O
do transformation of numeric data from one internal
format to another, input scanning of numeric strings
and formatting of numeric strings for output.

The input scanner recognizes simple symbols like
alphabetic names, numbers, boundaries, and gaps in
input strings. The routines work with one of the userdefined tables and returns as a result an operand that
can bp, utilized by the other string manipulation
routines.

• The floating-point transcendental function section
provides trigonometric, exponential, and other
transcendental functions for single precision, singleprecision extended, double precision, and doubleprecision extended floating-point arguments.
• The statistics routines compute the mean, variance,
and standard deviation of one group of statistical
data, and the covariance and correlation factor of two
groups of data. '
• The P. I. D. process control routines direct the
production of an appropriate output signal in
response to an input signal, using a formula with proportional, integral, and lor derivative terms, for realtime process control applications.
In linking modules to an application program, the user
must note the hierarchical structure of FSP and specify
in order the lower level packages on which a higher
level package must rely. Figure 1 shows the required
subordination of subroutines; for example, the
statistical package relies on the floating-point library,
which in turn relies on the FSP machine.

FSLMCH

All FSP routines are reentrant; that is, all local data used
by each routine is stored on the stack, These routines
may thus be interrupted, and during the interrupt the
same routine or other ;ou!;r.es mily be callp.d, ,,,,ithout
affecting the results of the interrupted routine.

14-9

FSPMACHINE

Figure 1. Hierarchy of FSP Modules

8080/8085 FUNDAMENTAL SUPPORT PACKAGE (FSP)
The output formatter arranges data into a form required
for further manipulation. For example, it permits:

Floating-Point (FSLFLP.LlB)
The routines in this library provide an extensive range
of floating-point arithmetic functions. In addition to addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division, there is a
module function, a square root function and a routine to
compare two floating' point operands. Floating-point
operands can be represented in any of four formats:

• Copying a character from the input string into the
output buffer
• Including a literal in a given position in the output
string
• Collapsing leading blanks

FORMAT

• Inserting the sign (i.e., of a number) in a given
position in the output string

Single Precision
Exlended Single Precision
Double Precision
Extended Double Precision

STORAGE

MANilSSA

EXPONENT

4 Byle
6 Byle

24 bits
32 bits
53 bits
64 bits

15 bits
11 bits
15 bits

BByte
10 Byte

Bbits

Additional functions provide for truncation, rounding
and conversion of floating-point operands from one of
the above formats to another.

Decimal Arithmetic (FSLDEC.LlB)
The routines available in this library operate directly on
signed decimal numbers without converting them internally into binary. Only integer operands are permitted.
These are represented as ASCII strings up to 32
characters long. Addition, subtraction, and multiplication are accomplished by means of one operation each.
For division there are two functions; one to calculate the
integer quotient, one to calculate a remainder. Additional functions allow for negation, absolute value, and
comparison of operands. Also available are utilities to
limit the length of operands and to scale decimal
variables.

Conversion and 1/0 (FSLCNV.LlB)
This library consists of routines for input and output of
floating-point numbers and for the conversion of
numeric data between different internal formats. There
is an input scanner to read numeric data; there is an output formatter that writes output data to a buffer. There
are various possible formats for input and output data;
numeric data are handled as ASCII strings, as follows:
• Integers (single, decimal mantissa)
• Scaled integers (sign, decimal mantissa, decimal
pOint)
• Floating pOint numbers (sign, decimal mantissa,
decimal pOint, decimal exponent)
There are also other routines necessary for conversion
of binary, decimal and floating point numbers. By
means of the transformation of decimal into floatingpoint numbers and vice-versa, single and double precision are achieved.

Integer Arithmetic (FSLlNT.LlB)
In this library there are routines for unsigned (8- and 16bit) and signed (8-, 16-, and 32-bit) decimal arithmetic.
For each of the fundamental operations-addition, subtraction, multiplication and division, as well as for the
comparison of two integer operands-there is one
routine. Additional functions provide for manipulation of
the signs of operands and conversion of operands
between different internal storage formats.

Statistics (FSLSTA.LlB)
This library makes available routines that provide
elementary statistical functions. The calculation of
means, variance, and standard deviation employs onedimensional arrays of data, whereas the calculation of
covariance and correlations presumes two-dimensional
arrays. In both cases, data are supplied as single precision floating-point numbers; the statistical routines
make use of the floating-point library. Results of
calculations are returned as single precision floating
point numbers.

For signed integer operands, the following formats are
possible:
FORMAT

RANGE

1 byte, Including sign
2 bytes, including sign
4 bytes, including sign
8 bytes, including sign

-2 7 to 27_1
-2 15 10215_1
_2 31 10231 _1
-263 10 26L l

Process Control (FSLPID.LlB)

For unsigned operands, there are three possible formats:
.
1 byte, without sign
2bytes, without sign
4 bytes, without sign

The routines in this library support digital process control using the 8080/8085. The PID algorithm

0102 6-1
0101 1Ll
0102 32-1

The 8-byte signed format and the 4-byte unsigned format are limited to retrieval of results.
1

4·10

M(t) = B +

~oo (E(t) + ~SE(S) ds + D ~;)
to

8080/8085 FUNDAMENTAL SUPPORT PACKAGE (FSP)
calculates an output signa! M(t) as a function of an input
signal E(t). The input quantity is a measure of the deviation of a controlled variable from a set point. The
parameters B, P, R, and D are supplied by the user. The
implementation is such that the user can select to
exclude or include any combination of the terms in the
PID equation (i.e., the proportional term, the integral
term~ the derivative term). ,There are also routines to
initialize the control function and to change the
measurement interval.

Transcendental Functions (FSL TRN.LlB)
This library includes routines to calculate elementary
mathematical functions in single, extended single,
pouble, and extended double precision. The following
functions are available:
• sin, cos, tan
• exp, In, 10gw Yx
• sinh, cosh, tanh
• arc sin, arc cos, arc tan, arctan (yjx)

Required Software:

SPECIFICATIONS

ISIS-II Diskette Operating System

DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT

LINK, LOC Utilities

Required Hardware:

ASM80, FORTRAN-80, PLlM-80

Intellec Microcomputer Development System
-Model 800
-Series,1I Model 220, 230, or '240

DOCUMENTATION PACKAGE
8080/8085 Fundamental Support Package (FSP)
Reference and Operating Instructions for ISIS-II Users
Order Number 9800887

64KB of Memory
-Single or double density diskette drive

Shipping Media
System Console
-Intel or Non-Intel CRT

Flexible Diskettes
-Single and double density

ORDERING INFORMATION:
Product Code
MDS-318'

Description
8080/8085 Fundamental
Support Package (FSP)

"'MDS" is an ordering code only, and is not used as a product
name or trademark. MDS'" is a registered trademark of
Mohawk Data Sciences Corp.

14·11

iCIS-COBOL
SOFTWARE PACKAGE
• Meets and Exceeds Minimum ANSI
Level 1 Standard for COBOL
(X3.23-1974)

• Can Link/Call Routines Written in
PLlM80, FORTRAN 80 and 8080/8085
Assembly Language

• Runs Under ISIS-II on Intellec® or
Intellec® Series II Microcomputer
Development Systems

• FORMS Utility Program Allows the User
~o Design and Test CRT Screen Format
Input by Generating COBOL. Source
Code for the Data Descriptions Defining that CRT Screen Format

• Compiler Compiles COBOL Source
Programs into an Intermediate Code
Which is Optimized for Speed and
Memory Space

• Compile-Time Option Available to Flag
Any Non-ANSI Standard Features for
Portability

• Includes Execution Run~Time Interpreter and an Interactive Debugger
• Powerful Extensions for Interactive
Programming

• Tested Using U.S. Dept. of Navy COBOL
Validation System

iCIS-COBOL, an acronym for Intel's Compact Interactive Standard COBOL, is a package designed to provide a
powerful interactive business language to users of Intel's Intellec and Intellec Series II Microcomputer Development
Systems_ iCIS-COBOL contains the most relevant parts of the ANSI 74 standard plus extra extensions to make this
product especially useful to Intellec users_ The compiler provides a feature to optionally disallow the iCIS-COBOL
extensions and rigidly enforce the ANSI 74 specification_ This will prove beneficial to users who may need to port
COBOL programs from the Intellec system to any other ANS Level 1 COBOL compiler.
iCIS-COBOL Compiler generates object code for a COBOL "virtual rnachine_" This code is designed for optimum
representation of COBOL verbs and data types_ The code generated is interpreted by. a Run-Time System_ This
consists of an interpreter which emulates the COBOL virtual machine and interfaces to the ISIS-II operating system
and the CRT_
After an application program has been tested and is ready for production use, it is possible to link it permanently to
the Run-Time System to form a free-standing ISIS-II load able program_

14·12

iCIS·COBOL
When data is being keyed in, the operator has full
cursor manipulation facilities, each variable acting as a
tab stop. Non·numeric digits may not be keyed into
fields defined as PIC 9. Finally, when the operator has
checked that the data is correct, the RETURN key is
pressed and processing continues.

LANGUAGE FEATURES
COBOL consists of twelve different modules imple·
mented either to Level 1 or Level 2 as defined in the
ANSI specification X3.23. iCIS·COBOL includes the
following modules implemented to Level 1:
Nucleus
Table Handling
Sequential 1/0
Relative 1/0
IndexEJd 1/0
Library
Interprogram Communication

SCREEN LAYOUT AND
FORMAT FACILITIES

CURSOR CONTROL
FACILITIES

Screen as a record

HOME 10 the slarl of Ihe
firsl dala field on Ihe screen

descripllon
FILLER

Extensions to ANSI Specification:

REDEFINES

• Advanced screen formatting and data entry
facilities. These include protected and unprotected
data, cursor manipulation, and numeric vet.

Ch a rac I er hi 9 h I i 9 h lin 9
Clear screen

• Run time input of filenames. The actual value of
the external filename may be moved to a file identi·
fier location prior to OPENing the file, avoiding the
need for an external linking mechanism.

Numeric vel lor PIC fields

Backward space

I Forward field
Backward field

CIR Release Ihe screen of
dala
LlF Left Fill numeric field
(The actual keys used vary
according to CRT keyboard)

• Line sequential files. Variable length records sep·
arated by carriage returnlline feed saves space on
disk and allows iCIS·COBOL programs to process
files output by a text editor.

FORMS UTILITY
A majority (up to 80%) of debugging timecan be spent
in designing, coding and testing the screen form
inputloutput of a COBOL program. The FORMS utility
included in the iCIS·COBOL package significantly
reduces this debugging time.

• Hexadecimal literals. These may be used to defin,"
control characters to output to special peripheral
devices.
• Rapid development facilities. During development,
compiled programs may be loaded directly by the
Run·Time System "fast load" facility, thus
avoiding the time otherwise spent in linking.

Using the FORMS program, the user may:

• Interactive debugging. Interactive debugging per·
mits the setting of breakpoints, examination and
modification of store, etc., at run time. Each
COBOL statement is identified by a four·digit
hexadecimal number.
o

line:column

.~T

Forward space
-

Store an image copy on disk of the form he has de·
fined for subsequent use.

Generate iCIS·COBOL source code for the data
descriptions required to define the form just
created. This may then be included in an iCIS·
COBOL program using COPY.

Choose to generate a checkout program which
allows duplication of the many machine conversa·
tions which would take place during a run of the
application which is being designed.

Lower case. This is permitted in COBOL words and
comments, thus helping to produce easy to read
documentation in the program.

INTERACTIVE CRT HANDLING
Intel has taken COBOL traditionally a batch
processing language - ,md extended it to become
interactive. iCIS·COBOL offers many facilities for
automatically formatting a CRT screen and facilitating
input keying.

COMPILE TIME DIRECTIVES
o

ANS
If specified. the Compiler will accept only those
iCIS·COBOL language statements that conform to
the ANS 74 standard.

The user can format the screen of any system console
(CRT) into protected and unprotected fields by using
standard COBOL statements. The screen layout may be
defined in the DATA DIVISION. An ACCEPT statement
nominates a record description which permits input to
the character positions corresponding to variables
identified by data·names. These may be separated by
FILLERs to position them on the screen. ConverselY, a
DISPLAY outputs only from non·FILLER fields in the
record description which it nominates. The programmer
can easily build up complex conversations for data
entry and transaction processing.

RESEQ
If specified, the Compiler generates COBOL
sequence numbers, renumbering each line in incre·
ments of 10.

NOINT
No intermediate code file is output. The Compiler
is, in effect, used for syntax checking only.

NOLIST
No list file is produced; used for fast compilation
of "clean" programs.

14-13

iCIS·COBOL
- Most COBOL programs are self·documenting.
- Conversational verbs and phrases and common
business terminology make COBOL easy to
learn, use and maintain.
- More business and application programs are
written in COBOL than any other language.

• COPYLIST
The contents of the file(s) nominated in COPY
statements are listed.
• NOFORM
No form feed or page headings are to be output by
the Compiler in the list file.

• Meets and exceeds ANS Level 1 COBOL standard.
- Assures portability to and from all computers
supporting ANS Level 1 COBOL.
- Extensive testing and validation using U.S.
NAVY COBOL VALIDATION SYSTEM assures
functionality for all Level 1 features.

• ERRLlST
The listing is limited to those COBOL lines contain·
ing syntax errors together with the associated
error. message(s).
• INT (external·file·name)
Specifies the file to which the intermediate code is
to be directed.

• iCIS·COBOL software package provides an easy to
use, efficient and friendly environment for COBOL
program development.
- CONFIGURATOR program allows the user to
reconfigure the software for any non'standard,
non·lntel CRT.
- Interactive debugger provides features aimed
at a CRT based system (rather than batch·
oriented).
- FORMS utility program reduces total program
development time by 30%.
- All iCIS·COBOL utilities make use of CRT
cursor control.

• LIST (external-file·name)
Specifies the file to which the listing is to be
directed.
• FORM (integer)
Specifies the number of COBOL lines per page of
listing.
• NOECHO
Error lines are echoed on the console unless this
directive is specified.

BENEFITS

• Adds value to an Intellec development system.
- COBOL applications programs developed
using iCIS·COBOL software package will
increase utilization of Intellec development
systems.

• Brings COBOL to Intellec Microcomputer Develop·
ment Systems.
- COBOL is the industry standard high·level
language for business·oriented applications.

~~~~~~ !~~~n~~~t~l~~og:~:t~~:~"_H.

~~~;

~~~~~~ ~~~:~~~~~~;~~t~~C'j'lOft.

0001

O"UO'l~ Ii~JtCI_~Ii .. f"H~.
OQOO~O 11'~V'j'-O"u~t ~iC'lION.

OOM'

~~~~!~ :~~~~~~IJ:~~~~l~~g~N.
The source program Is created

on diskllle wllh the ISIS·II
editor.

O"~O'O rlL&_~O~UO~.

ol:.Lt:Ci n"n. r lL~ ASSI~~
OJI~AI,IUno~ 1I<~oH~
ACC"~S HIO THEN
DO;
NUMCH = NUMCH + 1; DIGITS(NUMCH) = C;
C= DIGITS(NUMCH)/10;
DIGITS(NUMCH)= DIGITS(NUMCH) - 10*C;
END
END;

END FACTORIAL;

END;

Table 1. PL/M·80 Compiler Sample Factorial Generator Procedure

SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Environment
Required Hardware
Intellec microcomputer development system
65K bytes of memory
Dual diskette drives
System console - teletype
Optional Hardware
CRT as system console
Line printer
Required Software - ISIS-II diskette operating system

ORDERING INFORMATION

Shipping Media
Diskette

Reference Manuals
980026 - PUM 80 Programming Manual (SUPPLIED)
9800300 - ISIS·II PUM 80 Compiler Operator's Manual
(SUPPLIED)
Reference manuals are shipped with each product only
if designated SUPPLIED (see above). Manuals may be
ordered from any Intel sales representative, distributor
office or from Intel Literature Department, 3065 Bowers
Avenue, Santa Clara, California 95051.

Requires software license

Product Code

Description

MDS-PLM*

PLiM 80 High level language compiler

*MDS is an ordering code only and is not used as a product name or trademark. MDS® is a registered trademark of Mohawk Data Sciences
Corporation.
14.18

PASCAL 80
SOFTWARE PACKAGE
• Offers a Superset of· Standard Pascal

• Can Call Routines Written in PLIM 80,
FORTRAN 80, or 8080/8085 Macro
Assembler

• Provides Highly Structured Language
with Powerful Data Type Definitions to
Suit Applications

• Includes Data Types and Procedures
Consistent with RMX-80™ Environment
for Optional RMX-80 Run-Time
Interpreter (iSBC 803™)

• Compiles Pascal Source Code into
Intermediate Code to Optimize
Execution Speed and Storage
• Executes Compiler and Interprets the
Intermediate Code on Intellec®
Microcomputer Development Systems
ill

• Allows Modular Breakdown of Large
Programs and Separate Compilation of
Individual Modules

Provides a Utility to Produce
Relocatable Object Modules
Compatible with Other Intel®
Languages

• Gives Application Control Over
Run-Time Errors by Providing
User-Declared Error Procedures

PASCAL 80 Software Package consists of a compiler and an interactive Run-Time System designed to provide
the Pascal programming language as.a software development tool for Intellec Development System Users.
Pascal is a highly-structured, block-oriented programming language that is now gaining wide acceptance as a
powerful software development tool. Its rigid structure encourages and enforces good programming techniques, which, combined with a high level of readability, helps produce more reliable software.
Standard Intel development \0015, such as CREDIT editor can be .used to create and modify Pascal source
programs. The compiler compiles this source and creates a P-Code file. The Run-Time System executes this
P-Code in an interpretive manner under ISIS-II or optionally under RMX-80.
'Pascal language as defined in PASCAL User Manual and Report, Second Edition, Kathleen Jenson and Niklaus Wirth.

14·19

121515-002 Rev. B

PASCAL 80

LANGUAGE FEATURES
Data Structures
Pascal allows the user to define labels, constants,
data types, variables, procedures, and functions.

Variable Types
Variables can be defined according to the following
system-defined data types: boolean, integer, real,
character, array, record, string, set, file, and pointer.

PROGRAM TRACING FACILITY
The PASCAL 80 System incorporates a program
tracing facility which allows for selectively monitoring the execution of a Pascal program. When the
TRACE flag is set, the line number of each program
statement being executed is output to the console.
The TRACE flag may be manipulated in two ways:
-The TRACEON command (of the Run-Time System) will set the flag, and the TRACEOFF command will reset the flag.

User-Defined Types

-Pressing the Interrupt4 switch on the Intellec System front panel will toggle the TRACE flag; i.e., the
flag will be set if it was reset, and vice-versa.

New types can be defined by the user for added
flexibility.

COMPILER DIRECTIVES (PARTIAL LIST)

File Handling Pr()cedures

Compiler Command Line Directives

Pascal provides procedures to allow a user's program to interface with the ISIS-II file manager.
Routines provided are: RESET, 8EWRITE, CLOSE,
PUT, GET, SEEK, and PAGE.

NOLIST
No list file is produced; used for fast compilation of
"clean" programs.

Input/Output Procedures

NOCODE
No code file is produced; used for syntax error
checking.

Routines are provided to interact with the console or
an ISIS file. These procedures are: READ, WRITE,
READLN, WRITELN, plus BUFFER and BLOCK Read
and Write.

ERRLlST
List file is limited to only those Pascal lines that
contain errors, along with the error messages
produced.

Dynamic Memory Allocation

LIST (file-name)
Specifies the name of the list file.

The procedures NEW, MARK, and RELEASE allow
the user to obtai n and release memory space at ru ntime for dynamically allocating variable storage.

CODE (file-name)
Specifies the name of the code file.

String Handling

NOECHO
Error lines are echoed on the console unless this directiveis specified.

Pascal provides powerful toolS. for defining and
manipulating strings and character arrays. These
facilities enable concatenation of strings, character
and pattern scans, insertion, deletion, and pointer
manipulation.
.

Embedded Compiler Directives
$C text
Causes text to. appear in code file (allows for comments, copyrights, etc.).

Recursion
$1+
Pascal allows a PROCEDURE definition to include a
call to 'itself, a powerful construct in many mathematical algorithms.

Causes checking for I/O completion after each I/O
transfer. Failure results in a run-time error. ($1causes no checking, and no errors on I/O failure.)

14-20

AFN·01233B

PASCAL 80

-Pascal is being acclaimed as the programming
language of the future; it is being taught in many
colleges and universities around the country.

$R+
Causes Range Checking to occur, so that an out-ofrange value causes a Run-Time error. ($R- suppresses generation of code for Range Checking.)

-PASCAL 80 Run-Time System provides great ease
in programming formatted I/O operations.

$0+
Causes the compiler to operate in overlay mode.
Overlays allow less source code to reside in memory. ($0- causes no overlays, which decreases
compile time, since there are fewer disk accesses.)

PASCAL 80 provides a portable language for application programs running under ISIS-II.
PASCAL 80 can be used to evaluate complicated
algorithms using a natural language.

$T+

PASCAL 80 compiler generates intermediate
Pseudo-code.

Causes the compiler to generate tracing instructions to be used by the TRACE facility. ($Tsuppresses tracing instructions.)

-P-code is optimized for speed and storage space.
-P-code is approximately 50% to 70% smaller than
corresponding machine code.

BENEFITS

-P-code is machine independent, providing code
portability to any CPU.

Brings Pascal to Intellec Microcomputer DeV€lopment Systems:
-Pascal is a block-structured, highly-readable programming language, suitable for a wide-range of
applications.

Makes the Intellec Development System a more valuable tool. Extension of software support to include
Pascal makes software development and resource
management more flexible.

The source program is
created on diskette with
the ISIS-II text editor.

-PASCAL
... Loads the Run-Time System
which executes compiled PASCAL
programs.

COMP PROG ..
... Loads the compiler to convert
the source program into an
interpreted object form known
as intermediate code, or P-code.

·PROG ...
... Loads the Run-Time System
which executes compiled Pascal
programs.

Figure 1. Program Development Cycle

14-21

AFN-01233B

PASCAL 80

Table 1. Sample Program Listing Showing Nesting Levels
BUFFER.PAS Program Listing
Line

Seg

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 .. 1
9
10
11
12
13 .
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

Proc Lev Disp
program example;
{ Example using bufferread and builerwrite with break characters

44
64
65
67
108

f
1
1
1
.1
1

?
2
2
2

0
27
68
87
109
109
116
132
179
197
208
208
226
262
292
331
378
378
388

var buffer: string;
disk storage: Iile;
break: char;
new len, len: integer;
buff array: packed array[0 .. 80) 01 char;
begin
rewrite (disk. storage, 'data');
writeln('lnput a line 01 text: ');
readln (buffer);
len := bufferwrite(disk . storage, buffer[1], length(buffer));
repeat"
.
reset(disk_ storage);'
writeln; writeln;
write('lnput break char [cntrlZ to stop): ');
readln(break);
il not eol(input) then
begin
new_len:= bufferread(disk_storage, bulL_array, len, ord(break));
writeln('The buffer read: ');
writeln(copy(buffer, 1, abs(new_len)));
writeln('Length: ',abs(new_len):O);
if ~.ew.._len< 0 then writeln('(Break char not found)');
end;
untileof(input);
end.

SPECI FICATIONS

OPTIONAL SOFTWARE

ISIS-II CREDlpM (CRT-Based Text Editor)

Operating Environment
REQUIRED HARDWARE

Intellec® Microcomputer Development System
-Model 800
-Series II Model 220, Model 230, Model 240
64KB of Memory
Dual-Diskette Drives
-Single- or Double-Density'
System Console
-Intel® CRT or non-Intel® CRT
"Recommended.

Documentation Package
PASCAL 80 User's Guide (9801015-01)
PASCAL User Manual and Report, Second Edition,
Kathleen Jensen and Niklaus Wirth

Shipping Media
Flexible Diskettes
-Single- and Double-Density

REQUIRED SOFTWARE
ISIS-II Diskette Operating System
-Single-or Double-Density

14·22

AFN.()1233B

intel'

PASCAL 80

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

MDS-381*

PASCAL 80 Software Package

Requires Software License
'MDS is an ordering code only and is not used as a product name or trademark. MDS'" is a registered trademark of Mohawk Data Sciences
Corporation.

Intel Corporation has carefully reviewed this product and believes that the product will operate and perform according to its published user manuals. HOWEVER, INTEL MAKES NO
WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE OPERATION AND USE OF THIS VENDOR SUPPLIED PRODUCT. Successful use depends solely on customer's ability to install and use this
product.
This Vendor Supplied Product is licensed on an "as is" basis and Intel Corporation does not guarantee any future enhancements or extensions to this product. The existence of this
product does not imply its adaptation in any form as an Intel standard nor its compatibility with any other Intel product except as specifically stated in the published user manuals.
Inlel will provide limited telephone assistance to the customer in the underst'anding of the operation of the product.
In addition, if a problem is encountered which the user diagnosis indicates Is caused by a defect in this VendorSupplied Product, the user is requested to fill outa Problem Report form
and mail it to:
Intel Corporation
MCSO, Marketing
3065 Bowers Avenue
Santa Clara, CA 95051
Intel will use its best efforts to respond to Problem Reports in one of the following ways: 1) release information to correct the problem, 2) offer a new reVision, when available with
corrected code to fix the problem, or 3) Issue a notice of availability of a new revision with corrE:lcted code.

14-23

AFN-01233B

SP80 SUPPORT PACKAGE'

• Programs Writtenin'PUM, FORTRAN,
and Assembly Language can be Linked
Together and Relocated

• Development Support for 8080
Microprocessor Designs, Including:
• PL/M 80 Structured High-Level
Programming Language Compiler for
System Software Development

• ICE-80™Emulation Connects hltellec®
System Resources to a User's
Prototype

• ANS 77 FORTRAN 80 Compiler for
Mathematically Oriented Software
.Development.
• ICE-80™ In-Circuit Emulator
.

.;,

,'.

'".

.• Full Symbolic Debugging is Available
for Program Labels or Variables
.

8080 softw~re development begins using the 8080 macroassembler, PL/M 80, FORTRAN 80 high71evel languages and compilers. The compilers operate on Intellec microcomputer development systems under ISIS-II
disk operating systems and produces efficient relocatable object modules compatible for linkage with
PL/M 80, FORTRAN 80 and 8085 macroassembler modules. After compilation, the object program may be
linked to other modules, then located to an in-circuit emulator module (ICE-80) for software execution and
rlebugging in the Intellec environment.

14-24

SP80 SUPPORT PACKAGE
SP80 SUPPORT PACKAGE
SPECIFICATIONS

Environmental Characteristics
Operating Temperature -

Operating Environment

OOto 40°C

Operating Humidity - Up to 95% relative humidity with·
out condensation.

Required Hardware
DS002 System Package or equivalent is required

Reference Manuals (supplied)

DS003 System Package is recommended

FORTRAN·80 Programming Manual (9800481)
1515·11 FORTRAN·80 Compiler Operator's Manual
(9800480)
FORTRAN·80 Programming Reference Card (9800547)
PLlM·80 Programming Manual (980026)
1515·11 PLlM·80 Compiler Operator's Manual (9800300)
ICE·80 Operator's Manual (9800185)

Emulation Clock
User's system clock or ICE·80 adaptor socket.

Electrical Characteristics
DC Power Requirements
Vcc= +5V±5%
Icc = 10A max; 7A typ
Voo= + 12V±5%
100 = 80 mA max; 45 mA typ
Vss=,-10V±5%
Iss = 1 mA max; 1 "A typ

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number
SP80·KIT

Description
SP80 Support Package
Includes ICE·80 In·circuit emulator
(MDS·80·ICE), PLlM·80 High·Level Pro·
gramming Language (MDS·PLM), and
FORTRAN·80 Compiler (MDS·301)

14·25

SP8S SUPPORT PACKAGE
• Deve'lopment Support for 8085
Microprocessor Designs, Including:

• Programs Written in Pl/M, FORTRAN,
and Assembly Language can be
Linked Together and Relocated

• PL/M 80 Structured High-Level
Programming Language Compiler for
System Software Development

• ICE-858™ Emulation Connects intellec®
System Resources to a User's
Prototype
• Full Symbolic Debugging Is Available
for Program Labels or Variables

• ANS 77 FORTRAN 80 Compiler for
Mathematically Oriented Software
Development

• External Trace Module Extends
Emulation Capability to Prototype
System Peripheral Activity

• ICE-858™ In-Circuit Emulator

8085 software development begins using the 8085 macroassembler, PLIM 80, FORTRAN 80 high-level languages and compilers. The compilers operate on Intellec microcomputer development systems under ISIS-II
disk operating systems and produces efficient relocatable object modules compatible for linkage with
PLIM 80, FORTRAN 80 and 8085 macroassembler modules. After compilation, the object program may be
linked to other modules, then located to an in-circuit emulator module (ICE-858) for software execution and
.
debugging in the Intellec environment.

~4-26

SP85 SUPPORT PACKAGE

SP85 SUPPORT PACKAGE
SPECIFICATIONS

Voo= +12V±5%
100 = 80 mA max; 60 mA typ
Vss= -10V±5%
Iss = 30 mA max; 10 ,..A typ

Operating Environment
Required Hardware

Environmental Characteristics

OS002 System Package or equivalent is required.

Operating Temperature -

OS003 System Package is recommended.

O·to 40·C

Operating Humidity - Up to 95% relative humidity without condensation.

Emulation Clock
User's system clock or ICE-85B adaptor socket (6.144 MHz
crystal)

Reference Manuals (supplied)
FORTRAN-80 Programming Manual (9800481)
ISIS-II FORTRAN-80 Compiler Operator's Manual
(9800480)
FORTRAN-80 Programming Reference Card (9800547)
PUM-80 Programming Manual (980026)
ISIS-II PUM-80 Compiler Operator's Manual (9800300)
ICE-85 Operator's Manual (9800463) .

Electrical Characteristics
DC Power Requirements
Vce= +5V±5%
Icc = 12A max; 10A typ

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number
SP85·KIT

Description
SP85 Support Package
Includes:
ICE-85B'" In-circuit emulator (MOS-85B-ICE)
PLIM 80 High-Level Programming Language (MOS-PLM)*
and FORTRAN 80 Compiler (MOS-301)

Requires software license
• MDS is an ordering code only and Is not used as a product name or trademark. MDS" is a registered trademark of Mohawk Data Sciences
Corporation.

14-27

inter

ICE-80™
8080 IN-CIRCUIT EMULATOR

• Connects Intellec® System to User
Configured System Via an External
Cable and 40-pin Plug, Replacing the
User System 8080

• Eliminates Need for Extraneous
Debugging Tools Residing in User
Sy~em
..

• Allows Rei3I-Time (2 MHz) .Emulation of
User System 8080
.

• Provides Address, Data, and 8080
Status Information onLast44 Machine
Cycles Emulated

• Shares Intellec® RAM, ROM, and PROM
Memory and Intellec®I/O Facilities with
User System

• Provides Capability to Examine and
Alter CPU Registers, MainMemory, Pin,
and Flag Values

• Checks for Up to Three Hardware and
Four Software Break Conditions

• Integrates Hardware. and Software
Development Efforts

• Offers Full Symbolic Debugging
. Capabilities

• Available in Diskette or Paper Tape
.
Versions

The Intellec ICE-80 8080 In-Circuit Emulator is an Intellec resident module designed to interface with any user configured 8080 system. With ICE-80 as a replacement for a prototype system 8080, the designer may emUlate the
system's 8080 in real time, single step the system's program, and substitute Intellec memory and I/O for user system
equivalents. Powerful Intellec debug functions are extended into the user system. For the first time the designer may
examine and modify his system with symbolic references instead of absolute values.

14·28

ICE·80™ IN·CIRCUIT EMULATOR
during system debugging. By referring to symbolic
memory addresses, the user may be assured of examining, changing, or breaking at the intended location.

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Integrated Hardware/Software Development
Use of the ICE-80 module enables the system integration phase, which can be so costly and frustrating when
attempting to mesh completed hardware and software
products, to become a convenient two·way debug tool
when begun early in the design cycle. The user prototype need consist of no more than an 8080 CPU socket
and a user bus to begin integration of software and hardware development efforts. With the ICE-80 mapping
capabilities, system resources may be accessed for
missing prototype hardware. Hardware designs may be
tested using system software to drive the final product.
A functional block diagram of the ICE-80 module is
shown in Figure 1.

Symbolic Debugging Capability
ICE-80 provides for user-defined symbolic references to
program memory addresses and data. Symbols may be
substituted for numeric values in any of the.ICE-80 commands. The user is thus relieved from looking up
addresses of variables or program subroutines.
Symbol Table - The user symbol table generated along
with the object file during a PUM-80 compilation or a
MAC80 or resident assembly, is loaded to memory along
with the user program to be emulated. The user may add
to this symbol table any additional symbolic values for
memory addresses, constants, or variables found useful

Symbolic Relerence - ICE-80 provides symbolic definition of all 8080 registers, flags, and selected pins. The
following symbolic references are also provided for user
convenience: TIMER, a 16-bit register containing the
number of ~2 clock pulses elapsed during emulation;
ADDRESS, the address of the last instruction emulated;
INTERRUPTENABLED, the user 8080 interrupt mechanism status; and UPPERLIMIT, the highest RAM address
occupied by user memory.

Debug Capability Inside User System
ICE-80 provides for user debugging of full prototype or
production systems without introducing extraneous
hardware or software test tools. ICE-80 connects to the
user system through the socket provided for the user
8080 in the user system (See Figure 2). Intellec memory
is used for the execution of the ICE-80 software, while
110 provides the user with the ability to communicate
with ICE-80 and receive information on the generation of
the user system. A sample ICE-80 debug session is
shown in Figure 3.

I/O Mapping and Memory
Memory and 110 for the user system may be resident in
the user system or "borrowed" from the Intellec system
through ICE-80's mapping capability.

16 ADDRESS

B DATA OUT

a DATA IN

CONTROL

r-----~-----------l

I
I

I
I
I

I
I

ICE-SO TRACE BOARD

-----------_

.....

CONTROL}
B DATA "SITS

INTELL.EC BUS

16 ADDRESS BITS

Figure 1. Functional Block Diagram 01 ICE-SO Module

14·29

ICE·80™ IN·CIRCUIT EMULATOR
ICE-80 trace board. ICE-80 and the system also commu·
nicate through a control block resident in the Intellec
main memory, which contains. detailed configuration
arid status information transmitted at an emula.tion
break. ICE-80 hardware consists of two PC boards - the
processor and trace boards residing in the Intellec chassis - and a 6-foo!. cable interfaCing to the user system,
The trace and processor boards communicate with the
system on the bus, and also with each other on a separate ICE-80 bus. ICE-80 connects to the user system
through a cable that plugs directly into the socket
provided for the user's 8080.

trace Board
The trace board .talks to the' system as a peripheral
device. It receives commands to ICE-80 and returns
ICE-80. responses. While ICE-80 is executing the user
program, the trace board collects data for each machine
cycle emulated (snap data). The information is continuously stored in high-speed bipolar memory.

Figure 2. ICE·aO Module Installed in User System
Memory Blocking- ICE·80 separates user memory into
16 4K blocks. User I/O is divided into 16 16·port blocks.
Each block of memory or I/O may be defined independ·
ently. The user may assign system equivalents to take
the place of devices not yet designed for the user system during prototyping. In addition, memory or I/O may
be accessed in place of user system devices during prototype or production checkout.
Error Messages - The user may also designate a block
of memory or I/O as nonexistent. ICE-80 issues error
messages when rilemoryor I/O designated as nonexisting is accessed by the user program.

Real-Time Trace
ICE-80 captures valuable trace information while the
user is executing programs in real time. The 8080 status,
the user memory or port addressed, and the data read or
written (snap data), is stored for the last 44 machine
cycles executed. This provides ample data for determining how the user system was reacting prior to emulation
break. It is available whether the break was user initiated or the result of an error condition. For detailed
information on the actions of CPU registers, flags, or
other system operations, the user may operate in single
or multiple step sequences tailored to system debug
needs.

Hardware
The heart of the ICE-80 is a microcomputer system utilizing Intel's 8080 microprocessor as its nucleus. This
system communicates with the Intellec host processor
via .I/O commands .. Host processor .commands and
ICE-80 status are interchanged through registers on the

Breakpoint - The trace board also contains two 24-bit
hardware breakpoint registers which can be loaded by
the user. While in emulation mode, a hardware compari'
tor is constantly monitoring address and status lines for
a match to terminate an emulation. A user probe is also
available for attachment to any user signal. When this
signal goes true a break condition is recognized.
Interrogation - The trace board signals the processor
board when a comma.nd to ICE-80 or break condition has
been detected. The ICE-80 CPU then sends data stored
on the trace board to the control block in memory. Snap
data, along with information on 8080 registers and pin
status and the reason for the emulation break, are then
available for access during interrogation mode. Error
conditions, if present, are transmitted and automatically
displayed for the user.

Processor Board
An 8080 CPU resides on the processor board. During
emulation it executes instructions from the user's program. At all other times it executes instructions from
the control program in the trace module's ROM.
Timing - ,The processor board contains an internal
clock generator to provide clocks to the user emulation
CPU at 2 MHz. The CPU can alternately be driven by a
clock derived from user system signal lines. The clock
source is selected by a jumper option on the board. A
timer on .the trace board counts the ~2 clock pulses during emulation and can provide the user with the exact
timing of the emulation.
On/Off Control - The processor board turns on an emulation when ICE-80 has received a run command from
the system. It terminates emulation when a break condition is detected on the trace board, or the user's program attempts to access memory or I/O ports
designated as nonexistent in the user system, or the
user 8080 is inactive for a quarter of a second.
Status Storage - The address map located on the processor board stores the assigned location of each user
memory or I/O . block. During emulation the processor
board determines whether to send/receive information

14-30

ICE·80™ IN·CIRCUIT EMULATOR
ISIS BOBO MACROASSEMBLER, V1.0

PAGE I

;USER PROGRAM TO OUTPUT A SERIES OF
;CHARACTERS TO SDK·BO CONSOLE DEVICE
1320
0lE3

13200601
13223A3613
1354F
1326 CDE301
132979
132A 93
132B 323713
132E FE40
1330 C22513
1333 C32013
13365A
1337
0000

CO
START:
LOOP:

DAn:
RSLT:

ORG
EOU

1320H
IE3H

MVI
LOA
MDV
CALL
MOV
SBB
STA
CPI
JNZ
JMP

B,I
DAn
C,A
CO
A,C
B
RSLT
40H
LOOP
START

DB
OS
END

5AH
I

;SDK·BO CONSOLE OUT DRIVER
;SET UP B VALUE
;LOAD A WITH DATI VALUE
;SEND C VALUE TO CONSOLE
;RESTORE A
;SUBTRACT B FROM A
;STORE RESULT IN RSLT
;LAST VALUE TO PRINT
;LOOP AGAIN IF A>40H
;ELSE RESTART WHOLE PROCEDURE

ISIS, VI.O
INITIALICE·BO SESSION
·ICE80
(Nole: The SDK·BO Monitor has already been used to initialize the SDK·BO Board)
ISIS ICE·BO, VI.O
""XFORM MEMORY 0 TO I U
"XFORM 10 OFH U

CD
@

"LOAD PROG. HEX
ERR = 067
STAT = IIH TYPE = 06H CMND = 07H ADDR = 1320H GOOD = 06H BAD =04H
·CHANGE MEMORY 1321H FFH
ERR = 067
STAT=IIH TYPE=06H CMND=07H ADDR=I32IH GOOD=FFH BAD=FDH
"LOAD PROG. HEX
"GO FROM START UNTIL RSL T WRITTEN
EMULATION BEGUN
ERR=067
STAT=IIH TYPE=07H CMND=02H
"DISPLAY CYCLES 5

o
®

®
(j)

STAT = A2H ADDR = 1326H DATA = CDH
STAT=B2H ADDR=1327H DATA=E3H
STAT=62H ADDR=1326H DATA=OIH
STAT=04H ADDR=FFFFH DATA=13H
STAT=04H ADDR=FFFEH DATA=29H
"CHANGE DOUBLE REGISTER SP=13FFH
"BASE HEX
"EOUATE STOP =.1333H
"GO FROM START UNTIL STOP EXECUTED THEN DUMP
EMULATION BEGUN
B =OIH C = 41H D=OOH E= OOH H = OOH L= OOH F = 56H A=40H P= 1320H "= 1333H S= 13FFH
EMULATION TERMINATED AT 1333H
"EXIT
"FFFF

Notes
1. Set up user memory and 1/0. The program is set up to execute in block 1 (1000H-1FFFH) of user memory, and requires access to the SDK·eO
monitor (block 0) and 110 ports in block OFH. Bolh porls and memory are defined as available 10 Ihe user syslem. All other memory and 110 Is Initialized by ICE·aO as nonexislenl (guarded).
2. A load command generates an error. The type' and command numbers indicate that a data mismatch occurred on a write to memory command.
The data to be wrillen to address 1320H should have been aSH. When ICE-aO read the data after writing It, a 04H was detected. A change command
10 a differenl memory address hlnls thai bill does nol go to 1 anywhere In Ihis memory block. Examlnallon Indicates that a pin was shorted on Ihe
RAM localed a11300H-13FFH in Ihe prololype syslem. The problem is fixed and a subsequenlload succeeds.
3. A real-lime emulalion is begun. The program Is executed from 'START' (1320H) and continues until 'RSLT' Is wrltlen [in location 132aH, Ihe conlenls of Ihe accumulalor is slored in (wrillen Inlo) 'RSLT'].
4. An error condilion resulls: TYPE 07, CMND 02 Indicate Ihe program accessed Is a guarded area.
5. The lasl5 machine cycles executed are displayed. The last Inslruction executed was a call (CDH). The fourth and fifth cycles are a push'operalion (designaled by slalus 04H) 10 slore Ihe program counler before execuling Ihe call. The slack pOinter was nollnltlallzed In the program and is ac-,
cessing memory location FFFFH.
S. After making a note to inilialize Ihe Slack poinler in the nexl assembly, a temporary fix is effected by seiling the stack pointer 10 the top of user
available memory.
7. After seiling the base for displays to hex and adding Ihe symbol 'STOP' to the symbol table, emulation is started which wlilierminate when the
instruction al1333H ('STOP') is executed. When emulation terminates, a dump of the contents of user 80aO registers Is requested. One can see that
the value of the accumulator is set at 40H, the stack pOinter Is set at 13FFH, the last address executed (") Is 1333H, and the program counter has
been sel to 1320H.
a. Exit returns conlrol to the MDS monitor.

Figure 3" Sample ICE·SO Debug Session

14·31

ICE·80™ IN·CIRCUIT EMULATOR
on the Intellec or user bus by consulting the address
map. The processor board allows the ICE-80 CPU to gain
access to the bus as a master to "borrow" Intellec facilities. At an emulation break, the processor board stores
the status of specified 8080 input and output signals,
disables all interaction with the user bus, and commands the trace board to send stored information to a
control block in Intellec memory for access during interrogation mode.

a broad range of modifiers to provide the user with maximum flexibility in describing the operation to be performed. Listings of emulation commands, interrogation
commands, and utility commands are provided in Table
1, Table 2, and Table 3, respectively.

Command
Base

Cable Card

Display

Prints contents of memory, 8080 registers, input ports, 8080 flags, 8080 pins,
snap data, symbol table, or other diagnostic data on list device. May also be
used for base-to-base conversion, or for
addition or subtraction in any base.

Change

Alters contents of memory, register, output port, or 8080 flag.

XFORM

Defines memory and 110 status.

Looks through memory range for speci·
fied value.

The cable card is included for cable driving. It transmits
address and data bus information to the user system
through a 40'pin connector that plugs into the user system in the socket designed for the 8080 when enabled
by the processor module's user bus control logic.

Software
The ICE-80 software driver is a RAM-based program providing easy to use English language commands for
defining breakpoints, initiating emulation, and interrogating and altering the user system status recorded
during emulation. ICE-80 commands are configured with

Command

Operation
Establishes mode of display for output
data.

Tabie 2. ICE-80 Interrogation Commands

Operation
Initiates real-time emulation and allows
user to specify breakpoints, data retrieval,
and conditions under which emulation
should be reinitiated.

Command

Operation

Load

Fetches user symbol table and object
code from input device.

Save

Sends user symbol table and object code
to output device.

Initiates emulation in single or multiple
instruction increments. User may specify
register dump or tailor diagnostic activity to his needs following each step, and
define conditions under which stepping
should continue.

Equate

Enters symbol name and value to user
symbol table.

Fill

Fills memory range with specified value.

Move

Moves block of memory data to another
area of memory.

Range

Delimits blocks of instructions for which
register dump or tailored diagnostics are
to occur.

Timeout

Enables/disables user CPU 1/4 second
wait state timeout.

List

Continue

Resumes real·time emulation.

Defines list device (diskette-based version only).

Call

Emulates user system interrupt.

Exit

Returns program control to monitor.

Step

Table 1. ICE-80 Emulation Commands

Table 3. ICE·80 Utility Commands

SPECIFICATIONS

Diskette·Based
Operating Environment

Paper Tape·Based
Operating Environment

Required Hardware
Intellec system
32K bytes RAM memory
System console
Inteilec diskette operating system
ICE-80 module

Required Hardware
Intellec system
System console
Reader device
Punch device
ICE-80 module
Required Software
System monitor

Required Software
System monitor
1515-/1

14·32

ICE·80lM IN·CIRCUIT EMULATOR
System Clock

100= 79 rnA max; 45 rnA typ
Vee= -9V, ±5%
lee= 1 rnA max; 1"A typ

Crystal controlled 2.185 MHz±0.01%. May be replaced
by user clock through jumper selection.

Physical Characteristics
Width - 12.00 in. (30.48 cm)
Height - 6.75 in. (17.15 cm)
Depth - 0.50 in. (1.27 cm)
Weight - 8.00 Ib (3.64 kg)

Electrical Characteristics
DC Power Requirements
Vee= +5V, ±5%
lee= 9.81A max; 6.90A typ
Voo = + 12V, ± 5%

Environmental Characteristics
Operating Temperature - O·C to 40·C
Operating Humidity - Up to 95% relative humidity

without condensation

Equipment Supplied
Printed circuit modules (2)
Interface cables and buffer board
ICE·80 software driver, paper tape version
(lCE-80 software driver, diskette-based version is supplied with diskette operating systems)
Operator's Manual

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

MDS-80-ICE·

8080 CPU in-circuit emulator, .cable
assembly and interactive software
included

• MDS is an ordering code only and is not used as a product name or trademark. MDS~ is a registered trademark of Mohawk Data Sciences
Corporation.
.

14-33

intel'
ICE-858™
MCS-85™ IN-CIRCUIT EMULATOR
WITH MULTI-ICE™ SOFTWARE
• Offers full symbolic debugging
capability for both assembly language
and Intel's high-level compiler
languages PL/M-80 and FORTRAN-80

• Connects the Intellec® system
resources to the user-configured
system via a 40-pin adaptor plug
• Executes user system software in
real-time (5 MHz clock)

• The Multi-ICETM software provides:
-for two In-Circuit Emulators to
operate simultaneously in a single
Intellec Microcomputer Development
System.
-support for ICE 85/85™, 85/49™, and
85/41A™ Emulator combinations
-enhanced software features:
symbolic display of addresses,
macro commands, compound
commands, software
synchronization of processes, and
INCLUDE file capability.

• Allows user-configured system to
share Intellec® memory and I/O
facilities
• Provides 1023 states of 8085 trace data
• Displays trace data from the user's
8085 in assembler mnemonics and
allows personality groupings of data
sampled by the external 18-channel
trace module

The ICE-8S8™ module resides in the Intellec® Microcomputer Development System and interfaces to the user
system's 8085. It provides the ability to examine and alter MCS-8S™ registers, memory, flag values, interrupt
bits and I/O ports. Using the ICE-8S8 module, the designer can execute prototype software in real-time or
single-step mode and can substitute Intellec® system memory and I/O for user system equivalent. ICE
capability can be extended to the rest of the user system peripheral circuitry by allowing the user to create and
execute a library of user-defined peripheral chip analyzer routines.
Multi-ICE In-Circuit Emulator is a software product which allows two Intel In-Circuit Emulators to run
simultaneously in a single Intellec Microcomputer Development System. Multi-ICE software used in lieu of the
standard ICE software gives users full control of the two ICE modules for debugging of multi-processor
systems.

©INTEL CORPORATION. 1980.

14-34
«>

AFN·01557A
-

ICE-8SBTM IN-CIRCUIT EMULATOR
SYMBOLIC DEBUGGING CAPABILITY

to provide ready acknowledge when accessing
resources mapped to the Intellec.

ICE-858 allows the user to make symbolic references to I/O ports, memory addresses and data in his
program. Symbols and PUM-80 statement number
may be substituted for numeric values in any of the
ICE-85 commands. The user is relieved from looking
up addresses of variables or program subroutines.
The user symbol table generated along with the object file during a PUM-80 or FORTRAN-80 compilation or by the ISIS-II 8080/8085 Macro Assembler is
loaded into the Intellec® System memory along with
the user program which is to be emulated. The user
may add to this symbol table any additional symbolic
values for memory addresses, constants, or variables that are found useful during system debugging. 8y referring to symbolic memory addresses,
the user can examine, change or break at the intended location.
ICE-858 provides symbolic definition of all 8085 registers, interrupt bits and flags. The following symbolic references are also provided for user convenience: TIMER, the low-order 16 bits of a register
containing the number of 2 MHz clock pulses
elapsed during emulation; HTIMER, the high-order
16 bits of the timer counter; PPC, the address of the
last instruction emulated; 8UFFERSIZE, the number
of frames of valid trace data (between 0 and 1022).

The user can also designate a block of memory or I/O
as nonexistent. ICE-858 issues' error messages
when memory or I/O designated as nonexistent is
accessed by the user program.

INTEGRATED HARDWARE/SOFTWARE
DEVELOPMENT
The user prototype need consist of no more than an
8085 CPU socket and a user bus to begin integration
of software and hardware development efforts.
Through ICE-858 mapping capabilities, Intellec®
System equivalents can be accessed for missing
prototype hardware. Hardware designs can be
tested using the system software which will drive the
final product.
The system integration phase, which can be so
costly when attempting to mesh completed hardWare and software products, becomes a convenient
two-way debug tool when begun early in the design
cycle.
.

PERSONALITY GROUPED DISPLAYS
Trace data in the 1023 by 42-channel real-time trace
memory buffer is displayed in easy to read format.
The user has the option to specify trace data displays in actual 8085 assembler instruction
mnemonics. The data collected from the External
Trace Module can be grouped and symbolically
named according to user specifications and displayed in the appropriate number base designation.
Simple ICE-858 commands allow the user to select
any portion of the 42-bit trace buffer for immediate
display.

MEMORY AND I/O MAPPING

INTERROGATION AND
UTILITY COMMANDS
DISPLAY/
CHANGE

Display/Changes the values of symbols
and the contents of 8085 registers,
pseudo-registers, status flags, interrupt bits, I/O ports and memory.

EVALUATE Displays the value of an expression in
the bihary, octal, decimal or hexadecimal.

Memory and I/Ofor the user system can be resident
in the user system or "borrowed" from the Intellec®
System through ICE-858's mapping capability.

Searches user memory between locations in a user program for specified
contents.

ICE-858 separates user memory into 32 2K blocks.
Each block of memory can be defined independently. The user may assign Intellec® System equivalents to take the place of devices not yet designed
for the user system during prototyping. Ih addition,
Intellec® System memory or I/O can be accessed in
place of suspect user system devices during prototyping qr production checkout.

CALL

Emulates a procedure starting at a
specified memory address in user
memory.

ICALL

Executes a user-supplied procedure
starting at a specified memory address
in the Intellec(!) System memory.

EXECUTE

Saves emulated program registers and
emulates a user-supplied subroutine to
access peripheral chips in the user's
system.

User ready synchronization-resource borrowing
from the Intellec System is (at user option) independent of the user system; the user does not need
14-35
...!~---

ICE-8SBTM IN-CIRCUIT EMULATOR
REALTIME TRACE

EXTERNAL TRACE MODULE.

ICE-858 captures valuable trace information from
the emulating CPU and the External Trace Module
while the user is.executing.prClgrams in real time.
The 8085 status, the user memory or port addressed,
the data read or written, .theserial data lines and data
from 18 external signals, is stored for the last 1023
machine states executed (511 machine cycles).This
provides ample data for determining how the user
system was reacting prior to emulation break. It is
available whether the break was user-initiated or the
result of an error condition.

TTL level signals from 18 points in the user system
may be synchronously sampled by the External
Trace Module and collected in ICE-858's trace buffer. The signals can be collected from a single peripheral chip via the supplied 40-pin DIP clip or may
be placed by the user on up to 18 separate signal
nodes using the supplied 18 individual probe clips.
These signals are included in the 42-channel breakpoint comparisons and clock qualifiers. Also,data
from these 18 channels may be displayed in meaningful, user-defined groupings.

For detailed information on the actions of CPU registers,flags, or other system operations, the user
may operate in single or mUlti-step sequences tailored to system debug needs.

SYNCHRONOUS OPERATION
WITH OTHER DESIGN AIDS
ICE-858 can be synchronized with other Intellec®
design aids by means of two external synchronization lines. These lines are used to enable and disable
ICE-858 trace data collection and to cause break
conditions based on an external signal which may
not be included in the ICE-858 breakpoint registers.
In addition, ICE-858 can generate signals on these
lines which may be used to ·controlother design
aids.

BREAK REGISTERS/
TRACE MEMORY
ICE-858 has two breakpoint registers which are
used to break emulation, and two trace qualifier
registers which are used to control the collection of
trace data during emulation. Each register is 42
entries wide, one entry for each channel and each
entry can take anyone of the three values 0, 1 or
"don't care."

EMULATION CONTROLS AND
COMMANDS
GROUP

Defines into a symbolically named
group, a channel or combination of
channels from the 8085 Microprocessor
and/or the External Trace Module.

Initiates real-time emulation and controls emulation break conditions.

STEP

Initiates emulation in single instruction
steps. User may specify the type and
amount of information displayed following each step, and define conditions
under which stepping should continue.

The trace buffer, alsp.42 entries wide, collects. data
sampled from 248085 processor channels and 18
external channels sampled by the External Trace
Module. The signals collected from the 8085 include
address lines, data lines, status lines and serial input
and output lines. The 18 channels extending from
the External Trace Module synchronously sample
and collect into the trace buffer any user-specified
TTL compatible signal from the rest of the prototype
system. "8re.ak" and "trace qualification" may
therefore occur as a result of a match of any combination of up to 42 channels of CPU and external
circuitry signals.
.

Prints the user.-specified portion of the
trace memory to the selected list device.

MULTI-ICE™OPERATION
Multi-ICE software is a debug tool which allows two
ICE emulators to begin and stop in sequence. Once
started, two ICE emulators emUlate simultaneously
and independently. Thus, Multi-ICE software permits the debugging of asynchronous or synchronous. multi-processor systems.

14·36
-.. -~

ICE-8S8™ IN-CIRCUIT EMULATOR
A conceptual model for the Multi-ICE software can
be illustrated with the following block diagram.

Macro Command
A macro isaset of commands which is given a name.
Thus, a group of commands which is executed frequently may be defined as a macro. Each time the
user wants to execute that group of commands, he
may just invoke the macro by typing a colon followed by the macro name. Up to ten parameters may
be passed to the macro.

Block Diagram of Multi-ICE™ Operation
There are three processes in the Multi-ICE environment: the Host process and the two ICE processes to
control the two ICE hardware modules. The processor for these three processes is the microcomputer in the Intellec Microcomputer Development
System. Only the Host process is active when MultiICE software is invoked. The Parser interfaces with
the console, receives commands from the console
or from a file, translates them into intermediate
code, and loads the code into the Host command
code buffer or ICE command code buffers.
The Host process executes commands from its
command code buffer using the execution software
and hardware of the Host's current environment,
either environment 1 or environment 2 (EN1 or EN2),
as required. EN1 and EN2 are the operating
environments of the two In-Circuit Emulators.
The user can change the execution environment
(from EN1 to EN2 or vice versa) with the SWITCH
command. Once the environment is selected, ICE
operation is the same as with standard ICE software.
In addition, the enhanced software capabilities are
available to the user.
The two ICE processes (PR1 and PR2) execute
commands from their command code buffers in
their own environments (PR1 in EN1 and PR2 in
EN2). The main functions of the two ICE execution
processes are to control the operations of the two
ICE hardware sets. The ACTIVATE command controls the execution of the ICE processes. Commands
are passed on to each ICE unit to initiate the desired
ICE functions.
The two ICE hardware units accept commands from
the Host process or ICE processes. Once emulations
start, the two ICE hardware sets will operate until a
break condition is met or processing is interrupted
by commands from the ICE execution processes.

Macro commands may be defined at the beginning
of a debug session and then can be used throughout
the whole session. If the user wants to save the
macros for later use, he may use the PUT command
to save the macro on diskette, or the user may edit
the macro file off-line using the Intellec text editor.
Later, the user may use the INCLUDE command to
bring in the macro definition file that he created.
Example:
'DEFINE MACRO
INITMEM
.. SWITCH = EN1
.. BYTE 0 TO 100=0
"LOAD:F1 :DRIVER
.. SWITCH = EN2
"LOAD:F1 :DR2
.. EM

;This macro clears the
memory and then loads the
programs.
;Select environment 1 (ICE
Module 1)
;Initialize memory to O.
;Load user program into
memory for ICE Module 1.
;Select environment 2 (ICE
Module 2)
;Load user program into
memory for ICE Module 2
;End of Macro
;To execute this Macro, user
types :INITMEM

Compound Command
Compound commands provide conditional execution of commands (IF Command) and execution of
commands repeatedly until certain conditions are
met (COUNT, REPEAT Commands).
Compound commands and Macro commands may
be nested any number of times.
Example:
'DEFINE .1 = 0
'COUNT 100H
.. IF .1 AND 1 THEN
... BYT.I = .1

;Define symbol .I to 0
;Repeat the following
commands 100H times
;Check if .1 is odd
;Fill the memory at location .1
to value .1

... END

".1

.1 + 1

.. END

;Increment .1 by 1
;Command executes upon
carriage-return after END

Symbolic Display of Addresses

INCLUDE File Capability

The user has the option of displayi ng a 16-bit
address in the form of a symbol name or line number
plus a hex number offset.

The INCLUDE command causes input to be taken
from the file specified until the end of the file is
encountered, at which point, input continues to be

14-37

ICE-85BTM.IN-CIRCUIT EMULATOR
taken from the previous source. Nesting of INCLUDES is permitted. Since the command code file
can be complex, the ability to edit offline becornes
desirable. The INCLUDE command allows the user
to pull in command code files and Macro commands
created offline which can then be used for the particular debugging session:
Example:
'INCLUDE :F1.:PROG1
'MAP 0 lENGTH 64K
=USER·

'MAP 100 TO FF
=USER
'SWITCH = EN2
'lOAD :F2:lED.HEX
'sWITcH = EN1 .

PROCESSOR 1

PROCESSOR'
DORMAHT

;Cause input to be taken
from file PROG1
;Contents of the file
PROG1 are listed on
screen as they are
executed.

Softwar, Synchronization of Processes
Up to three processes (Host, PR1 and PR2) can be
active simultaneously in the system. An ICE process
can be activated (ACTIVATE), suspended (SUSPEND), kiiled (Kill), or continued (CONTINUE). The
Host process. can wait for other processes to become dormant before it becomes active again.
Through these synchronization commands; the user
can create a system test file off-line yet be able to
synchronize the three processes when the actual
system test is executed.
Example:
The capability of the software synchronization
commands is demonstrated by the. foll,owing example. The flowchart shows the synchronization
requirements. The program steps show the actual
implementation.

;End of the file PROG1
;After the end. of file is
reached, control is
returned to console.

HOST PROCESSOR

PROCESSOR 2

ACTIVE

--TAC~-

ACTIVATE PROCESSOR I

I PROCESSOR 2 " I.
I eQUANT
'
'ACTIVATE PRl

;Activate PRt

.'GO FROM 800

;Slart ICE Module 1
;End 01 Activate block

,"END

PRl EMULATION BeGUN
'SWI",EN2
~REPEAT

,'WHILE'
< > ,LOOP
.'ICT PR2
..'GO TILL .lOOP OR .END
..'REQISTER
,,"END
.·WAIT·PR2
.'IF PC=.LOOP THEN
.. ·SUSPEND PRl .

~-~--

,,"END
,'END

;Swltch execution Environment 10 EN2
;Repeat·the following block of
commands whirs PC Is nol aquallD .LOOp
;~ctlv8te PR2

. ;Go till instruction at location. Loop
or at location .END Is executed .
;Dlsplay the registers
;End of Activate block
;Walt u.ntll PR2 Is dormant

:End of IF block
:End of REPEAT block

I PROCESSOIII
I
DO«.....NT

Flowchart of the Example for Demonstrating Multi-ICETM Synchronization Capability

14-38

ICE-858™ IN-CIRCUIT EMULATOR
SPECIFICATIONS

Emulation Clock

ICE-SSB T " Operating Environment

User's system clock or ICE-85B adaptor socket
(10.0 MHz Crystal)

Required Hardware:
Intellec® Microcomputer Development System
(64K bytes RAM for Multi-ICE software)
(32K bytes RAM single ICE software)
System Console
Intellec® Diskette Operating System
ICE-85B Module
Required Software:
System Monitor
ISIS-II
ICE-85B or Multi-ICE Software

Physical Characteristics
Printed Circuit Boards:
Width: 12.00 in. (30.48 cm)
Height: 6.75 in. (1715 cm)
Depth: 0.50 in. (1.27 cm)
Packaged Weight: 6.00 Ib (2.73 kg)
Electrical Characteristics
DC Power:
Vcc=+5V±5%
Icc = 12A maximum; 10A typical
Voo = + 12V±.5%
100 = 80 mA maximum; 60 mA typical
V BB = - 10V ± 5%
IBB= 1 mAmaximum; 10 p.A typical

Equipment Supplied
18-Channel External Trace Module
Printed Circuit Boards (2)
Interface Cable and Emulation Buffer Module
Operator's Manuals
ICE-85B Software
Multi-ICE Software
Contains software that supports 85/85
Emulators, 85/49 Emulators and 85/41A
Emulators

L _________ _

Environmental Characteristics
Operating Temperatu re: 0° to 40°C
Operating Humidity:
Up to 95% relative
humidity without
condensation.

~---

1---------- ~----

r--~'---,-~

SYNC 0

TRACE MEMOR¥

AND
QUALIFIER
REGISTERS

CHIP DATA I

CONTROL

ADDRESS

TO USER'S

SOCKET

I
I

t=~~I=======:!:::=;;;;=::::!-----_1oSYNC
1
L ____________________
_~

ICE 8S TRACE BOARD

B085 CHIP CONTROLLER

,.----------,
K====J ~:~:~~

SIGNAL BUFFERS

l __________ J

18 EXTERNAL TRACE BUFFER

ICE-85BTM BLOCK DIAGRAM

14·39

TRACE

ICE-8SBTM IN-CIRCUIT EMULATOR
Ordering Information
Part Number

Description

MDS*-85S-ICE

8085 CPU In-Circuit Emulator,
18-Channel External Trace
Module and Multi-ICE
software

MDS*-85U-ICE

Upgrade kit to convert ICE-85
or ICE-85A to ICE-85S
functionality. Consists of
Multi-ICE software and 5MHz
Hardware

"'MDS" is an ordering code only. and is not used as a product
name or trademark. MDS® is a registered trademark of Mohawk
Data Sciences Corp.

14·40

iAPX 86/88 Support
Options

SERIES II
8086/8088 SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PACKAGES
• CONY 86/88 Converter for Conversion
of 8080/8085 Assembly Language
Source Code to 8086/8088 Assembly
Language Source Code

• PL/M 86/88 High Level Programming
Language
• ASM 86/88 Macro Assembler for
8086/8088 Assembly Language
Programming

• OH 86/88 Object-to-Hexadecimal
Converter

• LINK 86/88 and LOC 86/88 Linkage and
Relocation Utilities

• LIB 86/88 Library Manager

The Series II 8086/8088 software development packages provide a set of software development tools for the
8086 and the 8088 microprocessors and iSBC 86/12A single board computer. The package operates under the
ISIS-II operating system on InteHec Microcomputer Development Systems-Model 800 or Series II-thus
minimizing requirements for additional hardware or training for Intel Microcomputer Development System
users.
These packages permit' 8080/8085 users to efficiently upgrade existing programs into 8086/8088 code from
either 8080/8085 assembly language source code or PLIM 80 source code.
.
For the new Intel Microcomputer Development System user, the packages operating on an Intellec Series II,
such as a Model 235, provide total 8086/8088 software development capability.

15·1

9800757-04

intJ

SERIES II 8086/8088 SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PACKAGES

SERIES II
PL/M 86/88 COMPILER
• Language is Upward Compatible from
PL/M 80, Assuring MCS-80/85™ Design
Portability
• Supports 16-.bit Signed Integer and
32-bit Floating Point Arithmetic in
Accordlilnce with IEEE Proposed
Standard

• Produces Relocatable Object Code
Which is Linkable to All Other 8086
Object Modules
• Supports Full Extended Addressing
Features of the 8086 and the 8088·
Microprocessors (Up to 1 Mbyte)
• Code Optimization Assures Efficient
Code Generation and Minimum
Application Memory Utilization

• Easy-to-Learn,.Block-Structured
Language Encourages Program
Modularity

Like its counterpart for MCS-80/85 program development, PLIM 86/88 is an advanced, structured ~igh-Ieliel
programming language. The PLIM 86/88 compiler was created specifically for performing software development for the Intel 8086 and 8088 Microprocessors.
PLIM 86/88 has significant neW capabilities over PLIM 80 that take advantage of the new facilities provided by
the 8086 and the 8088 microprocessors, yet the PLIM 86/88 language remains compatible with PLIM 80.
With the exception of hardware-dependent modules, such as interrupt handlers, PLIM 80 applications may be
recompiled with PLIM 86/88 with little need for modification. PLIM 86/88, like PLIM 80, is easy to learn,
facilitates rapid program development, and reduces program maintenance costs.
PLIM is a powerful, structured, high-level system implementation language in which program statements can
naturally express the program algorithm. This frees the programmer to concentrate on the logic of the
program without concern for burdensome details of machine or assembly language programming (such as
register allocation, meanings of assembler mnemonics, etc.).
The PLIM 86/88 compiler efficiently converts free-form PLIM language statements into equivalent 8088/8086
machine instructions. Substantially fewer PLIM statements are necessary for a given application than if it were
programmed at the assembly language or machine code level.
The use of PLIM high-level language for system programming, instead of assembly language, results in a high
degree of engineering productivity during project development. This translates into significant reductions in
initial software development and follow"on maintenance costs for the user.

FEATURES

structure allows the use of REENTRANT which is
especially useful in system design.

Major features of the Intel PLIM 86/88 compiler and
programming language include:

Language Compatibility
PLIM 86/88 object modules are compatible with object modules generated by all other 86/88 translators. This means that PLlMprograms may be
linked to programs written in any other 86/88
languages.

Block Structure
PLIM source code is developed in a series of modules, procedures, and blocks. Encouraging program
modularity in this manner makes programs more
readable, and easier to maintain and debug. The
language becomes more flexible by clearly defining
the scope of user variables (local to a private procedure, global to a public module, for example).

Object modules are compatible with ICE-88 and
ICE-86 units; DEBUG compiler control provides the
In-Circuit Emulators with symbolic debugging
capabilities.

The use of procedures to break down a large problem is paramount to productive software development. The PLIM 86/88 implementation of a block

PLIM 86/88 Language is upward-compatible with
PLIM 80, so that application programs may be easily
ported to run on the iAPX 86 or 88.

15-2

AFN-01239B

SERIES 118086/8088 SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PACKAGES

Supports Five Data Types

Interrupt Handling

PUM makes use of five data types for various applications. These data types range from one to four
bytes, and facilitate various arithmetic, logic, and
addressing functions:

PUM has the facility for generating interrupts to
the iAPX 86 or 88 via software. A procedure may be
defined with the INTERRUPT attribute, and the
compiler will automatically initialize an interrupt
vector at the appropriate memory location. The
compiler will also generate. code to same and restore the processor status, for execution of the
user-defined interrupt handler routine. The procedure SET$INTERRUPT, the function retuning
an INTERRUPT$PTR, and the PLIM statement
CAUSE$INTERRUPT all add flexibility to user programs involving interrupt handling.

-Byte:
-Word:
-Integer:
-Real:
-Pointer:

8-bit unsigned number
16-bit unsigned number
16-bit signed number
32-bit floating point number
16-bit or 32-bit memory address
indicator

Another powerful facility allows the use of BASED
variables that map more than one variable to the
same memory location. This is especially useful for
passing parameters, relative and absolute addressing, and memory allocation.

Segmentation Control
The PUM 86/88 compiler takes full advantage of
program addressing with the SMALL, COMPACT,
MEDIUM, and LARGE segmentation controls. Programs with less than 64KB total code space can
exploit the most efficient memory addressing
schemes, which lowers total memory requirements.
Larger programs can exploit the flexibility of extended one-megabyte addressing.

Two Data Structuring Facilities
In addition to the five data types and based variables,
PUM supports two data structuring facilities. These
add flexibility to the referencing of data stored in
large groups.
-Array:
-Structure:

Code Optimization
The PUM 86/88 compiler offers four levels of optimization for significantly reducing overall program
size.

Indexed list of same type data
elements
Named collection of same or different type data elements

-Combinations
of Each:
Arrays of structures
structures of arrays

-Combination or "folding" of constant expressions; and short-circuit evaluation of Boolean expressions.
-"Strength reductions" (such as a shift left rather
than multiply by 2); and elimination of common
sUb-expressions within the same block.
-Machine code optimizations; elimination of
superfluous branches; re-use of duplicate code;
removal of unreadable code.
-Byte comparisons (rather than 20-bit address calculations) for pointer variables; optimization of
based-variable operations.

8087 Numerics Support
PL/M programs that use 32-bit REAL data may be
executed using the Numeric Data Processor for improved performance. All floating-point operations
supported by PUM may be executed on the 8087
NDP, or the 8087 Emulator (a software module)
provided with the package. Determination of use of
the chip or emulator takes place at link-time, allowing compilations to be run-time independent.

Compiler Controls

Built-In String Handling Facilities

The PUM 86/88 compiler offers more than 25 controls that facilitate such features as:

The PUM 86/88 language contains built-in functions
for string manipulaiton. These byte and word functions perform the following operations on character
strings: MOVE, COMPARE, TRANSLATE, SEARCH,
SKIP, and SET.

-Conditional compilation
-Intra- and Inter-module cross reference
-Corresponding assembly language code in the
. listing file
-Setting overflow conditions for run-time handling

15-3

AFN.()12398

inter

.SERIES II BOB6/80BB.S.OFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PACKAGES

BENEFITS

because less programming resources are required
for a given programmed function.

PL/M86/88 is designed to be an efficient, costeffective solution to the special requirements of
iAPX 86 oreE! Microsystem Software Development,
as illustrated by the following benefits of PLIM use:

Increased Reliability
PLIM 86/88 is designed to aid in the development of
reliable software (PLIM 86/88 programs are simple
statements of the program algorithm). This substantially reduces th~ risk of costly correction of errors in
systems that have already reached full production
status, as the more simply stated the program is, the
more likely it is to perform its intended function.

Low Learning Effort
PLIM 86/88 is easy to learn and to use, even for the
novice programmer.

Earlier Project Completion
Critical projects are completed much earlier than
otherwise possible because PL/M 86/88" a
structured high-level language, increases programmer productivity.

Easier Enhancements and Maintenance
Programs written in PL/M tend to be selfdocumenting, thus easier to read and understand.
This means it is easier to enhance and maintain
PLIM programs as the system capabilities expand
and future products are developed.

Lower Development Cost·
Increases in programmer productivity translate immediately into lower software development costs

SERIES II
8086/8088 MACRO ASSEMBLER
• Powerful and Flexible Text Macro
Facility with Three Macro Listing.
Options to Aid Debugging

• High-Level Data Structuring Facilities
Such as "STRUCTUREs" and
"RECORDs"

• Highly Mnemonic and Compact
Language, Most Mnemonics Represent
Several Distinct Machine .Instructions

• Over 120 Detailed and Fully Documented Error Messages

• "Strongly Typed" Assembler Helps

• Produces Relocatable and Linkable

Detect Errors at Assembly Time

Object Code. .

ASM 86/88 is the "high-level" macro assembler for the 8086/8088 assembly language. ASM 86/88 translates
symbolic 8086/8088 assembly language mne'monics into 8086/8088 relocatable object code.
ASM 86/88 should be used where maximum code efficiency and hardware control is needed. The 8086/8088
assembly language includes approximately.JOO instruction mnemonics. From these few mnemonics the
assembler can generate over 3,800 distinct machine instructions. Therefore, the software development task is
simplified, as the programmer need.know only 100 mnemonics to generate all possible 8086/8088 machine
instructions. ASM 86/88 will generate the shortest machine instruction possible given no forward referencing
or given explicit information as to the characteristics of forward referenced symbols.
ASM 86/88 offers many features normally ·found only in high-level languages. The 8086/8088 assembly
language is strongly typed. The assembler performs extensive' checks on the usage of variables and labels:
The assembler uses the attributes which are derived explicitly when a variable or label is first defined, then
makes sure that each use of the symbol in later· instructions conforms to the usage defined for that symbol.
This means that many programming errorswHlbe detected when the program is assembled, long before it is
being debugged on hardware.
15-4

AFN·DI239B

SERIES II 8086/8088 SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PACKAGES

FEATURES

Over 120 Detailed Error Messages

Major features of the Intel 8086/8088 assembler and
assembly language include:

Powerful and Flexible Text Macro Facility
-

Macro calls may appear anywhere
Allows user to define the syntax of each macro
Built-in functions
conditional assembly (IF-THEN-ELSE, WHILE)
repetition (REPEAT)
string processing functions (MATCH)
support of assembly time I/O to console (IN, OUT)
Three Macro Listing Options include a GEN
mode which provides a complete trace of all
macro calls and expansions

Support for ICE-86™ Emulation and
Symbolic Debugging
-

High-Level Data Structuring Capability
-

Appear both in regular list file and error print file.
User documentation fully explains the occurrence of each error and suggests a method to
correct it.

STRUCTURES: Defined to be a template and
then used to allocate storage. The familiar dot
notation may be used to form instruction
addresses with structure fields.
ARRAYS: Indexed list of same type data elements.
RECORDS: Allows bit-templates to be defined
and used as instruction operands and/or to allocate storage.

Debug options for inclusion of symbol table in
object modules for In-Circuit Emulation with
symbolic debugging.

Generates Relocatable and Linkable
Object Code-Fully Compatible with
LINK 86/88, LOC 86/88 and LIB 86/88
-

Permits ASM 86/88 programs to be developed
and debugged in small modules. These modules
can be easily linked with other ASM 86/88 or
PL/M 86/88 object modules and/or library
routines to form a complete application system.

Fully Supports 8086/8088 Addressing
Modes
-

Provides for complex address expressions involving base and indexing registers and
(structure) field offsets.
Powerful EQU facility allows complicated expressions to be named and the name can be used
as a synonym for the expression throughout the
module.

Powerful STRING MANIPULATION
INSTRUCTIONS
-

Permit direct transfers to or from memory or the
accumulator.
Can be prefixed with a repeat operator for repetitive execution with a count-down and a condition test.

15·5

BENEFITS
The 8086/8088 macro assembler allows the extensive capabilities of the 8086/8088 to be fully
exploited. In any application, time and space critical
routines can be effectively written in ASM 86/88.
The 8086/88 assembleroutputs relocatable and
linkable object modules. These object modules may
be easily combined with object modules written in
PLIM 86/88-lntel's structured, high-level programming language. ASM 86/88 compliments PUM
86/88 as the programmer may choose to write each
module in the language most appropriate to the task
and then combine the modules into the complete
applications program using the 8086/8088 relocation and linkage utilities.

AFN·01239B

SERIES II 8086/8088 SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PACKAGES

CONV 86
MCS-80/85™ to 86/88 ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
CONVERTER UTILITY PROGRAM
• Automatically Generates Proper ASM
86/88 Directives to Set Up a "Virtual
8080" Environment that is Compatible
with PL/M 86/88

• Translates 8080/8085 Assembly
Language Source Code to 8086/8088
Assembly Language Source Code
• Provides a Fast and Accurate Means
to Convert 8080/8085 Programs to the
8086 and the 8088, Facilitating
Program Portability

In support of Intel's commitment to software portability, CONV 86/88 is offered as a tool to move 8080/8085
programs to the 8086 and the 8088. A comprehensive manual, "MCS-86 Assembly Language Converter
Operating Instructions for ISIS-II Users" (9800642). covers the entire conversion process. Detailed methodology of the conversion process is fully described therein.

CONV 86/88 will accept as input an error-free
8080/8085 assembly-language source file and
optional controls, and produce as output, optional PRINT and OUTPUT files.

The PRINT file is a formatted copy of the 8080/
8085 source and the 8086/8088 source file with
embedded caution messages.

Because CONV 86/88 is a transliteration process,
there is the possibility of as much as a 15%-20%
code expansion over the 8080/8085 code. For compactness and efficiency it is recommended that critical portions of programs be re-coded in 8086/8088
assembly language.

The OUTPUT file is an 8086/8088 source file.

Also, as a consequence of the transliteration, some
manual editing may be required for converting instruction sequences dependent on:

CONV 86/88 issues a caution message when it
detects a potential problem in the converted
8086/8088 code.

-instruction length, timing, or encoding
~interrupt processing*
-PL/M parameter passing conventions*

A transliteration of the 8080/8085 programs occurs, with each 8080/8085 construct mapped to
its exact 8086/8088 counterpart:

*Mechanical editing procedures for these are suggested in the converter manual.

Registers
Condition flags
Instruction
Operands
Assembler directives
Assembler control lines
Macros

The accompanying figure illustrates the flow of the
conversion process. Initially, the abstract program
may be represented in 8080/8085 or 8086/8088 assembly language to execute on that respective
target machine. The conversion process is porting a
source destined for the 8080/8085 to the 8086 or the
8088 via CONV 86/88.
15-6
.0

AFN-012398
..•

intel·

SERIES II 8086/8088 SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PACKAGES

ABSTRACT PROGRAM

SOURCE CODE
IN 8080/8085
ASSEMBLY LANG

~,~
FOR
8080/8085

EXECUTE
ON
8080/8085

SOURCE CODE
IN 8088/8088
ASSEMBLY LANG

------ALGORITHM

ASSEMBLE
FOR
8088/8088 .

CONV 88/88

-----------

EQUIVALENT
FUNCTION

-----------

-----------------------

EXECUTE
ON
8088/8088

Figure 1. Porting 8080/8085 Source Code to the 8086/8088

LINK 86
• Automatic Combination of Separately
Compiled or Assembled 8086/8088
Programs Into a Relocatable Module

• Automatic Generation of a Summary
Map Giving Results of the LINK 86/88
Process

• Automatic Selection of Required
Modules from Specified Librari.es to
Satisfy Symbolic References

• Abbrev.iated Control Syntax.
• Relocatable Modules may be Merged
into a Single Module Suitable for
Inclusion in a Library
• Supports "Incremental" Linking
• Supports Type Checking of. Public and
External Symbols

• Extensive Debug Symbol
Manipulation, Allowing Line Numbers,
Local Symbols, and Public Symbols to
be Purged and Listed Selectively

LINK 86/88 combines object modules specified in the LINK 86/88 input list into a single output module. LINK
86/88 combines segments from the input modules according to the order in which the modules are listed.
LINK 86/88 will accept libraries and object modules built from PLIM 86/88, ASM 86/88, or any other translator
generating Intel's 8086 Relocatable Object Modules.
.
.
.
.support for incremental linking is provided since an output module produced by LINK 86/88 can be aninput to
another link.At each stage in the incremental linking proces!i,. unneeded public symbols may be purged.
LINK 86/88 supports type checking of PUBLIC and EXTERNAL symbols reporting an error iftheirtypes are not
consistent.
LINK 86/88 will link any valid setof input modules without any controls. However,'controls are available to control the output of diagnostic information in the LINK 86/88 process and to control the content of the output
module.
LINK 86/88 allows the user to create a large program as the combination of several smaller, separately compiled modules. After development and debugging of these component modules the user can link them
together, locate them using LOC 86/88 and enter final testing with much' of the work accomplished.

15-7

AFN-01239B

inter

SERIES II 8086/8088 SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PACKAGES

LIB 86/88
•. Libraries Can be Used as Input to
LINK 86/88 Which Will Automatically
Link Modules from the Library that
Satisfy External References in the
Modules Being Linked

• LIB a6/88 Is a Library Manager
Program which Allows You to:
~reate Specially Formatted Files to
¢ontain Libraries of Object Modules

Maintain These Libraries by Adding or
Dele.ting Modules
Print a Listing of the Modules and
Public Symbols in a Library File
!

•

• Abbreviated Control Syntax

Libraries aid in the job of building programs. The library manager program LIB 86/88 creates and maintains
files containing object modules. The operation ,of LIB 86/88 is controlled by commands to indicate which operation LIB 86/88 is to perform. The commands are:
CREATE:
ADD:
DELETE:
LIST:
EXIT:

creates an empty library file
adds object modules to a library file
qel~tes modules from a library file
lists the module directory of .library files
terminates the LIB 86 program and returns control to ISIS-II

When using object libraries, the linker will call only those object modules that are required to satisfy external
"
references, thus saving memory space.

Loe 86/88
• Automatic Generation of II Summary
Map Giving Starting Address, Segment
Addresses and Lengths, and Debug
Symbols and their Addresses

• Automatic and Independent
Relocation of Segments. Segments
May Be Relocated to Best Match
Users Memory Configuration

• Extensive Capability to Manipulate the
Order and Placement of Segments in
8086/8088 Memory

• Extensive Debug Symbol
Manipulation, Allowing Line Numbers,
Local Symbols, and Public Symbols to
be Purged and Listed Selectively

• Abbreviated Control Syntax

Relocatability allows the programmer to code programs or sections of programs without having to. know the
final arrangement of the object code in memory.
"
LOC 86/88 converts relative addresses in an input module to absolute addresses. LOC 86/88 orders the segments in the input module and' assigns absolute addresses to the segments. The sequence in which the segments in the input modu'le are assigned absolute addresses is determined by their order in the input module
and the controls supplied with the command.
LOC 86/88 will relocate any valid input module without any controls. However, controls are available to control
the output of diagnostic information in the LOC 86/88 process, to control the content of the output module, or
both.
The program you are developing will almost certainly use some mix of random access memory (RAM), readonly memory (ROM); andlor programmable read-only memory (PROM). Therefore, the locationot your program affects ti6th cost and performance in your application. The relocation feature allows you todevelop your
program on the Intellec development system and then simply relocate the object code to suit your application.
AFN·01239B
.Q

.•

SERIES II 8086/8088 SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PACKAGES

OH 86/88
• Converts an Absolute Module to a
More Readable Format that can be
Displayed on a CRT or Printed for
Debugging

• Converts an 8086/8088 Absolute Object
Module to Symbolic Hexadecimal
Format
• Facilitates Preparing a File for Later
Loading by a Symbolic Hexadecimal
Loader, such as the iSBC™ Monitor
SDK-86 Loader, or Universal PROM
Mapper

The OH 86/88 command converts an 8086/8088 absolute object module to the hexadecimal format. This conversion may be necessary to format a module for later loading by a hexadecimal loader such as the iSBC 86/12
monitor or.Universal Prom Mapper. The conversion may also be made to put the module in a more readable
format that can be displayed or printed.
The module to be converted must be in absolute format; the output from LaC 86/88 is in absolute format.

Figure 2. 8086/8088 Software Development Cycle

15·9
I-::-::':·" _ _

~_a_.

AFN-01239B

SERI ES II 8086/8088 SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PACKAGES

SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Environment

Documentation
PL/M-86 Prograr(lming Manual (9800466)

REQUIRED HARDWARE

Intellec® Microcomputer' Development System
- Model 800
.
- Series II

1515-1/ PL/M-86 Compiler Operator's Mariual ..
(9800478)
MCS-86 User's Manual (9800722)

64K Bytes of RAM Memory

MCS~86 Software Development Utilities .Operating
Instructions for 1515-1/ Users (9800639)

Dual Diskette Drives
- Single or Double-Density

MCS-86 Macro Assembly Language Reference
Manual (9800640)

System Console
- CRT or Hardcopy Interactive Device

MCS-86 Macro Assembler Operating Instructions
for 1515-1/ Users (9800641)

OPTIONAL HARDWARE

MCS-86 Assembly Language Converter Operating
Instructions for 1515-1/ Users (9800642)

Universal PROM Programmer
ICE-86™ Emulator

Universal PROM Programmer User's Manual
(9800819A)

REQUIRED SOFTWARE

Shipping Media

ISIS-II Diskette Operating System

ORDERING INFORMATION

The PL/M Compiler, Assembler, and Utilities Package is also available in the following development
support packages:

Series II 8086/8088 Sof~w~re Development
Packages:
Part No~
MDS-308*

Single- and Double-Density Diskettes

SP86A-KIT

Description

Includes ICE-86™ In-Circuit
Emulator (MDS-86 ICE) and
8086/8088' Software Development Package (MDS-3t1)

Assembler and Utilities
Package
SP86B-KIT

MDS-309*

MDS-311*

SP86A Support Package (for
Intellec® Model 800)

PUM compiler and Utilities.
Package

SP86B Support Package (for
Series II)
IncludesICE-86™ln-Circuit
Emulator (MDS-86-ICE),
8086/8088 Software Development Package (MDS-311),
and Series II Expansion
Chassis (MDS-201)

PUM compiler, Assembler,
and Utilities Package

All Packages and Kits Require Software Licenses
*MDS is an ordering code only and is not used as a.product name or trademark. MDS® is a registered trademark of Mohawk Data Sciences. Corporation.
15-10

AFN'()1239B

PL/M 86/88 SOFTWARE PACKAGE

•

Executes on Series III iAPX 86
Processor for Fastest Compilations

•

Language Is Upward Compatible from
PL/M 80, Assuring MCS-80/8S Design
Portability

•

Supports 16-Bit Signed Integer and
32-Bit Floating Point Arithmetic in
Accordance with IEEE Proposed
Standard

•

Easy-To-Learn Block-Structured
Language Encourages Program
Modularity

•

Improved Compiler Performance Now
Supports More User Symbols and
Faster Compilation Speeds

•

Produces Relocatable Object Code
Which Is Linkable to All Other 8086
Object Modules

•

Code Optimization Assures Efficient
Code Generation and Minimum
Application Memory Utilization

•

Built-In Syntax Checker Doubles
Performance for Compiling Programs
Containing Errors

Like its counterpart for MCS-80/85 program development, PL!M 86/88 is an advanced, structured high-level
programming language. The PLiM 86/88 compiler was created specifically for performing software development for the Intel 8086 and 8088 Microprocessors.
PLiM is a powerful, structured, high-level system implementation language in which program statements can
naturally express the program algorithm. This frees the programmer to concentrate on the logic of the program without concern for burdensome details of machine or assembly language programming (such as register allocation, meanings of assembler mnemonics, etc.).
The PLiM 86/88 compiler efficiently converts free-form PLiM language statements into equivalent 8088/8086
machine instructions. Substantially fewer PLiM statements are necessary for a given application than if it were
programmed at the assembly language or machine code level.
The use of PLiM high-level language for system programming, instead of assembly language, results in a high
degree of engineering productivity during project development. Tl:1is translates into significant reductions in
initial software development and follow-on maintenance costs for the user.

NOTE: The Intellec' Microcomputer Development System pictured hero is not included with the PL/M 86/88 Software Package but 'merely depicts a language in its operating

environment.

15-11
•

September 1980

PL/M 86/88 SOFTWARE PACKAGE

FEATURES

Major features of the Intel PL/M 86/88 compiler and
programming language include:

Block Structure

Two Data Structuring Facilities

PL/M source code is developed in a series of modules, procedures, and blocks. Encouraging program
modularity in this manner makes programs more
readable, and easier to. maintain and debug. The
language becomes more flexible, by clearly defining
the scope of user variables (local to a private procedure, global to a public procedure, for example).

In addition to the five data types and based variables,
PL/M supports two data structuring facilities. These
add flexibility to the referencing of data stored in
large groups.
.
- Array: Indexed list of same type data elell1ents
- Structure: Named collection of same or different
type data elements·
- Combinations of Each: Arrays of structures or
structu res of arrays

The use of procedures to break down a large problem is paramount to productive software development. The PL/M 86/88 implementation of a block
structure allows the use of REENTRANT (recursive)
procedures, which are especially useful in system
design.

8087 Numerics Support
PL/M programs that use 32-bit REAL data may be
executed 'Using the Numeric Data Processor for improved performance. All floating-point operations
supported by PL/M may be executed on the iAPX
86/20 or 88/20 NDP, orthe 8087 Emulator (a software
module) provided with the package. Determination
of use of the chip or Emulator takes place at linktime, allowing compilations to be run-time
independent.

Language Compatibility
PL/M 86/88 object modules are compatible with objectmodules generated by all other 86/88 translators. This means that PL/M programs may be
linked to programs written in any other 86/88
language.

Built-In String Handling Facilities

Object modules are compatible with ICE-88 and
ICE-86 units; DEBUG compiler control provides the
In-Circuit Emulators with symbolic debugging
capabilities.

The PL/M 86/88 language contains built-in functions
for string manipulation. These byte and word functions perform the following operations on character
strings: MOVE, COMPARE, TRANSLATE, SEARCH,
SKIP, and SET.

PL/M 86/88 Language is upward-compatible with
PL/M 80, so that application programs may be easily
ported to run on the iAPX 86 or 88.

Interrupt Handling
Supports Five Data Types

PL/M has the facility for generating interrupts to the
iAPX 86 or 88 via software. A procedure may be
defined with the INTERRUPT attribute, and the
compiler will automatically initialize an interrupt
vector at the appropriate memory location. The
compiler will also generate code to same and restore the processor status, for execution of the
user-defined interrupt handler routine. The procedure SET$INTERRUPT, the function retuning
an INTERRUPT$PTR, and the PL/M statement
CAUSE$INTERRUPT all add flexibility to user
programs involving interrupt and handling.

PL/M makes use of five data types for various applications. These data types range from one to four
bytes, and facilitate various arithmetic, logic, and
addressi ng functions:
- Byte: 8-bit unsigned number
- Word: 16-bit unsigned number
- Integer: 16-bit signed number
- Real: 32-bit floating point number
- Pointer: 16-bit or 32-bit memory address
indicator
15-12

AFN·01661A

-----=

PL/M 86/88 SOFTWARE PACKAGE

Including several that have been mentioned, the
PL/M 86/88 com piler offers more than 25 controls
that facilitate such features as:
- Conditional compilation
- Including additional PLiM source files from disk
- Intra- and Inter-module cross reference
- Corresponding assembly language code in the
listing file
- Setting overflow conditions for run-time handling

Segmentation Control
The PL/M 86/88 compiler takes full advantage of
program addressing with the SMALL, COMPACT,
MEDIUM, and LARGE segmentation controls. Programs with less than 64KB total code space can
exploit the most efficient memory addressing
schemes, which lowers total memory requirements.
Larger programs can exploit the flexibility of extended one-megabyte addressing.

Code Optimization
The PL/M 86/88 compiler offers four levels of optimization for significantly reducing overall program
size.
-

"Strength reductions" (such as a shift left rather
than multiply by 2); and elimination of common
sUb-expressions within the same block.
- Mach.ine code optimizations; elimination of
superfluous branches; re-use of duplicate code;
removal of unreadable code.
- Byte comparisons (rather than 20-bit address
calculations) for pointer variables; optimization
of based-variable operations.
-

Compiler Controls

Combination or "folding" of constant expressions; and short-circuit evaluation of Boolean expressions.

Error Checking
The PL/M 86/88 compiler has a very powerful feature
to speed up compilations. If a syntax or program
error is detected, the compiler will skip the code
generation and optimization passes. This usually
yields a 2X performance increase for compilation of
programs with errors.
A fully detailed set of programming and compilation
errors is provided by the compiler.

Compiler Performance
Performance benchmarks may provide valuable information in estimating compile times for various
programs. It is extremely important to understand,
however, the effect of varying conditions on compiler performance. Storage media, coding style,
program length, and the use of INCLUDE files significantly change the compiler's overall performance.
We tested typical PL/M programs of varying lengths.
The resu Its are listed in Table 1.

Table 1. PL/M Program Compile Times
Program Size

Compile Time(Sec)

Lines/Minute

SMALL (71)

213

MEDIUM (610)

678

LARGE (1710)

128

802

LARGE (1403)

129

653

(with very dense code,
plus include file)
NOTE:. These programs were run on a Series III with ISIS 4.1 and a hard disk. The lines per minute figures reflect fifteen percent blank lines
and comments.
.

The compiler allows approximately 1000 ten-character user symbols.

15·13

AFN-01661A

intJ

PL/M 86/88 SOFTWARE PACKAGE

M:DD: /' Beginning of module '/
~ PUBLIC and EXTERNAL attributes promote
SORTPROC: PROCEDUREtpTR, COUNT, RECSIZE, KEYINDEX)~;
" I program modularity,'
'
'
DECLARE PTR POINTER, (COUNT, RECSIZE, KEYINDEX) INTEGER,
/* Parameters:

PTR is pointer to first record.
COUNT is number of records to be sorted,
RECSIZE is number of bytes in each record-max is 128.
KEY1NDEX is byte position within each record of a BYTE scalar

to be used as sort key, '/
DECLARE RECORD BASED PTR (1) BYTE,
CURRENT (128) BYTE,
(I, JIINTEGER:
SORT:

FIND:

"Based" Variables allow manipulation of,external data by
passing the base of the data structure (a pointer), This
minimizes tt1e STACK space' used for parame~er passing, and
the execution time to perform many STACK operations.
,

DO J= 1 TO COUNT-1:
CALL MOVB(@RECORD(J'RECSIZE),,-,,,.:::..:.:..:.:..::;:c:.;-<.:.,'
I=J:
DO WHILE I ',0
AND RECORD((I-1)'RECSIZE+KEYINDEXI
'CURRENT(KEYINDEX):
CALL MOVB(@RECORD((I-,1),RECSIZE),
@RECORD(I'RECSIZE),
RECSIZE):
1=1 .. 1:
END FIND:

The "AT" operator returns the address of a
.
variable, instead of its contents. This is very useful
in passing pOinters for based variabJes.
.

One ofseve'ral PUM built-in procedures for string
manipulation",

END M:

Figure 1. Sample PUM 86/88 Program

BENEFITS
because less programming resources are required
for a given programmed function.

PL/M 86/88 is designed to be an efficient, costeffective solution to the special requirements of
iAPX 86 or 88 Microsystem Software Development,
as illustrated by the following benefits of PL/M use:

Increased Reliability
,PL/M 86/88 is designed to aid in the development of
reliable software (PL/M 86/88 programs are simple
statements of the program algorithm), This substantially reduces the risk of costly correction of errors in
systems that have already reached full production
status, as the more simply stated the program is. the
more likely it is to perform its intended function.

Low Learning Effort
PL/M 86/88 is easy to learn and to use, even for the
novice programmer.

Earlier Project Completion
Critical projects are completed much earlier than
otherwise possible because PL/M 86/88, a structured high-level language, increases programmer
productivity.

Easier Enhancements
and Maintenance
Progranis written in PL/M tend to be self-do,cumenting, thus easier to read and understand, This means
it is easier to enhance and maintain PL/M programs
as the system capabilities expand and future products are developed.

Lower Development Cost
Increases in programmer productivity translate immediately into lower software development costs

15-14

AFN-01661A

PL/M 86/88 SOFTWARE PACKAGE

REQUIRED SOFTWARE:
ISIS-II Diskette Operating System, V4.1 or later
Series III Operating System

SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Environment
REQUIRED HARDWARE:
Intellec® Microcomputer Development System
- Series III or equivalent
Dual Diskette Drives
- Single- or Double-Density
System Console.
- CRT or Hardcopy Interactive Device

Documentation Package
PL/M-86 User's Guide for 8086-based Development
Systems (121636)

OPTIONAL HARDWARE:
Universal PROM Programmer
Line Printer
ICE-86™

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

MDS-313*

PL/M 86/88 Software Package

Requires Software License
*MDS is an ordering code only and is not used as a product name or trademark. MDS® is a registered trademark of Mohawk Data Sciences
·Corporation.

15-15

AFN-01661A

PASCAL 86/88
SOFTWARE PACKAGE
• Resident on iAPX 86 Based I ntellec®
Series III Microcomputer Development
System for Optimal Performance
• Object Compatible and Linkable with
PL/M 86/88, ASM 86/88 and FORTRAN
86/88

• Supports iAPX86/20, 88/20 N.umeric
Data Processors
• Strict Implementation of ISO Standard
Pascal
• Useful Extensions Essential for
Microcomputer Applications

• ICE™ Symbolic Debugging Fully
Supported
• Implements REALMATH for Consistent
and Reliable Results

• Separate Compilation with TypeChecking Enforced Between Pascal
Modules
• Compiler Option to Support Full RunTime Range-Checking

PASCAL 86/88 conforms to and implements the ISO Draft Proposed Pascal standard. The lariguage is
enhanced to support microcomputer applications with special features, such as separate compilation, interrupt handling and direct port I/O. To assist the development of portable software, the compiler can be directed
to flag all non-standard features.
The PASCAL 86/88 compiler runs on the iAPX 86 Resident Intellec® Series III Microcomputer Development
System. A well-defined I/O interface is provided for run-time support. This allows a user-written operating system to support application programs as an alternate to the development system environment. Program modules compiled under PASCAL 86/88 are compatible and linkable with modules written in PUM 86/88, ASM
86/88 or FORTRAN 86/88. With a complete family of compatible programming languages for the iAPX 86,88
one can implement each module in the language most appropriate to the task at hand.
PASCAL 86/88 object modules contain symbol and type information for program debugging using ICE-86™
emulator. For final production version, the compiler can remove this extra information and code.

Note: The Inlellecoo microcomputer development system pictured here is not included with the Pascal 86/88 Software Package but merely depicts the language in Its operating
environment.

15·16

12168().001 Rev, A

inter

PASCAL 86/88

FEATURES

Supports numerous compiler options to control the
compilation process, to INCLUDE files, flag nonstandard Pascal statements and others to control
program listings and object modules.

Includes all the language features of Jensen & Wirth
Pascal as defined in the ISO Draft Proposed Pascal·
Standard.

Utilizes the IEEE standard for Floating-Point Arithmetic (the Intel REALMATH standard) for arithmetic
operations.

Supports required extensions for microcomputer
applications.
-Interrupt handling
-Direct port I/O

Well-defined and documented run-time operating
system interfaces allow the user to execute the applications under user-designed operating systems.

Separate compilation extensions allow:
-Modular decomposition of large programs
-Linkage with other Pascal modules as well as
PUM 86/88, ASM 86/88 and FORTRAN 86/88.
-Enforcement of type-checking at LINK-time

Provides run-time support for co-processors. All
real-type arithmetic is performed on the 86/20 numeric data processor unit or software emulator.
Run-time library routines, common between Pascal
and other Intel languages (such as FORTRAN), permit efficient and consistently accurate results.

BENEFITS
Provides a standard Pascal for iAPX 86, 88 based
applications.
-Pascal has gained wide acceptance as the portable application language for microcomputer
applications
-It is being taught in many colleges and universities
around the world
-It is easy to learn, originally intended as a vehicle
for teaching computer programming
-Improves maintainability: Type mechanism is
both strictly enforced and user extendable

Extended relocation and linkage support allows the
user to link Pascal program modules with routines
written in other languages for certain parts of the
program. For example, real-time or hardware dependent routines written in ASM 86/88 or PUM 86/88
can be linked to Pascal routines, further extending
the user's ability to write structured and modular
programs.

-Few machine specific language constructs
Strict implementation of the proposed ISO standard
for Pascal aids portability of application programs. A
compile time option checks conformance to the
standard making it easy to write conforming
programs.

PASCAL 86/88 extensions via predefined procedures for interrupt handling and direct port I/O make
it possible to code an entire application in Pascal
without compromising portability.

Standard Intel REALMATH is easy to use and provides reliable results, consistent with other Intel
languages and other implementations of the IEEE
proposed Floating-Point standard.

PASCAL 86/88 programs "talk" to the resident
operating system using Intel's standard interface for
translated programs. This allows users to replace
the development operating system by their own
operating systems in the final application.
PASCAL 86/88 takes full advantage of iAPX 86, 88
high level language architecture to generate
efficient machine code without using timeconsuming optimization algorithms.
Compiler options can be used to control the program listings and object modules. While debugging,
the user may generate additional information such
as the symbol record information required and
useful for debugging using ICE emulation. After debugging, the production version may be streamlined
by removing this additional information.

15-17

AFN-01652A

PASCAL 86/88

SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Environment
REQUIRED HARDWARE
Intellec® Series III Microcomputer Development
System
-System Console
-Double Density Dual Diskette Drive OR Hard Disk

REQUIRED SOFTWARE
ISIS-II Diskette Operating System V4.1 or later

Documentation Package
PASCAL 86 User's Guide (121539-001)

Shipping Media
Flexible Diskettes
-Single and Double Density

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

MDS*-314

PASCAL 86/88 Software Package

Requires software license .
• MDS is an ordering code only and is·not used as·a product name or trademark. MDS" is a registered trademark of Mohawk DataScience.

15-18

AFN·01652A

8087
. SOFTWARE SUPPORT PACKAGE
• Program Generation for the 8087
Numeric Data Processor on. the
Intellec® Microcomputer Development
System

• 8087 Emulator Duplicates Each 8087
Floating-Point Instruction in Software,
for Evaluation of Prototyping, or for
Use in an End Product .

• Consists of: 8086/8087/8088 Macro
. Assembler, 808TSofhvare Emulator

• Macro Assembler and 8087 Emulator
are Fully Compatible with Other
8086/8088 Development Software
• Implementation of the IEEE Proposed
Floating-Point Standard (the Intel®
Realmath Standard)

• Macro Assembler Generates Code for
8087 Processor or Emulator, While
Also Supporting the 8086/8088
Instruction Set
.

The 8087 Software Support Package is an optional extention of Intel's 8086/8088 Software Development
Package that runs under ISIS-lion an Intellec or Series II Microcomputer Development System.
The 8087 Software Support Package consists of the 8086/8087/8088 Macro Assembler, and. the Full 8087
Emulator. The assenibler is a functional superset of the 8086/8088 Macro Assembler, and includes instructions for over sixty new floating-point operations, plus new data types supported by the 8087.
The 8087 Emulator is an 8086/8088 object module that simuiates the environment of the 8087, and executes
each floating-point operation using software algorithms. This emulator functionally duplicates the operation
of the 8087 Numeric Data Processor.
Also included in this package are interface libraries to link with 8086/8087/8088 object modules, which are
used for specifying whether the 8087 Processor or the 8087 Emulator is to be used. This enables the run-time
.
environment to be invisible to the programmer at assembly time:

15-19

121653~OOl

Rev. A

8087 SOFTWARE SUPPORT PACKAGE

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
8086/8087/8088 Macro Assembler
The 8086/8087/8088 Macro Assembler translates
symbolic macro assembly language instructions
into appropriate machine instructions. It is an extended version of the 8086/8088 Macro Assembler,
and therefore supports all of the same features and
functions, such as limited type checking, conditional assembly, data structures, macros, etc. The
extensions are the new instructions and data types
to support floating-point operations. Realmath
floating-point instructions (see Table 1) generate
code capable of being converted to either 8087 instructions or interrupts for the 8087 Emulator. The
Processor/Emulator selection is ,made via ·interface
libraries at LINK-time. In addition to the new

floating-point instructions, the macro assembler
also introduces two new 8087 data types: aWORD
(8 bytes) and TBYTE (ten bytes). These support the
highest precision of data processed by the 8087.

Full 8087 Emulator
The Full 8087 Emulator is a 16-kilobyte object module that is linked to the application program for
floating-point operations. Its functionality is identical to the 8087 chip, and is ideal for prototyping and
debugging floating-point applicati,ons.· The
Emulator is an alternative to the use of the 8087 chip,
although thelatter.executes floating-point applications up to.1 00 times faster than an 8086 with the
8087 Emulator. Furthermore, since the 8087 is a
"co-processor," use of the chip will allow many operations to be performed in parallel with the 8086.

Table 1. 8087 Instructions
Processor Control Instructions

Arithmetic Instructions

FADD
FADDP
FIADD

FINIT/FNINIT
FDISI/FNDISI

Addition
Add real
Add real and pop
Integer add

FENl/FtilENI

Subtraction
FSUB
FSUBP
FISUB
FSUBR
FSUBRP
FISUBR

Subtract real
Subtract real and pop
Integer subtract
Subtract real reversed
Subtract real reversed and
pop
Integer subtract reversed
Multlpilcatlon

FMUL
FMULP
FIMUL

Multiply real
Multiply real and pop
Integer multiply

FDIV
FDIVP
FIDIV
FDIVR
FDIVRP
FIDIVR

Divide real
Divide real and pop
Integer divide
Divide real reversed
Divide real rev.ersed and
pop
Integer divide reversed

FABS
FCHS

Load control word

FSTCW/FNSTCW

Store control word

FSTSW/FNSTSW

Store status weird

FCLEX/FNCLEX
FSTENV/FNSTENV

Clear exceptions

FLDENV

Load environment

FSAVE/FNSAVE

Save state

Store environment

FRSTOR

Restore state

FINCSTP

Increment stack painter
Decrement stack pointer

FFREE

Free reg i ste r

FNOP

No operation

FWAIT

CPU wait

Comparison Instructions

Other Operations
FSQRT
FSCALE
FPREM
FRNDINT
FXTRACT

Disable interrupts
Enable interrupts'

FLDCW

FDECSTP

,Division

Initialize processor

Square root
Scale
Partial remainder
Round to integer
Extract exponent and
significand
Absolute value
Change sign

FCOM

Compare real

FCOMP

Compare real and pop
Compare real and pop
twice
Integer compare

FCOMPP
FICOM

15·20

FICOMP

Integer compare and pop

FTST
FXAM

Test
Examine

AFN·OI574A

8087 SOFTWARE SUPPORT PACKAGE

Table 1. 8087 Instructions (cont'd)
Transcendental Instructions
FPTAN
FPATAN
F2XM1
FYL2X
FYL2XP1

Data Transfer Instructions

Partial tangent
Partial arctangent
2'-1
y. 10g,X
y. log,(X+1)

FLD
FST
FSTP
FXCH
FILD
FIST
FISTP

Constant Instructions
FLDZ
FLD1
FLDPI
FLDL2T
FLDL2E
FLDLG2
FLDLN2

Load. +0.0
Load +1.0
Load 1]'
Load log,10

FBLD
FBSTP

Real Transfers
Load real
Store real
Store real and pop
Exchange registers
Integer Transfers
Integer load
Integer store
Integer store and pop
Packed Decimal Transfers
Packed decimal (BCD)
load
Packed decimal (BCD)
store and pop

Load log,e
Load log,,2
Load log,2

SPECIFICATIONS

REQUIRED SOFTWARE
ISIS-II Diskette Operating System
-Single or Double Density

Operating Environment

8086/8088 Software Development Package

REQUIRED HARDWARE
Intellec® Microcomputer Development System
-'-Model 800
-Series II (Models 220, 225 or equivalent)

Documentation Package
BOB6/BOB7/BOBB Macro Assembly Language Reference Manual for BOBO/BOB5-Based Development
Systems (121623-001)

64K Bytes of RAM Memory
Minimum One Diskette Drive
-Single or Double' Density

BOB6/BOB7/BOBB Macro Assembler Operating Instructions for BOBO/BOBS-Based Development Systems (121624-001)

System Console
-CRT or Hardcopyl.nteractive Device

The BOB6 Family Users Manual Supplement for the
BOB7 Numeric Data Processor (121586-001)

OPTIONAL HARDWARE
Universal PROM Programmer'
Line Printer'
.

Shipping Media

'Recommended

1 Single and 1 Double Density Diskette

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

MDS'-38?

808? Software Support Package

Requires Software License
'MDS is an ordering code only and is nol used as a product name or trademark. MDS'" is a registered trademark of Mohawk Data Sciences

Corporation.
15·21

AFN·01574A

inter
8089 lOP
SOFTWARE SUPPORT PACKAGE

• Program Generation for the 8089 I/O
Processor on the Intellec®
Microcomputer Development System

• Supports 8089-Based Addressing
Modes with a Structure Facility that
Enables Easy Access to Based Data

• Contains 8089 Macro Assembler, plus
Relocation and Linkage Utilities

• Powerful Macro Capabilities

• Relocatable Object Module
Compatible with All iAPX 86 and iAPX
88 Object Modules

• Provides Timing Information in
Assembly Listing
• Fully Detailed Setof Error Messages

• Fully Supports Symbolic Debugging
with the RBF-89 Software Debugger

The lOP Software Support Package extends Intellec Microcomputer Development System support to the 8089
I/O Processor. The macro assembler translates symbolic 8089 macro assembly language instructions into
relocatable machine code. The relocation and linkage utilities provide compatibility with iAPX 86, iAPX 88, and
8089 modules, and make structured, modular programming easier.
The macro assembler also provides symbolic debugging capability when used with the RBF-89 software
debugger. 8089 program modularity is supported with inter-segment jumps and calls. The macro assembler
also provides instruction cycle counts inthe listing file, for giving the programmer executiontiming information. The programs in the 8089 Software Support Package run on any Intellec Series II or Model 800 with 64K
bytes of memory.

15-22

9800999-02 Rov. B

8089 lOP SOFTWARE SUPPORT PACKAGE

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

so that any changes to that sequence need to be
made in only one place in the program. Common
code sequences that differ only slightly can also be
referred to with a macro call, and the differences can
be substituted with macro parameters.

The lOP Software S'upport Package contains:
ASM89 -The 8089 Macro Assembler.
LlNK86 - Resolves control transfer references between 8089 object modules, and data references in 8086, 8088, and 8089
modulras.
LOC86 -Assigns absolute memory addresses to
8089 object modules.
OH86

-Converts absolute object modules to
hexadecimal format.

UPM

- Thfl Universal PROM Mapper, which supports PROM programming in all iAPX
86./11 and iAPX 88/11 applications.

ASM89 translates symbolic 8089 macro assembly
language i'nstructions into the appropriate machine
codes. Thl3 ability to refer to both program and data
addresses with symbolic names makes it easier to
develop find modify programs, and avoids the errors
of hand 'translation.

ASM89 provides symbolic debugging information in
the object file. The RBF-89 debugger makes use of
this information, so the programmer can symbolically debug 8089 programs. ASM89 also provides
cycle counts for each instruction in the assembly
listing file (see Table 1). These cycle counts help the
programmer determine how long a particular
routine or code sequence will take to execute on the
8089.
ASM89 provides relocatable object module compatibility with the 8086 and 8088 microprocessors.
This object module compatibility, along with the
8086/8088 relocation and linkage utilities, facilitates
the designing of iAPX 86/11 and iAPX 88/11 systems.

The powerful macro facility allows frequently used
code sl3quences to be referred to by a single name,

ASM89 fully supports the based addressing modes
of the 8089. A structure facility allows the user to
define a template that enables accessing of based
data symbolically.

SPECIFICATIONS

Documentation Package
8089 Macro Assembler User's Guide (9800938)

Op'erating Environment

8089 Macro Assembler Pocket Reference (9800936)

RE.QUIRED HARDWARE
Intellec® Microcomputer Development System
-·ModeI800
--Series II (Models 220, 225 or equivalent)
64K Bytes of RAM Memory

MCS-86 Software Development Utilities Operating
Instructions for ISIS-I/ Users (9800639)
Universal PROM Programmer User's Manual
(9800819)

Minimum One Diskette Drive
-Single or Double' Density
System Console
-CRT or Hardcopy Interactive Device

Shipping Media
-Single and Double Density Diskettes

OPTIONAL HARDWARE
Universal PROM Programmer'
Line Printer'

ORDERING INFORMATION

REQUIRED SOFTWARE
ISIS-II Diskette Operating System
-Single or Double Density

MDS'-312

Part Number Description
808910P Software Support Package

Requires Software License
"MDS is an ordering code only and is not used as a product name
or trademark. MDS'" is a registered trademark of Mohawk Data
Sciences Corporation.

"Recommended

15-23

AFN·OOB40B

inter

8089 lOP SOFTWARE SUPPORT PACKAGE:

Table 1. Sample Program Listing

8SH "ACRO ASSEI!8J.:ER

ISIS-II eU9 !'IACRO IISSEI1BL£:f: 10;105 IlSSEPIBlY OF "ODULE TASK
OBJECT !tIJOltLE PLACED PI :f'1 TASK OBJ
~SSE"BLER IHIIOKED BV!
us,,"':! :t'ltosk a.g, geon I'Ia.c:o de-bioi; pagewidth(132) pr-;nt.
BUI

11118 HUBBall

BBI'

3138 aBD2

aUA

BBlI

'118 IUBlIBI
6182

8812
8816

1.,8 BBeD
1138

8818

2138

Bl1II

413C

aBle

484a

<7
77

'17

...
'"
173

1138 88CB

191.

812.3

1138 BiC8

8827

l\ 38 BIIZ
5t18 BBlBBlBB
6882

Baa

Load r'gl.tel' CA WI th oddre.s'
of 80U burrer

"0"';

gb.bufrel'iB889
gc.y
bcdgc]

1 Ito..,e burrel' oddl'e •• Into CD
, LOGd pOinter to count Into CC
, Ito..,. byh count into Be

39 l~op8BI Ito..,b
411
Inc
41 %Plocro.2( gb. gc)
42
43
gb
44
dec
4S
ge
, J nz
47
gc.%LOOP
49
LOOPBB

[gb]d go]
go

,
,

In'

58 TWO;
51
52 :;;",ocro 1

go. dototlp,or-t~9251
go. cOI'I"Gndllp0l'tI!8251

33'

gb.burfer-I!.8889
'ge,y
bcdgcl

20'

23.

.,.,
.,.,

386.

leaA FD
BUt Bace

BIll!

21138

aBle

4B3C

aBlE

4848 F2

'"'77

B'B4!

2848

BBU

'37

.,.,
'2

Ipdi
"o..,b

37
3S

.. .

". .,.,
,..

34 %"ocro
35

.,.,.,
.,.,

.,
28' '", ..,
.,.
'" ." .,
'" ,." .,.,
22i'
2(.2

aa:J6

lII:!l

go.buff.rIl8B86

" ,.,
'"

'24

aUF

BUI

Ipd i

32,OHEI
33

Itove byte fro" a8a6 to al89 bur,rer
Incre"ent pOinter Into 8886 burf',r

%PARAM.l
1 Incl'e"en\; poi nte-r Into
%PARAM.2
J DecrePlent byte count
%PARAM.2
J

",j

loop bock; I' byte count) II
.1 ,lood CA II I th .oddl'u, of 92:51 DP
lood ce II I th address of 82'1 ep
I

!'love buffel' ,Qddresii into C8
Load po Int.r to count Into CC
!'Io..,. bvte count Into 8C

'IQopBI= jnbt
[g!;"l.B.tQopU
loop until 82'1 trons" It ready
S8
I'IQllb
[go],[gbl
"essog' Into buff,r'59 :-;~Qcr-D.2( gb, gc:)
68
~PARAPI.l
"
gb
) Incr-el'lent po; nter Into source
62
dec
:':PARAPI_2
'~91C
I Decrel'lent byte count
64
jn;!
:':PARAI'I_2
65
gc.:-:LOLIP
J Loop bock if byte count> 8
H
LOOP!!!

,,0..,.

69 tASK
7B

hit
ends

EHD

ASSf"IBL,' COMPLETE. NO ERRORS FOUUv

15·24

= -.

AFN·OOS40B

--=-

SP86A/SP868 SUPPORT PACKAGE

• Full Development Support for 8086
Microprocessor Des';igns, Including:

• Programs Written inPL/M and
Assembly Language can be Linked
Together and Relocated

• 8086/8088 Software Development
Package for High-Level Language or
Assembly Language Programming
• ICE-86™ In-Circuit Emulation

• Programs Written in 8080/8085
Assembly Language can be Converted
to 8086/8088 Assembly Language

• Expansion Chassis for Development
Support on Intellec® Ser.:es "
Microcomputer Development System

• ICE-86™ Emulation Provides Fully
Symbolic Debugging for Program
Labels or Variables

The SP86A and SP86B Support Pac.l\ages combine the software and hardware components required for 8086
development using an Intellec Microcomputer Development System. The basic components are an 8086 Software
Development Package and ICE-86 in-circuit emulator. The SP86B version of the kit includes an expansion chassis to
provide additional board slots and power for the Intellec Series II.

15-25

SP86A/SP868 SUPPORT PACKAGE
SP86A AND SP868 SUPPORT PACKAGE
SPECI FICATIONS

MCS-86 Assembly
(9800640)

Operating Environment

MCS-86 Assembler Operating Instructions for ISIS-II
Users (9800641)

Required Hardware

Language

Reference

Manual

MCS-86 Assembly Language Converter Operating
Instructions for ISIS-Ii Users (9800642)

DS003 System Package or equivalent.

MCS-86 Absolute Object File Formats (9800821)

Environmental Characteristics

Universal PROM Programmer User's Manual (9800819A)
ICE-86 Operating Instructions (9800714A)

Operating Temperature: O·C to 40·C
Operating Humidity: Up to 95% relative humidity with-

out condensation_

Electrical Characteris;tics
DC Power Supply

Expansion Chassis Dimensions
Width - 17_37 in. (44.12 cm)
Height - 4_81 in. (11.22 cm)
Depth - 19.13 in. (48.59 cm)

Voltage

Reference Manuals (supplied)

Expansion
Chass'is
Amps
Suppl.ied

ICE-86 In·Circuit Emulator
Amps Required
Maximum

Typical

+5+5% -4%

;24

PUM-86 Programming Manual (9800466)

+12±5%

2.0

0.12

0.08

ISIS-II PLlM·86 Compiler Operator's Manual (9800478)
MCSTM-86 User's Manual (9800694)

-12±5%

0.3

none

-10±5%

1.0

0.015

0.012

MCS-86 Software Development Utilities Operating
Instructions for ISIS-II Users (9800639)

AC Requirements -

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part
Number

Description

SP86A-KIT

SP86A Support Package for Intellec Model 800
Includes ICE·86 In-Circuit Emulator (MDS-86ICE) and 808618088 Software Development
Package (MDS-311).

SP868-KIT

SP868 Support Package for Intellec Series II
Includes ICE-86 In-Circuit Emulator (MDS·86ICE),
808618088
Software
Development
Package (MDS:311), and Series II Expansion
Chassis (MDS-201) ..

15-26

50- 60 Hz, 115/230 VAC

SP 88
SUPPORT PACKAGE
• Development Support for iAPX 88
Microprocessor Designs

• Utility Program for Conversion of
8080/8085 Source Program into 8088
Source Program

• iAPX 88 Macro Assembler for 8088
Assembly Language Programming
• ICE·88™-iAPX 88 CPU In·Circuit
Emulator for Real·Time Emulation and
Full Symbolic Debugging

• Object Code Converter Which
Translates 8088 Absolute Module to
Symbolic H EX Format for Easler
Debugging

• Link and Locate Utilities Program for
Combination of Separately Assembled
8088 Programs into a Relocatable
Module

• Library Manager Program for Creation
and Maintenance of Object Files

The SP 88 support package provides both iAPX 88 assembler and ICE·88 emulation which may be combined with the
Series II Intellec Microcomputer Development System.
The iAPX 88 assembler outputs relocatable and linkable object modules. iAPX 88 programs can be developed and
debugged in 'small modules. These modules can be easily linked with other iAPX 88 assembler or PLIM 88 object
modules or library routines to form a complete application system.
The assembler translates symbolic assembly language instructions into the appropriate machine code, which can be
loaded to an ICE·88 in·circuit emulator module for software execution and symbolic debugging.

15·27

AFN 01667A

SP 88

The ICE-88 emulator allows hardware and software
development to proceed concurrently and interactively.
This is more effective than the traditional method of independent hardware and software development followed by system integration. With the ICE-88 module,
prototype hardware can. be added to. the system it is
designed. Software and hardware testing occurs while
the product is being developed.

The ICE-88 module provides in-circuit emulation for the
8088 microprocessor. It includes three circuit boards
which reside in Intellec Microcomputer Development
Systems. A cable and buffer box connect the Intellec
System to the user system in replace of the user's 8088.
Powerful debug functions are thus extended into the
user system. Using the ICE-88 module, the desginer can
execute software on prototype hardware in real-time or
single-step mode. Breakpoints allow the user to halt
emulation on user-specified conditions. Trace capability
gives 1023 frames of the 8088 programexectuion status
prior to the halt. User access to the prototype system
software is facilitated with the symbolic debugging
feature which alows reference to the source program
variables and labels.

ISIS·II

TEXT
EDITOR

In addition, the SP 88 support package contains a utility
program to translate 8080/8085 assembly or PLiM 80
language source code to 8088 assembly language
source code. A comprehensive manual, "MCS-86
Assembly Language Converter Operating. Instructions
for ISIS-II Users" (9800642), covers the entire conversion
process. Detailed methodology of the conversion process is fully described therein.

PLiM 88
SOURCE

RELOCATABLE
OBJECT
MODULE

USER
SYSTEM

RELOCATABLE
OBJECT
MODULE

ICE·aa

Figure 1. iAPX 88 Microprocessor Development Cycle

15·28

AFN 01667A

--.-~--..:::.=:::,.

SP 88

SPECIFICATIONS

Electrical Characteristics

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

DC Power
Vcc=+5V+5%-1%
Icc = 15A maximum; 11 A typical
Voo= +12V±5%
100= 120mA maximum; 80mA typical
Ves= -10'v±5%or -12V±5% optional
Iss=25mA maximum; 12mA typical

Required Hardware
Intellec microcomputer development system Models 800,
225, 235, 245 with:
1. Three adjacent slots for the ICE·88 module. (Series
11·220, ·230, ·240 require Model 201 Expansion
Chassis.)
2. 64K bytes of Intellec memory. If user prototype
program memory is desired, additional memory above
the basic 64K is required.
System Console
Intellec diskette operating system with Dual Diskette
Drives - single or double density
ICE·88 module

Environmental Characteristics
Operating Temperature: O· to 40·C
Operating Humidity: Up to 95% relative humidity without
condensation
DOCUMENTATION SUPPLIED
PLIM 86 Programming Manual (9800466)

Required Software

IS/S·II PLIM 86 Compiler Operator's Manual (9800478)

System monitor
ISIS·II, version 3.4 or subsequent
ICE·88 software

MCS·86 Software Development Utilities
Instructions for IS/S·II Users (9800639)

Equipment Supplied

MCS·86 Assembly Language Reference Manual (9800640)

Printed circuit boards (3)
Interface cable and emulation buffer module
Operator's Manual
ICE·88 software, diskette·based
ASM 88 software, diskette·based

MCS·86 Assembler Operating Instructions for IS/S·II
Users (9800641)

MCSTM·86 User's Manual (9800694)

MCS·86 Assembly Language Converter
Instructions for IS/S·II Users (9800642)

Operating

MCS·86 Absolute Object File Formats (9800821)

ICE-88 Emulator Operating Instructions (9800714A)

Emulation Clock
User system clock up to 5MHz or
2 MHz ICE·88 emulator internal clock in stand·alone mode
Physical Characteristics
Printed circuit boards:
Width:
Height:
Depth:
Packaged Weight:

12.00 in. (30.48 cm)
6.75 in. (17.15 cm)
0.50 in. (1.27 cm)
9.00 lb. (4.10 kg)

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number: SP 88·KIT
Description:

SP 88 Support Package includes ICE·88
In·Circuit Emulator (MDS·88* ICE) and
8088 Software Development Package
(MDS·308*). REQUIRES SOFTWARE
LICENSE.

*"MDS" is an ordering code only, and is not used as a product
name or trademark. MOS·' is a registered trademark of Mohawk
Data Sciences Corp.

15·29

AFN 01667A

ICE-86™
8086 IN-CIRCUIT EMULATOR
• Full Symbolic Debugging

• 2K Bytes. of High Speed ICE-86™
Mapped Memory

• Breakpoints to Halt Emulation on a
Wide Variety of Conditions·

•. Software Debugging with or without
User System

• Comprehensive Trace of Program
Execution, Both Conditional and
Unconditional

• Handles Full 1 Megabyte
Addressability of 8086

• Hardware In-Circuit Emulation

• Disassembly of Trace or Memory from
Object Code into Assembler
Mnemonics

• Compound Commands
• Command Macros

The ICE-86 module provides In-Circuit Emulation for the 8086 microprocessor and the iSBC 86/12 Single
Board Computer. It includes three circuit boards which reside in Intellec® Microcomputer Development Systems. A cable and buffer box connect the Intellec system to the user system by replacing the user's 8086. Powerfullntellec debug functions are thus extended into the user system. Using the ICE-86 module, the designer
can execute prototype software in continuous or single-step mode and can substitute blocks of Intellec system memory for user equivalents. Breakpoints allow the user to stop emulation on user-specified conditions,
and the trace capabilitygives a detailed history of the program execution prior to the break. All user access to
the prototype system software may be done symbolically by referring to the source program variables and
labels.

15-30

ICE-86™ IN-CIRCUIT EMULATOR
SYMBOLIC DEBUGGING

INTEGRATED HARDWARE/SOFTWARE
DEVELOPMENT

Symbols and PLiM statement numbers may be
substituted for numeric values in any of the ICE-86 com·
mands. This allows the user to make symbolic refer·
ences to 1/0 ports, memory addresses, and data in the
user program. Thus the user need not remember the ad·
dresses of variables or program subroutines.

The ICE-86 emulator allows hardware and software
development to proceed interactively. This is more ef·
fective than the traditional method of independent hard·
ware and software development followed by system in·
tegration. With the ICE·86 module, prototype hardware
can be added to the system as it is designed. Software
and hardware testing occurs while the product is being
developed.

Symbols can be used to reference variables, proce·
dures, program labels, and source statements. A vari·
able can be displayed or changed by referring to it by
name rather than by its absolute location in memory.
Using symbols for statement labels, program labels, and
procedure names simplifies both tracing and breakpoint
setting. Disassembly of a section of code from either
trace or program memory into its assembly mnemonics
is readily accomplished.

Conceptually, the ICE-86 emulator assists three stages
of development:
1. It can be operated without being connected to the
user's system, so ICE-86 debugging capabilities can
be used to facilitate program development before any
of the user's hardware is available.

2. Integration of software and hardware can begin when
any functional element of the user system hardware
is connected to the 8086 socket. Through ICE-86
mapping capabilities, Intellec memory, ICE memory,
or diskette memory can be substituted for missing
prototype memory. Time·critical program modules
are debugged before hardware implementation by us·
ing the 2K·bytes of high·speed ICE·resident memory.
As each section of the user's hardware is completed,
it is added to the prototype. Thus each section of the
hardware and software is "system" tested as it
becomes available.
3. When the user's prototype is complete, it is tested
with the final version of the user system software.
The ICE-86 module is then used for real time emula·
tion of the 8086 to debug the system as a completed
unit.
Thus the ICE-86 module provides the user with the abil·
ity to debug a prototype or production system at any
stage in its development without introducing
extraneous hardware or software test tools.

Furthermore, each symbol may have associated with it
one of the data types BYTE, WORD, INTEGER,
SINTEGER (for short, 8-bit integer) or POINTER. Thus
the user need not remember the type of a source pro·
gram variable when examining or modifying it. For
example, the command "!VAR" displays the value in
memory of variable VAR in a format appropriate to its
type, while the command "!VAR = !VAR + 1" increments
the value of the variable.
The user symbol table generated along with the object
file during a PLlM-86 compilation or an ASM-86
assembly is loaded into memory along with the user pro·
gram which is to be emulated. The user may add to this
symbol table any additional symbolic values for memory
addresses, constants, or variables that are found useful
during system debugging.
The ICE-86 module provides access through symbolic
definition to all of the 8086 registers and flags. The
READY, NMI, TEST, HOLD, RESET, INTR, and MN/MX
pins of the 8086 can also be read. Symbolic references
to key ICE-86 emulation information are also provided.

PLUG INTO
USER
8086 SOCKET

r------------r- _ _ _ _ ..,

I I
I I

I
I

IN~~~\EC

I I

I
I

L _____

I I
I
I L ____ -l

________________________

Figure 1. ICE-86 T" Emulator Block Diagram

15-31

I
I
~

T·CABLE

I I
I
I I

------------------------

ICE-86™ IN-CIRCUIT EMULATOR

A typical ICE·S6 development configuration. It is based on a Model 230 Development System, which also includes a
Double Density Diskette Operating System and a Model 201 Expansion Chassis (which holds the ICE·S6 emulator). The
ICE·S6 module is shown connected to a user prototype system, in this case an SDK·S6.

MACROS AND COMPOUND COMMANDS

Description

Command

The ICE·86 module provides a programmable diagnostic
facility which allows the user to tailor its operation us·
ing macro commands and compound commands.

A macro is a set of ICE·86 commands which is given a
single name. Thus, a sequence of commands which is
executed frequently may be invoked simply by typing in
a single command. The user first defines the macro by
entering the entire sequence of commands which he
wants to execute. He then names the macro and store~
it for future use. He executes the macro by typing its
name and passing up to ten parameters to the com·
mands in the macro. Macros may be saved on a disk file
foruse in subsequent debugging sessions.
Compound commands provide conditional execution of
commands(IF), and execution of commands until a con·
dition is met or until they have been executed a
specified number of times (COUNT, REPEAT).
Compound commands and macros may be nested any
number of times.

MEMORY MAPPING
Memory for the user system can be resident in the user
system or "borrowed" from the Intellec System through
ICE·86's mapping capability.
The ICE·86 emulator allows the memory which is addressed by the 8086 to be mapped in 1K-byte blocks to:
1. Physical memory in the user's system,
2. Either of two 1K-byte blocks of ICE-86 high speed
memory,

Initializes emulation and allows the
user to specify the starting point
and breakpoints. Example:
GO .FROM .START TILL .DELAY
EXECUTED
where START and DELAY are statement labels.

STEP

Allows the user to
through the program.

Single-step

Table 1. Summary of ICE-86™ Emulation
Commands

OPERATION MODES
The ICE-B6 software is a RAM-based program that provides the user with easy-to·use commands for initiating
emulation, defining breakpoints, controlling trace data
collection, and displaying and controlling system
parameters. ICE-B6 commands are configured with a
broad range of modifiers which provide the user with
maximum flexibility in describing the operation to be
performed.

Emulation
Emulation commands to the ICE-B6 emulator control the
process of setting up, running and halting an emulation
of the user's 80B6. Breakpoints and tracepoints enable
ICE-B6 to halt emulation and provide a detailed trace of
execution in any part of the user's program. A summary
of the emulation commands is shown in Table 1.

3. Intellec memory,
4. A random·access diskette file.
The user can also designate a block of memory as nonexistent. The ICE·86 module issues an error message
when any such "guarded" memory is addressed by the
user program.

15·32

Breakpoints - The ICE-86 module has two breakpoint
registers that allow the user to halt emulation when a
specified condition is met. The breakpoint registers may
be set up for execution or non-execution breaking. An
execution breakpoint consists of a single address
which causes a break whenever the BOB6 executes from
its queue an instruction byte which was obtained from

ICE·86™ IN·CIRCUIT EMULATOR
the address. A non·execution breakpoint causes an
emulation break when a specified condition other than
an instruction execution occurs. A non·execution breakpOint condition, using one or both breakpoint registers,
may be specified by anyone of or a combination of:

Memory/Register Commands
Display or change the contents of:
• Memory
• 8086 Registers
• 8086 Status flags
• 8086 Input pins'
• 8086 110 ports
• ICE·86 Pseudo·Reglsters (e.g. emulation timer)

1. A set of address values. Break on a set of address
values has three valuable features:
a. Break on a single address.

Memory Mapping Commands

b. The ability to set any number of breakpoints within
a limited range (1024 bytes maximum) of memory.

Display, declare, set, or reset the fCE·86 memory mapping.
Symbol Manipulation Commands

c. The ability to break in an unlimited range. Execution is halted on any memory access to an address
greater than (or less than) any 20·bit breakpoint address.

Display any or all symbols, program modules, and program
line 'numbers and their associated values (locations in
memory).
Set the domain (choose the particular program module) for
the line numbers.

2. A particular status of the 8086 bus (one or more of:
memory or 1/0 read or write, instruction fetch, halt, or
interrupt acknowledge).

Define new symbols as they are needed in

Remove any
statements.

3. A set of data values (features comparable to break on
a set of address values, explained in point one).

or all

symbols,

debug~lng.

modules, and

program

Change the value of any symbol:
TYPE

4. A segment register (break occurs when the register is
used in an effective address calculation).

Assign or change the type of any symbol in the symbol table.
ASM

An external breakpoint match output for user access is
provided on the buffer box. This allows synchronization
of other test equipment when a break occurs.

Disassemble user program memory into ASM·86 Assembler
mnemonics.
PRINT

Tracepoints - The ICE-86 module has two tracepoint
registers which establish match conditions to conditionally start and stop trace collection. The trl;lce Information is gathered at least twice per bus cycle, first
when the address signals are valid and second when the
data signals are valid. If the 8086 execution queue is
otherwise active, additional frames of trace are collected.

Display the specified portion of the trace memory.
LOAD
Fetch user symbol.table and object code from the input file.
SAVE
Send user symbol table and obiect code to the output file.
LIST
Send a copy of all output (including prompts, input line
echos, and error messages) to the chosen output device (e.g.
disk, printer) as well as the console.

Each trace frame contains the 20 addressldata lines and
detailed information on the status of the 8086. The trace
memory can store 1,023 frames, or an average of about
300 bus cycles, providing ample data for determining
how the 8086 was reacting prior to emulation break. The
trace memory contains the last 1,023 frames of trace
data collected, even if this spans several separate
emulations. The user has the option of displaying each
frame of the trace data or displaying by instruction in actual ASM·86 Assembler mnemonics. Unless the user
chooses to disable trace, the trace information is
always available after an emulation.

EVALUATE
Display the value of an expression in binary, octal, decimal,
hexadecimal, and ASCII.
SUFFIX/BASE
Establish the default base for numeric values in' input
text/output display (binary, octal, decimal, or hexadecimal).
CLOCK
Select the internal (ICE·86 provided, for stand·alone mode
only) or an external (user·provided) system clock.
RWTIMEOUT
Allows the user to time out READ/WRITE command signals
based on the time taken by the 8086 to access Intellec
memory or diskette memory.

Interrogation and Utility
Interrogation and utility commands give the user con·
venient access to detailed information about the user
program and the state of the 8086 that is useful in
debugging hardware and software. Changes can be
made in both memory and the 8086 registers, flags, input pins, and I/O ports. Commands are also provided for
various utility operations such as loading and saving
program files, defining symbols and macros, displaying
trace data, setting up the memory map, and returning
control to ISIS-II. A summary of the basic interrogation
and utility commands is shown in Table 2.
./

15-33

ENABLEfDlSABLE ROY
Enable or disable logical AND of ICE·86 Ready with the user
Ready signal for accessing Intellec memory, ICE memory, or
diskette memory.

Table 2. Summary of Basic ICE-86™
Interrogation and Utility
Commands

ICE;.86™IN-CIRCUIT EMULATOR
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN ICE-86™
EMULATION AND THE 8086
MICROPROCESSOR

DC CHARACTERISTICS OF ICE-86™
USER CABLE
1. Output Low Voltages [VodMax)= O.4V]
10L (Min)

The ICE-86 module emulates the actual operation of the
8086 microprocessor with the following ,exceptions:
The ICE-86 module will not respond to a user system
NMI or RESET signal when it is out of emulation.
• Trap is ignored in'single step mode and on the first instruction step of an emulation.

ADO-AD15

B mA
(24 mA @ 0.5V)

A16/S3-A19/S7, SHE/S7, RD, '
LOCK, OSO, OS1, SO, S1, S2,
WR, M/iB, DT/R, DEN, ALE,
.
INTA

BmA
(16 mA @ 0.5V)

7mA

HLDA

• The MIN/MAX line, which chooses the "minimum" or
"maximum" configuration of the 8086, must not
change dynamically in the user system.

MATCHO OR MATCH1 (on
buffer box)

• In the "minimum" mode, the user HOLD signal must
remain active until HLDA is output by the ICE-86
emulator.

16mA

2. Output High Voltages [V OH (Min) = 2.4V]
IOH(Min)

• The RO/GT lines in the "maximum" configuration are
not supported.
The speed of run emulation by the ICE-86 module
depends on where the user has mapped his memory. As
the user prototype progresses to include memory,
emulation becomes real time.

ADO-AD15

- 2 mA

A16/S3-A19/S7, SHE/S7, RD,
LOCK, OSO; OS1, SO, S1, S2,
WR, M/iB, DT/A, DEN, ALE,
INTA, HLDA

-1 mA

MATCHO OR MATCH1 (on
buffer box)

- O.B mA

3. Input Low Voltages [VIL(Max) = O.BV]
IlL (Max)
Memory
Mapped To

ADO-AD15
NMI, CLK
READY
INTR,HOLD,TEST,RESET
MN/MX (0.1I'f to GND)

Estimated Speed

-0.2
-0.4
-O.B
-1.4
-3.3

User System

100% of real time*, up to 4 MHz
clock

ICE

2 wait states per 80B6-controlled
bus cycle

4. Input High Voltages [VIH(Min) = 2.0V]

Intellec

Approximately 0.02% of real time
at 4 MHz clock

Diskette

ADO·AD15
NMI, CLK
READY
INTR, HOLD,TEST, RESET
MN/MX (0.1 I'F to GND)

IIH(Max)

* 100% of real time is emulation at the user system clock rate with

no wait states.
* :*The emulation speed from diskette is comparable to Intellee

memory, but emulation must wait when a new page is accessed
on the diskette.

mA
mA
mA
rnA
mA

BOI'A
20l'A
40l'A
-0.4 mA
-1.1 mA

5. RO/GTO, RO/GT1 are pulled up to + 5V through a 5.6K
ohm resistor. No current is taken from user circuit at
Vee, pin.

15-34
-.--.~

ICE-86 1M IN-CIRCUIT EMULATOR
SPECIFICATIONS

Emulation Clock

Operating Environment

User system clock up to 4 MHz or 2 MHz ICE-86 internal
clock in stand-alone mode

Required Hardware
Intellec microcomputer development system with:
1. Three adjacent slots for the ICE·86 module (Series II
requires Model 201 Expansion Chassis.)
2. 64K bytes of Intellec memory. If user prototype program memory is desired, additional memory above
the basic 64K is required.
System console
Intellec diskette operating system
ICE·86 module

Physical Characteristics
Printed Circuit Boards
Width: 12.00 in (30.48 cm)
Height: 6.75 in (17.15 cm)
Depth: 0.50 in (1.27 cm)
Packaged Weight: 9.00 Ib (4.10 kg)

Electrical Characteristics
DC Power

Vcc = +5V +5% -1%
Icc = 15A maximum; 11A typical
Voo = + 12V ± 5%
100
120 mA maximum; 80 mA typical
V BB = - 10V ± 5% or - 12V ± 5% (optional)
IBB 15 mA maximum; 12 mA typical

Required Software
System monitor
ISIS-II, version 3.4 or subsequent
ICE-86 software

=
=

Equipment Supplied
Printed circuit boards (3)
Interface cable and emulation buffer module
Operator's manual
ICE-86 software, diskette-based

Environmental Characteristics
Operating Temperature: 0' to 40 'C
Operating Humidity: Up to 95% relative humidity without condensation.

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part

Numb~r

MDS-86-ICE'

Description
8086 CPU in-circuit emulator, cable assembly and interactive diskette software.

'MDS is an ordering code only and is not used as a product name or trademark. MDS® is a registered trademark of Mohawk Data
Science Corporation.

15-35

inter
ICE-88™
8088 IN-CIRCUIT EMULATOR
.

• Hardware In-Circuit Emulation

• Full Symbolic Debugging

• 2K Bytes of High Speed ICE-88™
Mapped Memory

• Breakpoints to Halt Emulation on a
Wide Variety of Conditions

• Software Debugging with or without
User System

• Comprehensive Trace of Program
Execution, Both Conditional and
.
Unconditional

• Handles Full 1 Megabyte
Addressability of 8088

• Disassembly of Trace or Memory from
Object Code into Assembler
Mnemonics

• Compound Commands
• Command Macros

The ICE-88 module provides In-Circuit Emulation for the 8088 microprocessor. It includes three circuit boards
which reside in Intellec® Microcomputer Development Systems. A cable and buffer box connect the Intellec
system to the user system by replacing the user's 8088. Powerful Intellec debug functions are thus extended
into the user system. Using the ICE-88 module, the designer can execute prototype software in continuous or
single-step mode and can substitute blocks of Intellec system memory for user equivalents. Breakpoints allow
the user to stop emulation on user-specified conditions, and the trace capability gives a detailed history of the
program execution prior to the break. All user access to the prototype system software may be done symbolically by referring to the source program variables and labels.

15·36

AFN-0145A

ICE-88™ IN-CIRCUIT EMULATOR
INTEGRATED HARDWARE/SOFTWARE
DEVELOPMENT

SYMBOLIC DEBUGGING
Symbols and PLiM statement numbers may be substi·
tuted for numeric values in any of the ICE·88 com·
mands. This allows the user to make symbolic refer·
ences to 110 ports, memory addresses, and data in the
user program. Thus the user need not remember the
addresses of variables or program subroutines.

The ICE·88 emulator allows hardware and software
development to proceed interactively. This is more
effective than the traditional method of independent
hardware and software development followed by
system integration. With the ICE·88 module, prototype
hardware can be added to the system as it is designed.
Software and hardware testing occurs while the product
is being developed.

Symbols can be used to reference variables, proce·
dures, program labels, and source statements. A vari·
able can be displayed or changed by referring to it by
name rather than by its absolute location in memory.
Using symbols for statement labels, program labels,
and procedure names simplifies both tracing and break·
point setting. Disassembly of a section of code from
either trace or program memory into its assembly
mnemonics is readily accomplished.

Conceptually, the ICE·88 emulator assists three stages
of development:
1. It can be operated without being connected to the
user's system, so ICE·88 debugging capabilities can
be used to facilitate program development before
any of the user's hardware is available.
2. Integration of software and hardware can begin
when any functional element of the user system
hardware is connected to the 8088 socket. Through
ICE·88 mapping capabilities, Intellec memory, ICE
memory, or diskette memory can be substituted for
missing prototype memory. Time·crltical program
modules are debugged before hardware implementa·
tion by using the 2K·bytes of high·speed ICE·resident
memory. As each section of the user's hardware is
completed, it is added to the prototype. Thus each
section of the hardware and software is "system"
tested as it becomes available.

Furthermore, each symbol may have associated with it
one of the data types BYTE, WORD, INTEGER,
SINTEGER (for short, 8·bit integer) or POINTER. Thus
the user need not remember the type of a source pro·
gram variable when examining or modifying it. For
example, the command "!VAR" displays the value in
memory of variable VAR in a format appropriate to its
type, while the command "!VAR = !VAR + 1" increments
the value of the variable.
The user symbol table generated along with the object
file during a PLlM·86 compilation or an ASM·86 assem·
bly is loaded into memory along with the user program
which is to be emulated. The user may add to this
symbol table any additional symbolic values for
memory addresses, constants, or variables that are
found useful during system debugging.

3. When the user's prototype is complete, it is tested
with the final version of the user system software.
The ICE·88 module is then used for real time emula·
tion of the 8088 to debug the system as a completed
unit.

The ICE·88 module provides access through symbolic
definition to all of the 8088 registers and flags. The
READY, NMI, TEST, HOLD, RESET, INTR, and MNIMX
pins of the 8088 can also be read. Symbolic references
to key ICE·88 emulation information are also provided.

Thus the ICE·88 module provides the user with the
ability to debug a prototype or production system at any
stage in its development without introducing extrane·
ous hardware or software test tools.

Y·CABLE
BUFFER BOX

~PLUGINTO
USER
8088 SOCKET

,-----r-----,
I
I

I'
I I

[BLE

-----

---------------- - ---,
I

I Nr"E~k¥C'

FIRMWARE
CONTROLLER
BOARD

TRACE BOARD

I
88·CONTROLLER
BOARO

1
I
0 I
I'
, L ___ -l,<
L ___________________________
'I

T·CABLE

MULTI BUS

AUXllIARY·CON N ECTOR

Figure 1. ICE-88™ Emulator Block Diagram

15·37

,
,I
I
I

~~~

AFN·0145A

ICE~88T1~IN-CIRCUIT EMULATOR

DIFFERENCES BETWEEN ICE-88 n "
EMULATION AND THE 8088
MICROPROCESSOR

DC CHARACTERISTICS OF ICE-88™,
USER CABLE
1_ Output Low Voltages (VOL(Max)= 0_4VI
,
'lodMin)

The ICE-BB module emulates the actual operation, of the
BOBB microprocessor with the following exceptions:

,ADO-AD7, AB-A15,. 550,
A16/S3-A19/S7, RD,
LOCK, 050, 05< SO, 51, 52,
WR, M/iO, DT/R, DEN, ALE,
INTA

- The ICE-BB module willnot respond to a user system
NMI or,RESET signal when it is out of emulation .• ',
- Trap is ignored in single step mode and' on the Hrst
instruction step of an emulation.
-The MINIMAX line, which chooses the "minimum" or
"maximum" configuration of the BOBB, mUl!t not
change dynamically, in the user system.

BmA
(16mA @ 0.5V)

HLDA
MATCHO OR MATCH1 (on
buffer box)

5mA
16mA

2. Output High Voltages (VoH(Min) = 2_4V)
10H(Mln)

- In the "minimum" mode, the user HOLD signal must
remain active until HLDA is output by the ICE-BB
emulator.

ADO-AD7, AB-A15
A16/S3-A19/S7, 550, RD, '
LOCK, 050, 051, So, 51, 52,
WR, MilO, DT/R, DEN, ALE,
INTA
,HLDA

- The RO/GT lines inthe "maximum"configuration are
'
not supported.
The speed of run emulation by the ICE-SB module
depends Oli where the user has mapped his rriei)1ory. As
the user prototype progresses to include memory,
'
emulation becomes reill time.,

MATCHO OR MATCH1 (on
buffer box)

-2.0mA

-3.0mA
'-O.BmA

a.lnput Low Voltages (V ldMax)=O.8V)
Memory
Mapped To
User System
ICE
Intellec
Diskette

ADO-AD7 "
NMI, CLK
READY
INTR, HOLD, TEST,RESET
MN/MX (0.1"f to GND)

Estimated Speed
100% of real time*; up to 5 MHz
clock
2 wait states per BOBB-controlled
bus cyCle
Approximateiy 0.02% olreal time
at 5 MHz clock
**

4_ Input High Voltages (VIH(Mln) = 2.0V)
IIH(Max)
ADO-AD7
NMI, CLK
READY
INTR, HOLD, TEST, RESET,
MN/MX (0.1"F to GND)

.• 100% of real time is emulation at the user system clock. rate
with no walt states,

•• The emulation speed from diskette is comparable to Inteliec
memory, but emulation must walt when a ne~ page is
accessed on the diskette.

IldMax)
-0.2mA
-0.4mA
-O.BmA
-1AmA
'-3.3mA

BO"A
20"A
60"A
-OAmA
-1.1 mA

5. RO/GTO, RO/GT1 are pulled up to +5V through a
5.6K ohm resistor. No current is taken from user
circuit at Vee pin.

15-38

AFN·0145A

intel

ICE·88™ IN·CIRCUIT EMULATOR

A typical ICE-88 development configuration. It is based on a Model 230 Development System, which also
includes a Double Density Diskette Operating System and a Model 201 Expansion Chassis (which holds
the ICE-88 emulator). The ICE-88 module is shown connected to a user prototype system.

MACROS AND COMPOUND
COMMANDS
The ICE·88 module provides a programmable diagnostic
facility which allows the user to tailor its operation
using macro commands and compound commands.

The user can also deSignate a block of memory as non·
existent. The ICE·88 module issues an error message
when any such "guarded" memory is addressed by the
user program.

Compound commands provide conditional execution of
commands (IF), and execution of commands until a con·
dition is met or until they have been executed a speci·
fied number of times (COUNT, REPEAT).
Compound commands and macros may be nested any
number of times.
.

MEMORY MAPPING
Memory for the user system can be resident in the user
system or "borrowed" from the Intellec System through
ICE·88's mapping capability.
The ICE·88 emulator allows the memory Which is
addressed by the 8088 to be mapped in 1K·byte blocks
to:
1. Physical memory in the user's system,
2. Either of two 1K·byte blocks of ICE·88 high·speed
memory,
3. Intellec memory,
4. A random·access diskette file.

Description

Command

A macro is a set of ICE·88 commands which is given a
Single name. Thus, a sequence of commands which is
executed frequently may be invoked simply by typing in
a single command. The user first defines the macro by
entering the entire sequence of commands which he
wants to execute. He then names the macro and stores
it for future use. He executes the macro by typing its
name and passing up to ten parameters to the com·
mands in the macro. Macros may be saved on a disk file
for use in subsequent debugging sessions.

Initializes emulation and allows the
user to specify the starting point
and breakpoints. Example:
GO FROM .START TILL .DELAY
EXECUTED
where START and DELAY are state·
ment labels.

STEP

Allows the· user to
through the program.

single·step

Table 1. Summary,of ICE·88 Emulation Commands.

OPERATION MODES
The ICE·88 software is a RAM·based program that pro·
vides the user with easy·to·use commands for initiating
emulation, defining breakpoints, controlling trace data
collection, and displaying and controlling system para·
meters. ICE·88 commands are configured with a broad
range of modifiers which provide the user with
maximum flexibility in describing the operation to be
performed.

Emulation
Emulation commands to the ICE·88 emulator control
the process of setting up, running and halting an emula·
tion of the user's 8088. Breakpoints and tracepoints
enable ICE·88 to halt emulation and provide a detailed
trace of execution in any part of the user's program. A
summary of the.emulation commands is shown in Table 1.
Breakpoints -TheICE·88 module has two breakpoint
registers that allow the user to halt emulation when a

15·39

AFN0145A

inter

ICE·88™ IN·CIRCUIT EMULATOR

specified condition is met. The breakpoint registers
may be set up for execution or non-execution breaking_
An execution breakpoint consists of a single address
which causes a break whenever the 8088 executes from
its queue an instruction byte which was obtained from
the address_ A non-execution breakpoint causes an
emulation break when a specified condition other than
an instruction execution occurs_ A non-execution breakpoint condition, using one or both breakpoint registers,
may be specified by anyone of or a combination of:

program files, defining symbols and macros, displaying
trace data, setting up the memory map, and returning
control to the ISIS·II operating system. A summary of
the basic interrogation and utility commands is shown
in Table 2.

Memory/Register Commands
Dis'play or change the contents of:
• Memory
• 8088 Registers
• 8088 Status flags
o 8088 Input pins
o 8088 1/0 ports
• ICE·BS Pseudo-Registers (e.g. emulation timer)

1. A set of address values. Break on a set of address
values has three valuable features:
a. Break on a single address.
b. The ability to set any number of breakpoints within
a limited range (1024 bytes maximum) of memory.

Memory Mapping Commands
Display, declare, set, or reset the ICE-B8 memory mapping.

c. The abilityto break in an unlimited range. Execu,
tion is halted on any memory access to an address
greater than (or less than) any .20-bit breakpoint
address.

Symbol Manipulation Commands
Display,any or all symbols, program modules, and program
line numbers. and their associated values (locations in
memory).

2. A particular status of the 8088 bus (one or more of:
memory or 1/0 read or write, instruction fetch, halt, or
interrupt acknowledge).

Set the domain (choose the particula'r program module) for
the line numbers.

3. A set of data values (features comparable to break on
a set of address values, explained in point one).

Remove any or all symbols, modules, and program statements.

Define new symbols as thE?Y are needed in ,debugging.

Change the value of any symbol.

4. A segment register (break occurs when the register is
used in an effective address calculation).

TYPE

An external breakpoint match output for user access is
provided on the buffer box. This allows synchronization
of other test equipment when a break occurs.

ASM

Assign or change the type of any symbol in the symbol table.

Disassemble user program memory into ASM-86 Assembler
mnemonics.

Tracepoints - The ICE-88 module has two tracepoint
registers which establish match conditions to conditionally start and stop trace collection. The trace information is gathered at least twice. per bus cycle, first
when the address signals are valid and second when
the data signals are valid. If the 8088 execution queue is
otherwise active, additional frames of trace are collected.

PRINT
Display the specified portion of the trace memory.
LOAD
.

Fetch user symbol table and. object code from the input file.
SAVE
Send user symbol table and object code to the output file.
LIST

Each trace frame contains the 20 addressldata lines
and detailed information on the status of the 8088. The
trace memory can store 1,023 frames, or an average of
about 300 bus cycles, providing ample data for
determining how the 8088 was reacting prior to
emulation break. The trace memory contains the last
1,023 frames of trace data collected, even if this spans
several separate emulations. The user has the option of
displaying each frame of the trace data or displaying by
instruction in actual ASM-86 Assembler mnemonics.
Unless the user chooses to disable trace, the trace
information is always available after an emulation.

Send a·. copy of all output (including prompts, input line
echos, and error messages) to the chosen output device (e.g.
disk, printer) as well as the console.
EVALUATE
Display the value of an expression in binary, octal, decimal,
hexadecimal. and ASCII.
SUFFIX/BASE
Establish the default base for numeric values in input
textfoutput display (binary, octal, decimal, or hexadec·imal).
CLOCK
Select the· internal .(lCE-88 provided, for stand-alone mode
only) or an external (user-provided) system clock.
RWTIMEOUT
Allows the user to time out READIWRITE command Signals
based on the time taken by the 8088 to access Intellec
memory or diskette memory.

Interrogation and Utility
Interrogation and utility commands give the user con·
venient access to detailed information about the user
program and the state of the 8088 that is useful in
debugging hardware and software. Changes can be
made in both memory and the 8088 registers, flags,
inputpins,and 1/0 ports. Commands are also provided
for various utility operations such as loading and saving

ENABLEIDISABLE RDY
Enable or disable logical AND of ICE·88. Ready with the user
Ready signal for accessing Intellec memory, ICE memory, or
di skette memory.
-

Table 2. Summary of Basic ICE·88 Interrogation and
Utility Commands.

15-40

= -.

AFN0145A

ICE-88™ IN-CIRCUIT EMULATOR
SPECI FICATIONS

Emulation Clock

Operating Environment

User system clock up to 5 MHz or 2 MHz ICE-88
internal clock in stand-alone mode

Required Hardware
Intellec microcomputer development system with:
1. Three adjacent slots for the ICE·88 module. (Series II
requires Model 201 Expansion Chassis).
2. 64K bytes of Intellec memory. If user prototype pro·
gram memory is desired. additional memory above
the basic 64K is required.
System console
Intellec diskette operating system
ICE·88 module
Required Software
System monitor
ISIS·II, version 3.4 or subsequent
ICE·88 software

Physical Characteristics
Printed Circuit Boards
Width: 12.00 in (30.48 cm)
Height: 6.75 in (17.15 cm)
Depth: 0.50 in (1.27 cm)
Packaged Weight: 9.00 Ib (4.10 kg)

Electrical Characteristics
DC Power
Vcc= +5V +5%-1%
Icc = 15A maximum; 11 A typical
Voo = + 12V ±5%
100 = 120mA maximum; 80mA typical
VBB = -10V±5% or -12V±5% (optional)
IBB = 25mA maximum; 12mA typical

Equipment Supplied

Environmental Characteristics

Printed circuit boards (3)
Interface cable and emulation buffer module
Operator's manual
ICE-88 software, diskette-based

Operating Temperature: 0 to 40°C
Operating Humidity: Up to 95% relative humidity with'
out condensation.
0

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

MDS-88-ICE'

8088 CPU in-circuit emulator

'MDS is an ordering code only and is not used as a product name or trademark. MDS® is a registered trademark of Mohawk Data Science
Corporation.

15-41

---".:..:..:.:::..

Prototype
Microcomputer Kits

SDK-8S
MCS-8S™ SYSTEM DESIGN KIT
• Complete Single Board Microcomputer
System Including CPU, Memory, and I/O
• Easy to Assemble, Low Cost, Kit Form

• Popular SOSOA Instruction Set
• Interfaces Directly with TTY

• Extensive System Monitor Software in
ROM

• High Performance 3 MHz SOSSA CPU
(1.3 J-tS Instruction Cycle)

• Interactive LED Display and Keyboard

• Comprehensive Design Library
Included

• Large Wire-Wrap Area for Custom
Interfaces

The SDK-85 MCS-85 System Design Kit is a complete single board microcomputer system in kit form. It contains all
components required to complete construction of the kit, including LED display, keyboard, resistors, caps, crystal,
and miscellaneous hardware. Included is a preprogrammed ROM containing a system monitor for general software
utilities and system diagnostics. The complete kit includes a 6-digit LED display and a 24-key keyboard for a direct insertion, examination, and execution of a user's program. In addition, it can be directly interfaced with a teletype terminal. The SDK-85 is an inexpensive, high performance prototype system that has designed-in flexibility for simple interface to the user's application.

16-1

SDK·8S
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The SDK·85 is a complete 8085A microcomputer system
on a single board, in kit form. It contains all necessary
components to build a useful, functional system. Such
items as resistors, capacitors, and sockets are included.
Assembly time varies from three to five hours, depend·
,ng on the skill of the user. The S~K·85 functional block
diagram is shown 'n Figure 1.

808SA Processor

ADDRESS
DECODER

ROMIIO (8355)
EPROM/IO (8755)

Addressing - The 8085A uses a multiplexed data bus.
The 16·bit address is split between the 8·bit address bus
and the 8·bit address/data bus. The on·chip address
latches of 8155/8156/8355/8755 memory products allows
a direct interface with the 8085A.

System Monitor

The SDK·85 is designed around Intel's 8085A microproc·
essor. The Intel 8085A is a new generation, complete
8·bit parallel central processing unit (CPU). Its instruc·
tion set is 100% software upward compatible with the
8080A microprocessor, and it is deSigned to improve the
present 8080A's performance by higher system speed.
Its high level of system integration allows a minimum
system of three IC's: 8085A (CPU), 8156 (RAM), and
8355/8755 (ROM/PROM). A block diagram of the 8085A
microprocessor is shown in Figure 2.

CPU

System Integration - The 8085A incorporates all of the
features that the 8224 (clock generator) and 8228 (sys·
tem controller) provided for the 8080A, thereby offering
a high level of system integration.

A compact but powerful system monitor is supplied
with the SDK·85 to provide general software utilities and
system diagnostics. It comes in a pre·programmed
ROM.

Communications Interface
The SDK·85 communicates with the outside world
through either the on·board LED display/keyboard com·
bination, or the user's TTY terminal (jumper selectable).

KEYBOARD/DISPLAY

RAM/IO/COUNTER
.
_----

FOR BUS EXPANSION
DATA

FIELD

r-~:6--'}
L _____

.J ..

DATA
BUS

r----'

INTERRUPT
INPUTS

8216

'- -----..1

[~ ~ J

OPTIONAL

'6gic~£'~~~~~~~:U~EV~DED ON THE PC BOARD FOR THE DEVICE BUT THE

Figure 1. SDK·aS System Design Kit Functional Block Diagram

16·2

SDK·8S

INSIDE THE 8085:

POWER{_ +5V

SUPPLY

GND

TIMING AND CONTROL

A 1S"A e

A07·ADo
ADDRESS/DATA SUS

ADDRESS BUS

•
•

SEVEN a-BIT REGISTERS_ SIX OF THEM CAN BE LINKED
IN REGISTER PAIRS FOR CERTAIN OPERATIONS, '
a-BIT ALU_ ,

•
•

16-BIT STACK POINTER (STACK IS MAINTAINED
OFFBOARDIN SYSTEM RAM MEMORY),
16-BIT PROGRAM COUNTER.

Figure 2. SOSSA Microprocessor Block Diagram
Both memory and 1/0 can be easily expanded by simply
soldering in additional devices in locations provided for
this purpose. A large area of the board (45 sq. in.) is laid
out as general purpose wire·wrap for the user's custom
interfaces.

Commands - Keyboard monitor commands and teletype
monitor commands are provided in Table 1 and Table 2 respectively.
Command

Assembly

Display memory

Only a few simple tools 'are required for assembly;
soldering iron, cutters, screwdriver, etc. The SDK·85
user's manual contains step-by-step instructions for
easy assembly without mistakes. Once construction is
complete, the user connects his kit to a power supply
and the SDK-85 is ready to go. The monitor starts immediately upon power-on or reset.
Command

Substitute memory

Insert instructions
Move memory

Operation

Examine register

Reset
Go

Starts monitor.
Allows user to execute user program.
Single step
Allows user to execute user program one instruction at a timeuseful for debugging.
Substitute memory Allows user to examine and
modify memory locations.
Examine register
Allows user to examine and
modify 8085A's register contents.
Vector interrupt
Serves as user interrupt button.

Operation
Displays multiple memory locations.
Allows user to examine and
modify memory locations one
at a time.
Allows user to store multiple
bytes in memory.
Allows user to move blocks of
data in memory,
Allows user to examine and
modify the 8085A's register
contents.
Allows user to execute user
programs.

Table 2. Teletype Monitor Commands
I

Documentation
In addition to detailed information on using the
monitors, the SDK-85 user's manual provides circuit diagrams, a monitor listing, and a description of how the
system works. The complete design library for the
SDK-85 is shown in Figure 7-11 and listed in the Specifications section under Reference Manuals.

Table 1_ Keyboard Monitor Commands

16-3

Figure 3. SDK·8S Design Library

8085A INSTRUCTION SET
Table 3 contains a summary of processor instructions
used for the BOBSA microprocessor.

Mnemonlc 1

Description,

Instruction Code 2
I 1Clock 3
07 06 0 5 04 03 0201 DO Cycles

MOVE. LOAD. AND STORE
MOVr1r2

Move register to register

Mnemonlc 1

Descrlpllon

Instrucllon Code2

01 Clock 3

07 06 05 04 03 02 0, DO Cycles

LXI SP

Load immediate stack
pointer

Increment slack pOinter

Decrement slack
pOinter

MOV M.r

Move register to memory

INX SP

MOV r.M

Move memory to fegister

OCXSP

MVI r

Move immediate register

MVI M

Move immediate memory

JUMP

LXI B

Load immediate register
Pair B & C

JMP

Jump unconditional

Jump on carry

7/10

LXI D

Load immediate register

JNC

Jump on no carry

7/10

Jump on zero

7/10

Pair D & E

LXI H

load immediate register
Pair H & L

STAX B

Store A Indirect

JNZ

; Jump on no zero

7110

/ Jump on positive

7fl0

Jump on minus

7/10

STAX 0

Store A Indirect

LDAX B

Load A Indirect

JPE

Jump on parity even

7110

J~O

Jump on parity odd

7110

PCHL

H !i L to program
counter

LOA X 0

Load A indirect

STA

Store A direct

LOA

Load A direct

SHLO

Store H & L direct

LHLD

Load H & L direct

XCHG

Exchange D & E, H & L
registers

PUSH B

Push register pair B & C
on stack

. PUSH D

CAll

Call unconditional

Call on carry

9118

CNC

Callan no carry

9118

Call on zero

0
0

Push register pair D & E
on stack

Push register pair H & L
on stack

CALL

STACK OPS

PUSH H

PUSH PSW

Push A and-flags on
stack

POP B

Pop register pair B & C
off stack

CNZ

Call on no zero

9/18

Callan positive

9118

Call on minus

9118

CPE

Call on parity even

9/18

CPO

Call on parity odd

9/18

Return

Return on carry

6/12

RNC

Return on no carry

6/12

Return on zero

6112

RETURN
RET
RC

POP D

Pop register pair 0 & E
off stack

POP H

Pop register pair H & L
off stack

0 '0

POP PSW

Pop A and flags off
stack

XTHL

Exchange top of stack.
H&L

SPHL

H & L to stack pointer

RNZ

Return on no zero

6/12

Return on positive

6112

Return on minus

6112

contmued

16·4

SDK·a5
Mnemonlc 1

Description

I Clock 3

Instruction Code 2

I Cycles

) 07 06 Os 04 03 02 01 DO

Mnemonlc 1

RPE

Return on parity even

6112

lOGICAL

RPO

Return on parity odd

6112

ANA r
XRA r

RESTART
RST

And register with A

Exclusive Or register

4
4

107

Instruction Code 2

Os 05 04 03 02 0, Dol Cycles

with A
1

Restart

ORA r

Or register with A

CMPr

Compare register with A

ANA M

And memory with A

XRA M

Exclusive Or memory

INCREMENT AND DECREMENT
INR r

I Clock 3

Description

Increment register

DCRr

Decrement register

INA M

Increment memory

DCA M

Decrement memory

ORA M

Or memory with A

INX B

Increment B & C
registers

CMP M

Compare memory with A

INX D

Increment 0 & E

ANI

And immediate with A

XRI

Exclusive Or immediate

with A

registers

lNX H

Increment H & L
registers

DCX B

Decrement B & C

DCX 0

Decrement 0 & E

DCX H

Decrement H & L

1
1

ADD r

Add register to A

ADC r

Add register to A with
carry

ADD M

Add memory to A

ADC M

Add memory to A with
carry

ADI

Add immediate to A

. ACI

Add immediate to A
with carry

DAD B

Add 8 & C to H & L

DAD D

Add D & E to H & L

DAD H

Add H & L to H & L

DAD SP

Add stack painter to

with A
ORI

Or immediate with A

CPI

Compare immediate

with A
ROTATE
RlC

Rotate A left

RRC

Rotate A right

RAl

Rotate A left through
carry

RAR

Rotate A right through
carry

CMA

Complement A

STC

Set carry

CMC

Complement carry

DAA

Decimal adjust A

ADO

SPECIALS

INPUT/OUTPUT

H&l

Input

OUT

Output

Enable interrupts

Disable interrupts

NOP

No·operation

HlT

Halt

SUBTRACT
SUB r

Subtract repister from A

SBB r

Subtract register from A
with borrow

SUB M

Subtract memory from A

SBB M

Subtract memory from
A with borrow

SUI

Subtract immediate
from A

SBI

Subtract immediate
from A with borrow

CONTROL

RIM

Read interrupt mask

SIM

Set interrupt mask

NEW 8085 INSTRUCTIONS

Notes

1. All mnemonics copyright © Intel Corporation 1977.
2. DDD or SSS: 8=000, C=001, D=010, E=011, H=100, L= 101, Memory = 110, A= 111.
3. Two possible cycle times. (6/12) indicates instruction cycles dependent on condition flags.

Table 3. Summary of 8085A Processor Instructions

SPECIFICATIONS

Addressing

Central Processor

ROM - 0000-07FF (expendable to OFFF with an additional 8355/8755A)
RAM - 2000-20FF (2800-28FF available with an additional8155)

CPU - 8085A
Instruction Cycle Tcy - 330 ns

1.3 I's

Memory

Note
The wire-wrap area of the SDK·85 PC board may be used for additional

ROM - 2K bytes (expandable to 4K bytes) 8355/8755A
RAM - 256 bytes (expandable to 512 bytes) 8155

custom memory expansion up to the 64K·byte addressing limit of the

8085A.

16·5

SDK·as
Input/Output

Physical Characteristics

Parallel - 38 lines (expandable to 76 lines)
Serial - Through SID/SOD ports of 8085A. Software
generated baud rate.
Baud Rate - 110

Width Height Depth Weight -

Interfaces

DC Power Requirement (power supply not included in
kit)

12.0 in. (30.5 cm)
10 in. (25.4 cm)
0.50 in. (1.27 cm)
approx. 12 oz

Electrical Characteristics
Bus - All signals TTL compatible
Parallel 110 - All signals TTL compatible
Serial 110 - 20 mA current loop TTY

Voltage

1.3A
' 0.3A

VTTY -lOY ± 10%

(VTTY required only if teletype
is connected)

Environmental Characteristics

Interrupts

Operating Temperature -

Three Levels
(RST 7.5) - Keyboard interrupt
(RST 6.5) - TTL input
(INTR) - TTL input

Reference Manuals

Jumper selectable. TTL compatible

Software
System Monitor - Pre·programmed 8755A or 8355 ROM
Addresses - 0000-07FF
Monitor 110 - Keyboard/display or TTY (serial 110)

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

SDK-85

MCS-85 system design kit

0-55°C

9800451 - SDK-85 User's Manual (SUPPLIED)
9800366 - MCS-85 User's Manual (SUPPLIED)
9800301 - 8080/8085 Assembly Language Programming Manual (SUPPLIED)
8085/8080 Assembly Language Reference Card (SUP·
PLIED)
Reference manuals are shipped with each product only
if designated SUPPLIED (see above). Manuals may be
ordered from any Intel sales representative, distributor
office or from Intel Literature Department, 3065 Bowers
Avenue, Santa Clara, California 95051.

DMA
Hold Request input.

Current

Vee 5V ±5%

Note
By populating the buffer area of the board, the user has access to all bus
signals that enable him to design custom system expansions into the
kit's wire-wrap area.

16·6

SDK-86
MCS-86™ SYSTEM DESIGN KIT
• Wire Wrap Area for Custom Interfaces

• Complete Single Board Microcomputer
System Including CPU, Memory, and 1/0

• Extensive System Monitor Software in
ROM

• Easy to Assemble Kit Form
• High Performance 808616-Bit CPU

• Comprehensive Design Library
Included

• Interfaces Directly with TTY or CRT
• Interactive LED Display and Keyboard

The SDK-86 MCS-86 System Design Kit is a complete single board 8086 microcomputer system in kit form. It contains
all necessary components to complete construction of the kit, including LED display, keyboard, resistors, caps, crystal, and miscellaneous hardware. Included are preprogrammed ROMs containing a system monitor for general software utilities and system diagnostics. The complete kit includes an 8-digit LED display and a mnemonic 24-key keyboard for direct insertion, examination, and execution of a user's program. In addition, it can be directly interfaced
with a teletype terminal, CRT terminal, or the serial port of an Intellec system. The SDK-86 is a high performance prototype system with designed-in flexibility for simple interface to the user's application.

16-7

SDK·86
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

A block aiagram of the 8086 microprocessor isshown in
Figure 2.

The SDK-86 is a complete MCS-86 microcomputer system on a single board, in kit form. It contains all necessary components to build a useful, functional system.
Such items as resistors, caps, and sockets are included.
Assembly time varies from 4 to 10 hours, depending on
the skill of the user. The SDK-86 functional block diagram is shown in Figure 1.

System Monitor
A compact but powerful system monitor is supplied
with the SDK-86 to provide general software utilities and
system diagnostics. It comes in preprogrammed read
only memories (ROMs).

Communications Interface

8086 Processor
The SDK-86is designed around Intel's 8086 microprocessor. The Intel 8086 is a new generation, high performance microprocessor implemented in N-channel, deple- .
tion load, silicon gate technology (HMOS), and packaged in a 40-pin CerDIP package. The processor
features attributes of both 8-bit and 16-bit microprocessors in that it addresses memory asa sequence
of 8-bit bytes, but has a 16-bitwide physical path to
memory for high performance. Additional features of
the 8086 include the following:
• Direct addressing capability to one megabyte of
memory
• Assembly language compatibility with 8080/8085
• 14 word x 16-bit register set with symmetrical operations
• 24 operand addressing modes
• Bit, byte, word, and block operations
• 8 and 16-byte signed and unsigned arithmetic in
binary or decimal mode, including multiply and divide
• 4 or 5 or 8 MHz clock rate

The SDK-86 communicates with the outside world
through either the on-board light emitting diode (LED)
display/keyboard combination or the user's TTY or CRT
terminal (jumper selectable), or by means of a special
mode in which an Intellec development system
transports finished programs to and from the SDK-86.
Memory may be easily expanded by simply soldering in
additional devices in locations provided for this purpose. A large area of the board (22 square inches) is laid
out as general purpose wire-wrap for the user's custom
interfaces.

Assembly
Only a few simple tools are required for assembly: soldering iron, cutters, screwdriver; etc. The SDK-86
assembly manual contains step-by-step instructions for
easy assembly with a minimum of mistakes. Once construction is complete, the user connects his kit to a
power supply and the SDK-86 is ready to go. The monitor
starts immediately upon power-on or reset.
Commands - Keyboard mode commands, serial port
commands, and Intellec slave mode commands are
summarized in Table 1, Table 2, and Table 3, respectively. The SDK-86 keyboard is shown in Figure 3.

CONTROL
LINES
CONNECTOR

ADDRESS
BUS EXPANSION
CONNECTOR

LED DISPLAY

Figure 1. SDK-S6 System Design Kit Functional Block Diagram

16-8

AFN-Ol012A

SDK·8S

Documentation
In addition to detailed Information on using the monitors, the SDK-86 user's manual provides circuit diagrams, a monitor listing, and a description of how the
system works_ The complete design library for the
SDK-86 is shown in Figure 4 and listed In the specifications section under Reference Manuals.

EXECUTION UNIT

BUS INTERFACE UNIT

I R~~~~it.iI~~E I

DATA,
POINTER. AND
INDEX REGS
(8WOR.DS)

Figure 4. SDK-B6 Design Library
'-"':::"'''-"''1-_iiHlrIS,
Al~S.

AI~S3

Command
Reset

Starts monitor.

Allows user to execute user
program, and causes It to'halt
iO!t predetermined program
stop. Useful for debugging.

Single step

Allows user to execute user
program, one instruction at ,a
time. Useful for debugging.

Substitute
memory

Allows user to examine and
modify memory locations in
byte or word mode.

Examine
register

Allows user to examine and
modify 8086 register contents.

Block move

Allows user to relocate program and data portions In
memory.

Input or output

Allows direct control of
SDK-86 I/O facilities hi byte or
mode.

B·BYTE
INSTRUCTION
QUEUE·

i~ __-J--------~--------'
INT-_
NMI--

RCIGTO.1W
HOLD
HLDA--..-r__....,.__""T"__....,.__~

elK

Vee

RESET READY

GND

Figure 2. 8086 Microprocessor Block Diagram

Operation

Table 1_ Keyboard Mode Commands

RESET

IWfCS

REG

9
OWfDS

A
flSS

Command

Operation

Dump memory

Allows user to print or display
large blocks of memory information in hex format than
amount visible on terminal's
CRT display.

Start/continue
display

Allows user to display blocks
of memory Information larger
than amount visible on terminal's CRT display.

Punch/read
paper tape

Allows user to transmit finished programs into and out of
SDK-86 via TTY paper tape
punch.

B
fES

IBfSP

OB/BP

MV/SI

EW/DI

EB/AX

ER/BX

2
GO/CS

3
ST/DX

Figure 3. SDK-B6 Keyboard

Table 2. Serial Mode Commands

16-9 '

AFN-Dl012A

SDK·86
8086 INSTRUCTION SET
Table 4 contains a summary of processor instructions
used for the 8086 microprocessor.
Mnemonic and
Description

Mnemonic and
Description

Instiuction Code

Instruction Code

Data Transfer
MOV

Moy.:

715432'10

7un'rlD

Aegislerlmemory lollrom re!lister

11 DO 0 1 0 d w,1 mod

Immediate 10 regisleflmemory

reg

7&&43210

Immediale 10 register
Memory 10 accumulator

10 10 0 00 w

dala
adelr-high

adelr-Iow
rIm

addr-tllgll

11
11

0" 0 0 0 1w

000 1 1 10

Imod 0 reg

Segment register 10 register/memory

000 1 100

Imod 0 reg

CMP

datailw-l

data ilw.l

addr-Iow

Accumulalor to memory
Reoislerlmemory to segmenl:register

715.0%10

rim

1 0 0 0 1 1 w moa 0 0 0 rim
1011'11 reg
dala

I I 11 1111

01010 reg
000regl10

Segmenlregister

POP

mod 110 rim

711543210

100000 s \If modI I' rim
00111 10 \If

adjusllor subtract

DAS·Decimal adjusl lor subtracl

rIm

71543110

00 1 1 1 0 d \If mod reg

AIII~ASCIl

Pap:

CGmptrl:

tmmediate wl,h regIster/memory
Immediate wllh accumulalor

PUSH,. PUlh:
Register/memOry

Regislerlmemoryand register

71543210

71643210

rim
dala
dala!!w-l

data II s:\If-OI

001111,'
00101111

MUL·Mutlipty (unsigned)

1 1 1 1 0 1 1 w mod I 0 0 rIm

IMUL-Inleger multiply (Signed)

11,'011 w mod 101 rim

AAM-ASCII adjust lor multiply

11 0 1 0 100

DIY-Oivlde(unsigned)

1 I 1 1011 w mod 1 10 rim

00001010

IDIY·lnleger divide (Signed]

11110"

.loAD-ASCII adjusl tor divide
caW-Convert byte to word

11 0 1 0" 0 1

w mati 1 11

rim

CWO·Canvert word 10 double word

100'100 I

Logic
1I0T·lnvert

1111011'11 modO 1 0 rim

00001010

1 0 0 1 tOO 0

10 0 0 11 I 1 modO 0 0 rim
0101 1 reg

1000reglli I

Segment register

leNS,. behIRg.:
Reglslerlmemoryw,ilh register
Aegislerwilh

accumulaior

1100001 I'll Imod reg
110010 reg

rim

SHl/SAl·Shilt logicallarithmetic leU
, SHR,Shilllogicalright

IfiI,.lnpul
Fludporl

III

Varrable porI

11110110'11

OUT = Output

!" ,

Fixed port

byte to AL

BAR-Shill arithmelic rillht

port

I
pori

0 0 1 I \If 1
1110111'11

Variable port
XLU~Translate

10010 'II

EAto rellisler

11010111
1000 I 101

mod reg

rim

11000101

mod r!{l

rim

LEI~Load

11000100

mod rell

pointer to ES

lJ.Hf40ad AHwith !lags

1100111111

UHf·Slore AH into lIags

1100111101

PUIKF-Push lIags

10011100

POPf-Popllags

10011101

Add:

Reg.lmemory Wllh register to eilher

000000 d 'II mod reg

100000 s w modO 0 0 rim

Immedialeto accumulator

0000010'11

Add with mry:

Reg.lmemory wilh register to eilher
Immediate to regislerlmemory
Immediate to accumulator

,.C

rIm

data

I~ 0 0 1 0 lOw I

dala

11 I 1 1 I 1 w mod 000 rim

01000 reg

AlA-ASCII adjust lor add

0011 0111

data i!s:w-Ol

:::::::::

IBI

:~:: ~:i~:~~;:~ory

= IubltlCl

Immediate Irom accumulator
~

1 I 0 1 0 D v w modO 1 1

F.'~'~'~'~'!'~'
~.~m~"~'1J"~'cttt1=::J~~r=~~TI
~ 0 0 0 0 0 0 'II mod 1 0 0 rim
dala
dala if 'II-I
DOlO 0 lOw

data

OR· Or:
Reg.lrnemory and r!{llSler to eilher

100001 0 d w Imod reg~

Immediate to regislerlmemory

11000000'11 ImodO D 1 rim

Immediate 10 accumutator

10 0 0 0 lID w

data if 'II-I

dala

datailw-l

data il w~1

data

helullvlor:

Rell./memoryandregistertoeilher

001100 d 'II mod reg

Immediale10 registerlmemory

10 D 0 0 0 0 'II modl1 0 rim

rim

Immediate 10 accumulator

0011 DID w

data

dala

dalailw·l

data 1/'11·1

100100111

Siring Manipulation
IIEP-Repeat
MOVS= Move bytelword

f:'",'",'",',:.'",':.'~.¥m;;;:.~'~"~"~lm9---,;::::--r-=="""
f;:':::'::~';:'::~.;.~.;.:;;.:¥m;;;:':."~':,;,:=,:;;;lm9~,:",.,;!:a~i;a~,.",",-t--""'' :::''",if5",'"",",,-,'

II 1 1 1001 z I.
101001 0 'II

CMPS = Compare bytelword

10 10 0 1 I w

SCAS::: Scan byte/word

10 101 1 1w

LODS::: Load byte/wd to AUAX

I 0 1 0 1 lOw

STDS=5tor byte/wd Irm AUA

1010'0 I w

wlttl bern.

Rq./memory
reoisterto either
tmmediate fromandregisterlmemory

DEC

110 I 00 v w modO 1 D rim

IICH-Rotate through carry righl

dala if '11-1

SUB ~ Subll'lct:
Reg.lmemory and register to either

110100 v w modO 0 0 rim
110'00 v w modO 0 1 rim

~Io~'~'~'~'~'I':::'~Im~"~'~,,~,:'~Imq-----c-'--_r-=c.-c--:::-l
~Il~'~'~'~'±'t'~'tlm="="='~'~"mj=§'~'''~J''':':::'':::'',-,il5",.'",-',,-,'I

Registerlmemory

DAA·Decimal adjust lor add

mod 111 rim

ROR·Rotate right

XOR
dala
dala ilw-l

'ner,mlnl:

modI 0 1 rim

V'll

kDl-Rolate Ie!!

Immediate to accumulator

Immediate loregister/memory

ADC

mod I DO rim

V'll

IICl·Rotate through carry lIag lell

Reg,/memory and reglsler to eilher
Immediale 10 registerlmemory

Arithmetic

ADD

'II

110100

AND· And:

LDI-Load pOinter to DS

LU~Load

1 1.0 1 00 v

110

~~'~'~'~'~'~'~'Em~",~"~'~'~lmg=~~I:p~~~
1 0 0 000 s w mod 0 1 1 rim
000 , 1 lOw

clata

Dlieramlnl:

Reglsterlmemory

data

dala It w-1

11 I I l i t I W ImodO 0 1 rim

dala II 5:w-Ol

Control Transfer
CALL

Call:

Direct within segment

11101000

Indireclwllhinsegmenl

'1111111

Direct ~il\ersegmenl

Q011010

Indirectinlersegment

t i l l ' 111

dlsp-Iow
mod 0 1 0 rim
ollsel·low

10'1001 reg

lIES-Change sign

11111011 w lmodO 11 tim

seg·hlgh
mati 0 1 I rim

contInued
AFN-01012A

16·10

SDK·a6
Mnemonic and
Description
JMp· UnCDndlllonl1 Jump:
Oueel wlIl'lin segment

711543210711&.(32101850210
) 1 1 10 1 00 1

Dorect wllh,n segmen1-Shor,

11101011

Indirect wl\hlnsegmenl

1 111 1 1 1 1

dlsp-Iow

dlsp-hl~11

o!1sel·h'gh

111543210

JIIS·Jumpon not slon

1011110011

loOp·loopCX limes

~]dISP

LOOPZlLDOP('loop while zero/equal
lOOPIIZlLoOPIIE·Loopl'ohllenot
zero/equal
JCXl·Jump on CX zero

mod 1 0 a rim

ollsel-Iow

Instruction Code
7115 43 210

I
~~77~IF~~"~o'~I'W~+-~

dlsp

11100001

dlsp

11100000

dlsp

11100011

dlsp

Typespeclheo

11001101

Iype

Type 3

11001100

)1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 !mod 101 11m

IndutClmtersegment
= Rllurn

11 1 1 0 1010 r

Direct Inlersegment

RET

Mnemonic and
Description

Instruction Code

Iram CALL'

Within segment
Within seg. adding Immed 10 SP

! 1 10000' 1 I

In!ersegment

1001011

Inlersegment. addmg Immediate 10 SP

I~'~'~'~'~'!'~1O~1~:Jj~~+=::J:~iE::J

JE/JZ·Jumpon equal/zero

101110100

Jl/JIIIIE~~Ue~~a~n less/not greater

IIH·lntarrupl

IF.,~,~,~,~,~,~1O!ci1f------::=-:--,-------;=~..,

IIITO·IMerrupton overflow
IRET·lnterruplrelurn

\1001110
1110011111

I~'~'~'~'~'~'~oo~IF~~9

JlE/JIIG~~~~~ron less arequal/no! ~'~'~'~'~'~'~10~~~~'9
JI/JIIAE~~~~ea~n below/not above ~'~'~'~'~'~'~10~~~~'9

Processor Control

Jl£/JIIA~~~~goov~ below or equal/

Fi'..,',,;,',,;,'.;.'~'",1O;+~"';;"""'-=I

CLC·Cle3rcarry

JP/JP(-Jump on parity/parity even

F.'=;'=;'=;'~'~'::,,10~=~~'9

CMC·Complemenl carry

11110101

STC'Setcarry

1 1 1 11 001

1~,~,~,~,~,~,~oo~1~~~'9

JO·Jumponover!low
JS-Jump on sion
JIIEWIZ-JumponnoteQuallnotzero

JllL/m~~u~ea~n

not less/greater
JIILE/JBg~~~~ron not less or equal/

11 1 1 11 0

10 t I l l 000 1

ClD,Cleardlrectlon

1 1 11 1 100

I~'~'~'~'~'~'t'~'~II ~~~~

STD'SetdlrectlOn

11 1 1 1 101

CLI,Clearlnlerrupt

1111 1010

I~'~'~'~'~'~'~'~'FI~~~'9
~ 1111111

1111 101 1

ST!,Setlnterrupt

JItB/J.U~1ue~eayn nOI below/above

10 1 1 1 00 1 1

1,1,10,00

10 1 1 1 0 1 1 1

I
I

HLT'Halt

JIIBE/JA;~~~8ao~0~~t below or

WAIT'Walt

110011 0 11

JItP/JPO·Jumpon nol par/par odd

101 1 11 a 1 1

I·

ESC·Escape (to external

JIIO·Jump on nolover!low

101110001

de~lcel

LOCK-Sus lOCk prelix

I
I

111011 x x x Imod X)(X rim
'111 1 0000 ,

Notes
Al ,,8-bitaccumulator
AX" 16-bit accumulator
CX" Count register
OS" Data segment
ES" Extra segment
Abovelbelow refers to unsigned value.
Greater" more positive:
Less" less positive (more negative) signed values

it s:w = 01 then 16 bits of immediate data form the operand.
if s:w=11 then an immediate data byte is sign extended 10
form the 16-btI operand.
it v = 0 then "count" = 1; If v = 0 then "count" In (Cl)
x=don't care.
II v=O then "counl"=1: II v=1then "count" In (Cl) register.
z is used lor string primitives for comparison with ZF FLAG

Ild=1 then "to" reg; Ild=Othen "from" reg

if w" 1 then word instruction: it w" Othen byte Instruction

SEGMENT OVERRfDE PREFIX
Q01reg110

REG is assigned according to the lollowing table:
if mod'"
if mod"
if mod"
if mod'"

11 then
00 then
01 then
10 then

if rIm" 000 then
il rIm = 001 then
if rIm" 010 then
il rim ~ 011 then
il rIm" 100 then
If rIm" 101 then
il rIm", 110 then
if rIm" 111 then
DISP follows 2nd

rIm is treated as a REG field
DISP" 0·, disp-Iow and dlsp-high are absent
DISP " disp-Iow sign-extended to 16-bits, disp-hlgh is absent
DISP.o disp-high: disp-Iow

I~Blt

000
001
010
011
100
101
110
111

EA " (BX) -t- (51) .. DISP
EA " (BX) -t- (01) -t- DISP
EA " (BP) -t- (SI) -t- OISP
EA ~ (BP) • (01) • OISP
EA " (51) -t- DISP
EA ,,(01) -t- OISP
EA " (BP) -t- DISp·
EA" (BX) -t- DISP
byte of instrlittion (before data if required)

AX
CX
OX
BX
SP
BP
SI
01

8-BII (w

000
001
010
011
100
101
110
111

AL
CL
OL
BL
AH
CH
OH
eH

Segment
00 ES
01 CS
10 SS
11 OS

Instructions which reference the flag register fite as a 16-bit object use the symbol FLAGS to
represent the file:
FLAGS

'"except If mod.,. 00 and rIm" 110 then EA" disp-high: dlsp-Iow.

X:XX:X:(OF):IOF):IIFI:ITf):ISFIIZF):X:IAF):X:tpFIXICFI

Mnemonics

'c'

Intei, 1978

Table 4. 8086 Instruction Set Summary

SPECIFICATIONS

Addressing

Central Processor

ROM - FEOOO-FFFFF
RAM - 0-7FF (800-FFF available with additional
2142's)

CPU - 8086 (5 MHz clock rate)
Note
May be operated at 2.5 MHz or 5 MHz, iumper selectable, for use with
8086.

Note
The wire-wrap area of the SDK·86 PC board may be used lor additional
custom memory expansion_

Input/Output

Memory

Parallel - 48 lines (two 8255A's)
Serial - RS232 or current loop (8251A)
Baud Rate - selectable from 110 to 4800 baud

ROM - 8K bytes 2316/2716
RAM - 2K bytes (expandable to 4K bytes) 2142

16-11

AFN-Ol012A

SDK·B6
Interfaces

Electrical Characteristics

Bus - All signals TTL compatible
Parallel 110 - All signals TTL compatible
Serial 110 - 20 mA current loop TTY or RS232

DC Power Requirement
(Power supply not included in kit)

Note
The user has access to all bus signals which enable him to design custom system expansions into the kit's wire-wrap area.

Voltage

3.5A

VTTy-12V± 10%

O.3A

Interrupts (256 vectored)
Maskable
Non·maskable
TRAP

(VTTY required only -'if teletype is connected)

Environmental Characteristics
Operating Temperature - 0-50 'C

DMA
Hold Request input.

Current

VCC5V± 5%

Jumper selectable. TTL compatible

Reference Manuals

Software
System Monitor - Preprogrammed 2716 or 2316 ROMs
Addresses - FEOOO-FFFFF
Monitor 110 - Keyboard/display or TTY or CRT (serial
I/O)
.

Physical Characteristics
Width - 13.5 in. (34.3 cm)
Height - 12 in. (30.5 cm)
Depth - 1.75 in. (4.45 cm)
Weight - approx. 24 oz. (3.3 kg)

9800697A SDK·86 MCS·86 System Design Kit
Assembly Manual
9800722 - MCS·86 User's Manual
9800640A - 8086 Assembly Language Programming
Manual
8086 Assembly Language Reference Card
Reference manuals are shipped with each product only
if designated SUPPLIED (see above). Manuals may be
ordered from any Intel sales representative, distributor
office or from Intel Literature Department, 3065 Bowers
Avenue, Santa Clara, California 95051.

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

SDK·86

MCS·86 system design kit

16·12

inter

SDK-C86
MCS-86™ SYSTEM DESIGN KIT
SOFTWARE AND CABLE INTERFACE TO
INTELLEC® DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM

• Provides the Software and Hardware
Communications Link Between an
Intellec® Development System and the
SDK-86

• Enhances and Extends the Power and
Usefulness of the SDK-86

• Intellec® System Files can be Accessed
and Down-Loaded to the SDK-86
Resident Memory

• Allows the SDK-86 to Become an
Execution Vehicle for ISIS-II Developed
8086 Object Code Using the Series II
8086/8088 Software Development
Packages

• Data in SDK-86 Memory can be
Uploaded and Saved in Intellec®
System Files

• All SDK-86 Serial Port Mode Commands
Become Available at Console of the
Intellec® System

The SDK-C86 product provides the software and hardware link for using the SDK-86 monitor in conjunction
with an Intellec® Development System while adding features of data transfer between SDK-86 memory and Intellec® System files. The user may enter programs and data into the SDK-86 and then save them on a diskette.
Also, programs and data may be created on the IntelleC® System using the Series 118086/8088 Software Development Packages, then loaded into the SDK-86 for testing and checkout. This provides a real time execution
environment of the SDK-86 as a peripheral to the Intellec® System.

16-13

L:..::..... •. O

SDK-C86
HARDWARE

• Upload/Download: In this mode the SDK-C86 software,
in the Intellec®, recognizes the mnemonic for Upload or
Download from the terminal. It "translates" the
Download command to an R (Read hexadecimal tapel
command and the Upload command to a W (Write
hexadecimal tape). The Rand W commands are then
passed on to the SDK-86 monitor. Using these paper
tape commands allows for a checksummed transfer of
data between the Intellec® and the SDK-86 memory.

There are two serial ports on the Intellec® System back
panel, TTY and CRT. Assuming that one of the ports is
used for the Intellec® console, the SDK-C86 cable can
plug into the unused port. The SDK-86 is jumper
selectable to accept either the CRT (RS232) or TTY (20mA
current loop I signals.
The edge connector on the SDK-86 has the MUL TIBUS'·
form factor. No signals are connected to. the fingers
except the power supply traces. Therefore, the SDK-86
can plug directly into the Intellec® motherboard to obtain
power while using the SDK-C86 cable as the communication link.

COMMAND SUMMARY
• Reset -

• Execute with Breakpoint (G) Allows you to execute a user program and cause it to halt at a predetermined program step - useful for debugging.

SOFTWARE
Two programs must be invoked to operate in the SDK-86
slave mode. One program runs on the SDK-86, and
another runs in any ISIS-II environment that includes a
diskette drive.
The serial I/O monitor is installed on the SDK-86 and
operates as though it was talking to a terminal. The
software in the I ntellec® allows the I ntellec®, with a
console. device, to behave as if it were a terminal to the
SDK-86.
The SDK-C86 software program in the Intellec reads the
console input device, then passes the character to the
SDK-86 through the serial port. It also receives the
characters from the SDK-86 and displays them at the
console output device. Besides the basic transfer
function, this program also recognizes and performs the
Upload and Download functions.

starts the SDK-86. monitor.

• Single Step (N I - allows you to execute a user program
one instruction at a time - useful for debugging.
• Substitute Memory (S, SW) - allows you to examine
and modify memory locations in byte or word mode.
• Examine Register (X) - allows you to examine and
modify the8086's register contents.
• Block Move (M) --, allows you to relocate program and
data portions in memory.
• Input or Output (I, IW, 0, OW) -allows direct control of
the SDK-86's I/O facilities in byte or word mode.
• Display Memory (DI - allows you to print or display
large blocks of memory information in HEX format.

COMMAND MODES
• Transparent: In this mode, the SDK-C86 software
passes all characters through without any processing.
All the commands of the SDK-86 monitor (except paper
tape commands) are available and will function in
exactly the same manner as if the terminal were
attached directly to the serial port of the SDK-86.

• Load IL) - allows you to load hex format object files
into SDK-86 memory from an Intellec.
• Transfer (T) - allows you to save contents of SDK-86
memory in a hex format object file in the Intellec.

SERIAL~
PORTS
CABLE
~

,.....,..~====:::::::::::====~~

_ _ _-'-~

INTELLEC®
DEVELOPMENT
SYSTEM

G",,,,m
SDK-86/lnlellec® Slave Mode Configuration

16·14

SERIAL
PORT

SDK-86

MCS-48™ Development
Systems

MCS·48
DISKETTE·BASED SOFTWARE
SUPPORT PACKAGE
Extends Intellec microcomputer development system to support MCS-48
development

Takes advantage of powerful ISIS-II file
handling and storage capabilities

MCS-48 assembler provides conditional
assembly and macro capability

Provides assembler output in standard
Intel hex format

The MCS·48 assembler translates symbolic 8048 assembly language instructions into the appropriate machine opera·
tion codes, and provides both conditional and macroassembler programming. Output may be loaded either to an
ICE·49 module for debugging or into a Universal PROM Programmer for 8748 PROM programming. The MCS·48
assembler operates under the ISIS·II operati.ng system on Intellec Microcomputer Development systems.

17-1

MCS·48™ DISKETTE·BASED SOFTWARE SUPPORT PACKAGE
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

ISIS.II 6048 MACROASSEMBLER, VI ,0

LOC

The MCS-48 assembler. translates symbolic 8048
assembly language instructions into the appropriate
machine operation codes. The ability to refer to program
addresses with symbolic names eliminates the errors of
hand translation and makes it easier to modify programs
when adding or deleting instructions. Conditional
assembly permits the programmer to specify which portions of the master source document should be included or deleted in variations on a basic system deSign,
such as the code required to handle optional external
devices. Macro capability allows the programmer use of
a single label to define a routine. The MCS-48 assembler
will assemble the code required by the reserved routine
whenever the macro label is inserted in the text. Output
from the assembler is in standard Intel hex format. It
may be either loaded directly to an in-circuit emulator
(ICE-49) module for integrated hardware/software
debugging, or loaded into a Universal PROM Programmer for 8748 PROM programming. A sample assembly
listing is shown in Table 1.

Q8J
1
2

;DECIMAL ADDITION ROUTINE, ADD BCD NUMBER
;AT LOCATION 'BETA' TO BCD NUMBER AT 'ALPHA' WITH

,RESULT IN 'ALPHA: LENGTH OF NUMBER IS 'COUNT' DIGIT

4
5
6
7

;PAIRS. (ASSUME BOTH BETA AND ALPHA ARE SAME LENGTH
:AND HAVE EVEN NUMBER OF DIGITS OR MSD IS 0 IF
:000)
AUGNQ,ADONQ,CNT
INIT

RO, UUGND

8
9

OO"'E
0028
0032

0100
0102
0104

R2 .• CNT

ALPHA

EOU

BETA

Eau

COUNT

EQU

B81E
8928

,,.
"

£JA32
010697

0107 FO
010871
010957
OIDA
0108
OlOG

R1, ~AODND

Al
18
19

10CH
ALPHA, BETA. COUNT

RO.8ALPHA
Al,8BETA
R2,IICOUNT

C
A,@RO

""
"

A,@Al
A

R2. LP

0100 EAD7

@RO,A

USER SYMBOLS

ALPHA ~OOlE
Ll
0102
ASSEMBLY COMPLETE. NO ERRORS

ISIS-II ASSEMBLER SYMBOL CROSS REFERENCE. V, 0

ALPHA 13_
BETA
10
COUNT 158
1NIT
7~

'9~

22~

17
17
17
17

Table 1. Sample MCS-48 Diskette·Based
Assembly Listing

SPECI FICATlONS

Shipping Media

Operating Environment

Diskette

Required Hardware
Intellec Microcomputer Development System
32K RAM (non-macro use)
48K RAM (use of macro facility)
One or two Floppy disk drives
- Single or Double density
System Console
- CRT or interactive.hardcopy device

Reference Manuals
9800255 - MCS-48 and UPI-41 Assembly Language Programming Manual (SUPPLIED)

Required Software
ISIS-II Diskette Operating System

9800236 -

Universal PROM Mapper Operator's Manual

9800306 -

ISIS-II User's Guide

Reference manuals are shipped with each product only
if .designated SUPPLIED (see above). Manuals may be
ordered from any Intel sales representative, distributor
office or from Intel Literature Department, 3065 Bowers
Avenue, Santa Clara, California 95051.

Optional Hardware
ICE-49 In-Circuit Emulator
Line Printer
Universal PROM Programmer with 8748 personality card

ORDERING INFORMATION
Product Code

Description

MDS-D48

Diskette-based assembler for MCS-48
family .of microprocessors.

17-2

00819A

ICE·49
MCS·48 IN·CIRCUIT EMULATOR
Emulates 8049, 8048, 8748, 8039, 8035, and 8021* MIcrocomputers

Extends Intellec microcomputer develop·
ment system debug power to user con·
figured system via external cable and
40·pin plug, replacing system MCS·48
device
Emulates user system MCS·48 device in
real time
.

Eliminates need for extraneous debug·
ging tools residing in user system
Collects bus, register, and MCS·48
status information on instructions
emulated

Shares static RAM memory with user
system for program debug

Provides capability to examine and alter
MCS·48 registers, memory, and flag
values, and to examine pin and port
values

Provides hardware comparators for user
designated break conditions

Integrates hardware and software efforts
early to save development time

The ICE·49 MCS·48 In·Circuit Emulator module is an Intellec·resident module that interfaces with any MCS·48 system.
The MCS·48 family consists of the 8049, 8048, 8748, 8039, 8035, and 8021 microcomputers. The ICE·49 module inter·
faces with an MCS·48 system through a cable terminating in an MCS·48 pin·compatible plug which replaces the
MCS·48 device in the sytem. With the ICE·49 plug in place, the designer has the capability to execute the system in.
real time while collecting up to 255 instruction cycles of real·time trace data. In addition, he can single step the system
program to monitor more closely the program logic during execution. Static RAM memory is available through the
ICE·49 module to emulate MCS·48. program and data memory. The designer can display and alter the contents of data
and replacement RAM control memory, internal MCS·48 registers and flags and I/O ports. Powerful debug capability is
extended into the MCS·48 system while ICE·49 debug hardware and software remain inside the Intellec system. Sym·
bolic reference capability allows the designer to use meaningful symbols rather than absolute values when examining
and modifying memory, registers, flags, and I/O ports in this system.
*EM1 emulator board is also required.

17·3

AFN·Ol103A·Ol

ICE·49
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Integrated Hardware/Software Development
The user prototype need consist of no more than an
MCS·48 socket and timing logic to begin integration of
software and hardware development efforts. Through
the ICE·49 module mapping capabilities, Intellec system
resources can be accessed to replace prototype memo
ory. Hardware designs can be tested using the system
software to drive the final product. Thus, the system in·
tegration phase, which can be costly when attempting
to mesh completed hardware and software products,
becomes a convenient two·way debug tool when begun
early in the design cycle.

Debug Capability Inside User System
The ICE·49 module provides the user with the ability to
debug a full prototype or production system without
introducing extraneous hardware or software test tools.
The module connects to the user system through the
socket provided for the MCS·48 device in the user
system. Intellec memory is used for the execution of the
ICE·49 software. The Intellec console and file handling
capabilities provide the designer with the ability to com·
municate with the ICE·49 module and display informa·
tion on the operation of the prototype system. The
ICE·49 module block diagram is shown in Figure 1.

Real· Time Trace
The ICE·49 module captures trace information while the
designer is executing programs in real time. The instruc·
tions executed, program counter, port values for bus 0,
port 1 and port 2, and the values of selected MCS·48
status lines are stored for the last 255 instruction cycles
executed. When retrieved for display, code is disassem·
bled for user convenience. This provides data for deter·
mining how the user system was reacting prior to emu·
lation break, and is available whether the break was user
initiated or the result of an error condition. For more
detailed information on the actions of internal registers,
flags, or other system operations, the user may operate
in single or multiple step sequences tailored to system
debug needs.

Batch Testing
In conjunction with the ISIS·II diskette operating
system, 'the ICE·49 module can run extensive system
diagnostics without operator intervention. The designer
or test engineer can define a complete diagnostic exer·
cise, which is stored in a file on the diskette. When actio
vated with an ISIS·II submit command, this file can
instruct the ICE·49 module to execute the diagnostic
routine and store the results in another file on the
diskette. Results are available to the designer at his con·
venience. In this way, routine diagnostics and long term
testing may be done without tying up valuable man·
power.

----"-- ----------,I

EMULATOR BOARD

USER SOCKET

I
SYNC 0

---

CONTROL PROCESSOR BOARD

r-~~~JI~-----~

II
~--~~~'

I
I

CONTROL
PROGRAM

8080
CONTROL
PROCESSOR

P1
P2A

8049 OR 8048
W/INTERNAL
MONITORP~~r-_ _ _ _ _ _~~_~

I
I
I
I

I
I
I

INTERNAL
TIMER

II
I
I
I
I

II
II

CABLE
BUFFER

SYNC 1

L __ _

I
w

~ I
~ I

~ I

~ I
...~ I
~

I
I
I

_'- _____ -.J L____________ .-J

Figure 1. ICE·49 Module Block Diagram

17·4

AFN-Ol103A-02

ICE·49
Memory Mapping
The 8049, 8748 and 8048 contain Internal program and
data memory. Both program and data memory can be
expanded using external memory devices.
Internal Memory - When the MCS·48 microcomputer is
replaced by the ICE·49 socket in a system, the ICE·49
module supplies static RAM memory as a replacement
for the Internal microcomputer memory. The ICE-49
module has enough RAM memory available to emulate
up to the total 4K control memory capability of the system. The ICE·49 module also provides for up to 384
bytes of data memory.
External Memory - The ICE-49 module separates
replacement control memory into sixteen 256·byte
blocks. Replacement external data memory consists of
one 256-byte block. Each block of memory can be de·
fined separately as supplied by the user system or supplied by the ICE-49 module. The user may assign ICE·49
equivalent memory to take the place of external memory
not yet supplied in his system.

Symbolic· Debugging
ICE·49 software provides symbolic definition of all
MCS-48 registers, flags, and selected MCS-48 pins.
Symbolically defined pseudo registers provide access
to the sense of MCS-48 flip flops which enable time,
counter, interrupt, and flag-0Illag·1 options. In addition,
the user may reference locations in program and data
memory, or their contents, symbolically. The user sym·
bol table generated along with the object file during a
program assembly may be loaded to Intellec memory for
access during emulation. The user is encouraged to add
to this symbol table any additional symbolic values for
memory addresses, constants, or variables he may find
useful during system debugging. Symbols may be substituted for numeric values in any of the ICE·49 com·
mands. Symbolic reference is a great advantage to the
system designer. He is no longer burdened with the
need to recall or look up those addresses of key loca·
tions in his program that can change with each assembly. Meaningful symbols from his source program may
be used instead. For example, the command:
GO FROM .START TILL XDATA. RSLT WRITTEN
begins execution of the program at the address refer·
enced by the label START in the designers assembly
program. A breakpoint is set to occur the first time the
microprocessor writes to the external data memory
location referenced by RSLT. The designer does not
have to be concerned with the physical locations of
START and RSLT. The ICE-49 software driver supplies
them automatically from information stored in the
symbol table.

Intel 8080 to communicate with the Intellec host pro·
cessor via a common memory space. The 8080 also con·
trois an internallCE·49 bus for intramodule communication. ICE·49 hardware consists of two PC boards, the
controller board, and the emulator board, all of which
reside in the Intellec chassis. A cable interfaces the
ICE·49 boards to the MCS·48 system. The cable ter·
minates in a MCS-48 pin compatible plug which
replaces any MCS·48 device in the user system. The
ICE·49 module block diagram is shown in Figure 1.

Real· Time Trace
Trace Buffer - While the ICE·49 module is executing
the user program, it is monitoring port, program
counter, data, and status lines. Values for each instruc·
tion cycle executed are stored in a 255 x 44real·time
RAM trace buffer. A resetable timer resident on the controller board counts instruction cycles.

Controller Board
The ICE-49 module talks to the Intellec system as a
peripheral device. The controller board receives commands from the Intellec system and responds through
the parameter block. Three 15·bit hardware breakpoint
registers are available for loading by the user. While in
emulation mode, a hardware comparator is constantly
monitoring address and status lines for a match to ter·
minate an emulation. The breakpoint registers provide a
signal when a match is detected. The user may disable
the emulation break capability and use the signal to syn·
chronize other debug tools. The controller board returns
real-time trace data, MCS·48 register, flag, and pin
values, andlCE·49 status information, to a control block
in the Intellec system when emulation is terminated.
This information is available to the user through the
ICE-49 interrogation commands. Error conditions, when
present, are automatically displayed on the Intellec
system console. The controller board also contai ns
static RAM memory, which can be used to emulate
MCS·48 program and data memory in real time. 4K of
memory is available in sixteen 256·byte pages to emulate MCS-48 PROM or PROM program memory. A 256byte page of data memory is available to access in place
of MCS·48 external data memory. The controller board
address map directs the ICE·49 module to access either
replacement ICE·49 memory or actual user system ex·
ternal memory in 256·byte segments based on informa·
tion provided by the user.

Emulator Board
The emulator board contains the 8049* and peripheral
logic required to emulate the MCS·48 device in the user
system. A software selectable 6 MHz or 3 MHz clock
drives the emulated MCS·48 device. This clock can be
disabled and replaced with a user supplied TTL clock in
the user system.

Hardware
The ICE·49 module is a microcomputer system utilizing
Intel's 8049 or 8048/8748 microcomputer as its nucleus.
The 8049 provides the 8049, 8039 emulation character·
istics. The 8048/8748 provides the 8748/8048/8035/8021
emulation characteristics. The ICE·49 module uses an

17-5

'Use 8048 with internal monitor program when emulating 8748180481
803518021.

AFN-01103A-03

ICE·49
Cable Card
The cable card Is Included for cable driving. It transmits
address and data, bus information to the user system
through a 40-pin connector which plugs into the user
system in the socket designed forJhe MCS-48 device.

Command

Operation'

Display

Prints contents of memorY, MCS-48
device registers, 1/0 ports, flags; pins,
real-time trace data, symbol table, or
other diagnostic data on list device.
Alters' contents, of memory, register,
outp'ut port, or flag. Sets or alters breakpOints and display registers.
Defines memory 'status.
Establishes mode of display for output
data.
Establishes mode of display input data.,

Change

Software
The ICE-49 software driver Is a RAM-based program
which provides the user with an easy to use command
language (see Table 1, Table 2, and Table 3) for defining
breakpoints, Initiating real-time emulation or single step
operation, and Interrogating and altering user system
status recorded during emulation. The ICE-49 command
language contains a broad range of modifiers to provide
the user with maximum flexibility In defining the operation to be performed. The ICE-49 software driver is
available on diskette and operates In 32K of Intellec
RAM memory.

Command
Enable

Step

Interrupt

Map
Base
Suffix

Table 2_ ICE-49 Interrogation Commands

Command
Load
Save

Operation
Activates breakpoint and display regls-,
ters for. use with go and step commands.
Initiates real-time emulation and allows
user to specify breakpoints and data
retrieval.
Initiates emulationin single instruction
Increments. Each step Is followed by
register dump. User may optionally
tailor other diagnostic activity to his
needs.
Emulates user system Interrupt.

Define
Move
List
Exit
Evaluate

Remove
Reset

Table 1. ICE-49 Emulation Commands

Operation
Fetches user symbol table and object
code from input device.
Sends user symbol table and object
code to output device.
Enters symbol name an,d value to user
symbol table.
Moves block 'of memory data to another
area of memory.
Defines list device.
Returns program control to ISIS-II.
Converts expression to equivalent
values in binary, octal, decimal, and
hex.
Deletes symbols from symbol table.
Reinltlallzes IC,E-49 hardware.

Table 3_ ICE-49 Utility Commands

SPECIFICATIONS

System Clock

ICE·49 Operating Environment

Crystal controlled 6.0 MHz internal, 3.0 MHZ: internal or
user supplied TIL external: software selectable:

Required Hardware
Intellec microcomputer development system .'
System console
Intellec diskette operating system
ICE-49 Module
Required Software
System monitor
ISIS-II

Equipment Supplied
Printed circuit boards (control board, emulator board)
Interface cables and buffer module
iCE-49 software, diskette-based version (single density
or double density)
8048 with Internal monitor program

Physical Characteristics
Width Height Depth Weight -

12.00 in. (30.48 cm)
6.75 in. (17.15 cm)
0.50 In. (1.27 cm)
8.00 lb. (3.64 kg)

Electrical, Characteristics
DC Power Requirements
Vcc = +5V :1:5%
Icc = 10A max; 7.0A typ
Voo
+12V :1:5%
100 = 79.mA max; 45 mA typ
Vee
-10V :1:5%
lee
20 mA max

=
=
=

17-6

AFN-Oll03A-04

HSE·49
HIGH·SPEED EMULATOR
• Single-board execution and debugging
vehicle with integral keypad and display

• Real-time 11 MHz emulation of user
system

• System monitor firmware in ROM

• Breakpoints on user program and
external data addresses

• Wire-wrap area for prototyping

• Examine and alter MCS® -48 registers,
memory and status values

• Intellec®..system compatible power
pick-up card and serial-link cable

• No-break triggering of oscilloscope or
logic analyzer

The HSE-49™ emulator is a fully-assembled stand-alone development tool with on-board 33-key keypad,
8-character display, two 8039 mlcrocontrollers, 2K bytes of user-program RAM, a serial port and cable, and
a ROM-based monitor which supervises ttie emulator operation and user interface. The emulator provides
a means for executing and debugging programs for the 8048/8049 family of microcontrollers at speeds up
to 11 MHz. It interfaces to a user~designed system through an emulation cable and 40-pin plug, which
replaces the MCS-48™device in the user's system. Using the HSE-49 keypad, a designer can run programs
in real-time or single-step modes, set up to 8000 breakpoint flags, and display or change the contents of
user program memory, internal and external data memory, and internal MCS-48 hardware registers. When
linked to a host Intellec® development system, the HSE-49 emulator system-debugging capabilities, with
the development system program assembly and storage facilities, provide, the tools required for total
product development.

17-7

HSE·49

HIGH·SPEED EMULATOR

using the emulator's capabilities to break emulation and to examine and change the user program
and processor status values. The completed
system may be final tested prior to ROM-code entry by replacing the HSE-49 emulation plug with a
programmed 874X device in the user-system
MCS-48 device socket, and running the system
(with crystal input and power supplied) at full
speed. Figure 1 shows a typical development configuration utilizing a host Intellec development
system and the HSE-49 emulator, with the emulation cable interface to a user-designed system.
For enhanced system debugging capabilities the
designer may elect to use Intel's ICE-49™ incircuit emulator. The ICE-49 module permits realtime emulation of the user system up to 6 MHz,
and offers the added benefits of symbolic debugging, 255 instruction-cycle real-time trace, and full
emulation without the stack, interrupt or I/O limitations to which the HSE-49 emulator is sLibject
(see discussion under "Limitations" heading). For
further information on the ICE-49 emulator, refer
to the ICE-49™ In-Circuit Emulator Data Sheet
(order number 305200).

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The HSE-49 High-Speed Emulator Is a stand-alone
execution and debugging tool for 8048/8049 family
microcontroller-based systems which are designed to run at speeds up to 11 MHz. It may be
used alone or with other Intel microcomputer
development system products to facilitate system
int!lgration early in the product development cycle, in parallel with hardware and software development. The convenient two-way debugging
which early integration permits results in reduced
total development time and cost.

System Development
SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT
After an application program has been written In
MCS-48 assembly language, the HSE-49 emulator
may be used to debug software even if prototype
hardware is not yet available.
Stand-alone Mode
The designer first hand assembles the source
code from ASM-48 mnemonics into hex code, and
then loads the program Into the HSE-49 emulator
user-program RAM through the on-board hex keypad, or through the serial port from a hex file
stored on a user-supplied peripheral device. The
emulator may then be used to execute the user
program in a variety of debugging modes, and to
alter the program as necessary. The altered program may then be uploaded to a user-supplied
storage device.
Development System Mode
With an Intellec development system, the designer assembles the source code using the
MCS-48 macroassembler and. downloads the resulting hex file through the serial port and cable to
the HSE-49 emulator user-program RAM. The emulator Is then used to execute and debug the program as above. Finally, the resulting program is
uploaded to the development system and stored
in a disk file.

Figure 1_ Intellec®. System Based HSE-49
Emulator Connected to User Prototype
System
.

Emulator Overview
EMULATION AND MASTER PROCESSORS
The user's program is emulated by an 8039 microprocessor, the emulation processor (EP), which
executes code that is stored in 2K bytes of external RAM for ease of prog-ram development. Additional RAM may be added by the user in the provided sockets to expand program and external
data memory to 4K bytes each.

HARDWARE/SOFTWARE INTEGRATION
Prototype hardware may be developed off-board
or on the wire-wrap area provided on the HSE-49
emulator board. The HSE-49 emulator interfaces
to the user-system hardware through the supplied
emulation cable, which plugs Into the MCS-48
device socket in the user system. With the plug In
place, the emulator executes code from the userprogram memory ahd exercises the prototype
hardware. Additional hardware is added as it becomes available, and the system is debugged

A second microcontroller - an 8039 with off-cHip
ROM program memory - is used to scan the onboard keypad and display, interpret and imp Ie17-8

AFN·0165BA

inter

HSE·49

HIGH·SPEED EMULATOR

USER
SYSTEM
PROTOTYPE

D
Figure 2. HSE·49

Figure 3. HSE·49

Emulator Signal Flow Diagram

Emulator Command Keypad Organization

ment commands, drive serial interfaces, etc. In
general, this master processor (MP) is used to in·
terface the emulatiori processor's memory spaces
with the outside world and control the operation
of the EP. Figure 2 shows how the two processors
interrelate with the rest of the system. Figure 3
shows the layout of the 33-key keypad through
which the user interfaces to the emulator.

data RAM, accumulator, PSW, PC, timer/counter,
working registers, and internal RAM; executing
the user's program ·fromarbitrary addresses in var·
ious debugging modes; and uploading or down·
loading object or data files from diskettes using a
host development system. No special software is
needed for the Intellec system other than ISIS II
Version 3.4 or later. The data format is compatible
with the standard Intel hex file format produced by
ASM·48; the baud rate may be altered from 110
baud (default state) up to 1200 baud from the on·
board keypad. Blocks of data may be transmitted
to a CRT or printer and displayed in a tabular for·
mat.

MP MONITOR
The monitor program executed by the MP in·
cludes commarids for filling, reading, or writing
the various memory spaces, including theexecu·
tion processor's program RAM, external ("MOVX")

17-9
,......... ....

AFN-01656A

HSE·49HIGH·SPEED EMULATOR

INTERPROCESSOR COMMUNICATION

An 8212 8-bit latch is used to communicate data
and commands between the master and emulation processors. Under control of the MP, this register, call the "Link" register, may be logically
mapped into either the program or data RAM address spaces. When this is done, the RAM in the
respective memory space is disabled and the link
responds to all accesses regardless of address.
When the M P detects that the EP has been halted
by the breakpoint hardware, or when the operator
presses a key while the program is executing, the
program break sequence is initiated. The loworder 23 bytes of user-program memory is read
into a buffer within the internal RAM of the MP. A
short program· for reading .and transmitting internal EP status is written into the low-order userprogram memory. (This is one of several "minimonitors" overlayed on the user-program area.)
The link register is mapped logically into the userprogram memory, and loaded with the 8049 machine code for a "CALL" instruction to the minimonitor program area. The EP is then allowed to
fetch a single instruction from the link, forcing the
"CALL" to the mini-monitor onto the EP data bus.
The link register is then mapped to the external
data RAM address space. A block diagram of the
system at this point is shown in Figure 4.
From this point on, the EP executes code contained in the mini-monitor which makes the EP accumulator, timer/counter and PSW values available to the MP (through "MOVX" instructions to
the link register) so that the EP internal status may
be saved in the .MP internal data RAM. The MP
then loads a different mini-monitor into the same
EP program RAM area which allows it to read and
save the internal RAM of the EP.
At this point, the HSE-49 emulator may be interro'
gated or given instructions by the operator from
the hex keypad. The emulator operation remains
transparent to the user, who need not be concerned, for example, with the actual (altered) location of the EP low-order program RAM or internal
data RAM.
In order to resume. user-program execution, a
status restoration mini-monitor is overlayed. This
rel?tores th.e EPinternal status using a scheme
analogous to the one in which the status was originally saved. Th,e final step of the last mini-monitor
is an "RETR" instruction, after which the EP is
again halted. The low-order program memory
saved earlier is rewritten into the appropriate area,
the break logic is configured for the desired exe-

cution mode, and the EP is released to run at full
speed until the next break situation is encountered.

Operation Modes
The HSE-49 firmware is a ROM-based program
that provides the user with simple key-stroke commands for initiating emulation, defining break-.
points, and displaying and controlling system
parameters. A summary of the HSE-49 emulator
commands is given in Table 1.
SIX EMULATION MODES are provided by the
HSE-49 emulator to aid in hardware and software
debugging. The user may single-step through a
program or have the emulator automatically step
through the program with a user-defined idle time
between steps. Three real-time emulation commands allow 1) real-time emulation with breakpoints not enabled (a user-accessible pulse is
generated each time a breakpoint is encountered,
however, facilitating user-defined logic analysis),
2) real-time emulation with breakpoints enabled,
and 3) real-time emulation with automatic breakpointing, whereby the emulator executes in real
time between breakpoints, and pauses at each
breakpoint for a user-defined time before automatically reSuming real-time emulation. A final
command initiates real-time execution, beginning
emulation at user-program location OOOH, from
the Emulator Processor hardware reset state.
BREAKPOINTS may be set at any combination of
program memory and external data memory address locations from OOOH to FFFH. This unlimited capability to specify breakpoints for all
possible combinations' of addresses complements the somewhat different breakpointing
features available with the ICE-49 emulator.

The ICE-49 emulator permits the symbolic specification of breakpoints on program memqry and external data memory addresses, or external data
memory address reads or writes individually, and
upon the input of an external synchronization signal.
.,
,
INTERROGATION AND UTILITY.commands are
provided by the HSE-49 emulator which allow the
user to examine, change or fill the various emulator memory spaces. Additional commands are
provided to upload or download the contents of
the memory spaces to or from a hostlntellec de-,
velopment system, or .. other peripheral device,
through the HSE-49 emulator serial port.

17-10
c...• ~

AFN·0165BA

HSE·49

HIGH·SPEED EMULATOR

EXECUTION
PROCESSOR

MASTER
PROCESSOR

Figure 4. Communication between EP and MP
Table 1. HSE·49

Emulator Command Description

COmmand
Modifier

Command

Description
Begins emulation:

GO
NO BRK

Real·time breakpoints not enabled

W/BRK

Real·time breakpoints enabled

SING STP

Steps program one instruction

AUTO STP

Automatically steps/pauses/steps/...

AUTO BRK

Automatically emulates real·time/pauses at breakpoint/emulates real·
time/ ...

GO/RESET

(NONE)

Begins real·time emulation from EP hardware reset state, beginning at
program location OOOH

B,C

(PROG MEM, DATA MEM)

Sets (B) or Clears (C) breakpoint at specified address within Program or
External Data memory

SYS RST

(NONE)

Resets emulation and master processors and clears all breakpoints

EXAM/CHA

·
··
·

FILL
LIST
DNLOAD
UPLOAD

PROG MEM

Examine/Change memory location
Fill range of memory addresses with a single data value
List memory to output device through HSE·49 serial port
Download hex·file format memory to HSE-49 emulator through HSE·49
serial port
Upload memory within a range of addresses through HSE-49 serial port
to Intellec Development System or external peripheral device

• = Memory types allowed for above commands:
User-program memory

DATA MEM

External data memory (if installed)

PROG BRK

User-program breakpoint memory

DATA BRK

External data breakpoint memory

HARD REG

Hardware registers/system control parameters

17-11

AFN·0165BA

inter

HSE·49

HIGH·SPEED EMULATOR

dress within an interrupt servicing routine; if it
is, the EP may incorrectly recognize an interrupt request which should be ignored.

Limitations
The HSE-49 emulator was not designed to have
the same capabilities that Intel's ICE7M in-circuit
emulators have, and certain features have been
deleted to keep the circuitry relatively simple. As a
result, the following limitations exist and should
be taken into account when using the system.
1. As explained previously, user-program execution is terminated by forcing the EP to execute
a "CALL" instruction to the mini-monitor. Because this requires one level of the EP subroutine stack, the user program can be using a
maximum of seven levels of stack when a break
is initiated.
2. Because program execution is initiated by forcing the EP to execute an "RETR" instruction,
the EP interrupt-in-progress flip-flop will be
cleared. Therefore, if interrupts are enabled,
emulation should not be resumed from an ad-

3. The 110 status of ports PO and P22-P23 with respect to user-supplied hardware is determined
by the HSE-49 emulator hardware configuration
rather than by software. Therefore the 110
modes of these ports may not be altered while
a program is executing. These ports may be
configured as is inputs, latched outputs or bidirectional ports by changing socketed HSE-49
emulator hardware.
4. The "ANL BUS, #nn" and "ORLBUS, #nn" instructions may not be used in the user program, as external hardware cannot properly
restore these functions.
Several other minor limitations with the HSE-49
emulator operation are explained in the Operating
Instructions.

SPECIFICATIONS

Physical Characteristics

Equipment Supplied

Width: 14.0 in (35.6 cm)
Length: 10.0 in. (25.4 cm)
Height: 0.5 in. (1.27 cm)
Packaged Weight: 4.0 Ib (1.8 kg)

Printed Circuit Board with Integral Keypad, Display, ROM Monitor, (2) 8039 microprocessors and
2K bytes user program RAM
Emulation Cable and Plug
Serial-Link Cable
Power Pick-up Card with Cable
Power Cable

D.C. Electrical Characteristics
vcc = +5V ±5%
Icc
=2.0A max; 1.5A typical
VRS232= + 12V ± 5%; -12V ±.5%
IRS232 = 0.020A max; 0.015A typical
(VRS232 required only if using RS232 mode of
serial port)

Emulation Clock
11 MHz supplied, or user supplied crystal for 3.6
MHz to 11 MHz clock

Environmental Characteristics
Operating Temperature: 0° to 55°C

Serial 110

Operating Humidity: Up to 90% relative humidity
without condensation

20 mA Current Loop or RS232 (jumper selectable)

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

MCI-49-HSE

8048/8049 family CPU high-

speed (11 MHz) emulator, cable
assembly and ROM firmware

17-12

EM1
8021 EMULATION BOARD
EPROM functional equivalent of 8021 single component 8·bit microcomputer
Based on 8748 - user programmablel
erasable EPROM 8·bit computer
Operates with ICE·49™ module to provide
full in·circuit debugging of 8021 prototype
system

Connects to prototype system through
8021 pin compatible plug
On·card 3.0 MHz or external TTL driven
clock
Portable 4" x 7" microcomputer circuit
assembly

The EM1 emulator board is a ready-to-use 4" x 7" microcomputer circuit assembly that emulates the Intel 8021
microcomputer_ A 12-inch flat-cable assembly connects the board to the 8021 socket in a prototype system. The board
is designed so that it can be mounted either as a stand-alone unit, or within the prototype assembly.
The 8021 microcomputer has 1K x 8 mask-programmable ROM program memory and 64 by 8 RAM data memory. The
EM1 is controlled by an Intel 8748, with 1K of EPROM program memory and a 64 byte data memory. The EPROM can be
programmed and erased repeatedly during hardware and software development. The EM1 has several ancillary circuits
that perform the following functions which are specific to the 8021:
Zero crossing detector
Crystal controlled clock/buffer
Port 0 simulator
For prototype debugging, the 8748 cali be removed from its socket and replaced with a cable to an ICE-49 module.
When used with the EM1,ICE-49 module emulates the 8021 in real-time, or single-steps the 8021 program at the user's
command. A full range of capabilities for examining and modifying 8021 memory and status are supplied through
ICE-49 module.

17-13

AFN-OOB01A-01

EM1
Zero Cross Detection Simulator

HARDWARE
The EM1 emulation board uses the 8748 to perform the
emulation.

PO Simulator
Port 0 of the 8021 is a quasl*-bldlrectional port. The PO
simulator converts the data bus of the 8748 into a quasibidirectional port.

Crystal Control Clock Buffer
The EM1 allows user to select an on-board oscillator ora
TTL clock driven from the 8021 user's prototype system
via a Cambion Suitcase jumper.
Jumper
W1

Position

State

A-B

On-Board
External
TTL Clock

C-D

*A bidirectional port which serves as an input port, output port, or both even though outputs are statically
latched.
.
.

The zero cross detection simulator enables the 8748's
T1 Input to detect zero-crossings. The circuitry provides
a high level signal on a positive crossing and a low level
signal on a negative crossing of zero to the T1 Input of
the 8748.

Reset Buffer
The 8021 resets on a logic HIGH level signal. However,
the 8748 resets on a logic LOW level, thus an inverter is
provided on the EM1 to make the two chips compatible.

Optional Pull·Ups
Resistors are provided to simulate the optional pull-up
resistors on T11nput and Port 0 of the 8021. A removable
resistor pack is used on Port O. The T1 Input pull up can
be installed by soldering in a50K resistor.

Software

When emulating the 8021 with EM1, the user must
observe the 8021 Instruction set.

r- - - - ,
I OPTIONAL I
LPULL~...J

DB0- DB7

P10 - P17
P20- P28
ALE

8748
OR
40·PIN
PLUG

40
LINES

8021
CABLE
PLUG

PROG

CABLE TO
ICE-49
MODULE

12 INCHES
FLAT CABLE

XTAL1

T1r-~------'------;

r--------------,--;T1

RESET t---,.......;--~------'--'----------'---_o<

r - - - - - t - - - f RESET

RESET BUFFER

r
I

28
LINES

r--...,

O'NCIAiiD'"
CLOCK·

28·PIN
SOCKET

IL o~~~~~u~L
_ _ ....JI

L2!:!I~ ~

17·14

AFN-oDS01A-02

EM1
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Environment
Stand·Alone
Required Hardware:
EM1 emulation board
In·Circuit Emulation
Required Hardware:
EM1 emulation board
Intellec Microcomputer Development System con·
figurated with ICE-49 module

Equipment Supplied

System Clock
Crystal controlled 3.0 MHz on board or user supplied
TTL external clock: hardware jumper selectable.

Physical Characteristics
Width: 7.0 in (17.78 cm)
Height: 4.0 in. (10.16 cm)
Depth: 0.75 in. (1.91 cm)
Weight: < 1.0 Ibs. (0.45 kg)

Electrical Characteristics
DC Power:
Vcc5V ±5%
Icc 300 mA (max.)

EM1 printed circuit board

Environmental Characteristics

12" long flat cable terminating in 28-pin plug, pin com·
patible with 8021

Operating Temperature: 0 -

EM1 Operator's Manual

55°C

Operating Humidity: up to 95%
without condensation

relative

humidity

ORDERING INFORMATION
PART NUMBER

Description

MDS·EM1

8021 Emulation Board

17-15

AFN-OOB01A-03

EM2
. 8022 EMULATION BOARD

Portable 4.25" x 2.75" microcomputer
circuit assembly

Provides Intel® 8755A -2K )( 8 EPROM

Connects directly into prototype system
through Intel® 8022* pin compatible
socket

EPROM functional and electrical
equivalent of Intel® 8022 - single
component 8·bit computer ."

The EM2 emulator board Is a ready-to-use-4.25" x 2.75" microcomputer circuit assembly that emulates the Intel" 8022
single chip microcomputer. The emulator board. is designed to plug directly into the 8022 socket. No interfacing and
hiterconnection cables are nec;:essa,y. Power is obtained from the user's system.
The EM2 emulator board provides the user a full EPROM functional and electrical equivalent of the 8022 single component 8-bit microcomputer.
The EM2 emulator board consists of an Intel" 8022 emulator chip and an Intel" 8755A, providing the EM2 emulator
board with a 2K x 8 EPROM program memory which can be programmed and erased repeatedly during hardware and
.
software development.
The 8022E emulator chip is a modified version of the 8022 intended for use in design support systems; Instead of
using resident ROM memory as the 8022, the 8022E uses an external 2K EPROM 8755A memory. for program storage;
allowing easy program modification.
'
·See IntelO 8022 Data Sheet.

EM2
EM2 BLOCK DIAGRAM

40·PIN SOCKET CONFIGURATION
P2B

Vee

P27

P25

AVec

P24
PROG

VAREF

P23

ANl
ANa

P22

AVss

P21

P20

VTH

P17

POO

P16

pal

P15

P02

P14

P03

P13

P04

P12

P05

Pll

POB

Pl0

P07

RESET

ALE

XTAL2

XTALl

vss

SUSST

204B
EPROM
. - - - . ' MEMORY

B022 EMULATOR CHIP

D PIN 1
SQUARE SOLDER PAD

PIN DESCRIPTION
Desig·
nation

Pin II

Deslg·
nation
Function

Vss

Vee

+ 5V circuit power supply.

PROG

Output strobe for Intel 8243 I/O ex·
pander.

Pin II

Function

RESET

Input used to initialize the processor
by clearing status flip·flops and setting
the program counter to zero.

AVss

A/D converter GND potential. Also
establishes the lower limit of the con·
version range.

AVec

AID + 5V power supply.

SUBST

Substrate pin used with a bypass capacitor to stabilize the substrate voltage
and improve AID accuracy.

VAREF

A/D converter reference voltage. Establishes the upper limit of the conversion
range.

ANO,
AN1

6,5

Analog inputs to AID converter. Software selectable on-Chip via SEL ANO
and SEL AN1 instructions.

ALE

Address Latch Enable. Signal occurring once every 30 Input Input clocks
(once every single cycle instruction),
used as an output clock.

XTAL1

One side of crystal, Inductor, or resistor input for internal oscillator. Also
input for external frequency source.
(Not TTL compatible.)

XTAL2

Other side of timing control element.
This pin is not connected when an external frequency source is used.

Circuit GND potential.

POO-P07 10-17 8·bit open·draln port with comparator
Port 0
inputs. The switching threshold is set
externally by VTH • Optional pull·up resistors may be added via ROM mask
selection. (The emulator board has
switch selection of this option.)
VTH

B755A

40·PIN
SOCKET

Port 0 threshold reference, pin.

P10-P17 25~32 8-bit quasi-bidirectional port.
Port 1
P20-P27 33-36 8·bit quasi-bidirectional port.
Port 2
TO

38-39 P20-P23 also serve as a 4-bit I/O ex1-2 pander for Intel 8243.
8

Interrupt input and input pin testable
using the conditional transfer Instructions JTO and JNTO. Initiates an Interrupt following a low level Input if interrupt Is enabled. Interrupt Is disabled
after a reset.
Input pin testable using the JT1 and
JNT1 conditional transfer Instructions.
Can be designated the timer/event
counter input using the STRT CNT Instructlon. Also serves as the zero-cross
detection input to allow zero-crossover
sensing of slowly moving AC inputs.
Optional pull-up resistor may be added
via ROM mask selection.

17·17
.0:......

.:>

0.:.::::. __ •. __

AFN-00BOOA-02

EM2
On the EM2 Board:
The Intel® 8755A EPROM can be programmed using any
of the modules listed in Table 1.
Module

Description

UPP·103

Universal PROM Programmer.
Requires UPP·955, which in·
cludes 8755A Personality Card
with 40-pin adapter socket.

PROMPT-48

Intellec® MCS-48 Microcomputer Design Aid. Requires
PROMPT-475 Programming
Adapter.

The 8755A EPROM is erased when exposed to light with
wavelengths shorter than approximately 4000 Angstroms (A). Sunlight and certain fluorescent lamps have
wavelengths in the 3000A to 4000A range. If the 8755A is
to be exposed to sunlight or room fluorescent lighting
for extended periods, then opaque labels should be
placed over the window to prevent unintentional
erasure.

Table 1_ 8755A Proramming Module

The recommended erasure procedure is exposure to
ultraviolet light which has a wavelength of 2537 A. The
integrated dose (UV intensity multiplied by exposure
time) for erasure should be a minimum of 15W-sec/cm.
The erasure time with this dosage is approximately 15 to
20 minutes using an ultraviolet lamp with a 12,0001'
W/em 2 power rating. Place the 8755A within one inch of
the lamp during erasure. Some lamps include a filter
which should be removed before erasure.

SPECIFICATIONS

Physical Characteristics

PROMPT-80/85

Intellec® 8080/8085 Microcomputer Design Aid. Requires
PROMPT-975 Programming
Adapter.

Operating Environment
Intel® 8755A EPROM Programming
UPP-103
PROMPT-48
PROMPT-80/85

Width: 2.75 in. (6.98 cm)
Height: 4.25 in. (10.79 cm)
Depth: 1.5 in. (3.81 cm)
Weight: 0.5 Ib (0.23 kg)

Electrical Characteristics

Intellec Microcomputer Development System

DC Power
Vcc=5V ±5%
Icc=300 mA (maximum)

Software
8048 Assembler
ISIS-II Diskette Operating System

Environmental Characteristics

Equipment Supplied

Operating Temperature - 0 to 55·C

EM2 Printed Circuit Board
EM2 Reference Manual

Operating Humidity without condensation

Up to 95% relative humidity

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

MDS-EM2

8022 Emulation Board

17-18

AFN-00800A-03

ICE·22™
8022 IN·CIRCUIT EMULATOR
• Single·line assembler allows mnemonic
program instruction changes
• Full symbolic debugging

• 500 instruction cycle trace
conditionally triggered
- 16 user·definable trace probes
- symbolic groupings and display

• ICE™·resident user·program RAM for
real·time execution

• 32·bit half·microsecond emulation
timer

• Examine and alter 8022 registers,
memory, and digital port values, and
examine analog port data

• HELP facility summarizes ICE·22™
command syntax at the console

• User confidence test of ICE·22™

• Two user·specified breakpoint registers

hardware

The ICE-22 module resides in the Intellec® Microcomputer Development System and interfaces to any
user-designed 8022 system through a cable terminating in an 8022 emulator microprocessor and a pincompatible plug. The emulator processor, together with 2K bytes of user-program RAM located in the
ICE-22 buffer box, replaces the 8022 device in the user system while maintaining the 8022 electrical and
timing characteristics. Powerful Intellec debugging functions are thus extended into the user system.
Using the ICE-22 module, the designer can emulate the system's 8022, including full AID converter function, in real-time or single-step mode. Breakpoints allow the user to stop emulation on user-specified conditions, and a trace qualifier feature allows the conditional collection of 500 instruction cycles of trace
data. The ICE-22 trace includes 8022 status information and, through ICE-22 external logic probes, can
provide daia on up to 16 signal nodes in the user-system peripheral circuitry. For the first time in any ICE
module, the designer may alter program memory using ASM-48 mnemonics and symbolic references
without returning to ISIS II control. In addition, user-created peripheral chip analyzer routines may be applied to the logic probe data, thereby expanding the in-circuit emulation function to the entire system.

17·19

intJ

ICE·22™ IN·CIRCUIT EMULATOR

For each symbol that is used for memory reference in an ICE-22 emulator command, the emulator supplies the symbol value location as stored In
the ICE-22 emulator symbol table. This table can
be loaded with the symbol table produced by the
assembler during application program assembly.
Furthermore, the user can interactively modify the
emulator symbol table by adding new symbols or
changing or deleting old ones. This feature provides great flexibility in debugging and minimizes
the need to work with hexadecimal values.

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Integrated Hardware/Software
Development
The ICE-22 emul.ator allows hardw~re and software development to proceed interactively. This is
more effective than the traditional method of independent hardware and software development followed by system integration; With the ICE-22 module, prototype hardware can be added to the system as it is designed. Software and hardware testing occur while the product is being developed.

Through symbolic references in combination with
other features 0.1 the emulator, the user can easily:
• Disassemble program memory to mnemonics
• Assemble mnemonic instructions into executable code.
• Examine or modify 8022 internal registers, data
memory, or digital port contents.
• Examine analog port data
• Symbolically define groups of usei' probes, and
use these groups to symbolically specify breakpoints and trace qualifiers, or to format external
trace data output.

Conceptually, the ICE-22 emulator assists three
stages of development:
It can be operated without being connected to
the user's.system, so ICE-22 debugging capabilities can be used in conjunction with the
Intellec text editor and MCS-48™ macroassembler· to facilitate program development
before any of the user's hardware is available.
Integration of software and hardware can begin
when ·any functional element of the user sys- .
tem hardware is connected to the 8022 socket.
As each section of theuser'shardware is completed, it is added to the prototype. Thus, each
section of the hardware and software is "system" tested as it becomes available.
. When the user's prototype is complete, it is
. tested with the final version of the user system
software. The ICE-22 module is then used for
real-time emulation of the 8022 to debug the
system as a completed unit, and verify system
performance before any ROM codes are entered. A final product verification test may be
performed prior to ROM code entry by using the
separately available EM-2 8022 emulation board
(8022 EPROM equivalent) within the eventual
product package.
Thus, the ICE-22 module provides the user with
the ability to debug a prototype or production system at any stage in its development without introducing extraneous hardware or software test
tools.

Symbolic Debugging
The ICE-22 emulator permits the user to define
and use symbolic rather than absolute references
to program and data memory addresses; additional symbols are predefined by the ICE-22 software for referencing registers, flags, and inputl
output ports. Thus, the user.need not become involved with niach·ine code, or recall or look up the
addresses of key locations in his program as they
change with each assembly.

Operation Modes
The ICE-22 software is a RAM-based program that
provides the user with easy-to-use commands for
initiating emulation, defining breakpoints, controlling trace data collection, and displaying and
controlling system parameters. ICE-22 commands
are configured with a broad range of modifiers
which provide the user with maximum flexibility in
describing the operation to be performed.

EMULATION
The ICE-22 module can emUlate the operation of a
prototype 8022system,including full emulation of
the 8022 analog to digital converter, at real-time
speed (0.6 to 3.6 MHz) or in Single or multiple
steps. Emulation commands to the ICE-22 module
• control the process of ·setting up, running, and
. halting an emulation of the user's 8022-based
system. Breakpoints, comparison registers, and
tracepoints en.ablethe ICE-22 emulator to halt
emulation and provide a detailed trace of execution in any part of the user's program. A summary
of the emulation commands is shown in Table 1.

17-20

Breakpoints
TheICE-22 hardware includes two breakpoint registers that allow the user to halt emulation when
specified conditions are met. The emulator continuously compares the values stored on the
breakpoint registers with the status of specified
AFN·01586A

ICE·22™ IN·CIRCUIT EMULATOR

tion to the = condition, 2) more 8022 and ICE varibles may be compared, and 3) the comparators
themselves may be variables.

data, addresses, andlor external logic probes, and
halts emulation when this comparison is satisfied_ When an instruction initiates a break, that instruction is executed completely before the break
takes place. The ICE-22 emulator then regains
control of the console and enters the Interrogation Mode. With the breakpoint feature, the user
can request an emulation break when his program:

Trace and Tracepoints
Tracing is used with both real-time and singlestep emulation to record diagnostic information in
the trace buffer as a program is executed. The in~
formation collected includes opcodes executed,
program counter and Port 2 values, and 16 logic
probe values for the last 500 instruction cycles.
(There are one or two cycles per instruction, depending on the particular instruction.) This information can be displayed as assembler instruction
mnemonics, if desired, for analysis during Interrogation or Single-Step Mode. The trace-collection
facility may be set to run conditionally or unconditionally. One unique trace qualifier, specified in
the same way as a breakpoint, governs conditional
trace activity. It can be used to condition trace
data collection to take place as follows:

• Executes an instruction at a specific address or
within a range of addresses
• Executes a particular opcode
• Receives a specific signal on a logic probe, digital port pin, or group of probes or pins
• Fetches a particular data value from the user
program memory
Breakpoints can be composed of conditions on 22
channels which reflect internal 8022 activities,
plus the 16 external logic probe channels; all but
one of the channels may be specified as "Don't
Care" channels. Address ranges must be specified as a range of pages (rOOH) to sFFH), a range of
16-byte paragraphs within a page (prOH) to psFH),
or a range of bytes within a paragraph (pqrH to
pqsH) where, in each case, s is a digit greater than
or equal to the digit r.

• Under all conditions (constantly occurring)
• Only while the trace qualifier is satisfied
• For the 500 instruction cycles preceding the
time when a trace qualifier is first satisfied (pretriggered trace)

Table 1. Major Emulation Commands
Description

Command

GO
BRa, BR1, BR

STEP

CRO, CR1,
CR2, CR3, CR

• For the next 500 instruction cycles after a trace
qualifier is first satisfied (post triggered trace).

Begins real·time emulation and optionally specifies break conditions.
Sets or displays either or both
Breakpoint Registers used for stopping real-time emulation.
Begins single-step emulation and
optionally specifies terminating
conditions.
Sets or displays comparison criteria in all or individual Comparison
Registers used for stopping automatic single-step emulation.
Specifies or displays trace-data collection conditions, and optionally
sets Qualifier Register (QR).

INTERROGATION AND UTILITY
Interrogation and utility commands give the user
convenient access to detailed information about
the user program and the state of the 8022 that is
useful in debugging hardware and software_
Changes can be made in both memory and the
8022 registers, flags, and digital port values. Commands are also provided for various utility operations such as loading and saving program files,
defining symbols and logic probe groups, displaying trace data, controlling system synchronization
and returning control to ISIS-II. A summary of the
basic interrogation and utility commands is
shown in Table 2. Two new emulator features are
discussed below_
The single-line assembler (ASM command) is a new in-circuit emulation feature that permits the designer to examine and alter program memory using assembly
language mnemonics, without leaving emulation
mode or requiring time-consuming program· reassembly. When assembling new mnemonic instructions into program memory, previously deSINGLE-LINE ASSEMBLER -

Comparison Registers
Four comparison registers are provided that allow
the user to halt single step emulation when the
single condition specified in anyone of these registers is satisfied. The comparison registers differ
from the breakpoint registers in that, 1) the comparisons <, s, >, ~,and *- are permitted in addiAFN·015B6A

17-21

inter

ICE·22™ IN·CIRCUIT EMULATOR

The HELP file is a new ICE feature that allows the designer to display ICE-22 command syntax information at the Intellec console. By typing
"HELP~', a listing of all items for which help
messages are available is displayed; typing
"HELP " then displays relevant information about the item requested, including typical
usage examples. The "HELP" listing and a"HELP
ASM" message for the ASM command are shown
in Table 3.

fined symbolic references (from the original program assembly, or subsequently defined during
the emulation session) may be used in the instruction operand field, and the emulator will supply
the absolute address or data values as stored in
the emulator symbol table. These features greatly
reduce the .designer's time spent translating to
and from machine code and searching for, absolute addresses, with a corresponding reduction in
transcription errors.

HELP -

Table 2. Major Interrogation and Utility Commands
Description

Command
LOAD

Loads user object program (8022 code) into user-program memorY, and user symbols into
ICE-22 emulator symbol t a b l e . '
. .

DEFINE/REMOVE

Defines/removes symbols in ICE-22 emulator symbol table.

SAVE

Saves ICE-22 emulator symbol table a(ld/or user object program in ISIS·II hexadecimal file.

LIST

Copies all emulator console input and output to ISIS·II file.

Change/Display
Commands

Change or display value of symbolic reference in ICE-22 emulator symbol table, or contents
of key-word references (including registers, I/O ports, and status flags), or memory
references.

Group Commands

Define, change, remove, or display user-defined logic probe channel groups.

Trace Commands

Position trace buffer pointer; select and format trace output; enable or disable automatic display of trace data and register contents during single-step emulation.

Displays trace data pOinted to by trace buffer pOinter.

Synchronization
Line Commands

Set and display enabled/disabled status of SYNCO and SYNC1 synchronization iine outputs
or latched inputs (used to allow real-time emulation or tracing to start and stop synchronous~
Iy with external events).
.

ASM

Assembles mnemonic Instructions into user-program memory, 'or disassembles and displays
user-program memory contents.

INTERRUPT

Simulates external or timer interrupt sequence.

EVALUATE

Evaluates expression and displays resulting value.

SECONDS
HELP
, EXIT

Displays contents of emulation timer, in microseconds.
Displays help messages for ICE-22 emulator command-entry assistance.
Terminates ICE-22 emulator operation.

17-22

AFN·01586A

intJ

ICE·22™ IN·CIRCUIT EMULATOR

Table 3. HELP Command

-HELP
Help is available for the following items. Type HeLP followed by the
item name.
(For more information about HELP. type HELP HELP.)
Real-Time Emulation:
GO GR
SYO
BR BRO SRI

Change/Display/Define/Remove:
ASM
REGISTER
DEFINE
CBY'l'E
STACK
REMOVE
DBYTE
SECONDS
GROUP

SYl~BOLIC

SYNC

(PRIMARYSIO)
(STRING>

(SYSTEMSGROUP>
TO/LENGTH
EnD
(Change several locations and perform range checking or repetition.
If the instructions require mor ... memory than the size of the range.
an error occurs. If the instructions require less memory. then
the data is repeated Ilntil the range is filled.)
- Standard 8022 instructions typed one per line. The
operand "." can be used where "'data" is reqllired. and the operand
"" can be used where "addr" is r~quired. A continuation
~
prompt •••• is issued after each carriage return is typed.

AFN·01586A

17·23

intJ

ICE·22T/o1IN·CIRCUIT EMULATOR

SPECIFICATIONS

Environmental Characteristics

ICE·22 Operating Requirements

Operating Temperature: O· to 40,·C
Operating Humidity: Up to 95% relative humidity
'
without condensation.,

Intellec® Microcomputer Development System
(32K RAM required)
System console
Intellec® Diskette Operating System (single or
double density) ISIS-II v_ 3.4 or later

Equipment Supplied
• Printed circuit boards (2)
• Emulation buffer box, Intellec interfaqe cables,
and user-interface cable with 8022 emulation
processor
• 16 external trace probes
• Synchronization cables
• Crystal power accessory
• Operating instructions manual
• Diskette-based ICE-22 software (single and double density)

Emulation Clock
User's system clock (0_6 to 3.6 MHz) or ICE-22
crystal power accessory (3.0 MHz)

Physical Characteristics
Printed Circuit Boards
Width: 12.00 in. (30.48 cm)
Height: 6.75 in. (17.15 cm)
Depth: 0.50 in. (1.27 cm)
Buffer Box
Width: Uin, (11.43 cm)
Length: 10.0 .in. (25.40 cm)
Depth: 1.25 in, (3.18 cm)
Packaged Weight: 8.0 Ib (3.63 kg)

Electrical Characteristics
DC Power Requirements
Vcc = + 5V, + 5%, - 1%
Icc = 13.2A max; 11.0A typical
Voo= + 12V, ±5%
100 = 0.1A max; 0.05A typical
VBB= -10V, ±5%
IBB =0.05A max; 0.01 A typical

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

MCI-22-ICE

8022 Microcontroller In-Circuit
Emulator, cable assembly and
interactive diskette software

17-24

MCS-S1™ Development
Systems

8051 SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PACKAGE
• CONV51 Converter for translation of
8048 assembly language source code to
8051 assembly language source code

• Symbolic assembly language programming for 8051 microcontrollers
• Extends Intellec® Microcomputer
Development System to support 8051
program development

• Provides upward compability from the
MCS-48™ family of single-chip
microcontrollers

• Provides assembler output in standard
Intel hex format

• Supports conversion of ASM48 source
code macro definitions

• Macro Assembler features conditional
assembly and macro capabilities

The 8051 software development package provides development system support for the powerful 8051 family of single
chip microcomputers. The package contains a symbolic macro assembler and MCS-48 source code converter.
The assembler produces absolute machine code from 8051 macro assembly language instructions. This object code
may be used to program the 8751 EPROM version of the chip. The assembler output may also be debugged using the
ICE-51TM in-circuit emulator.
The converter translates 8048 assembly language instructions into 8051 source instructions to provide software compatibility between the two families of microcontrollers.
This diskette-based software package runs under ISIS-II on an Intellec Microcomputer Development System with 64K
bytes of memory.

MCa-61'"6tl4,11...0Qt5,
ASSlONaL Y l,.ANUUAat:
CQHI(lI;RT"'''OP£RATINOi
fHSTflUt:;rrIOH$ I'OR ISIS.II USER$

18-1

8051 SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PACKAGE

8051 MACRO ASSEMBLER
• Provides software support for many
addressing and data allocation
capabilities

• Supports 8051 family program development onlntellec® Microcomputer Devel.
opment Systems
• Gives symbolic access to powerful 8051
hardware features

• Symbolic Assembler supports symbol
table, cross-reference, macro
. capabilities, and conditional assembly

• Produces object file, listing file and
error diagnostics

The 8051 Macro Assembler (ASM51) translates symbolic 8051 macro assembly language instructions into machine
executable object code. These assembly language mnemonics are easier to program and are more readable than
binary or hexadecimal machine instructions. Also, by allowing the programmer to give symbolic names to memory
locations rather than absolute addresses, software design and debug are performed more quickly and reliably.
The assembler supports macro definitions and calls. This is a convenient way to program a frequently used code
sequence only once. The assembler also provides conditional assembly capabilities.
Cross referencing is provided in the symbol table listing, showing the user the lines in which each symbol was
defined and referenced.
ASM51 provides symbolic access to the many useful addressing features of the 8051 architecture. These features
include referencing for bit and byte locations, and for providing 4-bit operations for BCD arithmetic. The assembler
also provides symbolic access to hardware registers, 1/0 ports, control bits, and RAM addresses.
Math routines are enhanced by the MUltiply and DIVide instructions.
If an 8051 program contains errors, the assembler provides a comprehensive set of error diagnostics, which are
included in the assembly listing or on another file. Program testing may be performed by using the Universal PROM
Programmer and 8751 personality card to program the 8751 EPROM version of the chip, or by using the ICE-51 in-circuit
emulator.

IItS-51 "MIlO USU.UR
IllS-II IICS-51 UCRO ftSSEII8LER
DUEeT MODULE PLAUD 1M tFI:CONVRT.HEIt
ASSUaLER INVOkED BYI
I FI t lIS", I I Fit COHI'RT. 51 i\'llBOlS XREf
LOt

OB"

LIME

...,,,.

,
J

Th'5l"Ololtinlconnrts BCD to. binll.ry ond·binor." to BCD .

lUI ...
8 liB ,£1
Qllt ?5FIIA
1114 41111
11I'554FI

!lOY 9.1111

o III~

C?
liB', :541F
018027
11I[.F7
OIlF 2:! ,
1111884
11111 C4
1112 45F1
BlUf?
1115"22

IICS-51 IIACRO ASSEMBLER

TVPE

8 . . . II OSEe:
8CD8IN. l CSEG
IIMICD. L CIEG
COIIYRT" l esEC.

Lood B hI" diVision Dr lIultlpllcdlCln"by ' I

J.nQSk out lou ordll" digit
h,gl'l dllilit Into. \0.\1 order nibb\.

:.no".

f "UHIP~~Ld~:lt 11111 IB

.
"""
.."""

B ~ 19 114

JCBIH8CO
AIIL A.UFIH
SIIAP A

""
""

BIB.9C4

HUE

ORG'I811
CONYRT: ItOVA •• RI

·n

:
;
:
;

)tCH A.IUI

ANllI,ISFH
ADD A.UI

"DVeRI,1I

IkcCUJluhtal"

"BCD

RET
BIMBCDI

DIV A8
SWAP A
ORlA,8

nov

IIRI,IO

j
Diliid. by IS.
; Put quati.nt in high ard,r nlbbl.
Pt4C'I"IJl4Ind.r In law ordtrnibbl.
: Star, result

'"
'"

ptlla

ynUE 11110" REFEllEIICES
IIFIN
11I6N
1118N
IIIIM

lIultlpl\1dl91tby t8
Star. I nt.rll.d i ~ t. riliul t ~nd gft "n.w tallY
flask aut hHJh ard.r dl91t
Add h. 9h ~I"d.r If i 91 t and taw ard.1" d I 9' t
Star' I"Ulilt

1\ 24
U'
1222.
"

AU£lt8l't CDKFl£lE, HO ERRORS f!HJHII-

Sample ASM51 Listing

18·2

8051 SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PACKAGE

CONV51
8048 TO 8051 ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
CONVERTER UTILITY PROGRAM
• Preserves comments; translates 8048
macro definitions and calls

• Enables software written for the
MCS-48™ family to be upgraded to
run on the 8051

• Provides diagnostic information and
warning messages embedded in the
output listing

• Maps each 8048 instruction to a
corresponding 8051 instruction

The 8048 to 8051 Assembly Language Converter is a utility to help users of the MCS-48 family of microcomputers
upgrade their designs with the high performance 8051 architecture. By converting 8048 source code to 8051 source
code, the software investment developed for the 8048 is maintained when the system is upgraded.
The goal of the converter (CONV51) is to attain functional equivalence with the 8048 code by mapping each 8048
instruction to a corresponding 8051 instruction. In some cases a different instruction is produced because of the
enhanced instruction set (e.g., bit CLR instead of ANL).
Although CONV51 tries to attain functional equivalence with each instruction, certain 8048 code sequences cannot be
automatically converted. For example, a delay routine which depends on 8048 execution speed would require manual
adjustment. A few instructions, in fact, have no 8051 equivalent (such as those involving P4-P7). Finally, there are a few
areas of possible intervention such as PSW manipulation and interrupt processing, which at least require the user to
confirm proper translation. The converter always warns the user when it cannot guarantee complete conversion.
CONV51 produces two files. The output file contains the ASM51 source program produced from the 8048 instructions.
The listing file produces correlated listings of the input and output files, with warning messages in the output file to
point out areas that may require users' intervention in the conversion.

Optional Hardware:

SPECIFICATIONS

Universal PROM Programmer
Line Printer
ICE-51 In-Circuit Emulator

OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

Required Software:

Required Hardware:

ISIS-II Diskette Operating System (V3.4 or later)

Intellec Microcomputer Development System with

Documentation Package:

64K Bytes of RAM

MCS-51 Macro Assembler User's Guide

Flexible Disk Drive(s)

MCS-51 Macro Assembly Language Pocket Reference

System Console

MCS-51 8048-to-8051 Assembly Language Converter
Operating Instructions for ISIS-II Users

-CRT or hard copy device

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

MCI-51-ASM

8051 Software Development
Package

18-3

UPI-41ATM
Development Systems

ICE·41A™
UPI·41A IN·CIRCUIT EMULATOR
Extends Intellec microcomputer develop·
ment system debug power to user con·
figured system via external cable and
40·pin plug, replacing user UPI·41A™
devices
Em.ulates user system UPI·41A™dEwices
in real time

Eliminates need for extraneous debug·
ging tools residing in user system
Collects address, data, and UPI·41A™
status information on machine cycles
emulated
Provides capability to examine and alter
UPI·41A™ registers, memory, and flag
values, and to examine pin and port
values

Allows user configured system to use
static RAM memory for program debug

Integrates hardware and software efforts
early in engineering cycle to save devel·
opment time

Provides hardware comparators for user
designated break conditions

The !CE-41A UPI-41A In-Circuit Emulator module is an Intellec system reside.nt. module that interfaces to any user configured UPI-41A system. The.ICE-41A module. interfaces with a UPI-41A pin-compatible plug which replaces the UPI41A device In the system. With the ICE-41A plug In place, the designer has the capability to execute the system In real
ilme while collecting up to 255 Instruction cycles of real time trace data. In addition, he can single step the system program during execution. Static RAM memory is available through thelCE-41Amodule to store UPI·41A programs. The
designer may display and alter the contents of program memory, internal UPI-41A registers and flags, and 1/0 ports.
Powerful debug capability is extended into the UPI-41A system while ICE-41A debug hardware and software remain inside the Intellec system. Symbolic reference capability allows the designer to use symbols rather than absolute values
when examining and modifying memory, registers, flags, and 1/0 ports in the system.

19-1

00804A
L"'--:,_ .• _-· ..

ICE·41A™
GO FROM .START TILL CODE. RSLT

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

begins execution of the program at the address referenced by the I.abel START in the designer's assembly
program. A breakpoint is set to occur the first time the
microprocessor executes the program memory location
referenced by RSLT. The designer does not have to be
concerned with the physical locations of START and
RSLT. The ICE-41A software driver supplies them
automatically from information stClred in the symbol
table.

Debug Capability Inside User System
Intellec memory is used for the execution of the ICE·41A
software. The Intellec CRT console and the file handling
capabilities provide the designer with the ability to com·
municate with the ICE-41A module and display informa·
tion on the operation of the prototype system. The ICE·
41A module block diagram is shown in Figure 1.

Symbolic Debugging

Memory Replacement

Symbol Table - ICE·41A software allows the user to
make symbolic references to I/O ports, memory ad·
dresses, and data in his program. The user symbol table
which is generated along with the object file during a
program assembly can be loaded to Intellec memory for
access during emulation. The user may add to this symbol table any additional symbolic values for memory ad·
dresses, constants, or variables that he may find useful
during system debugging. By referring to symbol
memory addresses, the user can examine, change or
break at the intended location. In addition, ICE-41A pro·
vides symbolic definition of all UPI·41A registers and
flags.

The 8741/8741A and 8041/8041A contain internal program and data memory. When the UPI·41A microcomputer is replaced by the ICE-41A socket in a system, the
ICE-41A module supplies static RAM memory as a
replacement for the internal microcomputer memory.
The ICE·41A module has enough RAM memory available
to emulate upto the total 1K control memory capability
of the system.

Real· Time Trace
The ICE·41A module captures trace information while
the designer is executing programs in real time. The instructions executed, program counter, port values for
port 1 and port 2, and the values of selected UPI-41A
status lines are stored for the last 255 instruction cycles
executed. When retrieved for display, code is dis·
assembled for user convenience. This provides data for
determining how the user system was reacting prior to
emulating break.

Symbolic Reference - Symbolic reference is a great
advantage to the system designer. He is no longer
burdened with the need to recall or look up addresses of
key locations in his program which can change with
each assembly. Meaningful symbols from his source
program can be used instead. For example, the com·
mand:

USER SOCKET

SYNO

INTERNAL
TIMER

CABLE

SYN1

BUFFER

CONTROL
PROGRAM

8080A

CONTROL
PROCESSOR

P2
8741A

wllNTERNAL
MONITOR
PGM

Figure 1. ICE·41A Module Block Diagram

19-2

00804/\

ICE·41A™
vide the user with maximum flexibility in defining the
operation to be performed. The ICE-41A software driver
is available on diskette and operates in 32K of Intellec
RAM memory.

Integrated Hardware/Software Development
The user prototype systems need no more than a UPI41A socket and timing logic to begin integration of software and hardware development efforts. Through the
ICE-41A module, Intellec system resources can be accessed to replace the prototype system. UPI-41A software development can proceed without the prototype
hardware. Hardware designs can be tested using
previously tested system software.

Command

Hardware
The ICE-41A module is a microcomputer system utilizing Intel's UPI-41A microprocessor as its nucleus. This
system communicates with the Intellec system 8080A
processor via direct memory access. Host processor
commands and ICE-41A status are interchanged
through a DMA channel. ICE-41A hardware consists of
two printed circuit boards, the controller board and the
emulator board, which reside in the Intellec system
chassis. A cable assembly interfaces the ICE-41A
module to the user's UPI-41A system. The cable terminates in a UPI-41A pin-compatible plug which
replaces any UPI-41A device in the user system.

Operation

Enable

Activates breakpoint and display registers for use with go and step commands.

Initiates real-time emulation and allows user to specify breakpoints and
data retrieval.

Step

Initiates emulation in single instruction increments. Each step is followed
by register dump. User may optionally
tailor other diagnostiC activity to his
needs.

Interrupt

Emulates user system interrupt

Table 1. ICE·41A Emulation Commands

Controller Board

Command

The ICE-41A module interfaces to the Intellec systems
as a peripheral device. The controller board receives
commands from the Intellec system and responds
through a DMA port. Three 10-bit hardware breakpoint
registers are available which can be loaded by the user.
While in emulation mode, a hardware comparator is constantly monitoring address lines for a match which will
terminate an emulation. The controller board returns
real-time trace data, UPI-41A registers, flag and port
values, and status information to a control block in the
Intellec system when emulation is terminated. This information is available to the user through the ICE-41A
interrogation commands. Error conditions, when
detected, are automatically displayed on the Intellec
system console.

Display

Prints contents of memory, UPI-41A
device registers, 1/0 ports, flags, pins,
real-time trace data, symbol table, or
other diagnostiC data on list device.

Change

Alters contents of memory, register,
output port, or flag. Sets or alters
breakpoints and display registers.

Base

Establishes mode of display for output
data.

Suffix

Establishes mode of display for input
data.

Operation

Table 2. ICE·41A Interrogation Commands

Emulator Board

Command

The emulator board contains the 8741A and peripheral
logic required to emulate the UPI-41A device in the user
system. A 6 MHz clock drives the emulated UPI-41A
device. This clock can be replaced with a user supplied
TTL clock in the user system or can be strapped internally for 3 MHz operation.

Load

Fetches user symbol table and object
code from input device.

Save

Sends user symbol table and object
code to output device.

Define

Enters symbol name and value to user
symbol table.

Move

Moves block of memory data to another area of memory.

Prints user specified portion of trace
memory to selected list device.

Cable Card
The cable card is included for cable driving. It transmits
address and data bus information to the user system
through a 40-pin connector which plugs into the user
system in the socket designed for the UPI-41A device.

Software
The ICE-41A software driver is a RAM-based program
which provides the user with command language (see
Table 1, Table 2, and Table 3) for defining breakpoints,
initiating real-time emulation or single step operation,
and interrogation and altering user system status
recorded during emulation. The ICE-41A command
language contains a broad range of modifiers which pro-

Operation

List

Defines list device.

Exit

Returns program control to ISIS-II.

Evaluate

Converts expression to equivalent values in binary, octal, decimal, and hex.

Remove

Deletes symbols from symbol table.

Reset

Reinitializes ICE-41A hardware.

Table 3_ ICE-41A Utility Commands

19-3

OOB04A

ICE·41A™
Voo= + 12V, ±5%
100= 100 rnA max; 60 rnA typ
V BB = -10V
IBB c=30 rnA

SPECIFICATIONS
ICE·41A Operating Environment
Required Hardware
Intellec microcomputer development system
System console
lntellec diskette operating system
ICE·41A module

Input Impedance
@ ICE·41A user socket pins:

V IL =0.8V max; 1,,:.= 1.6 rnA
VIH=2.0V min; IIH=40 ~
@ Bus:
VIL = 0.8V max; IlL = 250,..A
V IH = 2.0V min; V IH = 20 ~

Required Software
System monitor
ISIS·II
ICE·41A diskette·based software

Output Imp!!dance
@ P1, P2:
VOL =O.5V max; IOL = 16 rnA
VOH=V CC (10K pullup).

System Clock
Crystal controlled 6.0 MHz or 3',0 MHz internal or user
supplied TTL external

@ Bus:
VoL =0.5V max; IOL=25 rnA
VOH = 3.65V min; IOH = 1 rnA
Others
VOL = 0.5V max; IOL;;' 16 rnA
VO H = 2.4V max; IOH = 400~.

Physical Characteristics
Printed Circuit Boards
Width: 12.00 in. (30.48 cm)
Height: 6.75 in. (17.15 cm)
Depth: 0.50 in. (1.27 cm)
Weight: 8.00 Ib (3.64 kg)

Equipment Supplied
Controller board
Emulator board
Interface cables and buffer module
Operator's manual
ICE·41A diskette based software

Cable Buffer Box
Width: 8.00 in. (20.32 cm)
Height: 4.00 in. (10.16 cm)
Depth: 1.25 in. (3.17 cm)
Flat Cable: 4.00 ft (121.92 cm)
User Cable: 15.00 in. (38.10 cm)

Reference Manuals
9800465 - ICE·41A Operator's Manual (SUPPLIED)
Reference manuals are shipped with each product only
if designated SUPPLIED (see above). Manuals may be
ordered from any Intel sales representative, distributor
office or fromlritel Literature Department, 3065 Bowers
..
Avenue, Santa Clara,.California 95051.

Electrical Characteristics
DC Power Requirements
Vcc= + 5V, ± 5%
Icc= 10A max; 8A typ

ORDERING INFORMATION
Part Number

Description

MDS·41A·ICE

UPI~41A (8741, 8041, 8741A, 8041A)

CPU
.
In,circuit emulator, cable assembly
and interactive diskette software
included

19·4

•.. ..:::.

00004A

2920 Signal Processor
Development Systems

2920 SOFTWARE SUPPORT PACKAGE
• Complete software design
development support for the 2920

• Extends Intellec® Microcomputer
Development System to support
2920 software development

The 2920 Software Support Package furnishes a 2920 Signal Processing Applications Software/Compiler, 2920
Assembler, and 2920 Software Simulator. These three software design and. development tools run on the Intellec@
Microcomputer Development System.
The 2920 Signal Processing Application Software/Compiler is an interactive tool for designing software to be
executed on the 2920 Signal Processor. The compiler accepts English·like statements from the user and generates
2920 assembly language code.
The assembler translates symbolic 2920 assembly language programs into the machine operation·code. The user can
load the code into the simulator for 2920 simulation or to the Universal PROM Programmer for 2920 EPROM
programming.
The simulator, operating entirely in software, allows the user to test and symbolically debug 2920 programs. The user
can specify input signals, simulate program execution, set up breakpoints, display input and output, and display and
alter th.e contents of the 2920 registers and memory locations. The simulator can also stop or trace the program and
constructively give the user access to the key elements inside a 2920 for analyzing his program.
The compiler, assembler, and simulator enable the designer to develop and tesf an entire program without a
complete prototype design. The 2920 designer works on the Intellec@ Microcomputer Development System rather
than on a breadboard. ThedevelopmEmt system can program, store and recall programs or routines and aid in 2920
program design.

2920 Software Support Package

20·1

inter

2920 SOFTWARE SUPPORT PACKAGE

2920 SIGNAL PROCESSING APPLICATIONS
SOFTWARE/COMPILER
• Interactive software support tool for
2920 Signal Processor

• Compiler generates 2920 Assembly
Language Code
• Extensive command set for designing
electrical filters

• Extends Intellec® Microcomputer
Development System support of
the 2920

• Graphics capability enhances analysis
of filter response or piecewise linear
function approximations

• Contains MACRO library for several
standard filters and signal processing
functions

• Powerful MACRO capability for
executing frequently used routines

The 2920 Signal Processing Applications Software/Compiler (SPAS20) is an interactive tool for designing
software to execute on the 2920 Signal Processor.
The SPAS20 package can be visualized as being comprised of four inter-related sections: A compiler section,
a filter design section, a curve fitting section, and a MACRO section.
Among the abilities of SPAS20 are: ability to generate 2920 assembly language code directly from
specifications of signal processing building blocks such as filters and waveform generators; ability to
generate 2920 assembly language code for several classes of algebraic equations such as Y = C·X, Y = C'Y,
and Y = C· X + Y where X, Yare variables and C is a constant; ability to generate 2920 assembly language
code for one variable function Y(X) = F(X); ability to examine time and frequency responses of filter sections
specified by continuous or sampled poles and zeroes; ability to examine piecewise linear approximation of
specific function; ability for users to implement more complex commands by grouping sets of commonly,
used commands into a MACRO.
The SPAS20 package runs under ISIS-II on any Intellec® Microcomputer Development System with 64K
RAM. The output of SPAS20 can be assembled with the 2920 assembler, tested with the 2920 Simulator, and
programmed into the 2920 chip with the Universal PROM Programmer for prototyping.

20-2

AFN·01386A

inter

2920 SOFTWARE SUPPORT PACKAGE

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

DATA

The 2920 Signal Processing Applications Software!
Compiler gives the analog designer a "high level
language" for his 2920 applications-it decreases
the need to code 2920 assembly language. Furthermore, the compiler Is interactive. This feature
enables the designer to define a filter, or transfer
function, graph their response, and change their
parameters many times, without having to program
and test in an actual 2920 implementation.

This command allows for specification of a set of vertices (i.e. X - Y
coordinate pairs) which determine a
piecewise linear approximation of
some defined function, filter
response characteristics, etc.

HOLD

Command to correct attenuation
due to sample-and-hold distortion:
if ON, it corrects absolute gain by
sin(x)!x and phase by adding x,
where x=TS*FREQ*n. It corrects
group delay by subtracting n*TS.

EVALUATE

Gives the decimal numeric value of
any expression.

CODE

Creates 2920 assembly language
code for giveri poles; and zeros,
equations, and user defined functions.

Once a filter is realized by moving poles and zeros
in the continuous and sampled planes, the filter
may be coded and written onto an ISIS file. Similarly, after a function Y = F(X) has been defined, the
code for a piecewise linear approximation can be
stored onto an ISIS file. Several other file commands are available to store and retrieve command
sequences for SPAS20 sessions.

The SPAS20 compiler also recognizes the following commands for file h?ndling:

SPAS20 Command Language
DEFINE

This command defines a pole or
zero by associating it with a
number (i.e., POLE 3), and with real
and imaginary coordinates in the
continuous or sampled plane.
This command also defines a symbol by associating a name with a
numeric value, or a MACRO by providing a pOinter to a specified command sequence.

GRAPH!
OGRAPH

MOVE

This command graphically displays
the values of object(s) specified.
For example, GRAPH GAIN and
GRAPH PHASE are used to display
filter response. The OGRAPH command will "overgraph" the new
response over the old response,
after any changes have been
made. (You may also graph Group
Delay, Step, and Impulse.)

Deletes the definition of a pole,
zero, symbol, or macro.

HELP

Types an explanatory message on
the console, pertaining to a command or its attributes.

FIT

This command performs curve fitting, i.e. it approximates an arbitrary
user supplied function with a piecewise linear function.

Writes out objects (commands) to
a specified file, either creating a
new one or appending an existing
one. This enables the user to
store all or part of a SPAS20 session on a diskette to be brought
back later with .the INCLUDE
command.

DISPLAY

Copies the
console.

INCLUDE

Executes a sequence of
instructions from a diskette file as
if they were typed in from the console.

LIST

Creates a file containing
console interactions.

cont~nts

of a file to the

all

In addition to naming macros for specific command sequences, compound and conditional
commands may be formed using all of the above
statements. These compound commands are:

Allows the definition of a pole or
zero to be changed-its coordinates, its plane, or both.

REMOVE

PUT!
APPEND

20-3

Establishes conditional flow of
control within a block of
commands.

REPEAT

Used for repetition of a block of
commands; executes indefinitely
or until a condition is met (using
WHILE, UNTIL, and END
statements).

COUNT

Establishes the number of times a
command sequence is to be
executed, in a looping fashion.

AFN·013B6A

2920 SOFTWARE SUPPORT PACKAGE
Intel also supplies several MACRO library files corvtaining the following commonly needed MACROs:

SPAS20 MACRO Facility
A macro is a sequence of commands that is stored
on a temporary diskette file. The command
sequence is executed when the macro name is
entered as a command. This saves repetitive entry
of the sequence, and permits alogorithms to be
saved on diskette for future use. This SPAS20
facility allows you to do the following:
•

Filter design MACROS
- Butterworth filter
- Chebyshev filter
- Bilinear transform
- Evaluate gain or phase of digital filter
in parallel form
- Time response simulatiori
Function design MACROs
- Code and error optimization
- Calculate instertitial error
MACROs for generation of 2920 code
- Code for all-POLE filter
- Input and AID conversion
- Multiplication
- Division
- Logarithm functions
- Square-root functions
- Sinewave oscillator

Display the text of any macro.
Define a macro, specifying its name and any
parameters that are to be used by the block.
This definition is followed by the contents of
the macro (commands) and the EM statement
to end its definition.

•

Invoke a macro by entering its name and
appropriate values for any parameters.

•

List the names of all defined macros.

•

Remove any or all macros.

SAMPLE SPAS20 FILTER DESIGN SESSION
-: FI : SPAS20 • SFT
ISIS-II 2920 SIGNAL PROCESSING APPLICATIONS COMPILER.

•'DEFINE

POLE 1

.fZ
POLE I •

n.o

CREATE A POLE IN CONTINUOUS S-PLANE

; LIST ALL POLES AND ZEROS

•oFSCALE.

•'V'CALi.

•'CRAPH

= -707.707

~707.00000.707.00000.CONTINUOUS

100.10000

, ESTABLISHES FREQUENC' RANGE OF INTEREST

-45.1

CAIN

ESTABLISHES "AGNITUDE RESPONSE RANGE OF INTEREST

PLOT "AGNITUDE RESPONSE OF POLE PAIR

!. . . , .• ""' ......... '" "' ................... _ .......... .................................. !

GA IN
1. 0

,-------------------------- •.••

-i. :(

-"l. {
-:i. to
-? a:
-11). I)

-IZ. !
-1 ~ ~.~

-1';.5
-I~.

-2Q.~

-2 •• !
-2'5.3
-27. ·5
-2~. ,.
-31. ,
-H.O
-305..2
-33.4
- 41). t,

-41.S
-45,0
DB I HZ

•••••

........... A

,100 150 200

••• A.

.....

300 400 500

•• ,

• A.

••

...

....................................

700 1000 1400 2000

3000

5000

10000

0, THE UNITS USED IN GRAPHING GAIN ARE SHOWN IN THE LOVER LEFT CORNER,
., GAIN IN DECIBELS IS GRAPHED YERSES FREQUENC' IN HERTZ,

PREPARE TO "OYE TO THE DIGITAL DO"AIN,

0' SA"PLE RATE "UST BE SPECIfiED,

•

-OTS

= U13020

= 7,'805004/10,'5

RATE fOR

192

INSTRUCTION PROGRA" AND 10"HZ CLOCK

20-4

AFN·01386A

2920 SOFTWARE SUPPORT PACKAGE

SAMPLE SPAS20 FILTER DESIGN SESSION (Cont'd.)

OHQVE POLE TO Z
1 POLES/ZEROES "DYED

I CONYERT FILTER TO DIGITAL YIA "ATCHED-Z TRANSFOR"ATION

op
LIST TRAHSFOR"ED POLE
POLE 1 ·0.710'2836,O.3411836',Z
o

0, COHPARE RisPOHSES OF THE ANALOG AHD DIGITAL FILTERS BY GRAPHING THE
OJ HEW RESPONSE OYER THE OLP.
o
.OI:P/\PH CAl H
G~:II

............ "

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "' • • • •

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A • ' . ' • • • "" . . . . . . . . . . . .

-3, •
-~

-7. i

t-.

+-.

-11).0

+'.•

-!l.1
-H.3
-I·L 5

t' •

t't ' ~.

-H.,
-20. ~
-21.1

++ ' .. - ••
++
' ,,
++

-2~.:l

-2",'5
-2i.~
-Jl.~

-3~.O

-3'.2

-3~.~

-4~.'

-4Z.S
-4 ~.

liB I HZ

A.......

...

100' i 50' 200' •• 30 0 • 400 . 500' . 70 0 • i 000 . i 400 . 2000' . iooo .... 5000 ..... i DO 00
1

...

......."

II.

0; PLUS SIGNS INP ICATE OLD CURYE .
• ; HOTE THAT THE DIGITAL FILTER RESPONSE 8EGINS TO IHCREASE AGAIN
OJ AT HALF THE SA"PLE RATE ( 6510 HZ ).

o
0; THE PHASE CHARACTERISTICS OF THIS FILTER CAN BE EXA"INED.
o

OYSCttLE • -PI,PI

I ESTABLISHES RANGE OF INTEREST.

oCRAPH PHASE
PH~SE

I . '0' ."" . . . . . . . . . . . . "" ••• "" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "' . . . . . . . . . . . A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "' • • • • • ~ • • •

3.14

2.94
2.54
2.24

1.94
1.6S
1.35
1.05
0.75
0.45
O.! 5
-0.15
-0.45
-0.75
-1.05
-1.35

."",-------""--

"_-

-1.65

-I."
-2.24
-2.54
-2.84
-3,14
RAD 1HZ

•'PUT
o

! ..... "" ...

••••• A

100 150 200

'FIIPOLE PZ

••• A

...... "

..... A ..... "

300 400 500
I

......... "

••••••• A

••••• "

5000

•••

10000

SAYE THE POLE LOCATION IN A DISK FILE BACKUP

PULE I 11181<11
: ~ENERA'IE
B!=I 33'8"'0 B20-0.50541'14

oC·)UE

•••• A •••

·700 1000 1400 2000 ·3000

~~~u

20:5.

·ASSE~i;L·(

I~ODE

FUR

THIS flLHR

AFN.(l1388A

2920 SOFTWARE SUPPORT PACKAGE

SAMPLE SPAS20 FILTER DESIGN SESSION (Cont'd.)
OPTlnlZED 2'20 CODE IS NOW GENERA1ED. 10 SAVE SPACE, SOnE
OF TNE SCREEH OUTPUT HAS BEEN DELE1ED. HORnALLY ALL A1TEnPTS
BY THE CO"PILER TO GENERAiE CODE ARE ECHOED ON 1HE SCREEN.
INS1=10
POLE 1 = 0.71089458,0.34116779,Z
BEST: PERROR
3.3795874/10"5,1.58846567/10"5

, HOTE: nAKE SURE SIGNAL IS <0.74635571
LD~

~UT2_PI,OUTI_PI,ROO

; OU12_PI-I.0000000000UTI_PI
LOA OUTI_PI,OUTO_PI,ROO
; OUTI_PI=I.00000000·OU10_PI
SUB OUTO_PI,OUTI_PI,R05
; OU10_PI=I.00000000oOU10_PI-0.031250000'OUTI_PI
ADO OUTO_PI,OU10_PI,R03
: OUTO_PI-I.1250000000UTO_PI-0.035156250'OUTI_PI
ADD OUTO_PI,OU11_PI,R02
; OUTO_PI-I.12500000*OU10_PI+0.21484375*OU11_'1
SUB OUTO_PI,OUT2_PI,ROI
; OUTO_PI-I. 1250000000U10_PI+0.21484375*OUTI_PI-0.50000000*OUT2_PI
SUB OUTO_PI,OUT2_PI,R08
; OUTO_PI=I.12500000*OU10_PI+0.21484375*OUTI_PI-0.50390625.0UT2_PI
ADO OUTO_PI,OUT2_PI:RII
: OU10_PI=I.12500000.0U10_PI+0.21484375'OU11_PI-0.503417'6'OUT2_PI
SUB OUTO_PI,OUTZ_PI,R09
: OUTO_PI=I.1250000000UTO_PI'0.214B4375'OU11_PI-0.50537109.0UT2_PI
ADD OUTO_PI,IHO_PI,ROO
; OU10_PI-I.12500000.0U10_PI+0.21484375.0U11_PI-0.5053710'.OUT2_PI+1 .OOOOOOOO

R. ._-Doilv_ERs~ 'Jr-:---liir---:-""--:-L"
",~L~OO~IC:,.J
~
PARITY

1(;::1\,

ECC

. . - '

~.M"EQii (READ AND WAITE DATAl

21·20

BUF:R

Figure 1. In·5160 NOVA·3 Add·ln Memory Simplified Block Diagram

ADDRf-ESS----'M"EMBBUSTRANSCEIVERS

2
~l

~I--r-TA----l

!
i

A
ClV~
IlL...
~r- ~

;:..

in·5160
Operating Modes

Parity

The in·5160 emulates all of the operating modes sup·
ported by Data General on the NOVA 3 series com·
puters. In normal operation, the in·5160 performs read,
read·hold, write, and read·modlfy·wrlte processor con·
trolled cycles. Refresh cycles are timed out internally
and use chip row addresses generated by a counter on
the board. The in·5160 offers the largest storage capac·
ity that can be handled by existing software and has a
higher effective speed than the NOVA 3 semiconductor
memories. Read or write operations required 500 nano·
seconds and the read·modify·write operation is com·
pleted in 1100 nanoseconds, whether Initiated when the
memory is Idle or Immediately following a preceding
cycle. On consecutive memory cycles, the Data General
NOVA 3 memory requires 500 nanoseconds for read
cycles, 1200 nanoseconds for write cycles and 2200
nanoseconds for read·modlfy·wrlte. Since consecutive
memory cycles occur frequently, the Intel memory can
provide significantly faster throughput. The data valid
time Is extended during the read·hold cycle by the proc·
essor pulling the hold input low. The longer data valid
time is required during defer cycles, console Initiated
read cycles (the examine switch), or during data channel
read cycles. For data channel memory cycles, the
memory operates in either write or read·hold modes. All
read, write, or read·modlfy·wrlte cycles can be per·
formed with or without single bit error correction, map,
memory protection, or parity error reset or Interrupt.

The parity feature is standard on all in·5160 memory
boards. During write operations, the parity logic gener·
ates a parity bit for the 16·bit data word. Data and parity
bit are then stored in the memory. During read opera·
tions, 16 bits of data and one parity bit are read out from
the memory and checked for a parity error. If a parity
error is detected, the address and parity bit are latched
in the parity error address register, and either a reset or
interrupt signal (jumper selectable) is returned to the
processor. The CPU reads the contents of the parity er·
ror address register by using standard 1/0 instructions.
The parity feature services not only the in·5160, but all
17·bit memories in the same system. On boards with the
ECC option, the parity logic still functions for other
17·bit memories in the system and reports multiple bit
errors detected by the ECC logic to the CPU as parity
errors.

Memory Management and Protection
Unit (MMPU)
Memory expansion - The MMPU provides the capabll·
ity to use a memory of up to 128K words and supplies
the hardware necessary to make use of the NOVA 3 soft·
ware protection . features. The expansion of memory
capacity is accomplished by replacing the five highest
order address bits (the logical address) with seven bits
from a location In the translation memory (the physical
address). Each logical address is 'mapped' (or .trans·
lated) to one, and only one, physical address, which may
be anywhere within the 128K physical address field. The
contents of the translation memory (the map) may be set
up using ordinary 1/0 instructions.
Memory protection - The memory protection function
of the MMPU provides detection capability for five types
of software violations:

Error Correction and Error Logger
The in·5160 error correction circuitry (ECC) provides on·
board capability to correct any single bit error and
detect any double bit error in the read data. Many errors
of more than 2 bits will also be detected. ECC greatly
Increases memory reliability and minimizes non·
recoverable system failures. The multiple bit errors are
flagged to the processor as parity errors. All errors are
logged as they occur and are simultaneously displayed
on the in·5160's control panel. The error correction func·
tion can be disabled by a switch on the control panel;
however, the error logger will continue to monitor and
store error information. The chip location of single bit
errors and row location of double bit and multiple bit
errors are stored in the error logger memory and
displayed on LEOs on the control panel as they occur.
The error logger .controls and indicators are shown in
Figure 2.

ERR BIT - THESE INDICATORS SHOW FAULTY DATA BIT (BINARY CODED),
16,8,4,2,1
EXAMPLE: INDICATORS 1 AND 4 ON, INDICATES BIT 5 IN ERROR.

SK (SEEK) - PUSHBunON SWITCH. WHEN PUSHED AND HELD, PERFORMS LED
TEST. WHEN RELEASED, EnROR LOGGING MEMORY IS SEARCHED

FOR ERROR INFORMATION.
eLR (CLEAR) - PUSHBUTTON SWITCH. CLEARS ERROR LOGGING MEMORY.

• Write protect tected 1K page

prevents writing into a write pro·
INH (INHIBIl) - TOGGLE SWITCH. IN ON POSITION INHIBITS ERROR CORRECTION
FUNCTION. DOES NOT INHIBIT ERROR LOGGER.

• Validity - prevents accessing, in any manner, a page
declared invalid
• Defer • 1/0 -

protects against runaway defer cycles

Loa - THIS INDICATOR COMES ON TO INDICATE ERROR LOGGING IN
PROGRESS.

enables 1/0 violation detection in the CPU

• Auto Index -

ROW - THESE INDICATORS SHOW ROW LOCATION OF FAULTY RAM
4,2,1,'12
(BINARY CODED).

ERR -INDICATES ERROR IS DETECTED; SINGLE BIT OR DOUBLE BIT/MULTIPLE BIT

Prevents auto·indexing operations.

When a violation is detected, the MMPU initiates a map
interrupt routine in the processor.

21·21

Figure 2. Error Logger Control Panel and Indicators

in·5160
the 128K in-5160 dissipates 170 Btu/hr; in battery
backup (standby) mode, it dissipates 55 Btu/hr. This
results in a cooler running system,an increased margin
for power supply operation, and improved system reliability. Every card is fully tested ,in a temperature
cycling environment for eight hours and in a NOVA 3
computer to test all options with the NOVA software.
Because of the 100% burn-in performed on each card,
the user is assured of receiving Intel's proven quality
and reliability. In addition, all Data General compatible
products manufactured by Intel are covered by a on year
warranty.

INSTALLATION
The installation of the in-5160 on a NOVA 3 system is
covered in detail by the technical manual which accompanies the product. The main pOints of consideration
during installation are address selection and parity
error actiori(RESET or interrupt). The location of these
switches arid jumpers are illustrated in the manual for
easy location.

RELIABILITY
The in-5160 is designed for low power dissipation. When
operating with all options, and at full speed in a NOVA 3,

Memory Data Input/Output - 16 bidirectional lines
1/0 Data InputlOutput - 16 bidirectional lines
Control Inputs - 36 lines
Control Outputs - 14 lines

SPECIFICATIONS
Storage Capacity
32K, 64K, 96K, or 128K words

Word Length

Physical Characteristics

Standard - 16 data bits and one parity bit
With ECC - 16 data bits and six ECC check bits

Width - 15 in, (38.1 cm)
Length - 15 in. (38.1 cm)
Height - 0.4 in. (1.02 cm)
Weight - Less than 3 Ib (1.36 kg)

Cycle Time
Read or Write Cycle - 500 ns
RMW"- 1100 ns

Electrical Characteristics

Access Time

DC Power Pequirements (128K, all options)
Voltage

300 ns (access and cycle times are extended 100 ns if
error correction takes place)

Processor - Read, read-hold, write, read-modify-write
Data Channel - Read-hold, write
MMPU - Translation enabled/disabled
Parity - Disabled/generate even parity, generate odd
parity

Interface - NOVA-3 backplane compatible, one card
slot required
Note: If Ihe in"5160 is equipped wllh MMPU opllon, backplane sial 2 Is
required.
.

Address Input DS 0-5: 6 lines

MADR 1-15: 15 Lines; ALU 0-6: 7 lines;

Address Input/Output -'MADR 1-15
(Generated in MMPU) X MADR 0-2

Current
Battery Backup

6.8A
890mA
5mA

+5V
+15V
5V

Operating Modes for Memory

Interface Characteristics

Active

(±S%)

2.2A
350mA

Environmental Characteristics
Temperature -'- O·C to 50·C operating ambient; -40·C
to 120·C non-operating ambient
Relative Humidity Altitude operating

Up to 90% with no condensation

10,000 ft max operating; 50,000ft max non-

Reference Manuals
TM-5160-000 - in-5160 Technical· Manual, Number
111768 (SUPPLIED)
Reference manuals are shipped with each product only
if designated SUPPLIED (see above). Manuals may be
ordered from any Intel sales representative.

21-22

in·5160
ORDERING INFORMATION
Model
CM-5160A-032
CM-5160A-064
CM-5160A-096
CM-5160A-128
CM-5160B-032
CM-5160B-064
CM-5160B-096
CM-5160B-128
CM-5160C-032
CM-5160C-064
CM-5160C-096
CM-5160C-128
CM-5160D-032
CM-5160D-064
CM-5160D-096
CM-5160D-128

Capacity Description
32Kx 17·bit
64K x 17·bit
96Kx 17·bit
128K x 17·bit
32Kx 22·bit
64Kx 22·bit
96Kx 22·bit
128K x 22·bit
32Kx 17·bit
64K x 17·bit
96K x 17·bit
128K x 17-bit
32Kx 22·bit
64Kx 22·bit
96Kx 22·bit
128K x 22·bit

32K memory with parity
64K memory with parity
96K memory with parity
128K memory with parity
32K memory with ECC·
64K memory with ECC
96K memory with ECC
128K memory with ECC
32K memory with parity and MMPU
64K memory with parity and MMPU
96K memory with parity and MMPU
128K memory with parity and MMPU
32K memory with ECC and MMPU
64K memory with ECC and MMPU
96K memory with ECC and MMPU
128K memory with ECC and MMPU

21·23

MU-S7S0
VAX*-11/7S0 ADD-IN MEMORY CARD
• 512KB or 1024KB Capacity (Equivalent
to 2 or 4 DEC M8210 Memory Modules)

• Replaces DEC* MS 780-DB or
MS 780-DC

• Spare Memory Devices On-Board

• Complete Hardware and Software
Compatibility

The Intel® MU-5780 is a 512KB or 1024KB plug-in memory card designed for use in any DEC VAX-11/780 computer. Organized as 64K or 128K words of 72 bits each, the MU-5780 operates at speeds controlled by the VAX11/780 memory controller. Typical READ cycle and access times are 530 ns and 250 ns, respectively.
The MU-5780 may be used to expand the MS 780-C or MS 780-CC basic VAX-11/780 memories up to 4096K
Bytes (four megabytes). The MU-5780 is available only as double or quadruple the capacity of the DEC M8210
memory module. Because VAX-11/780 memorybackplane slots are prewired as 256K Bytes each, the 512KB
MU-5780 must be installed in every other backplane slot and the 1024KB MU-5780 must be installed in every
fourth slot.
Two pre-tested memory devices are plugged into sockets on the MU-5780 to provide on-board spares. These
devices may be used to replace any failing memory devices in the field.
'VAX, DEC are registered trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation.

0000000000000000 ~DooD~ DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
0000000000000000 ~ ~ DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD ~DD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD ~OO~ DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
0000000000000000 ~DD~ 0000000000000000
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD ~ 00~ DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD ~DD~ DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
0000000000000000 ~OO~ 0000000000000000
DDDDDDDDDODDDDDD~~~~~DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD

o0 0 0 0 ODD DO 000000 0 0 0 0 DOD DO
The following are trademarks of Intel Corporation and may be used only to identify Intel products: i, Intel, INTEL, INTELLEC. MeS, im, ies, ICE, UP1, BXP, iSBC, iS8X, INSITE, iRMX,
CREDIT, RMXJ80, p,Scope, Multibus, PROMPT, Promware, Megachassis, Library Manager, MAIN MULTI MODULE, and the combination of MeS, ICE, ssc, RMX or ieS and a numerical
suffix; e.g., isee-eO.

Intel Corporation 1980

21-24

AFN-01734A

Insite™ User's Program
Library

intel°
INSITE™
USER'S PROGRAM LIBRARY
• Hundreds of Programs

• Programs for 8008,8048,8080,8085,
8088 and 8086 Processors

• For Each Accepted Program Submittal,
Insite™ Library Will Provide Either a
One-Year Free Membership, Five Free
Paper Tapes, or Three Programs on
Diskette

• Updates of New Programs Sent
Bi-Monthly
• Diskettes, Paper Tapes, and Listings
Available for Library Programs

Insite Intel's Software Index and Technology Exchange, is a collection of programs, subroutines, procedures, and macros written by users of Intel's microcomputers, single-board computers, and Intellec
development systems. Thanks to customer contributions to Insite, Intel is able to make these programs
available to all users of Intel microcomputers. By taking advantage of the availability of these general- purpose routines, the microcomputer design engineer and programmer can save many hours of programming and debugging time. The library of programs also serves as a good learning tool for those
unfamiliar with Intel assembly language or the high-level languages for Intel's family of microcomputers.

LIBRARY PROGRAMS AVAILABLE ON PAPER TAPE AND SINGLE OR DOUBLE DENSITY DISKETTE
The following are trademarks of Intel Corporation and may be used only to identify Intel products: exp, CREDIT, Intellec, Multlbus, i, ISeC, Multimodule, ICE, iSeX, PROMPT,
iCS, Library Manager, Promware,lnsite, MeS, RMX, Intel, Megachassis, UPI, Intelevision. Micromap, JoIScope and the combination of ICE, iCS, ISeC, ISeX, MeS, or RMX and a

~U~f~:~~~~~~~i'on 1980

22·1

9800033G

inter

INSITE™ USER'S PROGRAM LIBRARY

MEMBERSHIP

INSITE™ PROGRAM LIBRARY CATALOG

Membership in Insite is available on an annual
basis. Intel customers may become members
through an accepted program contribution or
membership fee. New members should use the
membership form on the back of this data sheet.

Each member will be sent the Program Library
Catalog consisting of an abstract for each program
indicating the function of the routine, required
hardware and software, and memory
requirements.

PROGRAM LIBRARY SERVicE
PAPER TAPES, DISKETTES OR SOURCE
LISTINGS are available for every program in Insite.
Diskettes are available on single or double
density. Membership is not required to purchase
or submit programs.

PROGRAM SUBMITTAL
Programs submitted for our revi~w must follow the
guidelines listed below:
1. Programs must be written in a standard Intel
Assembly Language or PLiM 80. These
languages are documented in the following
manuals:
a. 8008iMCS~8 Assembly Programming'
Manual #98-0198
b. 8080/8085, Assembly, Language
Programming Manual #9800301C

c. 8080/8085 Floating-Point Arithmetic Library
User's Manual #98004528

d. PL/M-80 Programming Manual '#~8-2688

e. MCS-48 and UPI-41 Assembly Language
Manual #9800255C

FORTRAN-80 Programming
#9800481 A

Manual

,g. ,8086 Assembly Language Reference
Manuai#9800640A" '"
h. PLlM-86 Programming Manual #9800466A
2. A source listing of the program must be
included. This must be the output listing of a
compile or assembly. All accepted programs
must be capable of compilation or assembly
by Intel standard compilers or assemblers. No
consideration will be given to partial programs
or duplication of existing programs.
3. A test program which assures the validity of
the contributed program must be included.
This must show the correct operation of the
program.
4. A source paper tape or diskette of the
contributed program is required. This will be
used for the reproduction of tapes for other
members.

User's Library members will be updated quarterly
with abstracts of new programs submitted to Insite
during the subscription period. For catalog and
yearly subscription fee please refer to the Intel
OEM Price List or contact the nearest Intel Sales
Office.

Complete the Submittal Form as follows: (please
type or print)
1. Processor (check appropriate box).
2. Program Title: Name and brief description of
program function.
3. Function: Detailed description .of operations
performed by the program. Attach, additional
pages if necessary.
4. Required Hardware:
For example: TTY or Ports 0 and 1
Interrupt Circuitry
1/0 Interface
Machine line and configuration
for cross prod ucts
5. Required Software:
For example: TTY Drive
Floating Point Package
Support s.oftware required for
cross .prod ucts

6. Input Parameters: Description of register
values, memory areas or values accepted from
input ports.
7. Output Results: Values to be expected in
registers, memory areas or on output ports.
8. Program Details: (for resident products only)
a. Register modified
b. RAM required (bytes)
c. ROM required (bytes)
d. Maximum subroutine nesting level
9 Assembler/Compiler Used:
For example: PLiM 80
Intellec Macro Assembler
FORTRAN 80
10. Programmer, Company and Address.
AFN-Ol'40"

insiteM'INTEL® USER'S LIBRARY SUBMITTAL FORM
o 8008

0 8048

0 8080/8085

0 8086/8088

0 Other

(Use additional sheets If necessary)

Program
Title
Function

Required
Hardware

Required
Software

Input
Parameters

Output
Results

Registers Modified:

Programmer:

RAM Required:

Company:

ROM Required:

Address:

Maximum Subroutine Nesting Level:

City:
State:

Assembler/Compiler Used:

Phone:

22·3

9800034·F
AFN·OI446B

insi~'USER'S LIBRARY MEMBERSHIP FORM
I am interested in becoming a member of InsiteTM
Enclosed is

D Check D Money Order

D Program Submittal

NAME:
COMPANY: ______________________________________________
SHIPTO:

SEND TO NEAREST LOCATION:
North America

Europe

Orient

Intel Corporation
User's Library 6·5000
Microcomputer Systems
3065 Bowers Avenue
Santa Clara, California
95051
Ph. 408·987·8080

Intel International Corp. S.A.
User's Library
Rue du Moulin a Papier 51
Boite 1
B·1160 Brussels, Belgium
Ph. 02·660·3010

Intel Japan K. K.
User's Library
Flowerhill·Shinmachi, East Bldg.
1·23·9 Shinmachi, Setagaya·ku
Tokyo 154, Japan
Ph. 813·426·9261 (PME & FSE)
813·426·9267 (CS & Fin.)

Please refer to Intel OEM Price List for membership fee.

22·4

Microcomputer
Workshops

Intel Mlcrocomputeli'
Workshops
Why Intel Training?
EXPERIENCE
Intel has been training
engineers in the application of
microprocessors and the
development of microcomputer systems since the early
70's, and there are now many
thousands of engineers creating the most advanced
microcomputer systems as a
direct result of successful
training with us.

Training in

Microcomputers
Whether your present involvement with microcomputers is a
result of long-term planning or
simply an exploratory project
undertaken by your company
in response to external
circumstances, there exists an
obvious and urgent need for
you to familiarize yourself with
this exciting new technology
as quickly and painlessly as
possible. If the microcomputer
is, or is destined to become, a
part of your working scene
(and there is no field of manufacturing or data processing it
will not touch sooner or later)
then the importance of
carefully planned training
cannot be over-emphasized. A
modest outlay in time and
money now can save many
weeks of self-study and could
well prevent some very
expensive mistakes during the
initial development of your
systems.

VARIETY OF COURSES
Intel Microcomputer Workshops offer training at three
levels - introductory, intermediate and advanced. Your
particular training requirement may involve just one or
several courses, so we have
taken care to ensure that each
Workshop is a high quality
training module that can
either stand independently or
integrate with other modules
to form a complete coverage
of our subject. The Workshops
are constantly being updated
to include the latest developmentsin devices and support
software, and course materials
are similarly reviewed on a
regular basis - both for clarity
ondcontent.

PRODUCT KNOWLEDGE
As the designers and
manufacturers of the most
widely accepted microcomputer products in the world,
our lmowledge is both
comprehensive and topical.
Remember the saying about
'the horse's mouth'!
EXTENSIVE MATERIAL
Teaching aids include slide
and video tape equipment.
student notebooks and a wide
range of printed materials
which are designed to provide
post-training assimilation and
act as practical reference
manuals in your own
laboratory.
"HANDS-ON" EXPERIENCE
We believe that stUdents learn
better by doing than by
listening, so a sizeable
proportion of course time is
devoted to dynamic training
via the Intellec MDS development system, appropriate
single board computers, InCircuit Emulators (ICE), I/O
units for programming exercises, and computer kits for
design and debugging sessions. Each student therefore
receives valuable 'hands-on'
experience of the principles
and techniques featured in the
lecture sessions.

'Where is Intel Training?
TRAINING CENTERS
Workshops are scheduled
nearly every week of the year
in our three regional training
centers:

23-1

AFN'01608A

WhIch Workshops Should

You Attend?
BOSTON AREA
Intel Customer Training
27 Industrial Ave.
Chelmsford, MA 0 1824
(617) 256-1374
CHICAGO AREA
Intel Customer Training
Gould Center, East Tower
2550 Golf Rd" Suite 815
Rolling Meadows, IL 60008
(312) 981-7250
SAN FRANCISCO AREA
Intel Customer Training
1350 Bordeaux Dr" SV3-1
Sunnyvale, CA 94086
( 408) 734-8102
ADDITIONAL LOCATIONS
Courses have been scheduled
in 35 additional locations
across the U.S" Canada, and
Mexico. These cities include
Los Angeles, Washington,
Dallas, Minneapolis, New York,
Atlanta, and Ottawa. Intel
Workshops are also available
in major European cities and
Japan. (See local workshop
brochure)
CUSTOMER-SITE WORKSHOPS
All workshops detailed in the
following pages can, by
special arrangement be
presented with full laboratory
equipment by Intel instructors
at your facility. Considering the
transportation and lodging
savings, the breakeven point is
typically 5-7 attendees. For
further information about onsite training, please contact
your nearest regional training
center.
EVENING WORKSHOPS
If you cannot find time to
attend our day-time workshops, check the schedule for
our evening workshops.

AFN:01608A

Which Workshops Should
You Attend?

Recommended Sequence of Workshops

As a DESIGN ENGINEER or
SYSTEM ENGINEER with a
good understanding of digital
electronics, you might start
with the MCS-48/49, MCS-51.
MCS-80/85, or iSBC Workshops.
If you lack the digital
electronics background, start
with the Introduction to Microcomputers Workshop. Unless
you have working experience
with microprocessor-based
design and assembly language programming, you
should attend the MCS-80/85
Workshop prior to attending
the iAPX86,88 Workshops.
As a PROGRAMMER. you may
be ready to start with the iSBC,
PASCAL, or PL/M Workshops:
however, if you intend to use
assembly language the MCS48/49, MCS-51. MCS-80/85, or
iAPX86,88 Workshops should
be attended first. We suggest
that you also consider the
Introduction to Microcomputers Workshop to gain basic
knowledge of digital electronics and machine language,
since these topics are usually
much more important to the
microcomputer programmer
than to the minicomputer or
large computer programmer.
As a MANAGER. ADMINISTRATOR. or PROJECT MANAGER
wishing an overview of this
new field, the Microcomputer
Concepts for Managers Workshop would be suitable: or if
you want more details, the
Introduction to Microcomputers Workshop is recommended.
If you have sufficient working
experience with microcom- -

23·2

puter hardware and software
you might attend any of the
Intel Workshops without first
attending a prerequisite
workshop: however, since
microcomputers are new to
many people, we recommend
the sequence indicated in the
chart for those who want to
advance their microcomputer
education.

Announcing ....
New MCS-5PM
Microcontroller
Workshop
This new 4-day workshop will
give a boost to your first 8051
based project or allow you to
evaluate the 8051 , The
workshop covers the architectture, instruction set. and
software development package of this new single chip
microcontrolier, (See
page 18)

New Data Communication
Chips DeSign Workshop
This new workshop focuses on
bit-serial synchronous communication modes and devices,
and provides both an
overview and hands-on lab for
data communications, (See
page 19)

NewIEEE-488 GPIB
Workshop
This course introduces the
concepts and specifications of
the IEEE-488 General Purpose
Interface Bus by deSign and
implementation with the Intel
IEEE-488 chip set. (See
page 19)

New ICE-85 ™ User's
Workshop
This 3-day workshop provides
intensive and comprehensive
training on the ICE-85 InCircuit Emulator hardware/
software debug tool through
lecture and hands-on laboratory, (See page 21 )

New Training Center
FaCilities and Labs
Responding to your request.
we have significantly increased the number of Inteliec
Microcomputer Development
Systems and other lab

23-3

equipment in our training
centers, We had to move to
new facilities to accomplish
this, but our goal is to deliver
the best training you can get
your hands-on,

New Workshop Vans for
More Hands-On at Your Site
We have outfitted three vans
with new Inteliec Microcomputer Development Systems
and ICE In-Circuit Emulators,
so we can easily bring our
extensive workshop lab equipment to your facility,

New Video Tape Library
ICE CONCEPTS
Intended for users of an InCircuit EmUlator, this 22-minute
color video tape demonstrates
the unique capabilities of ICE
debug tooL including the
debugging of an actual traffic
control application,
INTELLEC® MICROCOMPUTER
DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM
OPERATION
Intended for users of an
Inteliec 220, 225, 230, 235, 240,
or 245 system. This 20-minute
color video tape shows how to
power-on the system, handle
the floppy disk, edit a file with
the CRT editor CREDIT, and
use simple ISIS-II commands
like COPY, DELETE, and
DIRECTORY
Both are available in 3/4" and
1/2" video tape cassette
formats at $250,00 per copy,
Order from the San Francisco
Area Training Center,
(408) 734-8102,

AFN:01608A

Microcomputer Concepts
for Managers Workshop

Course Description
• Microcomputer terminology.
buzzwords. and fUndamental programming concepts
explained
• Hardware/software development process outlined
• Microcomputer appl1calions
reviewed
• Lab sessions on SDK-85 and
in programming in BASIC on
the Intellec Series II MIcrocomputer Development
System

Attendees
• Project leader. manager. or
administrative person who
needs overview of microprocessor and microcomputer concepts

Length: 2 Days
Tuition: $395
$325 (Group rate)

Introductory

23-4

Course OUtUne
DAY 1
Terminology
Microcomputer System
Organization
MemolY
Computer Selection
Lab: Using SDK-85

DAY 2
Introduction to Software
Development System Overview
Single Board Computer
OverView
Rel1ablllty, Testing, Timing
Project Chronology
Appl1catton Topics
Lab: Programming In BASIC

IntroducHonto
Mlcrocomputen Workshop
Course Description
• Fundamental computer
concepts and terminology
introduced
• Operation oj the Intel 8085
microprocessor explained
• 8085 assembly language
programming
• Stacks, subroutines, interrupts and I/O interlacing
introduced
• Lab sessions on SDK-85
System Design K1t
• An SDK-85 K1t (valued at
$300) is yours to keep

Attendees

Course OuWne
DAY I
Introduction to MicroelectrOnics
Computer Concepts
Computer Languages
Using the SDK-85
Lab: Kit Operation and
Programming
Moving Data

DAY 2
Delay Loops
Lab: Audio Oscillator using
Digital Techniques
Subroutines
Stq:ck Operation
Lab: Using Subroutines

DAY 3

LOgic Instructions
Engineers, scientists, or other
Lab: Handshaking Techniques
technical people with limited
Addition
computer or digital electronics Lab: Multi·Function Programs
background
Microprocessor Operation
Included in the price of the course is an SDK·85
kit which includes:
3 MHz 8085 CPU (enhanced 8080)
Keyboard - 24 keys
Display - 6 digits
Monitor ROM 2048 bytes
RAM Memory 256 bytes
38 I/O lines
Teletype interface
Complete documentation

Length: 4 Days
Tuition: $895 (includes
SDK-85K1t)
$750 (Group rate)

Introductory
23·5

DAY 4
Interrupts
Memory Operation and Address
Decoding
Programmable Peripheral Chips
Lab: Chip Programming Excercises
Introduction to the Development
System, ICE, Assembler, and
Higher Level Languages
Course Summary and Review

MCS®-80/85 System
Design Workshop
Course Description
• 8085 arChitecture explained
. indetail
• Assembly language programming for 8080/8085
• Design and development of
' I t 18080
systems usmg n e
.
•8085 chips
• Interfacing and programming techniques
• Lab sessions "hanciS~on"
using the Intellec Series Ii'
,
. IDlcrocomputer development
system
.
•. ICE-85 In-Circuit Emulator
used to debug programs

Attendees
• Design engineer or programmer who is familiar
. with binary numbers and
l~gic functions
• Prior attendance at Introduction to Microcomputers
Workshop or equivalent
knowledge is recommended

Length: 5 Days
Tuition: $895
$725 (Group rate)

Course- Outline
DAY 1
Introduction to Microprocessors
Assembly Language InstructiOns
Programmed Input and Output
Microcomputer Development
System Monitor
Lab: Using System Monitor

DAY 2
Microcomputer Development
System Disk Operating System
CREDIT Text Editor and Macro
Assembler
The Processors
Lab: Using Text Editor and
Assembler

D=-A=Y==3===------Stacks and Subroutines
Interrupts
Input and Output Techniques
Programming Techniques
Lab: In-Circuit Emulator Introduction

DAY 4
In-Circuit Emulator
8155, 8355,8185 Peripherals
Memory Interfacing
Lab: USing 8085 In-Circuit
Emulator
.

DAYS
8255 and 8251A Peripherals
Tools for Modular Program
Development
Chips vs, Boards
Preview 018088

8080/8085
23-6

AFN:01608A

ISBC ™ Single Board
Computer Workshop
Course Description

Course OUtline

• Covers state of the art
microprocessors and single
board computer systems
• Explains operation and programming of selected SBC
products including: iSBC80/30,
iSBC80/24, iSBC86/ l2A
• Describes design, configuration and implementation of
single board computer
systems for industrial applications
• Intel Development System
used in laboratory sessions
• Laboratory sessions also
implement a variety of iSBC
system configurations.
• ICE In-Circuit Emulator used
to aid system debugging
• Includes field service, fault
location, and maintenance
topics

DAY]
Survey of Intel Single Board
Computers, Languages,
and Operating Systems
Overview of the Intel
ISBC 80/30 Processor Board
and Associated Peripheral
Interface Chips
The 80S5A Microprocessor
Fundamentals and Assembly Language Programming Techniques
Designing with the Intel 8255
Programmable Peripheral
Interface Chip
Lab: iSBC Monitor and
Parallel I/O Capability of
iSBC 80/30 Processor Board
DAY 2
Intellec Development System
Credit.- CRT Based Text
Editor
ASM 80 Assembler/PLM-80
Programming
Tools for Modular Programming - (link, locate,
include and submit)
ICE-85, In-Circuit Emulator
Lab: Development of Programs for iSBC Processor
Boards via Development
System
DAY 3
DeSign and implementation
of a Serial CommunicationSystem
iSBC 544 Intelligent Communication Controller
iSBC 80/24 Single Board
Computer and Multimodule Expansion Boards
Multibus Specifications and
Architecture
Lab: Development Programs
to operate on iSBC
Processor Boards, Multimodule I/O Expansion
and Memory Boards
DAY 4
iSBC 86/ 12A Single Board
Computer
iSBC Memory Boards, RAM,
PROM, EPROM, and Bubble
Memory Boards

Attendees
• System engineer or programmer who will be using
iSBC Products
• Some programming experience is required, preferably
8085 assembly language;
PL/M workshop is helpful,
but not required

Length: 5 Days
Tuition: S895
S725 (Group rate)

AFN O]608A

23·7

iSBC Parallel I/O Expansion
Boards, iSBC 519, iSBC 569
iSBC Analog I/O Boards, iSBC
711,724, and 732
iCS Industrial Control System
and Signal Conditioning/
Terminator Panels
Lab: iSBC 544 CommunicationLab
DAYS
FSP and Model 810 Software Development
Modules
RMX/80 Real-Time
Multitasking Executive
Service and Maintenance of
iSBC, iCS Systems
Future iSBC Products
Lab: iSBC 544, iSBC 80/30
Multitasking Lab

8080/8085,Perlpheral~ps

PL/M-SO Language/
~ftwale Design Workshop
Course Description

Course OuWne

DAYl
• Learn PL/M programming
PL!M Overview
for 8080 and 8085 microDeclaration Statements
processors
Sequential Statements
• Design, implement, and
Conditional Statements
debug PL/M-80 modular
Loop Statements
software
Program Preparation
• LINK multi-modules using
Lab: Microcomputer Development
libraries
.
Systems Introduction
• Develop software for disk
DAY
2
file handling
.Intellec Series II Development
• "Hands-on"Jaboratory sesSystem
sions using the Intellec Series ISIS-II Commands
II microcomputer develSystem MOnitor
opment system
CREDIT Editor
Lab: Implement Program for
• In-Circuit Emulator used for
Oven Control
system debugging

Attendees
• Design engineer orpro-·
grammer
• Prior programming experience will assist in obtaining
maximum benefit from the
course
• Introduction to Microcomputers or MCS-80/85 System
Workshops recommended

Length: 5 Days
Tuition: $895
$725 (Group rate)

DAY 3
Procedures
Compiler Controls
Linking Modules
Locating
Submit Command
Lab: Design and Implement OnLine Editor

DAY 4
In-Circuit Emulation
Libraries
Lab: Use ICE-85 Module on SDK85 Kit

DAYS
System Calls
Interrupts
Reentrancy
Lab: Design and Implement
File Handling Program

SOSO/SOS5
23-8

AFN:01608A

RMX/80™ Operating
System Workshop
Course Description
• Operation and implementation of Intel RMX/80 RealTime Multi, Tasking Executive
• Basic concepts of multitasking are explained
• Concurrency of tasks, asynchronous events, priorities,
scheduling, resource sharing, interrupts, and inter-task
communication discussed
• Lab sessions on task writing
and system generation using
iSBC Processor Boards
• In-Circuit Emulator used to
aid system debugging

Course Outline
DAYl
Introduction to Multi-Tasking
What is RMX/80?
Review 01 Development Process
Lab: RMX/80 Operation

DAY 2
RMX/80 Model
Implementing RMX/80 Tasks
Configuring a System
Lab: Writing Tasks and
Configuring System

DAY 3
RMX/80 Extensions: Terminal
Handler
Task Priorities
Lab: Implementing a Terminal
Handler Task

Attendees

DAY 4

• System engineer or programmer who will be using
RMX/80 in iSBC system
application
• PL/M-80 Language/Software
Design Workshop or equivalent knowledge is required
( ego based variables, structures, and declare literally)
• Familiarity with Intellec
Microprocessor Development System is required

RMX/80 Extensions:
The Debugger and
The Free Space Manager
Lab: Implementing RMX Extensions

DAYS
RMX/80 Extensions:
The Disk System
Lab: Implementing RMX Extensions

Length: 5 Days
Tuition: S895
S725 (Group rate)

8080/808-5
AFN:01608A

23-9

IAPX 86,88 System
Design Workshop
Course Description

Attendees

• Design systems lor 8086/8088
• Develop programs using
8086 assembly langUage
• Lectures cover CPU,
addressing modes, Interrupt
system, timing, I/O
• Laboratory "hands-on" uses
Intellec Series II Microcomputer Development System
and SDK-86 Kit
• ICE-86 In-Circuit Emulator
introduced as soltware
debug tool

• Workshop lor design .
engineer or programmer
who will use or evaluate
8086, 8088, or iSBC 86/ 12A
• Prior experience with microcomputers and a working
knowledge 01 assembly
language is required, and
the MCS-85 workshop is
recommended

Length: 5 Days
Tuition: $895
$725 (Group rate)

Course OuWne
DAYl
Introduction to Assembly
Language Instructlon
8086/8088 CPU's
I/O Operations
System Design Kit (SDK-86)
. Lab: Using the SDK-86 and the
Serial Monitor
DAY 2
Development System
Addressing Modes
Programming Exercises
Lab: Using the 8086 Assembler
and the Development System
DAY 3
Procedures
String Operators
Interrupt System
Lab: Programrn1ngwith Procedures and the String Operators
DAY 4
Programming for Large Systems
CPU Timing
8086/8088 Support Chips
Lab: Programming with Multlple
Segments
DAY 5
Programrn1ng with Multlple
Modules
Introduction to ICE-86
Introductlon to Multlprocessing
and the Multlbus

8086/8088
23-10

AFN:Q1608A

ICE-86/88™ and

IAPX 86/21 Worksh@~
Course Description

Course OUtline

• Detailed discussions on
assembler directives,
segmentation, library
• The design and programming 01 large systems
• 8089 I/O Controller
explained .
• "Hands-on" lab sessions use
Intellec Series II Development System and iSBC
86/ l2A Single Board
Computers
• ICE-86 In-Circuit Emulator
used to debug programs

DAY 1

Attendees
• Programmer or system
designer who needs
complete understanding 01
8086 assembly language
programming and ICE-86
debugging techniques
• Knowledge 01 tntellec
Development System
assumed
• Prior attendance at MCS86/88 Workshop required

Length: 5 Days
Tuition: $895
$725 (Group rate)

ArN U1608/\

Review of the 8086/8088
Advanced Programming Topics
Linkage
.
The Software Development
Process
Lab: PL/M-86 Linkage

DAY 2
Execution Vehicle
Considerations
15BC 86/1 2A Board
8259A Peripheral Chip
Programming
Introduction 10 ICE-86 Emulator
Module
.
Lab: Interrupt Handling

DAY 3
Advanced ICE·86 Module
Features
Interrupt Structures
Multiprocessor Topics
Lab: ICE-86 Introduction

DAY 4
.. 8086 Component Family Review
. Multibus Arbitration Logic
Inlroductionlo Input/Output
Processors
Lab: ICE-86

DAYS
Advanced 8089 Topics
Application Topics

23·11

8086/8088

PL/Y-86 Language/Software
Design Workshop
Course Description
• Learn PL/M programming
jor 8086 microprocessor
• Design, implement. and
debug PL/M-86 modular
software
• LINK multi-modules using
libraries
• "Hands-on" laboratory sessions using Intellec Series II
Microcomputer Development System and SDK-86
Design Kit
• ICE-86 In-Circuit Emulator is
introduced as software debugging tool

Attendees
• Design engineer or programmer who is ready to
use high level language
with Intel 8086 or iSBC
86/12A
• MCS-86/88 workshop
recommended as prerequisite jor understanding the
underlying structure oj 8086
microprocessor
Length: 5 Days

Tuition: $895
$725 (Group rate)

Course OUtline
DAYl
Introduction
Declaration Statements
Data Elements
Data Types
Operators, Operations, and
Priorities
Execution Statements
Lab: Microcomputer Development System and SDK-86

DAY 2
Procedures
ISIS-II Disk Operating System
CREDIT Editor
PL/M-86 Compiler Options
Lab: Impiement Console I/O
Routines

DAY 3
Data References
Blocks
Link and Locate Programs
Built-In Facilities
Lab: Design and Implement
Modular Line Editor

DAY 4
Using Libraries
Character String Handling
Interrupt Procedures
Reentrant Procedures
Lab: Design and Implement
Command Line Interpreter

DAYS
ICE-86 Module
Discussion of Selected Programs

8086/8088
23-12

AFN:01608A

lRMX 86™ OperaHng
System Workshop
Course Description
• Introduction to iRMX 86
Real-Time Mulll-Tasking
Executive principles and
implementation
• Basic concepts of multitasking me explained
• Concurrency of tasks, asynchronous events, priorities,
scheduling, resource sharing, interrupts, andinter-task
communication discussed
• Lab sessions on task writing
and system generation using
iSBC Processor Boards
• In-Circuit Emulator used to
aid system debugging

Attendees
• System engineer or programmer who will be using
iRMX 86 on an iSBC 86/ l2A
Single Board Computer.
• PL/M 86 Language/Software
Design Workshop or equivalent knowledge is required
(eg. based variables, structures, and declare literally)
• Familiarity with Intellec
Series II Microcomputer
Development System is
required

Course Outline
DAYl
Real-Time Concepts
The iRMX 86 Model
OVerview of iRMX 86 Nucleus
The Software Development
Process
Lab: Write a single task for a
system

DAY 2
The IRMX 86 Nucleus
The Terminal Handler
Lab: Write multiple tasks for a
system which uses the
Terminal Handler

DAY 3
Interrupts
The Debugger
Lab: Write Interrupt task

DAY 4
The Configuration Process
Installing IRMX 86
Lab: Write configuration
modules

DAYS
OVerview of I/O System
Future iRMX 86 Features
Lab: Write task for tile I/O

Length: 5 Days
Tuition: $895
$725 (Group rate)

--------====-=============

8086/8088
AI'N,OI608A

23-13

PASCAL Programming
Workshop
Course Description
• Learn PASCAL programming on Intellec Development Systems
• Design, implement. and
debug PASCAL modular
software
II Learn Structured Programming Concepts
• "Hands-on" laboratory using
the Intellec Series II microcomputer development system and PASCAL-SO or
PASCAL-86 software

Attendees
• Design engineer, scientist. or
programmer
• No prior programming
experience necessary

Length: 5 DaYs
Tuition: $895
$725 (Group rate)

Course OUWne
DAY]
PASCAL Overview
Block Structuring
Lab: Microcomputer Develop'
ment System Introduction
Data Storage
PASCAL Standard Data Types
Program Construction in PASCAL
Assignment Statements

DAY 2
ISIS-II Disk Operating System
Credit Editor
PASCAL-80 Run Time System
Lab: DeSign and implement
PASCAL Program
Conditional Statements
Iteration·Loops
Procedures and Functions
Lab: PASCAL Program using
Procedures

DAY 3
Scalar Data Types
Structured.Data Types:
1. Sets
2. Arrays
3. Strings
4. Records
Lab: PASCAL Program using
Structured Data Types

DAY 4
Files
File Type
Built·in Procedures and
Functions to Manipulate
Files
Textfiles
Interactive Files
Untyped Files
Lab: PASCAL program using File
Data Structures

DAYS
Dynamic Data Structures
Advanced Programming Topics
Advanced Design Topics
Lab: PASCAL Program using
Dynamic Data Structures
PASCAL·86 Compiler

8080/8085,8086/8088
23-14

AFN:01608A

2920 Signal Processor
Workshop
Course Description
• Design systems using 2920
• Develop programs using
2920 assembly language
• Use Microcomputer Development Systems software
support tools for program
assembly and simulation
• Investigate applications for
2920 signal processor

Attendees
• Design engineer who is
familiar with analog filter
design. frequency domain
analysis and S-Plane representation
• Prior digital design or digital
filter experience recommended

Length: 4 Days
Tuition: 5795
$625 (Group rate)

Course OUtline
DAYl
Overview of 2920
Instruction Set
Binary Arithmetic
Simulator
Lab: Sawtooth Generator VCO

DAY 2
Constant Scaling
2920 Assembler
Constant Multiplication
Simulator Output
Lab: Low Pass Filter and Two Pole
Filter

DAY 3
Variable Multiplication
Variable Division
Signal Processing Application
Compiler
Lab: USing the Compiler

DAY 4
Review Sample Techniques
Noise
Aliasing
Application Discussion
Lab: Open

Single Chip
23-15

OO~CfJJ® c~/~/GJ® ~iem.
[Q)®ffiQ~ ~@f(~OP
Course Description
o Design and develop a
system using Intel MCS-48/49
single chip microcomputers
o Programming in 8048
assembly language
o Explanation of Intel 8048
architecture, system timing
and input/output design
o Lab sessions provide
"hands-on" experience
using PROMPT-48 and
Intellec Series II microcomputer development system to develop 8048
programs
o ICE-49 In-Circuit Emulator
used for system debugging
o Intel 802 L 8022, and 8041
chips are discussed

Attendees
o Design engineer or programmer who is familiar
with binary numbers and
digital logic
o Prior attendance at Introduction to Microcomputers
Workshop or equivalent
knowledge recommended

Length: 5 Days
Tuition: $895

Course Outline
DAYl
Microprocessor System
8048 Overview
Assembly Language Instructions
PROMPT-48 DeSign Aid
Lab: Software Development
USing PROMPT-48 Design Aid

DAY 2
Assembly Language Instructions
Subroutines
Development System
Text Editor and Macro
Assembler
Lab: Development System
Introduction

DAY 3
System Timing
Interrupts
Expanding I/O
Lab: Programming Using Timer
and Interrupts

DAY 4
Expanding Memory
Peripheral Interfacing Using

8279,8251,8255,8355,8155
In-Circuit Emulator
Lab: Debugging USing ICE-49
Module

DAY 5
8021, 8041A, 8022
Analog Interfacing

$725 (Group rate)

23-16

AFN OI608A

MCS®·51 Mlcrocontroller
Workshop
Course Description
• Program in 8051 Assembly
Language and discuss
system design with 8051
components
• Explanation of MCS-51
Architecture including:
- Boolean Processor
- I/O Port Structure
- Timers
- Serial Port
- Interrupts
- Memory Types and
Memory Spaces
• "Hands-on" Lab sessions
covering the MDS Development System. the ISIS
Operating System. the
CREDIT text editor. the MCS51 Assembler. and
execution vehicle.
• Review of some 8048
concepts.

Attendees
This course is designed for the
design engineer who wants to
become familiar with the 8051
family of components. Prior
knowledge of Intel components is not required. The
attendee should be familiar
with digital logic functions and
have some programming
experience. The Introduction
to Microcomputer Workshop is
recommended.

Course OuWne
DAYl
Introduction
Programming and Instruction
Set Representation
Internal Data Memory
Lab
Program Sequencing
Immediate Data
Lab: Tra1flc Light Control using
Delays

DAY 2
ISIS-II
CREDIT
MCS-51 Assembler
Lab: 7-segment display
Subroutines
Lab: Tral1lc Light Controller
Revisited using Subroutines

DAY 3
Port Structure
Register Addressing
Boolean Processor
Lab: Multiplexing 7-segment
display
Indirect Addressing
Lab: Using Table Look-up
Techniques

DAY 4
Interrupts
8051 Timers
Serial Port
Lab: Setting up and using the
Serial Port to communicate
with a CRT
Arithmetic Instructions
Accessing External Memory
Application Topics

Length: 4 Days
Tuition: $795
$625 (Group rate)

Single Chip
AFN:0 160BA

23-17

Data Communication
Chips Workshop
Course Description
• Reviews data communication fundamentals
• Describes Asynchronous and
Synchronous bit serial
communication protocols:
Bi-Synch, HDLC/SDLC, X,25
• ut1l1ze Intel chips in
laboratory:
8251 USART
8273 HDLC/SDLC Controller
• Explain new Intel chips for
data communication: 8256
and 8274
• Discusses RS232, Local
network and ether net

Attendees
• Intended for the design
engineer, service engineer,
or programmer who needs
to understand how serial
data communication is used
in a distributed system,
• The Introduction to Microcomputer Workshop or
equivalent knowledge is
required,

IIIE-488 GPIB Chips
Workshop

Length: 4 Days
Tuition: $795
$625 (Group rate)

Course OUtline
DAYl
History 01 Data Comm,
Communication Hierarchy
Non-standards
Asynch
Lab: USing Intellec

DAY 2
Byte Synch, Comm,
BI-synch
RS232
Lab: Using SBC 544

DAY 3
Bit Synchronous
HDLC/SDLC

LOOp mode
X25 Protocol
Laboratory Demonstration

DAY 4
Local networks
Ether-net
Star Con1iguratlons
Application discussion

Course Description
• Describes the General
Purpose Interface Bus char• The Introduction to Microacteristics including protocol,
computer Workshop or
equivalent knowledge is
electrical, and mechanical
specifications
required, The Intellec
• Explains systems application
Development System Operexamples and implemenation Workshop is recomtation guidelines
mended,
• Includes programming and
Length: 4 Days
use of:
Tuition: $795
8291 GPIB Talker/Listener
$625 (Group rate)
8292 GPIB Controller
8293, 8296, 8297 Transceiver
Topics
and Interface
IEEE-488/GPIB OVerview
iSBC 80/24 and IEEE 488 Intel Chip Set OVerview
Multi-module
Hardware Considerations

Attendees

Peripheral Chips

• Design engineer or programmer who has prior
assembly language or PL/M
programming experience

23-18

Programming Examples
Bus Functions
Message Protocols
Interrupt and DMA Operation
Servicing Requests
ISBC Intedace Considerations

Intellec® Development
System Workshop
Course Description
• Comprehensive coverage of
ROM based system monitor.
ISIS-II Diskette Operating
System. and CREDIT text
editor
• Introduction to FORTRAN-80.
LINK/LOCATE. system monitor debugging techniques.
In-Circuit Emulation (ICE-85
used as an example ). and
Universal PROM Programmer
• System installation and
checkout

Attendees
• Programmer or design
engineer who will be using
Intellec Series II Development System to develop.
debug. and integrate hardware/software
• Managerwhowantsto
understand how this tool can
help get a project completed faster

Course OUtline
DAYl
Introduction
System Overview
System Installation
Introduction to ISIS-II
Using CREDIT Text Editor
DAY 2
Introduction to FORTRAN-80
Compiling a Program
Introduction to LINK/LOCATE
System Monitor
ICE-85
DAY 3
ICE-85 (Continued)
User Maintenance
Programming Aids
Universal PROM Programmer
Course Review

Length: 3 Days
Tuition: $595
$475 (Group rate)

Development System
ArN,OI608A

23-19

ICE-as™ Users Workshop
Course Description

Topics

• Comprehensive coverage 01
In-Circuit Emulation using
ICE-85
• Debugging 01 Assembly and
PL/M Programs
..
• Extensive Hands-on Laboratory practice with instructor's guidance.

ICE Concept
Installation
Use of ICE Manuals Documentation
Command Language
Memory Mapping
Emulation Control with BreakpOints
Trace Data Collection Modes
Data Display Formats
Debugging Strategies
Multi-ICE
Comparison of ICE-48, ICE-41,
and ICE-85

Attendees
• Programmer or design
engineer who will be using
an ICE Product (lCE-48, ICE:
4 L or ICE-85) and who
needs to develop expertise·
• Prior programming experience with 8085, and use 01 a
development system is
assumed. Introduction to
Microcomputer Workshop
or equivalent is required

Length: 3 Days
Tuition: 5595
5475 (Group rate)

Development System
23-20

AFN:01608A

Training Center
Information
SAN FRANCISCO AREA
1350 Bordeaux Drive, Sunnyvale, CA 94086 408-734-8102
INTEL

HOTELS n.ar training center:
€) Sundownsr
® Captains Cove Motel
Sunnyvale, CA
Sunnyvale, CA
408·734·9900
408·735·7800

@ Marriott Hotel

Inn
Sunnyvale, ·CA
408·245·5330
800·238·8000

Santa Clara, CA
40B·988·1500
800·228·9290

CHICAGO AREA
Gould Center, East Tower
2550 Golf Road, Suite 815, Rolling Meadows, IL 60008 312-981-7250

BOSTON AREA
27 Industrial Avenue, Chelmsford, MA 01824 617-256-1374

TO MILWAUKEE

ROLLING MEADOWS

®
EUCLID AVE.

O'HAREAIRPORT

HOTELS nelr training center:
® Arlington Park Hilton
Arlington Heights, IL
312·394·2000

® Howard ~ohnson's
Palatlne,IL
312·359·6900
800·654·2000

TaCHICAGO

HOTELS near training center:
Howard Johnson's
CD Town House Motor Inn
Chelmsford, MA
Lowell, MA
617·256·7511
617·455·5606
800·654·2000

®
® Holiday

Inn
Rolling Meadows, IL
312·259·5000
BOO·238·BooO

23·21

o Howard Johnson
Burlington, MA
617·272·6550
800·654·2000

Registration
To enroll in a scheduled workshop, call the appropriate Intel
Training Center between the
(5) San Francisco
(C) Chicago
(B) Boston

hours of 8-12 and 1-5, and ask
for Customer Training.

(408) 734-8102
(312) 981-7250
(617) 256-1374

( also for other West Coast locations)
( also for other Mid West locations)
( also for other East Coast locations)

Confirmation

Group Rate Tuition Policy

A confirmation letterwill be sent
to you specifying details of
workshop time, location,
directions, and lodging.

Tuition is at the group rate
when an organization enrolls 3
or more people in the same .
course, one person in 3 or
more courses, or some
combination thereof. Groups
are eligible for this discount
only when enrollment and
pre-payment are made together.

Payment
DUE BEFORE THE WORKSHOP
BEGINS, Tuition and schedule

subject to change.

Since enrollment is limited,
registration 4-8 weeks in
advance is recommended.

Product Service

2~.it
i~C;}

.•

INTEL PRODUCT SERVICE
Today, it's essential to have dependable data processing
and information storage equipment.

If there should be an equipment problem, customers contact the nearest Intel service location. If the customer location is within Intel's service area, an Intel Customer
Engineer is dispatched to the site as quickly as possible.
Once there, using advanced diagnostic tools and
sophisticated test equipment, the Customer Engineer will
determine the trouble and the replacement parts needed.
With Intel's vast inventory of replacement parts, the right
part is always available on the shortest notice, and the
Customer Engineer is able to make repairs quickly and
verify performance.

To insure trouble-free performance, every Intel product is
engineered and manufactured to exacting standards. But
sometimes, even the finest components may malfunction.
It's then that Intel Product Service delivers fast, economical, quality maintenance and service support to keep
vital projects on schedule.
Intel is committed to providing a total service support
package through a wide variety of service offerings
available from Intel Product Service.
Intel Product Service takes pride in its capabilities and in
the entire Intel systems product line, and is dedicated.to
total customer satisfaction.

Product Service Alternatives

Intel offers customers a number of service alternatives ...
all at reasonable prices and featuring the quality expected
of the industry leader.
First, there's the Maintenance Agreement, which guarantees maintenance at the customer's site plus parts
replacement and labor at no extra charge beyond an
easy-to-budget, fixed monthly rate--all billed against
one purchase order. The Maintenance Agreement
features preventive maintenance which helps keep
emergencies at a minimum. But should an emergency
arise, a Customer Engineer is sent to the site immediately.

Customer Is Assured Maximum Equipment
Performance

The Intel Product Service team is a skilled group capable
of solving any problem, either by phone or on-site. All service needs (including emergency service and preventive
maintenance) are handled quickly and efficiently by
Intel's Customer Engineers, supported by district,
regional and factory specialists.
This assures the customer of minimum downtime and
maximum equipment performance.
Immediate Availability of Service and Parts

Working from field service offices throughout the United
States, Canada and abroad, Intel's Customer Engineers
provide maintenance agreement customers with equipment installation and regularly scheduled preventive
maintenance, including automatic installation of
engineering changes as they occur.
24·1

Toll· Free Service Hotline

Of course Intel provides service for every system it sells.
Thus,site service, parts replacement and repair are also
available without a Maintenance Agreement. However,
the.site must be within a reasonable distance of an Intel
field service location, and all charges are paid as they
are incurred.

In the United States, Intel's toll-free service Hotline is a
direct connection to service support specialists who can
help immediately.
If on·site service is available, they direct the customer to
the nearest Intel field service location. If not, Hotline

For customers not located in an Intel service area, or for
those who prefer direct factory service, an Intel Direct
Return Authorization enables the customer to return
parts direct to Intel for repair, refurbishing and upgrade
services by its factory experts. This service is offered with
or without contract. (With contract, one purchase order
covers all returns. Without contract, a separate purchase
order is needed for each individual return.)

specialists can usually help locate the trouble ... and in·
dicate how to make the necessary repairs.
Whichever service alternative is chosen, the customer is
assured fast, affordable service. Intel offers customers the
total service they need··that is one of the most important
benefits of buying Intel products.

When distance from an Intel field location is too great, the
Before Return Replacement contract is the logical solu·
tion for customers. To allow them to save valuable time
and make repairs as soon as possible should trouble strike,
a call via Intel's Hotline puts the customer in direct contact
with support specialists who can determine which part is
needed to repair the system. The part is then sent
immediately··before the return of the old part to Intel.
This service is also available with or without contract.

24·2

intel·

U.S. AND CANADIAN SERVICE OFFICES

3065 Bowers Avenue
Santa Clara, California 95051
Tel: (408) 987·8080
TWX: 910·338·0026
TELEX: 34·6372

800-528-0595
TOLL-FREE U.S. HOT-LINE NUMBER
For service in Arizona and Canada call (602)869-4600

CALIFORNIA

MARYLAND

OREGON

CANADA

Intel Corp.
1601 Old Bayshore Hwy.
Suite 345
Burlingame 94010
Tel: (415) 692·4762
TWX: 910·375·3310

Intel Corp.
7257 Parkway Drive
Hanover 21076
Tel: (301) 796-7500
TWX: 710-862-1944

Intel Corp.
10700 S.W. Beaverton·Hilisdale Hwy.
Suite 22
Beaverton 97005
Tel: (503)641·8086
TWX: 910-467·8741

Intel Corp.
50 Galaxy Blvd.
Unit 12
Aexdale, Ontario
M9W4Y5
Tel: (416) 675·2105
Telex: 069·89278

PENNSYLVANIA

Intel Corp.
39 Hwy. 7, Bell Corners
Ottawa, Ontario
K2H8R2
Tel: (613) 829·9714
Telex:053-4115

Intel Corp.
2000 E. 4th Street
Suite110
Santa Ana 92705
Tel: (714) 835·2670
TWX: 910·595·2475
Intel Corp.
7670 Opportunity Road
San Diego 92111
Tel: (714) 268·3563
Intel Corp.
3375 Scott Blvd.
Santa Clara 95051
Tel: (408) 987·8068
Intel Corp.
5530 N. Corbin
Tarzana 91356
Tel: (213) 708·0333
COLORADO
Intel Corp.
650 South Cherry
Suite 720
Denver 80222
Tel: (303) 321-8086
TWX: 910·931·2289
FLORIDA
Intel Corp.
1001 N.W. 62nd Street
Suite 406
FI. Lauderdale 33309
Tel: (305) 771-0600
TWX: 510·956·9407
Intel Corp.
5151 Adamson SI.
Orlando 32804
Tel: (305) 628-2393
GEORGIA
Intel Corp.
3300 Holcombe Bridge Rd.
Suite 225
Norcross 30092
Tel: (404)449·0541
ILLINOIS
Intel Corp.
2550 Gall Road
Suite815
Aolling Meadows 60008
Tel: (312) 981-7230
TWX: 910·253·1825

MASSACHUSETTS
Intel Corp.
27 Industrial Avenue
Chelmsford 01 824
Tel: (617) 667-8126
TWX: 710·343·6333
MICHIGAN
Intel Corp.
26500 Northwestern Hwy.
Suite 401
Southfield 48075
Tel: (313) 353·0920
TWX: 810·224-4915

Intel Corp.
510 Pennsylvania Ave.
3rd Floor
Fort Washington 19034
Tel: (215)641·1000
TWX: 510-661·2077
TEXAS

MINNESOTA

Intel Corp.
313 E. Anderson Lane
Suite 314
Austin 78752
Tel: (512) 454·3628
TWX: 910-874-1347

Intel Corp.
7401 Metro Blvd.
Suite 355
Edina 55435
Tel: (612) 835·6722
TWX: 910·576·2867

Intel Corp.
2925 L.B.J. Freeway'
Suite 175
Dallas 75234
Tel: (214)241-2820
TWX: 910-860·5617

MISSOURI
Intel Corp.
502 Earth City Plaza
S'uite121
Earth City 63045
Tel: (314)291-1990

Intel Corp.
6420 Aichmond Avenue
Suite 280
Houston 77057
Tel: (713) 784·1300
TWX: 910·881·2490
VIRGINIA

NEW JERSEY
Intel Corp.
2460 Lemoine Avenue
. Ft. Lee 07024
Tel: (201) 947·6267
TWX: 710·991·8593

Intel Corp.
7700 Leesburg Pike
Suite412
Falls Church 22043
Tel: (703) 734·9707
TWX: 710·931·0625

OHIO

WASHINGTON

Intel Corp.
Chagrin-Brainard Bldg. 300
28001 Chagrin Blvd.
Cleveland 44122
Tel: (216) 464·2736
TWX: 810·427-9298

Intel Corp.
1603116th Ave. N.E.
Suite114
Bellevue 98005
Tel: (206) 232·7823
TWX: 910·443·3002

Intel Corp.
6500 Poe Avenue
Dayton 45414
Tel: (513) 890·5350
TWX: 810·450·2528

WISCONSIN
Intel Corp.
150 S. Sunnyslope Road
Suite 148
Brookfield 53005
Tel: (414) 784-9060

KANSAS
Intel Corp.
9393 W. 110th Street
Suite 265
Overland Park 66210
Tel: (913) 642-8080

This list of service offices is accurate as of the
date of printing. However, new offices are being
added as required.

24-3

intJ

u.s. AND CANADIAN SALES OFFICES

3065 Bowers Avenue
Santa Clara, California 95051

Tel: (408) 987·8080
TWX: 910·338-0026

TELEX:

3~·6372.

ALABAMA
Intel Corp.
aDa Williams Avenue, S.W.
Suite 1422
Huntsville 35801

. T.~I:,~~O~L~3~.~.~~~
ARIZONA
Intel Corp.
10210 N. 25th Avenue, Suile 11
Phoenix 85021

Tel: (602) 997-9695
BFA
4426 North Saddle Bag Trail
Scottsdale 85251

Tel: (802) 994-5400
CALIFORNIA
Intel Corp.
7670 Opportunity Rd.
Suite 135
San Diego 92111
Tel: (714) 268·3563

Intel Corp,'
2000 East 4th Street
Suite 100
Santa Ana 92705
Tel: (714) 835·9842

TWX: 910·595·1114
Intel Corp.'
6530 Corbin Ave.
Suite 120
Tarzana 91356

Tel: (213) 708·0333
TWX: 910·496·2045
Intel Corp.'
3375 Scott Blvd.
Santa Clara 95051
Tel: (40B) 987·808e
TWX: 910·339·9279
910,338·0255
Earle Associates, Inc.
4617 Ruffner Street
Suite 202
San Diego 92111
Tel: (714) 278·5441
Mac·1
P.O. Box 1420
Cupertino 95014
Tel: (406) 257·9660
Mac·1
558 Valley Way
Calaveras Business Park
Milpitas 95035
Tel: (408) 946·6665
Mac·1
P.O. Box 8763
Fountain Valley 92708
Tel: (714) 839·3341
Mac·1
1321 Centinela Avenue
Suite 1
Santa Monica 90404
Tel: (213) 829-4797
Mac-I
20121 Ventura Blvd., Suite 240E
Woodland Hills 91364
Tel: (213) 347-5900

COLORADO
Intel Corp."
650 S. Cherry Street
Suite 720
Denver 80222
Tel: (303) 321·6086
TWX: 910·931·2289
CONNECTICUT
Intel Corp.
Peacock Alley
36 Padanaram Road
Danbury 06810
Tel: (203) 792·8366
TWX: 710-456-1199
EMC Corp.
48 Purnell Place
Manchester 06040
Tel: (203) 646·8085
FLORIDA.
Intel Corp.
1001 N.W. 62nd Street, Suite 406
Ft. Lauderdale 33309
Tel: (305) 77H1600
TW)C: 510·~.~.~·9497

FLORIDA (coni.)
Intel Corp:
5151 Adanson Street, Suite 203
Orlando 32804
Tel: (305) 628·2393
TWX: ~110~~53.921.9
GEORGIA
Inlel Corp.
3300 Holcomb Bridge Rd.
Norcross 30092
Tel: (404) 4~9;0541
ILLINOIS
Intel Corp.
2550 Gall Road, Suite 815
Rolling Meadows 60006
Tel: (312) 981·7200
TWX: 910-651·5661
Technical Representatives
1502 North Linde Street
Bloomington 61701
Tel: (309) 629-8060
INDIANA
Intel Corp.
9101 Wesleyen Road
Suite 204
Indianapolis 46268
Tel: (317) 299·0823
IOWA
Technical Representatives, Inc.
St. Andrews Building
1930 St. Andrews Drive N.E.
Cedar Rapids 52405
Tel: (319) 393·6510
KANSAS
Intel Corp.
9393 W. 110th St., Ste. 285
Overland Park 66210
Tel: (913) 842·8080
Technical Representativee, Inc.
8245 Nieman Road, Suite 100
Lenexa 86214
Tel: (913) 888-0212, 3 & 4
TWX: 910·749·6412
Technical Representatives, Inc.
360 N, Rock Road
Suite 4
Wichita 67206
Tel: (316) 681-0242
MARYLAND
Intel Corp."
7257 Parkway Drive
Hanover 21076
Tel: (301) 796-7500
TWX: 710'862-1944
Mesa Inc.
16201 Industrial Dr,
Gaithersburg 20760
Tel: (301) 948·4350
MASSACHUSETTS
Intel Corp."
27 Induslrial Ave.
Chelmsford 01824
Tel: (617) 667-8126
TWX: 710·343·6333
EMC Corp,
381 Elliot Street
Newton 02164
Tel: (617) 244·4740
TWX: 922631
MICHIGAN
Intel Corp."
26500 Northwestern Hwy,
Suite 401
Southfield 48075
Tel: (313) 353·0920
TWX: 810-244·4915 .'
MINNESOTA
Intel Corp.
7401 Metro Blvd.
Suite 356
Edina 55435
Tel: (612) 835·6722
TWX: 910·576·2867

MISSOURI
Intel Corp.
502 Earth City Plaza
Suite 121
Earth City 60345
· Tel: (314) 2,91-.199.0
Technical Representatives, Inc.·
502 Earth City Plaza
Suite 201
Earth City 63045
Tel: (314) 291·0001
Technical Representatives,' InC?"
VSW Bldg. Suite 660
406 W. 31st Sireet
Kansas City 64111
Tel: (816) 756·3576
TWX: 910·771·0026
NEW JERSEY
Intel Corp,·
Raritan Plaza
2nd Floor
Raritan Center
Edison 08817
Tel: (201) 225·3000
TWX: 710·480·6238
,NEW MEXICO
BFA Corporation
1704 Moon N.E., Suite 7
Las Cruces 87112
Tel: (505) 523·0S01
TWX: 910-983·0543
BFA Corporation
· .3705 Westerfield, N,E.
Albuquerque 87111
Tel: (505) 292·1212
'TWX: 910-989·1157

NEWVORK
Intel Corp.'
300 Motor Pkwy.
Hauppauge 11787
. Tel: (516) 231-3300
'J"WX: 610·227·6236
Intel Corp.
80 Washington St,
Poughkeepsie 12601
Tel: (914) 473-2303
TWX: 610·248·0060
Inlel Corp.'
2255 Lyell Avenue
Lower Floor East Suite .
Rochester 14606
Tel: (716) 264-6120
TWX: 610·253·7391
Measurement Technology, Inc.
· 159 Northern Boulevard
Great Neck 11021
.Tel: (516) 462·3500
T·Squared
4054 Newcourt Avenue
Syracuse 13206
Tel: (315) 463·8592
TWX: 710·541-0554
T·Squared
2E. Main
Victor 14564
Tel: (718) 924·9101
TWX: 510-254·8542

NORTH CAROLINA
Intel Corp.
154 Huffman Mill Rd,
Burlington 27216
Tel: (919) 584-3631

OHIO
Intel Corp."
6500 Poe Avenue
Dayton 45415
Tel: (513) 890·5350
TWX: 810·450·2628
Intel Corp.'
.
Chagrin·Brainard Bldg., No. 300
'28001 Chagrin Blvd.
Cleveland 44122
Tel: (218) 464-2736
TWX: 810·427·9298

OREGON
Intel Corp,
10700 S.W. Beaverton
Hillsdale Highway
Suite 324
Beaverton 97006
'rei: (503) 641·8086'
TWX: 910·467·8741
PENNSYLVANIA
Intel Corp."
510 Pennsylvania Avenue
Fort Washington 19034
Tel: (215) 641-1000
TWX: 510·661·2077
Intel Corp.'
.
201 Penn Center Boulevard
Suite 301W
Pittsburgh 15235
,.Tel: (412) 823·4970
O,E,D. Electronics
300 N. York Road
Hatboro 19040
Tel: (215) 674·9600

TEXAS
Intel Corp."
2926 L,B,J. FreewJlY
Suite 175
Dallas 75234
Tel: (214) 241-9521
TWX: 910·860·5617
Intel Corp.'
8420 Richmond Ave.
Suite 280
Houston 77057
Tel: (713) 784·3400
TWX: 910·881·2490
fndustrial Digital Systems Corp.
5925 Sovereign
Suite 101
Houston 77038
.Tel: (713) 988·9421
Intel Corp.
313 E. Anderson Lene
Suite 314
Austin 78752
Tel: (512) 464·3628

WASHINGTON
Intel Corp.
Suite 114, Bldg. 3
1803 116th Ave. N.E.
Bellevue 98005
Tel: (206) 453·8086
TWX: 910·443·3002
WISCONSIN
Il'!tel Corp.
150 S. Sunnyslope Rd.
Brookfield 53005
Tel: (414) 784-9060
CANADA
Intel Semiconductor Corp. "
Suite 233, Bell Mews
39 Highway 7, Bells Comers
Oltawa, Ontario K2H 8R2
Tel: (613) 829·9714
TELEX: 053·4116
Inlel Semiconductor Corp.
60 Galaxy Blvd.
Unit 12
Rexdale, Ontario
M9W 4Y5
Tel: (416) 676·2t06
TELEX: 06983574
Multilek, Inc.'
15 Grenlell Crescent
Ottawa, Ontario K2G OG3
Tel: (613) 228-2365
. TELEX: 053·4585
Multilek,lnc.'
Toronto
Tel: (416) 246·4622
Multllek, Inc.
Montreal
.
Tel: (514) 481·1350

"Field Application'Location

U.S. AND CANADIAN DISTRIBUTORS
3065 Bowers Avenue
Santa Clara, California 95051
Tel: (408) 987·8080
TWX: 910·338·0026
TELEX: 34·6372
ALABAMA
tHamillon/Avnet Electronics
4812 Commercial Drive N.W.
Huntsville 35805
.
Tel: (205) 837·7210
tPioneer IHuntsville
1207 Putman Drive N.W.
Huntsville 35605
Tel: (205) 837·9033
TWX: 810·726·2197
ARIZONA
tHamillon/Avnet Electronics
2615 S. 21st Street
Phoenix 85034
Tel: (602) 275·7851
tWyle Distribution Group
8155 N. 24th Avenue
Phoenix 85021
Tel: (602) 995·9185
TWX: 910·951·4282
CALIFORNIA
Arrow Electronics. Inc.
9511 Ridge Haven Court
San Diego 92123
Tel: (714) 585·4800
Arrow Electronics, Inc.
720 Palomar Avenue
Sunnyvale California 94088
Tel: (406) 739·3011
TWX: 910·339·9371
t Avnet Electonics
350 McCormick Avenue
Costa Mesa 92626
Tel: (714) 754·6051
TWX: 910·595·1928
Hamilton/Avne! Electronics
1175 Bordeaux Dr.
Sunnyvale 94086
Tal; (408) 743·3300
TWX: 910·339·9332
tHamiltonl Avnet Eleclonics
8917 Complex Drive
San Diego 92123
Tel: (714) 571·7923
TWX: 910·335·1216
tHamilton I Avnel Electronics
10912 W. Washington Blvd.
Culver City 90230
Tel: (213) 558·2193
TWX: 910·340·6364 or 7073
tHamilton Electro Sales
3170 Pullman Street
Costa Mesa 92628
Tel: (714) 641·4100
TWX: 910·595·2638
tWyle Distribution Group
124 Maryland Street
EI Segundo 90245
Tel: (213) 322·3826
TWX: 910·348·7140 or 7111
tWyJa Distribution Group
9525 Chesapeake Dr.
San Diego 92123
Tel: (714) 565·9171
TWX: 910·335·1590
tWyle Distribution Group
3000 Bowers Avenue
Santa Clara 95052
Tel: (406) 727·2500
TWX: 910·338·0451 or 0296
Wyle Distribution Group
17872 Cowan Avenue
Irvine 92714
Tel: (714) 841·1611
COLORADO
tWyle Distribution Group
6777 E. 50th Avenue
Commerce City 60022
Tel: (303) 267·9611
TWX: 910·931·0510

COLORADO IConl.)
tHamillon/Avnet Electronics
8765 E. Orchard Road
Suite 706
Englewood 80111
Tel: (303) 534·1212
TWX: 910'931-0510
Wyle Dlatrlbution Group
451 E. 124th Avenue
Thornlon 80241
Tel: (303) 457·WYLE
TWX: 910-931-0510

CONNECTICUT
tArrow Eleclonics
12 Beaumont Road
Wallingford 06512
Tel: (203) 265·7741
TWX: 710-478-0182
tHamillonl Avnet Electronics
CommerCe Induatrial Park
Commerce Drive
Danbury 08810
Tel: (203) 797-2800
TWX: 710·456-9974
tHarvey Electronics
112 Main Street
Norwalk 08851
Tel: (203) 853·1515
TWX: 710·488-3373
TWX: 710-393-6770

FLORIDA
tArrow Electronics
1001 N.W. 82nd Street
Suile 108
Ft. Lauderdale 33309
Tel: (305) 776·7790
TWX: 510-955·9458
tArrow Electronics
115 Palm Bay Road, N.W.
Suite 10, Bldg. 200
Palm Bay 32905
Tel: (305) 725·1480
TWX: 510·959-6337
tHamillon/Avnet Electronics
6800 Northweat 20th Ave.
Ft. Lauderdale 33309
Tel: (305) 971-2900
TWX: 510·955·3097
Hamilton I Avnel Electronics
3197 Tech. Drive North
St. Peteraburg 33702
Tel: (813) 576·3930
TWX: 810·883·0374
tPloneer I Orlando
6220 S. Orange Blossom Trail
Suite 412
Orlando 32809
Tel: (305) 659·3600
TWX: 810·850·0177
GEORGIA
Arrow Electronics
2979 Pacific Drive
Norcrosa 30071
Tel: (404) 449·8252
TWX: 610-757·4213
tHamiltonl Avnet Electronica
6700 1-85 Access Road. No. 11
Suite IE
Norcross 30071
Tel: (404) 448·0800
ILLINOIS
Arrow Electronics
492 Lunt Avenue
P.O. Box 94248
Schaumburg 60172
Tel: (312) 893·9420
TWX: 910·222·1807
tHamillon I Avnet Electronica
3901 No. 25th Avenue
Schiller Park 60176
Tel: (312) 678·8310
TWX: 910·227·0060
Pioneer/Chicago
1551 Carmen Drive
Elk Grove 60007
Tel: (312) 437·9680
TWX: 910'222-1834

INDIANA
tHamilton I Avnet Electronics
485 Gradle Drive
Carmel 46032
Tel: (317) 844-9333
Pioneer Iindiana
6408 Caslleplace Drive
Indianapolis 46250
Tel: (317) 849·7300
TWX: 810'260-1794
KANSAS
tHamiltonl Avnet Electronics
9219 Ouivira Road
Overland Park 66215
Tel: (913) 888-8900
tComponent Specialties, Inc.
8369 Nieman Road
Lenexa 66214
Tel: (913) 492·3555
MARYLAND
Arrow ElectroniCS, Inc.
.4801 Benson Avenue
Baltimore 21227
Tel: (301) 247-5200
tHamiiton/Avnet Eleclronlca
7235 Standard Drive
Hanover 21076
Tel: (301) 796·5684
TWX: 710'862-1861
tPioneer/Washington
9100 Gaither Road
Gaithersburg 20760
Tel: (301) 948·0710
TWX: 710·828·0545
MASSACHUSETTS
tHamiltonl Avnet Electronics
50 Tower Office Park
Woburn 01801
Tel: (817) 273·7500
TWX: 710·393-0382
t Arrow Electronics
96D Commerce Way
Woburn 01801
Tel: (617) 933·8130
Harvey I Boaton
4 Hartwell Ave.
Lexington 02173
Tel: (617) 881·9200
TWX: 710·326-6617

MICHIGAN

t Arrow Electronica
3810 Varsity Drive
Ann Arbor 48104
Tel: (313) 971·8220
TWX: 810·223·6020
tPloneer I Michigan
13485 Stamford
Livonia 48150
Tel: (313) 525·1800
TWX: 810·242-3271
tHamiltonl Avnet Electronics
32487 Schoolcraft Road
Livonia 48150
Tel: (313) 522-4700
TWX: 810'242-8775
MINNESOTA
t Arrow Electronlca
5230 W. 73rd Street
Edina 55435
Tel: (612) 830·1800
TWX: 910'758-2728
tlndustrial Componenla
5229 Edina Industrial Blvd.
Minneapolia 55435
Tel: (612) 831·2668
TWX: 910'756-3153
tHamiltonl Avnet Electronics
7449 Cahill Road
Edina 55435
Tel: (612) 941·3801
TWX: 910'576-2720

MISSOURI
tHamiltonl Avnet Electronics
13743 Shorline Ct.
Earth City 63045
Tel: (314) 344·1200
TWX: 910·762·0606
NEW HAMPSHIRE
tArrow Electronics
1 Perimeter Drive
Manchester 03103
Tel: (603) 666·6968
TWX: 710·220·1684
NEW JERSEY
tArrow Electronics
Pleasant Valley Avenue
Moorestown 08057
Tel: (215) 928·1800
TWX: 710·897·0829
tArrow Electronics
285 Midland Avenue
Saddle Brook 07662
Tel: (201) 797·5800
TWX: 710·998·2206
tHamllton / Avnet Electronics
1 Keystone Ave.
Bldg. 36
Cherry Hili 08003
Tel: (609) 424·0100
TWX: 710·897·1405
Hamilton I Avnet Electronica
10 Industrial Road
Fairfield 07006
Tel: (201) 575·3390
,TWX: 710·734·4438
tHarvey Electronics
45 Route 46
Pine brook 07058
Tel: (201) 227·1262
TWX: 710·734·4382
NEW MEXICO
tAlliance Electronics Inc.
11030 Cochiti S.E.
Albuquerque 87123
Tel: (505) 292·3360
TWX: 910·989·1151
tHamillonl Avnet Electronics
2524 Baylor Drive S.E.
Albuquerque 87119
Tel: (505) 765·1500
NEW YORK
t Arrow Electronics
3000 South Winton Road
Rochester 14623
Tel: (716) 275·0300
TWX: 510·253·4766
tArrow Electronics
7705 Malttage Drive
Liverpool 13088
Tel: (315) 652·1000
TWX: 710·545·0230
Arrow Electronics
20 Osor Avenue
Hauppauge 11787
Tel: (516) 231·1000
TWX: 510·227·6623
tHamiltonl Avnet Electronics
333 Metro Park
Rochester 14623
Tel: (716) 475~9130
TWX: 510·253·5470
tHamiltonl Avnet Electronics
16 Corporate Circle
E. Syracuse 13057
Tel: (315) 437·2641
tHamiiton/ Avnet Electronics
5 Hub Drive
Melville. Long Island 11746
Tel: (516) 454·6000
TWX: 510·252·0893

tMicrocomputer System Technical Demonstrator Centers

inter

u.s. AND CANADIAN DISTRIBUTORS

3065 Bowers Avenue
Sanla Clara, California 95051

Tel: (408) 987·8080
TWX: 910-338-0026
TELEX: 34·6372
NEW YORK (Cant.)
Harvey Electronics
P.O. Box 1208
Binghampton 13902
Tel: (607) 748·8211

TWX: 510·252·0893
tHarvey Electronics
60 Crossways Park West
Woodbury 11797
Tel: (516) 921·8700
TWX: 510·221·2184
Harvey/Rochester
840 Fairport Park
Fairport 14450
Tel: (7IS) 381·7070
TWX: 510·253· 700 1

NORTH CAROLINA
Arrow Electronics
938 Burke Sireet
Winston-Salem 27102
Tel: (919) 725·8711
TWX: 510-922·4765
tHamilton I Avne! Electronics
2603 Industrial Drive

Raleigh 27609
Tel: (919) 829·8030
Pioneer I Carolina
106 Industrial Ave.
Greensboro 27406
Tel: (919) 273·4441
TWX: 510·925·1114

OHIO
Arrow Electronics
7620 McEwen Road
Centerville 45459
Tel: (513) 435·5563
TWX: 810·459·1611
Arrow Electronics
6238 Cochran Rd.
Solon 44139
Tel: (216) 248·3990
TWX: 810·427·9409
Arrow Electronics
10 Knollcrest Or.
Cincinnati 45237
Tel: (513) 761·5432
TWX: 810·461·2670
tHamiltonl Avnet Electronics
954 Senate Drive
Dayton 45459
Tel: (513) 433·0610
TWX: 910·340·2531
tHamiltonl Avnet Electronics
4588 Emery Industrial Parkway
Warrensville Heights 44128
Tel: (216) 831·3500
TWX: 810'427·9452
tPioneer I Dayton
1900 Troy Street
Dayton 45404
Tel: (513) 236·9900
TWX: 810·459·1622
tPioneer I Cleveland
4800 E. 131 st Street
Cleveland 44105
Tel: (216) 587·3600
TWX: 810·422·2210
OKLAHOMA
tComponents Specialties, Inc.
7920 E. 40th Street
Tulsa 74145
Tel: (SI8) 664·2820
TWX: 910·845·2215
OREGON
tAlamc/Slroum Electronics
8022 S.W. Nimbus, Bldg. 7
Beaverton 97005
Tel: (503) 641·9070
tHamilton I Avnet Electronics
6024 S.W. Jean Rd.
Bldg. C, Suite 10
Lake Oswego 97034
Tel: (503) 635·7848

PENNSVLVANIA
tArrow Electronics
4297 Greensburg Pike
Suite 3114
Pittsburgh 15221
Tel: (412) 351·4000
Pioneer/Pittsburgh
259 Kappa Drive
Pittsburgh 15238
Tel: (412) 782·2300
TWX: 710·795·3122
Pioneer/Delaware Valley
261 Gibralter Road
Horsham 19044
Tel: (215) 674·4000
TWX: 510·665·6778
TEXAS
Arrow Electronics
13715 Gamma Road
Dallas 75234
Tel: (214) 386·7500
TWX: 910·661·5495
Arrow Electronics, Inc.
10700 Corporate Drive, Suite 100
Stafford 77477
Tel: (713) 491·4100
Component Specialties, Inc.
8222 Jamestown Drive
Suite 115
Austin 76758
Tel: (512) 837·8922
TWX: 910·874·1320
tComponent Specialties, Inc.
10607 Shady Trail, Suite 101
Dallas 75220
Tel: (214) 357·6511
TWX: 910·861·4999
tComponent Specialties, Inc.
8585 Commerce Park Drive, Suite 590
Houston 77036
Tel: (713) 771·7237
TWX: 910-881·2422
Hamilton I Avnet Electronics
10508A Boyer Blvd.
Austin 78757
Tel: (512) 837·8911
tHamiiton I Avnet Electronics
2111 W. Walnut Hill Lane
Iving 75062
Tel: (214) 661·4111
TWX: 910·860·5371
tHamilton I Avnet Electronics
3939 Ann Arbor Drive
Houston 77063
Tel: (713) 780·1771
UTAH
tHamilton / Avnet Electronics
1585 West 2100 South
Salt Lake City 84119
Tel: (801) 972·2800
WASHINGTON
tAlmac/Stroum Electronics
5811 Sixth Ave. South
Seattle 98108
Tel: (206) 763·2300
TWX: 910·444,2067
Arrow Electronics, Inc.
Electronics Distribution Division
1059 Andover Park East
..
Tukwila 98188
Tel: (206) 575·0907
tHamiltonl Avnet Electronics
14212 N.E. 21 st Street
Bellevue 98005
Tel: (206) 453·5844

WASHINGTON (Coni.)
tWyle Distribution Group
1750 132nd Avenue N.E.
Bellevue 98005
Tel: (206) 453·6300
TWX: 910·443·2526
WISCONSIN
t Arrow Electronics
430 W. Rawson Avenue
Oak Creek 53154
Tel: (414) 764·6600
TWX: 910,338·0026

QUEBEC
tHamliton I Avnet Electronics
. 2670 Sabourin Street
SI. Laurent H4S 1M2
Tel: (514) 331-6443
TWX: 610·421·3731
Zentronica
5010 Pare Street
Montreal H4P lP3
Tel: (514) 735-5361
TWX: 05-827-535

tHamiltonl Avnet Electronics
2975 Moorland Road
New Berlin 53151
Tel: (414) 784·4510
TWX: 910·262·1182
CANADA
ALBERTA
tL.A. Varah Ltd.
4742 14th Street N.E.
Calgary T2D 6L7
Tel: (403) 230·1235
TWX: 018-258·97
Zentronics
9224 27th Avenue
Edmonton T6N 182
Tel: (403) 463·3014
.Zentronics
, 3651 21st N.E.
Calgary T2E 6T6
Tel: (403) 230·1422
BRITISH COLUMBIA
tL.A. Varah Ltd.
• ,2077 Alberta Street
Vancouver V5V lC4
Tel: (604) 873-3211
TWX: 610·929-1068
Zenlronics
550 Cambie St.
Vancouver V6B 2N7
Tel: (604) 688·2533
TWX: 04-5077-89
MANITOBA
L.A. Varah
1-1832 King Edward Street
Winnipeg R2R ON 1
Tel: (204) 633-6190
TWX: 07-55·365
Zentronics
590 Serry St.
Winnipeg R3H OS 1
Tel: (204) 775·8661
ONTARIO
tHamilton I Avnet Electronics
3688 Rexwood Road, Units G & H
. Mississauga L4V 1M5
Tel: (416) 677-4732
TWX: 610·492,8860
tHamiiton I Avnet Electronics
1735 Courlwood Cresent
Ottawa K2C 3J2
Tel: (613) 226·1700
TWX: 053-4971
tL.A. Varah, Ltd ..
605 Kenora Avenue
Hamilton L8E 3P2
Tel: (416) 561-9311
TWX: 061·8349
tZentronics
141 Catherine Slreet
Ottawa K2P 1C3
Tel: (613) 238·6411
TWX: 053-3636
tZentronics
1355 Meyerside Drive
Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1C9 .
Tel: (416) 676-9000
Telex: 06-983-667

t~icrocomputer System Technical Demonstrator Centera

INTERNATIONAL SALES AND MARKETING OFFICES
3065 Bowers Avenue
Santa Clara, California 95051
Tel: (408) 987·8080
TWX: 910·338·0026
TELEX, 34·6372

INTERNATIONAL DISTRIBUTORS/REPRESENTATIVES
ARGENTINA
Micro Sistemas S. A.
9 De Julio 561
Cordoba
Tel: 54·51·32·880
TELEX: 51837 BICeO

AUSTRALIA
A.J.F. Systems & Components Ply. Ltd.
310 Queen Street
Melbourne
Victoria 3000

Tel: 679-702
TELEX: AA 31261
Warburton Franki
Corporale Headquarters
372 Eastern Valley Way
Chalswood, New South Wales 2067

Tel: 407·3261
TELEX: AA 21299
AUSTRIA
Bacher Eleklronische Geraela GmbH
Rotenmulgasse 28
A 1120 Vienna

Tal: (0222) 83 63 96
TELEX: (O1) 1532
Aekirsch Eleklronik Goraela GmbH
Lichtensteinslrasse 97
A 1000 Vienna

Tel: (222) 347648
TELEX: 74759

FINLAND
Oy Finlronic AB
Melkonkatu 24 A
SF-00210
Helsinki 21
Tel: 0·692 6022
TELEX: 124224 Flron SF
FRANCE
Celdis S.A.'
53, Rue Charlas Frerot
F-94250 Gentilly
Tel: (1) 581 0020
TELEX: 200 485
Feulrier
Rue des Trois Glorieuses
F·42270 SI. Priest·en-Jarez
Tel: (77) 74 67 33
TELEX: 300021
Metrologie'
la Tour d' Asnieres
4, Avenue Leurent Cely
92606-Asnieres
Tel: 791 4444
TELEX: 611 448
Tekelec Airtronic'
Cite des Bruyeres
Rue Carle Vernet
F·92310 Sevres
Tel: (1) 534 75 35
TELEX: 204552

Av. Vic. Mc kenna 204
Casille 6055
Sentiago
Tel: 227 564
TELEX: 3520003

GERMANY
Electronic 2000 Vertriebs GmbH
Neumarkler Strasse 75
0·6000 Munich 80
Tel: (089) 434061
TELEX: 522561
Jermyn GmbH
Posifach 1180
0·6077 Camberg
Tel: (06434) 231
TELEX: 484426
Kontron Elektronik GmbH
Breslauerstrasse 2
8057 Eching B
0-8000 Munich
Tel: (89) 319011
TELEX: 522122
Neye Enatechnik GmbH
Schillerstrasse 14
0-2085 Quickborn·Hamburg
Tel: (04106) 6121
TELEX: 02·13590

CHINA
C.M. Technologies
525 University Avenue
Suite A·40
Pato Allo, CA 94301
Tel: (415) 326·9150

GREECE
American Technical Enterprises
P.O. Box 156
Athans
Tel: 30·1·8811271
30-1·8219470

COLOMBIA
International Computer Machines
Carrera 7 No. 72·34
Apdo. Aereo 19403
Bogota 1
Tel: 211-7282
TELEX: 413141NCO

HONG KONG
Schmidt & Co.
28/F Wing on Centar
Connaught Road
Hong Kong
Tel: 5·455·644
TELEX: 74766 Schmc Hx

CYPRUS
Cyprus Eltrom Electronics
P.O. Box 5393
Nicosia
Tel: 21·27982

INDIA
Micronic Devices
104/109C, Nirmallndustrial Eetate
Sion (E)
Bombay 400022, India
Tel: 486-170
TELEX: 011·5947 MDEV IN

BELGIUM
Inoleo Belgium SA
Ave. des Croix de Guerre 94
B 1120 Brussels
Tel: (02) 216 01 60
TELEX: 25441
BRAZIL
Icotron S.A.
0511 Av. Mutinga 3650
6 Andar
Pirituba Sao Paulo
Tel: 261-0211
TELEX: (011) 222 ICO BR
CHILE

DIN

DENMARK
STL-Lyngso Komponenl AlS
Oslmarken 4
OK·2860 Soborg
Tel: (01) 67 00 77
TELEX: 22990
Scandinavian Semiconductor
Supply AIS
Nannasgade 18
OK-2200 Copenhagen
Tel: (01) 83 50 90
TELEX: 19037

ISRAEL
Easlronics Ltd.'
11 Rozanis Street
P.O. Box 39300
Tel Aviv 61390
Tel: 475151
TELEX: 33636
ITALY
Eledra 3S S.P.A.'
Viale Elvezia, 18
120154 Milan
Tel: (02) 34.93.041-31.85.441
TELEX: 332332

JAPAN
Asahi Electronics Co. ltd.
KMM Bldg. Room 407
2·14·1 Asano, Kokura
Klla-Ku, Kltokyushu City 802
Tel: (093) 511·6471
TELEX: AECKY 7126-16
Hamilton-Avnet Electronics Japan Ltd.
YU and YOU Bldg. 1-4 Horidome·Cho
Nihonbashi
Tel: (03) 662·9911
TELEX: 2523774
Ryoyo Electric Corp.
Konwa Bldg.
1-12·22, Tsukiji, I-Chrome
Chuo-Ku, Tokyo 104
Tel: (03) 543-7711
Tokyo Electron Ltd.
No.1 Higashikata-Machi
Midori·Ku, Yokohama 226
Tel; (045)471-8811
TELEX: 781-4473
KOREA
Koram Digital
Room 909 Woonam Bldg.
7, I·KA Bongre-oong
Chung-Ku Seoul
Tel: 238-123
TELEX: K23542 HANSINT
Leewood International, Inc.
C.P.O. Box 4046
112·25 Sokong-Dong
Chung-Ku, Seoul 100
Tel: 285·927
TELEX: MOCNDM K23231
CABLE: "LEEWOOD" Seoul
MEXICO
Proveedora Electronica, S.A. (Proesa)
Prot. Moclezuma Ote. 24
Col. Romero de Terreros
Apdo. Postal 21-139
Mexico 21, D.F.
Tel: 554·8300
TELEX: 017·72402 SAULME
NETHERLANDS
Inelco Nether. Compo Sys. BV
Turfstekerstraat 63
Aalsmeer 1431 0
Tel: (2977) 26655
TELEX: 14693
Koning & Hartman
Koperwerl 30
2544 EN Den Haag
Tel: (70) 210.101
TELEX: 31528
NEW ZEALAND
W. K. McLean Ltd.
P.O. Box 18-065
Glenn innes, Auckland, 6
Tel: 587·037
TELEX: NZ2763 KOSFY
NORWAY
Nordisk Elektronic (Norge) AIS
Postoffice Box 122
Smedsvingen 4
1364 Hvalstad
Tel: 02 78 62 10
TELEX; 17546
PORTUGAL
Ditram
Componentes E Electronica LOA
Av. Miguel Bombarda, 133
Lisboa 1
Tel; (19) 545313
TELEX: 14347 GESPIC
SINGAPORE
General Engineers Associates
Blk 3, 1003-1008, 10th Floor
P.S.A. Multi·Storey Complex
Telok Btangah/Pasir Panjang
Singapore 5
Tel: 271-3163
TELEX: RS23987 GENERCO

SOUTH AFRICA
Electronic Building Elements
Pine Square
18th Street
Hazelwood, Pratoria 000 t
Tel: 011-27·12·46-9221
TELEX: 30181SA
SPAIN
Interface S.A.
Ronda Ssn Pedro 22. 3'
Barcelona 10
Tel: 301 78 51
TWX: 51508
ITT SESA
Miguel Angel 16
Madrid 10
Tel: (1) 4190957
TELEX: 27707/27461
SWEDEN
AB Gosta Backstrom
Box 12009
10221 Stockholm
Tel: (08) 541 080
TELEX: 10135
Nordisk Electronik AB
Box 27301
8-10254 Stockholm
Tel: (08) 635040
TELEX: 10547
SWITZERLAND
Industrade AG
Gemsenstrassa 2
Postcheck 80 - 21190
CH·8021 Zurich
Tel: (01) 60 22 30
TELEX: 56788
TAIWAN
Taiwan Automation Co.'
3d Floor #75, Section 4
Nanking East Road
Taipei
Tel: 771·0940
TELEX: 11942 TAIAUTO
TURKEY
Turkelek Electronics
Apapurk Boulevard 169
Ankara
Tel: 189483
UNITED KINGDOM
Comway Microsystems Ltd.
Market Street
68-Bracknell, Berkshire
Tel: (344) 51654
TELEX: 847201
G.E.C. Semiconductors Ltd.
East Lane
North Wembley
Middlesex HA9 7PP
Tel: (01) 904-9303/908-4111
TELEX: 28817
Jermyn Industries
Vestry Estate
Seven oaks, Kent
Tel: (0732) 501.44
TELEX: 95142
Rapid Recall, ltd.
6 Soho Mills Ind. Park
Wooburn Green
Bucks, England
Tel: (6285) 24961
TELEX: 849439
Sintrom Electronics ltd.'
Arkwright Road 2
Reading, Berkshire RG2 OlS
Tel: (0734) 85464
TELEX: 847395
VENEZUELA
Componentes y Circuitos
Electronicos TTLCA C.A.
Apartado 3223
Caracas 101
Tel: 718-100
TELEX: 21795 TELETIPCS

"Field Application location

INTERNATIONAL SALES AND MARKETING OFFICES
3065 Bowers Avenue
Santa Clara, California 95051
Tel: (408) 987-8080
TWX: 910-338-0026
TELEX: 34·6372

INTEL® MARKETING OFFICES
AUSTRALIA
Inlel Semiconductor Ply. Ltd.
Suite 2, Level 15, North Point
100 Miller Street
North Sydney, NSW, 2060
Tel: 450-847
TELEX: AA 20097

BELGIUM
Intel Corporation S.A.
Rue du Moulin a Papier 51
Boite 1
B·1160 Brussels
Tel: (02) 660 30 10
TELEX: 24814
DENMARK
Inlel Denmark A/S'
lyngbyvei 32 2nd Floor
OK-2IDO Copenhagen East
Tel: (01) 182000
TELEX: 19567

FINLAND
Intel Finland OY
Sentnerikuja 3
SF • 00400 Helsinki 40
Tel: (0) 558531
TELEX: 123332
FRANCE
Inlel Corporation, S.A.R.L.·
5 Place de Ie Balance

Silic 223
94528 Rungia Cedax
Tel: (01) 687 22 21
TELEX: 270475

GERMANY
Intel Semiconductor GmbH·
Seidlstrasse 27
8000 Muenchen 2
Tel: (089) 53 891
TELEX: 523 177
Intel Semiconductor GmbH
Mainzer Strasse 75
6200 Wiesbaden 1
Tel: (06121) 700874
TELEX: 04186183
Intel Semiconductor GmbH
Wernerstresse 67
P.O. Box 1460
7012 Fellbach
Tel: (0711) 580082
TELEX: 7254826
Intel Semiconductor GmbH
Hohenzollern Strasse 5
'3000 Hannover 1
Tel: (0511) 327081
TELEX: 923825
Intel Semiconductor GmbH
Oberrathstrasse 2
4000 Duesseldorf 30
Tel: (0211) 651054·6
TELEX: 8S86977
HONG KONG
Intel Semiconductor Ltd,
99·105 Des Voeux Rd" Central
ISF, Unit B
Hong Kong
Tel: 5·450·847
TELEX: 63869

ITALY
Intel Corporation Italia, S.p.A.
Corso Sempione 39
1·20145 Milano
Tel: 2/34.93287
TELEX: 311271
JAPAN
Intel Japan K.K .•
Flower HiII·Shinmachi East Bldg.
1·23·9 Shinmachl, Setagaya·ku
Tokyo 154
Tel: (03) 426·9261
TELEX: 781·28426
NETHERLANDS
Intel Semiconductor B. V.
Cometongebouw
Westblaak 106
3012 Km Rotterdam
Tel: (10) 149122
TELEX: 22283
NORWAY
Intel Norway AI S
P.O. Box 92
Hvamveien 4
N·2013
Skjetten
Tel: (2) 742 420
TELEX: 18018

SWEDEN
Intel Sweden A,B.·
Box 20092
Alpvagen 17
S·16120 Bromma
Tel: (08) 98 53 90
TELEX: 12261
SWITZERLAND
Inlel Semiconductor A,G.
Forchstrasae 95
CH 8032 Zurich
Tel: 1·554502
TELEX: 557 89 ich ch
UNITED KINGDOM
Inlel Corporation (U.K,) Lid.'
5 Hospital Street
Nantwich, Cheshire CWS SRE
Tel: (0270) 62 65 60
TELEX: 36820
Intel Corporation (U.K.) Ltd.
Dorcan House
Eldine Drive
Swindon. Wiltshire SN3 3TU
Tel: (0793) 26101
TELEX: 444447 INT SWN

ISRAEL
Intel Semiconductor Ltd,·
P.O, Box 2404
Haifa
Tel: 972/452 4261
TELEX: 92246511
'Fleld Application Location

Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.2 Paper Capture Plug-in Modify Date : 2009:12:17 21:51:08-08:00 Create Date : 2009:12:17 21:51:08-08:00 Metadata Date : 2009:12:17 21:51:08-08:00 Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:870f610d-9767-4716-8d43-31ae044789eb Instance ID : uuid:f2c0b9b6-4f6b-41db-b1e4-e96e9c4fd20f Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseNone Page Count : 578
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

1981_Systems_Data_Catalog 1981 Systems Data Catalog

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation